# Texmate LLM Searchable Manuals and Datasheets

## Tiger Family Panel Meters and Bargraphs

All individual Tiger Family controllers are covered in separate user manuals. Each manual provides a brief description of the meter’s programmable functions and memory, hardware, and software options. They also describe how to configure the display for each input channel, calibrate a channel, and configure each input channel with a specific measurement task in easy to follow procedures. They also provide general data sheet information such as specifications, pinout details, and case size dimensions.

## Tiger Family Digital Meters

- DI-503E
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-503T
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50E
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50EAN6
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50T
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50TAN6
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-602AE
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-602AT5C
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-60AE
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-60AT
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-60AT5C
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-60E
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-60T
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-60XE
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-60XT
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-802XAE
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-802XAT
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- GI-50E
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- GI-50T
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

## Tiger Family Bargraphs

- DI-50EB51
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50EB51H
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50TB51
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50TB51H
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FI-B101D50E
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FI-B101D50T
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- GI-50EB101
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- GI-50TB101
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

### DI-503 320 DS NZ304 UL March 2016

## DI-503E & DI-503T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit, 3 Display 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 3-display Programmable

### Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal

### conditioning and advanced software features for monitor-

### ing, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

3 displays with red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

ated by the front panel program button.

time stamp).

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1 Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Version also supports custom macros.

Digital Display: 3 displays, 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T

Page 2

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

Operational Display

Display with Faceplate and Bezel

buttons.

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the button at the same time initiates the Pressing the P and main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button button at the same once and then press the P and button at the same time initiates the Pressing the P and setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and t h e same time.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at

time.

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button initiates When in the operational display, pressing the a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Seven Segment LED Displays The six, seven segment LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings.

They also display the programming codes and settings during programming. The display is available in red, green, or super bright red LEDs.

Page 6

LED Displays

The meter has three 5-digit, 7-segment, 8 mm standard red, or optional green or bright red LED displays. The top display is the primary display and displays the primary input signal on Channel 1. It is also used to display all meter configuration programming codes. This includes programming the second and third displays.

The second and third displays can each be programmed to display an independent input signal, or a combination of signals processed by the meter, such as rate and total, peak and valley, etc.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run but requires a simple compiler generated macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The

scaling

requirement

exceeded the capability of the meter (19999 to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or

incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPCX] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

Third

Digit

First

Digit

Second

Digit

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits. These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite. To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

The top display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the

documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button. In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this and indicates that both the buttons can play: UP for be used to adjust the disincrease, DOWN for decrease.

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand button, the user is entering the main programming pressing the mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Operational Display

### Step 1

### Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3-digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See Diagram below). Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

Save Code Settings & Exit

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values Setpoint 1

[SPC_1]

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

To view, press the

button:

To view, press the

button:

View Mode

View Mode

Ch2

Ch4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

Ch1

Ch3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Page 10

After configuring an on the function demand

Calibration On Demand

Mode, press the P button for

4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

MODEL AND SOFTWARE CODE VERSION CHECK PROCEDURE

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

START HERE

Operational Display

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE

Operational Display

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

MODEL & SOFTWARE

CODE VERSION

CHECK

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Page 11

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 1

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures continued

### [bri] - Display Brightness

Example

Display Configuration

Once you have read the User manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. 5 is the default setting.

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE

Example Procedure:

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Operational Display

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Page 12

Step 2

Adjust brightness to 7

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer

Page 14

selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

START HERE

TWO-POINT

CALIBRATION

From Step 6

Step 1

Example

Step 7

Step 2

Step 8

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 9

Step 10

Example

Step 11

To Step 7

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

From Step 6

Step 1

Step 7

Example

Step 2

Step 8

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Page 16

Step 9

Step 10

Example

Step 11

To Step 7

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits settings.

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary, second, or third display is configured by selecting 5 in the 2nd digit and the relevant display in the 3rd digit:

[X50] = Primary Display.

[X51] = Second Display.

[X52] = Third Display.

The top display is the primary display and is used during all meter configuration procedures, including configuring the second and third displays.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the 1st digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 18).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the 2nd digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the analog sample rate selected in Code 2.

Selected in Code 2 the example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2.

See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the 3rd digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

The same procedure is used to configure the second and third displays, with the three digits set to [X51] for second display and [X52] for third display.

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 18

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Programming Tip

Step 7

Programming Tip

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 8

Step 9

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the 3rd digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61] to enter the Display Format Mode.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY FORMAT

Step 1

From Step 5

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 6

Example

Step 7

X X

Step 8

Step 9

Page 20

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text Character Mode. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

From Step 6

Step 7

X X

Step 8

Step 5

Step 9

Step 6

Example

To Step 7

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Example Procedure:

Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 4

Step 5

Step 5

Page 22

Programming Tip

The Configuring

Setpoint Annunciators

and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series DI-503 meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

CONFIGURING CH1 MEASUREMENT TASK & SAMPLING RATE PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

### Step 1

### Step 2

### Step 3

Example

### Step 5

### Step 4

### To Step 5

Operational Display

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

CONFIGURING CH1 POST PROCESSING PROCEDURE

From Step 3

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

### Step 1

### Step 4

### Step 2

### Step 5

### Step 3

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data printing is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Operational Display

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

From Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

Page 26

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH4

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The 3rd digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Step 1

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 5

Step 4

Page 28

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4/5 A Form A and 9/10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

Page 30

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Adj.

ON-T

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

### Setpoint Programming Mode Programming Procedures

### Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

From Step 5

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1

SETPOINT & RELAY

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Step 7

Example

Step 3

Step 4

Example

Step 8

Step 9

Step 5

Step 10

To Step 6

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 34

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 38

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Page 40

Pin 1

Pin 2

Display Board

Pin 16 Pin 15

Processor Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

### Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths..................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 24

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip.

P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

Metal Surround Case

uses Metal Screw

Mount Clips and has a max. panel thickness

mounting of 15.5 mm (0.61").

NOTE: The Metal Surround Case is pre-installed at the factory and cannot be removed without damage

to the case.

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 48x96mm

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

96 mm

(3.78")

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

Metal Surround Case

(P/N: OP-MTL96X48)

Various bezel

colors are available.

Black is standard.

Page 44

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-503 Features and Specs 1 6 24 2025

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-503E & DI-503T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit, 3 Display 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 3-display Programmable

### Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal

### conditioning and advanced software features for monitor-

### ing, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

3 displays with red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

## Display

Digital Display: 3 displays, 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real (option):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in.eludoM yromeM draC hsalF M821 ot 4 elbavomer a Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Outputs

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

10A 240VAC~1/2

5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-50ET data Sheet NZ300 UL 2022

## DI-50E & DI-50T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming via front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.56 high LEDs

with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

UL Listed

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate P.N.: 76-DI50EG-N4 for green display & 76-DI50ER-N4 for red display

Once into the viewing routine, pressing the through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button moves

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend. They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Seven Segment LED Displays The six, seven segment LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings.

They also display the programming codes and settings during programming. The display is available in red, green, or super bright red LEDs.

LED Display

The meter has a 5-digit, 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) standard red, or optional green or superbright red LED numeric display.

The LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run with a simple macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P butt h e ton once and then press the P and same time.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

button at

buttons.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays 'LOC'.

The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures. The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the

meter (199999 to +999999).

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Front Panel Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen. However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Front Panel Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Five eights and five decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Front Panel Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), both the main and setpoint programming

modes are locked out. All meter programming codes

and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LocK].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

The CAPTURE pin (pin 12) can be activated by a very short logic low input or by connecting to the COMMON pin (pin 11). The CAPTURE pin can be programmed as a setpoint/relay activation source for any selected setpoint to trigger any designed setpoint function or for macro control applications. See Setpoint Control Settings on page 34 in the Setpoint Programming Mode second digit [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the first, second, and third digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

Operational Display

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

symbol

represents

This the

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand button, the user is entering the main programming pressing the mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The exceptions to this rule are when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check, or the Code Blanking and Macro Check.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3-digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters manual programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints. Operational Display

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Setpoint Activation Values

Programming Tip

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

time to exit.

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

Save Code Settings & Exit

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on demand the function

Calibration On Demand

Mode, press the P button for

4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

To view, press

the

button:

View Mode

CH1

CH3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

TOT_1

CH2

CH4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

TOT_2

Page 10

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check

The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

MODEL AND SOFTWARE CODE VERSION CHECK PROCEDURE

Operational Display

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Step 1

Press and hold

the and

buttons

Operational Display

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Example

Page 11

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 1

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. 5 is the default setting.

Example

Example Procedure:

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Operational Display

Step 2

Adjust brightness to 7

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

Page 12

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Page 14

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration meth2-POINT CALIBRATION od. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

LOW

Signal

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

HIGH

Signal

START HERE

TWO POINT

CALIBRATION

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

### From Step 6

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and enter

Calibration Mode

HIGH

Signal

Step 7

7.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

span input

Step 8

Save zero and span settings and re-enter

Calibration Mode

Example

Step 9

Select the No Function Calibration Mode [000]

Step 4

Enter Cal Mode [111] For 2-point calibration

of CH1

LOW

Signal

Step 6

Set reading for zero load into meter and enter Span Mode

Example

### To Step 7

Step 10

Save Calibration Mode

[000] setting and

enter Code 1

Step 11

Exit code 1 and return to operational display

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

CONFIGURING AVERAGING SAMPLING & AVERAGING WINDOW PROCEDURE

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 6

Step 7

Select averaging

window between 1

and 65535 counts

Example

Step 8

Save averaging

window settings

Step 9

Select [000] to leave the Calibration Mode

Step 10

Save settings

Step 11

Exit Code 1 and return to operational display

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and enter

Calibration Mode

Step 4

Save settings

0 Result

1 Channel 1

2 Channel 2

3 Channel 3

4 Channel 4

Step 5

Select averaging sampling

rate from 1 to 255 samples

Example

Step 6

Save averaging

sampling rate setting

Page 16

To Step 7

### [CodE_1] - Display Configuration Initial Setup Procedures

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits settings.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the 1st digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 18).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the 2nd digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the analog sample rate selected in Code 2. The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2.

See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the 2nd digit and the 0 in the 3rd digit:

Note:

[XX1] Second Display is the bargraph display on models DI-50EB51, DI-50TB51, FI-B101D50E, FI-B101D50T. The [XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the 3rd digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Initial Setup Procedures

Page 18

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Initial Setup Procedures Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

CONFIGURING THE DATA SOURCE PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

From Step 5

### Step 6

Example

Programming Tip

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Programming Tip

Step 8

Save Data Source setting

### Step 4

0 Primary Display

1 Second Display (See Note)

2 Third Display (See Note)

3 Peak/Valley

4 Analog Output 1

5 Analog Output 2

6 Totalizer 1

7 Totalizer 2

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Page 19

### [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Initial Setup Procedures

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the third digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY FORMAT PROCEDURE

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61] to enter the Display Format Mode.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 5

### Step 6

Example

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

### Step 4

0 Result

1 Channel 1

2 Channel 2

3 Channel 3

4 Channel 4

5 Default Display

6 Total 1

7 Total 2

Page 20

Step 7

Select [X0X] to leave Code 1

## X X

Step 8

Save Display

Functions setting

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

### [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Initial Setup Procedures

## Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

CONFIGURING THE TEXT CHARACTER PROCEDURE

Configure channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text Character mode. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

From Step 6

### Step 4

0 Result

1 Channel 1

2 Channel 2

3 Channel 3

4 Channel 4

5 Default Display

6 Total 1

7 Total 2

Step 5

Select Text Character [C] from the options listed in the diagram above

### Step 6

Example

To Step 7

Step 7

Select [X0X] to leave Code 1

## X X

Step 8

Save Last Digit Text Character setting

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Page 21

### [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Initial Setup Procedures

Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Example Procedure:

CONFIGURING THE SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS PROCEDURE Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

UPDATE AT SAMPLE RATE PROCEDURE Example Procedure:

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

Step 3

Select SP Annunciators

setting [1XX]

Step 3

Select update at sample rate setting [X2X]

Example

## X X

Example

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 2

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 2

Step 5

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Step 5

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 22

### [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate Initial Setup Procedures

The Tiger 320 Series DI-50 meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

CONFIGURING CH1 MEASUREMENT TASK & SAMPLING RATE PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness

Mode, Calibration

Mode, Code 1, and enter Code 2

Step 5

Exit Code 3.

Return to

Operational

Display

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 3

To Step 5

Page 23

### [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions Initial Setup Procedures

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

CONFIGURING CH1 POST PROCESSING PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 3

Step 4

Save Post Processing

setting

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 and 2, and enter Code 3

Step 5

Exit Code 4. Return to Operational Display

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate Initial Setup Procedures

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

CONFIGURING CH2 MEASUREMENT TASK PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 3

Step 4

Save CH 2

Measurement Task

setting

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 3, and enter Code 4

Step 5

Exit Code 5. Return to Operational Display

Page 25

### [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions Initial Setup Procedures

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module. CONFIGURING CH3 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 4 and enter Code 5

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 6. Return to Operational Display

Step 4

Save CH3 setting

Page 26

### [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions Initial Setup Procedures

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 for a direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

CONFIGURING CH4 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH4 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 5 and enter Code 6

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 7. Return to Operational Display

Step 4

Save CH4 setting

Page 27

### [CodE_7] - Result Processing Initial Setup Procedures

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

CONFIGURING CH1 & CH2 RESULT PROCESSING PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 6 and enter Code 7

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 8.

Return to

Operational

Display

Step 4

Save CH1 & CH 2 Result Processing setting

Page 28

### [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode Initial Setup Procedures

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins Initial Setup Procedures

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4 /

5 A Form A and 9 / 10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options.

A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

Setpoint Programming Mode

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Enter these menus to set setpoint (SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default setting = 18000 Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

Default setting = 18000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

Default setting = 5000

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

Default setting = 5000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

Default setting = 10000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Default setting = 10000

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control settings

See Page 34

for a Level 1 Setpoint & Relay

Control Settings

diagram.

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint Mode Logic Diagram

Page 30

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

minimum on time

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

LEVEL 1 SETPOINT CONFIGURATION

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

START HERE

CONFIGURE LEVEL 1

SETPOINT & RELAY

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Setpoint

Programming Mode

From Step 5

Step 6

Select [CH1] as the SP1 activation source. See

diagram on Pages 34 and 35

Step 2

Adjust setpoint 1 (SP1) activation value to e.g.

500 counts

Step 7

Save SP1

control settings

Example

Example

Step 3

Save SP1 activation

value setting

Step 4

Set SPC_1 to [013]:

1st Digit = 0 Energize above SP1 value

Example

Step 5

Enter SP1

source sub-menu

Step 9

Save SP1

control settings

To Step 6

Step 10

Exit SPC_2 and return to operational display

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 34

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

PXX

(DOB)

Programming Tip

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 12 Capture. The CAPTURE pin (pin 12) can be activated by a very short logic low input or by connecting to the COMMON pin (pin 11). The CAPTURE pin can be programmed as a setpoint/ relay activation source for any selected setpoint to trigger any designed setpoint function or for macro control applications. See Setpoint Control Settings on page 34 in the Setpoint Programming Mode second digit [X2X].

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 38

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Main

Board

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Page 40

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths..................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

Loose Fitting

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

TOP VIEW

Max. panel thickness

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip. P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

O-ring

Gasket

Base

Removable

Key-lock

Cover

Various bezel colors

are available.

Black is standard.

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 96x48mm

96 mm

(3.78")

Safety

Catch

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Page 44

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 (cid:127) www.texmate.com

Mar-07-2016 DI-50 320 DS (NZ300)_UL_March 2016

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-50 Features and Specs

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-50E & DI-50T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downgnimmargorp dna )etisbew etamxeT eht morf loaded FREE via front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.56 high LEDs

with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD card module with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

UL Listed

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real (option ):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-50AN6 320 DS NZ303 UL March 2016 web

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-50EAN6 & DI-50TAN6

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit Programmable Meter

### Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, Input signal con-

### ditioning and advanced software features for monitoring,

### measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming via front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs

with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

6 light bar annunciators to illuminate application specific text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multi-loop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint. Also 6 red, green or yellow 19x4mm light bar annunciators to illuminate application specific text.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Annunciator Panels

The annunciator panels are green or custom color 19 mm x

4 mm light bars. Each light bar can be customized to display application specific text using a stick-on overlay.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run but requires a simple compiler generated macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

time.

buttons.

button at

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button button at the same once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and t h e same time.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button initiates When in the operational display, pressing the a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. button moves Once into the viewing routine, pressing the through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

LED Display

The DI-50AN6 has a 5-digit, 7-segment, 8 mm (0.31) standard red, or optional green or super-bright red, LED display.

The LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

### Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter.

If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures. The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement the capability exceeded

of the meter (19999 to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect

connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin

8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming

modes. All meter programming codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPCX] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

Third

Digit

First

Digit

Second

Digit

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits. These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite. To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

The display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the

documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button. In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand button, the user is entering the main programpressing the ming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5]. This is the display brightness mode and is the first submenu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3-digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press P and

at the same time

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Main Programming Mode

Setpoint Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

Programming Tip

time to exit.

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values Setpoint 1

[SPC_1]

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on the function demand

Calibration On Demand

Mode, press the P button for

4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

To view, press the

button:

To view, press the

button:

View Mode

View Mode

Ch2

Ch4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

Ch1

Ch3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Page 10

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check

The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

START HERE

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Page 11

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Operational Display

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Display Configuration

Once you have read the User manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. The default setting is 5.

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

Operational Display

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS MODE

### Step 1

Operational Display

### Step 2

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Page 12

Example

### Step 3

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

Page 14

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

START HERE

TWO-POINT

CALIBRATION

Step 1

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

From Step 6

Step 7

Example

Step 2

Step 8

Step 3

Step 9

Step 4

Step 10

Step 11

Example

To Step 7

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over CONFIGURING AVERAGING SAMPLING & AVERAGING WINDOW PROCEDURE (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

Step 1

From Step 6

Step 2

Step 7

Example

Step 8

Step 3

Step 9

Step 4

Step 10

Step 5

Step 6

Page 16

Step 11

Example

To Step 7

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits settings.

The top display is the primary display and is used during all meter configuration procedures, including configuring the second and third displays.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the 1st digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 18).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the 2nd digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the analog sample rate. The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2.

See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the 2nd digit and the 0 in the 3rd digit:

Note:

[XX1] Second Display is the bargraph display on models DI-50EB51, DI-50TB51, FI-B101D50E, and FI-B101D50T.

The [XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the 3rd digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 18

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Programming Tip

Step 2

Step 7

Programming Tip

Step 8

Step 3

Step 9

Step 4

Step 5

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the 3rd digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61] to enter the Display Format Mode.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

From Step 5

Step 6

Example

Step 7

X X

Step 8

Step 4

Step 9

Page 20

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text CONFIGURING THE TEXT CHARACTER PROCEDURE Character Mode. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

Step 1

Step 4

From Step 6

Step 8

X X

Step 5

Step 9

Step 6

To Step 7

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure

## Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

CONFIGURING THE SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS PROCEDURE Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Example Procedure:

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Step 2

Step 2

Step 3

X X

Step 4

Step 4

Programming Tip

Configuring The

Step 5 Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Step 5

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series DI-50AN6 meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code

2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

CONFIGURING CH1 MEASUREMENT TASK & SAMPLING RATE PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

### Step 1

### Step 2

### Step 3

### Step 5

Example

### Step 4

### To Step 5

Operational Display

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

CONFIGURING CH1 POST PROCESSING PROCEDURE

From Step 3

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

### Step 1

### Step 4

### Step 2

### Step 5

### Step 3

Programming tip

Operational Display

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data printing is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [030].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

From Step 3

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Step 1

Step 4

Step 2

Step 5

Step 3

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

CONFIGURING CH3 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH3

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

Page 26

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

CONFIGURING CH4 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH4

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

From Step 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The 3rd digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

CONFIGURING CH1 & CH2 RESULT PROCESSING PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE RESULT

PROCESSING

### Step 1

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

From Step 4

### Step 2

### Step 3

### Step 5

### Step 4

Page 28

Operational Display

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4 /

5 A Form A and 9 / 10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options.

A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 180000

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

Page 30

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

SP-B

SP-A

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Adj.

ON-T

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Setpoint Programming Mode Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions: LEVEL 1 SETPOINT CONFIGURATION

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1

SETPOINT & RELAY

FUNCTIONS

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Step 7

Step 3

Example

Step 8

Step 9

Step 4

Step 5

Example

To Step 6

Step 10

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 34

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

PXX

Programming Tip

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 38

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Page 40

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths..................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

45 mm

(1.77")

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Snug Fitting

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the

optional screw mount clip.

P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

Metal Surround Case

uses Metal Screw

Mount Clips and has a max. panel thickness

mounting of 15.5 mm (0.61").

NOTE: The Metal Surround Case is pre-installed at the factory and cannot be removed without damage

to the case.

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 48x96mm

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

96 mm

(3.78")

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

Metal Surround Case

(P/N: OP-MTL96X48)

Various bezel

colors are available.

Black is standard.

Page 44

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-50AN Features and Specs

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-50EAN6 & DI-50TAN6

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit Programmable Meter

### Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, Input signal con-

### ditioning and advanced software features for monitoring,

### measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming via front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs

with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

6 light bar annunciators to illuminate application specific text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multi-loop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

UL Listed

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint. Also 6 red, green or yellow 19x4mm light bar annunciators to illuminate application specific text.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real (option ):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI 602A manual NZ313 UL April 2016 web

## DI-602AE & DI-602AT5C

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## Two 6 Digit 0.39

## Alphanumeric LED Displays

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 16-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

Red, green, or red/green 14-segment, 0.39 high LEDs with

full support for 14-segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

UL Listed

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 14-segment alphanumeric, 0.39 (10 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std) and/or Green (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN (F1 and F2 available on T version only).

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

### Specifications

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC or 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC or 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Certifications and Listings

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Series Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Dual LED Display

The DI-602A has two 6-digit, 14-segment, 0.39 (10 mm) standard red, green or red/green LED displays. The LED displays are used to display two independent input signals, or a combination of processed signals such as rate and total.

Top Display

The top display is known as the primary display during programming and displays the three digit code settings when in a programming mode.

Bottom Display

The bottom display is known as the secondary display during programming and displays the programming code number or sub-menu name.

Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel

Display Text Editing with 14 Segment Full Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run with a simple macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 14-segment full alphanumeric display.

14-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

### Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate

Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

button at the same time.

buttons.

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button initiates When in the operational display, pressing the a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

Function Buttons

Function buttons F1 and F2 activate pre-programmed macros on demand. each macro is written to activate from a specific function button. When the function button is pressed, the macro carries out its designated tasks.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Error]

Error messages usually

occur during calibration procedures. The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter

(199999 to +999999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and

setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Front Panel Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen. However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Front Panel Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 11) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Front Panel Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPC-X] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

Third

Digit

Second

Digit

First

Digit

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the first, second, and third digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

Operational Display

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

symbol

represents

This the

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the input signal or the result of a math function to the meter. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main programming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in place of a digit, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one selection can be made.

[SPAN]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes:

the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

at the same time P and

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[CodE_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[CodE_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[CodE_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[CodE_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[CodE_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

Save Code Settings & Exit

[CodE_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[CodE_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[CodE10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Operational Display

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Pressing both the buttons at the same time while in either the peak, valley, total 1, or total 2 view modes resets the setting to the current displayed signal.

and

Operational Display

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

To view, press

the

button:

View Mode

CH1

CH3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

TOT_1

CH2

CH4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALLEY

TOT_2

Page 10

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING &

MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Page 11

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness

Step 5

Press the Prog. button

Step 6

Press the button to switch the macro OFF

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Display Configuration

Once you have read the user manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. The default setting is 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness (contrast) setting to 7 (bright).

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Adjust brightness to 7

Example

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

Page 12

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

Page 14

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

START HERE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Example

To Step 7

From Step 6

Step 7

Example

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

From Step 6

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 4

Save settings

Example

Step 10

Save settings

To Step 7

Page 16

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of first, second, and third digit settings.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 18).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the second digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode in Code 1 allows you to configure:

The data source for the primary display.

The format of the display with last digit rounding, type of display

units, and decimal point placement.

A text character for the last digit.

The display functions mode is configured by changing the second and third digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source Second Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the second digit and the 0 in the third digit.

Note:

[XX1] Second Display is the bargraph display on models DI-50EB51, DI-50TB51, FI-B101D50E, and FI-B101D50T.

The [XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The second digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the third digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the second digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format Second Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the second digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the third digit selection.

Text Character Second Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the second digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the third digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 18

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

From Step 5

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and Calibration

Modes and enter

Code 1

Step 3

Set Code 1 to [X50]

Step 4

Programming Tip

Example

Step 6

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Step 8

Save Data

Source settings

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

To Step 6

Programming Tip

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the 3rd digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61] to enter the Display Format Mode.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and Calibration

Modes and enter

Code 1

Step 3

Set Code 1 to [X61]

Step 4

Set the Display Format Mode to [106]:

1st Digit = 1 Rounding by 2s

2nd Digit = 0 Decimal display

3rd Digit = 6 Decimal Point

Step 5

### From Step 5

### Step 6

Example

Step 7

Select [X0X] to leave Code 1

Step 8

Save Data

Source settings

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

### To Step 6

Page 20

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text Character Mode. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 3

Set Code 1 to [X71]

Step 4

Step 6

Example

To Step 7

From Step 6

Step 7

Select [X0X] to leave Code 1

Page 21

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Example Procedure:

Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Operational Display

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and Calibration

Modes and enter

Code 1

Step 3

Select SP Annunciators

setting [1XX]

### Step 4

Example

Save setting and

enter Code 2

Step 5

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Operational Display

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and Calibration

Modes and enter

Code 1

Step 3

Select update at sample rate setting [X2X]

### Step 4

Example

Step 5

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series DI-60A meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

From Step 4

START HERE

To Step 5

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 and 2, and enter Code 3

Step 3

Set Code 3 to [100] 1st Digit = 1 Selects square root of CH1 2nd Digit = 0 Selects no linearization

3rd Digit = 0 Selects ASCII Mode

Operational Display

### To Step 4

### From Step 3

Step 4

Save Post Processing

setting

Step 5

Exit Code 4. Return to Operational Display

Operational Display

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

### From Step 3

Step 4

Save CH2 Measurement

Task setting

Step 5

Exit Code 5. Return to Operational Display

Page 25

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a voltage input direct with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 to 3, and enter Code 4

Step 3

Set Code 4 to [010] 1st Digit = 0 Selects voltage, current

2nd Digit = 1 Selects direct

3rd Digit = 0 Selects no linearization

### To Step 4

### From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 6. Return to Operational Display

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the 3rd input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The the diagram opposite

available configuration selections in Code 5.

lists

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 to 4, and enter Code 5

Step 3

Set Code 5 to [11X] 1st Digit = 1 Selects square root of CH3 2nd Digit = 1 Selects voltage, current

3rd Digit = X Not relavent

Step 4

Save CH3 setting

### To Step 5

Page 26

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the 4th input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH4 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 to 5, and enter Code 6

Step 4

Save CH4 setting

### To Step 5

### From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 7. Return to Operational Display

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Operational Display

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 to 6, and enter Code 7

Step 3

Set Code 6 to [003] 1st Digit = 0 Selects direct display of result 2nd Digit = 0 Selects no linearization on result 3rd Digit = 3 Selects result = CH1+CH2

Step 4

Save CH1 & CH2 Result Processing

setting

### To Step 5

Page 28

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

### From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 8. Return to Operational Display

Operational Display

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal emulation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Four standard relay output module options provide a selection of 16 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4/5 A Form A and 9/10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

[SP_3]

[SP_4]

[SP_5]

[SP_6]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 180000

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 50000

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 30

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

### Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

### Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1 SETPOINT

& RELAY

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Setpoint

Programming Mode

Step 2

Adjust setpoint 1 (SP1) acivation value to e.g.

500 counts

Operational Display

Example

Step 3

Save SP1 activation

value setting

Step 4

Set SPC_1 to [013] 1st Digit = 0 Energize above SP1 value 2nd Digit = 1 Select source for SP1 3rd Digit = 3 Relay latching with manual reset

Example

Step 5

Enter SP1

source sub-menu

### To Step 6

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

### From Step 5

### Step 6

Select [CH1] as the SP1 activation source

Step 7

Save SP1

control settings

Example

Step 8

Reset 2nd digit to 0. If the 2nd digit is not reset to 0, the meter will constantly cycle through SPC_1

Step 9

Save SP1 control

settings

Step 10

Exit SPC_2 and return to operational display

Operational Display

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Page 34

Programming Tip

Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued Set Up Timer Delay Settings

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 38

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 40

### Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Math Function

Cross Channel Math....................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

TOP VIEW

Max. panel thickness

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip. P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

O-ring

Gasket

Base

Removable

Key-lock

Cover

Various bezel colors

are available.

Black is standard.

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 96x48mm

96 mm

(3.78")

Safety

Catch

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 44

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-602A Features and Specs

## DI-602AE & DI-602AT5C

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## Two 6 Digit 0.39

## Alphanumeric LED Displays

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 16-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

Red, green, or red/green 14-segment, 0.39 high LEDs with

full support for 14-segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

UL Listed

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 14-segment alphanumeric, 0.39 (10 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std) and/or Green (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN (F1 and F2 available on T version only).

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in.eludoM yromeM draC hsalF M821 ot 4 elbavomer a Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Real (option ):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

### Specifications

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-60A manual NZ302 UL April 2016 web

## DI-60AE & DI-60AT

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 6 Digit 0.56 Alphanumeric LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit alphanumeric Programmable Meter Controller

### (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 14-segment, 0.56 high LEDs

with full support for 14-segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Ethernet or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

UL Listed

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide

(Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Certifications and Listings

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Series Software and Hardware Structure

RAW DATA ANALOG, DIGITAL AND LOGIC I/O

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

LED Display

The DI-60A has a 6-digit, 14-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) standard red, or optional green or super-bright red LED display. The LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel

Display Text Editing with 14 Segment Full Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run with a simple macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 14-segment full alphanumeric display.

14-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate

### Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

button at the same time.

buttons.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the button to increase the value of the displayed parameter. button initiates When in the operational display, pressing the a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button initiates When in the operational display, pressing the a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Error]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter

(199999 to +999999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and

setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen. However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 11) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPC-X] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd0 digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

Operational Display

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

symbol

represents

This the

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main programming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[SPAN]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3-digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes:

the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See Diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[CodE_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[CodE_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[CodE_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[CodE_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[CodE_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[CodE_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[CodE_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[CodE10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On the Demand Mode, press P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

To view, press

the

button:

View Mode

CH1

CH3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

TOT_1

CH2

CH4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALLEY

TOT_2

Page 10

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

Operational Display

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

Example

Page 11

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Step 1

Press and hold

the and

buttons

Operational Display

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 1

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Display Configuration

Once you have read the user manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. The default setting is 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Example

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

Page 12

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Page 14

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

START HERE

TWO POINT

CALIBRATION

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 6

Step 4

Save settings

Step 5

Example

To Step 7

Step 7

Example

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 6

Step 3

Step 4

Go to averaging

sample size selection.

Example

Step 8

Save averaging

window settings

Step 10

Save settings

Step 11

Exit Code 1 and return to operational display

Example

To Step 7

Step 6

Save averaging

sampling rate setting

Page 16

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits settings.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 18).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the 2nd digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the analog sample rate selected in Code 2.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at 50 samples per second by setting Code

1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2.

See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page

23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the 2nd digit and 0 in the 3rd digit.

Note:

[XX1] Second Display is the bargraph display on models DI-50B51 and FI-B101D50. The [XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 18

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 5

Step 6

Go to the next selection.

Programming Tip

Example

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Programming Tip

Step 8

Save Data Source setting

Step 4

Go to Source

selection.

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the 3rd digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61] to enter the Display Format Mode.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

From Step 5

Example

Step 3

Step 7

## X X

Page 20

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text Character Mode. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

From Step 6

Step 4

Save Code setting

Example

To Step 7

## X X

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Example Procedure:

Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Example

## X X

Example

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 2

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Code 1, and enter Code 2

Step 3

Set Code 2 to [000]:

1st Digit = 0 Selects 10 samples/sec (60 Hz) 2nd Digit = 0 Selects voltage, current 3rd Digit = 0 Selects no function

Step 5

Exit Code 3. Return to Operational Display

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 3

To Step 5

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

From Step 3

Step 4

Save Post

Processing

setting

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 and 2, and enter Code 3

Step 5

Exit Code 4.

Return to

Operational Display

Step 3

Set Code 3 to [100]:

1st Digit = 1 Square root of CH1 2nd Digit = 0 No linearization 3rd Digit = 0 ASCII Mode

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a voltage input direct with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

CONFIGURING CH2 MEASUREMENT TASK PROCEDURE

From Step 3

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH12

MEASUREMENT TASK

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 3, and enter Code 4

Step 4

Save CH 2

Measurement

Task setting

Step 5

Exit Code 5.

Return to

Operational Display

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the 3rd input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The the diagram opposite

available configuration selections in Code 5.

lists

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

CONFIGURING CH3 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 6.

Return to

Operational Display

Step 4

Save CH3 setting

Page 26

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the 4th input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module. CONFIGURING CH4 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH4 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 7.

Return to

Operational Display

Step 4

Save CH4 setting

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

CONFIGURING CH1 & CH2 RESULT PROCESSING PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 6 and enter Code 7

From Step 4

Step 3

Set Code 7 to [003]:

1st Digit = 0 Selects direct display of result 2nd Digit = 0 Selects no linearization on result 3rd Digit = 3 Selects result = CH1+CH2

Step 5

Exit Code 8.

Return to

Operational Display

Step 4

Save CH1 & CH 2 Result Processing setting

Page 28

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal emulation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source.

See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Four standard relay output module options provide a selection of 16 relay configuration options for Tiger 320 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4/5 A Form A and 9/10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = -180000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = -50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = -100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

See Page 34 for a Level 1 Setpoint & Relay Control

Settings diagram.

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 30

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

LEVEL 1 SETPOINT CONFIGURATION

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1

SETPOINT & RELAY

FUNCTIONS

From Step 5

Example

Example

Example

To Step 6

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Page 34

Programming Tip

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

PXX

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34 )

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 12 Capture. The CAPTURE pin (pin 12) can be activated by a very short logic low input or by connecting to the COMMON pin (pin 11). The CAPTURE pin can be programmed as a setpoint/ relay activation source for any selected setpoint to trigger any designed setpoint function or for macro control applications. See Setpoint Control Settings on page 34 in the Setpoint Programming Mode second digit [X2X].

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485 stuoniPnoitacinummoClaireS 1elbaT

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 38

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Page 40

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485

Note:

mounted Externally

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly to the standard (RS-232 / RS-485) serial module

outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Math Function

Cross Channel Math....................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

TOP VIEW

Max. panel thickness

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip. P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

O-ring

Gasket

Base

Removable

Key-lock

Cover

Various bezel colors

are available.

Black is standard.

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 96x48mm

96 mm

(3.78")

Safety

Catch

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 44

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-60A Features and Specs

## DI-60AE & DI-60AT

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 6 Digit 0.56 Alphanumeric LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit alphanumeric Programmable Meter Controller

### (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 14-segment, 0.56 high LEDs

with full support for 14-segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

UL Listed

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

## Display

Digital Display: 14-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 14-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real (o pti on):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accu-

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

.dnoces rep selpmas 01 yllacipyT Conversion Rate:

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-60A5C

## DI-60AT5C

## Programmable Meter Controller

## Tiger 320 Series PMC

## 6 Digit Alphanumeric 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit alphanumeric Programmable Meter Controller

### (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

### General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 14-segment, 0.56 high LEDs with full support for 14-segment alphanumeric text.

The meter comes with two extra buttons, F1 and F2, that

are available to access functions via macro.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-

channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM appli-

cations.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus, Ethernet, DeviceNet or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit

Isolated Analog Outputs.

Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multi-loop feedback and PID output. Scalable from

1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with

8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with

date/time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plugin I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features...................1 Specifications......................2 Tiger 320 Series Literature Overview...3 Tiger 320 Series System Overview...4-5 Planning to Use the Tiger 320.......6-8 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure...9 Configuration Utility Program.........10 Custom Macro Program............11 Index.........................12-13

### Table of Contents

Controls & Indicators............14-15 Front Panel Configuration & Setup....16 Front Panel Programming Codes...17-18 Initial Setup Procedures..........19-20 Display Brightness.................20 Calibration Modes..............21-24 Programming Procedures........25-37 Setpoint Programming Mode......38-43 Registers........................44

Functional Diagram................45 Connector Pinouts.................45 Carrier Board Output Pins...........46 Relay and Logic I/O Modules........46 Component Layout & Ext. Devices...47-48 I-Series Input Modules...........49-55 Ordering Information............56-58 Custom Faceplates................59 Case Dimensions.................60

Specifications

Display

Digital Display: 14-segment alphanumeric, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999 Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP, DOWN, F1 and F2.

Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS Real Time Clock (option): Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from the web. T Version also supports custom macros.

Development System for Custom Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from the web, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application (see page 11).

Installed Application Software Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. DeviceNet and Ethernet optional output carrier boards are also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals (see page 49).

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C. Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second. However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec.

Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

1. Standard Carrier Board:

Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. DeviceNet Carrier Board: 5 pin 3.5mm screw terminal.

3. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA

(or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Analog Output Specifications:

Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling. Compliance: 500 maximum for current output. 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate: Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 10A Form C Relays* and two 5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 5A Form A Relays**.

10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A

*Form C Relay Specifications:

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications:

Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) or (140mA AC/DC) SSRs (400V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5V

or 0 to V+ (40VDC max).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or

16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16 MB memory.

Power Supplies

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

### Tiger 320 Series Modular Literature Overview

(cid:3)(cid:3)The Tiger 320 Series, Modular Literature system, makes it easy to select detailed information about those specific functions required for your application and the Configuration of the Tiger 320 you intend using.

Copies of all Data Sheets / User Manuals and Supplements can be viewed page-by-page and/or downloaded from the document server on our website.

Programming Code Sheet

Generic to all Tiger 320 Series models, the Programming Code Sheet is a quick reference document that allows you to quickly view the meters manual programming codes.

Shipped with each product ordered, copies are also available on request, or can be viewed and downloaded from the document server on our website.

Model Specific Data Sheet / User Manual

Specific to each 320 Series meter model, the data sheet / user manual describes the basic functions of the meter and how to configure the meter for these functions.

Shipped with each product ordered, copies are also available on request, or can be viewed and downloaded from the document server on our website.

The model specific data sheet / user manual contains:

Technical Specifications

Front Panel Button Manual

Overview of Tiger 320 Series

Programming Codes Overview

Software and Hardware

Programming Procedures

Planning Guide

Functional Diagram and

Block Diagram of the Tiger

320 Software and Hardware

Configuration Utility Program

Custom Macro Programming

Front and Rear Panel

Controls

Pinouts

Hardware Layout and Available

Input and Output Modules

Meter Options, and Custom

Faceplates

Ordering Information

Supplements to Data Sheet / User Manual are Generic to all Tiger 320 Models

Generic to all Tiger 320 Series models, each supplement provides in-depth technical and procedural information on all individual meter modules, functions, or applications.

Listed are the supplements which are currently available:

Specific supplements are

shipped with each product ordered to suit our customers application. Copies are also available on request, or can be viewed and downloaded from the document server on our website.

(cid:2)(cid:2)Advanced Calibration and On DEMAND

Mode

(cid:2)(cid:2)Analog Output Modules

(cid:2)(cid:2)BASIC to Tiger 320 MACRO-Language

Program Development System, Compiler and Tutorial

(cid:2)(cid:2)Configuration Utility Program (Runs on PC) (cid:2)(cid:2)Linearizing Functions

(cid:2)(cid:2)Meter Registers (for Macro Programming) (cid:2)(cid:2)Serial Communications Output Modules (cid:2)(cid:2)Setpoints & Relays

(cid:2)(cid:2)Totalizing & Batching Functions

Other Tiger 320 Series Related Literature

Tiger 320

Functional Overview

Tiger 320

Application Examples

I-Series Input Signal

Conditioning Modules

Meters By the

Case Size

### An Overview of the Awesome Power of the Tiger 320 Series

### The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the

### different functions required by todays automation and process control applications.

### Tiger 320 32-Bit Operating System

A virtual toolbox of selectable and programmable application software functions are embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. They integrate seamlessly with a truly vast array of modular input and output hardware options.

Embedded Application Software Includes:

Multi-channel Inputs In Many Combinations

Full Floating-point Maths

Cross Channel Math (A+B, A-B, AxB, A/B)

Square Root, Inverse and Log of Input

4 x 32 Point Or 1 x 125 Point Linearization Table

Smart Auto Zero with Programmable Capture Band, Rate

of Change and Aperture Window for Weighing Applications

Set Tare Reset Tare for Batching

Smart Quick Response Averaging

Smart Timer and Time Integration Functions

Time and Event-based Sequencing

Polynomial Calculations

Remote Reset of Any Function

Dual Totalizers

Dual PID

Data Logging and Memory Options Up to 1MB of non-volatile on-board memory can be installed for (Black Box) endless loop recording. Up to 4000 data records can be continuously stored to provide before and after analysis of any process fault condition.

Data log from 4 channels.

Data log from 2 channels with date & time stamp.

Log / print from setpoint

A Plug-in I/O Module is available with removable Flash Card Memory for high-capacity or long-term data logging.

or timer.

Flash Cards are

available from 4

to 128 Meg.

### Real-time Clock

Optional Real-time clock

with date and time stamp.

15 year lithium battery.

Powerful Custom Macro Programming Capability Texmates BASIC to Tiger 320 Macro-language Compiler can quickly Convert your special metering, control and automation ideas into reality.

This powerful easy to use development system enables programs to be written in BASIC utilizing any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. When your BASIC program is compiled into the Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized. There are also numerous offthe-shelf application specific programs available. Many only need the blanks to be filled in to use them and this does not require any knowledge of BASIC.

Scrolling annunciator messages can be programmed to appear with any setpoint activation, selected events or logic inputs.

### Programmable Front Panel Controls

Programmable Front Panel Controls

The front panel buttons can be used to control or program any standard functions.

They can also be programmed to only access and display specifically designated functions, such as Tare, Auto-Cal or Print on Demand.

### Configuration & Programming from a PC

PC Programming

Program the meter from a PC with Texmates easy to use Tiger 320 Configuration Utility Program.

### A Wide Selection of Display Formats & 8 Case Sizes to Suit any Application

144x72mm 9/32 DIN

Single or multiple LED or LCD displays Numeric, Alpha Numeric and Bargraph

48x96mm1/8 DIN

96x48mm1/8 DIN

36x144mm

9/64 DIN

648x144mm 4LED

Remote Display

5 or 6 digit Driven by RS485

from any Tiger 320

### 22 Opto-Isolated I/Os on Plug-in Module & 6 Onboard Programmable I/O Logic Ports

6 Inputs & 16 Outputs or 6 Inputs & 6 Outputs

Fully Programmable

Connects to DIN Rail terminal block module with 3M IDC cable

Three logic level inputs are provided on the module input header and three rear input pins are provided that can be programmed to STOP/START/RESET almost any function including: set tare, reset tare, relays, totalizers, print output, data logging, peak, valley, or any register from an external contact closure.

### 6 Super Smart Setpoints - 8 Selectable Functions - 7 Programmable Timer Modes

Serial module

Analog Output module

Output Module Carrier Board

### 5 A

### 10 A

### Scrolling Annunciator

Scrolling Annunciator up to 99 Characters long is available on all 6 setpoints for Alphanumeric Displays with Fill-in-theblanks Macro.

Dual PID

Dual PID

Activation

Relay Latching

### Serial Communications & Printer Output

### 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs

Single

Dual

RS-232

Serial Printer Output

Smart printer driver makes simple serial printers look intelligent.

0 ~ 4-20mA or 0-10V Programmable 0~4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V for retransmission, 4-20 mA loops, drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multi-loop feedback and PID output.

0-10V & 0-10V

Auto-sensing AC/DC Power Supply

High Efficiency CE tested Auto Sensing AC/DC power supplies.

Standard 85-265 Volt AC / 95-370 Volt DC.

Low Voltage 9-32 Volt AC / 10-60 Volt DC.

RS-485

Selectable Communication

Modes include:

ASCII

Modbus

Ethernet (TCP/IP)

Devicenet (with optional carrier board installed)

Interface directly with PCs (using Windows terminal program), PLCs, or any Epson compatible serial printer.

Meter to Meter Communication.

Direct meter to meter communication enables two meters to share data and resources.

### Over 120 Different Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Choose from over 120 different single, dual, triple

and quad input signal conditioners.

Over120Single-Input,Dual-Input,Triple Input and Quad-Input signal conditioners work with the Tiger 320 series

Mixed function and smart modules with their own A/Ds, co-processors, SSRs and I2C Bus outputs are available to suit almost any application.

### Planning to Harness the Power of Tiger 320 Programmable Meter Controllers

A combination of modular hardware and software resources enable Tiger 320 Series Programmable Meter Controllers

(PMCs) to be easily configured as a cost effective solution for the most simple or the most complex of applications.

A review of your Projects objectives, its physical layout, the proposed sensors and control outputs will enable you to select the optimum configuration of the Tiger 320 PMCs unique hardware and software capabilities.

Input Signals & Sensors

4-20 mA or Sensor Direct Unless sensors are located at a far distance, the greatest accuracy and best performance is usually obtained by connecting sensors directly to the Tiger 320, which will then function as the primary measurement device.

There are more than 120 Tiger compatible input signal conditioning modules, with the appropriate excitation outputs, to suit almost any type of sensor or combina-

tions of up to 4 sensors.

In most cases, sensors with a 4-20 mA output are more costly, and when a separate 4-20 mA transmitter is used, signal conversion, drift, and calibration inaccuracies are introduced.

Some Tiger input modules combine direct sensor inputs with 4-20 mA inputs, enabling both local and far distant sensor inputs to be combined.

Sensor Linearization or Compensation The performance of many sensors can be greatly enhanced or expanded with linearization and or compensation. Sensors may be compensated for temperature, frequency, altitude, humidity and mechanical position, to name just a few parameters.

Tiger PMCs with 32 kilobits or more of memory provide up to four 32-point user defined linearization tables or one combined 125-point table.

Many compensation methods can be implemented with the standard cross channel math capabilities of the Tigers 32-bit operating system. Complex three-dimensional compensation can also be implemented using the powerful macro programming capability.

The serial number and calibration date of a sensor can be loaded into the meter. The serial number, linearization tables, and compensation factors of a newly calibrated sensor can then be saved for future reloading, either serially through a PC or directly through the web via an Ethernet port.

Although there are numerous input modules with combinations of various input signals, some inputs such as watts or pH are provided on input modules dedicated to a single function. Combining these inputs with each other signals two or more Tiger meters can serially communicate, and be configured to share their data and processing resources.

Display Options

Tiger PMCs have a large range of display options, including digital and alphanumeric LCDs, LEDs and Touch Panel HMIs.

LED or LCD Displays LED displays are a lower cost and popular display option.

They operate over the largest temperature range, have better viewing angles and viewing distances, and have the longest operational life. However, red LEDs are difficult to read in direct sunlight without a shade hood and consume more power. Green LEDs and backlit LCD displays can be more easily read in direct sunlight.

The Tiger range can be ordered with red or green LEDs.

LCD displays are also available, with or without backlighting.

Numeric or Alphanumeric Displays Generally, numeric displays are a lower cost option than alphanumeric displays. The Tiger range supports a full 7segment numeric and 14-segment alphanumeric alphabet of English letters and Arabic numerals. Where complex text messaging or alarm annunciation is required, we recommend using the 14-segment alphanumeric option.

Single or Multiple Display The Tiger meter has four input channels and can be configured to display many different inputs or results. These can be viewed constantly on the operational display, or on demand in one of the view modes by pressing a button. Some applications require multiple values to be displayed simultaneously. With single, dual, or triple displays, and single displays with 51 or 101-segment bargraph combinations, we have a large range of display options to choose from.

Tiger meters can communicate with each other to share their data and processing resources and be stack or twin mounted to provide a wider range of display options.

Stack mounting

for greater display

options

Twin or triple mounting for greater display options

Push Button or Membrane Touch Pads Tiger PMCs are shipped as standard with high usage hard plastic push buttons. An optional clear lens cover that opens on a cam hinge with a key lock can provide full NEMA 4 or IP65 dust and water proofing. Alternatively, an optional membrane touch pad faceplate can be ordered.

Faceplates can be custo suit any tomized OEM application, and

be quickly produced in large or small quantities for push buttons or membrane touch pads.

## Control Outputs & I/O Logic

Electromechanical Relays or Solid State Control Outputs

Tiger PMCs have a wide selection of control outputs to chose from. The decision on which control output to choose depends on the current and the switching frequency.

Electromechanical relays are a popular choice for most control outputs. Tiger output modules are available with combinations of two 10 amp form C and two to six 5 amp form A relays that can be used to directly drive fractional HP motors or actuators.

The limitation of electromechanical relays is switching speed. If a relay needs to operate in less than 30 mS, or be cycled faster than.5 cpm, it is advisable to select an output module with solid state relays (SSR) or open collector outputs (OC), that can drive external high current SSRs.

### Planning to Harness the Power of Tiger 320 Programmable Meter Controllers continued

PID or On/Off Control Depending on the process to be controlled, either PID or on/off control should be selected. If the process variables are reasonably consistent, then the on/off control is generally more than adequate and easier to implement. Super smart setpoint control software supports many selectable functions, such as Hi or Lo activation, Latching, Hysteresis, Tracking, Register Resetting and 7 Multi-function internal Timers on all setpoints.

Control systems with large lag and lead times are not suitable for on/off control and tend to overshoot and undershoot. PID is needed to stabilize and control these systems. One of the many powerful setpoint functions provided by the Tiger 320 Operating System is single or dual PID.

Retransmission 0-10V or 4-20mA Tiger PMCs can have an optional single (0-10 V or 0/4-20 mA) or dual (0-10 V) analog output module installed. The isolated 16-bit output is fully scalable and highly accurate.

With a compliance of up to 500 at 20mA, the 4-20 mA output can be used over very long distances and still drive more than one output device, such as a PID controlled valve positioner.

The analog outputs can be reversed to output 20mA to 4/0 or 10 to 0VDC. They can be scaled across any portion of the digital range, up to full scale. The output can be programmed to swing 0 to 20mA or 0 to 10V in one digital count to drive external logic or SSRs as additional setpoints.

Under Macro Program Control, the analog outputs can be programmed to produce pulses or even sinewaves.

I/O Logic, Rear Panel or Breakout Box The Tiger Operating System has many built-in logic functions that can be used to develop sophisticated control systems. The Tiger PMC has three logic inputs/outputs available via the LOCK, HOLD, and CAPTURE pins, and three logic I/Os are available for input module use via pins D1, D2 and D3.

More complex I/O intensive applications require an opto-isolated I/O plug-in module, which supports six inputs and up PLANNING to 16 outputs. This module can connect to an external TIP

Breakout Box that is DIN Rail mountable with screw terminal blocks. There are also compatible DIN Rail mounting electromechanical relays and SSR modules.

6 Inputs & 16 Outputs or 6 Inputs & 6 Outputs

Fully Programmable

## Serial Communication

The easiest way to configure or program a Tiger PMC is with the free user-friendly Configuration or Macro Development Software. Serial I/O is provided via an optional Plug-in output carrier board, which supports RS-232 or RS-485 output modules. If serial I/O is not required by the application, the serial carrier board can be removed for reuse. The Tiger 320 Operating System supports several serial protocols, including ASCII, Modbus RTU and Print Mode (which includes a printer driver and support for direct meter to meter communications).

Also supported is DeviceNet, which requires a special dedicated carrier board, and Ethernet (TCP/IP), which requires an external converter box.

RS-232 or RS-485

Except for DeviceNet, all serial communication modes supported by the Tiger can function with either RS-232 or RS-485. The limitations of RS-232 are that only one meter at a time can be connected to the serial port of a computer, and the

distance from the computer to the meter is limited in practical terms to around 30 meters (100 feet).

Up to 32 meters can be connected on an RS-485 bus.

The differential current drive of the RS-485 bus ensures signal integrity in the most harsh environments to distances up to 1230 meters (4000 feet). However, RS-485 generally requires a special RS-485 output card to be installed in the computer or an external RS-232 to RS-485 converter has to be used.

DECISION

### Select the Communication Mode Best

### Suited to Your Application:

Modbus (RTU)

Modbus is widely used in industry. It has a large base, and most SCADA and HMI software packages support it. See also Modbus Wrapped in Ethernet (Modbus/TCP) below.

There are 100s of HMI Touch Panel Screens that are compatible with the Tiger 320 Modbus interface.

ASCII

The meter configuration utility program and the development software use the ASCII protocol. The ASCII protocol allows you to write your own driver for your own application via the development software and should provide the quickest development time.

Print Mode

This is an ASCII based printer driver output that enables the serial port to be directly connected to any serial printer with Epson compatibility. Printer output can be configured to occur from a setpoint or on demand, and can be date or time stamped.

The print mode can also be used for computer data logging applications. The meter can be connected directly to a computer, set up in Microsoft Hyperterminal mode, with the meter programmed to output directly into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format. (Also see Data Logging).

Print Mode for Meter to Meter Communication Two or more Tiger PMCs can be connected together allowing data to be transferred from the master meter (in print mode) to the slave meter (in ASCII mode). This enables the meters to share input data and control output functions.

Master Mode

This mode is for use with macro programming to expand the meter to meter communication capability to multiples of Tiger PMCs. This is useful for building an entire system of Tiger PMCs, sharing information and control output resources.

DECISION

Ethernet

Ethernet has become a popular automation and control protocol. We supply an ethernet output option and several external ethernet converters that are compatible with the serial outputs of Tiger PMCs.

Ethernet ASCII Wrap - The ethernet output carrier board option wraps the ASCII output into the Ethernet protocol, and provides a T-base 10/100 Ethernet output socket. This allows the Configuration Utility Program or the Macro Development Software to run over a standard Ethernet network. This enables the Tiger meter to be configured or macro programmed from anywhere in the world via the web.

Up to 32 Tiger PMCs can be connected by RS-485 to a single Ethernet Converter, which will support up to 32 separate IP addresses.

Ethernet Modbus Wrap - This converter accepts the Tiger PMCs modbus protocol and outputs Modbus/TCP through an Ethernet T-base 10 port. This has become a standard for Ethernet on the factory floor. Many SCADA and HMI software packages connect directly to Modbus/TCP.

### Planning to Harness the Power of Tiger 320 Programmable Meter Controllers continued Planning to Use the Tiger 320 Series of Programmable Meter Controllers continued

DeviceNet

DeviceNet was originally developed by Allen Bradley to connect sensors from the factory floor to PLCs. It is a deterministic real-time system, typically used to connect to networks using Allen Bradley PLCs. An optional carrier board is required for DeviceNet which replaces the standard serial output with a dedicated DeviceNet output connector.

## Data Logging

The Tiger 320 Operating System has built-in, sophisticated data logging software. Data logging can be triggered from the PROGRAM button, digital inputs, time or alarm functions. Up to 1MB of optional extra on-board memory provides a powerful, multichannel data capture and acquisition system.

Tiger PMCs can be configured to log in an endless loop, overwriting the oldest data first and utilizing the maximum amount of memory available. Similar to the Black Box on an aircraft, the data can be downloaded for analysis after a problem event occurs.

Data logging can be combined with an Ethernet converter to provide an individual Web Page with data that can be accessed by a browser over the internet.

Real-time Clock

The Tiger meter has an optional real-time clock with a 15 year lithium battery backup, ensuring that time information is not lost in the event of a power failure. It can be configured in 12 or 24-hour modes for printing and data logging applications.

Other applications of the real-time clock include activating a setpoint or control action at fixed times of the hour, day, week, month or year.

Flash Card Memory Module For long term data logging, a Flash Card Memory Module that plugs in to the carrier board output socket is available. Flash Cards are available from

4 to 128 meg. They can be removed and read by a standard card reader, or the data can be downloaded through the serial port or over the internet with an Ethernet converter. The module also has an SSR setpoint output to trigger an external event.

## Configuration and Programming with

## a PC

With a serial output module installed, Tiger 320 PMCs are most easily configured using the Tiger 320 Configuration Utility, which can be downloaded free from the web and run on any Windows-based PC. The utility also enables the user to access some special capabilities of the Tiger 320 which cannot be programmed manually by the front panel buttons.

The Configuration Utility requires that an RS-232 interface board be installed in a Tiger 320 for programming.

However, if the final application does not require a serial output, the RS-232 board can be easily removed, after programming is completed, and kept for future use.

When a Tiger 320 is to be used in a custom application, the utility enables all or any of the front panel programming functions to be disabled (code blanking).

Customized descriptive text can also be entered to appear with any setpoint action or event.

Different configurations can be stored in a PC for fast downloading into a meter by the user. Custom configurations can also be issued a serial number and pre-

loaded at the factory.

## Development Software

Custom Macro Programming

This powerful, easy to use development system enables programs to be written in BASIC, utilizing any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. When your Basic program is compiled into the Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized. There are also numerous offthe-shelf application specific programs available. Many only need the blanks to be filled in to use them and do not require any knowledge of BASIC programming.

Macro in the

writing stage

Macros are useful when implementing any specialized control system that cannot be achieved by the standard configuration capability of the Tiger 320 Operating System. Using the development software, functions can be altered or added in a standard meter to perform the required job. This may typically include logic sequencing functions and mathematical functions.

Developing a Macro is much easier and quicker than programming a PLC, because the basic code required to customize the Tiger meter is considerably less than the ladder logic programming required for PLCs. This is due to the hundreds of functions built into the Tiger meter that can be manipulated or invoked by a macro, to fulfill the requirements of almost any application.

S c r o l l i n g annunciator

m e s s a g e s can be programmed

to appear with any setpoint activation, selected events or logic inputs. Easy to read, plain text prompts can be programmed to replace the manual programming codes and provide a userfriendly interface for any custom application.

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

RAW DATA ANALOG, DIGITAL AND LOGIC I/O

### Configuration Utility Program

The Easiest and Fastest Way to Configure the Tiger 320 is to Use a PC with the Free Downloadable Configuration Utility Program The diagrams and instructions provided in this data sheet / user manual are intended to enable the Tiger meter to be configured and programmed manually using the front panel buttons. A system of Programming Codes is required to facilitate this type of manual programming and these are explained in detail with diagrams and examples.

However, when the Tiger meter is configured and programmed via the optional RS-232 serial port and a PC using the Configuration Utility, the system of Programming Codes is bypassed. The Configuration Utility enables all the programming options to be clearly identified by their functions for direct on-screen selection. The Configuration Utility requires that an RS-232 interface board be installed in a Tiger 320 for programming. However, if the final application does not require a serial output, the RS-232 board can be easily removed, after programming is completed, and kept for future use.

The Configuration Utility Program (which may be freely downloaded from the web) is designed to simplify and speed up the configuration and programming of any Tiger 320. Pull down menus facilitate the selection of different options and the assignment of values. A Help explanation is provided just by holding the cursor over any function box.

The configuration utility enables the user to access some special capabilities of the Tiger 320 which cannot be selected manually by the front panel buttons.

Easy Installation of Linearization Tables

The configuration utility facilitates the storage and downloading of complex linearization tables. Tables can be created in any mathematical or spreadsheet program, and copied into the utility. Linearization tables can be created to precisely match a particular sensor so that they can be installed and downloaded as part of an annual calibration procedure.

Code Blanking

When a custom configuration is created for any specialized application, the Tiger 320 can be programmed to blank out and disable all or any manual programming codes that you do not wish the user to be able to view or access by de-selecting them in the appropriate check box.

Display Text Editing

The meter can be programmed to display customized text to appear for any setpoint or event to suit any application requirements.

Easy Setpoint Configuration

The Tiger 320 supports an incredible range of setpoint options and functions. The utility makes is quick and easy to select and download any combination you may require.

Configuration Data Copying and Loading The configuration utility program allows you to store a record of a meters configuration for later referral, or for the restoration of a desired configuration. Macros can be combined with a configuration file so they can be downloaded together and locked at the same time. When a file is locked after downloading, it cannot be copied. It can only be erased and reloaded from a master file.

Also included is the ability for the user to make notes about the configuration that can be stored as part of the file.

### Custom Macro Programming

## Never Before has the Customization of such a Powerful Measurement,

## Control and Automation Product been Made so Fast, Free and Easy

### The Tiger 320 Macro Development System is so

### power packed and feature rich that you can

### build a completely custom designed controller

### in 1/50th of the time it would take to program a

### microprocessor or a PC, and 1/20th of the time

### it can take to program a PLC.

### Quickly convert any special metering or control

### and automation idea into your own proprietary

### product, CE approved and ready to ship in

### days, with custom multicolor faceplates, labels,

### shipping boxes and instruction manuals.

This powerful, easy to use Development System can be downloaded free from the web. It enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

When your BASIC program is compiled into the Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized. When your Macro is downloaded into a Tiger 320 and locked, it is locked forever. It cannot be read or duplicated, it can only be erased.

There is no back-door access. A Tiger 320 running your Macro will remain your exclusive proprietary product.

There is also a growing library of off-the-shelf application specific macro programs available. Many only need the blanks to be filled in to use them and this does not require any knowledge of BASIC. The source code is provided with these programs so they can easily be customized and/or integrated into any proprietary application-specific Macro.

On request, any custom Macro can be issued a serial number and pre-installed at the factory to operate on power-up.

Scrolling annunciator messages can be programmed to appear with any setpoint activation, selected events or logic inputs.

Easy to read, plain text prompts can be programmed to replace the manual programming codes and provide a user-friendly interface for any custom application.

Tiger Development System - Code Writing Screen

Register Labels

Code Writing Area

Tiger Development System screen showing Macro being written.

Double clicking on

register label in the left hand side frame

automatically inserts the function in the code window at the cursor insertion point.

Tiger Development System screen showing the Macro code being compiled successfully.

Tiger Development System screen showing the compiled Macro being downloaded into a Tiger 320 Series PMC.

### Index

32-Bit Operating System....................................................4 Analog Output / Analog Retransmission..........................21-22 Calibration of Analog Output............................................21 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................21 Location of Analog Output Module..................................47 Pinout of Analog Output..................................................46 Scaling of Analog Output................................................21, 22 Select Source for Analog Output....................................21 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications..........22 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4....................21 Averaging - Digital Filtering................................................22 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4....................21

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................9 Brightness Display..............................................................20

Calibration............................................................................21-24

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD..................................21 Manual Calibration..........................................................23

Single-Point Calibration....................................................23

Two-Point Calibration......................................................23

Case Dimensions................................................................60

Modular Construction......................................................47

Other Case Sizes............................................................3, 4 Channel 1 Settings..............................................................31-32

32 Point Linearization......................................................32 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate....................................31 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................31

Measurement Task..........................................................31

Post Processing..............................................................32

Print Mode........................................................................32

Sampling Rate................................................................31

Serial Mode......................................................................32

Smart Input Module........................................................31 Channel 2 Settings..............................................................33 Channel 3 Settings..............................................................34 Channel 4 Settings..............................................................35 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization......................................................36 Maths Functions..............................................................36

Code 1 - Display Configuration..........................................25-30 Configure Data Source Procedure..................................27 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure....................28 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure......................29 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure..................30 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................30 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]........................................25 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]....................................25 Display Functions Mode..................................................25 Manual Loader Mode......................................................25 Setpoint Annunciators Mode............................................25

Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]......................................25 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate........................25

Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................31

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions..........................................32

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................33 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions............................................34 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions............................................35 Code 7 - Result Processing................................................36 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................37

Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins..........................37 Code Blanking......................................................................19-20

Clock/Timer

Configuration....................................................................31, 34, 35

Optional Real-time Clock................................................4 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................31, 34, 35 Real-time Clock Date......................................................37 Time Stamp......................................................................37

Component Layout & External Devices............................47-48 Modular Construction......................................................47

Component Layout..........................................................48

Configuration and Programming from a PC....................4, 8 Configuration Utility Program

Code Blanking and Display Text Editing..........................10 Configuration Data Copying............................................10 Installation of Linearization Tables..................................10 Setpoint Configuration....................................................10

Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts..........................................46 Connector Pinouts..........................................................45

DeviceNet........................................................................46

External Devices..............................................................48

Ordering Information, Connectors..................................58 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................45 Controls & Indicators..........................................................14-15 Annunciator LEDs............................................................14

Down Button....................................................................14

Error Message................................................................15

LED Display....................................................................14

Program Button................................................................14

Program Lockout Switch..................................................15 Scrolling Display Text Messaging....................................14 Setpoint Lockout Switch..................................................15 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................14 Up Button........................................................................14

Control Outputs..................................................................6-7

Electromechanical Relays

or Solid State Control Outputs........................................6 I/O Logic, Rear Panel or Breakout Box............................7 PID or ON/OFF Control..................................................7 Retransmission 0-10V or 4-20mA....................................7

Custom Macro Programming

Macro Compiling and Loading........................................11 Data Logging........................................................................4, 8, 37 Downloading Logged Data from Meter............................37 Flash Card Memory Module............................................8 Printing Logged Data......................................................37 Real-time Clock................................................................8, 37

Development Software

When to Use Macros......................................................8 DeviceNet..............................................................................8, 46

Digital Input Pins................................................................37 Display Brightness Setting................................................20 Display Functions................................................................25-30

Data Source....................................................................27

Display Format and Decimals..........................................28 Display Rounding............................................................28

Last Digit Text Character..................................................29 Other Display Formats....................................................4 Setpoint Annunciator Mode..............................................30

Update at Sample Rate..................................................30

### Index

Display Options

LED or LCD Displays......................................................6 Numeric or Alphanumeric Displays..................................6 Push Button or Membrane Touch Pads..........................6 Remote Display................................................................6

Single or Multiple Displays..............................................6

Faceplates

Custom Faceplates..........................................................59

Optional Caption Sheets..................................................59 Custom Faceplate Design Template................................59

Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls..........................................................4, 14-15 Front Panel Programming Codes......................................17-18 Main Programming Mode................................................17 On Demand Modes..........................................................18

Setpoint Programming Mode..........................................17 View Modes....................................................................18

Functional Diagram............................................................45

General Features................................................................1

HMI Touch Panel Graphic Displays....................................7 Hysteresis and Deviation....................................................39-40, 42 Initial Setup Procedures......................................................19-20

Code Blanking and Macro Check....................................19-20 Model and Software Code Version Check......................19 Input Signal Conditioning Modules..................................5, 49-55 Input Module Component Glossary................................55 Input Module Index..........................................................49 Input Modules..................................................................50-54

Modular Position..............................................................47

Ordering Information, Input Modules..............................56-57

Input Signals & Sensors

4-20mA or Sensor Direct................................................6 Sensor Linearization or Compensation............................6 I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports)....................................5, 48 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors....................................31 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables........................................32 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors and User Loaded Tables..................................................33 Channel 3 Temperature Sensors and User Loaded Tables..................................................34 Channel 4 Temperature Sensors and User Loaded Tables..................................................35 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables......................36 Table Settings..................................................................22, 36

Literature Overview

Model Specific Data Sheets / User Manuals..................3 Other Tiger 320 Series Related Software........................3 Programming Code Sheet..............................................3 Supplements to Data Sheets / User Manuals..................3

Macros..................................................................................4, 8, 11 Macro Check....................................................................19-20

Manual Loader....................................................................25

Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths......................................................9, 36 Result Processing............................................................36

Modbus................................................................................7, 22

Model Type Check................................................................19

On Demand Functions........................................................21 Ordering Information..........................................................56-58

Panel Cutout........................................................................60

PID Control Settings............................................................39, 42 Power Supply......................................................................5, 45 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................31

Channel 2........................................................................33

Print Mode............................................................................7, 32 Programming Codes............................................................17-18

Programming Conventions................................................16

Programming via PC..........................................................4, 10-11 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected....................................44 Registers That Should Not Be Selected..........................44 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints..................44 Relay & Logic Output Modules..........................................46 Serial Communication........................................................5, 7-8 ASCII................................................................................7

Configuration....................................................................32

DeviceNet........................................................................8

Ethernet..........................................................................7

Master Mode....................................................................7

Modbus............................................................................7

Pinouts............................................................................46

Print Mode........................................................................7

RS-232 or RS-485..........................................................7 Setpoint Programming Mode..............................................38-43

Data Logging....................................................................39

Data Printing to PC..........................................................39 Data Printing to Serial Printer..........................................39 Display Flashing..............................................................39

Hysteresis or Deviation....................................................39-40, 42 Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures........................41 PID Control Settings........................................................39, 42 Real-time Clock Option....................................................39 Real Time Control Modes................................................40 Relay Energize Functions................................................39 Relay Output Modules....................................................38 Setpoint & Relay Control Settings..................................38, 42 Setpoint Activation Source..............................................39 Setpoint Activation Values................................................38

Setpoint Latching............................................................39

Setpoint Reset & Trigger..................................................39, 43 Setpoint Tracking..............................................................39

Timer Modes....................................................................39, 43

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up........................................................................31

Supplements

See Literature Overview

Table of Contents................................................................1 Timers..................................................................................5, 39

Configuration....................................................................31, 34, 35

Delay Settings..................................................................43

Modes..............................................................................40

Totalizers

Setting..............................................................................21-22

### Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

LED Display

The DI-60A5C has a 6-digit, 14-segment, 0.56(14.2 mm) standard red, or optional green, or super-bright red LED display. The LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

See Ordering Information for further details.

Display Text Editing with 14 Segment Full Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run with a simple macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 14-segment full alphanumeric display.

14-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

and

buttons.

button saves the current pro-

Program Button

While programming, pressing the gramming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the button once and then press the button at the same P time.

Pressing the button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the button once and then press the button at the same time.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

and

and

and

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Function Buttons

Function buttons activate pre-programmed macros on and demand. each macro is written to activate from a specific function button. When the function button is pressed, the macro carries out its designated tasks.

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

### Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC].

The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [ERROR]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal

must be at least

1000 counts greater

than the low input

(zero) signal (positive and negative

values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the

capability of the meter (19999 to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the

button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 17):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 17):

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 17):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,

total 1, and total 2 at

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

power-up [2XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes.

All meter programming

codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPCX] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the

meter uses the three righthand side display digits.

These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite. To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps.

Operational Display

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger

320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

The top display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal.

This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button. In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Operational Display

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operabutton and a right tional display. With a left hand pressing the

hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main programming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].This is the display brightness mode and is the first submenu of the main programming mode.

Operational Display

### Step 1

### Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes:

the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

at the same time P

and

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program. (see page 10)

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press

at the same time

the Setpoint

and

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

Save SP Settings & Exit To save a new setpoint configuration setting and

return to the operational display at any point,

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

press

once.

the

button

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Then press the

and

button at the same

time to exit.

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values Setpoint 1

[SPC_1]

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

### View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

To view, press the

button:

To view, press

the

button:

View Mode

Ch1

Ch3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

View Mode

Ch2

Ch4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the

button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on the function demand

Calibration On Demand

Mode, press the button for

4 seconds to activate one of following selected on the demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101). See page 3 for more information.

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

## Model and Software Code Version Check

The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

T HERE STSTARART HERE

Operational Display

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CODE BLANKING &

MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Step 1

Press and hold

the and

buttons

Operational Display

Example

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

## Display Configuration

Once you have read the user manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. The default setting is 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

T HERE STSTARART HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

### Step 1

Operational Display

### Step 2

Example

### Step 3

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

## Calibration Modes

## ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details. (See page 3 for more information).

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module. (See page 3 for more information).

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 24 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters. (See page

3 for more information).

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 36 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use. (See page 3 for more information).

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module. (See page 3 for more information).

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 27 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

T HERE STSTARART HERE

TWO-POINT

CALIBRATION

From Step 5

Example

Step 11

Example

To Step 7

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration procedures. (See page 3 for more information).

T HERE STSTARART HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

Operational Display

Step 2

Pass Brightness

Mode and enter

Calibration Mode

### Step 3

0 Result

1 Channel 1

2 Channel 2

3 Channel 3

4 Channel 4

### Step 4

From Step 5

Step 7

Select averaging

window between 1

and 65535 counts

Example

Step 8

Save averaging

window settings

Step 9

Select [000] to

leave the

Calibration Mode

Step 10

Save settings

Step 5

Select averaging sampling

rate from 1 to 255 samples

### Step 11

Step 6

Save averaging

sampling rate setting

Example

### To Step 7

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 26 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits settings.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes off

when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 26).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 30 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the 2nd digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the analog sample rate selected in Code 2.

The example procedure on Page 30 shows how to configure the display to update at 50 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2.

See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 31 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the 2nd digit and 0 in the 3rd digit.

Note:

[XX1] Second Display is the bargraph display on models DI-50B51, FI-B101D50, and GI-50B101. The [XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

The example procedure on Page 27 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format sub-menu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 28 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 29 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Data Source Procedure

Example Procedure:

The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

From Step 5

Step 6

Programming Tip

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Programming Tip

Step 8

Step 4

Step 9

Step 5

Example

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the 3rd digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61] to enter the Display Format Mode.

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY FORMAT

Step 4

Step 9

Step 5

From Step 5

Example

Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

## X X

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text Character. See diagram opposite.

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

From Step 6

Step 4

Step 5

Example

To Step 7

Step 7

## X X

Step 8

Step 9

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure

## Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Example Procedure:

Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

T HERE STSTARART HERE CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Example

Step 4

Example

Step 5

Step 5

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series DI-50A5C meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2.

The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

Operational Display

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Code 1, and enter Code 2

Step 3

Set Code 2 to [000]:

1st Digit = 0 Selects 10

### Step 5

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 3

Example

### To Step 5

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 and 2, and enter Code 3

### Step 3

Operational Display

From Step 3

Step 4

Save Post

Processing setting

### Step 5

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 3, and enter Code 4

Step 4

Save CH 2

Measurement Task

setting

### Step 5

T HERE STSTARART HERE

Operational Display

From Step 3

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the 3rd input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite the

available configuration selections in Code 5.

lists

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Step 5

Step 4

Save CH3 setting

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the 4th input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

CH4 FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

Save CH4 setting

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The 3rd digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

Operational Display

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 6 and enter Code 7

From Step 4

### Step 3

### Step 5

Step 4

Save CH1 & CH 2 Result Processing setting

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal emulation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs. When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

## Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 5 A Form A and 10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 400 V, 210 mA DC SSRs and another SSR output module supports 400 V, 140 mA AC / DC SSRs providing a further eight configuration options.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

140 mA

(AC/DC)

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

5 A Form A Max Two

10 A Form C

Max Six

5 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

## Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters

and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 42 and 43.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press

buttons at the same time

and

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

SP-B

SP-A

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can be applied to setpoints

configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or

PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programmable offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers

Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, programmable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is 70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually

programs a relays

setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

1-Shot ON mode (Programmable Minimum ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

minimum on time

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

1-Shot OFF mode (Programmable Minimum OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint 1

(SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3). (See page 3 for more information).

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

From Step 5

T HERE STSTARART HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1

SETPOINT & RELAY

FUNCTIONS

Step 7

Save SP1

control settings

Example

Example

Step 9

Save SP1

control settings

Example

Step 5

To Step 6

Step 10

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 42.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 43 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

PXX

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system (see page 11).

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 26 & 27)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 42)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 43)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 43)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle (cid:4) is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle (cid:2) is shown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and

release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable 1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown on the right, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed.

Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

### Carrier Board Output Pins

Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

DeviceNet The DeviceNet carrier board has the same analog pinouts, but with a 3.5mm Pitch Socket. The serial output pins are replaced with DeviceNet pins, as follows:

Pin 19 - Positive (+) 24V.

Pin 20 - Can + (positive).

Pin 21 - N/C.

Pin 22 - Can - (negative).

Pin 23 - Negative (-) 24V.

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Opto Isolated I/0 Module for External Breakout Box with 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs & 6 Inputs

Relay Modules with up to two 5A Form A Relays, and up to two 10A Form C Relays

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 400V (210mA DC only) or (140mA AC/DC) SSRs

Relay Modules with five or six 5A Form A Relays

Open Collector / TTL / 5V Output

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

Relay

Module

When Serial Outputs are not

required, the Standard Serial

Output Carrier Board is

available without Serial

Output to support

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output, DeviceNet Output and

Ethernet Output Carrier

Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

Optional

DeviceNet

Carrier Board

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

mA or Volts

Selection Header

DeviceNet Pins

24, 23, 22, 21, 20, 19

Input Signal

Conditioner

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Analog Outputs

and/or

Plug-in

Relay

& Logic

I/O Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Processor

Board

Main

Board

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Optional DeviceNet Carrier Board

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485

Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

# I-SERIES INPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULES

Over 120 plug-in signal conditioning modules are available to suit almost any input signal, control, or data output. Modules can be easily inserted through the rear of the meter without disassembly of the case or removal from the panel. Many modules are exclusively designed for the Tiger 320 Series, and some can also be used with the Leopard and Lynx Family panel meters and bargraphs.

*Optimized for 50 Hz rejection. **Optimized for 60 Hz rejection.

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or see Texmates web site at: www.texmate.com for updated information. Pre calibrated I-Series Input Modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges are designed to be header selectable by the user, and our unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary for more information.

Unless otherwise specified, we will ship all modules pre calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scaling as shown in BOLD type. Other pre calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available.

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

*A module code shown below a compatibility symbol indicates another module is available, similar in function, which may be more suited for use with that family.

**Modules which are compatible are listed below the Model Specific Symbol.

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

Indicates a SMART MODULE. Smart Modules incorporate their own microprocessor and A/D converter. They communicate digitally with the Tiger 320 Operating System. Some also have their own SSR outputs.

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

ID06: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with External Decimal Select

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

ID08: DC Volts, 2/20/200/Custom V DC with External LIN Table Select

IDT2: Dual RTD Input, 2/3-wire, 100

IDP2: Dual Input, 3-wire RTD and 4-20mA

IDT3: Dual Input, 3-wire RTD and DCV

IDP3: Dual InputThermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

and 4 to 20mA

IDR1: Dual Resistance Input, 0.2/2/20K

IDT6: Dual Input - Thermocouple and Load Cell 362C

IDD4: Dual Input, DCV and DCmV 2V/50mV DC

IF06: Line Frequency

IF10: Univ. Freq. / RPM / UP DOWN Counter

IDD6: Dual Input, DC mV and 4 to 20mA

TTL Input Connected to IF10

50mV/4 to 20mA DC

IDT1: Dual Thermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

Tach Generator Connected to IF10

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

NAMUR Sensor Connected to IF10

IP10: Process + 3 Digital Inputs

PNP Open Collector Proximity Switch Connected to IF10

IOR1: ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential)

Switch or Dry Contact Connected to IF10

Magnetic Pickup Connected to IF10

IQP1: Quad 4 to 20mA

IP09: 4-20mA with External LIN Table Select

IR01: Resistance, 2/3/4-Wire, 200/ 2K/20K

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

IS03: Pressure/Load Cell with AutoCal

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

ITT1: Triple Thermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

IT01: Thermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

ITT4: Triple InputT/C, T/C (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

and 4 to 20mA

IW03: DC-Watts, 10V/50mV DC

ITT8: Triple InputT/C (J/K/R/S/T/B/N),

4 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA

ITT9: Triple InputT/C (J/K/R/S/T/B/N), DCV and 50mV DC

ITP1: Triple 4 to 20mA

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

## INPUT MODULE COMPONENT GLOSSARY

Dual input modules, and those modules exclusively compatible with the Leopard or Tiger Families, do not have zero and span adjustments. These modules are scaled and calibrated using the internal software functions of each individual meter.

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24 V DC Output for 4-20 mA Header On some modules this header enables a 24 V DC 25 mA

(max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin

2 that can power most 4-20 mA transmitters.

INPUT RANGE Headers

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to eight positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Display span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit.

Function Select Headers

On some modules various functions such as Amps and Volts, 4 wire and 6 wire, or cold junction compensation are selected by header positions that are marked on the PCB.

Excitation Output Select Headers When excitation outputs are provided, they are typically 5 V DC max 30 mA, 10 V DC max 30 mA (300 or higher resistance) or external supply. They are selected by either a single or multiple jumper clip.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of the full scale display span.

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, by 25% of the full scale display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5 V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

TOP VIEW

Max. panel thickness

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip. P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

O-ring

Gasket

Base

Removable

Key-lock

Cover

Various bezel colors

are available.

Black is standard.

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 96x48mm

96 mm

(3.78")

Safety

Catch

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-60AT5C Features and Specs

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-60AT5C

## Programmable Meter Controller

## Tiger 320 Series PMC

## 6 Digit Alphanumeric 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit alphanumeric Programmable Meter Controller

### (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming via front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 14-segment, 0.56 high LEDs

with full support for 14-segment alphanumeric text.

The meter comes with two extra buttons, F1 and F2, that are

available to access functions via macro.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed.

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different PlugInput Signal Conditioners are

I-Series

approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 14-segment alphanumeric, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP, DOWN, F1 and F2.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC or 85-265VAC,. 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC or 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Certifications and Listings

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-60 320 DS NZ301 UL March 2016 web

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-60E & DI-60T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 6 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

### General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.56 high LEDs

with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

## Specifications

## Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

## Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

### Front Panel Controls and Indicators

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Seven Segment LED Displays The six, seven segment LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings.

They also display the programming codes and settings during programming. The display is available in red, green, or super bright red LEDs.

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate P.N.: 76-DI60EG-N4 for green display & 76-DI60ER-N4 for red display

Program Lockout Switch

Seven Segment

LED Display

Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel

LED Display

The meter has a 6-digit, 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) standard red, or optional green or superbright red LED numeric display.

The LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run but requires a simple compiler generated macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button button at the same once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

buttons.

time.

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button initiates When in the operational display, pressing the a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button initiates When in the operational display, pressing the a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter.

If programming is attempted, the meter displays 'LOC'. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter

(199999 to +999999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X].When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [00X]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period.

The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and

setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

The CAPTURE pin (pin 12) can be activated by a very short logic low input or by connecting to the COMMON pin (pin 11). The CAPTURE pin can be programmed as a setpoint/relay activation source for any selected setpoint to trigger any designed setpoint function or for macro control applications. See Setpoint Control Settings on page 34 in the Setpoint Programming Mode second digit [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the first, second, and third digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

symbol

represents

This the

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the input signal or the result of a math function to the meter. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand button, the user is entering the main programming pressing the mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in place of a digit, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained.

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters manual programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and

at the same time

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[CodE_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[CodE_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[CodE_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[CodE_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[CodE_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[CodE_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[CodE_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[CodE10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

Save SP Settings & Exit

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

time to exit.

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Mode Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

To view, press

the

button:

View Mode

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Ch1

Ch3

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

Ch2

Ch4

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

Page 10

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check

The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

MODEL AND SOFTWARE CODE VERSION CHECK PROCEDURE

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Step 1

Press and hold

the and

buttons

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Example

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 11

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 1 Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Example

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Display Configuration

Once you have read the data sheet and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. The default setting is 5.

Example Procedure: CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Example

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

Page 12

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

Functions Activated by P Button Mode In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 13

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting

Properties Mode.

[CAL][20X] enters

the Serial Communications

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value. When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series the meter related calibration procedures configured calibration mode.

Page 14

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. The calibration mode display is set to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

2-POINT CALIBRATION

### From Step 6

### Step 1

### Step 2

HIGH

Signal

### Step 7

### Step 8

Example

### Step 9

### Step 3

### Step 4

### Step 10

LOW

Signal

### Step 5

### Step 6

Example

Set reading for zero load into meter and enter Span Mode To Step 7

### Step 11

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

CONFIGURING AVERAGING SAMPLING & AVERAGING WINDOW PROCEDURE

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

From Step 6

### Step 1

### Step 2

### Step 7

Example

### Step 8

### Step 3

### Step 4

0 Result

1 Channel 1

2 Channel 2

3 Channel 3

4 Channel 4

### Step 9

### Step 10

### Step 5

### Step 11

### Step 6

Example

To Step 7

Page 16

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### [CodE_1] - Display Configuration Initial Setup Procedures

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of first, second, and third digit settings.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 18).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the second digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode in Code 1 allows you to configure:

The data source for the primary display.

The format of the display with last digit rounding, type of display

units, and decimal point placement.

A text character for the last digit.

The display functions mode is configured by changing the second and third digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source Second Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the second digit and the 0 in the third digit.

Note:

[XX1] Second Display is the bargraph display on models DI-50EB51, DI-50TB51, FI-B101D50E, and FI-B101D50T.

The [XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The second digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the third digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the second digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format Second Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the second digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the third digit selection.

Text Character Second Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the second digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the third digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 18

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram below for data source selection options.

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Step 3

Programming Tip

Step 7

Programming Tip

Step 8

Step 4

Step 9

Step 5

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 19

### [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Initial Setup Procedures

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the third digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel 1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY FORMAT PROCEDURE setting Code 1 to [X61].

Step 1

From Step 5

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Step 7

Step 8

Step 3

Step 4

Step 9

Step 5

Page 20

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71]. See diagram opposite.

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 6

Step 3

Step 7

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Example

To Step 7

Step 8

Step 9

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 21

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Example Procedure:

CONFIGURING THE SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS PROCEDURE Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

UPDATE AT SAMPLE RATE PROCEDURE Example Procedure:

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

Step 1

Step 1

Step 2

Step 2

Step 3

Step 3

Example

Step 4

## X X

Example

Step 4

Step 5

Step 5

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 22

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series DI-60 meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 secs by setting Code 2 to [000].

Step 1

Step 2

Step 5

Step 4

To Step 5

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (First digit only).

From Step 3

Step 1

Step 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 5

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Download Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of logging data using the meters print mode. The data can be downloaded directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Print Mode Data Download Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to downloaded data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the first and second digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a voltage input with the processed input signal inversed with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [030].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

From Step 3

Step 1

Step 4

Step 2

Step 3

Step 5

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the first, second, and third digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

CONFIGURING CH3 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

To Step 5

Page 26

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the first, second, and third digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 for a voltage input with the CH4 processed input signal inversed by setting Code 6 to [21X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

To Step 5

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the first and second digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

To Step 5

Page 28

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using Windows HyperTerminal, or directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the third digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the second digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and data stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4/5 A Form A and 9/10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = -180000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = -50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = -100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

See Page 34

for a Level 1 Setpoint & Relay

Control Settings

diagram.

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 30

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

SP ON

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

Page 32

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

Relay to energize above SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Step 7

Example

Step 3

Step 8

Step 9

Example

Step 5

To Step 6

Step 10

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the first, second, and third digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

Page 34

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

Page 36

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts

## Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pin 12 Capture. The CAPTURE pin (pin 12) can be activated by a very short logic low input or by connecting to the COMMON pin (pin 11). The CAPTURE pin can be programmed as a setpoint/ relay activation source for any selected setpoint to trigger any designed setpoint function or for macro control applications. See Setpoint Control Settings on page 34 in the Setpoint Programming Mode second digit [X2X].

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Relay Modules with up to two 4/5A Form A Relays, and up to two 9/10A Form C Relays

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Page 38

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 40

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

Page 42

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths..................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

TOP VIEW

Max. panel thickness

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip. P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

O-ring

Gasket

Base

Removable

Key-lock

Cover

Various bezel colors

are available.

Black is standard.

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 96x48mm

96 mm

(3.78")

Safety

Catch

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

Page 44

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Mar-14-2016 DI-60 320 DS (NZ301)_UL_March 2016

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-60 Features and Specs

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-60E & DI-60T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 6 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

### General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 0.56 high LEDs

with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

UL Listed

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

## Specifications

## Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real (option):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in.eludoM yromeM draC hsalF M821 ot 4 elbavomer a Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

## Specifications continued

## Inputs

## Outputs continued

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

## Outputs

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI 60X manual NZ310 UL April 2016 web

## DI-60XE & DI-60XT

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 6 Digit 0.56 LCD

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

### General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming via front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

7-segment, 0.56 high LCD with full support for seven seg-

ment alphanumeric text.

Brightness (Contrast) control of LCD display from front panel

buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

ated by the front panel program button.

time stamp).

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

UL Listed.

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) Reflective LCDs.

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

Display Dimming: 8 brightness (contrast) levels. Front Panel selectable

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC / 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC / 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Certifications and Listings

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Series Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

### Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel

LCD Display

The meter has a 5-digit, 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) standard LCD numeric display. The LCD displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run but requires a simple compiler generated macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

### 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

Prog.

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate Part Number: 76-DI60X-N4

### Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P butbutton at the same time. ton once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

buttons.

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter.

If programming is attempted, the meter displays 'LOC'. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter (199999 to +999999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X].When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [00X]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and

setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPC-X] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the first, second, and third digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

symbol

represents

This the

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the input signal or the result of a math function to the meter. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main programming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in place of a digit, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters manual programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and

at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[CodE_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[CodE_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[CodE_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[CodE_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[CodE_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[CodE_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[CodE_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[CodE10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Mode Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

To view, press

the

button:

View Mode

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Ch1

Ch3

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

Ch2

Ch4

Page 10

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

Operational Display

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Step 1

Press and hold

the and

buttons

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

Example

Page 11

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

continued from Step 4

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Step 6

Press the button to switch the macro OFF

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Page 12

Display Configuration

Once you have read the data sheet and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness (Contrast) Mode The display brightness (contrast) mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LCDs without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The contrast can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and

7 being bright. The default setting is 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure the contrast setting to 7 (bright).

Operational Display

### Step 1

### Step 2

### Step 3

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness (Contrast) setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

Functions Activated by P Button Mode In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

Page 14

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. The calibration mode display is set to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

2-POINT CALIBRATION

### From Step 6

### Step 1

### Step 2

HIGH

Signal

### Step 7

Example

### Step 8

### Step 9

### Step 10

Example

### Step 11

Page 15

### Step 6

Set reading for zero load into meter and enter Span Mode To Step 7

### Step 3

### Step 4

LOW

Signal

### Step 5

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

From Step 6

### Step 1

### Step 2

### Step 7

Example

### Step 8

### Step 3

### Step 4

0 Result

1 Channel 1

2 Channel 2

3 Channel 3

4 Channel 4

### Step 5

Example

To Step 7

### Step 6

Page 16

### Step 9

### Step 10

### Step 11

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of first, second, and third digit settings.

The display functions mode is configured by changing the second and third digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source Second Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the second digit and the 0 in the third digit.

Note:

[XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode (not available on DI-60X)

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the second digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode in Code 1 allows you to configure:

The data source for the primary display.

The format of the display with last digit rounding, type of display

units, and decimal point placement.

A text character for the last digit.

The second digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the third digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the second digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format Second Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the second digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the third digit selection.

Text Character Second Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the second digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the third digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 18

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram below for data source selection options.

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Programming Tip

Step 7

Programming Tip

Step 8

Step 3

Step 4

Step 9

Step 5

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the third digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel 1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61].

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Step 7

Step 8

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Page 20

Step 9

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71]. See diagram opposite.

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 6

Step 3

Step 7

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Example

To Step 7

Step 8

Step 9

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

## X X

Example

Step 4

Step 5

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 secs by setting Code 2 to [000].

### Step 1

### Step 2

Step 3

1st Digit = 0 Selects 10 samples/sec (60 Hz) 2nd Digit = 0 Selects voltage, current 3rd Digit = 0 Selects no function

### Step 5

### Step 4

To Step 5

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (First digit only).

From Step 3

### Step 1

### Step 4

### Step 2

### Step 3

### Step 5

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Download Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of logging data using the meters print mode. The data can be downloaded directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Print Mode Data Download Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to downloaded data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the first and second digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a voltage input with the processed input signal inversed with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [030].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

From Step 3

### Step 1

### Step 4

### Step 2

### Step 3

### Step 5

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the first, second, and third digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

### Step 1

### Step 2

From Step 4

### Step 3

### Step 5

To Step 5

### Step 4

Page 26

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the first, second, and third digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 for a voltage input with the CH4 processed input signal inversed by setting Code 6 to [21X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Step 4

To Step 5

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the first and second digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

Operational Display

Enter Brightness Mode

### Step 1

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

### Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 6 and enter Code 7

From Step 4

### Step 3

1st Digit = 0 Selects direct display of result 2nd Digit = 0 Selects no linearization on result 3rd Digit = 3 Selects result = CH1+CH2

### Step 5

Example

### Step 4

Save CH1 & CH 2 Result Processing setting

To Step 5

Page 28

Exit Code 8. Return to Operational Display

Operational Display

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using Windows HyperTerminal, or directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the third digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the second digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and data stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Four standard relay output module options provide a selection of 16 relay configuration options for Tiger 320 Series meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4/5 A Form A and 9/10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = -180000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = -50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = -100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

See Page 34

for a Level 1 Setpoint & Relay

Control Settings

diagram.

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 30

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

SP-B

SP-A

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Adj.

ON-T

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

From Step 5

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 2

Step 7

Example

Step 3

Step 8

Step 9

Example

Step 5

To Step 6

Step 10

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the first, second, and third digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Page 34

Programming Tip

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 38

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Page 40

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

## Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

## Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real Time Clock.............................................................. 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27

## Index

Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Math Function

Cross Channel Math....................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

45 mm

(1.77")

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Snug Fitting

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

TOP VIEW

Max. panel thickness

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip. P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

O-ring

Gasket

Base

Removable

Key-lock

Cover

Various bezel colors

are available.

Black is standard.

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

Safety

Catch

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 96x48mm

96 mm

(3.78")

450 State Place, Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 44

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-60X Features and Specs

TIGER FAMILY

## DI-60XE & DI-60XT

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 6 Digit 0.56 LCD

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 6-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

### General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming via front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

7-segment, 0.56 high LCD with full support for seven seg-

ment alphanumeric text.

Brightness (Contrast) control of LCD display from front panel

buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.56 (14.2 mm) Reflective LCDs.

Digital Display Range: -199999 to 999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

Display Dimming: 8 brightness (contrast) levels. Front Panel selectable

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real (op tio n):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in.eludoM yromeM draC hsalF M821 ot 4 elbavomer a Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

.dnoces rep selpmas 01 yllacipyT Conversion Rate:

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard):

2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC / 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

,zH004-05,CAV562-58 / CDV003-59

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI 802XA manual NZ311 UL April 2016 web

## DI-802XAE & DI-802XAT

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## Two 8 Digit 0.217 LCD Displays

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 16-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Two 8-digit, 7x5 dot, 0.217 high positive reflective LCD displays with black text on a grey background. These are suitable for displaying two independent input signals, or a combination of processed signals such as rate and total.

Brightness (Contrast) control of LCD display from front panel

buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 9 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 8-digit, 7x5 dot, 0.217 (5.5 mm) reflective LCDs.

Digital Display Range: -9999999 to 99999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness (contrast) levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full dot matrix text characters supported on T Version with macros

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP, DOWN, F1, F2, F3.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point math (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real Time Clock (option):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A

Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form

A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC or 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC or 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Certifications and Listings

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Series Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

### 99999.99

### HI ALARM

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate P.N.: 76-DI60X-N4 for LCD Display

### 99999.99

### HI ALARM

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and button at the same Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

buttons.

time.

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

Page 6

Function Buttons

Function buttons F1 and F2 activate pre-programmed macros on demand. each macro is written to activate from a specific function button. When the function button is pressed, the macro carries out its designated tasks.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Dual LCD Display

The two 8-digit LCD displays are used to display two independent input signals, or a combination of processed signals such as rate and total.

Top Display

The top display is known as the primary display during programming and displays the three digit code settings when in a programming mode.

Bottom Display

The bottom display is known as the secondary display during programming and displays the programming code number or sub-menu name.

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Error]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the

the capability of

meter (99999999

to +99999999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

ERROR 1

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 17):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and

setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Locked

Display

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 17):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen. However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 17):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPCX] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the first, second, and third digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

99999.9

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

symbol

represents

This the

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the input signal or the result of a math function to the meter. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Contrast

99999.9

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[SPAN]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main prog r a m m i n g mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5]. This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in place of a digit, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one selection can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes:

the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and

at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[CodE_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[CodE_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[CodE_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[CodE_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[CodE_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[CodE_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

Save Code Settings & Exit

[CodE_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[CodE_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[CodE10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

99999.9

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Pressing both the

either the peak, modes resets the setting to the current displayed signal.

buttons at the same time while in valley, total 1, or total 2 view

and

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

CH1

CH3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

TOT_1

CH2

CH4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALLEY

TOT_2

Page 10

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check

The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

START HERE

MODEL & SOFTWARE

CODE VERSION

CHECK

Operational Display

99999.9

99999.9

Example

3.011

DI802T

99999.9

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Step 1

Press and hold

the and

buttons

Example

Page 11

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Off

Macro

Off

99999.9

Operational Display

Display Configuration

Once you have read the user manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness (Contrast) Mode The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LCDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. The default setting is 5.

2-POINT CALIBRATION

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness (contrast) setting to 7 (bright).

START HERE

DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

(CONTRAST)

Operational Display

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Step 2

Adjust brightness to 7

Example

Step 3

Save Brightness setting.

Exit Brightness mode.

Return to Operational

Display

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

Page 12

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

SPAN

2500

ZERO

SPAN

2500

CH2

CH1

OFF-R

SCAL-R

10000

ZERO

SPAN

2500

INPUT

0.0V

ZERO

32F

INPUT

32.0F

CAL-LO

]6384

CAL-HI

30000

BAUD

9600

PARITY

OFF

AZ-CAP

OFF

AZ-MOT

AVE-S

OFF

AVE-W

OFF

INPUT

10000

AFTER

1 SEC

MODE

MAN

ZERO

F.S.

999999

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Page 14

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

2-POINT CALIBRATION

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

START HERE

TWO POINT

CALIBRATION

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Operational Display

### From Step 6

HIGH

Signal

Step 7

7.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

span input

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

enter Calibration Mode

Example

Step 8

Save zero and span settings and re-enter Calibration Mode

Step 3

Select Calibration

Mode [111]

Step 4

Enter Cal Mode [111] For 2-point calibration

of CH1

Step 5

5.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

zero input

LOW LOW

Signal Signal

Example

Step 6

Set reading for zero load into meter and enter Span Mode

### To Step 7

Step 9

Select the No Function Calibration Mode [000]

Step 10

Save Calibration Mode [000] setting and enter Code 1

Step 11

Exit Code 1 and return to operational display

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and enter

Calibration Mode

From Step 6

Step 7

Select averaging

window between 1

and 65535 counts

Step 8

Save averaging

window settings

Step 9

Select [000] to leave the Calibration Mode

Step 10

Save settings

Step 11

Exit Code 1. Return to Operational Display

To Step 7

Step 4

Save settings

Step 5

Select averaging sampling

rate from 1 to 255 samples

Example

Step 6

Save averaging

sampling rate setting

Page 16

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 17 for a breakdown of first, second, and third digit settings.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 17).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the second digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode in Code 1 allows you to configure:

The data source for the primary display.

The format of the display with last digit rounding, type of display

units, and decimal point placement.

A text character for the last digit.

The display functions mode is configured by changing the second and third digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source Second Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the second digit and the 0 in the third digit.

Note:

[XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The second digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the third digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the second digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format Second Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the second digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the third digit selection.

Text Character Second Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the second digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the third digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

P SOURCE

### OFF

### DISP

### 000

## Char

## Off

Page 18

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

P SOURCE

### OFF

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

From Step 5

Step 6

Example

Programming Tip

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Step 8

Save Data

Source setting

Step 4

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Programming Tip

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the third digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61].

### DISP

### 000

Operational Display

From Step 5

### Step 6

Example

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

### Step 3

Step 4

Set the Display

Format Mode to [106]:

1st Digit = 1 Rounding by 2's 2nd Digit = 0 Decimal display 3rd Digit = 6 Decimal point

Step 7

Select [X0X] to leave Code 1

Step 8

Save Data Source setting

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

0 Result

1 Channel 1

2 Channel 2

3 Channel 3

4 Channel 4

5 Default Display

6 Total 1

7 Total 2

### Step 5

Page 20

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text Character Mode. See diagram opposite.

## Char

## Off

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

Step 4

Save setting

Example

Step 6

Save setting

To Step 7

From Step 5

Step 7

Select [X0X] to leave Code 1

Step 8

Save Last Digit Text Character setting

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Example Procedure:

Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

Step 3

Select SP Annunciators

setting [1XX]

Example

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 2

### Step 5

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Operational Display

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

Operational Display

Step 3

Select update at sample rate setting [X2X]

Example

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 2

Step 5

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

PRES_S

Step4

Save setting and

enter Code 3

Step 5

Exit Code 3. Return to Operational Display

To Step 5

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST

PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 3

Step 4

Save Post Processing

setting

Step 5

Exit Code 4. Return to Operational Display

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

PRES_S

Step 4

Save CH 2 Measurement Task setting

Step 5

Exit Code 5. Return to Operational Display

Page 25

From Step 3

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the 3rd input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite the

available configuration selections in Code 5.

lists

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

To Step 5

Step 4

Save CH3 setting

Page 26

SMART

000

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 6. Return to Operational Display

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the 4th input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH4 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 4

Save CH4 setting

To Step 5

SMART

000

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 7. Return to Operational Display

Page 27

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

START HERE

Page 28

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Four standard relay output module options provide a selection of 16 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4/5 A Form A and 9/10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 42 and 43.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

[SP_3]

[SP_4]

[SP_5]

[SP_6]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 180000

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 50000

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 30

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Setpoint Programming Mode Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1 SETPOINT

& RELAY

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Setpoint

Programming Mode

Step 2

Adjust setpoint 1 (SP1) activation value to e.g.

500 counts

Example

Step 3

Save SP1 activation

value setting

Example

Step 5

Enter SP1

source sub-menu

To Step 6

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

From Step 5

Example

Step 7

Save SP1

control settings

Step 9

Save SP1

control settings

Step 10

Exit SPC_2 and return to operational display

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 43 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

### SOURCE

### OFF

XX5

Programming Tip

MODE

OFF

MODE

OFF

HYST

HYST

FLASH

OFF

TRACK

OFF

XX5

XX0

DEVIN

PID

PASS-B

SPAN

P-BAND

0.0%

INT

0.0

DER

0.0

AR%

0.1%

1.0

CYC-T

Page 34

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

DELAY

OFF

NORMAL

DOM

0.0

(DOB)

Programming Tip

DELAY

OFF

1 SHOT

0.0

0.0

PULSE

-PULSE

0.1

0.001

0.0

0.0

0.1

OFF-T

0.0

0.001

0.0

0.0

DOB

0.1

OFF-T

0.001

0.0

DOB

0.0

0.0

0.1

0.001

OFF

MAKE

DEST

OFF PRINT

OFF

OFF

MODE CONST

RES-C

Programming Tip

TRIG

OFF

SOURCE

DISP

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 37

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 38

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 40

### Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 36 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13,14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-14

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 36 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 DeviceNet........................................................................ 38

External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Alphanumeric LCD Displays........................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LCD Display.................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28 Macro Check 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Math Function

Cross Channel Math....................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13 Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Supplements

See Literature Overview

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 28 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

Loose Fitting

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

TOP VIEW

Max. panel thickness

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip. P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

O-ring

Gasket

Base

Removable

Key-lock

Cover

Various bezel colors

are available.

Black is standard.

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 96x48mm

96 mm

(3.78")

Safety

Catch

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

450 State Place, Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 44

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-802X Features and Specs

## DI-802XAE & DI-802XAT

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## Two 8 Digit 0.217 LCD Displays

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 16-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Two 8-digit, 7x5 dot, 0.217 high positive reflective LCD displays with black text on a grey background. These are suitable for displaying two independent input signals, or a combination of processed signals such as rate and total.

Brightness (Contrast) control of LCD display from front panel

buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 8-digit, 7x5 dot, 0.217 (5.5 mm) reflective LCDs.

Digital Display Range: -9999999 to 99999999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness (contrast) levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full dot matrix text characters supported on T Version with macros

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP, DOWN, F1, F2, F3.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point math (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

Real Time Clock (option):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module. Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either timeup, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

.dnoces rep selpmas 01 yllacipyT Conversion Rate:

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A

Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form

A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC or 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC or 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### GI-50 320 DS NZ308 UL April 2016 web

## GI-50E & GI-50T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit 1 LEDs

## in a 9/32 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 1 high LEDs with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for

multi-channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be ini-

tiated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display

text

editing. Customize

display

text

for

OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus or

direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with

date/time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-29 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 30-35 Registers......................... 36 Functional Diagram................. 37 Connector Pinouts.................. 37 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 38 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 38 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 39-40 Installation Guidelines............... 41

Index......................... 42-43 Case Dimensions.................. 44

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 1 (25.4 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Time

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

## Outputs continued

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

(See pages 38-39 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC / 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 2.5W nominal

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC / 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2.5W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 9/32 DIN, 144x72mm (5.69 x 2.84)

Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Certifications and Listings

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Series Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend. They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LoC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

LED Display

The meter has a 5-digit, 7-segment, 1 (25.4 mm) standard red, or optional green or superbright red LED numeric display. The LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run with a simple macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Display with Faceplate and Bezel

buttons.

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button.

The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the

Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and

Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

button at the same

time.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures. The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input

(full scale) signal

must be at least 1000 counts greater than

the low input (zero) signal (positive and

negative values are

allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter (19999

to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 19) is connected to the COMMON pin (21) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 19 is disconnected from pin 21 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 20) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 21) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Five eights and five decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 18 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 21 on the main PCB), both the main and setpoint programming modes

are locked out. All meter programming codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 22) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 21), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPC_X] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 21).

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

Operational Display

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

The display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main programming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The exceptions to this rule are when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check, or the Code Blanking and Macro Check.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3-digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes:

the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode. (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and

at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

View Modes

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

While in the operational display, pressing the you to view but not change the following parameters:

button allows

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

To view, press

button:

the

View Mode

To view, press

the

button:

View Mode

CH1

CH3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

TOT_1

CH2

CH4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

TOT_2

Page 10

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

MODEL AND SOFTWARE CODE VERSION CHECK PROCEDURE Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE

CODE VERSION

CHECK

Example

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. The supplier has a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE and/or run a macro, the supplier programs the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING &

MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Operational Display

Example

Page 11

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 1

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Display Configuration

Once you have read the User manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. 5 is the default setting.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Page 12

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Operational Display

Step 2

Adjust brightness to 7

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for

most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple input

source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input mod-

ules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

Page 14

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 28 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 19 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

2-POINT CALIBRATION

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. The calibration mode display is set to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

input source

is The high

applied to the meter when setting the span value.

START HERE

TWO-POINT

CALIBRATION

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 6

HIGH

Signal

Step 7

7.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

span input

Example

Step 8

Save zero and span settings and re-enter

Calibration Mode

Step 9

Select the No Function Calibration Mode [000]

Step 10

Save Calibration

Mode [000] setting

and enter Code 1

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and enter

Calibration Mode

Step 4

Enter the Zero Mode

LOW

Signal

Step 6

Set reading for zero load into meter and enter Span Mode

Step 11

Exit Code1.

Return to

Operational Display

Example

Step

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts. CONFIGURING AVERAGING SAMPLING & AVERAGING WINDOW PROCEDURE

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode

and enter

Calibration Mode

From Step 6

Step 7

Select averaging

window between 1

and 65535 counts

Example

Step 8

Save averaging

window settings

Step 9

Select [000] to

leave the

Calibration Mode

Step 4

Enter the Averaging

Sampling Rate Mode

Step 10

Save settings

Example

Step

Step 5

Select averaging

sampling rate from

1 to 255 samples

Page 16

Step 11

Exit Code1.

Return to

Operational Display

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

CODE 1 Display Configuration Modes All meter display modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1 (See diagram below). See Code 1 diagram on Page 18 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits settings.

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the 1st digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 18).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the 2nd digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the analog sample rate selected in Code 2. The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to configure the display to update at typically 10 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2.

See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 23 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The data source for the primary display is configured by selecting

5 in the 2nd digit and the 0 in the 3rd digit:

Note:

[XX1] Second Display is the bargraph display on models DI-50EB51, DI-50TB51, FI-B101D50E, and FI-B101D50T.

The [XX1] Second Display and [XX2] Third Display only apply to DI-503 meters with three displays.

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to configure the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows you to select the data from one of a number of meter registers as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the 3rd digit.

The example procedure on Page 19 shows how to select the data source for the primary display. The three digits are set to [X50].

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

The example procedure on Page 20 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 18

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

CONFIGURING THE DATA SOURCE PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

From Step 5

### Step 6

Example

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

Programming Tip

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Programming Tip

Step 8

Save Data Source

setting

### Step 4

0 Primary Display

1 Second Display (See Note)

2 Third Display (See Note)

3 Peak/Valley

4 Analog Output 1

5 Analog Output 2

6 Totalizer 1

7 Totalizer 2

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

Page 19

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY FORMAT PROCEDURE Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the 3rd digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel

1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61].

From Step 5

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

Step 1

Step 6

Example

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Page 20

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71]. See diagram opposite. CONFIGURING THE TEXT CHARACTER PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

From Step 6

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Step 6

Step

Example

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Example Procedure:

Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

UPDATE AT SAMPLE RATE PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

## X X

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Step 3

Example

Step

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

From Step 3

Step

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Step 4

Save Post Processing

setting

Step 5

Exit Code 4.

Return to

Operational Display

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

From Step 3

Step 4

Save CH 2 Measurement Task setting

Step

Step 5

Exit Code 5.

Return to

Operational Display

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for proCONFIGURING CH3 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE cedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH3

FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 6.

Return to

Operational Display

Step

Step 4

Save CH3 setting

Page 26

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 for a direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH4

FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Step 3

Step 5

Exit Code 7.

Return to

Operational Display

Step 4

Save CH4 setting

Step

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 8.

Return to

Operational Display

Step

Step 4

Save CH1 & CH2 Result Processing setting

Page 28

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 29

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Four standard relay output module options provide a selection of 16 relay configuration options for Tiger 320 Series meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4/5 A Form A and 9/10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

Setpoint Programming Mode

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Enter these menus to set setpoint (SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default setting = 18000 Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

Default setting = 18000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

Default setting = 5000

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 34 and 35.

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

Default setting = 5000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

Default setting = 10000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Default setting = 10000

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control settings

See Page 34

for a Level 1 Setpoint & Relay

Control Settings

diagram.

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint Mode Logic Diagram

Page 30

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 31

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 32

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

LEVEL 1 SETPOINT CONFIGURATION

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1

SETPOINT & RELAY

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Setpoint

Programming Mode

Step 3

Save SP1 activation

value setting

Example

From Step 5

Example

Step 7

Save SP1

control settings

Step 9

Save SP1

control settings

Step 5

Enter SP1

source sub-menu

Example

Step 10

Exit SPC_2.

Return to

Operational Display

Step

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Mode Logic Diagram on Page 34.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 35 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 34

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

PXX

Programming Tip

Page 35

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 18 & 19)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 34)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 35)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 35)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 36

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Page 37

### Carrier Board Output Pins

Analog Outputs

Pin 44 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 45 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 46 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Page 38

### Component Layout and External Devices

incorporates,

Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Analog

Output

Module

Standard Serial

Output Module

(RS-232 or RS-485)

## Tiger 320 Series GI Modular

## Construction

### Exploded View of

### Meter Modular Boards

Serial Output

R.J.11 Socket

Pins 37-42

Pin 46

Pin 44

Pin 35

Pin 28

Relay

Output

Module

Output

Carrier

Board

Bargraph

Display

AC / DC

Power Pins

24, 25

Digital

Display

Display

Board

Main/Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1-6

Input Signal

Conditioner

Page 39

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 40

### Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 41

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 39 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 38 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 44 Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 23-24

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 24 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 23 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 23 Measurement Task.......................................................... 23 Post Processing.............................................................. 24 Print Mode....................................................................... 24 Sampling Rate................................................................. 23 Serial Mode..................................................................... 24 Smart Input Module......................................................... 23 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 25 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 26 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 27 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Maths Functions.............................................................. 28 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-22 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 19 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 20 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 21 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 22 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 22 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 23

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 24

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 25 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 26 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 27 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 28 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 29 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 29 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 42

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 23, 26, 27 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 29 Time Stamp..................................................................... 29

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 39 Component Layout.......................................................... 40 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 38 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 37 External Devices............................................................. 40 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 37 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 6 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 29 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 29 Real-time Clock............................................................... 29 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 29 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-22 Data Source.................................................................... 19 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 20 Display Rounding............................................................ 20 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 21 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 22 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 22 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 37 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 39

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 40 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 23 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 24 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 25

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 26

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 27 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 28

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 28

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Math Function

Cross Channel Math....................................................... 4, 28 Result Processing........................................................... 28 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 44 PID Control Settings........................................................... 31, 34 Power Supply...................................................................... 37 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 23 Channel 2........................................................................ 25 Print Mode............................................................................ 24

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 36 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 36 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 36 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 38 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 24

Pinouts............................................................................ 38

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 30-35 Data Logging................................................................... 31 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 31 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 31 Display Flashing.............................................................. 31 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 31-32, 34

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 33 PID Control Settings....................................................... 31, 34

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 31 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 32 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 31 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 30

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 30, 34 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 31 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 30 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 31 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 31, 35 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 31 Timer Modes................................................................... 31, 35

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 23

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 31

Configuration................................................................... 23, 26, 27 Delay Settings................................................................. 35 Modes............................................................................. 32

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 43

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Mosaic Fitting

135.5mm

(5.35")

65.8mm

(2.6")

9/32

DIN

Cutout spacers

136.85mm

(5.41")

138mm

(5.44")

68mm

(2.68")

66.9mm

(2.63")

9/32 DIN

Cutout spacers

65.8mm

(2.6")

Mosaic Fitting

67.75mm

(2.64")

Snug Fitting

Loose Fitting

8mm

(0.31")

130.47mm

(5.15")

14mm

(0.55")

Top & Bottom

Right-angled

Connectors

These dimensions are increased by 2mm (0.08") when the metal surround case is installed.

Metal Surround Case

P/N:(OP-MTL144X72)

NOTE: The Metal Surround Case is pre-installed at the factory and cannot be removed without damage

to the case.

Two Screw Mount Clips are supplied as standard with this case. For replacement Screw Mount Clips, Order P/N.(OP-MTLCLIP)

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 44

Various bezel

colors are available.

Black is standard.

FRONT VIEW

9/32 DIN 144x72mm

72mm

(2.84")

5mm

(0.2")

typical

144mm

(5.69")

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### GI-50 Features and Specs

TIGER FAMILY

## GI-50E & GI-50T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 5 Digit 1 LEDs

## in a 9/32 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit Programmable Meter Controller (PMC)

### with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, 1 high LEDs with full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for

multi-channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be ini-

tiated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display

text

editing. Customize

display

text

for

OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus or

direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with Sd Card with Date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front co

UL Listed

ver.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 1 (25.4 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in.eludoM yromeM draC hsalF M821 ot 4 elbavomer a Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Time

Real (option):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

## Outputs continued

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

.dnoces rep selpmas 01 yllacipyT Conversion Rate:

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to

20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (5VDC max, 50 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD Card.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC / 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 2.5W nominal

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC / 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 2.5W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 9/32 DIN, 144x72mm (5.69 x 2.84)

Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI 50B51 320 DS NZ306 UL March 2016 web 1

## DI-50EB51 & DI-50TB51

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 51 Segment Bargraph, 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 51-segment Programmable

### Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal

### conditioning and advanced software features for monitoring,

### measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

Red or green 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support

for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

51 segment red or green bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 6-7 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 8 Front Panel Programming Codes.... 9-10 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 11-12 Display Brightness.................. 12 Calibration Modes............... 13-16

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 17-33 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 34-39 Registers......................... 40 Functional Diagram................. 41 Connector Pinouts.................. 41 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 42 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 42 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 43-44 Installation Guidelines............... 45

Index......................... 46-47 Case Dimensions.................. 48

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Bargraph Display: 51-segment bargraph.

Bargraph Color: Red (std). Green (optional).

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz)

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

(See pages 42-43 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

Bargraph Display

The bargraph display is a 51 segment red or green bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal. The bargraph display is known as the secondary display during programming.

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run but requires a simple compiler generated macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

Operational Display Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

buttons.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

button at the same

time.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

LED Display

The meter has one 5-digit, 7-segment, 8 mm standard red or optional green LED display. The digital display is the primary display and reads the primary input signal on Channel 1. It is also used to display all meter configuration programming codes.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter.

If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Error]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were

too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter (19999 to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect

connections.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPCX] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

Third

Digit

First

Digit

Second

Digit

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits. These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite. To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

The display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the docu-

mentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button. In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand button, the pressing the user is entering the main programming mode. This

is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first submenu of the main programming mode.

### Step 1

### Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The exceptions to this rule are when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check or the Code Blanking and Macro Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3 digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Operational Display

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values Setpoint 1

[SPC_1]

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

the operational

View Modes

While in

display, pressing

button allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel 1.

the

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

the operational While

butdisplay, pressing the ton allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

Peak (of CH1).

Valley (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Operational Display

Operational Display

Operational Display

To view, press the

button:

Press

To view, press the

button:

Press

View Mode

View Mode

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

Ch2

Ch4

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Ch1

Ch3

Page 10

On Demand Modes

Tare

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

MODEL AND SOFTWARE CODE VERSION CHECK PROCEDURE

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, We program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting. CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Page 11

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 2 Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Display Configuration

Once you have read the User manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. 5 is the default setting.

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

Example

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Page 12

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

Step 2

Adjust brightness to 7

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See Diagram below.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Functions Activated by P Button Mode In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer

Page 14

selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 32 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 21 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. The calibration mode display is set to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

From Step 6

START HERE

Step 6

To Step 7

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

Step 4

Page 16

To Step 7

From Step 6

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

All digital display configuration modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1.

how to configure the display to update at 50 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

All bargraph display configuration modes are configured in Code 10 (See diagram below).

See Code 1 diagram on Page 22 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

See Code 10 diagram on Page 23 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

### CODE 1 Digital Display Configuration

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 22).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 29 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the second digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 29 shows

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 27 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The digital display is the primary display. The bargraph display is the secondary display.

To select the data source for the primary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 0 in the 3rd digit [X50].

To select the data source for the secondary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 1 in the 3rd digit [X51].

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows the data from one of a number of meter registers to be selected as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to select the data source for the primary display.

The three digits are set to [X50]. The same example can be used for selecting the data source for the secondary display (bargraph). The three digits are set to [X51].

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to select the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 27 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 23 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Set Up Bargraph Scaling This mode is where the span range of the bargraph is scaled.

The span range of the bargraph can be set between 19999 to

99999 counts. There are three methods of scaling the bargraph:

Linear.

Via Linearization Table 1.

Logarithmic.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit enters the Set Up Bargraph Scaling mode.

Linear Bargraph Scaling

The most common method of scaling the bargraph is through the Linear Bargraph Scaling sub-menu. In this menu the bar low, bar high, and bar nominal settings are set.

Bar Low [bAr_L] is the setting in counts required at the bottom of the bargraph.

Bar High [bAr_h] is the setting in counts required at the top of the bargraph.

Bar Nominal sets the point on the bargraph at which the bar begins to light up. This can be any position between and including the bar low and bar high settings.

If bar nominal is set to the bar low setting, the bargraph behaves like a typical bargraph making the segments light up from the bottom of the bar and grow towards the top.

If bar nominal is set to the bar high setting, this makes all segments from the displayed signal to the top of the bar light up. As the signal increases, the number of lit segments between the signal and the bar high setting becomes steadily less. When the signal reaches the bar high setting no segments are lit.

Bargraph Nominal Set Low or High

Setting bar nominal to the midpoint between bar low and bar high makes the bargraph behave like a typical center zero bargraph. This means the bargraph lights up at the center of the bar and moves either up or down the bar depending on the displayed signal.

Page 18

For example, if the meter's full scale range is 20,000 counts, the midpoint is 10,000 counts. If a signal of 10,000 counts is applied, only one segment at the 10,000 count mark lights up.

If a signal of 17,000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (10,000 counts) and the 17,000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 5000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (10,000 counts) and the 5000 count mark light up.

Typical Center Zero Bargraph

An added feature of this bargraph is that it can also be non-symmetrical. This means that the bar nominal setting does not need to be set at the mid-point between bar low and bar high. For example, if the bargraph is configured to display 200 to 800 C, bar low is set to 200 counts and bar high is set to

800 counts. Bar nominal is set to 0 counts. If a signal of 50 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 down to 50. If a signal of 600 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 up to 600.

Example Procedure. The

example procedure on

Page 25 shows how to scale the bargraph using linear scaling.

Non-symmetrical Zero

Bargraph

Bargraph Scaling using Linearization Table 1 When set in this mode, the register selected to be displayed on the bargraph display (Code 1 set to [XX1]) is first processed through a 32-point flexible linearization table (Table 1) before being displayed.

This can be used, for example, if channel 1 is the required digital display while the bargraph display is the square root of channel 1.

See Linearization Supplement (NZ207) for full details to set up linearization Table 1.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit and 1 in the 3rd digit selects Bargraph scaling via Linearization Table 1.

Example Procedure. To scale the bargraph using Linearization Table 1, follow the Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure on Page 25. Ensure the secondary (bargraph) display has been set up in Code 1 and Linearization Table 1 has been formatted and selected for the required application.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Logarithmic Bargraph Scaling

Logarithmic scales are used in a wide variety of measurements.

Probably the most well known logarithmic scale is the Richter scale for measuring earthquakes. Other log scales used include sound level (dB), radio frequency signals, power levels (dBm), and numerous radiation signals.

In all logarithmic scales a reference level is required that is the level at 0 dB. For example, in an RF measurement 0 dBm is at a reference of 1 mW.

The scale is calculated from:

10 log10

counts (input)

reference

If the meter is scaled so that:

1 mW = 100 counts and 1 W = 100,000 counts Then the reference for 0 dBm would be set to 100 counts:

10 log10

(input)

100

= 0 dBm

Decade

(Counts)

100

1000

10,000

100,000

1,000,000

dBm

20

10

Now every 10 dBm represents a decade, the bargraph can be scaled to a different amount of bars per decade (as set in the 3rd digit).

Example of Bars per Decade

Reference. This is the number of counts displayed for a 0 dB reference. Range: 1 to 99999 counts.

Bar Nominal. See Bar Nominal description under heading:

Linear Bargraph Scaling.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit and 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the 3rd digit enters the Set Up Scaling for Logarithmic Bargraph sub-menu:

Selecting 3 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 10 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 4 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 20 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 5 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 25 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 6 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 33 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 7 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 50 Bar/Decade.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 26 shows how to scale the bargraph using example logarithmic settings.

Bargraph Display Format

After the bargraph colors have been set and the bargraph scaled, the display format can be set. This is normally the final setting. The 2nd digit selects the format of the bargraph display. There are four display format settings available:

Setpoints on Bar. Selecting [X0X] means that the setpoints are displayed on the bar as lit segments in the current display color. When the bargraph lights up on or beyond a setpoint, the setpoint segment goes out.

Example of Setpoints on Bargraph

Peak and Valley on Bar. Selecting [X1X] means that peak and valley are displayed as lit segments and are updated as they change. The setpoints are not displayed.

Min/Max with

Setpoints.

Selecting [X4X] means that the segments of the bar remain lit over the minimum and maximum signal variations. The setpoints are displayed as lit segments.

This is a useful mode for seeing process variations at a glance.

Note:

When moving from another display format to the Min/Max with Setpoints mode, the peak and valley settings must be set to the current settings by entering the Peak View mode or Valley View mode and pressing the UP and DOWN buttons at the same time.

Example: Peak and Valley on Bargraph

When moving from Min/Max with Setpoints mode to another display format, the bar nominal [bAr_n] setting must be reset to its original settings in Code 10 [3XX].

Bar Only. Selecting [X7X] means that only the bargraph display signal is displayed on the bar. Setpoints and peak and valley are not displayed.

Example: MIN and MAX on Bargraph

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 20

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

Step 4

From Step 5

Step 6

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the third digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel 1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61].

START HERE

Step 4

From Step 5

Step 6

Step 8

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71]. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

From Step 6

Page 23

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Example Procedure:

CONFIGURING THE SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS PROCEDURE Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

X X

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code

1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure

From Step 6

START HERE

Step 5

Step 6

Step

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Scale Bargraph using Logarithmic Scaling Procedure CONFIGURE BAR LOGIRITHMIC SCALING

From Step 6

START HERE

CONFIGURE

BARGRAPH

LOGIRITHMIC

SCALING

Page 26

Step

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series DI-50B51 meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Example

To Step 5

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

From Step 3

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 28

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

START HERE

From Step 3

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Page 29

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Page 30

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner the

fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

installed,

Post processing and measure ment task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH4 FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Page 31

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The 3rd digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

Note 5:

START HERE

From Step 4

Page 32

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4 /

5 A Form A and 9 / 10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options.

A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 38 and 39.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 34

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 35

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 36

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Setpoint Programming Mode Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

From Step 5

START HERE

To Step 6

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 38.

Page 37

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 39 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 38

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

PXX

Programming Tip

Page 39

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 20 & 21)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 38)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 39)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 39)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 40

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 41

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 42

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 43

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 44

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 45

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 43 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 42 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 48 Modular Construction...................................................... 43 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 27-28

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 27 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 27 Measurement Task.......................................................... 27 Post Processing.............................................................. 28 Print Mode....................................................................... 28 Sampling Rate................................................................. 27 Serial Mode..................................................................... 28 Smart Input Module......................................................... 27 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 29 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 30 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 31 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 32 Maths Functions.............................................................. 32 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-26 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 21 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 22 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 23 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 24 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 24 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 27

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 28

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 29 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 30 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 31 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 32 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 33 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 33 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 46

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 27, 30, 31 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 27, 30, 31 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 33 Time Stamp..................................................................... 33

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 43 Component Layout.......................................................... 44 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 42 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 41 External Devices............................................................. 44 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 41 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 33 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 33 Real-time Clock............................................................... 33 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 33 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-26 Data Source.................................................................... 21 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 22 Display Rounding............................................................ 22 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 23 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 24 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 24 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 41 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 35-36, 38 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 43

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 44 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 27 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 28 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 29

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 30

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 31 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 32

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 32

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths..................................................... 4, 32 Result Processing........................................................... 32 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 48 PID Control Settings........................................................... 35, 38 Power Supply...................................................................... 41 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 27 Channel 2........................................................................ 29 Print Mode............................................................................ 29

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 40 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 40 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 40 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 42 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 20

Pinouts............................................................................ 41

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 34-39 Data Logging................................................................... 35 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 35 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 35 Display Flashing.............................................................. 35 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 35-36, 38

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 37 PID Control Settings....................................................... 35, 38

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 35 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 36 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 35 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 34

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 34, 38 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 35 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 34 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 35 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 35, 39 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 35 Timer Modes................................................................... 35, 39

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 27

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 35

Configuration................................................................... 27, 30, 31 Delay Settings................................................................. 39 Modes............................................................................. 36

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 47

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip.

P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

Metal Surround Case

uses Metal Screw

Mount Clips and has a max. panel thickness

mounting of 15.5 mm (0.61").

NOTE: The Metal Surround Case is pre-installed at the factory and cannot be removed without damage

to the case.

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 48x96mm

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

96 mm

(3.78")

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

Metal Surround Case

(P/N: OP-MTL96X48)

Various bezel

colors are available.

Black is standard.

Page 48

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-50B51 Features and Specs

## DI-50EB51 & DI-50TB51

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 51 Segment Bargraph, 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 51-segment Programmable

### Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal

### conditioning and advanced software features for monitoring,

### measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger

320 Operating System.

Red or green 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support

for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

51 segment red or green bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-chan-

nel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus,

Ethernet, or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Bargraph Display: 51-segment bargraph.

Bargraph Color: Red (std). Green (optional).

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz)

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in.eludoM yromeM draC hsalF M821 ot 4 elbavomer a Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Real (option):

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Time

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

9/10A 240VAC~1/2

4/5A 240VAC, 4A

24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with SD card

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA

or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-50EB51H DI-50TB51H controller PLC Manual d0041 2

## DI-50EB51 & DI-50TB51

## DI-50EB51H & DI-50TB51H

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 51 Segment Bargraph, 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 51-segment Programmable Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red or green 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support

for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

51 segment red or green bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-

channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus, Ethernet, DeviceNet or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications....................... 2 Tiger 320 Series Literature Overview... 3 Tiger 320 Series System Overview... 4-5 Planning to Use the Tiger 320....... 6-8 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 9 Configuration Utility Program......... 10 Custom Macro Program............. 11 Index......................... 12-13

Table of Contents

Controls & Indicators............. 14-15 Front Panel Configuration & Setup..... 16 Front Panel Programming Codes... 17-18 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 19-20 Display Brightness.................. 20 Calibration Modes............... 21-24 Programming Procedures......... 25 -41 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 42-47 Registers......................... 48

Functional Diagram................. 49 Connector Pinouts.................. 49 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 50 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 50 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 51-52 I-Series Input Modules........... 53-59 Ordering Information............. 60-62 Custom Faceplates................. 63 Case Dimensions.................. 64

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green (optional).

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Bargraph Display: 51-segment bargraph.

Bargraph Color: Red (std). Green (optional).

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz)

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver. An Ethernet optional output carrier board is also supported.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Time

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

### Specifications continued

## Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 9/10A Form C Relays* and two 4/5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 4A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 9/10A 240VAC~1/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 4/5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (210mA DC only) SSRs (300V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5VDC (50 mA) or 0 to V+ (50VDC max, 100 mA).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 16

MB memory.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

Power Supplies

## Outputs

(See pages 42-43 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Two Optional Plug-in Carrier Boards: Provide three different serial outputs or no serial output, support single or dual analog outputs, and accept any one of seven different plug-in I/O modules.

1. Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

2. Ethernet Carrier Board: 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-

45 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 85-265VAC / 95-300VDC @ 2W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 14-48VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 1/8 DIN, 96x48mm (3.78 x 1.89) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

## THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 5

Bargraph Display

The bargraph display is a 51 segment red or green bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal. The bargraph display is known as the secondary display during programming.

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run but requires a simple compiler generated macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

Operational Display Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

buttons.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

button at the same

time.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

LED Display

The meter has one 5-digit, 7-segment, 8 mm standard red or optional green LED display. The digital display is the primary display and reads the primary input signal on Channel 1. It is also used to display all meter configuration programming codes.

Page 6

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter.

If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position 1, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Error]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were

too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter (19999 to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect

connections.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPCX] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 7

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

Third

Digit

First

Digit

Second

Digit

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits. These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite. To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

The display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the docu-

mentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button. In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Page 8

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand button, the pressing the user is entering the main programming mode. This

is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first submenu of the main programming mode.

### Step 1

### Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The exceptions to this rule are when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check or the Code Blanking and Macro Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3 digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Operational Display

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

time to exit.

Enter these menus to adjust SP activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control values Setpoint 1

[SPC_1]

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 9

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

the operational

View Modes

While in

display, pressing

button allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel 1.

the

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

the operational While

butdisplay, pressing the ton allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

Peak (of CH1).

Valley (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Operational Display

Operational Display

Operational Display

To view, press the

button:

Press

To view, press the

button:

Press

View Mode

View Mode

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

Ch2

Ch4

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Ch1

Ch3

Page 10

On Demand Modes

Tare

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

MODEL AND SOFTWARE CODE VERSION CHECK PROCEDURE

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, We program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting. CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Page 11

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 2 Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Display Configuration

Once you have read the User manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. 5 is the default setting.

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

Example

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Page 12

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

Step 2

Adjust brightness to 7

Example

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See Diagram below.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Functions Activated by P Button Mode In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

Page 13

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer

Page 14

selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 32 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 21 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. The calibration mode display is set to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

From Step 6

START HERE

Step 6

To Step 7

Page 15

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

Step 4

Page 16

To Step 7

From Step 6

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

All digital display configuration modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1.

how to configure the display to update at 50 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

All bargraph display configuration modes are configured in Code 10 (See diagram below).

See Code 1 diagram on Page 22 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

See Code 10 diagram on Page 23 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

### CODE 1 Digital Display Configuration

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 22).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 29 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is set in the second digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 29 shows

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 27 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The digital display is the primary display. The bargraph display is the secondary display.

To select the data source for the primary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 0 in the 3rd digit [X50].

To select the data source for the secondary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 1 in the 3rd digit [X51].

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows the data from one of a number of meter registers to be selected as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 21 shows how to select the data source for the primary display.

The three digits are set to [X50]. The same example can be used for selecting the data source for the secondary display (bargraph). The three digits are set to [X51].

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to select the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 27 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 23 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

Set Up Bargraph Scaling This mode is where the span range of the bargraph is scaled.

The span range of the bargraph can be set between 19999 to

99999 counts. There are three methods of scaling the bargraph:

Linear.

Via Linearization Table 1.

Logarithmic.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit enters the Set Up Bargraph Scaling mode.

Linear Bargraph Scaling

The most common method of scaling the bargraph is through the Linear Bargraph Scaling sub-menu. In this menu the bar low, bar high, and bar nominal settings are set.

Bar Low [bAr_L] is the setting in counts required at the bottom of the bargraph.

Bar High [bAr_h] is the setting in counts required at the top of the bargraph.

Bar Nominal sets the point on the bargraph at which the bar begins to light up. This can be any position between and including the bar low and bar high settings.

If bar nominal is set to the bar low setting, the bargraph behaves like a typical bargraph making the segments light up from the bottom of the bar and grow towards the top.

If bar nominal is set to the bar high setting, this makes all segments from the displayed signal to the top of the bar light up. As the signal increases, the number of lit segments between the signal and the bar high setting becomes steadily less. When the signal reaches the bar high setting no segments are lit.

Bargraph Nominal Set Low or High

Setting bar nominal to the midpoint between bar low and bar high makes the bargraph behave like a typical center zero bargraph. This means the bargraph lights up at the center of the bar and moves either up or down the bar depending on the displayed signal.

Page 18

For example, if the meter's full scale range is 20,000 counts, the midpoint is 10,000 counts. If a signal of 10,000 counts is applied, only one segment at the 10,000 count mark lights up.

If a signal of 17,000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (10,000 counts) and the 17,000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 5000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (10,000 counts) and the 5000 count mark light up.

Typical Center Zero Bargraph

An added feature of this bargraph is that it can also be non-symmetrical. This means that the bar nominal setting does not need to be set at the mid-point between bar low and bar high. For example, if the bargraph is configured to display 200 to 800 C, bar low is set to 200 counts and bar high is set to

800 counts. Bar nominal is set to 0 counts. If a signal of 50 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 down to 50. If a signal of 600 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 up to 600.

Example Procedure. The

example procedure on

Page 25 shows how to scale the bargraph using linear scaling.

Non-symmetrical Zero

Bargraph

Bargraph Scaling using Linearization Table 1 When set in this mode, the register selected to be displayed on the bargraph display (Code 1 set to [XX1]) is first processed through a 32-point flexible linearization table (Table 1) before being displayed.

This can be used, for example, if channel 1 is the required digital display while the bargraph display is the square root of channel 1.

See Linearization Supplement (NZ207) for full details to set up linearization Table 1.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit and 1 in the 3rd digit selects Bargraph scaling via Linearization Table 1.

Example Procedure. To scale the bargraph using Linearization Table 1, follow the Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure on Page 25. Ensure the secondary (bargraph) display has been set up in Code 1 and Linearization Table 1 has been formatted and selected for the required application.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Logarithmic Bargraph Scaling

Logarithmic scales are used in a wide variety of measurements.

Probably the most well known logarithmic scale is the Richter scale for measuring earthquakes. Other log scales used include sound level (dB), radio frequency signals, power levels (dBm), and numerous radiation signals.

In all logarithmic scales a reference level is required that is the level at 0 dB. For example, in an RF measurement 0 dBm is at a reference of 1 mW.

The scale is calculated from:

10 log10

counts (input)

reference

If the meter is scaled so that:

1 mW = 100 counts and 1 W = 100,000 counts Then the reference for 0 dBm would be set to 100 counts:

10 log10

(input)

100

= 0 dBm

Decade

(Counts)

100

1000

10,000

100,000

1,000,000

dBm

20

10

Now every 10 dBm represents a decade, the bargraph can be scaled to a different amount of bars per decade (as set in the 3rd digit).

Example of Bars per Decade

Reference. This is the number of counts displayed for a 0 dB reference. Range: 1 to 99999 counts.

Bar Nominal. See Bar Nominal description under heading:

Linear Bargraph Scaling.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit and 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the 3rd digit enters the Set Up Scaling for Logarithmic Bargraph sub-menu:

Selecting 3 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 10 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 4 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 20 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 5 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 25 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 6 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 33 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 7 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 50 Bar/Decade.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 26 shows how to scale the bargraph using example logarithmic settings.

Bargraph Display Format

After the bargraph colors have been set and the bargraph scaled, the display format can be set. This is normally the final setting. The 2nd digit selects the format of the bargraph display. There are four display format settings available:

Setpoints on Bar. Selecting [X0X] means that the setpoints are displayed on the bar as lit segments in the current display color. When the bargraph lights up on or beyond a setpoint, the setpoint segment goes out.

Example of Setpoints on Bargraph

Peak and Valley on Bar. Selecting [X1X] means that peak and valley are displayed as lit segments and are updated as they change. The setpoints are not displayed.

Min/Max with

Setpoints.

Selecting [X4X] means that the segments of the bar remain lit over the minimum and maximum signal variations. The setpoints are displayed as lit segments.

This is a useful mode for seeing process variations at a glance.

Note:

When moving from another display format to the Min/Max with Setpoints mode, the peak and valley settings must be set to the current settings by entering the Peak View mode or Valley View mode and pressing the UP and DOWN buttons at the same time.

Example: Peak and Valley on Bargraph

When moving from Min/Max with Setpoints mode to another display format, the bar nominal [bAr_n] setting must be reset to its original settings in Code 10 [3XX].

Bar Only. Selecting [X7X] means that only the bargraph display signal is displayed on the bar. Setpoints and peak and valley are not displayed.

Example: MIN and MAX on Bargraph

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 20

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

Step 4

From Step 5

Step 6

Programming Tip

Programming Tip

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the third digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel 1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61].

START HERE

Step 4

From Step 5

Step 6

Step 8

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71]. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

From Step 6

Page 23

Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Example Procedure:

CONFIGURING THE SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS PROCEDURE Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

X X

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code

1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure

From Step 6

START HERE

Step 5

Step 6

Step

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Scale Bargraph using Logarithmic Scaling Procedure CONFIGURE BAR LOGIRITHMIC SCALING

From Step 6

START HERE

CONFIGURE

BARGRAPH

LOGIRITHMIC

SCALING

Page 26

Step

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series DI-50B51 meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1 (CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Example

To Step 5

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

From Step 3

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 28

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

START HERE

From Step 3

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Page 29

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Page 30

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner the

fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

installed,

Post processing and measure ment task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH4 FUNCTIONS

From Step 4

Page 31

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The 3rd digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

Note 5:

START HERE

From Step 4

Page 32

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 33

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for DI-50 meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 4 /

5 A Form A and 9 / 10 A Form C relays providing 12 configuration options.

A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 300 V, 210 mA DC SSRs.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 16 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 16 outputs with a 10 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

4 A Form A Max Two

9 A Form C

Max Six

4 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 38 and 39.

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 180000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 50000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 100000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 100000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Page 34

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 35

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and

delay-on-break (DOB)

settings.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and

off time settings.

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

on time settings.

Single actuation, programmable DOM and

time minimum on

settings.

Adj.

DOM

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

Single actuation, programmable minimum

off time and DOB settings.

Page 36

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable off time

and DOB.

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and

on time settings.

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Setpoint Programming Mode Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

From Step 5

START HERE

To Step 6

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 38.

Page 37

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 39 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 38

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

PXX

Programming Tip

Page 39

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 20 & 21)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 38)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 39)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 39)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 40

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin 3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 8 to 15 Pin 8 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 9 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the

meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 10 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 11 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pins 14/15 AC/DC Power Input. These are the pins that supply power to the meter. See Power Supply for details of the standard and optional low voltage power supply.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 41

Carrier Board Output Pins Analog Outputs

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 18 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only) SSRs

Ethernet The Ethernet carrier board has the same analog output pins, with 10/100Base-T Ethernet (RJ-45 Socket).

Relay Modules with five or six 4A Form A Relays

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Page 42

Open Collector / TTL / 5VDC Output (50 mA)

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Flash Card Memory Module

Component Layout and External Devices Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

When Serial Outputs are not required,

Relay

Module

Relay Output Pins

32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25

Flash Card

Memory Module

Part Numbers

OR91 & OR92

Flash Card

Two NPN Open

Collector Outputs

The Standard Serial Output and Ethernet Output Carrier Boards accept all Relay and Logic I/O Modules

RS-232 or RS-485 Serial Output Pins, RJ-6 Socket Ethernet Output Carrier

Board has 10/100Base-T, with RJ-45 Socket

Analog

Output Pins

18, 17, 16

the Standard Serial Output

Carrier Board is available without Serial Output

to support Analog

Outputs and/

or Plug-in

Relay

Logic

I/O

Modules.

Serial

Output

Module

Single or Dual

Analog Output

Module

Display

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Processor

Board

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1, 2, 3

Main

Board

LOCK

HOLD

TEST

COMMON

CAPTURE

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Page 43

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal Conditioner

Processor

Board

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485 Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 44

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 45

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 13-14 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 13 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 13 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 43 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 42 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 13-14 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 13 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 14 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 13

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 12

Calibration........................................................................... 13-16

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 13 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 15 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 15 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 15 Case Dimensions................................................................ 48 Modular Construction...................................................... 43 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 27-28

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 28 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 27 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 27 Measurement Task.......................................................... 27 Post Processing.............................................................. 28 Print Mode....................................................................... 28 Sampling Rate................................................................. 27 Serial Mode..................................................................... 28 Smart Input Module......................................................... 27 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 29 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 30 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 31 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 32 Maths Functions.............................................................. 32 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 17-26 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 21 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 22 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 23 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 24 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 24 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 17 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 17 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 17 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 17 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 17 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 17 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 17 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 27

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 28

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 29 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 30 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 31 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 32 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 33 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 33 Code Blanking..................................................................... 11-12

Page 46

Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 27, 30, 31 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 27, 30, 31 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 33 Time Stamp..................................................................... 33

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 43 Component Layout.......................................................... 44 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 42 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 41 External Devices............................................................. 44 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 41 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 6-7 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 6 Down Button.................................................................... 6 Error Message................................................................. 7 LED Display..................................................................... 6 Program Button............................................................... 6 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 7 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 6 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 7 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 6 Up Button........................................................................ 6 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 33 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 33 Real-time Clock............................................................... 33 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 33 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 12 Display Functions............................................................... 17-26 Data Source.................................................................... 21 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 22 Display Rounding............................................................ 22 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 23 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 24 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 24 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 6-7 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 9-10 Main Programming Mode................................................ 9 On Demand Modes......................................................... 10

Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 9 View Modes..................................................................... 10 Functional Diagram............................................................. 41 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 35-36, 38 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 11-12 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 11-12 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 11 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 43

I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 44 Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 27 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 28 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 29

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 30

### Index

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 31 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 32

Table Settings.................................................................. 14, 32

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 11-12 Manual Loader..................................................................... 17 Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths..................................................... 4, 32 Result Processing........................................................... 32 Modbus................................................................................ 14

Model Type Check............................................................... 11 On Demand Functions........................................................ 13

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 48 PID Control Settings........................................................... 35, 38 Power Supply...................................................................... 41 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 27 Channel 2........................................................................ 29 Print Mode............................................................................ 29

Programming Codes........................................................... 9-10 Programming Conventions................................................ 8 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 40 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 40 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 40 Relay & Logic Output Modules.......................................... 42 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 20

Pinouts............................................................................ 41

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 34-39 Data Logging................................................................... 35 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 35 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 35 Display Flashing.............................................................. 35 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 35-36, 38

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 37 PID Control Settings....................................................... 35, 38

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 35 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 36 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 35 Relay Output Modules..................................................... 34

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 34, 38 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 35 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 34 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 35 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 35, 39 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 35 Timer Modes................................................................... 35, 39

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 27

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 35

Configuration................................................................... 27, 30, 31 Delay Settings................................................................. 39 Modes............................................................................. 36

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 13-14

Page 47

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard 1/8 DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Straight-thru Connector

for meters with output board 20mm (0.79")

3.7mm

(0.15")

43.4mm

(1.71")

Snug Fitting

45 mm

(1.77")

43.4 mm

(1.71")

DIN Cutout spacers

40.8 mm

(1.61")

4mm

(0.16")

8 places

3mm

(0.12")

8 places

1/8 DIN

Cutout spacers

Mosaic Fitting

87.4mm

(3.45")

40.8mm

(1.61")

91.6mm

(3.6")

92 mm

(3.62")

Loose Fitting

These dimensions are

increased by 1.6mm (0.06") when the metal surround case is installed.

When extra panel mounting tightness is required, order the optional screw mount clip.

P/N:(OP-MTLCLIP)

5.3 mm

(0.21")

117 mm

(4.61")

Right-angled Connector

11.8mm (0.47")

For extra strength in portable applications, the 8 DIN spacers should be snipped off and the Mosaic fitting cutout used. Alternatively, the High Strength Panel Mounting Kit (Part # OP-PMA96X48) can be used.

The 96x48mm case is particularly suitable for

mounting in mosaic panels or insulative panels up to 2" thick. They can also stack mount, 2 up in existing cutouts for 1/4 DIN

(96x96mm) or 4 up in 1/2 DIN (96X192mm).

Metal Surround Case

uses Metal Screw

Mount Clips and has a max. panel thickness

mounting of 15.5 mm (0.61").

NOTE: The Metal Surround Case is pre-installed at the factory and cannot be removed without damage

to the case.

FRONT VIEW

1/8 DIN 48x96mm

Clear Lockable

NEMA 4X

Splash Proof Cover

P/N:(OP-N4/96x48)

96 mm

(3.78")

48 mm

(1.89")

3.9 mm

(0.15")

typical

Metal Surround Case

(P/N: OP-MTL96X48)

Various bezel

colors are available.

Black is standard.

1934 Kellogg Ave. Carlsbad, CA 92008 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Email: [email protected] [email protected]

Web: www.texmate.com

Page 48

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

DI-50E/TB51 & DI-50E/TB51H Manual (d0041)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DI-50EB51H DI-50TB51H controller PLC features and specifications d0041

## DI-50EB51H & DI-50TB51H

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 51 Segment Bargraph, 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 51-segment Programmable

### Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal

### conditioning and advanced software features for monitoring,

### measurement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red or green 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support

for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

51 segment red or green bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-

channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus, Ethernet, DeviceNet or direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 16 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

time stamp).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications....................... 2 Tiger 320 Series Literature Overview... 3 Tiger 320 Series System Overview... 4-5 Planning to Use the Tiger 320....... 6-8 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 9 Configuration Utility Program......... 10 Custom Macro Program............. 11 Index......................... 12-13

Table of Contents

Controls & Indicators............. 14-15 Front Panel Configuration & Setup..... 16 Front Panel Programming Codes... 17-18 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 19-20 Display Brightness.................. 20 Calibration Modes............... 21-24 Programming Procedures......... 25-41 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 42-47 Registers......................... 48

Functional Diagram................. 49 Connector Pinouts.................. 49 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 50 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 50 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 51-52 I-Series Input Modules........... 53-59 Ordering Information............. 60-62 Custom Faceplates................. 63 Case Dimensions.................. 64

DI-50EB51H&DI-50TB51H (d0041)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FI B101D50 T DS NZ307 UL April 2016 web

## FI-B101D50E & FI-B101D50T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 101 Segment Bargraph, 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 101-segment Programmable

### Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal

### conditioning and advanced software features for monitoring, mea-

### surement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support for seven

segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

101 segment red, green or tricolor bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable

input signal conditioners.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-

channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules

are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus or

direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multi-loop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter or

from any digital input.

Up to 4 independent programmable electromechanical and

solid state relays.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with date/

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initiated

time stamp).

by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is provid-

ed for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display

text

editing. Customize

display

text

for

OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... 1 Specifications..................... 2-3 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 4 Controls & Indicators............... 5-6 Front Panel Configuration & Setup...... 7 Front Panel Programming Codes..... 8-9 Initial Setup Procedures.......... 10-11 Display Brightness.................. 11 Calibration Modes............... 12-15

Table of Contents

Programming Procedures......... 16-34 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 35-41 Registers......................... 42 Functional Diagram................. 43 Connector Pinouts.................. 43 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 44 Relay Options..................... 44 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 45-46 Installation Guidelines............... 47

Index......................... 48-49 Case Dimensions.................. 50

Page 1

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Bargraph Display: 101-segment bargraph.

Bargraph Color: Red (std). Green or Tricolor (optional).

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in a removable 4 to 128M Flash Card Memory Module.

Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Time

(option): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Clock

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

Page 2

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C.

Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 10 samples per second.

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

(See pages 44-46 for pinouts and details of modular construction)

Carrier Board: Provides three different serial outputs or no serial output and supports single or dual analog outputs.

Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

## Outputs continued

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling.

Compliance: 500 maximum for current output.

500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC / 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 3.5W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC / 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 3.5W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 9/64 DIN, 144x36mm (5.69 x 1.42)

Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Certifications and Listings

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

Page 3

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Series Software and Hardware Structure

Page 4

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators 2

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Program Button

While programming, pressing

the P button saves the current programming settings

and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the

buttons.

Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode.

To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press

the P button

button at the same time.

once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and button at the same time.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the alarm status.

Setpoint 1 can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

LED Display

The five, seven segment digital display LEDs are used to display the meter input signal readings and programming codes and settings during programming. The digital display is known as the primary display during programming. The display is available in red LEDs.

Bargraph Display

The bargraph display is a 101 segment red, green, or tri-color bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal. The bargraph display is known as the secondary display during programming.

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

Program Lockout Switch

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch 2 prevents any programming changes being made to the meter. If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LOC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

For Example:

Instead of [SP_1]

Instead of [SP_2]

could be used for TANK LOW

could be used for BRAKE OFF

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run but requires a simple compiler generated macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

Page 5

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch 1 is set to the ON position, the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually occur during calibration procedures.

The three most likely causes of an error message are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the low input

(zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter (19999 to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or incor-

rect connections.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [XX1].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total 1 [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (11) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset channel 1 [X1X].

Reset total 1 and total 2 [X2X].

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

Lock Pin

By configuring Code 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), locks out the main and setpoint programming modes. All meter programming codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 10) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 11) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Six eights and six decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 9):

Reset counter channel 1 and total 2 at power-up [1XX].

Reset counters, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,- total 1, and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total 1 and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 12) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPCX] [X2X].

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Page 6

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

Third

Digit

First

Digit

Second

Digit

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits. These are known as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite. To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps.

The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Operational Display

Symbol

Explanation

The digital display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button. In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram to the right shows the meter in the operational display.

With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main programming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first submenu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The only exception to this rule is when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this indicates that both the buttons can be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

If an X appears in the description of a 3-digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

Page 7

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes: the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See Diagram below). Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

at the same time P and

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

Save Code Settings & Exit

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

Page 8

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Programming Tip

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

time to exit.

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

the operation-

View Modes

While

al display, pressing the button allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel 1.

Channel 3.

Setpoint 1.

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

Peak (of CH1).

Total 1 (total of CH1).

the operation-

While

al display, pressing the button allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Valley (of CH1).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

Pressing both the buttons at the same time while in either the peak, valley, total 1, or total 2 view modes resets the setting to the current displayed signal.

and

Operational Display

Operational Display

Operational Display

Press

Press

To view, press

button: the

View Mode

To view, press

button: the

View Mode

Ch1

Ch3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Ch2

Ch4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

After configuring an on demand the function

Calibration On Demand

Mode, press the P button for

4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101).

Page 9

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

START HERE

MODEL &

SOFTWARE CODE

VERSION CHECK

Example

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Page 10

Code Blanking and Macro Check

320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. We have a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes and/or run a macro, we will program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING

& MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 1

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Display Configuration

Once you have read the user manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 3, with 0 being dull and 3 being bright. The default setting is 2.

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS PROCEDURE

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 3 (bright).

START HERE

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

MODE

Step 1

Enter

Brightness Mode

### Step 2

### Step 3

Example

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

Operational Display

Page 11

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Page 12

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

16 and 17).

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details.

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting [CAL][20X] enters the Serial Communications Properties Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement

(NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module.

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][21X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value.

When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from 1 to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 16 shows how to configure channel 1 (CH1) with an averaging sample rate of 10 counts and an averaging window of 1000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 10000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters.

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels 1 to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 34 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use.

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code 1.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 13 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module.

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 22 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

Page 13

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel 1 (CH1) using the two-point calibration method. Set the calibration mode display to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

From Step 6

Step 9

START HERE

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 6

Page 14

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from 1 to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between 1 and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 10 samples and an averaging window of 1000 counts for Channel 1 by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures.

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

Step 1

Step 2

From Step 6

Step 9

Step 10

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Example

Step 6

Example

Step

Page 15

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

All digital display configuration modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code 1.

All bargraph display configuration modes are configured in Code 10 (See diagram below).

See Code 1 diagram on Page 23 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

See Code 10 diagram on Page 24 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

CODE 1 Digital Display Configuration

CODE 10 Bargraph Display Configuration

### CODE 1 Digital Display Configuration

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code 1. The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note 1 on Code 1 diagram

on Page 20).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 25 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is

Page 16

set in the second digit of Code 1 as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 25 shows how to configure the display to update at 50 samples per second by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 29 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code 1 to [X1X].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code 1:

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The digital display is the primary display. The bargraph display is the secondary display.

To select the data source for the primary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 0 in the 3rd digit [X50].

To select the data source for the secondary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 1 in the 3rd digit [X51].

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows the data from one of a number of meter registers to be selected as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 22 shows how to select the data source for the primary display.

The three digits are set to [X50]. The same example can be used for selecting the data source for the secondary display (bargraph). The three digits are set to [X51].

The 2nd digit in Code 1 can also be used to select the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output 1.

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer 1.

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 12 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 23 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 24 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

CODE 10 Bargraph Display Configuration Set Up Bargraph Colors This mode is where the colors of the bargraph relative to the setpoints are set. Tri-color bargraphs use the following three colors:

Green.

Orange.

Red.

The bargraph colors are not applied to specific setpoints. They are applied to whichever setpoint is configured at the lowest setting, and then to each next highest setpoint in turn.

Only one color is displayed on the bargraph at any time. As the signal changes, the color selected for the most recently activated setpoint displays

Only setpoints with the same source data as the bargraph are displayed.

If all six setpoints are used the colors are set as follows:

Color 1. Color BELOW lowest setpoint.

This is the bargraph color before it

reaches a setpoint.

Color 2. Color ABOVE lowest setpoint

and BELOW the next highest.

Color 3. Color ABOVE the 2nd lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 4. Color ABOVE the 3rd lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 5. Color ABOVE the 4th lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 6. Color ABOVE the 5th lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 7. Color ABOVE the highest set-

point.

Example of

Bargraph Colors

Any one of the colors (green, orange, red, or OFF meaning no color) can be applied to each color setting (See Example:

Bargraph Colors diagram above). Selecting 2 in the 1st digit enters the Set Up Bargraph Colors mode. Selections for the 2nd and 3rd digits are not relevant at this point.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 26 shows how to configure the bargraph colors.

Set Up Bargraph Scaling This mode is where the span range of the bargraph is scaled.

The span range of the bargraph can be set between 19999 to

99999 counts. There are three methods of scaling the bargraph:

Linear.

Via Linearization Table 1.

Logarithmic.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit enters the Set Up Bargraph Scaling mode.

Linear Bargraph Scaling

The most common method of scaling the bargraph is through the Linear Bargraph Scaling sub-menu. In this menu the bar low, bar high, and bar nominal settings are set.

Bar Low [bAr_L] is the setting in counts required at the bottom of the bargraph.

Bar High [bAr_h] is the setting in counts required at the top of

the bargraph.

Bar Nominal sets the point on the bargraph at which the bar begins to light up. This can be any position between and including the bar low and bar high settings.

If bar nominal is set to the bar low setting, the bargraph behaves like a typical bargraph making the segments light up from the bottom of the bar and grow towards the top.

If bar nominal is set to the bar high setting, this makes all segments from the displayed signal to the top of the bar light up. As the signal increases, the number of lit segments between the signal and the bar high setting becomes steadily less. When the signal reaches the bar high setting no segments are lit.

Bargraph Nominal Set Low or High

Setting bar nominal to the midpoint between bar low and bar high makes the bargraph behave like a typical center zero bargraph. This means the bargraph lights up at the center of the bar and moves either up or down the bar depending on the displayed signal.

For example, if the meter's full scale range is 20,000 counts, the midpoint is 10,000 counts. If a signal of 10,000 counts is applied, only one segment at the 10,000 count mark lights up. If a signal of 17,000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (10,000 counts) and the 17,000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 5000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (10,000 counts) and the 5000 count mark light up.

Typical Center Zero Bargraph

An added feature of this bargraph is that it can also be non-symmetrical. This means that the bar nominal setting does not need to be set at the mid-point between bar low and bar high. For example, if the bargraph is configured to display 200 to 800 C, bar low is set to 200 counts and bar high is set to

800 counts. Bar nominal is set to 0 counts. If a signal of 50 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 down to 50. If a signal of 600 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 up to 600.

Page 17

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 27 shows how to scale the bargraph using linear scaling.

Non-symmetrical Zero

Bargraph

Bargraph Scaling using Linearization Table 1 When set in this mode, the register selected to be displayed on the bargraph display (Code 1 set to [XX1]) is first processed through a 32-point flexible linearization table (Table 1) before being displayed.

This can be used, for example, if channel 1 is the required digital display while the bargraph display is the square root of channel 1.

See Linearization Supplement (NZ207) for full details to set up linearization Table 1.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit and 1 in the 3rd digit selects Bargraph scaling via Linearization Table 1.

Example Procedure. To scale the bargraph using Linearization Table 1, follow the Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure on Page 27. Ensure the secondary (bargraph) display has been set up in Code 1 and Linearization Table 1 has been formatted and selected for the required application.

Logarithmic Bargraph Scaling

Logarithmic scales are used in a wide variety of measurements.

Probably the most well known logarithmic scale is the Richter scale for measuring earthquakes. Other log scales used include sound level (dB), radio frequency signals, power levels (dBm), and numerous radiation signals.

In all logarithmic scales a reference level is required that is the level at 0 dB. For example, in an RF measurement 0 dBm is at a reference of 1 mW.

The scale is calculated from:

10 log10

counts (input)

reference

If the meter is scaled so that:

1 mW = 100 counts and 1 W = 100,000 counts Then the reference for 0 dBm would be set to 100 counts:

(input)

100

10 log10

Decade

(Counts)

100

1000

10,000

100,000

1,000,000

= 0 dBm

dBm

20

10

Now every 10 dBm represents a decade, the bargraph can be scaled to a different amount of bars per decade (as set in the 3rd digit).

Page 18

Example of Bars per Decade

Reference. This is the number of counts displayed for a 0 dB reference. Range: 1 to 99999 counts.

Bar Nominal. See Bar Nominal description under heading:

Linear Bargraph Scaling.

Selecting 3 in the 1st digit and 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the 3rd digit enters the Set Up Scaling for Logarithmic Bargraph sub-menu:

Selecting 3 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 10 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 4 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 20 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 5 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 25 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 6 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 33 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 7 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 50 Bar/Decade.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 28 shows how to scale the bargraph using example logarithmic settings.

Bargraph Display Format

After the bargraph colors have been set and the bargraph scaled, the display format can be set. This is normally the final setting. The 2nd digit selects the format of the bargraph display.

There are four display format settings available:

Setpoints on Bar. Selecting [X0X] means that the setpoints are displayed on the bar as lit segments in the current display color.

When the display color changes, the setpoint segments change to that color. When the bargraph lights up on or beyond a setpoint, the setpoint segment goes out.

Example of Setpoints on Bargraph

Peak and Valley on Bar. Selecting [X1X] means that peak and valley are displayed as lit segments and are updated as they change. The setpoints are not displayed.

Min/Max with Setpoints. Selecting [X4X] means that the segments of the bar remain lit over the minimum and maximum signal variations. The setpoints are displayed as lit segments.

This is a useful mode for seeing process varia-

tions at a glance.

Note:

When moving from another display format to the Min/Max with Setpoints mode, the peak and valley settings must be set to the current settings by entering the Peak View mode or Valley View mode and pressing the UP and DOWN buttons at the same time.

Example:

Peak and

Valley on

Bargraph

When moving from Min/Max with Setpoints mode to another display format, the bar nominal [bAr_n] setting must be reset to its original settings in Code 10 [3XX].

Bar Only. Selecting [X7X] means that only the bargraph display signal is displayed on the bar.

Setpoints and peak and valley are not displayed.

Example: MIN and MAX on Bargraph

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 19

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 20

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code 1 to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

Step 2

From Step 5

Step 7

Programming Tip

Step 8

Example

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 9

Page 21

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the third digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel 1 with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits

4 and 5 by setting Code 1 to [X61] to enter the Display Format Mode.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

From Step 5

Step 6

Example

Step 7

Step 8

Step 9

Step 5

Page 22

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure Channel 1 with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code 1 to [X71] to enter the Select Last Digit Text Character Mode. See diagram opposite.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

From Step 6

Step 7

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 8

Step 9

Step

Example

Page 23

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure

## Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code 1 to [1XX].

Example Procedure:

UPDATE AT SAMPLE RATE PROCEDURE Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 [2XX] by setting Code 1 to [X2X].

START HERE

Step 1

Step 2

START HERE

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 3

Step 4

X X

Step 5

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint

Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code 1 could be set to [12X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 24

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Bargraph Colors Procedure

START HERE

CONFIGURE

BARGRAPH

COLORS

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

From Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

Step 9

Step 10

Step 6

Step

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure

START HERE

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Page 26

From Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

Step 9

Step 10

Step 11

Step

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Scale Bargraph using Logarithmic Scaling Procedure

From Step 6

Step 7

START HERE

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step

Step 8

Step 9

Step 10

Page 27

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel 1

(CH1) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH1 for a voltage input with 10 samples/second (60 Hz rejection) sampling rate and output rate of 0.1 seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 3

Example

Page 28

Step 5

Step

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH1 signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel

1 (CH1) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (1st digit only).

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

From Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printed Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Page 29

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the 1st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Page 30

From Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

CH3 FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step

Step 4

From Step 4

Step 5

Page 31

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 as direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH4

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step

Step 4

Page 32

From Step 4

Step 5

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel 1 and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the 1st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH1 and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

START HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Step 2

Step 3

Step

Step 4

From Step 4

Step 5

Page 33

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal emulation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 34

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 41 and 42.

To enter press P and buttons at the same time Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values

Enter these menus to set setpoint

(SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default Setting = 18000

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2 Default Setting = 18000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3 Default Setting = 5000

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4 Default Setting = 5000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5 Default Setting = 10000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6 Default Setting = 10000

Setpoint & Relay Control Function Settings

Enter these menus to configure SP control values

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram

Page 35

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

SP-B

SP-A

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

Page 36

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP1 and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID1 stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 51.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, programma-

ble offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 10 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 510 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between 1 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 1000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 1035 counts.

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and off time settings.

Repeat ON Mode

SP ON

Deviation

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Hytseresis

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayon-make (DOM) and delay-on-break (DOB) settings.

Normal Mode

SP ON

### SP OFF

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

### Adj.

### DOM

### Adj.

### DOB

### SP OFF

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

Adj.

ON-T

Adj.

OFF-T

Adj.

ON-T

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time) Pulse ON Mode (Prog. Max ON-time) Single actuation, programmable DOM and on time settings.

SP ON

### SP OFF

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

### Adj.

### MAX

### ON-T

### Adj.

### DOM

1-Shot ON mode (Programmable Minimum ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and minimum on time settings.

1-Shot ON Mode (Prog. Min. ON-time) SP ON

### SP OFF

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

### Adj.

### DOM

### Adj.

### MIN ON-T

Page 37

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

1-Shot OFF mode (Programmable Minimum OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable minimum off time and DOB settings.

1-Shot OFF Mode (Prog. Min. OFF-time) SP ON

SP OFF

RLY ON

RLY OFF

Adj.

DOB

Adj.

MIN OFF-T

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time) Pulse OFF Mode (Prog. MAX OFF-time) Single actuation, programmable off time and DOB.

SP ON

SP OFF

RLY ON

RLY OFF

Adj.

DOB

Adj.

MAX

OFF-T

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level 1 functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP1 and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and on time settings.

### Repeat OFF Mode

### SP ON

Level 3 uses all Level 1 and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

SP OFF

RLY ON

RLY OFF

Adj.

OFF-T

Adj.

ON-T

Adj.

OFF-T

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Page 38

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

### Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint

1 (SP1) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions:

SP1 to activate from Channel 1 (CH1).

LEVEL 1 SETPOINT CONFIGURATION

Relay to energize above or below SP1 value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3).

START HERE

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

From Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

Step 9

Step 5

Step 10

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP1 to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram on Page 41.

Page 39

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 42 shows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 40

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

PXX

Programming Tip

Page 41

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,144 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system.

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 20 & 22)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 41)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 42)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 42)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is s hown.

No register number is shown for the first 11 functions, because these 11 functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers 1 to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from 1 to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical 1 to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable

1 to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Page 42

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers. In the example shown below, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 12 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed. Totalizer 1 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 12, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

### Functional Diagram

AC Neutral, DC AC Line, + DC AC/DC Power Input

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 See the I-Series Input Signal Modules Guide (Z87) for connection details of all input modules. On most single input signal conditioners, usually Pin 1 is the signal high pin (Hi +) and Pin

3 is the signal low pin (Lo ).

Function Pins Pins 17 to 21 Pin 17 Program Lock. By connecting the PROGRAM LOCK pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11 on the main PCB), the PROGRAM LOCK pin allows the meter's programmed parameters to be viewed but not changed.

Pin 18 Hold Reading. By connecting the HOLD READING pin to the COMMON pin (pin 11), the HOLD READING pin allows the meter's display to be frozen. However, A/D conversions continue

and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 11 the updated reading is instantly displayed.

Pin 19 Display Test and Reset. The DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin provides a test of the meter's display and resets the microprocessor when the DISPLAY TEST and RESET pin is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 11).

Pin 20 Common. To activate the HOLD, TEST and RESET, or LOCKOUT pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin.

Pin 21 Capture. Connecting the CAPTURE pin (pin 21) to the COMMON pin (pin 11), allows a selected relay to be activated.

Chassis Ground Tab. Only on versions with metal sheath casing.

Page 43

### Carrier Board Output Pins

Analog Output

Pins 25 to 27 Analog Output Pins. The analog output pins are:

Pin 25 Positive (+) analog output 1.

Pin 26 Negative () analog output 1 and 2.

Pin 27 Positive (+) analog output 2.

SSR Output

Pins 28 to 31 SSR Output Pins.

Pin 28 Normally open 6 (SP6) 210 mA, 300 VDC SSR.

Pin 29 Common 6 (SP6).

Pin 30 Normally open 5 (SP5) 210 mA, 300 VDC SSR.

Pin 31 Common 5 (SP5).

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485 Pins 32 37 Serial Comm. Pinouts for RS-232 & RS-485.

### Relay Options

The meter has relay options on the main / processor board.

The main / processor board supports up to four electromechanical relays. Combined they provide 16 options ranging from a single 4 A Form A relay up to a maximum of two 4 A Form A and two 9 A Form C.

### Electromechanical Relays

The main / processor board supports relay combination options using up to four electromechanical relays.

A maximum of two 4 A Form A and two 9 A Form C relays. Relay outputs for one to four setpoints can be ordered for factory installation on the main board in any required combination of up to two 9A form C and two 4A form A relays.

Main / Processor Board

Page 44

### Component Layout and External Devices

Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 51 or 101-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

Tiger 320 Series Modular Construction

Output

Carrier

Board

Display Driver

Board

Digital

Display

AC / DC

Power Pins

14, 15

Standard Serial

Output Module

(RS-232 or RS-485)

Analog

Output

Module

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins 1-6

Input Signal

Conditioner

Main/Processor

Board

Bargraph

Display

Display

Board

Exploded View of Meter Modular Boards

Page 45

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Input Signal

Conditioner

PCB

Analog output Selection

Pin 1

Pin 2

Pin 14

Pin 13

Display Board

Display Driver

Board

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485

Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

10 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-10V) or Dual (0-10V & 0-10V)

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 46

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 47

### Index

Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 12-13 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 12 Dual (0-10V) Analog Output............................................ 12 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 45 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 46 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 12-13 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 12 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 12 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 11 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 13 Set Parameters for CH1, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 12

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware............................ 4 Brightness Display.............................................................. 11

Calibration........................................................................... 12-15

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 12 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 14 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 14 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 14 Case Dimensions................................................................ 50 Modular Construction...................................................... 45 Channel 1 Settings.............................................................. 28-29

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 29 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 28 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 28 Measurement Task.......................................................... 28 Post Processing.............................................................. 29 Print Mode....................................................................... 29 Sampling Rate................................................................. 28 Serial Mode..................................................................... 29 Smart Input Module......................................................... 28 Channel 2 Settings.............................................................. 30 Channel 3 Settings.............................................................. 31 Channel 4 Settings.............................................................. 32 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 33 Maths Functions.............................................................. 33 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 16-27 Configure Bargraph Colors Procedure............................ 25 Configure Bargraph Using Linear Scaling Procedure..... 26 Configure Bargraph Using Logarithmic Scaling.............. 27 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 21 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 22 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 23 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 24 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 24 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 16 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 16 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 16 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 16 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 16 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 16 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 16 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 28

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 29

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 30 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 31 Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 32 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 33

Page 48

Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 34 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 34 Code 10 - Bargraph Display Configuration...................... 17-18 Code Blanking..................................................................... 10-11 Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 28, 31, 32 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 28, 31, 32 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 34 Time Stamp..................................................................... 34

Component Layout & External Devices Modular Construction...................................................... 45 Component Layout.......................................................... 46 Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 44 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 43 External Devices............................................................. 46 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 43 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 5-6 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 5 Down Button.................................................................... 5 Error Message................................................................. 6 LED Display..................................................................... 5 Program Button............................................................... 5 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 6 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 5 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 6 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 5 Up Button........................................................................ 5 Data Logging

Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 34 Printing Logged Data...................................................... 34 Real-time Clock............................................................... 34 Digital Input Pins................................................................ 34 Display Brightness Setting................................................ 11 Display Functions............................................................... 16-27 Bargraph Colors.............................................................. 17 Bargraph Display............................................................. 18 Data Source.................................................................... 21 Display Format and Decimals......................................... 22 Display Rounding............................................................ 22 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 23 Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 24 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 24 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 5-6 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 8-9 Main Programming Mode................................................ 8 On Demand Modes......................................................... 9 Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 8 View Modes..................................................................... 9

Functional Diagram............................................................. 43 General Features................................................................. 1 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 35-89, 01 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 10-11 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 10-11 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 10 Input Signal Conditioning Modules Modular Position.............................................................. 45

### Index

Linearization

Channel 1 Temperature Sensors.................................... 28 Channel 1 User Loaded Tables....................................... 29 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 30

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 31

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 32 Result of CH1 & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 33

Table Settings.................................................................. 13, 33

Macros

Macro Check................................................................... 10-11 Manual Loader..................................................................... 16 Math Function

Cross Channel Math....................................................... 4, 33 Result Processing........................................................... 33 Modbus................................................................................ 13

Model Type Check............................................................... 10 On Demand Functions........................................................ 12

Panel Cutout........................................................................ 50 PID Control Settings........................................................... 36 40 Power Supply...................................................................... 43 Prescaling

Channel 1........................................................................ 28 Channel 2........................................................................ 30 Print Mode............................................................................ 29

Programming Codes........................................................... 8-9 Programming Conventions................................................ 7 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 42 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 42 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 42 Relay Options...................................................................... 44 Serial Communication

Configuration................................................................... 29

Pinouts............................................................................ 44

Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 35-41 Data Logging................................................................... 36 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 36 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 36 Display Flashing.............................................................. 36 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 36-38, 40

Level 1 - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 39 PID Control Settings....................................................... 36, 40

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 36 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 37-38 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 36

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 35, 40 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 36 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 35 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 36 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 36, 41 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 36 Timer Modes................................................................... 36, 41

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 28

Table of Contents................................................................ 1 Timers.................................................................................. 36

Configuration................................................................... 28, 31, 32

Delay Settings................................................................. 41 Modes............................................................................. 37-38

Totalizers

Setting............................................................................. 12-13

Page 49

### Case Dimensions

FRONT VIEW

9/64 DIN

36x144 mm

Panel Adaptor to fit existing 6" Edgewise Pointer Meter Cut-Outs P/N.(OP-PA/144x36)

SIDE VIEW

To open rear cover, use a small flat blade screw driver.

Press down lightly

to release catch and lever outwards.

Two bezel Trim

Strips are supplied with each Panel Adaptor

The adaptor snaps on the 36x144 mm

(1.42"x5.69") case and

enables single unit or stack mounting in an existing 6" edgewise

pointer meter cut-out.

When extra panel

mounting tightness is

required, order the optional

screw mount

clip.

Various

bezel colors

are available.

Black is

standard.

Metal Surround Case:

These dimensions are increased

by 2 mm (0.08") when the

metal surround case

is installed.

Clear Lockable NEMA-4X

Splash Proof Lens Cover P/N.(OP-N4/144X36 )

Metal Surround Case

P/N.(OP-MTL144X36)

is pre-installed at the factory and cannot

be removed without damage to the case.

TOP VIEW

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 50

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FI-B101D50 Features and Specs

## FI-B101D50E & FI-B101D50T

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 101 Segment Bargraph, 5 Digit 0.31 LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 101-segment Programmable

### Meter Controller (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal

### conditioning and advanced software features for monitoring, mea--

### surement, control and communication applications.

General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program (which can be downloaded FREE from the Texmate website) and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the Texmate website). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red 7-segment, 0.31 high LEDs with full support for seven

segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

101 segment red, green or tricolor bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 120 interchangeable

input signal conditioners.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-

channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules

are provided with 5V, 10V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initiated

by the front panel program button.

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is provid-

ed for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display

text

editing. Customize

display

text

for

OEM applications.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus or

direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 10V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multi-loop feedback and PID output. Scalable from 1 count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter or

from any digital input.

Up to 4 independent programmable electromechanical and

solid state relays.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 15 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging with SD Card with date/time stamp.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 120 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

### Specifications

### Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, 0.31 (8 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red

Digital Display Range: -19999 to 99999

Update Rate: 3 to 10 times per second

Bargraph Display: 101-segment bargraph.

Bargraph Color: Red (std). Green or Tricolor (optional).

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable

Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative

Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

## Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (18.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: 1.25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and 1MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 6144 registers comprised of 8, 16 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS

## Development System for Custom

## Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from our website, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application.

## Installed Application Software

## Includes

Counter Functions: Two built-in counters. UP counters, DOWN counters, UP/DOWN counters and high speed quadrature counters.

Data Logging: Logging with a date/time stamp, initiated at timed intervals, by activation of a setpoint, or manually. Data stored in internal 1MB EEPROM or in.eludoM yromeM draC hsalF M821 ot 4 elbavomer a Endless loop recording is supported.

Input Compensation: Provides compensation to the primary input channel (CH1) via channels 2, 3 or 4.

Linearization: 4 selectable 32 point or one 125 point flexible linearization tables are provided.

Logic I/O: 28 Macro programmable I/O ports supported.

Manual Loader: Front panel adjustable, 4 to 20mA or

0 to 10V isolated analog output.

Math Functions: Cross channel math functions to calculate the sum, difference, ratio or the product of two inputs.

On Demand Functions: Tare, compensation and calibration.

Peak and Valley: The meter can retain peak and valley (min/max) information and recall this on the front panel.

Remote Setpoint Input: Remote setpoint input via channel 2.

Serial Output Protocols: Selectable communication modes include ASCII, Modbus (RTU), Master Mode (for meter to meter communication) and an Epson compatible printer driver.

Setpoint Functions: Six super smart setpoints with fully configurable hysteresis, on and off delays, one shot, pulse and repeat timers, latching, dual PID, setpoint tracking, resetting of registers, initiating of logging and printing.

Signal Conditioning Functions: Averaging, smart filter, rounding, square root,auto zero maintenance.

Timer: Timer functions supported in either time-up, time-down, or real-time clock modes.

Totalizer: Two totalizers for running total and batch totals of a process signal that can be accumulated over time.

Time

(opti on): Real

Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 15 yr Lithium battery backup.

Cloc k

Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from our website. T Version also supports custom macros.

## Outputs continued

Accuracy: 0.02%

FS. Resolution: 16-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides.gnilacs egatlov no V052,gnilacs tnerruc no A4.0 Compliance: 500.tuptuo tnerruc rof mumixam 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate:

Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From 1 count to full scale.

Power Supplies

Auto sensing AC/DC (DC to 400Hz) hi volts std, low volts optional.

PS1 (standard): 95-300VDC / 85-265VAC, 50-400Hz, 3.5W nominal.

PS2 (optional): 10-72VDC / 14-48VAC, 50-400Hz, 3.5W nominal.

Environmental (See Rear page for IP-65 & NEMA-4 options)

Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 C (32 F to 122 F).

Storage Temperature: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F).

Relative Humidity: 95% (non-condensing) at 40 C (104 F).

Mechanical (See Rear page for more details)

Case Dimensions: 9/64 DIN, 144x36mm (5.69 x 1.42)

Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: 11.5 oz (0.79 lbs), 14 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

CE: As per EN-61000-3/4/6 and EN-61010-1.

UL: E469078

### Specifications continued

### Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 120 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals.

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.0001% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from 1sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts 1 count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 17 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 16 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient:.C /mpp03 yllacipyT Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of 1ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 10 minutes, depending on input module.

.dnoces rep selpmas 01 yllacipyT Conversion Rate:

However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 100msec or 10msec. Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within 1.2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 10V or 24VDC is provided.

## Outputs

Carrier Board: Provides three different serial outputs or no serial output and supports single or dual analog outputs.

Standard Carrier Board: Is available without a serial output, or with either an isolated RS-232 or an isolated RS-485 (RJ-6 socket).

Two Isolated Analog Output Options: Mounted on any

carrier board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output:

Fully scalable from 4 to

20mA or 0 to 20mA (or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 10VDC (or reverse).

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### GI-50EB101 manual NZ309np

## GI-50EB101 & GI-50TB101

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 101 Segment Bargraph

## 5 Digit 1 LEDs

## in a 9/32 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 101-segment Programmable Meter Controller

### (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

### General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, high LEDs with

full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

0 segment red, green or tricolor bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 20 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-

channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 0V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus or

direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 6-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 0V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 6 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 5 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with

date/time stamp).

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 20 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... Specifications....................... 2 Tiger 320 Series Literature Overview... 3 Tiger 320 Series System Overview... 4-5 Planning to Use the Tiger 320....... 6-8 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 9 Configuration Utility Program......... 0 Custom Macro Program............. Index......................... 2-3

### Table of Contents

... 9-20 Display Brightness.................. 20 Calibration Modes............... 2-24 Programming Procedures......... 25-44 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 45-5 Registers......................... 52

Functional Diagram................. 53 Connector Pinouts.................. 53 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 54 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 54 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 55-56 I-Series Input Modules........... 57-63 Ordering Information............. 64-66 Custom Faceplates................. 67 Case Dimensions.................. 68

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page

Specifications

Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, (25.4 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -9999 to 99999 Update Rate: 3 to 0 times per second Bargraph Display: 0-segment bargraph.

Bargraph Color: Red (std). Green or Tricolor (optional).

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (8.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: .25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 644 registers comprised of 8, 6 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS Real Time Clock (option): Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 5 yr Lithium battery backup.

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from the web. T Version also supports custom macros.

Development System for Custom Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from the web, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application (see page ).

Installed Application Software Includes

Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 20 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals (see page 57).

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.000% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 7 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 6 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C. Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 0 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 0 samples per second. However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 00msec or 0msec.

Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within .2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 0V or 24VDC is provided.

board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA

(or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 0VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 0VDC (or reverse).

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS.

Resolution: 6-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling. Compliance: 500 maximum for current output. 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate: Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 0A Form C Relays* and two 5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 5A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 0A 240VAC~/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC.

Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (20mA DC only) or (40mA AC/DC) SSRs (400V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5V

or 0 to V+ (40VDC max).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 6 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 6 MB memory.

Power Supplies

Case Dimensions: 9/32 DIN, 44x72mm (5.69 x 2.84) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: .5 oz (0.79 lbs), 4 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-6000-3/4/6 and EN-600-.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Tiger 320 Series Modular Literature Overview

8The Tiger 320 Series, Modular Literature system, makes it easy to select detailed information about those specific functions required for your application and the Configuration of the Tiger 320 you intend using.

Copies of all Data Sheets / User Manuals and Supplements can be viewed page-bypage and/or downloaded from the document server on our website.

Programming Code Sheet

Generic to all Tiger 320 Series models, the Programming Code Sheet is a quick reference document that allows you to quickly view the meters manual programming codes.

Shipped with each product ordered, copies are also available on request, or can be viewed and downloaded from the document server on our website.

Model Specific Data Sheet / User Manual

Specific to each 320 Series meter model, the data sheet / user manual describes the basic functions of the meter and how to configure the meter for these functions.

Shipped with each product ordered, copies are also available on request, or can be viewed and downloaded from the document server on our website.

The model specific data sheet / user manual contains:

Technical Specifications

Front Panel Button Manual

Overview of Tiger 320 Series

Programming Codes Overview

Software and Hardware

Programming Procedures

Planning Guide

Functional Diagram and

Block Diagram of the Tiger

320 Software and Hardware

Configuration Utility Program

Custom Macro Programming

Front and Rear Panel

Controls

Pinouts

Hardware Layout and Available

Input and Output Modules

Meter Options, and Custom

Faceplates

Ordering Information

Supplements to Data Sheet / User Manual are Generic to all Tiger 320 Models

Generic to all Tiger 320 Series models, each supplement provides in-depth technical and procedural information on all individual meter modules, functions, or applications.

Listed are the supplements which are currently available:

Specific supplements are

shipped with each product ordered to suit our customers application. Copies are also available on request, or can be viewed and downloaded from the document server on our website.

4Advanced Calibration and On DEMAND Mode

4Analog Output Modules

4BASIC to Tiger 320 MACRO-Language

Program Development System, Compiler and Tutorial

4Configuration Utility Program (Runs on PC)

4Linearizing Functions

4Meter Registers (for Macro Programming)

4Serial Communications Output Modules

4Setpoints & Relays

4Totalizing & Batching Functions

Tiger 320

Functional Overview

Tiger 320

Application Examples

I-Series Input Signal

Conditioning Modules

Smart Module

Data Sheets

Other Tiger 320 Series Related Literature

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### An Overview of the Awesome Power of the Tiger 320 Series

### The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers incorporates, in one instrument, all the

### different functions required by todays automation and process control applications.

### Tiger 320 32-Bit Operating System

A virtual toolbox of selectable and programmable application software functions are embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. They integrate seamlessly with a truly vast array of modular input and output hardware options.

Embedded Application Software Includes:

Multi-channel Inputs In Many Combinations

Full Floating-point Maths

Cross Channel Math (A+B, A-B, AxB, A/B)

Square Root, Inverse and Log of Input

4 x 32 Point Or 1 x 125 Point Linearization Table

Smart Auto Zero with Programmable Capture Band, Rate

of Change and Aperture Window for Weighing Applications

Set Tare Reset Tare for Batching

Smart Quick Response Averaging

Smart Timer and Time Integration Functions

Time and Event-based Sequencing

Polynomial Calculations

Remote Reset of Any Function

Dual Totalizers

Dual PID

Data Logging and Memory Options Up to 1MB of non-volatile on-board memory can be installed for (Black Box) endless loop recording. Up to 4000 data records can be continuously stored to provide before and after analysis of any process fault condition.

Data log from 4 channels.

Data log from 2 channels with date & time stamp.

Log / print from setpoint

A Plug-in I/O Module is available with removable Flash Card Memory for high-capacity or long-term data logging.

Flash Cards are available from 4 to 28 Meg.

or timer.

### Real-time Clock

Optional Real-time clock

with date and time stamp.

15 year lithium battery.

Powerful Custom Macro Programming Capability Texmates BASIC to Tiger 320 Macro-language Compiler can quickly Convert your special metering, control and automation ideas into reality.

This powerful easy to use development system enables programs to be written in BASIC utilizing any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. When your BASIC program is compiled into the Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized. There are also numerous offthe-shelf application specific programs available. Many only need the blanks to be filled in to use them and this does not require any knowledge of BASIC.

Scrolling annunciator messages can be programmed to appear with any setpoint activation, selected events or logic inputs.

### Programmable Front Panel Controls

Programmable Front Panel Controls

The front panel buttons can be used to control or program any standard functions.

They can also be programmed to only access and display specifically designated functions, such as Tare, Auto-Cal or Print on Demand.

### Configuration & Programming from a PC

PC Programming

Program the meter from a PC with Texmates easy to use Tiger 320 Configuration Utility Program.

### A Wide Selection of Display Formats & 8 Case Sizes to Suit any Application

144x72mm 9/32 DIN

Single or multiple LED or LCD displays Numeric, Alpha Numeric and Bargraph

96x48mm1/8 DIN

36x144mm

9/64 DIN

648x144mm 4LED

Remote Display

5 or 6 digit Driven by RS485

from any Tiger 320

Page 4 Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

9 May, 0/

GI-50B0 320 Series (NZ309) GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### 22 Opto-Isolated I/Os on Plug-in Module & 6 Onboard Programmable I/O Logic Ports

6 Inputs & 16 Outputs or 6 Inputs & 6 Outputs

Fully Programmable

Connects to DIN Rail terminal block module with 3M IDC cable

Three logic level inputs are provided on the module input header and three rear input pins are provided that can be programmed to STOP/START/RESET almost any function including: set tare, reset tare, relays, totalizers, print output, data logging, peak, valley, or any register from an external contact closure.

### 6 Super Smart Setpoints - 8 Selectable Functions - 7 Programmable Timer Modes

Serial module

Analog Output module

Output Module Carrier Board

### 5 A

### 10 A

### Scrolling Annunciator

Scrolling Annunciator up to 99 Characters long is available on all 6 setpoints for Alphanumeric Displays with Fill-in-theblanks Macro.

DUAL PID

Dual PID

Activation

Relay Latching

### Serial Communications & Printer Output

### 16-bit Isolated Analog Outputs

Single

Dual

RS-232

Serial Printer Output

Smart printer driver makes simple serial printers look intelligent.

0 ~ 4-20mA or 0-10V Programmable 0~4 to 20 mA or 0 to 0 V for retransmission, 4-20 mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multi-loop feedback and PID output.

0-10V & 0-10V

Auto-sensing AC/DC Power Supply

High Efficiency CE tested Auto Sensing AC/DC power supplies

Standard 85-265 Volt AC / 95-370 Volt DC

Low Voltage 9-32 Volt AC / 0-60 Volt DC

RS-485

Selectable Communication

Modes include:

ASCII

Modbus

Ethernet (TCP/IP)

DeviceNet (with optional carrier board installed)

Interface directly with PCs (using Windows terminal program), PLCs, or any Epson compatible serial printer.

Meter to Meter Communication.

Direct meter to meter communication enables two meters to share data and resources.

### Over 120 Different Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Choose from over 20 different single, dual,

triple and quad input signal conditioners.

Over 120 Single-Input, Dual-Input, Triple Input and Quad-Input signal conditioners work with the Tiger 320 series

Mixed function and smart modules with their own A/Ds, co-processors, SSRs and I2C Bus outputs are available to suit almost any application.

006 GI-50B0 320 Series (NZ309) GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5 Page 5

### Planning to Harness the Power of Tiger 320 Programmable Meter Controllers

A combination of modular hardware and software resources enable Tiger 320 Series Programmable Meter Controllers

(PMCs) to be easily configured as a cost effective solution for the most simple or the most complex of applications.

A review of your Projects objectives, its physical layout, the proposed sensors and control outputs will enable you to select the optimum configuration of the Tiger 320 PMCs unique hardware and software capabilities.

Input Signals & Sensors 4-20 mA or Sensor Direct Unless sensors are located at a far distance, the greatest accuracy and best performance is usually obtained by connecting sensors directly to the Tiger 320, which will then function as the primary measurement device.

There are more than 20 Tiger compatible input signal conditioning modules, with the appropriate excitation outputs, to suit almost any type of sensor or combinations of up to 4 sensors.

In most cases, sensors with a 4-20 mA output are more costly, and when a separate 4-20 mA transmitter is used, signal conversion, drift, and calibration inaccuracies are introduced.

Some Tiger input modules combine direct sensor inputs with 4-20 mA inputs, enabling both local and far distant sensor inputs to be combined.

Sensor Linearization or Compensation The performance of many sensors can be greatly enhanced or expanded with linearization and or compensation.

Sensors may be compensated for temperature, frequency, altitude, humidity and mechanical position, to name just a few parameters.

Tiger PMCs with 32 kilobits or more of memory provide up to four 32-point user defined linearization tables or one combined 25-point table.

Many compensation methods can be implemented with the standard cross channel math capabilities of the Tigers 32-bit operating system. Complex three-dimensional compensation can also be implemented using the

powerful macro programming capability.

The serial number and calibration date of a sensor can be loaded into the meter. The serial number, linearization tables, and compensation factors of a newly calibrated sensor can then be saved for future reloading, either serially through a PC or directly through the web via an Ethernet port.

Although there are numerous input modules with combinations of various input signals, some inputs such as watts or pH are provided on input modules dedicated to a single function. Combining these inputs with each other signals two or more Tiger meters can serially communicate, and be configured to share their data and processing resources.

Display Options

Tiger PMCs have a large range of display options, including digital and alphanumeric LCDs, LEDs and Touch Panel HMIs.

LED or LCD Displays LED displays are a lower cost and popular display option.

They operate over the largest temperature range, have better viewing angles and viewing distances, and have the longest operational life. However, red LEDs are difficult to read in direct sunlight without a shade hood and consume more power. Green LEDs and backlit LCD displays can be more easily read in direct sunlight.

The Tiger range can be ordered with red or green LEDs. LCD displays are also available, with or without backlighting.

Numeric or Alphanumeric Displays Generally, numeric displays are a lower cost option than alphanumeric displays. The Tiger range supports a full 7segment numeric and 4-segment alphanumeric alphabet of English letters and Arabic numerals. Where complex text messaging or alarm annunciation is required, we recommend using the 4-segment alphanumeric option.

Single or Multiple Display The Tiger meter has four input channels and can be configured to display many different inputs or results. These can be viewed constantly on the operational display, or on demand in one of the view modes by pressing a button. Some applications require multiple values to be displayed simultaneously. With single, dual, or triple displays, and single displays with 5 or 0-segment bargraph combinations, we have a large range of display options to choose from.

Tiger meters can communicate with each other to share their data and processing resources and be stack or twin mounted to provide a wider range of display options.

Stack mounting

for greater display

options

Twin or triple mounting for greater display options

Push Button or Membrane Touch Pads Tiger PMCs are shipped as standard with high usage hard plastic push buttons. An optional clear lens cover that opens on a cam hinge with a key lock can provide full NEMA 4 or IP65 dust and water proofing. Alternatively, an optional membrane touch pad faceplate can be ordered.

PLANNING

TIP

Faceplates can be

customized to suit any OEM application, and

be quickly produced in large or small quantities for push buttons or membrane touch pads.

## Control Outputs & I/O Logic

Electromechanical Relays or Solid State Control Outputs

Tiger PMCs have a wide selection of control outputs to chose from. The decision on which control output to

choose depends on the current and the switching frequency.

Electromechanical relays are a popular choice for most control outputs. Tiger output modules are available with combinations of two 0 amp form C and two to six 5 amp form A relays that can be used to directly drive fractional HP motors or actua-

tors.

The limitation of electromechanical relays is switching speed. If a relay needs to operate in less than 30 mS, or be cycled faster than.5 cpm, it is advisable to select an output module with solid state relays (SSR) or open collector outputs (OC), that can drive external high current SSRs.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Planning to Harness the Power of Tiger 320 Programmable Meter Controllers continued

PID or On/Off Control Depending on the process to be controlled, either PID or on/ off control should be selected. If the process variables are reasonably consistent, then the on/off control is generally more than adequate and easier to implement. Super smart setpoint control software supports many selectable functions, such as Hi or Lo activation, Latching, Hysteresis, Tracking, Register Resetting and 7 Multi-function internal Timers on all setpoints.

Control systems with large lag and lead times are not suitable for on/off control and tend to overshoot and undershoot.

PLANNING

PID is needed to stabilize and control these systems. One TIP of the many powerful setpoint functions provided by the Tiger 320 Operating System is single or dual PID.

Retransmission 0-10V or 4-20mA Tiger PMCs can have an optional single (0-0 V or 0/4-20 mA) or dual (0-0 V) analog output module installed. The isolated 6-bit output is fully scalable and highly accurate.

With a compliance of up to 500 at 20mA, the 4-20 mA output can be used over very long distances and still drive more than one output device, such as a PID controlled valve positioner.

The analog outputs can be reversed to output 20mA to 4/0 or 0 to 0VDC. They can be scaled across any portion of the digital range, up to full scale. The output can be programmed to swing 0 to 20mA or 0 to 0V in one digital count to drive external logic or SSRs as additional setpoints. Under Macro Program Control, the analog outputs can be programmed to produce pulses or even sinewaves.

I/O Logic, Rear Panel or Breakout Box The Tiger Operating System has many built-in logic functions that can be used to develop sophisticated control systems. The Tiger PMC has three logic inputs/outputs available via the LOCK, HOLD, and CAPTURE pins, and three logic I/Os are available for input module use via pins D, D2 and D3.

More complex I/O intensive applications require an opto-isolated I/O plug-in module, which supports six inputs and up to 6 outputs. This module can connect to an external Breakout Box that is DIN Rail mountable with screw terminal blocks. There are also compatible DIN Rail mounting electromechanical relays and SSR modules.

6 Inputs & 16 Outputs or 6 Inputs & 6 Outputs

Fully Programmable

## Serial Communication

The easiest way to configure or program a Tiger PMC is with the free user-friendly Configuration or Macro Development Software.

Serial I/O is provided via an optional Plug-in output carrier board, which supports RS-232 or RS-485 output modules. If serial I/O is not required by the application, the serial carrier board can be removed for reuse. The Tiger 320 Operating System supports several serial protocols, including ASCII, Modbus RTU and Print Mode (which includes a printer driver and support for direct meter to meter communications). Also supported is DeviceNet, which requires a special dedicated carrier board, and Ethernet (TCP/IP), which requires an external converter box.

RS-232 or RS-485

Except for DeviceNet, all serial communication modes supported by the Tiger can function with either RS-232 or RS-

485. The limitations of RS-232 are that only one meter at a time can be connected to the serial port of a computer, and the distance from the computer to the meter is limited in practical

terms to around 30 meters (00 feet).

Up to 32 meters can be connected on an RS-485 bus. The differential current drive of the RS-485 bus ensures signal PLANNING integrity in the most harsh environments to distances up TIP to 230 meters (4000 feet). However, RS-485 generally requires a special RS-485 output card to be installed in the computer or an external RS-232 to RS-485 converter has to be used.

Select the Communication Mode Best Suited to Your Application:

Modbus (RTU)

Modbus is widely used in industry. It has a large base, and most SCADA and HMI software packages support it. See also Modbus Wrapped in Ethernet (Modbus/TCP) below.

There are 00s of HMI Touch Panel Screens that are compatible with the Tiger 320 Modbus interface.

ASCII

The meter configuration utility program and the development software use the ASCII protocol. The ASCII protocol allows you to write your own driver for your own application via the development software and should provide the quickest development time.

Print Mode

This is an ASCII based printer driver output that enables the serial port to be directly connected to any serial printer with Epson compatibility.

Printer output can be configured to occur from a setpoint

or on demand, and can be date or time stamped.

The print mode can also be used for computer data logging applications. The meter can be connected directly to a computer, set up in Microsoft Hyperterminal mode, with the meter programmed to output directly into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format. (Also see Data Logging).

Print Mode for Meter to Meter Communication Two or more Tiger PMCs can be connected together allowing data to be transferred from the master meter (in print mode) to the slave meter (in ASCII mode). This enables the meters to share input data and control output functions.

Master Mode

This mode is for use with macro programming to expand the meter to meter communication capability to multiples of Tiger PMCs. This is useful for building an entire system of Tiger PMCs, DECISION

sharing information and control output resources.

Ethernet

Ethernet has become a popular automation and control protocol. We supply an ethernet output option and several external ethernet converters that are compatible with the serial outputs of Tiger PMCs.

Ethernet ASCII Wrap - The ethernet output carrier board option wraps the ASCII output into the Ethernet protocol, and provides a T-base 0/00 Ethernet output socket.

This allows the Configuration Utility Program or the Macro Development Software to run over a standard Ethernet network.

This enables the Tiger meter to be configured or macro programmed from anywhere in the world via the web.

Up to 32 Tiger PMCs can be connected by RS-485 to a single Ethernet Converter, which will support up to 32 separate IP addresses.

Ethernet Modbus Wrap - This converter accepts the Tiger PMCs modbus protocol and outputs Modbus/TCP through an Ethernet T-base 0 port. This has become a standard for Ethernet on the factory floor. Many SCADA and HMI software packages connect directly to Modbus/TCP.

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

Planning to Harness the Power of Tiger 320 Programmable Meter Controllers continued Planning to Use the Tiger 320 Series of Programmable Meter Controllers continued The Configuration Utility requires that an RS-232 interface board be installed in a Tiger 320 for programming.

However, if the final application does not require a serial output, the RS-232 board can be easily removed, after programming is completed, and kept for future use.

DeviceNet

DeviceNet was originally developed by Allen Bradley to connect sensors from the factory floor to PLCs. It is a deterministic real-time system, typically used to connect to networks using Allen Bradley PLCs. An optional carrier board is required for DeviceNet which replaces the standard serial output with a dedicated DeviceNet output connector.

## Data Logging

The Tiger 320 Operating System has built-in, sophisticated data logging software. Data logging can be triggered from the PROGRAM button, digital inputs, time or alarm functions. Up to MB of optional extra on-board memory provides a powerful, multichannel data capture and acquisition system.

Tiger PMCs can be configured to log in an endless loop, overwriting the oldest data first and utilizing the maximum amount of memory available. Similar to the Black Box on an aircraft, the data can be downloaded for analysis after

a problem event occurs.

Data logging can be combined with an Ethernet converter to provide an individual Web Page with data that can be accessed by a browser over the internet.

Real-time Clock

The Tiger meter has an optional real-time clock with a 5 year lithium battery backup, ensuring that time information is not lost in the event of a power failure. It can be configured in

2 or 24-hour modes for printing and data logging applications.

Other applications of the real-time clock include activating a setpoint or control action at fixed times of the hour, day, PLANNING week, month or year. TIP

### Flash Card Memory Module

For long term data logging, a Flash Card Memory Module that plugs in to the carrier board output socket is available. Flash Cards are available from 4 to 28 meg. They can be removed and read by a standard card reader, or the data can be downloaded through the serial port or over the internet with an Ethernet converter. The module also has an SSR setpoint output to trigger an external event.

## Configuration and Programming with a PC

With a serial output module installed, Tiger 320 PMCs are most easily configured using the Tiger 320 Configuration Utility, which can be downloaded free from the web and run on any Windows-based PC. The utility also enables the user to access some special capabilities of the Tiger

320 which cannot be programmed manually by the front panel buttons.

When a Tiger 320 is to be used in a custom application, the utility enables all or any of the front panel programming functions to be disabled (code blanking).

Customized descriptive text can also be entered to appear with any setpoint action or event.

Different configurations can be stored in a PC for fast downloading into a meter by the user. Custom configurations can also be issued a serial number and

preloaded at the factory.

## Development Software

Custom Macro Programming

This powerful, easy to use development system enables programs to be written in BASIC, utilizing any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. When your Basic program is compiled into the Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized. There are also numerous off-the-shelf application specific programs available. Many only need the blanks to be filled in to use them and do not require any knowledge of BASIC programming.

Macro in the

writing stage

Macros are useful when implementing any specialized control system that cannot be achieved by the standard configuration capability of the Tiger 320 Operating System. Using the development software, functions can be altered or added in a standard meter to perform the required job. This may typically include logic sequencing functions and mathematical functions.

Developing a Macro is much easier and quicker than programming a PLC, because the basic code required to customize the Tiger meter is considerably less than the ladder logic programming required for PLCs. This is due to the hundreds of functions built into the Tiger meter that can be manipulated or invoked by a macro, to fulfill the requirements of almost any application.

S c r o l l i n g annunciator

m e s s a g e s can be pro-

grammed to appear with any setpoint activation, selected events or logic inputs. Easy to read, plain text prompts can be programmed to replace the manual programming codes and provide a user-friendly interface for any custom application.

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Block Diagram of the Tiger 320 Software and Hardware Structure

RESULT PROCESSING

of Cross Channel Math

RAW DATA ANALOG, DIGITAL AND LOGIC I/O

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

Configuration Utility Program

The Easiest and Fastest Way to Configure the Tiger 320 is to Use a PC with the Free Downloadable Configuration Utility Program The diagrams and instructions provided in this data sheet / user manual are intended to enable the Tiger meter to be configured and programmed manually using the front panel buttons. A system of Programming Codes is required to facilitate this type of manual programming and these are explained in detail with diagrams and examples.

However, when the Tiger meter is configured and programmed via the optional RS-232 serial port and a PC using the Configuration Utility, the system of Programming Codes is bypassed. The Configuration Utility enables all the programming options to be clearly identified by their functions for direct on-screen selection. The Configuration Utility requires that an RS-232 interface board be installed in a Tiger 320 for programming. However, if the final application does not require a serial output, the RS-232 board can be easily removed, after programming is completed, and kept for future use.

The Configuration Utility Program (which may be freely downloaded from the web) is designed to simplify and speed up the configuration and programming of any Tiger 320. Pull down menus facilitate the selection of different options and the assignment of values. A Help explanation is provided just by holding the cursor over any function box.

The configuration utility enables the user to access some special capabilities of the Tiger 320 which cannot be selected manually by the front panel buttons.

Easy Installation of Linearization Tables

The configuration utility facilitates the storage and downloading of complex linearization tables. Tables can be created in any mathematical or spreadsheet program, and copied into the utility. Linearization tables can be created to precisely match a particular sensor so that they can be installed and downloaded as part of an annual calibration procedure.

Easy Setpoint Configuration

Code Blanking

When a custom configuration is created for any specialized application, the Tiger 320 can be programmed to blank out and disable all or any manual programming codes that you do not wish the user to be able to view or access by de-selecting them in the appropriate check box.

Display Text Editing

The meter can be programmed to display customized text to appear for any setpoint or event to suit any application requirements.

The Tiger 320 supports an incredible range of setpoint options and functions. The utility makes is quick and easy to select and download any combination you may require.

Configuration Data Copying and Loading

The configuration utility program allows you to store a record of a meters configuration for later referral, or for the restoration of a desired configuration. Macros can be combined with a configuration file so they can be downloaded together and locked at the same time. When a file is locked after downloading, it cannot be copied. It can only be erased and reloaded from a master file.

Also included is the ability for the user to make notes about the configuration that can be stored as part of the file.

Page 0

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Custom Macro Programming

### Never Before has the Customization of such a Powerful Measurement,

### Control and Automation Product been Made so Fast, Free and Easy

### The Tiger 320 Macro Development System is

### so power packed and feature rich that you can

### build a completely custom designed controller

### in 1/50th of the time it would take to program a

### microprocessor or a PC, and 1/20th of the time

### it can take to program a PLC.

### Quickly convert any special metering or control

### and automation idea into your own proprietary

### product, CE approved and ready to ship in

### days, with custom multicolor faceplates, labels,

### shipping boxes and instruction manuals.

Tiger Development System screen showing Macro being written.

This powerful, easy to use Development System can be downloaded free from the web. It enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

When your BASIC program is compiled into the Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized. When your Macro is downloaded into a Tiger 320 and locked, it is locked forever. It cannot be read or duplicated, it can only be erased.

There is no back-door access. A Tiger 320 running your Macro will remain your exclusive proprietary product.

There is also a growing library of off-the-shelf application specific macro programs available. Many only need the blanks to be filled in to use them and this does not require any knowledge of BASIC. The source code is provided with these programs so they can easily be customized and/or integrated into any proprietary application-specific Macro.

On request, any custom Macro can be issued a serial number and pre-installed at the factory to operate on power-up.

Scrolling annunciator messages can be programmed to appear with any setpoint activation, selected events or logic inputs.

Easy to read, plain text prompts can be programmed to replace the manual programming codes and provide a user-friendly interface for any custom application.

Tiger Development System - Code Writing Screen

Register Labels

Code Writing Area

Double clicking on

register label in the left hand side frame

automatically inserts the function in the code window at the cursor insertion point.

Tiger Development System screen showing the Macro code being compiled successfully.

Tiger Development System screen showing the compiled Macro being downloaded into a Tiger 320 Series PMC.

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page

### Index

32-Bit Operating System.................................................... 4 Analog Output / Analog Retransmission.......................... 21-22 Calibration of Analog Output........................................... 2 Dual (0-0V) Analog Output............................................ 2 Location of Analog Output Module................................. 55 Pinout of Analog Output.................................................. 54 Scaling of Analog Output................................................ 2, 22 Select Source for Analog Output.................................... 2 Auto Zero Maintenance for Weighing Applications......... 22 Set Parameters for CH, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 2 Averaging - Digital Filtering............................................... 22 Set Parameters for CH, CH2, CH3 & CH4................... 2

Block Diagram of Software & Hardware........................... 9 Brightness Display............................................................. 20 Calibration........................................................................... 21-24

Calibration Thermocouple or RTD.................................. 2 Manual Calibration.......................................................... 23 Single-Point Calibration................................................... 23 Two-Point Calibration...................................................... 23 Case Dimensions................................................................ 68 Modular Construction...................................................... 55 Other Case Sizes............................................................ 3, 4 Channel 1 Settings............................................................. 38-39

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 39 Analog Input Signal Sample Rate................................... 38 Counter/Resident Timer/Clock........................................ 38 Measurement Task.......................................................... 38 Post Processing.............................................................. 39 Print Mode....................................................................... 39 Sampling Rate................................................................. 38 Serial Mode..................................................................... 39 Smart Input Module......................................................... 38 Channel 2 Settings............................................................. 40 Channel 3 Settings............................................................. 41 Channel 4 Settings............................................................. 42 Channel 1 & Channel 2 Results Processing

32 Point Linearization...................................................... 43 Maths Functions.............................................................. 43 Code 1 - Display Configuration......................................... 25-37 Configure Bargraph Colors Procedure............................ 35 Configure Bargraph Using Linear Scaling Procedure..... 36 Configure Bargraph Using Logarithmic Scaling.............. 37 Configure Data Source Procedure.................................. 3 Configure Display Format Mode Procedure.................... 32 Configure Last Digit Text Char. Procedure...................... 33 Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure................... 34 Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure................ 34 Data Source - 2nd Digit [X5X]......................................... 25 Display Format - 2nd Digit [X6X]..................................... 25 Display Functions Mode.................................................. 25 Manual Loader Mode...................................................... 25 Setpoint Annunciators Mode........................................... 25 Text Character - 2nd Digit [X7X]..................................... 25 Update Display at Selected Sample Rate....................... 25 Code 2 - Channel 1 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 38

Code 3 - Channel 1 Post Processing

and Serial Mode Functions.......................................... 39

Code 4 - Channel 2 Measurement Task

and Sampling Rate........................................................ 40 Code 5 - Channel 3 Functions........................................... 41

Code 6 - Channel 4 Functions........................................... 42 Code 7 - Result Processing............................................... 43 Code 8 - Data Logging & Print Mode................................ 44 Code 9 - Functions for Digital Input Pins......................... 44 Code 10 - Bargraph Display Configuration...................... 26-28 Functions for Digital Input Pins........................................ 51 Code Blanking..................................................................... 19-20 Clock/Timer

Configuration................................................................... 38, 4, 42 Optional Real-time Clock................................................ 4 Real-time Clock Configuration........................................ 38, 4, 42 Real-time Clock Date...................................................... 44 Time Stamp..................................................................... 44 Component Layout & External Devices............................ 55-56 Modular Construction...................................................... 55 Component Layout.......................................................... 56 Configuration and Programming from a PC.................... 4, 8 Configuration Utility Program

Code Blanking and Display Text Editing......................... 0 Configuration Data Copying............................................ 0 Installation of Linearization Tables.................................. 0 Setpoint Configuration..................................................... 0

Connections

Carrier Board Output Pinouts.......................................... 54 Connector Pinouts........................................................... 53 External Devices............................................................. 55 Ordering Information, Connectors................................... 66 Rear Panel Pinout Diagram............................................ 53 Controls & Indicators......................................................... 14-15 Annunciator LEDs........................................................... 4 Down Button.................................................................... 4 Error Message................................................................. 5 LED Display..................................................................... 4 Program Button............................................................... 4 Program Lockout Switch................................................. 5 Scrolling Display Text Messaging.................................... 4 Setpoint Lockout Switch.................................................. 5 Seven Segment LED Displays........................................ 4 Up Button........................................................................ 4 Control Outputs.................................................................. 6-7

Electromechanical Relays

or Solid State Control Outputs........................................ 6 I/O Logic, Rear Panel or Breakout Box........................... 7 PID or ON/OFF Control................................................... 7 Retransmission 0-0V or 4-20mA................................... 7 Custom Macro Programming

Macro Compiling and Loading........................................ Data Logging....................................................................... 4, 8, 44 Downloading Logged Data from Meter........................... 44

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Index

Display Rounding............................................................ 32 Last Digit Text Character................................................. 33

Other Display Formats.................................................... 4

Setpoint Annunciator Mode............................................. 34 Update at Sample Rate................................................... 34 Display Options

LED or LCD Displays...................................................... 6 Numeric or Alphanumeric Displays................................. 6 Push Button or Membrane Touch Pads.......................... 6 Remote Display............................................................... 6 Single or Multiple Displays.............................................. 6

Faceplates

Custom Faceplates......................................................... 67 Optional Caption Sheets................................................. 67 Custom Faceplate Design Template............................... 67 Filtering

See Averaging Samples & Averaging Window

Front Panel Controls........................................................... 4, 14-15 Front Panel Programming Codes...................................... 17-18 Main Programming Mode................................................ 7 On Demand Modes......................................................... 8 Setpoint Programming Mode.......................................... 7 View Modes..................................................................... 8 Functional Diagram............................................................ 53 General Features................................................................. 1 HMI Touch Panel Graphic Displays................................... 7 Hysteresis and Deviation................................................... 45-48, 50 Initial Setup Procedures..................................................... 19-20 Code Blanking and Macro Check................................... 9-20 Model and Software Code Version Check...................... 9 Input Signal Conditioning Modules.................................. 5, 57-63 Input Module Component Glossary................................ 63 Input Module Index.......................................................... 57 Input Modules.................................................................. 58-62

Modular Position.............................................................. 55

Ordering Information, Input Modules.............................. 64-65 Input Signals & Sensors

4-20mA or Sensor Direct................................................ 6 Sensor Linearization or Compensation........................... 6 I/Os (Opto Isolated & Logic Ports).................................... 5 Linearization

Channel Temperature Sensors.................................... 38 Channel User Loaded Tables....................................... 39 Channel 2 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 40

Channel 3 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 4

Channel 4 Temperature Sensors

and User Loaded Tables................................................. 42 Result of CH & CH2 User Loaded Tables..................... 43

Result Processing........................................................... 43 Modbus................................................................................ 7, 22 Model Type Check............................................................... 19 On Demand Functions....................................................... 21 Ordering Information.......................................................... 64-66 Panel Cutout........................................................................ 68 PID Control Settings........................................................... 46, 50 Power Supply...................................................................... 5, 53 Prescaling

Channel ........................................................................ 38 Channel 2........................................................................ 40 Print Mode........................................................................... 7, 39 Programming Codes........................................................... 17-18 Programming Conventions................................................ 16 Programming via PC........................................................... 4, 10-11 Registers

Registers That Can Be Selected..................................... 52 Registers That Should Not Be Selected......................... 52 Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints.................. 52 Relay Options...................................................................... 54 Serial Communication........................................................ 5, 7-8 ASCII............................................................................... 7

Configuration................................................................... 39

DeviceNet........................................................................ 8

Ethernet........................................................................... 7

Master Mode................................................................... 7 Modbus............................................................................ 7

Pinouts............................................................................ 54

Print Mode....................................................................... 7 RS-232 or RS-485.......................................................... 7 Setpoint Programming Mode............................................. 45-51 Data Logging................................................................... 46 Data Printing to PC......................................................... 46 Data Printing to Serial Printer......................................... 46 Display Flashing.............................................................. 46 Hysteresis or Deviation................................................... 46-48, 50

Level - Basic Mode - Prog. Procedures....................... 49 PID Control Settings....................................................... 46, 50

Real-time Clock Option................................................... 46 Real Time Control Modes............................................... 47-48 Relay Energize Functions............................................... 46

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings................................... 45, 50 Setpoint Activation Source.............................................. 46 Setpoint Activation Values............................................... 45 Setpoint Latching............................................................ 46 Setpoint Reset & Trigger................................................. 46, 5 Setpoint Tracking............................................................. 46 Timer Modes................................................................... 46, 5

Smart Input Modules

Setting Up....................................................................... 38

Table Settings.................................................................. 22, 43

Supplements

Macros.................................................................................. 4, 8, 11 Macro Check................................................................... 9-20 Manual Loader..................................................................... 25 Maths Function

Cross Channel Maths..................................................... 9, 43

See Literature Overview

Setting............................................................................. 2-22

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

alarm status.

Setpoint can be configured to indicate the rising signal trend.

Setpoint 2 can be configured to indicate the falling signal trend.

They are labeled from left to right: SP, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5, SP6.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Seven Segment LED Displays The five, seven segment LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings.

They also display the programming codes and settings during programming. The display is available in red, green, or super bright red LEDs.

Optional Membrane Touch Pad Faceplate

LED Display

The meter has a 5-digit, 7-segment, (25.4 mm) standard red, or optional green or superbright red LED numeric display. The LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming codes and settings during meter programming.

Bargraph Display

The bargraph display is a 0 segment red, green, or tri-color bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal. The bargraph display is known as the secondary display during programming.

Display Text Editing with 7 Segment Alphanumeric Display Characters

Display text, such as setpoints, can be easily edited to suit your application, by connecting the meter to a PC running the free downloadable Configuration Utility program.

Scrolling Display Text Messaging Scrolling display text messaging can be configured to run with a simple macro.

Display Text Characters

The following text characters are used with the 7-segment display.

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY CHARACTERS

### Display with Faceplate and Bezel

Program Button

While programming, pressing the P button saves the current programming settings and moves to the next programming step.

You can move through the programming codes using the program button. The codes you pass are not affected, unless you stop and make changes using the Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the main programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and Pressing the P and button at the same time initiates the setpoint programming mode. To save a new configuration setting and return to the operational display, press the P button once and then press the P and See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button at the same time.

button at the same time.

buttons.

Up Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the button to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 1 and 3, setpoints 1, 3, and 5, peak, and total 1. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

button to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, press the

When in the operational display, pressing the button initiates a viewing mode that allows you to view the readings on channels 2 and 4, setpoints 2, 4, and 6, valley, and total 2. Once into the viewing routine, pressing the button moves through each displayed parameter.

See Display with Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs can be programmed to indicate the

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Controls and Indicators continued Controls and Indicators

Program Lockout Switch

When the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch is set to position 2, all programmable meter functions can be changed.

When set to the ON position, the PROGRAM LOCKOUT switch prevents any programming changes being made to the meter.

If programming is attempted, the meter displays [LoC]. The ON position allows programming parameters to be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Setpoint Lockout Switch

When the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch is set to position , the setpoints can be programmed. Once the setpoint values have been entered and the SETPOINT LOCKOUT switch set to the ON position, the setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

See Display PCB without Faceplate and Bezel diagram.

Error Message [Err]

Error messages usually

occur during calibration

procedures. The three most likely causes of an error message are:

) The full scale and zero signals were too similar.

Note, the high input (full scale) signal must be at least 000 counts greater than the low input (zero) signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter

(9999 to +99999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

## Rear Panel External Switched Inputs

The LOCK pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 7):

Reset channel [XX].

Reset channel 2 [XX2].

Reset channel 3 [XX3].

Reset channel 4 [XX4].

Reset tare [XX5].

Reset total [XX6].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [XX7].

Hold Pin

Configure Code 9 to [X0X]. When the HOLD pin (pin 9) is connected to the COMMON pin (2) the displayed reading is frozen.

However, A/D conversions and all control functions continue and as soon as pin 9 is disconnected from pin 2 by the switch, the updated reading is instantly displayed.

The HOLD pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following functions (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 7):

Reset channel [XX].

Reset total and total 2 [X2X].

Reset total 2 [X3X].

Reset peak and valley [X4X].

Reset tare [X5X].

Set tare [X6X].

Unlatch (de-energize) all setpoints [X7X].

Test Pin

Configure Code 9 to [0XX]. When the TEST pin (pin 20) is connected briefly to the COMMON pin (pin 2) all segments of the display and setpoint annunciators light up. Five eights and five decimal points (8.8.8.8.8.) are displayed for a short period. The microprocessor is also reset during this time, losing all RAM settings such as peak and valley, and any digital input pin settings set up in Code 9.

The TEST pin can also be configured in Code 9 to carry out the following (see Meter Programming Codes on Page 7):

Reset counter channel and total 2 at power-up [XX].

Reset counters, CH, CH2, CH3, CH4, total , and total 2 at

power-up [2XX].

Reset total and total 2 at power-up [3XX].

Capture Pin

When the CAPTURE pin (pin 22) is connected to the COMMON pin (pin 2), the CAPTURE pin can be programmed for setpoint/ relay activation or macro control applications in the setpoint control settings mode of the setpoint programming mode [SPC_X] [X2X]

Common Pin

To activate the LOCK, HOLD, TEST and CAPTURE pins from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin (pin 2).

Lock Pin

By configuring Coe 9 to [XX0], connecting the LOCK pin (pin 8 on the main PCB) to the COMMON pin (pin 2 on the main PCB), both the main and setpoint programming modes are locked out. All meter programming codes and setpoints can be viewed but not changed.

The main programming mode can be entered, but only the brightness setting adjusted. After adjusting the brightness setting, pressing the P button displays [LoCK].

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Front Panel Push Button Configuration and Setup for Programming Conventions

The meter uses a set of intuitive software codes to allow maximum user flexibility while maintaining an easy programming process.

To configure the meters programming codes, the meter uses the three right-hand side display digits.

These are known as the first, second, and third digits and can be seen in the diagram opposite.

First

Digit

Second

Digit

Third

Digit

To explain software programming procedures, diagrams are used to visually describe the programming steps. The following conventions are used throughout the range of Tiger 320 Series document diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter, and the actions involved in programming the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

The display showing 99999 represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY. After the meter has been powered up, the display settles and indicates the calibrated input signal. This is known as the operational mode and is generally referred to as the operational display throughout the documentation.

All programming modes are entered from this level.

Programming procedures are graphic based with little descriptive text.

Each procedure shows a number of meter panel displays running in procedural steps from the top to the bottom of the page.

If need be, the procedure may run into two columns with the left column running down the page and continuing at the top of the right-hand column. Each action performed by the user is shown as a numbered step.

Each procedural step shows the meter display as it looks before an action is performed. The hand or hands in the procedural step indicate the action to be performed and also how many times, or for how long, the button is to be pressed.

For example, the diagram below shows the meter in the operational display. With a left hand pressing the P button and a right hand pressing the button, the user is entering the main programming mode. This is indicated by the next diagram displaying [bri] and [5].

This is the display brightness mode and is the first sub-menu of the main programming mode.

Step 1

This symbol represents the PROGRAM button.

In a procedure, pressing the program button is always indicated by a left hand. A number indicates how many times it must be pressed and released, or for how long it must be pressed before releasing.

This symbol represents the UP button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the UP button is always indicated by a right hand.

This symbol represents the DOWN button.

Shown in a diagram, pressing the DOWN button is always indicated by a right hand.

Where two right hands are shown on the same diagram with the word OR between them, this buttons can indicates that both the be used to adjust the display: UP for increase, DOWN for decrease.

and

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a description or procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

Step 2

Where a left and right hand are shown on separate buttons on the same diagram, this indicates that the buttons must be pressed at the same time.

The exceptions to this rule are when carrying out the Model and Software Code Version Check, or the Code Blanking and Macro Check.

When two displays are shown together as black on grey, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value or configuration setting.

Where a number is not definable, the default setting [000] is shown.

If an X appears in the description of a 3digit programming code or in a configuration procedure, this means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained, or more than one choice can be made.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Front Panel Programming Codes

The meters programming codes are divided into two modes:

the main programming mode, and the setpoint programming mode (See diagram below).

Each mode is accessible from the operational display.

Programming Tip

The easiest and fastest way to configure the Tiger 320 is to use a PC with the free downloadable configuration utility program. (see page 0)

Main Programming Mode

The main programming mode provides access to program all meter functions, except setpoints.

Setpoint Programming Mode

The setpoint programming mode provides access to program all setpoint and relay functions.

Programming Tip

To enter or exit the Main Programming Mode, press

P and at the same time

Main Programming Mode

Display Brightness

[bri]

[CAL]

Calibration Modes for Input and Output

[Cod_1]

Code 1 Display Configuration

[Cod_2]

Code 2 CH1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

time to exit.

[Cod_3]

Code 3 CH1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

[Cod_4]

Code 4 CH2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

[Cod_5]

Code 5 CH3 Functions

[Cod_6]

Code 6 CH4 Functions

[Cod_7]

Code 7 Result Processing

Programming Tip

[Cod_8]

Code 8 Data Logging & Print Mode

[Cod_9]

Code 9 Functions for Digital Input Pins

[Cod10]

Code 10 Bargraph Setup

To enter or exit Programming Mode, press P and at the same time

the Setpoint

Setpoint Programming Mode

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Front Panel Programming Codes continued

the operational

View Modes

While in

display, pressing

button allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel .

the

Channel 3.

Setpoint .

Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 5.

the operational While

display, pressing the button allows you to view but not change the following parameters:

Channel 2.

Channel 4.

Setpoint 2.

Setpoint 4.

Setpoint 6.

Peak (of CH).

Valley (of CH).

Total (total of CH).

Total 2 (total of CH2).

Pressing both the buttons at the same time while in either the peak, valley, total , or total 2 view modes resets the setting to the current displayed signal.

and

To view, press

the button:

View Mode

To view, press

the button:

View Mode

Ch1

Ch3

SP_1

SP_3

SP_5

PEAK

tot_1

Ch2

Ch4

SP_2

SP_4

SP_6

VALEY

tot_2

On Demand Modes

The meter can be programmed to activate the following functions on demand by pressing the P button for 4 seconds:

Tare.

Single-point calibration.

Two-point calibration.

Primary input compensation.

Manual loader (manual offset).

Print.

The on demand function is selected in the calibration mode.

After configuring an on demand function in the Calibration On Demand Mode, press the P button for 4 seconds to activate one of the following selected on demand modes.

On Demand Modes

Tare

Single-point calibration

Two-point calibration

Primary input compensation

Manual loader (manual offset)

Print

For a full breakdown of all programming codes, see the Tiger 320 Series Programming Code Sheet (NZ101). See page 3 for more information.

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures Initial Setup Procedures

Before configuring the meter, carry out the following meter configuration checks:

Model and software code version check.

Code blanking and macro check.

After powering-up the meter, check the model and software code version number and note this in your user manual.

Model and Software Code Version Check The meter model and software code version number can be checked at any time while in the operational display using the following procedure.

START HERE

Code Blanking and Macro Check Tiger 320 Series meters have the ability to hide (blank out) all or some programming codes, making them tamper-proof. This can only be done using the Texmate Meter Configuration program.

With code blanking turned ON, all main and setpoint codes that have been blanked out during factory programming are hidden, preventing them from being reprogrammed. Any codes that have not been blanked out are still visible and can be reprogrammed.

Turning code blanking OFF means all meter programming codes are visible when you enter the programming modes and can be reprogrammed.

A macro is a set of commands that run automatically when the meter is powered up. Texmate has a growing library of macros to suit a wide range of standard customer applications.

Macros can be installed in the meter at the factory during initial programming or by the customer at some later date. Macros are written and compiled using the Texmate BASIC Compiler program, and loaded into the meter using either the BASIC Compiler program or the Texmate Meter Configuration program.

Turning the macro OFF means that the meter will not perform the automatic commands pre-programmed to run with the macro.

Unless requested to blank out all or some programming codes CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE and/or run a macro, Texmate program the meter in the code blanking OFF and macro OFF (default) setting.

To turn the code blanking and macro settings from ON to OFF:

To view, press

the

button:

START HERE

CODE BLANKING &

MACRO CHECK

PROCEDURE

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Model and Software Code Version checking procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings.

Example

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

CODE BLANKING & MACRO CHECK PROCEDURE 1

### Initial Setup Procedures continued Initial Setup Procedures

### [bri] - Display Brightness Initial Setup Procedures

Step 5

Press the Prog. button.

Example

Display Configuration

Once you have read the User manual and related supplements, and installed and powered-up the meter, configure the display

to suit its designated application.

Display Brightness Mode

The display brightness mode is accessed when entering the main programming mode. It allows you to adjust the brightness of the display LEDs and setpoint annunciators without interfering with other configuration settings. It is always available, even with the PROGRAM LOCK switch set to ON, or the external LOCK pin connected to the COMMON pin, locking out the programming modes.

The display brightness can be set between 0 and 7, with 0 being dull and 7 being bright. 5 is the default setting.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display brightness setting to 7 (bright).

Step 7

Press the Prog. button.

START HERE

Operational Display

Programming Tip

Code Blanking and Macro ON/OFF settings revert to the meters original configuration settings when the meter is powered off and on.

Programming Tip

The Display Brightness setting procedure can be performed at any time without interfering with other configuration settings by entering the main programming mode.

Page 20

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output

The Tiger 320 Series meter has an extremely powerful set of input and output calibration modes. See diagram below.

ON DEMAND Functions

In this mode the meter can be programmed to activate one of the following on demand functions by pressing the P button while in the operational display:

On Demand TARE.

On Demand Single-point Calibration (requires single input source).

On Demand Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

On Demand Primary Input Compensation Mode.

On Demand Manual Loader Mode.

Calibration Modes

The following calibration modes are available:

Manual Calibration (requires NO input source).

Two-point Calibration (requires dual input source).

This is the calibration mode generally used to calibrate the meter for most applications. An example procedure has been included.

Calibrate Thermocouple (requires K type thermocouple

input source).

Calibrate RTD (requires RTD 385 input source).

Calibrate Smart Input Module (not available on all input

modules).

Calibrate Analog Output (requires multimeter connected to pins

6 and 7).

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 2

[CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued Related Calibration Functions

The following functions are also configured in the calibration mode. See Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Supplement (NZ203) for further calibration details. (See page 3 for more information).

Serial Communications Properties

Selecting

Properties Mode.

[CAL][20X] enters

the Serial Communications

This mode allows you to configure the serial communications output module baud rate, parity, time delay, and address settings.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for further details on the serial communications module. (See page 3 for more information).

Set Auto Zero Maintenance Selecting [CAL][2X] enters the Set Auto Zero Maintenance Mode.

This mode allows you to configure auto zero maintenance settings for weighing applications applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Set Averaging Samples & Averaging Window Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the number of input signal samples to average over, and the size of the averaging window in display counts applied to the channel selected in the 3rd digit.

Selecting [CAL][22X] enters the Set Averaging Samples and Averaging Windows Mode. When in this mode, the [AV_S] menu allows you to select the number of input signal samples to average over. After setting the number of samples, moving to the [AV_W] menu allows you to configure the size of the averaging window in displayed counts.

The meter averages the input samples over the selected number of input samples (selected in the [AV_S] menu). This carries on in a continual process provided the input signal stays within the averaging window (set in the [AV_W] menu). If the sample moves out of the averaging window, the meter responds quickly to the change by displaying the non-averaged signal value. When the signal stabilizes, a new averaging window is established and averaging resumes.

You can program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over from to 255 samples. The averaging window can be set to between and 65535 counts.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

See Input Signal Sampling Showing Averaging Window diagram opposite.

Example Procedure

The example procedure on Page 24 shows how to configure channel (CH) with an averaging sample rate of 0 counts and an averaging window of 000 counts.

Totalizer Settings

Selecting [CAL][23X] enters the Totalizer Settings Mode.

This mode allows you to configure the settings for the totalizer selected in the 3rd digit. An input value of 0000 counts is applied to a selectable time period to produce the required total value.

The cutoff is a programmable limit below which the input is not totalized.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Totalizing and Batching Supplement (NZ208) for further details on K factor and totalizer cutoff parameters. (See page

3 for more information).

Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Selecting [CAL][24X] enters the Setup 32-point Linearization Tables Mode.

This mode allows you to set up the linearization table or tables using the manual or auto setup modes. The table or tables can then be selected to linearize the signals on channels to 4.

See Linearization Table Notes on Page 43 for a description of memory related issues with linearization.

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Linearizing Supplement (NZ207) for further details on linearization table setup and use. (See page 3 for more information).

Scale Analog Output

Selecting [CAL][25X] enters the Scale Analog Output Mode.

This mode allows you to calibrate and scale the analog output signal. Before calibrating the analog output in the calibration mode, the data source for the analog output must be configured in Code .

See the calibration modes diagram on Page 21 showing a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digits.

Also see the Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for further details on the analog output module. (See page 3 for more information).

Also see Configure Data Source Procedure on Page 31 for an example of setting the analog output data source.

Calibration Mode Procedures Supplement The Advanced Calibration and On Demand Mode Procedures Supplement (NZ203) describes in detail all Tiger 320 Series meter related calibration procedures configured in the calibration mode.

Page 22

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Two-point Calibration

Two-point calibration is the most commonly used method of calibrating Tiger 320 Series meters when a low and high input source is available.

Example Calibration Procedure

Calibrate channel (CH) using the two-point calibration 2-POINT CALIBRATION

method. The calibration mode display is set to [111].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

START HERE

TWO-POINT

CALIBRATION

From Step 6

Example

Example

Step

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 23

### [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued [CAL] - Calibration Modes for Input and Output continued

Input Signal Filtering and Averaging Input signal filtering and averaging is configured in the calibration mode. Programmable averaging allows you to program the number of samples you want to average the input signal over (from to 255 samples).

A programmable averaging window provides a quick response time to large input signal changes. The averaging window can be set to between and 65535 counts.

Example Procedure:

Select an averaging sampling rate of 0 samples and an averaging window of 000 counts for Channel by setting [CAL] to [221].

See Advanced Calibration & On Demand Mode Supplement

(NZ203) for further calibration procedures. (See page 3 for more information).

START HERE

INPUT SIGNAL

FILTERING &

AVERAGING

From Step 6

Example

Step 10

Save settings

Example

Step

Page 24

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/24/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration

All digital display configuration modes, except the display brightness mode, are configured in Code .

All bargraph display configuration modes are configured in Code 0 (See diagram below).

See Code 1 diagram on Page 32 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

See Code 10 diagram on Page 30 for a breakdown of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd digit settings.

CODE 1 Digital Display Configuration

CODE 10 Bargraph Display Configuration

### CODE 1 Digital Display Configuration

Setpoint Annunciators Mode

The setpoint annunciators mode is configured by changing the first digit in Code . The setpoint annunciators can be configured to operate as follows:

On when the setpoint activates.

All annunciators are permanently on and each one only goes

off when its setpoint activates.

All annunciators are always off (See Note on Code diagram

on Page 29).

Setpoint 1 annunciator comes on indicating a rising signal.

Setpoint 2 annunciator comes on indicating a falling signal.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 34 shows how to select the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active).

Update Display at Selected Sample Rate The meters default display update rate is 0.5 seconds and is

set in the second digit of Code as [X0X].

The display can be configured to update at the input signal sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 34 shows how to configure the display to update at 50 samples per second by setting Code to [X2X].

For these settings to take effect, the analog sample rate must be set at [2XX] in Code 2. See Code 2 Channel 1 Measurement Task and Sampling Rate on Page 38 for an example.

Manual Loader Mode

The meter can be configured to function exclusively as a manual loader by setting Code to [XX].

See Analog Output Module Supplement (NZ200) for full details on manual loader mode functions.

Display Functions Mode

The display functions mode is configured by changing the 2nd and 3rd digits in Code :

Selecting [X5X] enters the Data Source sub-menu.

Selecting [X6X] enters the Display Format sub-menu.

Selecting [X7X] enters the Last Digit Text Character sub-

menu.

Data Source 2nd Digit [X5X] The digital display is the primary display. The bargraph display is the secondary display.

To select the data source for the primary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 0 in the 3rd digit [X50].

To select the data source for the secondary display select 5 in the 2nd digit and 1 in the 3rd digit [X51].

Selecting 5 in the 2nd digit enters a sub-menu and allows the data from one of a number of meter registers to be selected as the data source for the displays or functions selected in the third digit.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 3 shows how to select the data source for the primary display.

The three digits are set to [X50]. The same example can be used for selecting the data source for the secondary display (bargraph). The three digits are set to [X51].

The 2nd digit in Code can also be used to select the data source for the remaining functions in the 3rd digit:

[X53] = Peak and Valley.

[X54] = Analog Output .

[X55] = Analog Output 2.

[X56] = Totalizer .

[X57] = Totalizer 2.

Display Format 2nd Digit [X6X] Selecting 6 in the 2nd digit enters the Display Format submenu where the following display format settings can all be configured:

Last digit rounding.

Display units (Decimal, octal, or optional 2 or 24-hour clock).

Decimal point placement.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 32 shows how to configure the three display format modes for the 3rd digit selection.

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 25

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Text Character 2nd Digit [X7X] Selecting 7 in the 2nd digit allows you to select one of 54 characters and apply it to the last digit when the meter is in the operational display.

For example, if the meter was measuring a temperature, the display could be configured to display the reading with a C or an F in the last digit for C or F.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 33 shows how to configure the last digit text character as C for centigrade (C) for the 3rd digit selection.

Note:

After setting any or all the above three modes [X5X], [X6X], [X7X], the Code 1 display must be set back to [X0X] to leave Code 1 and carry on programming.

### CODE 10 Bargraph Display Configuration

Set Up Bargraph Colors This mode is where the colors of the bargraph relative to the setpoints are set. Tri-color bargraphs use the following three colors:

Green.

Orange.

Red.

The bargraph colors are not applied to specific setpoints. They are applied to whichever setpoint is configured at the lowest setting, and then to each next highest setpoint in turn.

Only one color is displayed on the bargraph at any time. As the signal changes, the color selected for the most recently activated setpoint displays

Only setpoints with the same source data as the bargraph are displayed.

If all six setpoints are used the colors are set as follows:

Set Up Bargraph Scaling This mode is where the span range of the bargraph is scaled.

The span range of the bargraph can be set between 9999 to 99999 counts. There are three methods of scaling the bargraph:

Linear.

Via Linearization Table .

Logarithmic.

Selecting 3 in the st digit enters the Set Up Bargraph Scaling mode.

Linear Bargraph Scaling

The most common method of scaling the bargraph is through the Linear Bargraph Scaling sub-menu. In this menu the bar low, bar high, and bar nominal settings are set.

Bar Low [bAr_L] is the setting in counts required at the bottom of the bargraph.

Bar High [bAr_h] is the setting in counts required at the top of the bargraph.

Bar Nominal sets the point on the bargraph at which the bar begins to light up. This can be any position between and including the bar low and bar high settings.

If bar nominal is set to the bar low setting, the bargraph behaves like a typical bargraph making the segments light up from the bottom of the bar and grow towards the top.

If bar nominal is set to the bar high setting, this makes all segments from the displayed signal to the top of the bar light up. As the signal increases, the number of lit segments between the signal and the bar high setting becomes steadily less. When the signal reaches the bar high setting no segments are lit.

Bar Nominal set to Bar Low Bar

High

Bar Nominal set to Bar High Bar

High

Color 1. Color BELOW lowest set-

point.

This is the bargraph color before it

reaches a setpoint.

Color 2. Color ABOVE lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 3. Color ABOVE the 2nd lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 4. Color ABOVE the 3rd lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 5. Color ABOVE the 4th lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 6. Color ABOVE the 5th lowest setpoint and BELOW the next highest.

Color 7. Color ABOVE the highest

setpoint.

Bar

Low

Bar

Low

Example of

Bargraph Colors

Any one of the colors (green, orange, red, or OFF meaning no color) can be applied to each color setting (See Example:

Bargraph Colors diagram above). Selecting 2 in the st digit enters the Set Up Bargraph Colors mode. Selections for the 2nd and 3rd digits are not relevant at this point.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 35 shows how to configure the bargraph colors.

No Signal

Signal Applied

No Signal

Signal Applied

Bargraph Nominal Set Low or High

Setting bar nominal to the midpoint between bar low and bar high makes the bargraph behave like a typical center zero bargraph. This means the bargraph lights up at the center of the bar and moves either up or down the bar depending on the displayed signal.

Page 26

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

For example, if the meter's full scale range is 20,000 counts, the midpoint is 0,000 counts. If a signal of 0,000 counts is applied, only one segment at the 0,000 count mark lights up. If a signal of 7,000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (0,000 counts) and the 7,000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 5000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (0,000 counts) and the 5000 count mark light up.

17,000

5000

20,000

10,000

Typical Center Zero Bargraph

An added feature of this bargraph is that it can also be nonsymmetrical. This means that the bar nominal setting does not need to be set at the mid-point between bar low and bar high.

For example, if the bargraph is configured to display 200 to

800 C, bar low is set to 200 counts and bar high is set to 800 counts. Bar nominal is set to 0 counts. If a signal of 50 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 down to 50. If a signal of 600 C is applied, the bar lights from 0 up to 600.

Example Procedure. The

example procedure on

Page 36 shows how to scale the bargraph using linear scaling.

800

600

Bar Nominal

50

200

Bargraph Scaling using Linearization Table 1 When set in this mode, the register selected to be displayed on the bargraph display (Code set to [XX]) is first processed through a 32-point flexible linearization table (Table ) before being displayed.

This can be used, for example, if channel is the required digital display while the bargraph display is the square root of channel .

See Linearization Supplement for full details to set up linearization Table 1.

Selecting 3 in the st digit and 1 in the 3rd digit selects Bargraph scaling via Linearization Table .

Example Procedure. To scale the bargraph using Linearization Table , follow the Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure on Page 36. Ensure the secondary (bargraph) display has been set up in Code and Linearization Table has been formatted and selected for the required application.

Logarithmic Bargraph Scaling

Logarithmic scales are used in a wide variety of measurements.

Probably the most well known logarithmic scale is the Richter scale for measuring earthquakes. Other log scales used include sound level (dB), radio frequency signals, power levels (dBm), and numerous radiation signals.

In all logarithmic scales a reference level is required that is the level at 0 dB. For example, in an RF measurement 0 dBm is at a reference of mW.

The scale is calculated from:

0 log0

counts (input)

reference

If the meter is scaled so that:

mW = 00 counts and W = 00,000 counts

Then the reference for 0 dBm would be set to 00 counts:

10 log10

(input)

100

= 0 dBm

Decade

(Counts)

00

000

0,000

00,000

,000,000

dBm

20

0

Non-symmetrical Zero

Bargraph

Now every 0 dBm represents a decade, the bargraph can be scaled to a different amount of bars per decade (as set in the 3rd digit).

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 27

Peak and Valley on Bar. Selecting [XX] means that peak and valley are displayed as flashing segments and are updated as they change.

The setpoints are not displayed.

Min/Max with

Setpoints.

Selecting [X4X] means that the segments of the bar remain lit over the minimum and maximum signal variations. The setpoints are displayed as flashing segments.

This is a useful mode for seeing process variations at a glance.

Note:

When moving from another display format to the Min/Max with Setpoints mode, the peak and valley settings must be set to the current settings by entering the Peak View mode or Valley View mode and pressing the UP and DOWN buttons at the same time.

Example: Peak and Valley on Bargraph

When moving from Min/Max with Setpoints mode to another display format, the bar nominal [bAr_n] setting must be reset to its original settings in Code 10 [3XX].

Bar Only. Selecting [X7X] means that only the bargraph display signal is displayed on the bar. Setpoints and peak and valley are not displayed.

Example: MIN and MAX on Bargraph

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Example of Bars per Decade

Reference. This is the number of counts displayed for a 0 dB reference. Range: to 99999 counts.

Bar Nominal. See Bar Nominal description under heading:

Linear Bargraph Scaling.

Selecting 3 in the st digit and 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the 3rd digit enters the Set Up Scaling for Logarithmic Bargraph sub-menu:

Selecting 3 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 0 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 4 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 20 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 5 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 25 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 6 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 33 Bar/Decade.

Selecting 7 in the 3rd digit sets the log to 50 Bar/Decade.

Example Procedure. The example procedure on Page 37 shows how to scale the bargraph using example logarithmic settings.

Bargraph Display Format

After the bargraph colors have been set and the bargraph scaled, the display format can be set. This is normally the final setting. The 2nd digit selects the format of the bargraph display. There are four display format settings available:

Setpoints on Bar. Selecting [X0X] means that the setpoints are displayed on the bar as flashing segments in the current display color.

When the display color changes, the setpoint segments change to that color. When the bargraph lights up on or beyond a setpoint, the setpoint segment goes out.

Example of Setpoints on Bargraph

Page 28

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 29

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Page 30

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Data Source Procedure The following example procedure describes how to select the source of the data to be displayed for the third digit selection.

Example Procedure:

Configure the Primary Display with the display [diSP] as the data source by setting Code to [X50]. See diagram at the bottom of the page for data source selection options.

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DATA SOURCE

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

From Step 5

Example

### Step 6

Step 2

Pass Brightness and

Calibration Modes

and enter Code 1

Programming Tip

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Programming Tip

Step 8

Save Data Source

setting

### Step 4

0 Primary Display

1 Second Display (See Note)

2 Third Display (See Note)

3 Peak/Valley

4 Analog Output 1

5 Analog Output 2

6 Totalizer 1

7 Totalizer 2

Step 9

Exit Code 2. Return to Operational Display

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

### Configure Display Format Mode Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to configure the display format mode for the 3rd digit selection and covers:

Last Digit Rounding.

Display Units.

Decimal Point Placement.

Example Procedure:

Configure the display format mode for channel with rounding by 2s, decimal display units, and the decimal point placed between display digits 4 and 5 by setting Code to [X61].

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY FORMAT PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

DISPLAY

FORMAT

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

From Step 5

Example

Step 6

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Page 32

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Last Digit Text Character Procedure

The following example procedure describes how to select the last digit text character.

Example Procedure:

Configure channel with C as its last digit text character (for C) by setting Code to [X71]. See diagram opposite. CONFIGURING THE TEXT CHARACTER PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LAST DIGIT

TEXT CHARACTER

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

From Step 6

Step 7

Select [000] to leave Code 1

Step 8

Save Last Digit Text Character setting

Step 6

Example

Step

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 33

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Configure Setpoint Annunciators Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure setpoint annunciators.

Configure Update at Sample Rate Procedure The following example procedure describes how to configure the display to update at the sample rate selected in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

CONFIGURING THE SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS PROCEDURE Configure the setpoint annunciators to come ON when the setpoints are OFF (not active) by setting Code to [1XX].

Example Procedure:

UPDATE AT SAMPLE RATE PROCEDURE Update the display at the sample rate selected in Code 2 [2XX] by setting Code to [X2X].

START HERE

CONFIGURE

SETPOINT

ANNUNCIATORS

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

START HERE

CONFIGURE

UPDATE AT

SAMPLE RATE

Step 1

Enter Brightness

Mode

Step 3

Select SP Annunciators

setting [1XX]:

Step 3

Select update at sample rate setting [X2X]:

Step 4

Save the settings and enter Code 2

## X X

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 2

Step 5

Exit Code 2.

Return to

Operational Display

Step 5

Exit Code 2.

Return to

Operational Display

Programming Tip

The Configuring Setpoint Annunciators and the Update at Sample Rate procedures can be combined so that Code could be set to [2X] (for the above examples) in a single procedure.

Page 34

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Configure Bargraph Colors Procedure

START HERE

CONFIGURE

BARGRAPH

COLORS

From Step 6

Example

Example

Step 10

Example

Step

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 35

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

## Scale Bargraph using Linear Scaling Procedure

START HERE

CONFIGURE

BARGRAPH

LINEAR SCALING

From Step 6

Example

Step

Example

Step 10

Step 11

Page 36

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_1] - Display Configuration continued

Scale Bargraph using Logarithmic Scaling Procedure CONFIGURE BAR LOGARITHMIC SCALING

From Step 6

START HERE

CONFIGURE

BARGRAPH

LOGARITHMIC

SCALING

Step 8

Example

Step 5

Example

Step

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 37

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_2] - Channel 1 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

The Tiger 320 Series meter can be configured to measure almost any input signal. The measurement task and sampling rate for Channel (CH) is configured in the three digits of Code 2. The diagram below lists the available configuration selections in Code 2.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH for a voltage input with 0 samples/second (60 Hz) sampling rate and output rate of 0. seconds by setting Code 2 to [000].

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

MEASUREMENT

TASK & SAMPLING

RATE

Step 3

Example

Step 4

Save setting and

enter Code 3

Step

Page 38

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_3] - Channel 1 Post Processing & Serial Mode Functions

Post processing functions refer to functions that occur to the input after it has been configured and scaled.

Example Procedure:

Configure the meter to apply square root to the CH signal by setting Code 3 to [100].

Post processing for Channel (CH) is configured in the first digit of Code 3. The diagram below lists the available post processing configuration

selections in Code 3 (st digit only).

From Step 3

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH1

POST PROCESSING

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, Codes 1 and 2, and enter Code 3

Step 4

Save Post Processing

setting

Step 5

Exit Code 4.

Return to

Operational Display

Step

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to Serial Printer Print mode data logging is a simple method of capturing data using the meters print mode. The data can be printed directly to a serial printer from the meter.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to a remote serial printer. The data can be printed with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Programming tip

For full details on the Serial Mode, see Serial Communications Output Module supplement.

Print Mode Data Printing Direct to PC The print mode can also be used to print data to a PC where it is logged in a Windows Terminal program.

The print mode uses the meters serial communications port to connect to the PC. The data can be logged with or without a Day: Month: Year or Hours: Minutes: Seconds time stamp.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

Time stamp settings are configured in Code 8.

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 39

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_4] - Channel 2 Measurement Task & Sampling Rate

Code 4 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 2.

When a dual input signal conditioner is installed, the second input signal is processed and displayed on CH2.

Measurement task and 32-point linearization for CH2 is configured in the st and 2nd digits of Code 4. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 4.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH2 for a direct voltage input with no linearization by setting Code 4 to [010].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual input module.

CONFIGURING CH2 MEASUREMENT TASK PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH2

MEASUREMENT

TASK

From Step 3

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 3, and enter Code 4

Step 4

Save CH 2 Measurement Task setting

Step 5

Exit Code 5.

Return to

Operational Display

Step

Page 40

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_5] - Channel 3 Functions

Code 5 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 3.

When a triple input signal conditioner is installed, the third input signal is processed and displayed on CH3.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH3 are configured in the st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 5. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 5.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH3 to display the square root of a voltage input by setting Code 5 to [11X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a triple input module. CONFIGURING CH3 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE CH3

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 4 and enter Code 5

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 6.

Return to

Operational Display

Step

Step 4

Save CH3 setting

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 4

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_6] - Channel 4 Functions

Code 6 is a single code that combines all the configuration and post processing functions available for Channel 4.

When a quad input signal conditioner is installed, the fourth input signal is processed and displayed on CH4.

Post processing and measurement task functions for CH4 are configured in the st, 2nd, and 3rd digits of Code 6. The diagram opposite lists the available configuration selections in Code 6.

Example Procedure:

Configure CH4 for a direct display of voltage input by setting Code 6 to [01X].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a quad input module.

START HERE

Page 42

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_7] - Result Processing

The third digit of Code 7 performs various math functions between channel and channel

2 and stores this data in the result register.

The data in the result register can then be further processed by the selections made in the st and 2nd digits.

Example Procedure:

Configure Code 7 to add the input of CH and CH2 and directly display the result by setting Code 7 to [003].

See I-Series Input Modules Guide (Z87) for procedures to set up a dual, triple, or quad input module.

Linearization Table Notes

CONFIGURING CH1 & CH2 RESULT PROCESSING PROCEDURE

START HERE

CONFIGURE

RESULT

PROCESSING

Step 1

Enter Brightness Mode

Step 2

Pass Brightness Mode, Calibration Mode, and

Codes 1 to 6 and enter Code 7

From Step 4

Step 5

Exit Code 8.

Return to

Operational Display

Step

Step 4

Save CH1 & CH2 Result Processing setting

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 43

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_8] - Data Logging & Print Mode

Up to 4000 samples can be logged within the meter in the cyclic or linear FIFO mode and saved for later downloading to a PC, using a terminal evaluation program, or printing directly to a serial printer.

Data logging can be triggered (activated) from a setpoint, the program button, or from an external switch. See the 3rd digit in the diagram below.

Data from up to four selectable registers can be logged with one of the following printer or spreadsheet style time and date stamps. All time and date stamps are generated from an optional real-time clock (see the 2nd digit in the diagram below):

No time stamp.

Month - Day - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Day - Month - Year. Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Printer style time and date stamps have a carriage return and line feed. Spreadsheet style time and date stamps are continuous on a single line.

See Serial Communications Module Supplement (NZ202) for full details on the Data Logging and Print Mode Options.

### Initial Setup Procedures [CodE_9] - Functions for Digital Input Pins

The TEST, HOLD, and LOCK pins are located at the rear of the meter to accommodate external switched digital inputs.

When switched to the COMMON pin, they can be programmed in Code 9 to perform remote resetting functions to add to the functionality of the meter.

Note:

CAPTURE, HOLD, and LOCK pins can be a setpoint activation source. See Setpoint Programming mode.

Page 44

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Setpoint Programming Mode

All setpoint activation and control settings are selected and configured using the front panel buttons in the setpoint programming mode. Or, software configured via the meter configuration utility program if the meter is connected to a PC through the serial port. The meter has six software driven setpoints, independently configured to operate within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Relay Output Modules

Five standard relay output module options provide a selection of 20 relay configuration options for 320 Series meters.

Three electromechanical relay output modules support a combination of 5 A Form A and 0 A Form C relays providing 2 configuration options. A solid state relay (SSR) output module supports 400 V, 20 mA DC SSRs and another SSR output module supports 400 V, 40 mA AC / DC SSRs providing a further eight configuration options.

A 22 opto-isolated I/O plug-in module can support six inputs and up to 6 outputs. The standard plug-in module has six inputs and six outputs that can be extended to 6 outputs with a 0 output add-on board.

320 Series Relay Output Module Options

Setpoint Programming Mode

To enter press P and buttons at the same time

Setpoint Activation Values Mode

Enter these menus to set setpoint (SP) activation values

[SP_1]

Setpoint 1 Default setting = 8000 Setpoint 1

[SP_2]

Setpoint 2

Default setting = 8000

[SP_3]

Setpoint 3

Default setting = 5000

Max Four

140 mA

(AC/DC)

Max Four

210 mA

(DC Only)

Max Four

5 A Form A

Max Two

5 A Form A Max Two

10 A Form C

Max Six

5 A Form A

Optional Opto-isolated

22 I/O Plug-in Module

Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

(10 outputs)

Standard I/O

Plug-in Module

(6 in/6 out)

Setpoint Programming Mode

See the Setpoint Programming Mode Logic Diagram opposite.

The setpoint programming mode is entered by pressing the meters P and

buttons at the same time.

Setpoint Activation Values

Each setpoint activation value is individually programmed. Setpoint activation values can be set within the total span range of the meter and the selected input module.

Setpoint and Relay Control Settings See the Setpoint and Relay Control Settings diagram on Pages 50 and 51.

[SP_4]

Setpoint 4

Default setting = 5000

[SP_5]

Setpoint 5

Default setting = 0000

[SP_6]

Setpoint 6

Default setting = 0000

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Mode

Enter these menus to configure SP control settings

See Page 49

for a Level 1 Setpoint & Relay

Control Settings

diagram.

[SPC_1]

Setpoint 1

[SPC_2]

Setpoint 2

[SPC_3]

Setpoint 3

[SPC_4]

Setpoint 4

[SPC_5]

Setpoint 5

The control settings provide access to the following setpoint and relay functions for configuration using the meters st, 2nd, and 3rd digits:

1st Digit Relay Energize Functions.

2nd Digit Setpoint Activation Source.

3rd Digit Setpoint Delay, Timer, and Reset and Trigger Functions.

Setpoint Mode Logic Diagram

[SPC_6]

Setpoint 6

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 45

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Relay Energize Functions

All setpoints activate at the setpoint value.

All relays/setpoints are programmable to energize above or below the setpoint value.

Setpoint Activation Source

Setpoints activate from any input channel, selected meter register, or external switched inputs (digital input pins).

Setpoint Latching

Setpoints can be programmed in relay latching modes.

Setpoint Reset & Trigger Setpoints can be programmed to reset selected registers, or be manually reset. They can also trigger a data print or a data log.

Setpoint Tracking

Setpoint tracking can

be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis, deviation, or PID modes.

Display Flashing

Display flashing can be applied to setpoints configured in the hysteresis or deviation modes.

Each setpoint can be programmed to make the display flash on and off while the setpoint is active, and keep it flashing until the setpoint de-activates.

Real-time Clock Option

Any setpoint can be programmed to operate from the real-time clock option.

Data Logging

Any setpoint can be programmed to log data within the meter (up to

4000 samples).

Data Printing to Serial Printer Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a serial printer.

Data Printing to PC Any setpoint can be programmed to send data directly to a connected PC.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each relay can operate in a hysteresis or deviation mode.

PID Control Settings

The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) control function provides exceptional control stability during control process applica-

tions. PID control is available from the following outputs:

Setpoint / relay output.

Analog output.

Relay and analog output at the same time.

PID control from the setpoint / relay output is available from SP and SP2 only.

There are two PID control outputs available via the analog output:

PID stored in register 50.

PID2 stored in register 5.

PID Control

Timer Modes

Each setpoint can be programmed to operate the relay in one of the following seven resident timer modes:

Normal Mode Timer

Single actuation, delay-on-make (DOM) and delay-onbreak (DOB).

Normally OFF/Pulsed ON Timers

Repeat ON Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and maximum on-time.

1-Shot ON Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOM and minimum on-time.

Normally ON/Pulsed OFF Timers Repeat OFF Mode Timer multiple actuation, program-

mable offand on-time.

Pulse OFF Mode Timer single actuation, programmable

DOB and maximum off-time.

1-Shot OFF Mode Timer single actuation, program-

mable DOB and minimum off-time.

Hysteresis or Deviation

Each setpoint can be individually programmed to energize the relay in the hysteresis or deviation mode, with or without initial startup inhibit.

Hysteresis (deadband) is the programmable band above and below the setpoint value that determines when and for how long the relay is energized or de-energized. The setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay above or below the setpoint value.

The hysteresis setting can be any value between 0 and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a hysteresis band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 500 counts and the hysteresis setting is 0 counts, the hysteresis band around the setpoint setting is 20 counts, starting at 490 counts and ending at 50 counts.

Note:

If hysteresis is set with ZERO counts, the relay energizes AT or ABOVE the setpoint value.

Page 46

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Deviation (passband) is the programmable band around the setpoint in which the setpoint can be programmed to energize the relay inside or outside the deviation band.

The deviation setting can be any value between and 65535 counts. The number of counts selected act both positively and negatively on the setpoint, forming a deviation band around the setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint setting is 000 counts and the deviation setting is 35 counts, the deviation band around the setpoint setting is

70 counts starting at 965 counts and ending at 035 counts.

Deviation

Initial Start-up Inhibit.

On power-on, start-up inhibit prevents the relay from energizing on the first setpoint activation cycle. Depending on how the meter has been programmed, initial start-up inhibit either functions during a falling input signal, or during a rising input signal.

Relay Time Control Modes The following time control mode settings can cover almost every relay timer application.

All setpoints can be individually programmed to operate a relay in one of the following time control modes above or below the setpoint value.

Hytseresis

Normal Mode

This mode individually programs a relays setpoint with delayNormal Mode

on-make (DOM) and delay-on-break (DOB) settings.

SP ON

### SP OFF

RLY ON

RLY OFF

### Adj.

### DOM

### Adj.

### DOB

Normally OFF / Pulsed ON Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally off and pulses on when the setpoint activates.

Repeat ON Mode

Repeat ON Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable on and off time settings.

SP ON

### SP OFF

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

Adj.

ON-T

Adj.

OFF-T

Adj.

ON-T

Pulse ON mode (Programmable ON-time) Pulse ON Mode (Prog. Max ON-time) Single actuation, programmable DOM and on time settings.

SP ON

### SP OFF

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

### Adj.

### MAX

### ON-T

### Adj.

### DOM

1-Shot ON mode (Programmable Minimum ON-time)

Single actuation, programmable DOM and minimum on time 1-Shot ON Mode (Prog. Min. ON-time) settings.

SP ON

### SP OFF

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

### Adj.

### DOM

### Adj.

### MIN ON-T

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 47

Level 1

Setpoint & Relay Basic Mode

This is an easily programmable mode for users who require the

following basic setpoint and relay functions:

First Digit Relay Energize Functions

Relays programmed to energize above or below the

setpoint value.

Second Digit SP Activation Source

Setpoints programmed to activate from selectable meter registers or one of six external switched inputs.

Third Digit Setpoint Latching

Relays programmed with latching and manual reset

options.

Level 2

Setpoint & Relay Intermediate Mode

Level 2 uses all Level functions and is further extended by the following programmable modes. The functionality of the relay energize functions are extended by allowing the relays to be programmed with or without initial start-up inhibit.

Hysteresis, Deviation & PID Mode

This mode adds extra functionality to the basic mode by providing programmable hysteresis or deviation settings for all setpoints, or PID control from setpoints SP and SP2.

Timer Modes

These modes add even more functionality to the basic and intermediate mode by providing each setpoint with a choice of one of seven resident programmable timers.

Level 3

Setpoint & Relay Advanced Mode

Level 3 uses all Level and Level 2 functions combined with reset and trigger functions to provide an extremely powerful advanced mode.

Level 3 enables you to program all setpoints individually for operations normally requiring sophisticated controllers.

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Normally ON / Pulsed OFF Modes These are delay modes were the relay is normally on and pulses off when the setpoint activates.

1-Shot OFF mode (Programmable Minimum OFF-time)

Single actuation, programmable minimum off time and DOB 1-Shot OFF Mode (Prog. Min. OFF-time) settings.

SP ON

SP OFF

RLY ON

RLY OFF

Adj.

DOB

Adj.

MIN OFF-T

Pulse OFF mode (Programmable OFF-time) Pulse OFF Mode (Prog. MAX OFF-time) Single actuation, programmable off time and DOB.

SP ON

SP OFF

RLY ON

RLY OFF

Adj.

DOB

Adj.

MAX

OFF-T

Repeat OFF Mode

Repeat OFF Mode

Multiple actuation, programmable off and on time settings.

SP ON

### SP OFF`

### RLY ON

### RLY OFF

Adj.

OFF-T

Adj.

ON-T

Adj.

OFF-T

Each setpoint can be individually configured for basic to advanced operations in the following three levels. Each operational level is designed to provide only the required relevant setpoint and relay functions.

The modes at Level 2 and Level 3 can be set to OFF for each individual setpoint, ensuring that no other functions are programmed to influence the setup.

Page 48

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

## Level 1 - Basic Mode - Programming Procedures

Example Procedure:

The following procedure describes how to program setpoint (SP) for the following Level 1 setpoint and relay functions: LEVEL 1 SETPOINT CONFIGURATION

SP to activate from Channel (CH).

Relay to energize above or below SP value.

Relay to latch with manual relay reset.

See Setpoints and Relays Supplement (NZ201) for procedures to program all setpoint and relay operational levels (Level 1 to Level 3). (See page 3 for more information).

START HERE

CONFIGURE

LEVEL 1

SETPOINT & RELAY

FUNCTIONS

Step 1

Enter Setpoint

Programming Mode

From Step 5

Example

Step 3

Save SP1 activation

value setting

Example

Step 7

Save SP1

control settings

Step 9

Save SP1

control settings

Step 5

Enter SP1

source sub-menu

Example

Step

Step 10

Exit SPC_2.

Return to

Operational Display

Programming tip

All required setpoint activation values (SP to SP6) can be adjusted before programming setpoint and relay control function settings. See Setpoint Mode Logic Diagram on Page 50.

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 49

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Setpoint & Relay Control Settings Diagram

The diagram below and continued on Page 5 shows the st, 2nd, and 3rd digit control settings for the setpoints and relays.

Programming Tip

PXX

Page 50

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Setpoint Programming Mode continued Setpoint Programming Mode continued

Programming Tip

PXX

Programming Tip

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Registers That Can Be Selected By Front Panel Push Button Programming

A Tiger 320 Series meter has 6,44 registers which are provided for use by the operating system and the powerful Custom Macro Programming system (see page ).

40 Manually Selectable Registers Using the front panel buttons, there are 40 registers that may be selected for use within the following functions:

[CodE_1] - Display Configuration [X50]. Selection of a register as the data source for displays, peak and valley, totalizers and analog outputs. (See pages 29 & 3)

Setpoint Control Settings [X1X]. Selection of a register

as the data source for a setpoint. (See Page 50)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Selection of a destination register that is to be reset by a setpoint with the contents of a selected source register. (See Page 5)

Setpoint Control Settings [XX7]. Select which registers contents are to be copied into the destination register by a setpoint. (See Page 5)

The 40 registers that can be selected as a data source, a reset source or a reset destination for the functions above are shown in the table on the right.

The table shows, in seven columns, the functions where these registers can be used.

Where a register is more likely to be used in a particular function, a closed circle is shown in the column. For those functions where a register is less likely to be used, an open circle is shown.

No register number is shown for the first functions, because these functions are identified in the display menu for direct selection by their code names.

When cycling through the Registers Menu and then Registers to 244, the numerical Register Set will increment through each decade in turn, from to 0, while the button is held down. When [200] is reached, [oFF] or [tArE] will be displayed. To select a specific number set, the button should be released and pressed again each time the left most decade displays the desired number for that decade.

To quickly exit the numerical to 244 Register Set, hold the button down while cycling through the decades, and release it when [oFF] or [tArE] appears.

Registers that Should Not be Used The following registers are contained within the selectable to 244 Register Set, but they should not be selected because they are either reserved for future use, or for use by the operating system only:

15, 38, 47-48, 52-53, 61-64, 123-128, 140-141, 234-244

Any selection of these Registers may cause a malfunction.

Resetting and Incrementing Using Setpoints Setpoints may be used to reset and/or increment registers.

In the example shown on the right, 2 liter soft drink bottles are being filled and packed 2 to a case. Using the setpoint reset and increment feature, the number of bottles and the total number of filled cases is easily calculated and displayed.

Totalizer counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats. CH 2 counts from 0 to 2, resets, and repeats.

USING SETPOINTS TO INCREMENT AND RESET REGISTERS

Page 52

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

### Rear Panel Pinout Diagram

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 53

### Carrier Board Output Pins

Analog Outputs

Pin 44 Positive (+) analog output .

Pin 45 Negative () analog output and 2.

Pin 46 Positive (+) analog output 2.

Serial Outputs RS-232 or RS-485

Electromechanical Relays

There are 8 relay options available using the relays mounted on the main processor board. The main processor board supports relay combination options using up to four electromechanical relays. A maximum of two 5 A Form A and two 0 A Form C relays. Relay outputs for one to four setpoints can be ordered for factory installation on the main board in any required combination of up to two 0A form C and two 5A form A relays.

### Relay and Logic I/O Modules

Relay Modules with up to two 5A Form A Relays, and up to two 10A Form C Relays

Relay Modules with up to four 5A Form A Relays

Relay Modules with five or six 5A Form A Relays

TTL / 5V Output

Flash Card Memory Module

Relay Modules with up to 4 Independent 400V (210mA DC only) or (140mA AC/DC) SSRs

Open Collector Output

Opto Isolated I/0 Module for External Breakout Box with 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 16 Outputs & 6 Inputs

Page 54

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### Component Layout and External Devices

incorporates,

Modular Construction

The Tiger 320 Series of 32-bit Programmable Meter Controllers in one instrument, all the different functions required by todays automation and process control applications. This is made possible by modular construction, around standard case sizes, built to American, European, and Japanese standards.

The range comes with a wide variety of display options, including 5 or 6-digit numeric or alphanumeric displays, 6-digit LCD displays, and 5 or 0-segment red, green, or tri-color straight and circular bargraphs.

All meters are housed in one of three DIN case sizes, or the popular 4 ANSI case, and provide the ideal solution for your measurement and process control applications.

Modular construction ensures you dont have to pay for unnecessary hardware. Simply order the input and output options to suit your application.

## Tiger 320 Series GI Modular

## Construction

Analog

Output

Module

Standard Serial

Output Module

(RS-232 or RS-485)

Serial Output

R.J. Socket

Pins 37-42

Pin 46

Pin 44

Pin 35

Pin 28

### Exploded View of

### Meter Modular Boards

Output

Carrier

Board

Bargraph

Display

AC / DC

Power Pins

24, 25

Relay

Output

Module

Input Signal

Conditioner

Pins -6

Input Signal

Conditioner

Digital

Display

Display

Board

Main/Processor

Board

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 55

### Component Layout and External Devices continued

Display Board

Analog Output Module PCB

Current or

Voltage

Selection

Header

CURRENT

Position

VOLTAGE

Position

Available in Single (0~4-20mA or 0-0V) or Dual (0-0V & 0-0V)

Standard Serial Output Modules RS-232 or RS-485

Note:

Externally mounted

Ethernet compatible

communication output

modules are available

that connect directly

to the standard (RS-

232 / RS-485) serial module outputs.

RS-485 Output Module PCB

RS-232 Output Module PCB

Opto Isolated I/O Modules Connect to External DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box

0 Digital Outputs

Add-on Board

3M IDC

Cable

DIN Rail Mounting Breakout Box with Screw Terminal Blocks

Standard 6 Digital

Inputs/6 Digital Outputs

DIN Rail

Relay Module

Page 56

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

# I-SerIeS Input SIgnal CondItIonIng ModuleS

Over 120 plug-in signal conditioning modules are available to suit almost any input signal, control, or data output. Modules can be easily inserted through the rear of the meter without disassembly of the case or removal from the panel. Many modules are exclusively designed for the Tiger 320 Series, and some can also be used with the Leopard and Lynx Family panel meters and bargraphs.

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 57

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or see Texmates web site at: www.texmate.com for updated information. Pre calibrated I-Series Input Modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges are designed to be header selectable by the user, and our unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary for more information.

Unless otherwise specified, we will ship all modules pre calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scaling as shown in BOLD type. Other pre calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available.

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

*A module code shown below a compatibility symbol indicates another module is available, similar in function, which may be more suited for use with that family.

**Modules which are compatible are listed below the Model Specific Symbol.

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

Indicates a SMART MODULE. Smart Modules incorporate their own microprocessor and A/D converter. They communicate digitally with the Tiger 320 Operating System. Some also have their own SSR outputs.

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

ID06: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with External Decimal Select

Page 58

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

ID08: DC Volts, 2/20/200/Custom V DC with External LIN Table Select

IDT2: Dual RTD Input, 2/3-wire, 100 Pt

IDP2: Dual Input, 3-wire RTD and 4-20mA

IDT3: Dual Input, 3-wire RTD and DCV

IDP3: Dual InputThermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

and 4 to 20mA

IDR1: Dual Resistance Input, 0.2/2/20K

IDT6: Dual Input - Thermocouple and Load Cell 362C

IDD4: Dual Input, DCV and DCmV 2V/50mV DC

IF06: Line Frequency

IF10: Univ. Freq. / RPM / UP DOWN Counter

IDD6: Dual Input, DC mV and 4 to 20mA

TTL Input Connected to IF10

50mV/4 to 20mA DC

IDT1: Dual Thermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

Tach Generator Connected to IF10

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 59

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

NAMUR Sensor Connected to IF10

IP10: Process + 3 Digital Inputs

PNP Open Collector Proximity Switch Connected to IF10

IOR1: ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential)

Switch or Dry Contact Connected to IF10

Magnetic Pickup Connected to IF10

IQP1: Quad 4 to 20mA

IP09: 4-20mA with External LIN Table Select

IR01: Resistance, 2/3/4-Wire, 200/2K/20K

Page 60

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

IS03: Pressure/Load Cell with AutoCal

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 6

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

ITT1: Triple Thermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

IW03: DC-Watts, 10V/50mV DC

IT01: Thermocouple (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

ITT4: Triple InputT/C, T/C (J/K/R/S/T/B/N)

and 4 to 20mA

ITT8: Triple InputT/C (J/K/R/S/T/B/N),

4 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA

ITT9: Triple InputT/C (J/K/R/S/T/B/N), DCV and 50mV DC

ITP1: Triple 4 to 20mA

Page 62

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

## Input Module CoMponent gloSSary

Dual input modules, and those modules exclusively compatible with the Leopard or Tiger Families, do not have zero and span adjustments. These modules are scaled and calibrated using the internal software functions of each individual meter.

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24 V DC Output for 4-20 mA Header On some modules this header enables a 24 V DC 25 mA

(max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin

2 that can power most 4-20 mA transmitters.

INPUT RANGE Headers

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to eight positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 5 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 00% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Display span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit.

Function Select Headers

On some modules various functions such as Amps and Volts, 4 wire and 6 wire, or cold junction compensation are selected by header positions that are marked on the PCB.

Excitation Output Select Headers When excitation outputs are provided, they are typically 5 V DC max 30 mA, 0 V DC max 30 mA (300 or higher resistance) or external supply. They are selected by either a single or multiple jumper clip.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of the full scale display span.

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, by 25% of the full scale display span. For example a Negative offset enables a to 5 V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 0% steps across 00% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 63

### Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Case will mount in standard DIN cutouts

SIDE VIEW

Mosaic Fitting

135.5mm

(5.35")

65.8mm

(2.6")

9/32

DIN

Cutout spacers

136.85mm

(5.41")

138mm

(5.44")

68mm

(2.68")

66.9mm

(2.63")

9/32 DIN

Cutout spacers

65.8mm

(2.6")

Mosaic Fitting

67.75mm

(2.64")

Snug Fitting

Loose Fitting

8mm

(0.31")

130.47mm

(5.15")

14mm

(0.55")

Top & Bottom

Right-angled

Connectors

These dimensions are increased by 2mm (0.08") when the metal surround case is installed.

Metal Surround Case

P/N:(OP-MTL144X72)

NOTE: The Metal Surround Case is pre-installed at the factory and cannot be removed without damage

to the case.

Two Screw Mount Clips are supplied as standard with this case. For replacement Screw Mount Clips, Order P/N.(OP-MTLCLIP)

Various bezel

colors are available.

Black is standard.

FRONT VIEW

9/32 DIN 144x72mm

72mm

(2.84")

5mm

(0.2")

typical

144mm

(5.69")

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

Page 68

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

0/

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### GI-50EB101 features spec

## GI-50EB101 & GI-50TB101

## Programmable Meter Controllers

## Tiger 320 Series PMCs

## 101 Segment Bargraph

## 5 Digit 1 LEDs

## in a 9/32 DIN Case

TIGER FAMILY

### A powerful, intelligent, 5-digit, 101-segment Programmable Meter Controller

### (PMC) with modular outputs, input signal conditioning and advanced software

### features for monitoring, measurement, control and communication applications.

### General Features

The Tiger 320 Operating System supports an easy to use PC based Configuration Utility Program, which can be downloaded FREE from the web, and programming from front panel buttons.

The T Version supports custom macro programs that can be easily produced with the Tiger 320 Macro Development System (available FREE on the web). The Development System enables programs to be written in BASIC, which can utilize any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Red, green, or superbright red 7-segment, high LEDs with

full support for seven segment alphanumeric text.

Brightness control of LED display from front panel buttons.

0 segment red, green or tricolor bargraph that can display the signal from any of four channels or the result of a processed input signal.

Modular construction with more than 20 interchangeable input signal conditioners and more than 25 interchangeable I/O modules.

Up to 4 input channels with cross channel math for multi-

channel processing.

For applications where sensor excitation is required, modules are provided with 5V, 0V or 24 V DC voltage outputs.

On demand tare, calibration and compensation can be initi-

ated by the front panel program button.

Serial output options include RS-232, RS-485, ModBus or

direct meter-to-meter communications.

Single or dual 6-bit Isolated Analog Outputs. Programmable 0~4 to 20mA or 0 to 0V for retransmission, 4-20mA loops to drive valve actuators, remote controllers & displays, multiloop feedback and PID output. Scalable from count to full scale.

Dual independent totalizers to integrate input signals.

6 super smart, independently programmable setpoints with 8 selectable functions, including latching, deviation, hysteresis, register resetting, tracking and dual PID. Plus 7 programmable timer modes on all 6 setpoints.

Setpoint tracking, setpoint latching and manual relay reset.

Setpoints activated from any input, any register in the meter

or from any digital input.

Plug-in I/O modules include electromechanical or solid state relays, logic outputs or open collector outputs. 6 inputs & 6 outputs of opto-isolated I/O can be connected to an external DIN Rail terminal block module.

Internal program safety lockout switch to prevent tampering.

Peak & valley (max & min) with front panel recall and reset.

Real time clock with 5 year Lithium battery backup.

Data logging within the meter (up to 4000 samples with

date/time stamp).

Autozero maintenance for super stable zero reading is pro-

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

vided for use in weighing applications.

Programmable input averaging and smart digital filtering for

quick response to input signal changes.

Display text editing. Customize display text for OEM applica-

tions.

Scrolling display text messaging on T meters with macros.

Auto-sensing high voltage or optional low voltage AC / DC

power supply.

### Input Module Compatibility

TIGER FAMILY: More than 20 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for the Tiger Family of meters.

See I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Guide (Z87) for an up-to-date list.

General Features................... Specifications....................... 2 Tiger 320 Series Literature Overview... 3 Tiger 320 Series System Overview... 4-5 Planning to Use the Tiger 320....... 6-8 Block Diagram of Tiger 320 Structure... 9 Configuration Utility Program......... 0 Custom Macro Program............. Index......................... 2-3

### Table of Contents

... 9-20 Display Brightness.................. 20 Calibration Modes............... 2-24 Programming Procedures......... 25-44 Setpoint Programming Mode...... 45-5 Registers......................... 52

Functional Diagram................. 53 Connector Pinouts.................. 53 Carrier Board Output Pins........... 54 Relay and Logic I/O Modules......... 54 Component Layout & Ext. Devices... 55-56 I-Series Input Modules........... 57-63 Ordering Information............. 64-66 Custom Faceplates................. 67 Case Dimensions.................. 68

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page

Specifications

Display

Digital Display: 7-segment, (25.4 mm) LEDs.

Display Color: Red (std). Green or Super-Bright Red (optional).

Digital Display Range: -9999 to 99999 Update Rate: 3 to 0 times per second Bargraph Display: 0-segment bargraph.

Bargraph Color: Red (std). Green or Tricolor (optional).

Display Dimming: 8 brightness levels. Front Panel selectable Scrolling Display Text Messaging: Full alphanumeric, 7-segment text characters supported on T Version with macros.

Polarity: Assumed positive. Displays - negative Decimal Point: Front panel, user selectable to five positions.

Annunciators: 6 red LEDs on front panel; one per setpoint.

Overrange Indication:

Underrange Indication:

Front Panel Controls: PROGRAM, UP and DOWN.

Operating System (Tiger 320)

Processor: 32 bit with floating point maths (8.4 MHz).

Flash Memory: 64k, 4k for use by custom macros.

RAM: .25k and FeRAM 4k.

EEPROM: E Version 4k standard, T Version 32k standard. Memory upgrades available to 32k for LIN Tables and MB for Data Logging and custom macros.

Registers: 644 registers comprised of 8, 6 or 32 bit signed, unsigned or floating point registers, implemented in a combination of RAM, FeRAM, Flash and EEPROM.

Internal communication BUS: 32 bit I2C BUS Real Time Clock (option): Year:Month:Date:Hour:Minute:Second with 5 yr Lithium battery backup.

Configuration: Supports Front Panel Programming Codes and a PC-based Configuration Utility Program, which may be downloaded free from the web. T Version also supports custom macros.

Development System for Custom Macros

The Tiger 320 Macro Development System, which may be downloaded free from the web, can be used to create powerful macro software that allows Tiger 320 T Versions to be easily customized to suit any proprietary OEM application (see page ).

Installed Application Software Includes

Inputs

Inputs Available: More than 20 single, dual, triple and quad input signal conditioners available covering all types of analog, digital and mixed input signals (see page 57).

Accuracy: Tiger 320 PMCs enable the user to establish any degree of system accuracy required. Built-in compensation and linearization functions enable system accuracies of the order of 0.000% of reading for analog inputs. Stop -Start time resolution from sec to 0.7nsec. Digital input and pulse counts count.

A/D Convertors: A Dual Slope, bipolar 7 bit A/D is provided as standard on the main board. SMART modules can have 24 bit or 6 bit Delta-Sigma A/D convertors that utilize the internal I2C BUS.

Temperature Coefficient: Typically 30ppm/ C. Compensation can be utilized to achieve system temperature coefficients of ppm.

Warm Up Time: Up to 0 minutes, depending on input module.

Conversion Rate: Typically 0 samples per second. However, SMART input modules are available that can convert at 60, 240, 480 or 960 samples per second.

Control Output Rate: Can be selected for 00msec or 0msec.

Some SMART modules have SSR outputs that react within .2msec.

Excitation Voltage: Depends on input module selected. Typically, 5V, 0V or 24VDC is provided.

board.

1. Single Analog Output: Fully scalable from 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA

(or reverse) and selectable for 0 to 0VDC (or reverse).

2. Dual Analog Output: Fully scalable from 0 to 0VDC (or reverse).

Analog Output Specifications: Accuracy: 0.02% FS.

Resolution: 6-bit Delta-Sigma D/A provides 0.4A on current scaling, 250V on voltage scaling. Compliance: 500 maximum for current output. 500 minimum for voltage output. Update Rate: Typical 7 per second. Step Response: Typical 6msec to a display change. Scalable: From count to full scale.

Seven I/O Modules: Plug into any carrier board from rear.

1. Four Relay Module: Available in six combinations from one relay up to a total of two 0A Form C Relays* and two 5A Form A Relays**.

2. Four Relay Module: Available with one to four 5A Form A Relays**.

3. Six Relay Module: Available with five or six 5A Form A Relays**.

*Form C Relay Specifications: 0A 240VAC~/2 HP, 8A 24VDC. Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed. **Form A Relay Specifications: 5A 240VAC, 4A 24VDC.

Isolation 3000V. UL and CSA listed.

4. Four Solid State Relay (SSR) Module: Available with one to four independent (20mA DC only) or (40mA AC/DC) SSRs (400V max).

5. Six Output 5VDC / TTL or Open Collector: Available with 0 to 5V

or 0 to V+ (40VDC max).

6. Opto Isolated I/O Module: Available in either 6 Outputs & 6 Inputs, or 6 Outputs and 6 Inputs. For connection to an external breakout box.

7. Flash Card Memory Module: Available with 8 or 6 MB memory.

Power Supplies

Case Dimensions: 9/32 DIN, 44x72mm (5.69 x 2.84) Case Material: 94V-0 UL rated self-extinguishing polycarbonate.

Weight: .5 oz (0.79 lbs), 4 oz (0.96 lbs) when packed.

Approvals

CE: As per EN-6000-3/4/6 and EN-600-.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

GI-50EB0 320 DS (NZ309)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

## Leopard Family Panel Meters and Bargraphs

Individual Leopard Family meters are covered in separate user manuals. Each manual provides a brief description of the meter’s programmable functions and memory, hardware, and software options. They also describe how to configure the display for each input channel, calibrate a channel, and configure each input channel with a specific measurement task in easy to follow procedures. They also provide general data sheet information such as specifications, pinout details, and case size dimensions.

## Leopard Family Digital Meters

- BL-40
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40PSF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40JANUS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

## Leopard Family Bargraphs

- BL-B51D40
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101D40
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101D40PS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101Q
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B202Q
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- PL-B101D40
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

### BL-40

LEOPARD FAMILY

## BL-40

## Leopard Panel Meter

## 4 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/16 DIN CASE

An economically smart programmable meter relay with isolated 4 to 20 mA retransmission or control loop output capability for measurement and control applications in a 96x24mm case.

### General Features

### Input Module Compatibility

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current Pressure AC/DC Voltage Process Load Cell

Prototype

Resistance

*Temperature

4 to 20 mA

*See model BL-40H for higher accuracy digitally linearized

thermocouple and RTD

Optional isolated 6 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 0 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 999 to 9999 (2000 counts).

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 5-48 V AC / 0-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 0 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4-digit LED

with display range 999 to 9999 (2000 counts).

Three annunciator LEDs provide front panel alarm status

indication for up to three setpoints.

One 0 Amp Form C and one 5 Amp Form A relay, or up to

three 5 Amp Form A relays are available.

When analog output is installed, one 0 Amp Form C or two 5

Amp Form A relays can be supported.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

Software Features

Three-button programming from the front panel

(UP, DOWN and PROGRAM buttons).

Three front panel selectable ranges.

Front panel selectable four-level brightness control of digital dis-

play, and setpoint LEDs.

Three programmable setpoints.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below

(LO) each setpoint.

Hysteresis setting for all three setpoints. Delay on make and

delay on break for SP and SP2.

Peak and Valley. View and Reset.

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Modular Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters. Some examples are shown on pages 0-2.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:...........4 bit single slope Accuracy:...................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............00 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......5 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................4 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Red, Green or Super Bright Red (optn). Range 999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:......................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:..Top segments of digital display flash Negative Overrange:.Bottom segments of digital display flash Relay Output:............Three 5 Amp Form A relays or one 0 Amp

Form C, and one 5 Amp Form A relay.

Analog Output:..........Isolated 6 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out).......... 0-0 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC @ 2.5W max 3.2W PS2.........................5-48 VAC / 0-72 VDC @ 2.5W max 3.2W Operating Temp.:.......0 to 60 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:...../6 DIN Bezel 96x24mm

Depth behind bezel 22.2mm (4.83") Plus 2.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connectors

Weight:.......................7 oz., 9 oz when packed

### Index

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page

### Controls and Indicators

Program lockout header

behind face plate.

SP3

SP2

## Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The P button is used to move from one program step to the next. When button, it initiates the button, it

calibration mode. When pressed at the same time as the initiates the setpoint setting mode.

pressed at the same time as the

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the button alone, allows you to view and reset the Peak and Valley (Highest and Lowest Readings.)

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter. (cid:19)(cid:24)(cid:20)(cid:34)

PROGRAM

BUTTON

IR02(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:20)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:80)(cid:85)(cid:70)(cid:79)(cid:85)(cid:74)(cid:80)(cid:78)(cid:70)(cid:85)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:18)(cid:44)(cid:1)(cid:78)(cid:74)(cid:79)(cid:1)(cid:9)(cid:17)(cid:14)(cid:39)(cid:15)(cid:52)(cid:15)(cid:10)

DOWN ARROW

BUTTON

UP ARROW

BUTTON

Down Button

When in the operational display, pressing the you to view, but not change, the setting of setpoint , 2 and 3.

button alone, allows

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

### Glossary of Programming Symbols

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The fol-lowing symbols are used throughout the logic diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

This symbol

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

represents

the

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP ARROW button.

This is the DOWN ARROW button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When two or more buttons are shown, each with an arrow, this indicates that there is a number of programming choices.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If the display is shown with XXXX, it means the value displayed will be the previously set value. When a number is shown, it indicates the initial factory default setting or a specific example number.

When two displays are shown together

with bursts, this indicates that the display is

toggling (flashing) between the name of the

function and the value.

[Span]

Text or numbers shown between square

brackets in a procedure indicate the pro-

[10000]

gramming code name of the function or the

value displayed on the meter display.

When the

and

buttons are shown

together, the display value can be increased

by pressing and releasing the

button

or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

When the

and

buttons are shown

with two displays, either display can be

selected by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

When there are more than two display selec-

tions they are shown in brackets below the

first display and are also selectable by press-

ing and releasing the

buttons.

A dotted box indicates these functions are

omitted or bypassed when the related hard-

ware is not present

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

### Software Logic Tree

The BL-40 is an intelligent meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

After the meter has been powered up, the four digits light up for three seconds and then settle to the operational display indicating the input signal.

15 Second Program Timeout The meter has a 5 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 5 seconds, at any stage of the programming sequence the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the P button in the preceding step will not be saved.

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Digital Calibration Mode

This mode enables the meter to be calibrated with an automatic scale factor calculation, by applying a high input signal, entering the desired reading for that signal, then applying a zero or low input signal, and then entering the desired 0 or low reading. The meter then automatically calculates and programs in the requisite scale factor, within the following parameters.

. Positive and negative signals may be applied, but the difference between the high and the low signal inputs must be at least 000

counts or Err will be indicated.

2. Positive and Negative values for the desired reading can be entered, but the scale factor created can not exceed the Digital Display Span capability of the meter which is 2,000 counts between 999 to 9999.

3. The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between V DC to + 2 V DC. Any outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange regardless of the Digital Display Span scaled.

Note: Most input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meters digital scale factor is set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 000 with a .000 V input, any pre-calibrated signal conditioner with an output that does not exceed V to + 2 V, will read correctly in the meter without any further calibration.

### Digital Calibration Procedure

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode ) Press the P and Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [ZEro] and the previous zero setting.

buttons at the same time.

button.

STEP B Select Between Two Point Digital Calibration of Input Signal and

Two Point Analog Output

Note: If the analog output option is not present, Step B is skipped and the program goes directly from Step A to Step C.

) Press the

to [iP] input cAL.

button to select the display toggling from [cAL]

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [ZEro] and the previous zero setting.

STEP C Set the Meters Low Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

) Apply a zero or low signal to the meter. (Positive or negative values are allowed)

and

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied low input signal.

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SPAn] and the previous span setting.

STEP D Set the Meters High Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

) Apply a high input signal to the meter.

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied high input signal.

3) Press the P button.

and

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

The Digital Calibration Procedure Mode is Now Complete.

If the digital calibration was successfully completed, the menu branches

to the DECIMAL POINT AND BRIGHTNESS SELECTION,

(see page 5) and the display shows previous [dp] selection.

ERROR

Indicates Unsuccessful Calibration

If the calibration was unsuccessful, the display indicates [Err], the new calibration settings just entered will not take effect and the previously stored setting will remain.

The three most likely causes of an error during calibration are:

) The full scale and zero signals were too similar. The full scale signal must be at least 000 counts greater than the zero or low input signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter

(999 to 9999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

### Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode ) Press the P and Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out] input calibration.

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

buttons at the same time.

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between [SPAn] and the previous [SPAn], the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Enter the Analog [oUT] Output Mode

) Press the P button. Display toggles between [cLo] and an internal scale factor.

STEP C Set or Calibrate the [cLo] Low Analog Output Range

) Select the voltage or current loop output header position on the output module. (See Component Layout on page 9).

2) Connect a multimeter to pins 8 and 9 on the output module. (See Rear Panel Pinouts on page 8). Using the

buttons, adjust the analog

and

output to the desired low value as shown on the multimeter display.

CLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 7 mA (mA output

selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected)

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [chi] and an internal scale factor.

STEP D Set or Calibrate the [chi] High Analog Output Range

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high

value as shown on the multimeter display. chi may be adjusted to any value

from 7 mA to 2 mA (mA output selected) or from 8 V to 0.3 V (volt

output selected)

2) Press the P button. The display exits the calibration mode and returns to

the operational display.

Note: Having established the Low and High range of the analog output, the digital span can now be selected which will set the two digital points between which the analog output will occur. (See Digital Span Selection below).

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP A Enter the Decimal Point and Brightness Mode Through the Sub Menu

[cAL] [oFF]

) Press the P and Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the P button. Display shows previous [dp] selection.

buttons at the same time.

STEP E Set the Decimal Point, adjust the display to the desired decimal point setting. ) Using the 2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [Br] and the previous [Br] setting.

and

STEP F Set the Display Brightness

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired brightness

setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the P button. Display brightness changes to new setting and display

t o g g l e s between [AnHi] and the previous [AnHi] setting.

### Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output

STEP G Setting the Digital Span Point for Analog High Output

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value ) Using the which sets the point at which the selected analog high output range will occur.

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and previous [AnLo] setting.

and

STEP H Setting the Digital Span Point for Analog Low Output

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value ) Using the which sets the point at which the selected analog low output range will occur.

2) Press the P button. The display exits the calibration mode and returns to

and

the operational display.

Note: Any two digital scale points from 999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital scale points for analog high and analog low can be reversed for reversed 20-4 mA output. The span of the digital scale can be as small as two counts, however small spans cause the 6 bit D to A to increment in stair case steps.

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed the software auto detects missing relays and deletes reference to them from the menu. In some cases setpoints without relays are operational for display only purposes.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode

) Press the P and Display toggles between [SP] and the previous [SP] setting.

buttons at the same time.

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 (SP1) ) Using the and 2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous [doM] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP value.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value

(0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous [dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value (0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break contact (de-energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [HYSt] and the previous [HYSt]

setting.

STEP E Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 1

and

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous [SP2] setting.

NOTE: Half of the Hysteresis value selected is applied above and below the setpoint.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

NOTE: Steps F, G, H and J have functionally the same procedure as steps B, C, D, and E shown above.

STEP F Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) STEP G Set the SP2 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting STEP H Set the SP2 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting STEP I Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 2

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP3] and the previous [SP3] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

and

STEP J Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob])

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [HYSt] and the previous [HYSt]

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

and

setting.

STEP K Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 3

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [rLYS] and the previous relay setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

and

STEP N Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS]

(H) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP, SP2, and SP3. buttons, adjust the reading on the display to the desired

and

) Using the

relay settings: [LLL-], [LHL-], [LLH-], [HHH-].

If only 2 relays installed [LH] [HL] [HH] [LL].

2) Press the P button.

The meter exits the setpoint mode and returns to the operational display.

The Setpoint Relay programming mode is now complete.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

### Functional Diagram

BL-40 Functional Diagram

with analog output and two 5 Amp Form A relays

### Connector Pinouts

This meter comes standard with screw terminal plug connections.

Connectors

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 4 and 5) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Top Catches

Release From Bottom

TO REMOVE REAR COVER

Pin Descriptions

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 Pins to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner. See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 12 Relay and Analog Output Pins

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Pin Descriptions continued

### Pins 14 and 15 AC/DC Power Input

Auto sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 VAC or 95-370 VDC (PS).

Pin 14 & Pin 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket. The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-

265 VAC/95-370 VDC (PS Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 5-48 VAC/0-72 VDC (PS2) is also available.

## Internal Header Pin out

Internal header pins 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 are for factory settings only. Not for external use!

4 HOLD. By connecting the HOLD pin to the GND pin, the displayed reading is frozen, however, A/D conversions continue.

When the HOLD pin is disconnected from the GND pin, the correct reading is displayed.

5 GND. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

+5V

VPP

HOLD

SDA

SCL

### Component Layout Component Layout

## Input Signal

## Conditioner

## Analog Output

## Module

## Main Board

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

### Component Layout continued

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate. com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 3 and 4. Also see Two Point Digital Calibration and Digital Calibration on page 4.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

IA06(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:55)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:53)(cid:83)(cid:86)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:20)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:23)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:55)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:70)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:23)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)

IA07(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:55)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:53)(cid:83)(cid:86)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)

(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)

IA02:(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:55)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:70)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)

IA08(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:46)(cid:74)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:74)(cid:66)(cid:78)(cid:81)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:53)(cid:83)(cid:86)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:34)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)

(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)

IA03(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:46)(cid:74)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:74)(cid:66)(cid:78)(cid:81)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:70)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:34)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA04: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

Fully User Scalable

IA10(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:46)(cid:74)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:74)(cid:87)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:70)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:18)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)

(cid:39)(cid:86)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:90)(cid:1)(cid:54)(cid:84)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:66)(cid:67)(cid:77)(cid:70)

Page 0

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IA12(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:46)(cid:74)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:74)(cid:87)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:46)(cid:52)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:74)(cid:72)(cid:78)(cid:66)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:70)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:66)

ID07(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:46)(cid:74)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:74)(cid:66)(cid:78)(cid:81)(cid:84)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:34)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:85)(cid:73)(cid:1)(cid:48)(cid:71)(cid:71)(cid:84)(cid:70)(cid:85)(cid:1)

(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:66)(cid:79)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)

ID01(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:55)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:36)(cid:86)(cid:84)(cid:85)(cid:80)(cid:78)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)

IF02: (cid:45)(cid:74)(cid:79)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:39)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:82)(cid:86)(cid:70)(cid:79)(cid:68)(cid:90)

ID02(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:46)(cid:74)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:74)(cid:87)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:22)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:18)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)

IGYZ(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:54)(cid:79)(cid:74)(cid:87)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:84)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:74)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:68)(cid:85)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:86)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:9)(cid:34)(cid:67)(cid:84)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:86)(cid:85)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:80)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:74)(cid:71)(cid:71)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:79)(cid:85)(cid:74)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:16)(cid:40)(cid:66)(cid:72)(cid:70)(cid:10)

(cid:1)

(cid:52)(cid:70)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:67)(cid:70)(cid:77)(cid:80)(cid:88)(cid:1)(cid:71)(cid:80)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:80)(cid:83)(cid:69)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:74)(cid:79)(cid:72)(cid:1)(cid:68)(cid:80)(cid:69)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:80)(cid:81)(cid:85)(cid:74)(cid:80)(cid:79)(cid:84)

ID03(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:46)(cid:74)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:74)(cid:66)(cid:78)(cid:81)(cid:84)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:34)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)

ID04(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:78)(cid:81)(cid:84)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:22)(cid:34)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)

ID09(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:34)(cid:78)(cid:81)(cid:84)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:18)(cid:34)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)

IP01:(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:80)(cid:68)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:45)(cid:80)(cid:80)(cid:81)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:21)(cid:14)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:34)

IP02:(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:80)(cid:68)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:45)(cid:80)(cid:80)(cid:81)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:21)(cid:14)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:34)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:85)(cid:73)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:55)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:57)(cid:36)(cid:1)

(cid:17)(cid:26)(cid:18)(cid:38)

(cid:39)(cid:86)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:90)(cid:1)(cid:54)(cid:84)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:66)(cid:67)(cid:77)(cid:70)

(cid:39)(cid:86)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:90)(cid:1)(cid:54)(cid:84)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:66)(cid:67)(cid:77)(cid:70)

ID05(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:55)(cid:80)(cid:77)(cid:85)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:36)(cid:86)(cid:84)(cid:85)(cid:80)(cid:78)(cid:1)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:85)(cid:73)(cid:1)(cid:48)(cid:71)(cid:71)(cid:84)(cid:70)(cid:85)

(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:66)(cid:79)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)(cid:15)(cid:1)

IP03:(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:80)(cid:68)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:42)(cid:79)(cid:81)(cid:86)(cid:85)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:18)(cid:14)(cid:22)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:36)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:85)(cid:73)(cid:1)(cid:48)(cid:71)(cid:71)(cid:84)(cid:70)(cid:85)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)

(cid:39)(cid:86)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:90)(cid:1)(cid:54)(cid:84)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:52)(cid:68)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:66)(cid:67)(cid:77)(cid:70)

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IP07: (cid:54)(cid:79)(cid:74)(cid:87)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:84)(cid:66)(cid:77)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:80)(cid:68)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:1)(cid:42)(cid:79)(cid:81)(cid:86)(cid:85)

(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:22)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:18)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:78)(cid:34)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:78)(cid:34)(cid:16)(cid:36)(cid:86)(cid:84)(cid:85)(cid:80)(cid:78)

(cid:19)(cid:19)(cid:21)(cid:36)

IS05(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:86)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:16)(cid:45)(cid:80)(cid:66)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:36)(cid:70)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:78)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:55)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:22)(cid:16)(cid:18)(cid:17)(cid:55)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)(cid:1)(cid:21)(cid:14)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:83)(cid:70)

IPT1(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:80)(cid:85)(cid:80)(cid:85)(cid:90)(cid:81)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:35)(cid:80)(cid:66)(cid:83)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:71)(cid:80)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:36)(cid:86)(cid:84)(cid:85)(cid:80)(cid:78)(cid:1)(cid:37)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:74)(cid:72)(cid:79)

IS06(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:86)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:16)(cid:45)(cid:80)(cid:66)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:36)(cid:70)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:85)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)(cid:15)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:78)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:55)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:21)(cid:14)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:83)(cid:70)

IR02(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:20)(cid:1)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:80)(cid:85)(cid:70)(cid:79)(cid:85)(cid:74)(cid:80)(cid:78)(cid:70)(cid:85)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:18)(cid:44)(cid:1)(cid:78)(cid:74)(cid:79)(cid:1)(cid:9)(cid:17)(cid:14)(cid:39)(cid:15)(cid:52)(cid:15)(cid:10)

IS07:(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:86)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:16)(cid:45)(cid:80)(cid:66)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:36)(cid:70)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:85)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)(cid:15)(cid:1)(cid:41)(cid:74)(cid:72)(cid:73)(cid:1)(cid:42)(cid:78)(cid:81)(cid:70)(cid:69)(cid:66)(cid:79)(cid:68)(cid:70)(cid:13)

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IR03(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:45)(cid:74)(cid:79)(cid:70)(cid:66)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:80)(cid:85)(cid:70)(cid:79)(cid:85)(cid:74)(cid:80)(cid:78)(cid:70)(cid:85)(cid:70)(cid:83)(cid:1)(cid:18)(cid:44)(cid:1)(cid:78)(cid:74)(cid:79)

IR04(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:74)(cid:84)(cid:85)(cid:66)(cid:79)(cid:68)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:44)(cid:1)(cid:9)(cid:45)(cid:90)(cid:79)(cid:89)(cid:1)(cid:80)(cid:79)(cid:77)(cid:90)(cid:10)

IR05(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:51)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:74)(cid:84)(cid:85)(cid:66)(cid:79)(cid:68)(cid:70)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:44)(cid:1)(cid:9)(cid:45)(cid:70)(cid:80)(cid:81)(cid:66)(cid:83)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:80)(cid:79)(cid:77)(cid:90)(cid:10)

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire

IS04(cid:27)(cid:1)(cid:49)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:84)(cid:84)(cid:86)(cid:83)(cid:70)(cid:16)(cid:45)(cid:80)(cid:66)(cid:69)(cid:1)(cid:36)(cid:70)(cid:77)(cid:77)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:85)(cid:1)(cid:38)(cid:89)(cid:68)(cid:15)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:17)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:78)(cid:55)(cid:16)(cid:55)(cid:13)(cid:1)(cid:21)(cid:16)(cid:23)(cid:30)(cid:88)(cid:74)(cid:83)(cid:70)

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

For higher accuracy digitally linearized RTD (P385 or P392) and Thermocouples (J/K/R and T), see the special Leopard Temperature meters DL-40H(/8 DIN) and BL-40H(/6 DIN) which use only two special thermocouple modules which are not compatible with regular Leopard Family meters.

IT-10

User Selectable Accuracy 0.05% + 2 digits.

IT-11

User Selectable Accuracy 0.05% + 2 digits.

RTD 00 Pt, 3/4 wire, C/F, /0. resolution

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 5 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 00% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 999 counts to 00 (one count).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 0% steps across 00% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-00 to +00 counts).

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span.

For example a Negative offset enables a to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Analog Calibration

In addition to the analog calibration capabilities that enable many modules to be interchanged between different meters without loss of accuracy the Leopard Family of meters have enhanced Digital Calibration functions. See Page 4

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. For negative inputs, Leopard Family Meters will display negative overrange at 50% of full scale range.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 50 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from 999 (counts) to 00 (one count).

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 0 V to read 0 to 800 gallons.

Signal Span = 0V, Digital Display Span = 800 counts

Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 800 counts with an input of only .8 V which is (.80)=8% of the examples 0 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 8% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position ) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 0 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

800.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display

### Case Dimensions

Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: to 5 V to read 00 to 500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 600 counts

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 600 counts for an input of .6 V which is (.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input -5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 00% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 600 counts for an input of 4V which is 00% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts.

Apply V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 00. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +00.0% Signal Span = 6 mA, Digital Display Span = 000 counts.

The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 000 counts with an input of only 0 mA which is (06)=62.5% of the examples 6 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 6 mA input would then read 000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts.

Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000.

Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 000. Select decimal point XXXX to display 00.0 to 00.0.

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

### the Leader in Measurement and Control Instrumentation

# Leopard Family Meters and Bargraphs

## Smart, Programmable Bargraph Relays with Isolated 16 Bit 4-20 mA or 0-10 V Outputs

6FL-B202Q

Red or Green Display

### NEW!

6FL-B101Q

Red or Green Display for Left, Right and Center Bar Tri-Color option for Center Bar only

6FL-B101D40 Programmable Tri Color or Mono Color, Red or Green Display

6PL-B101D40

Red Display

Shown with

Optional white

face plate. Black

is standard.

BL-B51D40

Red Display

9/64 DIN 36x144 mm (1.42x5.69)

3/32 DIN

24x144 mm

(0.95x5.69)

1/16 DIN

24x96 mm

(0.95x3.78)

### LEOPARD FAMILY FEATURES

Smart 4 digit meters, tricolor and mono-color bargraphs

Front-panel digital scaling, offset, and setpoints

Bargraph can be independently scaled to a sensitivity of 100 counts full scale

within any portion of the digital scale

Over 38 different I-Series Input Signal Conditioners. For more info, please refer to

the I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules catalog.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4-20 mA transmitters and 5 or

10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors

Dual 10 & 5-amp relays, 4 relays total plus 16-bit analog output

1/16 DIN meters have one 10 Amp relay or two 5 Amp relays plus 16-bit analog

output or an extra 5 Amp relay

Auto-sensing AC/DC, wide range power supplies, 85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC or

18-36 V AC / 9-60 V DC

Quick, easy mounting into any panel thickness

Direct flush mount into mosaic panels

Optional NEMA 4X membrane touch screen face plates

Optional NEMA 4X, IP65 clear polycarbonate lens covers

Optional metal surround case for DL and FL meters.

Standard plug-in screw terminal connectors are provided

5FL-B101D40PS with horizontal face plate option Programmable Tri Color or Mono Color, Red or Green Display

5FL-B202Q horizontal face plate option Red or Green Display

NEW!

BL-404

5DL-40 w/0.8 display option

5DL-40 Water Proof Membrane Touch-pad Option

5DL-40

BL-40 DS (BL2)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### BL-40

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: BL-40-DR-PS1-IA01-0IC-R1-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and a 75-DMT96X24

basic model number

BL-40....... 96x24mm, Leopard, 4 Digit

standard options for this model number

Order Code Suffix

Description

display

DR.... Red LED, 0.56 inch high DB...... Superbright Red LED, 0.56 inch high DG...... Green LED, 0.56 inch high

power supply

PS1... 85 - 265VAC / 95 - 370VDC PS2..... 18 - 48VAC / 10 - 72VDC

input modules (partial list. see www.texmate.com)

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type.

IA01.... AC-Volts Scaled RMS, 200/600V AC IA02.... AC-Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC IA03.... AC-mA Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC IA04.... AC-Amps Scaled RMS, 0-1 Amp AC (0-100.00) IA05.... AC-Amps Scaled RMS, 0-5 Amp AC (0-100.00) IA06.... AC-Volts True RMS, 200/600V AC IA07.... AC-Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC IA08.... AC-mA True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC IA09.... AC-Amps True RMS, 0-1 Amp AC (0-100.00) IA10.... AC-Millivolt, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC IA11.... AC-Amps True RMS, 0-5 Amp AC (0-100.00) IA12.... AC-Millivolt, True RMS, 100mV AC ID01.... DC-Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc ID02.... DC-Millivolt, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc ID03.... DC-Milliamp, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc ID04.... DC-Amps, 5A DC ID05.... DC-Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC w/Offset and 24V Exc ID07.... DC-Milliamp, 2/20/200mA DC w/Offset and 24V Exc ID09.... DC-Amps, 1A DC IF02..... Line Frequency, 50-500VAC, 199.9Hz, or optional 400Hz IGYZ*... Universal Direct Pressure *View the IGOrdering Code on page 11 to determine the value for Y & Z (IGAZ to IGKZ) IP01.... Process Loop, 4-20mA(0-100.00) IP02.... Process Loop, 4-20mA(0-100.00) w/24VDC Exc IP03.... Process Input, 1-5V DC(0-100.00) w/Offset, 24V Exc IP07.... Universal Process 2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom IPT1.... Prototype Board for Custom Design IR02.... 3-Wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.) IR03.... Linear Potentiometer, 3-wire, 1K min IR05.... Resistance 2K IS01.... Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02.... Pressure 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS04.... Pressure Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire IS05.... Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire IS06.... Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IS07.... Pressure 20/2mV/V with High Impedance and External Excitation IT03..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-190.0 to 199.0F) IT06..... Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT07..... Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999F) IT08..... Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C) IT09..... Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260C) IT14..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.0 to 199.0C)

analoG output*

OIC..... Isolated analog 4-20mA (with a Max. Two-5A Form A Relays) OIV..... Isolated analog 0-10VDC (with a Max. Two-5A Form A Relays) *Note: When either of the Analog Output options is installed, only the R1, R2 and R11 Relay Output options can be co-installed (see below).

relay output

R1...... Single 5A Form A Relay R2...... Dual 5A Form A Relays R3...... Three 5A Form A Relays; SP1 & SP2 common** R11..... Single 10A Form C Relay R16..... Single 10A Form C & Single 5A Form A Relays** **R3 & R16 cannot be co-installed with Analog Output options.

special options and accessories (oas)

Part Number

Description

special options (specify inputs or outputs & req. reading)

CR-CHANGE......... Calibrated Range Change to another Standard Range CS-L/40............ Custom Scaling within any Stnd. or Custom Selectable Range CSR-L/40........... Custom Selectable Range Installation or Modification CSS-L/40........... Custom Special Scaling beyond the Standard Range COA-L/SINGLE....... Custom Output - Special Scaling of Analog Output COR-L/RELAY........ Custom Output - Relays Installed in Non-Standard Locations CCP-L/SETUP........ NRC to Set-up Custom Configuration - Functions, Codes CCP-L/INSTL........ Factory Installation - Custom Configuration

accessories (specify serial # for custom artwork installation)

75-DMT96X24........ Side Slide Brackets (2 pc) - extra set, extra strength 75-DBBZ96X24........ Extra Black Bezel for 96x24mm Case ART-FS-S/D/C........ NRC for artwork & set-up Faceplate/Desc/Co.Logo ART-FS-S/D.......... NRC for artwork & set-up Faceplate/Desc ART-FS-001.......... Install Custom Faceplate per meter - 1 color 93-PLUG2P-DP....... Extra Screw Terminal Conn., 2 Pin Power Plug 93-PLUG2P-DR....... Extra Screw Terminal Conn., 2 Pin Plug 93-PLUG3P-DR....... Extra Screw Terminal Conn., 3 Pin Plug 93-PLUG4P-DR....... Extra Screw Terminal Conn., 4 Pin Plug DN.CAS96X24L....... Extra Complete 96x24mm Case with bezel OP-MTLCLIP......... Screw Mounting Clips (2 pc) to screw tighten slide brackets 75-DTP96X24......... Black Metal Trim Plate (96x24mm Case) 1 Meter 75-DTP2X9624........ Black Metal Trim Plate (96x24mm Case) 2 Meters 75-DTP3X9624........ Black Metal Trim Plate (96x24mm Case) 3 Meters

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40 DS (BL2)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BL-40 DS Features and Specs

LEOPARD FAMILY

## BL-40

## Leopard Panel Meter

## 4 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/16 DIN CASE

An economically smart programmable meter relay with isolated 4 to 20 mA retransmission or control loop output capability for measurement and control applications in a 96x24mm case.

### General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current Pressure AC/DC Voltage Process Load Cell

Prototype

Resistance

*Temperature

4 to 20 mA

*See model BL-40H for higher accuracy digitally linearized

thermocouple and RTD

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4-digit LED

with display range 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Three annunciator LEDs provide front panel alarm status

indication for up to three setpoints.

One 9Amp Form C and one 4 Amp Form A relay, or up to

three 4 Amp Form A relays are available.

When analog output is installed, one 9 Amp Form C or two 4

Amp Form A relays can be supported.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while

providing a fast display response to real level changes.

UL Listed

Software Features

Three-button programming from the front panel

(UP, DOWN and PROGRAM buttons).

Three front panel selectable ranges.

Front panel selectable four-level brightness control of digital dis-

play, and setpoint LEDs.

Three programmable setpoints.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below

(LO) each setpoint.

Hysteresis setting for all three setpoints. Delay on make and

delay on break for SP1 and SP2.

Peak and Valley. View and Reset.

### Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Modular Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:...........14 bit single slope Accuracy:...................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......5 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................4 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Red, Green or Super Bright Red (optn). Range 1999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:......................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:..Top segments of digital display flash Negative Overrange:.Bottom segments of digital display flash Relay Output:............Three 4 Amp Form A relays or one 9 Amp

Form C, and one 5 Amp Form A relay.

Analog Output:..........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out).......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................

PS2.........................

Operating Temp.:.......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:.....1/16 DIN Bezel 96x24mm

85-265 VAC 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 2.3W 15-48 VAC 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 2.3W

Depth behind bezel 122.2mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connectors

Weight:.......................7 oz., 9 oz when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BL-40PSF

## Leopard Panel Meter

## 4 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/16 DIN CASE

LEOPARD FAMILY

### An economically smart meter relay with programmable scale factor

### and offset with isolated 4 to 20 mA output retransmission capability

### for measurement and control applications in a 96x48mm case.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current Pressure AC/DC Voltage Process Load Cell

Prototype

Resistance

*Temperature

4 to 20 mA

*See model BL-40H for higher accuracy digitally linearized

thermocouple and RTD

Optional isolated 6 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 0 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 999 to 9999 (2000 counts).

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 5-48 V AC / 0-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 0 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4-digit LED

with display range 999 to 9999 (2000 counts).

Three annunciator LEDs provide front panel alarm status

indication for up to three setpoints.

One 0 Amp Form C and one 5 Amp Form A relay, or up to

three 5 Amp Form A relays are available.

When analog output is installed, one 0 Amp Form C or two 5

Amp Form A relays can be supported.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

### Software Features

Three-button programming from the front panel

(UP, DOWN and PROGRAM buttons).

Three front panel selectable ranges.

Front panel selectable four-level brightness control of digital dis-

play, and setpoint LEDs.

Three programmable setpoints.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below

(LO) each setpoint.

Hysteresis setting for all three setpoints. Delay on make and

delay on break for SP and SP2.

Peak and Valley. View and Reset.

### Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Modular Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters. Some examples are shown on pages 0-2.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:...........4 bit single slope Accuracy:...................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............00 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......5 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................4 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Red, Green or Super Bright Red (optn). Range 999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:......................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:..Top segments of digital display flash Negative Overrange:.Bottom segments of digital display flash Relay Output:............Three 5 Amp Form A relays or one 0 Amp

Form C, and one 5 Amp Form A relay.

Analog Output:..........Isolated 6 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out).......... 0-0 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC @ 2.5W max 3.2W PS2.........................5-48 VAC / 0-72 VDC @ 2.5W max 3.2W Operating Temp.:.......0 to 60 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:...../6 DIN Bezel 96x24mm

Depth behind bezel 22.2mm (4.83") Plus 2.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connectors

Weight:.......................7 oz, 9 oz when packed

### Index

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page

### Controls and Indicators

Program lockout header

behind face plate.

SP3

SP2

PROGRAM

BUTTON P

UP ARROW

BUTTON

DOWN ARROW

BUTTON

### Glossary of Programming Symbols

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The fol-lowing symbols are used throughout the logic diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

This symbol represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP button.

This is the DOWN button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When two or more buttons are shown, each with an arrow, this indicates that there is a number of programming choices.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If the display is shown with XXXX it means the value displayed will be the previously set value. When a number is shown it indicates the initial factory default setting or a specific example number.

## Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The P button is used to move from one program step to the next. When pressed at the same time as the button, it initiates the calibration mode. When pressed at the same time as the button, it initiates the setpoint setting mode.

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the button alone, allows you to view and reset the Peak and Valley (Highest and Lowest Readings.)

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When in the operational display, pressing the you to view, but not change, the setting of setpoint , 2 and 3.

button alone, allows

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

When two displays are shown together

with bursts, this indicates that the display is

toggling (flashing) between the name of the

function and the value.

[Span]

Text or numbers shown between square

brackets in a procedure indicate the pro-

[10000]

gramming code name of the function or the

value displayed on the meter display.

When the

and

buttons are shown

together, the display value can be increased

by pressing and releasing the

button

or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

When the

and

buttons are shown

with two displays, either display can be

selected by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

When there are more than two display selec-

tions they are shown in brackets below the

first display and are also selectable by press-

ing and releasing the

buttons.

A dotted box indicates these functions are

omitted or bypassed when the related hard-

ware is not present

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

### Software Logic Tree

The BL-40PSF is an intelligent meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

After the meter has been powered up, the four digits light up for three seconds and then settle to the operational display indicating the input signal.

15 Second Program Timeout The meter has a 5 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 5 seconds, at any stage of the programming sequence the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the P button in the preceding step will not be saved.

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Digital Rescaling

The DL-40PSF meter may be rescaled without applying an external signal by changing the Offset and Scale factor.

Offset is the reading that the meter will display for a zero input. The Offset may be set to any value from -999 to +9999. The default value of the Offset is 0

Scale factor is the gain of the meter. The displayed reading is directly proportional to the Scale factor. The default value of the scale factor is 2000, but it may be set to any value between -999 and +9999.

For an input of 2V a calibrated meter will read 2000 with the default Scale factor of 2000, 3000 with a Scale factor of 3000 and 500 with a Scale factor of 500

If a linear scale is represented by mx + b, then the Scale Factor corresponds to the slope m and the Offset corresponds to the intercept b

The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between V DC to + 2 V DC. Outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange.

Note: Most input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meters digital Scale Factor is set to

2000 and Offset set to 0 then, any pre-calibrated signal conditioner with an output that does not exceed V to + 2 V, will read correctly in the meter without any further calibration.

### Digital Rescaling Procedure

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode ) Press the P and Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out].

buttons at the same time.

button.

STEP B Select Between Calibration of Input or Output

Note: If the analog output option is not present, Step B is skipped and the program goes directly from Step A to Step C.

) Press the

to [iP].

button to select the display toggling from [cAL]

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [oFFS] and the previous offset setting.

STEP C Set the Offset on the Digital Display

) Using the

desired offset. This is the reading that the meter will display for a

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

and

zero input

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [ScAL] and the previous Scale factor.

STEP D Set the Scale factor on the Digital Display and

) Using the

desired Scale factor. The default value is 2000, for which a 2V

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

input will read 2000. If the scale factor is changed the display will change proportionately. Therefore if the Scale factor is changed to

000 then for the same 2V input the display would read 000.

3) Press the P button.

The Digital Calibration Procedure Mode is Now Complete.

The menu branches to the DECIMAL POINT AND BRIGHTNESS SE LECTION, (see page 5) and the display flashes [dP] and the previous decimal point selection.

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

### Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode ) Press the P and Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out] input calibration.

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

buttons at the same time.

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between [SPAn] and the previous [SPAn], the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Enter the Analog [oUT] Output Mode

) Press the P button. Display toggles between [cLo] and an internal scale factor.

STEP C Set or Calibrate the [cLo] Low Analog Output Range

) Select the voltage or current loop output header position on the output module. (See Component Layout on page 9).

2) Connect a multimeter to pins 8 and 9 on the output module. (See Rear Panel Pinouts on page 8). Using the

buttons, adjust the analog

and

output to the desired low value as shown on the multimeter display.

CLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 7 mA (mA output

selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected)

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [Chi] and an internal scale factor.

STEP D Set or Calibrate the [chi] High Analog Output Range

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high

value as shown on the multimeter display. chi may be adjusted to any value

from 7 mA to 2 mA (mA output selected) or from 8 V to 0.3 V (volt

output selected)

2) Press the P button. The display exits the calibration mode and returns to

the operational display.

Note: Having established the Low and High range of the analog output, the digital span can now be selected which will set the two digital points between which the analog output will occur. (See Digital Span Selection below).

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP A Enter the Decimal Point and Brightness Mode Through the Sub Menu

[cAL] [oFF]

) Press the P and Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the P button. Display shows previous [dp] selection.

buttons at the same time.

STEP E Set the Decimal Point, adjust the display to the desired decimal point setting. ) Using the 2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [Br] and the previous [Br] setting.

and

STEP F Set the Display Brightness

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired brightness

setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the P button. Display brightness changes to new setting and display

toggles between [AnHi] and the previous [AnHi] setting.

### Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output

STEP G Setting the Digital Span Point for Analog High Output

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value ) Using the which sets the point at which the selected analog high output range will occur.

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and previous [AnLo] setting.

and

STEP H Setting the Digital Span Point for Analog Low Output

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value ) Using the which sets the point at which the selected analog low output range will occur.

2) Press the P button. The display exits the calibration mode and returns to

and

the operational display.

Note: Any two digital scale points from 999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital scale points for analog high and analog low can be reversed for reversed 20-4 mA output. The span of the digital scale can be as small as two counts however small spans cause the 6 bit D to A to increment in stair case steps.

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed the software auto detects missing relays and deletes reference to them from the menu. In some cases setpoints without relays are operational for display only purposes.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode

) Press the P and Display toggles between [SP] and the previous [SP] setting.

buttons at the same time.

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 (SP1) ) Using the and 2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous [doM] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP value.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value

(0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous [dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting

) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value (0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break contact (de-energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [HYSt] and the previous [HYSt] setting.

STEP E Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 1

and

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous [SP2] setting.

NOTE: Half of the Hysteresis value selected is applied above and below the setpoint.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

NOTE: Steps F, G, H and J have functionally the same procedure as steps B, C, D, and E shown above.

STEP F Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) STEP G Set the SP2 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting STEP H Set the SP2 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting STEP I Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 2

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP3] and the previous [SP3] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

and

STEP J Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob])

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [HYSt] and the previous [HYSt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

and

STEP K Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 3

) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [rLYS] and the previous relay setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

and

STEP N Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS]

(H) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP, SP2, and SP3. buttons, adjust the reading on the display to the desired

and

) Using the

relay settings: [LLL-], [LHL-], [LLH-], [HHH-].

If only 2 relays installed [LH] [HL] [HH] [LL].

2) Press the P button.

The meter exits the setpoint mode and returns to the operational display.

The Setpoint Relay programming mode is now complete.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

### Functional Diagram

BL-40PSF Functional Diagram

with analog output and two 5 Amp Form A relays

### Connector Pinouts

### Connectors

This meter comes standard with screw terminal plug connections.

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 4 and 5) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

### Pin Descriptions

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 Pins to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner. See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 12 Relay and Analog Output Pins

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Pin Descriptions continued

### Pins 14 and 15 AC/DC Power Input

Auto sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 VAC or 95-370 VDC (PS).

Pin 14 & Pin 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket. The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-

265 VAC/95-370 VDC (PS Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 5-48 VAC/0-72 VDC (PS2) is also available.

## Internal Header Pin out

Internal header pins 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 are for factory settings only. Not for external use!

4 HOLD. By connecting the HOLD pin to the GND pin, the displayed reading is frozen, however, A/D conversions continue.

When the HOLD pin is disconnected from the GND pin, the correct reading is displayed.

5 GND. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

+5V

VPP

HOLD

SDA

SCL

### Component Layout Component Layout

## Input Signal

## Conditioner

## Analog Output

## Module

## Main Board

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

### Component Layout continued

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate. com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 3 and 4. Also see Two Point Digital Calibration and Digital Calibration on page 4.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300/600V AC

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/600V AC

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA04: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

Fully User Scalable

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

Fully User Scalable

Page 0

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IF02: Line Frequency

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

Fully User Scalable

Fully User Scalable

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

Fully User Scalable

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IP07: Universal Process Input 2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

224C

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IPT1: Prototype Board for Custom Design

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6=wire

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

For higher accuracy digitally linearized RTD (P385 or P392) and Thermocouples (J/K/R and T), see the special Leopard Temperature meters DL-40H(/8 DIN) and BL-40H(/6 DIN) which use only two special thermocouple modules which are not compatible with regular Leopard Family meters.

IT-10

User Selectable Accuracy 0.05% + 2 digits.

IT-11

User Selectable Accuracy 0.05% + 2 digits.

RTD 00 Pt, 3/4 wire, C/F, /0. resolution

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 5 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 00% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 999 counts to 00 (one count).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 0% steps across 00% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-00 to +00 counts).

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span.

For example a Negative offset enables a to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Analog Calibration

In addition to the analog calibration capabilities that enable many modules to be interchanged between different meters without loss of accuracy the Leopard Family of meters have enhanced Digital Calibration functions. See Page 4

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. For negative inputs, Leopard Family Meters will display negative overrange at 50% of full scale range.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 50 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from 999 (counts) to 00 (one count).

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 0 V to read 0 to 800 gallons.

Signal Span = 0V, Digital Display Span = 800 counts

Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 800 counts with an input of only .8 V which is (.80)=8% of the examples 0 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 8% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position ) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 0 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

800.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

### Case Dimensions

Example B: to 5 V to read 00 to 500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 600 counts

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 600 counts for an input of .6 V which is (.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input -5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 00% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 600 counts for an input of 4V which is 00% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts.

Apply V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 00. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +00.0% Signal Span = 6 mA, Digital Display Span = 000 counts.

The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 000 counts with an input of only 0 mA which is (06)=62.5% of the examples 6 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 6 mA input would then read 000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts.

Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000.

Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 000. Select decimal point XXXX to display 00.0 to 00.0.

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

the Leader in Measurement and Control Instrumentation

## Leopard Family Meters and Bargraphs

### Smart, Programmable Bargraph Relays with Isolated 16 Bit 4-20 mA or 0-10 V Outputs

NEW!

LEOPARD FAMILY FEATURES

Smart 4 digit meters, tricolor and mono-color bargraphs

Front-panel digital scaling, offset, and setpoints

Bargraph can be independently scaled to a sensitivity of 100 counts full scale

within any portion of the digital scale

Over 38 different I-Series Input Signal Conditioners. For more info, please refer to

the I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules catalog.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4-20 mA transmitters and 5 or

10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors

Dual 10 & 5-amp relays, 4 relays total plus 16-bit analog output

1/16 DIN meters have one 10 Amp relay or two 5 Amp relays plus 16-bit analog

output or an extra 5 Amp relay

Auto-sensing AC/DC, wide range power supplies, 85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC or

18-36 V AC / 9-60 V DC

Quick, easy mounting into any panel thickness

Direct flush mount into mosaic panels

Optional NEMA 4X membrane touch screen face plates

Optional NEMA 4X, IP65 clear polycarbonate lens covers

Optional metal surround case for DL and FL meters.

Standard plug-in screw terminal connectors are provided

NEW!

BL-404

5DL-40

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### BL-40PSF

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: BL-40PSF-DR-PS1-IA01-0IC-R1-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and a 75-DMT96X24

basic model number

BL-40PSF.....96x24mm,.Leopard,.4.Digit,.Programmable.Scale.Factor

standard options for this model number

Order Code Suffix

Description

display

DR.... Red.LED,.0.56.inch.high DB...... Superbright Red LED, 0.56 inch high DG...... Green LED, 0.56 inch high

power supply

PS1.... 85.-.265VAC./.95.-.370VDC PS2..... 18 - 48VAC / 10 - 72VDC

input modules (partial list. see www.texmate.com)

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type.

IA01.... AC-Volts Scaled RMS, 200/600V AC IA02.... AC-Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC IA03.... AC-mA Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC IA04.... AC-Amps Scaled RMS, 0-1.Amp.AC.(0-100.00) IA05.... AC-Amps Scaled RMS, 0-5.Amp.AC.(0-100.00) IA06.... AC-Volts True RMS, 200/600V AC IA07.... AC-Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC IA08.... AC-mA True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC IA09.... AC-Amps True RMS, 0-1.Amp.AC.(0-100.00) IA10.... AC-Millivolt, Scaled RMS, 100mV.AC IA11.... AC-Amps True RMS, 0-5.Amp.AC.(0-100.00) IA12.... AC-Millivolt, True RMS, 100mV.AC ID01.... DC-Volts,.2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc ID02.... DC-Millivolt, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc ID03.... DC-Milliamp, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc ID04.... DC-Amps, 5A.DC ID05.... DC-Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC w/Offset and 24V Exc ID07.... DC-Milliamp, 2/20/200mA DC w/Offset and 24V Exc ID09.... DC-Amps, 1A.DC IF02..... Line Frequency, 50-500VAC, 199.9Hz, or optional 400Hz IGYZ*... Universal Direct Pressure *View.the.IG-.Ordering.Code.on.page.11.to.determine.the.value.for.Y.&.Z.(IGAZ.to.IGKZ) IP01.... Process Loop, 4-20mA(0-100.00) IP02.... Process Loop, 4-20mA(0-100.00) w/24VDC Exc IP03.... Process Input, 1-5V.DC(0-100.00) w/Offset, 24V Exc IP07.... Universal Process 2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom IPT1.... Prototype Board for Custom Design IR02.... 3-Wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.) IR03.... Linear Potentiometer, 3-wire, 1K min IR05.... Resistance 2K IS01.... Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02.... Pressure 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS04.... Pressure Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire IS05.... Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire IS06.... Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IS07.... Pressure 20/2mV/V with High Impedance and External Excitation IT03..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire.(-200.to.800C) IT04..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200.to.1470F) IT05..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-190.0.to.199.0F) IT06..... Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400.F) IT07..... Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999F) IT08..... Thermocouple, J Type (0-760.C) IT09..... Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260C) IT14..... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.0.to.199.0C)

analoG output*

OIC..... Isolated analog 4-20mA (with a Max. Two-5A Form A Relays) OIV..... Isolated analog 0-10VDC (with a Max. Two-5A Form A Relays) *Note: When either of the Analog Output options is installed, only the R1, R2 and R11 Relay Output options can be co-installed (see below).

relay output

R1...... Single 5A Form A Relay R2...... Dual 5A Form A Relays R3...... Three 5A Form A Relays; SP1 & SP2 common** R11..... Single 10A Form C Relay R16..... Single 10A Form C & Single 5A Form A Relays** **R3 & R16 cannot be co-installed with Analog Output options.

special options and accessories (oas)

Part Number

Description

special options (specify inputs or outputs & req. reading)

CR-CHANGE........Calibrated Range Change to another Standard Range CS-L/40...........Custom Scaling within any Stnd. or Custom Selectable Range CSR-L/40..........Custom Selectable Range Installation or Modification CSS-L/40..........Custom Special Scaling beyond the Standard Range COA-L/SINGLE......Custom Output - Special Scaling of Analog Output COR-L/RELAY.......Custom Output - Relays Installed in Non-Standard Locations CCP-L/SETUP.......NRC to Set-up Custom Configuration - Functions, Codes CCP-L/INSTL.......Factory Installation - Custom Configuration

accessories (specify serial # for custom artwork installation)

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BL-40PSF DS (BL5)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BL-40PSF Features and Specs

## BL-40PSF

## Leopard Panel Meter

## 4 Digit 0.56 LEDs

## in a 1/16 DIN CASE

LEOPARD FAMILY

### An economically smart meter relay with programmable scale factor

### and offset with isolated 4 to 20 mA output retransmission capability

### for measurement and control applications in a 96x48mm case.

### General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current Pressure AC/DC Voltage Process Load Cell

Prototype

Resistance

*Temperature

4 to 20 mA

*See model BL-40H for higher accuracy digitally linearized

thermocouple and RTD

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4-digit LED

with display range 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Three annunciator LEDs provide front panel alarm status

indication for up to three setpoints.

One 9 Amp Form C and one 4 Amp Form A relay, or up to

three 4 Amp Form A relays are available.

When analog output is installed, one 9 Amp Form C or two 4

Amp Form A relays can be supported.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

UL Listed

Software Features

Three-button programming from the front panel

(UP, DOWN and PROGRAM buttons).

Three front panel selectable ranges.

Front panel selectable four-level brightness control of digital dis-

play, and setpoint LEDs.

Three programmable setpoints.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below

(LO) each setpoint.

Hysteresis setting for all three setpoints. Delay on make and

delay on break for SP1 and SP2.

Peak and Valley. View and Reset.

### Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Modular Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:...........14 bit single slope Accuracy:...................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......5 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................4 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Red, Green or Super Bright Red (optn). Range 1999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:......................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:..Top segments of digital display flash Negative Overrange:.Bottom segments of digital display flash Relay Output:............Three 4 Amp Form A relays or one 9 Amp

Form C, and one 4 Amp Form A relay.

Analog Output:..........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out).......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 2.3W PS2.........................15-48 VAC 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 2.3W Operating Temp.:.......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:.....1/16 DIN Bezel 96x24mm

Depth behind bezel 122.2mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connectors

Weight:.......................7 oz, 9 oz when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DL-40JANUS Manual d0111v1

## DL-40JANUS

## With or without an External Signal

## Source for Rescaling

0.56" or optional 0.8 large display red or green LED

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by directly connecting of the sensor output to one of Texmate's

29 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Resistance

*Temperature

4 to 20 mA *See models DL-40-RTD and DL-40-RTD for higher accuracy

Pressure

Process

Prototype

digitally linearized thermocouple and RTD

Optional isolated 14 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Optional Isolated Modbus RTU RS-485 serial communication with selectable baud rate (9600, 19200), address and parity.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 VAC / 95-300 VDC (PS1) or 15-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4-digit LED

display with range from 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Red or green 0.8 LED large display option

Four annunciator LEDs provide front panel alarm status

indication for up to four setpoints.

Up to optional six relays in combination of six, four or two 4 Amp Form A relays or two 9 Amp Form C with two or four 4 Amp Form A relays are available.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while

providing a fast display response to real input signal changes.

Three-button programming via the front panel

(UP, DOWN and PROGRAM buttons).

Software Features

Front panel selectable four-level brightness control for digital

display and setpoint LEDs.

Four programmable setpoints.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below

(LO) each setpoint.

Hysteresis setting for all four setpoints. Delay on make and

delay on break for SP1 and SP2.

Peak and Valley. View and Reset.

Program Lock switch

A powerful, smart, programmable panel meter with optional Modbus RS-485 serial, analog and up to six relays output for measurement and control applications in a 1/8 DIN 96x48mm case.

Specifications

Input Specs:................Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:.............14 bit single slope Accuracy:.....................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:...............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:.............2 minutes Conversion Rate:.........5 conversions per second (Typical) Display:........................4 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std),

0.56 or 0.8" Red, Green or Super Bright Red (optional)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:........................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:.......Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:.....Top segments of digital display flash Negative Overrange:...Bottom segments of digital display flash Relay Output:..............Up to Six Relays in combination of six, four or two 4 Amp Form A relays or two

9 Amp Form C with two or four 4 Amp Form A relays.

Analog Output:............Isolated 14 bit user scalable mA or V AIC (mA out)................ 4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resis-

tance.

AIV (volts out).............. 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:.............AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)..................... 85-265 VAC / 95-300 VDC, 50-400Hz @ 3W PS2..............................15-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC, 50-400Hz @ 2.5W Operating Temp.:.........0 to 60 C Storage Temp:.............20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:.......95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:.......1/8 DIN, Bezel: 96x48 mm (3.78x1.89) Depth behind bezel: 117 mm (4.61) Plus 11.8 mm (0.47) for Right-angled

connectors, or plus 20 mm (0.79) for Straight-thru connector.

Weight:........................6.5 oz., 8.5 oz when packed

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 29 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

Some examples are shown on pages 12 - 14.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Index

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators

SP4

SP3

SP2

SP1

PROGRAM

BUTTON

UP ARROW

BUTTON

DOWN ARROW

BUTTON

Glossary of Programming Symbols To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The fol-lowing symbols are used to represent various functions and associated display elements of the meter:

Symbol

Explanation

This symbol

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

represents

the

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP button.

This is the DOWN button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When two or more buttons are shown, each with an arrow, this indicates that there is a number of programming choices.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If the display is shown with XXXX it means the value displayed will be the previously set value. When a number is shown it indicates the initial factory default setting or a specific example number.

Page 2

## Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The

When pressed at the same time as the calibration mode. When pressed at the same time as the ton, it initiates the setpoint setting mode.

button is used to move from one program step to the next. button, it initiates the but-

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the allows you to view and reset the Peak and Valley Lowest Readings.)

button alone, (Highest and

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When in the operational display, pressing the button alone, allows you to view, but not change, the setting of setpoint 1,2,3 & 4.

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

When two displays are shown together with

bursts, this indicates that the display is

toggling (flashing) between the name of the

function and the value.

### [ScAL]

### [9999]

Text or numbers shown between square

brackets in a procedure indicate the pro-

gramming code name of the function or the

value displayed on the meter display.

When the

and

buttons are shown

together, the display value can be increased

by pressing and releasing the

button

or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

When the

and

buttons are shown

with two displays, either display can be

selected by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

When there are more than two display selec-

tions they are shown in brackets below the

first display and are also selectable by press-

ing and releasing the

buttons.

A dotted box indicates these functions are

omitted or bypassed when the related hard-

ware is not present

The DL-40JANUS is an intelligent meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

After the meter has been powered up, the four digits light up for three seconds and then settle to the operational display indicating the input signal.

### Software Logic Tree

15 Second

Program Timeout

The meter has a 15 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 15 seconds, at any stage of the programming sequence the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the P button in the preceding step will not be saved.

Page 3

### Manual Rescaling Mode

When the rear Auto/Manual switch is in the Manual position, the meter can be rescaled without applying an external signal by changing the oFSt (offset) and SCAL (scale) parameters in the user menu. A pre-calibrated Input Signal Conditioning module must be used. The meter assumes that this calibration used a true zero input (0V from conditioner to meter) resulting in a display value of 0 and a maximum input signal span (2V from conditioner to meter) resulting in a display value of the SCAL value set in the user menu. The linear equation is y = mx + b where m = (SCAL-0)/(2-0) and b = oFSt.

The default value of SCAL is 2000, but it may be set to any value between -1999 and +9999.

The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between1 V DC to+ 2 V DC. Any outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange regardless of the Digital Display Span scaled. For example, an ID01 DC Volts Input Signal Conditioner can read +/-2VDC, but in the DL-40 will show under-range for a -1.2V input.

### Manual Rescaling Procedure

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

1) Press the

Display toggles between [CAL] and [oFF].

buttons at the same time.

and

2) Press and hold the button.

Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CAL] and [out].

STEP B Select Between Calibration of Input or Output

Note: If the analog output option is not present, Step B is skipped and the program goes directly from Step A to Step C.

1) Press the

to [inPt].

button to select the display toggling from [CAL]

2) Press the

previous offset setting.

button. Display toggles between [oFSt] and the

STEP C Set the Offset on the Digital Display

1) Using the

desired offset. This is the reading that the meter will display for a

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

and

zero input.

2) Press the

previous Scale factor.

button. Display toggles between [SCAL] and the

STEP D Set the Scale factor on the Digital Display and

1) Using the

desired Scale factor. The default value is 2000, for which a 2V

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

input will read 2000. If the scale factor is changed the display will change proportionately. Therefore if the Scale factor is changed

to 1000 then for the same 2V input the display would read 1000.

2) Press the P button.

The Digital Calibration Procedure Mode is Now Complete.

The menu branches to the DECIMAL POINT AND BRIGHTNESS SE LECTION, (see page6) and the display flashes [dP] and the previous decimal point selection.

Page 4

### Auto Calibration Mode

When the rear Auto/Manual switch is in the Auto position, the meter can be calibrated with an automatic scale factor calculation, by applying a low input signal (InLo), entering the desired low display reading for that signal (ZERO), then applying a high input signal (InHi), and then entering the desired high display reading (SPAN). The meter then automatically calculates and programs in the requisite scale factor using a true linear (y=mx + b) calculation where m = (SPAN-ZERO)/(InHi-InLo) and b = ZERO, but within the following parameters.

1. Positive and negative signals may be applied, but the difference between the high and the low signal inputs must be at least 1000 counts or Err will be indicated.

2. Positive and Negative values for the desired reading can be entered, but the scale factor created can not exceed the Digital Display Span capability of the meter which is 12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999.

3. The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between 1 V DC to + 2 V DC. Any outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange regardless of the Digital Display Span scaled.

Note: Most input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meters digital scale factor is set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 1000 with a 1.000 V input, any pre-calibrated signal conditioner with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly in the meter without any further calibration.

### Auto Calibration Procedure

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

buttons at the same time.

and

1) Press the

Display toggles between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press and hold the button.

Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

3) Press the

previous zero setting.

button. Display toggles between [ZErO] and the

STEP B Select Between Two Point Digital Calibration of Input Signal and

Two Point Analog Output

Note: If the analog output option is not present, Step B is skipped and the program goes directly from Step A to Step C.

1) Press the

button to select the display toggling from [CAL]

to [inPt] input calibration.

2) Press the

previous zero setting.

button. Display toggles between [ZErO] and the

STEP C Set the Meters Low Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a zero or low signal to the meter. (Positive or negative values are allowed)

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

and

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied low input signal.

3) Press the

previous span setting.

button. Display toggles between [SPAn] and the

STEP D Set the Meters High Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a high input signal to the meter.

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied high input signal.

3) Press the P button.

and

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

The Digital Calibration Procedure Mode is Now Complete.

If the digital calibration was successfully completed, the menu branches to the DISPLAY FUNCTION CONFIGURATION MODE, (see page 7) and the display flashes [dP] and the previous setting.

ERROR

Indicates Unsuccessful Calibration

If the calibration was unsuccessful, the display indicates [Err], the new calibration settings just entered will not take effect and the previously stored setting will remain.

The three most likely causes of an error during calibration are:

1) The full scale and zero signals were too similar. The full scale signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the zero or low input signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

2) The scaling requirement exceeded the capability of the meter

(1999 to 9999).

3) No input signal present, or incorrect connections.

Page 5

### Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

buttons at the same time.

1) Press the

Display toggles between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CAL] and [out] input calibration.

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between [oFSt] (Manual) or [ZErO]

(Auto) and the previous setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Enter the Analog [oUT] Output Mode

1) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CLo] and an internal scale factor.

STEP C Set or Calibrate the [CLo] Low Analog Output Range

1) Select the voltage or current loop output header position on the output module. (See Component Layout on page 9).

2) Connect a multimeter to pins 16 and 17 on the output module. (See Rear Panel Pinouts on page 8). Using the

buttons, adjust the analog

and

output to the desired low value as shown on the multimeter display. cLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 17 mA (mA output selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected)

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CHi] and an internal scale factor.

STEP D Set or Calibrate the [CHi] High Analog Output Range

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high value as shown on the multimeter display. CHi may be adjusted to any value from 17 mA to 21 mA (mA output selected) or from 8 V to 10.3 V (volt out

put selected)

2) Press the

button. The display exits the calibration mode and returns to

the operational display.

Note: Having established the Low and High range of the analog output, the digital span can now be selected which will set the two digital points between which the analog output will occur. (See Digital Span Selection below).

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP A Enter the Decimal Point and Brightness Mode Through the Sub Menu

[CAL] [oFF]

1) Press the

Display toggles between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the P button. Display shows previous [dP] selection.

buttons at the same time.

and

STEP E Set the Decimal Point, adjust the display to the desired decimal point setting. 1) Using the 2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [br] and the previous [br] setting.

and

STEP F Set the Display Brightness

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired brightness

setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the

button. Display brightness changes to new setting and display

toggles between [AnHi] and the previous [AnHi] setting.

### Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output

STEP G Setting the Digital Span Point for Analog High Output

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value 1) Using the which sets the point at which the selected analog high output range will occur.

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and previous [AnLo] setting.

and

STEP H Setting the Digital Span Point for Analog Low Output

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value 1) Using the which sets the point at which the selected analog low output range will occur.

2) Press the

button. The display exits the calibration mode and returns to

and

the operational display.

Note: Any two digital scale points from 1999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital scale points for analog high and analog low can be reversed for reversed 20-4 mA output. The span of the digital scale can be as small as two counts however small spans cause the 16 bit D to A to increment in stair case steps.

Page 6

### Modbus RTU & RS-485 Communication Settings

The Modbus/RS-485 communication settings sub-menu allows you to set the following parameters:

a) Baud Rate this is the baud rate of the RS-485 serial communication between the meter (slave) and Modbus master. Options are

9600 (default, meter shows 96) and 19200 (meter shows 192).

b) Address this is the meters Modbus address on the RS-485 loop. Typically, RS-485 limits the number of devices on the loop to 32, but the DL-40 supports the full Modbus address range of 1-247.

Address 1 is the default value.

c) Parity this is the parity setting for the RS-485 serial communication between the meter (slave) and Modbus master. Options are: None (display shows 0; Odd (display shows 1); Even (default, display shows 2).

The meters response time to a read command from the master is 40-45msec (typically 42msec). The response time for a write command is 70-75msec (typically 72msec). This is due to the module having to communicate to the meters core firmware to complete the desired command. Exception responses are handled directly by the module and typically have a response time of 3msec.

### Modbus RTU Implementation

The DL-40 Modbus communication module supports the following

Modbus commands:

a) Read Holding Register (0x03)

b) Write Single Register (0x06)

Modbus addresses for DL-40JANUS registers are shown on

the next page

The following are some things to note about particular registers:

a) Modicon address 40001 RELAY has the bit values for Sp3 & Sp4 and LED3 & LED4 reversed. There is an historical reason for this, and we have chosen to maintain backward compatibility in case customers want to send their meters in for a Modbus upgrade (at a nominal fee).

b) Modicon addresses 40002 INP, 40026 PEAK, 40027 VALY,

40029 ZERO, 40029 SPAN return a 2 byte hexadecimal value of the meters display (in counts) and does not include the decimal point. If you need the decimal value with decimal point, you will need to read the register, convert it to decimal, read 40024 (see below) to determine decimal location, then combine the two. Display counts are in Twos Complement notation.

a. Hex values for 0 to 9999 are 0x0000 to 0x270F.

b. Hex values for -1 to -1999 are 0xFFFF to 0xF831.

c. Over-range is indicated by a returned value of 9999 (0x270F).

d. Under-range is indicated by a returned value of -1999 (0xF831).

c) In order for Sp3 and Sp4 set point settings to work, the DL-40 must have the optional Output Carrier Board installed (P/N SA-DL/OM-CB).

d) All Delay on Make (DoM), Delay on Break (DoB) and Hysteresis

values are in units of whole seconds.

e) Modicon address 40023 RLYMOD uses the following values to set the relay activation mode (letter sequence is SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4):

a. 0 for HHHH

b. 1 for HLHL

c. 2 for LHLH

d. 3 for LLLL

e. H means relay is energized if input is equal to or

exceeds setpoint; L means relay is energized if input

is less than setpoint.

f. Note that the meter will not show the last two letters if

the Output Carrier Board option is not installed.

f) Modicon address 40023 DP uses the following values to set the

display decimal point location:

a. 0 for XXXX (none)

b. 1 for XXXX.

c. 2 for XXX.X

d. 3 for XX.XX

e. 4 for X.XXX

g) Modicon address 40025 BRIGHT must be a value between 1

(most dim) to 4 (most bright).

h) Modicon addresses 40028 and 40029 will have different meanings depending on the Auto calibration or Manual rescaling operational selection (see Auto Calibration Mode or Manual Rescaling Mode above). These are explained in the register table below.

i) Modicon addresses 40030 IZERO and 40031 ISPAN return hexadecimal values related to the Auto Mode calibration of the meter. They do not necessarily match expected values due variations and tolerances in the measurement circuit components, e.g., calibrating with a value of zero volts for the ZERO value may return a value of 0xFFFE (-2). These registers have no meaning in Manual Rescaling Mode).

Page 7

### Modbus Addresses for DL-40 Registers

Page 8

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed the software auto detects missing relays and deletes reference to them from the menu. In some cases setpoints without relays are operational for display only purposes.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode

1) Press the

Display toggles between [SP1] and the previous [SP1] setting.

buttons at the same time.

and

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 (SP1) 1) Using the and 2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous [doM] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP1 value.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value

(0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition

until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous [dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value (0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break contact (de-energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [HYSt] and the previous [HYSt] setting.

STEP E Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 1

1) Using the and buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [hYSt] value.

2) Press the button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous [SP2] setting.

NOTE: Half of the Hysteresis value selected is applied above and below the setpoint.

NOTE: Steps F, G, H and J have functionally the same procedure as steps B, C, D, and E shown above.

STEP F Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) STEP G Set the SP2 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting STEP H Set the SP2 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting STEP I Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 2

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP3] and the previous [SP4] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

and

STEP J Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [HYSt] and the previous [HYSt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

and

STEP K Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 3

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP4] and the previous [SP4] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

and

STEP L Set Setpoint 4 (SP4) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [HYSt] and 0.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP4 value.

and

STEP M Set the Hysteresis Setting for Setpoint 4

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [rLYS] and the previous relay setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired hysteresis [HYSt] value.

and

STEP N Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS]

(H) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes

below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

1) Using the

relay settings: [LLLL], [LHLH], [HLHL], [HHHH].

buttons, adjust the reading on the display to the desired

and

If only 2 relays installed [LH--], [HL--], [HH--], [LL--].

2) Press the

The meter exits the setpoint mode and returns to the operational display.

button.

The Setpoint Relay programming mode is now complete.

Page 9

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

Pinout Diagram

The Rear View of the Meter diagram shows the meter with the relay configuration: dual 9 Amp Form C and dual 4 Amp Form A relays. An analog output module is also shown as installed.

The DL-40JANUS uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 14 and 15) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board and input signal conditioner use right-angled connectors as standard. The output module uses straight-thru connectors as standard.

Pin 19

### Pins 14 and 15 AC/DC Power Input

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC/95-370 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC/10-72 V DC (PS2).

Pin 14 AC/DC Neutral. Neutral power supply line.

Pin 15 AC/DC line. Live power supply line.

## Analog and RS-485 Output Board Pins

Pins 16 and 17 Analog Output Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output.

Pin 17 Negative () analog output.

### Pins 18 to 21 Rear Panel Function Pins

Pins 18 to 21 provide functions that can be implemented with an external switch. Their pin definitions are:

Pin 18

DIM. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting is halved.

COMMON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Switch 1

AUTO/MANUAL SCALING Mode. When switch 1 is set to ON position, the Manual Scaling is selected. When switch 1 is set to OFF, the Auto Scaling is selected, and this is the default position.

Switch 2

LOCK. By setting the LOCK pin to the ON

position, the meter's programmed

parameters can be viewed but not changed.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

### Meter Assembly Component Layout

Relay

Module

Output

CarrierBoard

RS-485

or Analog

Output Module

Input Signal

Conditioner

Main

Board

Standard plug-in screw terminal connectors provided by Texmate:

## Input Signal Pins 1 to 6

Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner.

See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

Pins 8 to 12 Relay Output Pins

Note: If relays for setpoints 1 & 2 are installed on the main board, and a relay output module is used that also has relays in the setpoints 1 & 2 positions, the duplicate relays will operate in unison.

Pin 8 SP1 NO.

Pin 9 SP1 NO.

Pin 10 SP2 NO.

Pin 11 SP2 NO.

Pin 12 NO CONNECTION.

4 Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

4 Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

Page 10

### Connector Pinouts continued

### On board Relay Pins 8 to 11 and Relay Output Module Pins 22 to 29

*Note: If relays for setpoints 1 & 2 (R2)

are installed on the main board, and a relay output module is used that also has relays in the setpoints 1 &

2 (OR14 or OR34), the duplicate relays will operate in unison.

Relay Modules with 4 Independent 400V 210mA DC only SSRs

### Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 11

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www. texmate.com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 14 and 15. Also see Manual Rescaling on page 4 and Auto Calibration on page 5.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300/600V AC

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

Page 12

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

Fully User Scalable

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

Fully User Scalable

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

Fully User Scalable

IP07: Universal Process Input 2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

224C

IF02: Line Frequency

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

Direct Pressure (IGYX, IGYY & IGYZ) Ordering Code Options

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

Page 13

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6=wire

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

For higher accuracy digitally linearized RTD (P385 or P392) and Thermocouples (J/K/R and T), see the special Leopard Temperature meters DL-40-RTD and DL-40-RTD which use only two special thermocouple modules which are not compatible with regular Leopard Family meters.

IT-10

IT-11

Thermocouple J/K/R/T, C/F, 1/0.1 resolution User Selectable Accuracy 0.05% + 2 digits.

RTD 100 Pt, 3/4 wire, C/F, 1/0.1 resolution User Selectable Accuracy 0.05% + 2 digits.

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

Page 14

### Input Module Component Glossary Continue

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span.

For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

Input Module Calibration Examples IA06 AC-Volts True RMS, 200/600V AC

SPAN POT

INPUT RANGE HEADER

IA11 AC-Amps True RMS

SPAN ADJUST

HEADER

SPAN POT

SPAN RANGE

HEADER

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Analog Calibration

In addition to the analog calibration capabilities that enable many modules to be interchanged between different meters without loss of accuracy the Leopard Family of meters have enhanced Digital Calibration functions. See Page 4-5.

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. For negative inputs, Leopard Family Meters will display negative overrange at 50% of full scale range.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from

1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

Page 15

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 1800.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts.

Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0% Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only 10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts.

Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000.

Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 1000. Select decimal point XXXX to display 00.0 to 100.0.

### Case Dimensions

Page 16

SIDE VIEW

### Clear Lockable Water-proof Lens Cover OP-N4X/96X48

Clear Lockable NEMA 4X Dust and Splash Proof Cover PN: OP-N4/96x48

O-ring Gasket

Safety Catch

Cover

Removable

key-lock

The clear lockable cover is designed to be dust and water proof to NEMA-4X, IP65 standards. The assembly consists of a base and cover with a cam hinge and key-lock fastening mechanism. An O-ring, or neoprene gasket forms a seal between the base and the panel. The cam hinge prevents the cover from closing when opened until pushed closed. The cover has a tapered recess that, when closed, forms a seal with a tapered spigot on the base. A key-lock employs a cam locking device to force the spigot into the recess, ensuring seal integrity. A safety catch keeps the cover closed even when the key is removed, and the keyhole can be used to attach a safety seal clip, preventing unauthorized opening.

### Metal Surround Case Option OP-MTL96X48

Part No.

OP-MTL96X48

### Meter with Metal Surround Case

### and screw-type mounting clips

### assembled

### Screw-type

### Mounting Clip

Ground

Tab

### Metal Surround Case

### & Mounting Clips

The meters plastic case is made from fire retardant polycarbonate. A metal surround case can be ordered to enhance the meters fire retardant capabilities and also provide shielding against electromagnetic interference (EMI). The metal case slides over the polycarbonate case and is held firmly in place by spring-type non-return clips. The Metal Surround Case must be factory installed on the polycarbonate case and once installed, it cannot be removed in the field.

With the metal case in place, the meters standard ratchet-type mounting clips can not be used. Instead a pair of screw-type DIN standard mounting clips are provided, which clip into holes on the side of the metal case and tighten against the rear of the panel. A ground tab on the metal case enables the metal case to be easily connected to the panel ground.

Page 17

Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

### DL-40JANUS

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT*

RELAY OUTPUT*

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product. Please see our website, www.texmate.com to configure a meter and see current pricing.

Page 18

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DL-40JANUS Features and specifications

## DL-40JANUS

## With or without an External Signal

## Source for Rescaling

0.56" or optional 0.8 large display red or green LED

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by directly connecting of the sensor output to one of Texmate's

29 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Resistance

*Temperature

4 to 20 mA *See models DL-40-RTD and DL-40-RTD for higher accuracy

Pressure

Process

Prototype

digitally linearized thermocouple and RTD

Optional isolated 14 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Optional Isolated Modbus RTU RS-485 serial communication with selectable baud rate (9600, 19200), address and parity.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 VAC / 95-300 VDC (PS1) or 15-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4-digit LED

display with range from 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

Red or green 0.8 LED large display option

Four annunciator LEDs provide front panel alarm status

indication for up to four setpoints.

Up to optional six relays in combination of six, four or two 4 Amp Form A relays or two 9 Amp Form C with two or four 4 Amp Form A relays are available.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while

providing a fast display response to real input signal changes.

Three-button programming via the front panel

(UP, DOWN and PROGRAM buttons).

Software Features

Front panel selectable four-level brightness control for digital

display and setpoint LEDs.

Four programmable setpoints.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below

(LO) each setpoint.

Hysteresis setting for all four setpoints. Delay on make and

delay on break for SP1 and SP2.

Peak and Valley. View and Reset.

Program Lock switch

A powerful, smart, programmable panel meter with optional Modbus RS-485 serial, analog and up to six relays output for measurement and control applications in a 1/8 DIN 96x48mm case.

Specifications

Input Specs:................Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:.............14 bit single slope Accuracy:.....................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:...............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:.............2 minutes Conversion Rate:.........5 conversions per second (Typical) Display:........................4 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std),

0.56 or 0.8" Red, Green or Super Bright Red (optional)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:........................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:.......Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:.....Top segments of digital display flash Negative Overrange:...Bottom segments of digital display flash Relay Output:..............Up to Six Relays in combination of six, four or two 4 Amp Form A relays or two

9 Amp Form C with two or four 4 Amp Form A relays.

Analog Output:............Isolated 14 bit user scalable mA or V AIC (mA out)................ 4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resis-

tance.

AIV (volts out).............. 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:.............AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)..................... 85-265 VAC / 95-300 VDC, 50-400Hz @ 3W PS2..............................15-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC, 50-400Hz @ 2.5W Operating Temp.:.........0 to 60 C Storage Temp:.............20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:.......95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:.......1/8 DIN, Bezel: 96x48 mm (3.78x1.89) Depth behind bezel: 117 mm (4.61) Plus 11.8 mm (0.47) for Right-angled

connectors, or plus 20 mm (0.79) for Straight-thru connector.

Weight:........................6.5 oz., 8.5 oz when packed

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 29 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

Some examples are shown on pages 12 - 14.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Index

Page 1

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BL-B51D40 panel meter bargraph controller Texmate BL8

LEOPARD FAMILY

## BL-B51D40

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 51 LED Segments

## in a 1/16 DIN Case

### A red, 51 segment bargraph with a

### 4-digit LED digital display for monitoring, measurement

### and control applications mounted in a 24x96mm case.

### General Features

(cid:127) External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

Pressure

Resistance

AC/DC Voltage

Process

Temperature

Load Cell

Prototype

4 to 20 mA

(cid:127)

(cid:127)

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

A red, 51 segment high brightness bargraph.

(cid:127) Red 4-digit LED display with a range of 1999 to 9999

(12000 counts).

(cid:127)

(cid:127)

(cid:127)

(cid:127)

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 10 Amp Form C and two 5 Amp Form A relays available for the BL-B51D40.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC/95-370 V DC (PS1).

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest display setting by 50%.

(cid:127) Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

### Software Features

(cid:127) The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

(cid:127) Bargraph center zero function. (cid:127) Four programmable setpoints. (cid:127) Setpoint 1 has delay-onmake and delay-on-break

plus a special pump on pump off mode that creates a Hysteresis Band between SP1 and SP2.

(cid:127) Relay activation can be

selected to occur above (hi) or below (Lo) each setpoint.

(cid:127) Digital display blanking. (cid:127) Decimal point setting. (cid:127) Four-level brightness control of the bargraph and digital display.

### Input Module Compatibility

(cid:31)

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 40 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

Some examples are shown on pages 12 - 13.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

LEOPARD

Input Specs:..............Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 to 16 conversions per second Display:......................4 digit 0.31" Red LED display (std).

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays ve sign.

Decimals:..................User programmable

Positive Overrange:....Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash.

Negative Overrange:..First segment of bargraph and bottom

segments of digital display flash.

Display Range:..........1999 to 9999 counts - 101 segment digital display

0 to 101 segments on bargraph

Relay Output:............Two 5A Form A relays.

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply

85-265V AC / 95-370V DC@3W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 60C Storage Temp:..........20C to 70C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN, Bezel: 96x24mm (3.78 x 0.95),

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled conn.

Weight:......................6.5 oz., 8.5 oz when packed.

### Index

Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection...6 Case Dimensions......................7 Component Layout...................11 Connector Pinouts....................10 Connectors.........................11 Controls and Indicators.................2 Custom Faceplates and Scales...........9 Decimal Point and Brightness Selection....5 Digital Span Selection for Display.........5

Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output..6 Functional Diagram...................10 General Features......................1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules..12-13 Input Module Calibration Procedures.....15 Input Module Component Glossary.......14 Ordering Information..................16 Pin Descriptions......................10 Programming Conventions..............2

Setpoint Setting & Relay Configuration Mode....8 Software Features.....................1 Software Logic Tree....................3 Specifications........................1 Two Point Analog Range Setting & Calibration...7 Two Point Digital Calibration Mode........4

BL-B51D40 (BL8)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 (cid:127) www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators

LED

Annunciators

for Setpoints

1-2

100

Display with Faceplate and Bezel

### Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The

When pressed at the same time as the

button is used to move from one program step to the next. button, it initiates the

### Programming Conventions

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The following symbols are used throughout the logic diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter:

This symbol represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP button.

This is the DOWN button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When an alternative dotted line is shown, this indicates that an alternative logic branch will be followed when a particular option is present.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If an X appears through a digit, it means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained.

calibration mode.When pressed at the same time as the it initiates the setpoint setting mode.

button,

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the allows you to view, but not change, the setting of Setpoint SP1.

button alone,

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When in the operational display, pressing the allows you to view, but not change, the setting of setpoint SP2.

button alone,

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

### Front Panel LED Display

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs indicate the alarm status. They are labeled from bottom to top: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

Digital LED Displays

The digital LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming settings during programming.

Setpoint Indication

The position of setpoints on the bargraph display are indicated by an ON or OFF segment dependent on the bargraph display being above or below the setpoint.

and

When the buttons are shown together, the display value can be increased button by pressing and releasing the or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

and

When the buttons are shown with two displays, either display can be or selected by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

When two displays are shown together with bursts, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value.

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

When there are more than two display selections they are shown in brackets below the first display and are also selectable by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

A dotted line enclosing an entire logic diagram indicates that programming branch will appear only when a particular option is present.

Software Logic Tree

This is an intelligent bargraph meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

Software Version is Displayed on Power-up When power is applied, all segments of the bargraph and digital display light up for 3 seconds. The version number of the installed software is then displayed for 2 seconds, after which, the operational display indicates the input signal.

15 Second Program Timeout Except for ZERO and SPAN settings in the Two Point Digital Calibration Mode and the Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode (cLo and chi), the meter has a 15 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 15 seconds in any of the other programming sequences, the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the button in the preceding step will not be saved.

### Two Point Digital Calibration Mode

This mode enables the meter to be calibrated by applying a zero or low input signal, entering the desired reading for that signal, then applying a high input signal, and then entering the desired reading for that signal. The meter then automatically calculates and programs in the requisite scale factor, within the following parameters.

1. Positive and negative signals may be applied, but the difference between the low and the high signal inputs must be at least 1000 counts or Err will be indicated.

2. Positive and Negative values for the desired reading can be entered, but the scale factor created can not exceed the Digital Display Span capability of the meter which is 12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999.

3. The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between 1 V DC to + 2 V DC. Any outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange regardless of the Digital Display Span scaled.

Note: Many input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meter is digitally set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 1000 with a 1.000 V input, any pre-calibrated analog signal conditioner, with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly without any further calibration when it is inserted in the meter.

MAIN MENU

Operational Display

Sub-menu

MODE

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

1) Press the

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

3) Press the

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

button. Display toggles between [CAL] and [out].

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP C and toggles between [SPAn] and the previous [SPan] setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Select Two Point Digital Calibration of Input Signal

button to select CAL [iP] for input signal cali-

button. Display toggles between [ZEro] and the pre-

1) Press the

bration.

2) Press the

vious zero setting.

STEP C Set the Meters Low Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a zero or low signal to the meter. (Positive or negative values are allowed).

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied low input signal.

3) Press the

vious span setting.

button. Display toggles between [SPAn] and the pre-

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

and

STEP A Calibration

Mode

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display

See Page 6

STEP B Calibration

Mode

To Two Point Analog Output Range Setting

and Calibration

See Page 7

TWO POINT DIGITAL

CALIBRATION MODE

STEP D Set the Meters High Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

STEP C Zero

1) Apply a high input signal to the meter.

2) Using the and desired reading for the applied high input signal.

3) Press the

button.

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

The Digital Calibration Procedure is now complete.

If the digital calibration was successfully completed, the menu branches to the Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display (see page 5), and the display flashes [bhi] and the previous setting.

STEP D Span

ERROR Indicates Unsuccessful Calibration

If the calibration was unsuccessful, the display indicates [Err], the new calibration settings just entered will not take effect and the previously stored setting will remain. The three most likely causes of an error during calibration are:

The full scale and zero signals were too similar. The full scale signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the zero or low input signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

The scaling requirement exceeded the digital display span capability of the meter (12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999).

No input signal present, or incorrect input signal connections.

Err. Any new setting canceled and previous

settings are retained

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display Page 5

### Digital Span Selection For Bargraph Display

The bargraph can be set to display full scale (0-51 bars) any portion of the

digital reading from a minimum of 100 counts to a maximum of 12,000

counts. This provides higher resolution bargraph indication for those appli-

cations where the normal operating input signal range is less than the

desired full scale display range of the digital display.

For Example:

If the full scale range of the meter has been set from -1999 to

9999 (0-12,000 counts), but the normal operating range of the

input signal is between 4000 & 6000. The bargraph high parame-

ter [bhi] can be set to 6000 and the bargraph low parameter [bLo]

can be set to 4000.

This means that although the meter could digitally display a signal

from -1999 to 9999 (0-12,000 counts), the bargraph display only

Bargraph Display Scale Range Setting Example

begins to function at a reading of 4000, and reaches full scale indi-

cation at a reading of 6000. Although the digital display will con-

tinue reading up to 9999 before indicating overrange, the bargraph

display will indicate its overrange by flashing for readings above

6000.

Input Signal of 3999 counts Bargraph does not light up

Input Signal of 5000 counts Bargraph lights up from 4000 to 5000 counts

STEP A Enter the Calibration Sub Menu Mode

1) Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [bhi] and the

previous setting.

STEP B Set the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display (See example above) buttons, adjust the display to the desired

1) Using the

and

high parameter reading, e.g. 6000 counts.

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [bLo] and the

previous setting.

3) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

low parameter reading, e.g. 4000 counts.

4) Press the

button. Display changes from [4000] to [dP].

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP C Set the Decimal Point 1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

decimal point setting.

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [br] and the

previous brightness setting.

STEP D Set the Bargraph and Digital Display Brightness

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

brightness setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the

previous [Anhi] setting.

button. Display toggles between [Anhi] and the

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP G and toggles between [Cto] and [oFF], the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

### Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output

STEP E Selecting the [Anhi] Digital Value for Analog High Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value at which the [chi] Calibrated Analog High output will occur. For digital readings outside the digital span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability. However, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo (see below).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and previous

[AnLo] setting.

STEP F Selecting the [AnLo] Digital Value for Analog Low Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

digital value at which the [cLo] Calibrated Analog Low output will occur. For Digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. button. The display toggles between [cto] and

2) Press the

[oFF].

Note: Any two digital span points from 1999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital values for [Anhi] analog high and [AnLo] analog low can be reversed to provide a 20 to 4mA output. The digital span selected can be as small as two counts, when using the analog output to function as a Control or Alarm Driver. Small digital spans will cause the high resolution 16 bit D to A to increment digitally in stair case steps.

See Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration at the top of the next page.

Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with a Unipolar Input

If the meter's full scale range is set to 5000 counts, the midpoint would be

2500 counts. If a signal of 2500 counts is applied only one segment at the

2500 count mark will light up. If a signal of 4000 counts is applied the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 4000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 1000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 1000 count mark will light up.

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with Bipolar Signal Inputs

The meter may also be calibrated to display symmetrical bipolar signals such as 1 V or 10 V. When the center point display mode is selected, it will then function as a center zero meter. When positive signals are applied, the bar will go up from the center point, and when negative signals are applied, the bar will go down from the center point.

STEP G Bargraph Center Point Mode Selection (See example above) 1) To select bargraph center point mode, press the

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

2) Press the

or [oFF].

button. Display toggles between [diSP] and [on]

STEP H Digital Display ON/OFF Selection

1) To set the display to [oFF], press the toggles between [diSP] and [oFF].

button. Display

2) Press the

button. The display exits the calibration mode

and returns to the operational display. Only the bargraph display is on and the digital display is off.

If the digital display is selected to be off, pressing any button to make programming changes or to view setpoints activates the digital display.

When the procedure is complete, the digital display will then automatically switch off.

The Display/Bargraph settings are now complete.

### Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration

Determine if the Analog Output Selection Header is in the 4 to 20mA (0-20mA) position or the 0 to 10VDC position. If necessary, the module may have to be removed and the header position changed (see Component Layout below).

Note: Always disconnect power from the meter before removing the analog output module to adjust the mA or Volts output selection header and reinstalling it. When power is reconnected, the meters software will automatically detect the presence or absence of the analog output module.

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

1) Press the

and [oFF].

2) Press the

Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [cAL]

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on]. button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out] input calibration.

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between Zero and the previous Zero setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Enter the Two Point Analog [ouT] Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode button. Display toggles between [cLo] and an internal scale factor.

1) Press the

and

STEP E Set or Calibrate [cLo] the Low Analog Value of the Analog Output Range 1) Connect a multimeter to analog output pins 17 and 18 (see Rear Panel Pinouts on page 10). Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired low value as measured on the multimeter. cLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 18 mA (mA output selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected). However, the output of cLo must always be less than the value selected for chi. If a reversed analog output is desired, the values selected to establish the Digital Span can be reversed (see top of page 6). For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go any lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. However, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the the maximum analog output capability (see chi below).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [chi] and an internal scale factor.

and

STEP F Set or Calibrate [chi] the High Analog Value of the Analog Output Range 1) Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high value as measured on the multimeter display. chi may be adjusted to any value from 18 mA to 24 mA (mA output) or from 8 V to 10.3 V (volt output).

However, the value must be higher than the value selected for cLo. For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability.

2) Press the button. The meter exits the calibration mode and returns to the operational display.

Note: The analog output range established by the values selected for cLo and chi will occur, automatically scaled, between the two digital values selected for AnHi and AnLo.

However, the analog output can linearly rise above the chi value set for digital readings outside the digital span selected. See Digital Span Selection on page 6.

### Case Dimensions

SIDE VIEW

TOP VIEW

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed, the setpoints without relays are operational in software for tricolor control or display only purposes. To remove unwanted setpoint indications, set them to 9999 or -1999 depending on the relay activation mode selected.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode

1) Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

between [SP1] and the previous SP1 setting.

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 (SP1) 1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP1 value.

and

button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous

[doM] setting.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value

(0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous

[dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value

(0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in a non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break

contact (de-energize).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [hYSt] and the previous

[hYSt] setting.

STEP E Select the Hysteresis (hYSt)

1) Using the

2) Press the

and

SP2 setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous

Note: When hYSt is selected ON, and SP2 is set at a value higher than SP1, the SP1 relay will operate in a special "pump on pump off" Hysteresis mode. SP2 acts as the upper limit and SP1 acts as the lower limit of the Hysteresis Band on the SP1 relay.

For filling applications:

rLYS should be set to LhLh (see step I). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs less than the SP1 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP2 setpoint is reached.

For emptying applications:

rLYS should be set to hhhh (see step I). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs greater than the SP2 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP1 setpoint is reached.

STEP F Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) 1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP2 value.

and

button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous

[doM] setting.

STEP G Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the

SP4 setting.

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

button. Display toggles between [SP4] and the previous

SETPOINT SETTING

AND RELAY

CONFIGURATION MODE

STEP H Set Setpoint 4 (SP4) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press

the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP4 value.

button. Display

toggles between

[rLYS] and

the

previous relay setting.

STEP I

Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS]

(H) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

1) Using the

the desired relay settings: [LLLL], [LhLh], [LLhh], [hhhh].

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the reading on the display to

button.

and

### Functional Diagram

Connector Pinouts

Rear Panel Pinout Diagram The BL-B51D40 uses plug-in type screw terminal

connectors for all input and output connections.

### Pin Descriptions

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner. See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 12 Relay and Analog Output Pins

Pins 14 and 15 AC/DC Power Input

Auto sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 VAC or 95-370 VDC (PS1).

Pin 14 & Pin 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket. The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-

265 VAC/95-370 VDC (PS1 Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 15-48 VAC/10-72 VDC (PS2) is also available.

### Component Layout

Typical Input Signal Conditioner

Input Signal Conditioner

100

Relay Activation LEDs

Bargraph Segments

Digital Display

Programming Buttons

Output Module

### Program Lock Switch

Default setting is Lock off (switch to opposite

position to turn Lock on).

Processor Board

### Connectors

WARNING

AC and DC input signals and power supply voltages can be hazardous.

Do Not connect live wires to terminal blocks, and do not insert, remove or handle terminal blocks with live wires connected.

Standard plug-in screw terminal blocks provided:

BL-B51D40 (BL8)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 (cid:127) www.texmate.com

Page 11

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 14 and 15.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Input and Output Pins

On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

### INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB.Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

### SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

### SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

### 24V DC Output Header

On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

### ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

### ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header

When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps.

This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

Input Module Calibration Procedures Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

The unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from 1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

1800.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase). This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0%

Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of

0 to 2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only 10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts. Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000. Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 1000.

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### BL-B51D40

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: BL-B51D40-HRR-PS1-IA01-0IC-R1-OA2, the 2 OAs are, HD-CHANGE and a GN.CAS96X24L

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BL-B51D40 Features and Specs

## BL-B51D40

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 51 LED Segments

## in a 1/16 DIN Case

LEOPARD FAMILY

### A red, 51 segment bargraph with a

### 4-digit LED digital display for monitoring, measurement

### and control applications mounted in a 24x96mm case.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

Pressure

Resistance

AC/DC Voltage

Process

Temperature

Load Cell

Prototype

4 to 20 mA

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

A red, 51 segment high brightness bargraph.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of 1999 to 9999

(12000 counts).

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 9 Amp Form C and two 4 Amp Form A relays available for the BL-B51D40.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC/95-300 V DC (PS1).

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest display setting by 50%.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

UL Listed

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints.

Setpoint 1 has delay-onmake and delay-on-break

plus a special pump on pump off mode that creates a Hysteresis Band between SP1 and SP2.

Relay activation can be

selected to occur above (hi) or below (Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control of the bargraph and digital display.

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 40 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

LEOPARD

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 to 16 conversions per second Display:......................4 digit 0.31" Red LED display (std).

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays ve sign.

Decimals:..................User programmable

Positive Overrange:....Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash.

Negative Overrange:..First segment of bargraph and bottom

segments of digital display flash.

Display Range:..........1999 to 9999 counts - 101 segment digital display

0 to 101 segments on bargraph

Relay Output:............Two 4A Form A relays.

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply

85-265V AC / 95-300V DC@3W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:..........20C to 70C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN, Bezel: 96x24mm (3.78 x 0.95),

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled conn.

Weight:......................6.5 oz., 8.5 oz when packed.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### CL-B101D40 bargraph meter d0094 data sheet 1

# CL-B101D40

### Smart 101 segment, 4 digit LED Tricolor or Mono-

### color digital bargraph controller with

### four fully programmable set points

### in a switchboard style case for

### monitoring, measurement, and control applications.

0.56 LEDs

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by

Specifications

Input Specs: Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter: 14 bit single slope Accuracy: (005% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff: 100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time: 2 minutes Conversion Rate: 10 conversions per second (Typical) Digital Display: 4 digit 0.56" LED red (std), green (optn)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts

Bargraph Display: 101 segment 235o circular red (standard),

Green (optional) or tricolor (optional) LED

Polarity: Assumed positive Displays negative Decimal Selection: Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange: Bargraph and top segments of digital display

flash

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom seg-

ments of digital display flash

Relay Output: Two 9 Amp Form C relays, two 4 Amp Form

A relays or 4 x 4 Amp Form A relays

Analog Output: Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out) 4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out) 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply: AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std) 85-265 VAC / 95-300 VDC, 50-400Hz 4.2W PS2 18-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC, 50-400Hz 42W Operating Temp: 0 to 50C Storage Temp: 20C to 70C Relative Humidity: 95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions: Bezel (4.48"x4.48") 113.8x113.8mm

Depth behind bezel (4.23") 107.46 mm Plus (048) 1224 mm for connectors

Weight: 16 oz, 1lb 4 oz when packed

direct connection of the sensor output to more than

40 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4

to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

A Programmable Tricolor (Red-Green-Orange) or mono color (red or

green), 101 segment high brightness bargraph.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of -1999 to 9999

(12000 counts). Optional green digital display.

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A or 4 x 4 Amp Form A relays available.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest

display setting by 50%.

Automatic intelligent averaging, smooths noisy signals while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Setpoint 1 has delay-on-make

and delay-on-break plus

a special pump on pump off mode that creates a Hysteresis Band between SP1 and SP2.

Four programmable setpoints with adjustable Hysteresis.

Bargraph center zero function.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (hi) or below

(Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control

Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection... 6 Bargraph Color Programming Mode........ 9 Case Dimensions....................... 7 Component Layout..................... 11 Connector Pinouts..................... 10 Connectors........................... 11 Controls and Indicators.................. 2 Decimal Point and Brightness Selection..... 5

Table of Contents

Digital Span Selection for Display.......... 5 Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output... 6 Functional Diagram.................... 10 General Features....................... 1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules...12-14 Input Module Calibration Procedures...... 16 Input Module Component Glossary........ 15 Installation guidelines................... 17 Ordering Information................... 18

Pin Descriptions....................... 10 Programming Conventions................ 2 Setpoint Setting & Relay Configuration Mode.... 8-9 Software Features...................... 1 Software Logic Tree..................... 3 Specifications.......................... 1 Two Point Analog Range Setting & Calibration.... 7 Two Point Digital Calibration Mode......... 4

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators

## Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Setpoints indicated

by an OFF Segment

101 Segment

Bargraph

Setpoints

indicated

by an ON

Segment

Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The

When pressed at the same time as the calibration mode. When pressed at the same time as the ton, it initiates the setpoint setting mode.

button is used to move from one program step to the next. button, it initiates the but-

### Programming Conventions

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The following symbols are used throughout the logic diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter:

This symbol represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP button.

This is the DOWN button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When an alternative dotted line is shown, this indicates that an alternative logic branch will be followed when a particular option is present.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If an X appears through a digit, it means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained.

Page 2

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the to view the setting of the saved Peak and Valley Values.

button allows you

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When in the operational display, pressing the button allows you to change the Brightness Level as well as to view the setting of the setpoints SP1, SP2, SP3 & SP4.

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Front Panel LED Display Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs indicate the alarm status. They are labeled from bottom to top: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

Digital LED Displays

The digital LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming settings during programming.

Setpoint Indication

The position of setpoints on the bargraph display are indicated by an ON or OFF segment dependent on the bargraph display being above or below the setpoint.

and

When the buttons are shown together, the display value can be increased by pressing and releasing the button or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

and

When the buttons are shown with two displays, either display can be selected by pressing and releasing the or

buttons.

When two displays are shown together with bursts, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value.

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

When there are more than two display selections they are shown in brackets below the first display and are also selectable by pressing and releasing the buttons.

A dotted line enclosing an entire logic diagram indicates that programming branch will appear only when a particular option is present.

### Software Logic Tree

The CL-B101D40 is an intelligent bargraph meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

Software Version is Displayed on Power-up When power is applied, all segments of the bargraph and digital display light up for 3 seconds. The version number of the installed software is then displayed for 2 seconds, after which, the operational display indicates the input signal.

15 Second Program Timeout Except for ZERO and SPAN settings in the Two Point Digital Calibration Mode and the Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode (cLo and chi), the meter has a 15 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 15 seconds in any of the other programming sequences, the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the P button in the preceding step will not be saved.

Page 3

### Two Point Digital Calibration Mode

This mode enables the meter to be calibrated by applying a zero or low input signal, entering the desired reading for that signal, then applying a high input signal, and then entering the desired reading for that signal. The meter then automatically calculates and programs in the requisite scale factor, within the following parameters.

1. Positive and negative signals may be applied, but the difference between the low and the high signal inputs must be at least 1000 counts or Err will be indicated.

2. Positive and Negative values for the desired reading can be entered, but the scale factor created can not exceed the Digital Display Span capability of the meter which is 12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999.

3. The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between 1 V DC to + 2 V DC. Any outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange regardless of the Digital Display Span scaled.

MAIN MENU

Operational Display

Note: Many input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meter is digitally set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 1000 with a 1.000 V input, any pre-calibrated analog signal conditioner, with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly without any further calibration when it is inserted in the meter.

Sub-menu

MODE

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

1) Press the

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CAL] and [out].

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP C and toggles between [SPAn] and the previous [SPan] setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Select Two Point Digital Calibration of Input Signal

button to select CAL [iP] for input signal cali-

button. Display toggles between [ZEro] and the

1) Press the

bration.

2) Press the

previous zero setting.

STEP C Set the Meters Low Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a zero or low signal to the meter. (Positive or negative values are allowed).

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied low input signal.

3) Press the

previous span setting.

button. Display toggles between [SPAn] and the

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

and

STEP D Set the Meters High Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a high input signal to the meter.

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied high input signal.

3) Press the

button.

and

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

STEP A Calibration

Mode

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display

See Page 6

STEP B Calibration

Mode

To Two Point Analog Output Range Setting

and Calibration

See Page 7

TWO POINT DIGITAL

CALIBRATION MODE

STEP C Zero

The Digital Calibration Procedure is now complete.

If the digital calibration was successfully completed, the menu branches to the Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display (see page 5), and the display flashes [bhi] and the previous setting.

STEP D Span

ERROR

Indicates Unsuccessful Calibration

If the calibration was unsuccessful, the display indicates [Err], the new calibration settings just entered will not take effect and the previously stored setting will remain. The three most likely causes of an error during calibration are:

The full scale and zero signals were too similar. The full scale signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the zero or low input signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

The scaling requirement exceeded the digital display span capability of the meter (12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999).

No input signal present, or incorrect input signal connections.

Page 4

Err. Any new setting canceled and previous

settings are retained

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display Page 5

### Digital Span Selection For Bargraph Display

The bargraph can be set to display full scale (0-101 bars) any portion

of the digital reading from a minimum of 100 counts to a maximum of

12,000 counts. This provides higher resolution bargraph indication for

those applications where the normal operating input signal range is less

than the desired full scale display range of the digital display.

For Example:

If the full scale range of the meter has been set from -1999 to

9999 (0-12,000 counts), but the normal operating range of the

input signal is between 4000 & 6000. The bargraph high parame-

ter [bhi] can be set to 6000 and the bargraph low parameter [bLo]

can be set to 4000.

This means that although the meter could digitally display a signal

from -1999 to 9999 (0-12,000 counts), the bargraph display only

begins to function at a reading of 4000, and reaches full scale

indication at a reading of 6000. Although the digital display will

continue reading up to 9999 before indicating overrange, the bar-

graph display will indicate its overrange by flashing for readings

above 6000.

An example of setting the digital span of the bargraph display to be different than the digital display range

Bargraph does not light up for Input Signals up to

3999 counts

Bargraph lights up for Input Signals above

4000 counts

STEP A Enter the Calibration Sub Menu Mode

1) Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [bhi] and the

p r e v i o u s setting.

STEP B Set the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display (See example

above)

1) Using the

desired

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the

and

high parameter reading, e.g. 6000 counts. button. Display toggles between [bLo] and the

previous setting.

3) Using the

desired

and

low parameter reading, e.g. 4000 counts.

buttons, adjust the display to the

4) Press the P button. Display changes from [4000] to [dP].

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP C Set the Decimal Point 1) Using the

desired decimal point setting.

2) Press the

previous brightness setting.

and

buttons, adjust the display to the

button. Display toggles between [br] and the

STEP D Set the Bargraph and Digital Display Brightness

and

buttons, adjust the display to the

1) Using the

desired brightness setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the

the previous [Anhi] setting.

button. Display toggles between [Anhi] and

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP G and toggles between [Cto] and [oFF], the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

Page 5

Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output STEP E Selecting the [Anhi] Digital Value for Analog High Output buttons, adjust the display to the desired

1) Using the

and

digital value at which the [chi] Calibrated Analog High output will occur. For digital readings outside the digital span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability. However, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo (see below). button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and

2) Press the

previous [AnLo] setting.

STEP F Selecting the [AnLo] Digital Value for Analog Low Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

digital value at which the [cLo] Calibrated Analog Low output will occur. For Digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo.

2) Press the

[oFF].

button. The display toggles between [cto] and

Note: Any two digital span points from 1999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital values for [Anhi] analog high and [AnLo] analog low can be reversed to provide a 20 to 4mA output. The digital span selected can be as small as two counts, when using the analog output to function as a Control or Alarm Driver. Small digital spans will cause the high resolution 16 bit D to A to increment digitally in stair case steps.

### Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with a Unipolar Input

If the meter's full scale range is set to 5000 counts, the midpoint would be 2500 counts. If a signal of 2500 counts is applied only one segment at the 2500 count mark will light up. If a signal of 4000 counts is applied the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 4000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 1000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 1000 count mark will light up.

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with Bipolar Signal Inputs

The meter may also be calibrated to display symmetrical bipolar signals such as 1 V or 10 V. When the center point display mode is selected, it will then function as a center zero meter. When positive signals are applied, the bar will go up from the center point, and when negative signals are applied, the bar will go down from the center point.

STEP G Bargraph Center Point Mode Selection (See example above)

1) To select bargraph center point mode, press the button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

2) Press the

[on] or [oFF].

button. Display toggles between [diSP] and

STEP H Digital Display ON/OFF Selection

1) To set the display to [oFF], press the Display toggles between [diSP] and [oFF].

2) Press the

button. The display exits the calibration mode

button.

Bipolar Signal Input

and returns to the operational display. Only the bargraph

display is on and the digital display is off.

If the digital display is selected to be off, pressing any button to make programming changes or to view setpoints activates the digital display.

When the procedure is complete, the digital display will then automatically switch off.

The Display/Bargraph settings are now complete.

Page 6

Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Determine if the Analog Output Selection Header is in the 4 to 20mA (0-20mA) position or the 0 to 10VDC position. If necessary, the module may have to be removed and the header position changed (see Component Layout below).

Note: Always disconnect power from the meter before removing the analog output module to adjust the mA or Volts output selection header and reinstalling it. When power is reconnected, the meters software will automatically detect the presence or absence of the analog output module.

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

1) Press the

2) Press the

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out] input calibration.

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between Zero and the previous Zero setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF]. button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

and

STEP B Enter the Two Point Analog [ouT] Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode

1) Press the

button. Display toggles between [cLo] and an internal scale factor.

STEP E Set or Calibrate [cLo] the Low Analog Value of the Analog Output Range

and

1) Connect a multimeter to analog output pins 17 and 18 (see Rear Panel Pinouts on page 10). Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired low value as measured on the multimeter. cLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 18 mA (mA output selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected).

However, the output of cLo must always be less than the value selected for chi. If a reversed analog output is desired, the values selected to establish the Digital Span can be reversed (see top of page 6). For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go any lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. However, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the the maximum analog output capability (see chi below).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [chi] and an internal scale factor.

STEP F Set or Calibrate [chi] the High Analog Value of the Analog Output Range

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high value as measured on the multimeter display. chi may be adjusted to any value from 18 mA to 24 mA (mA output) or from 8 V to 10.3 V (volt output). However, the value must be higher than the value selected for cLo. For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability.

2) Press the

operational display.

button. The meter exits the calibration mode and returns to the

Note: The analog output range established by the values selected for cLo and chi will occur, automatically scaled, between the two digital values selected for AnHi and AnLo. However, the analog output can linearly rise above the chi value set for digital readings outside the digital span selected. See Digital Span Selection on page 6.

### Case Dimensions

0.256

6.50

Panel Cutout

1/4"-28UNF

5.0

0.197

101.60

4.000

Page 7

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed, the setpoints without relays are operational in software for tri-color control or display only purposes. To remove unwanted setpoint indications, set them to 9999 or -1999 depending on the relay activation mode selected.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode 1) Press the

SP1 setting.

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [SP1] and the previous

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 [SP1] and

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous [doM] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP1 value.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make [doM] Delay Time Setting

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value (0 to 9999 seconds).

The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous [dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break [dob] Delay Time Setting

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value (0 to 9999 seconds).

The reading must continuously remain in a non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break contact (de-energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hYSt] and the previous [hYSt] setting.

STEP E Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between PUM and (on) or (oFF).

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

STEP F Select Pump [PUM] (on) or (oFF)

1) Using the buttons, select the Pump to be ON or OFF. When PUM is selected ON, and SP2 is set at a value higher than SP1, the SP1 relay will operate in a special "pump on pump off" mode.

SP2 acts as the upper limit and SP1 acts as the lower limit of the Hysteresis Band on the SP1 relay.

and

For filling applications:

[rLYS] should be set to [LhXX] (see step M). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs less than the SP1 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP2 setpoint is reached.

For emptying applications:

[rLYS] should be set to [hhXX] (see step M). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs greater than the SP2 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP1 setpoint is reached.

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous SP2 setting.

STEP G Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) and

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP2 value.

STEP H Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP3] and the previous [SP3] setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

STEP I Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

and

STEP J Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP4] and the previous [SP4] setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

STEP K Set Setpoint 4 (SP4) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP4 value.

and

STEP L Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [rLYS] and the previous relay setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

Please Continue On Next Page.

Page 8

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode Continued

STEP M Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS] for SP1

(h) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

1) Using the buttons, select (L) or (h) for the first digit, which corresponds to SP1.

2) Press the P button. The SP2 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

and

STEP N Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP2

1) Using the buttons, select (L) or (h) for the second digit, which corresponds to SP2.

2) Press the P button. The SP3 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

and

STEP O Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP3

1) Using the buttons, select (L) or (h) for the third digit, which corresponds to SP3.

2) Press the P button. The SP4 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

and

STEP P Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP4

1) Using the

2) Press the P button.

and

buttons, select (L) or (h) for the fourth digit, which corresponds to SP4.

If a mono-color red or green display is installed then the Setpoint Relay Programming Mode is now complete and the meter returns to the operational display.

If a tricolor bargraph display is installed then the Bargraph Color Programming Mode will be entered and display toggles between [CoL] and the previous setting. Color selection menu will be displayed.

### Bargraph Color Programming Mode

To comply with the latest safety requirements, the tri-color bargraph is designed like a traffic light, to display either red, orange or green, but only one color at a time. When the bar reaches a selected color change point, the entire bar will change to the color designated for that zone. This eliminates any ambiguity as to the signal status, especially just after transitioning to a new zone.

First (Step Q) is to select the color to be displayed, when the bar is below*, whichever set point is set to the lowest position.

Second (Steps R, S, T, and U) is to select the color to be displayed when the bar is above each specific set point, regardless of the order or position to which the set points are set.

However, if two or more setpoints with differently specified colors are positioned at the same set point value, the color specified for the set point with the highest identifying number will be displayed. When set points are set to the same value, the SP4 color overrides the SP3 color, the SP3 color overrides the SP2 color, and the SP2 color overrides the SP1 color.

STEP Q Select Bargraph Color when the bar is BELOW* the Setpoint that is set to the lowest

position

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP1] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP R Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP1 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP2] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP S Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP2 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP3] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP T Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP3 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP4] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP U Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP4 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. The meter exits the setpoint mode and returns to the operational

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

display.

The Bargraph Color programming mode is now complete.

Page 9

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts Connector Pinouts

Pinout Diagram

The Rear View of the Meter diagram shows the meter with the relay configuration: dual 9 Amp Form C and dual 4 Amp Form A relays An analog output module is also shown as installed

The CL-B101D40 uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections The power supply connections (pins 14 and 15) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection The main board and input signal conditioner use right-angled connectors as standard The output module uses straight-thru connectors as standard

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Page 10

Standard plug-in screw terminal connectors provided by Texmate:

### Input Signal Pins 1 to 6

Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner

### Pins 8 to 11 Rear Panel Function Pins

Pins 8 to 11 provide functions that can be implemented with an external switch. Their pin definitions are:

Pin 11 DIM. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting

is halved

Pin 10 COMMON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground

Pin 9 No function

Pin 8 LOCK. By connecting the LOCK pin to the

COMMON pin, the meter's programmed parameters can be viewed but not changed

### Connector Pinouts continued

AC/DC Power InputPins 14 and 15 Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply For voltages between 85-265 V AC/95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC/10-72 V DC (PS2).

Pin 14 AC/DC Neutral. Neutral power supply line Pin 15 AC/DC line. Live power supply line

### Optional Carrier Board Output Pins

### Analog Output- Pins 16 and 17

Pins 16 and 17 are the analog output pins on the optional output module Their pin definitions are:

Pin 16 Positive (+) analog output Pin 17 Negative () analog output

### RS-485 Output- Pins 19, 21 and 21

### Pins 22 to 29 Output Module Pins

Relay Modules with 4 Independent 300V (210mA DC only)

DL Series

### Component Layout Component Layout

Relay Relay

Module Module

Relay Modules with 2 Non-Isolated 4A Form A Relays, and 2 Non-Isolated 9A Form C Relays

DL Series

Relay Modules with 4 Isolated 5A Form A Relays

DL Series

Output Output

Carrier Carrier

Board Board

Analog Output

Module

Input Signal

Conditioner

Main

Board

Main

Board

Page 11

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate.com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 13 and 14. Also see Two Point Digital Calibration and Digital Calibration on page 4.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

### IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA04: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

Page 12

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

Fully User Scalable

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

Page 13

Fully User Scalable

Fully User Scalable

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

Fully User Scalable

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10V DC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10V DC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire Pressure Transducer

IP07: Universal Process Input

2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

224D

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6=wire

IPT1: Prototype Board for Custom Design

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

Page 14

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range.

This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

Page 15

### Input Module Calibration Procedures

In addition to the analog calibration capabilities that enable many modules to be interchanged between different meters without loss of accuracy the Leopard Family of meters have enhanced Digital Calibration functions.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. For negative inputs, Leopard Family Meters will display negative overrange at 50% of full scale range.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from

1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 1800.

Page 16

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts.

Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0%

Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to

2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only 10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts.

Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000.

Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 1000.

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1 Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred

4 A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (eg, 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (eg, 15A or 20A)

5 See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information

6 See Connector Pinouts section for wiring

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm)

8 Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 45 lb-in (051 N-m)

Page 17

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### CL-B101D40

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: CL-B101D40-VRR-PS1-IA01-OIC-R11-OA2 plus ZR

1934 Kellogg Ave., Carlsbad, CA 92008 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected]

Page 18

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### CL-B101D40 d0094 specifications

# CL-B101D40

### Smart 101 segment, 4 digit LED Tricolor or Mono-

### color digital bargraph controller with

### four fully programmable set points

### in a switchboard style case for

### monitoring, measurement, and control applications.

0.56 LEDs

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by

Specifications

Input Specs: Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter: 14 bit single slope Accuracy: (005% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff: 100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time: 2 minutes Conversion Rate: 10 conversions per second (Typical) Digital Display: 4 digit 0.56" LED red (std), green (optn)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts

Bargraph Display: 101 segment 235o circular red (standard),

Green (optional) or tricolor (optional) LED

Polarity: Assumed positive Displays negative Decimal Selection: Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange: Bargraph and top segments of digital display

flash

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom seg-

ments of digital display flash

Relay Output: Two 9 Amp Form C relays, two 4 Amp Form

A relays or 4 x 4 Amp Form A relays

Analog Output: Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out) 4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out) 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply: AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std) 85-265 VAC / 95-300 VDC, 50-400Hz 4.2W PS2 18-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC, 50-400Hz 42W Operating Temp: 0 to 50C Storage Temp: 20C to 70C Relative Humidity: 95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions: Bezel (4.48"x4.48") 113.8x113.8mm

Depth behind bezel (4.23") 107.46 mm Plus (048) 1224 mm for connectors

Weight: 16 oz, 1lb 4 oz when packed

direct connection of the sensor output to more than

40 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4

to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

A Programmable Tricolor (Red-Green-Orange) or mono color (red or

green), 101 segment high brightness bargraph.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of -1999 to 9999

(12000 counts). Optional green digital display.

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A or 4 x 4 Amp Form A relays available.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest

display setting by 50%.

Automatic intelligent averaging, smooths noisy signals while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Setpoint 1 has delay-on-make

and delay-on-break plus

a special pump on pump off mode that creates a Hysteresis Band between SP1 and SP2.

Four programmable setpoints with adjustable Hysteresis.

Bargraph center zero function.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (hi) or below

(Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control

Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection... 6 Bargraph Color Programming Mode........ 9 Case Dimensions....................... 7 Component Layout..................... 11 Connector Pinouts..................... 10 Connectors........................... 11 Controls and Indicators.................. 2 Decimal Point and Brightness Selection..... 5

Table of Contents

Digital Span Selection for Display.......... 5 Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output... 6 Functional Diagram.................... 10 General Features....................... 1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules... 12-14 Input Module Calibration Procedures...... 16 Input Module Component Glossary........ 15 Installation guidelines................... 17 Ordering Information................... 18

Pin Descriptions....................... 10 Programming Conventions................ 2 Setpoint Setting & Relay Configuration Mode.... 8-9 Software Features...................... 1 Software Logic Tree..................... 3 Specifications.......................... 1 Two Point Analog Range Setting & Calibration.... 7 Two Point Digital Calibration Mode......... 4

Page 1

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B101D40 DS FL7

LEOPARD FAMILY

## FL-B101D40

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment, 4 Digit 0.32 LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

This smart Tricolor or Mono-color digital bargraph has four fully programmable set points for monitoring, measurement, and control applications.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by

direct connection of the sensor output to more than

40 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4

to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

A Programmable Tricolor (Red-Green-Orange) or mono color (red or

green), 101 segment high brightness bargraph. Vertical or optional horizontal format.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of -1999 to 9999

(12000 counts). Optional green digital display.

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest

display setting by 50%.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Automatic intelligent averaging, smooths noisy signals while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

UL Listed

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints with adjustable Hysteresis.

Setpoint 1 has delay-on-make

and delay-on-break plus

a special pump on pump off mode that creates a

Hysteresis Band between SP1 and SP2.

Relay activation can be selected to occur above (hi) or below

(Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control

accessed by the

adjusted by the

button and

button.

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

Some examples are shown on pages 12 - 15.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs: Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter: 14 bit single slope Accuracy: (005% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff: 100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time: 2 minutes Conversion Rate: 10 conversions per second (Typical) Digital Display: 4 digit 0.31" LED red (std), green (optn)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts

Bargraph Display: 101 segment 4 red vertical (std),

green or tricolor (optn), horizontal (optn) Polarity: Assumed positive Displays negative Decimal Selection: Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange: Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom

Relay Output: Two 4 Amp Form A relays and Two

segments of digital display flash

9 Amp Form C relays

Analog Output: Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out) 4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out) 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply: AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std) 85-265 VAC / 95-300 VDC, 50-400Hz 4.2W PS2 18-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC, 50-400Hz 42W Operating Temp: 0 to 50C Storage Temp: 20C to 70C Relative Humidity: 95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions: 9/64 DIN (Bezel 36Wx144Hmm)

Depth behind bezel (583") 148mm Plus (07) 18mm for connectors

Weight: 95 oz, 12 oz when packed

Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection... 6 Bargraph Color Programming Mode........ 9 Case Dimensions....................... 7 Component Layout..................... 11 Connector Pinouts..................... 10 Connectors........................... 11 Controls and Indicators.................. 2 Custom Faceplates and Scales........... 19 Decimal Point and Brightness Selection..... 5

Index

Digital Span Selection for Display.......... 5 Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output... 6 Functional Diagram.................... 10 General Features....................... 1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules...12-15 Input Module Calibration Procedures...... 17 Input Module Component Glossary........ 16 Ordering Information................... 20 Pin Descriptions....................... 10

Programming Conventions................ 2 Setpoint Setting & Relay Configuration Mode.... 8-9 Software Features...................... 1 Software Logic Tree..................... 3 Specifications.......................... 1 Standard Faceplates and Scales.......... 18 Two Point Analog Range Setting & Calibration.... 7 Two Point Digital Calibration Mode......... 4

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators

Setpoints

indicated

by an ON

Segment

Setpoints

indicated

by an OFF

Segment--

Seven Segment

LED Display

101 Segment

Bargraph

LED

Annunciators

for Setpoints

1-4

Button

PROGRAM

Button

DOWN

Button

Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The

When pressed at the same time as the calibration mode. When pressed at the same time as the ton, it initiates the setpoint setting mode.

button is used to move from one program step to the next. button, it initiates the but-

### Programming Conventions

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The following symbols are used throughout the logic diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter:

This symbol represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP button.

This is the DOWN button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When an alternative dotted line is shown, this indicates that an alternative logic branch will be followed when a particular option is present.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If an X appears through a digit, it means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained.

Page 2

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the to view the setting of the saved Peak and Valley Values.

button allows you

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

button allows you When in the operational display, pressing the to change the Brightness Level as well as to view the setting of the setpoints SP1, SP2, SP3 & SP4.

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Front Panel LED Display Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs indicate the alarm status. They are labeled from bottom to top: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

Digital LED Displays

The digital LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming settings during programming.

Setpoint Indication

The position of setpoints on the bargraph display are indicated by an ON or OFF segment dependent on the bargraph display being above or below the setpoint.

and

When the buttons are shown together, the display value can be increased by pressing and releasing the button or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

and

When the buttons are shown with two displays, either display can be selected by pressing and releasing the or

buttons.

When two displays are shown together with bursts, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value.

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

When there are more than two display selections they are shown in brackets below the first display and are also selectable by pressing and releasing the buttons.

A dotted line enclosing an entire logic diagram indicates that programming branch will appear only when a particular option is present.

### Software Logic Tree

The FL-B101D40 is an intelligent bargraph meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

Software Version is Displayed on Power-up When power is applied, all segments of the bargraph and digital display light up for 3 seconds. The version number of the installed software is then displayed for 2 seconds, after which, the operational display indicates the input signal.

15 Second Program Timeout Except for ZERO and SPAN settings in the Two Point Digital Calibration Mode and the Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode (cLo and chi), the meter has a 15 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 15 seconds in any of the other programming sequences, the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the P button in the preceding step will not be saved.

Page 3

### Two Point Digital Calibration Mode

This mode enables the meter to be calibrated by applying a zero or low input signal, entering the desired reading for that signal, then applying a high input signal, and then entering the desired reading for that signal. The meter then automatically calculates and programs in the requisite scale factor, within the following parameters.

1. Positive and negative signals may be applied, but the difference between the low and the high signal inputs must be at least 1000 counts or Err will be indicated.

2. Positive and Negative values for the desired reading can be entered, but the scale factor created can not exceed the Digital Display Span capability of the meter which is 12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999.

3. The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between 1 V DC to + 2 V DC. Any outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange regardless of the Digital Display Span scaled.

MAIN MENU

Operational Display

Note: Many input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meter is digitally set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 1000 with a 1.000 V input, any pre-calibrated analog signal conditioner, with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly without any further calibration when it is inserted in the meter.

Sub-menu

MODE

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

1) Press the

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CAL] and [out].

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP C and toggles between [SPAn] and the previous [SPan] setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Select Two Point Digital Calibration of Input Signal

button to select CAL [iP] for input signal cali-

button. Display toggles between [ZEro] and the

1) Press the

bration.

2) Press the

previous zero setting.

STEP C Set the Meters Low Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a zero or low signal to the meter. (Positive or negative values are allowed).

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied low input signal.

3) Press the

previous span setting.

button. Display toggles between [SPAn] and the

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

and

STEP D Set the Meters High Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a high input signal to the meter.

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied high input signal.

3) Press the

button.

and

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

STEP A Calibration

Mode

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display

See Page 6

STEP B Calibration

Mode

To Two Point Analog Output Range Setting

and Calibration

See Page 7

TWO POINT DIGITAL

CALIBRATION MODE

STEP C Zero

The Digital Calibration Procedure is now complete.

If the digital calibration was successfully completed, the menu branches to the Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display (see page 5), and the display flashes [bhi] and the previous setting.

STEP D Span

ERROR

Indicates Unsuccessful Calibration

If the calibration was unsuccessful, the display indicates [Err], the new calibration settings just entered will not take effect and the previously stored setting will remain. The three most likely causes of an error during calibration are:

The full scale and zero signals were too similar. The full scale signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the zero or low input signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

The scaling requirement exceeded the digital display span capability of the meter (12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999).

No input signal present, or incorrect input signal connections.

Page 4

Err. Any new setting canceled and previous

settings are retained

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display Page 5

Example of Setting the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display to be Different than the Digital Display Range

### Digital Span Selection For Bargraph Display

The bargraph can be set to display full scale (0-101 bars) any portion

of the digital reading from a minimum of 100 counts to a maximum of

12,000 counts. This provides higher resolution bargraph indication for

those applications where the normal operating input signal range is less

than the desired full scale display range of the digital display.

For Example:

If the full scale range of the meter has been set from -1999 to

9999 (0-12,000 counts), but the normal operating range of the

input signal is between 4000 & 6000. The bargraph high parame-

ter [bhi] can be set to 6000 and the bargraph low parameter [bLo]

can be set to 4000.

This means that although the meter could digitally display a signal

from -1999 to 9999 (0-12,000 counts), the bargraph display only

begins to function at a reading of 4000, and reaches full scale

indication at a reading of 6000. Although the digital display will

continue reading up to 9999 before indicating overrange, the bar-

graph display will indicate its overrange by flashing for readings

above 6000.

Bargraph does not light up for Input Signals up to 3999 counts

Bargraph lights up for Input Signals above 4000 counts

STEP A Enter the Calibration Sub Menu Mode

1) Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [bhi] and the

p r e v i o u s setting.

STEP B Set the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display (See example

above)

1) Using the

desired

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the

and

high parameter reading, e.g. 6000 counts. button. Display toggles between [bLo] and the

previous setting.

3) Using the

desired

and

low parameter reading, e.g. 4000 counts.

buttons, adjust the display to the

4) Press the P button. Display changes from [4000] to [dP].

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP C Set the Decimal Point 1) Using the

desired decimal point setting.

2) Press the

previous brightness setting.

and

buttons, adjust the display to the

button. Display toggles between [br] and the

STEP D Set the Bargraph and Digital Display Brightness

and

buttons, adjust the display to the

1) Using the

desired brightness setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the

the previous [Anhi] setting.

button. Display toggles between [Anhi] and

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP G and toggles between [Cto] and [oFF], the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

Page 5

Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output STEP E Selecting the [Anhi] Digital Value for Analog High Output buttons, adjust the display to the desired

1) Using the

and

digital value at which the [chi] Calibrated Analog High output will occur. For digital readings outside the digital span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability. However, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo (see below). button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and

2) Press the

previous [AnLo] setting.

STEP F Selecting the [AnLo] Digital Value for Analog Low Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

digital value at which the [cLo] Calibrated Analog Low output will occur. For Digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo.

2) Press the

[oFF].

button. The display toggles between [cto] and

Note: Any two digital span points from 1999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital values for [Anhi] analog high and [AnLo] analog low can be reversed to provide a 20 to 4mA output. The digital span selected can be as small as two counts, when using the analog output to function as a Control or Alarm Driver. Small digital spans will cause the high resolution 16 bit D to A to increment digitally in stair case steps.

### Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with a Unipolar Input

If the meter's full scale range is set to 5000 counts, the midpoint would be 2500 counts. If a signal of 2500 counts is applied only one segment at the 2500 count mark will light up. If a signal of 4000 counts is applied the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 4000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 1000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 1000 count mark will light up.

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with Bipolar Signal Inputs

The meter may also be calibrated to display symmetrical bipolar signals such as 1 V or 10 V. When the center point display mode is selected, it will then function as a center zero meter. When positive signals are applied, the bar will go up from the center point, and when negative signals are applied, the bar will go down from the center point.

STEP G Bargraph Center Point Mode Selection (See example above)

1) To select bargraph center point mode, press the button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

2) Press the

[on] or [oFF].

button. Display toggles between [diSP] and

STEP H Digital Display ON/OFF Selection

1) To set the display to [oFF], press the Display toggles between [diSP] and [oFF].

2) Press the

button. The display exits the calibration mode

button.

and returns to the operational display. Only the bargraph

display is on and the digital display is off.

If the digital display is selected to be off, pressing any button to make programming changes or to view setpoints activates the digital display.

When the procedure is complete, the digital display will then automatically switch off.

The Display/Bargraph settings are now complete.

Page 6

Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Determine if the Analog Output Selection Header is in the 4 to 20mA (0-20mA) position or the 0 to 10VDC position. If necessary, the module may have to be removed and the header position changed (see Component Layout below).

Note: Always disconnect power from the meter before removing the analog output module to adjust the mA or Volts output selection header and reinstalling it. When power is reconnected, the meters software will automatically detect the presence or absence of the analog output module.

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

1) Press the

2) Press the

3) Press the P button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out] input calibration.

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between Zero and the previous Zero setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [cAL] and [oFF]. button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

and

STEP B Enter the Two Point Analog [ouT] Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode

1) Press the

button. Display toggles between [cLo] and an internal scale factor.

STEP E Set or Calibrate [cLo] the Low Analog Value of the Analog Output Range

and

1) Connect a multimeter to analog output pins 17 and 18 (see Rear Panel Pinouts on page 10). Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired low value as measured on the multimeter. cLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 18 mA (mA output selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected).

However, the output of cLo must always be less than the value selected for chi. If a reversed analog output is desired, the values selected to establish the Digital Span can be reversed (see top of page 6). For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go any lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. However, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the the maximum analog output capability (see chi below).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [chi] and an internal scale factor.

STEP F Set or Calibrate [chi] the High Analog Value of the Analog Output Range

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high value as measured on the multimeter display. chi may be adjusted to any value from 18 mA to 24 mA (mA output) or from 8 V to 10.3 V (volt output). However, the value must be higher than the value selected for cLo. For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability.

2) Press the

operational display.

button. The meter exits the calibration mode and returns to the

Note: The analog output range established by the values selected for cLo and chi will occur, automatically scaled, between the two digital values selected for AnHi and AnLo. However, the analog output can linearly rise above the chi value set for digital readings outside the digital span selected. See Digital Span Selection on page 6.

Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Page 7

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed, the setpoints without relays are operational in software for tri-color control or display only purposes. To remove unwanted setpoint indications, set them to 9999 or -1999 depending on the relay activation mode selected.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode 1) Press the

SP1 setting.

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [SP1] and the previous

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 [SP1] and

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous [doM] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP1 value.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make [doM] Delay Time Setting

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value (0 to 9999 seconds).

The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous [dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break [dob] Delay Time Setting

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value (0 to 9999 seconds).

The reading must continuously remain in a non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break contact (de-energize).

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hYSt] and the previous [hYSt] setting.

STEP E Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between PUM and (on) or (oFF).

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

STEP F Select Pump [PUM] (on) or (oFF)

1) Using the buttons, select the Pump to be ON or OFF. When PUM is selected ON, and SP2 is set at a value higher than SP1, the SP1 relay will operate in a special "pump on pump off" mode.

SP2 acts as the upper limit and SP1 acts as the lower limit of the Hysteresis Band on the SP1 relay.

and

For filling applications:

[rLYS] should be set to [LhXX] (see step M). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs less than the SP1 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP2 setpoint is reached.

For emptying applications:

[rLYS] should be set to [hhXX] (see step M). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs greater than the SP2 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP1 setpoint is reached.

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous SP2 setting.

STEP G Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) and

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP2 value.

STEP H Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP3] and the previous [SP3] setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

STEP I Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

and

STEP J Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [SP4] and the previous [SP4] setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

STEP K Set Setpoint 4 (SP4) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP4 value.

and

STEP L Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [rLYS] and the previous relay setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

Please Continue On Next Page.

Page 8

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode Continued

STEP M Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS] for SP1

(h) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

1) Using the buttons, select (L) or (h) for the first digit, which corresponds to SP1.

2) Press the P button. The SP2 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

and

STEP N Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP2

1) Using the buttons, select (L) or (h) for the second digit, which corresponds to SP2.

2) Press the P button. The SP3 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

and

STEP O Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP3

1) Using the buttons, select (L) or (h) for the third digit, which corresponds to SP3.

2) Press the P button. The SP4 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

and

STEP P Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP4

1) Using the

2) Press the P button.

and

buttons, select (L) or (h) for the fourth digit, which corresponds to SP4.

If a mono-color red or green display is installed then the Setpoint Relay Programming Mode is now complete and the meter returns to the operational display.

If a tricolor bargraph display is installed then the Bargraph Color Programming Mode will be entered and display toggles between [CoL] and the previous setting. Color selection menu will be displayed.

### Bargraph Color Programming Mode

To comply with the latest safety requirements, the tri-color bargraph is designed like a traffic light, to display either red, orange or green, but only one color at a time. When the bar reaches a selected color change point, the entire bar will change to the color designated for that zone. This eliminates any ambiguity as to the signal status, especially just after transitioning to a new zone.

First (Step Q) is to select the color to be displayed, when the bar is below*, whichever set point is set to the lowest position.

Second (Steps R, S, T, and U) is to select the color to be displayed when the bar is above each specific set point, regardless of the order or position to which the set points are set.

However, if two or more setpoints with differently specified colors are positioned at the same set point value, the color specified for the set point with the highest identifying number will be displayed. When set points are set to the same value, the SP4 color overrides the SP3 color, the SP3 color overrides the SP2 color, and the SP2 color overrides the SP1 color.

STEP Q Select Bargraph Color when the bar is BELOW* the Setpoint that is set to the lowest

position

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP1] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP R Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP1 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP2] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP S Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP2 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP3] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP T Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP3 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. Display toggles between [CSP4] and the previous color setting.

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

STEP U Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP4 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the P button. The meter exits the setpoint mode and returns to the operational

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

display.

The Bargraph Color programming mode is now complete.

*Note: For horizontal display formats BELOW* should be read as, to the left and ABOVE* should be read as, to the right.

Page 9

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 23 and 24) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Replacement 2-, 3-, and 4-pin plug connectors are available (see Accessories on page 20).

### Pin Descriptions

## Input Signal Pins 1 to 6

Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner.

See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 15 Relay Output Pins

Pin 8 SP3 NO. Normally Open 4 Amp Form A.

Pin 9 SP1/3 COM. Common for SP1 and SP3.

Pin 10 SP1 NC. Normally Closed 9 Amp Form C.

Pin 11 SP1 NO. Normally Open 9 Amp Form C.

Pin 12 SP4 NO. Normally Open 4 Amp Form A.

Pin 13 SP2/4 COM. Common for SP2 and SP4.

Pin 14 SP2 NC. Normally Closed 9 Amp Form C.

Pin 15 SP2 NO. Normally Open 9 Amp Form C.

### Pins 17 to 21 Rear Panel Switches

Note: The sequence of setpoint outputs is now 3-1-4-2, enabling delay on make (dom) and delay on break (dob) to be used with both Form C relays.

Pin 18 ANALOG OUTPUT (). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 19 Programming LOCK. By connecting the LOCK pin

to the COMMON pin, the meter's programmed parameters can be viewed but not changed.

Pin 20 COMMON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Pin 21 DIM. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting is halved.

### Pins 23 and 24 AC/DC Power Input

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Pin 17 ANALOG OUTPUT (+). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 23 AC Neutral / DC. Neutral power supply line.

Pin 24 AC line / +DC. Live power supply line.

Page 10

### Component Layout

### Connectors

WARNING

AC and DC input signals and power supply voltages can be hazardous.

Do Not connect live wires to terminal blocks, and do not insert, remove or handle terminal blocks with live wires connected.

Standard plug-in screw terminal blocks provided by Texmate:

Page 11

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate.com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 13 and 14. Also see Two Point Digital Calibration and Digital Calibration on page 4.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

### IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA04: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

Page 12

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

Fully User Scalable

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IF02: Line Frequency

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

Fully User Scalable

Fully User Scalable

Page 13

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

Fully User Scalable

IP07: Universal Process Input

2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

224D

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10V DC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10V DC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire Pressure Transducer

IPT1: Prototype Board for Custom Design

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6=wire

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

Page 14

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

Page 15

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range.

This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Page 16

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Calibration Procedures

In addition to the analog calibration capabilities that enable many modules to be interchanged between different meters without loss of accuracy the Leopard Family of meters have enhanced Digital Calibration functions.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. For negative inputs, Leopard Family Meters will display negative overrange at 50% of full scale range.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from

1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 1800.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts.

Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0%

Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to

2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only 10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts.

Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000.

Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 1000.

Page 17

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1 Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation

3 Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred

4 A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (eg, 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (eg, 15A or 20A)

5 See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information

6 See Connector Pinouts section for wiring

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm)

8 Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 45 lb-in (051 N-m)

Page 19

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### FL-B101D40

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: FL-B101D40-VRR-PS1-IA01-OIC-R11-OA2 plus ZR and an OP-N4/144X36

1934 Kellogg Ave, Carlsbad, CA 92008 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected]

Page 20

For Custom Face Plates and Scales see page 18.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B101D40 Features and Specs

LEOPARD FAMILY

## FL-B101D40

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment, 4 Digit 0.32 LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

This smart Tricolor or Mono-color digital bargraph has four fully programmable set points for monitoring, measurement, and control applications.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by

direct connection of the sensor output to more than

40 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4

to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to 9999 (12000 counts).

A Programmable Tricolor (Red-Green-Orange) or mono color (red or

green), 101 segment high brightness bargraph. Vertical or optional horizontal format.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of -1999 to 9999

(12000 counts). Optional green digital display.

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest

display setting by 50%.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Automatic intelligent averaging, smooths noisy signals while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

UL Listed

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints with adjustable Hysteresis.

Setpoint 1 has delay-on-make

and delay-on-break plus

a special pump on pump off mode that creates a

Hysteresis Band between SP1 and SP2.

Relay activation can be select-

ed to occur above (hi) or below

(Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control

accessed by the

adjusted by the

button and

button.

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......10 conversions per second (Typical) Digital Display:..........4 digit 0.31" LED red (std), green (optn)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts.

Bargraph Display:.....101 segment 4 red vertical (std),

green or tricolor (optn), horizontal (optn) Polarity:.....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:..Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash.

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom

Relay Output:............Two 4 Amp Form A relays and Two

segments of digital display flash.

9 Amp Form C relays.

Analog Output:.........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out).......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC,50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 4.2W PS2.........................18-48 VAC,50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.2W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:...........20C to 70C Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....9/64 DIN (Bezel 36Wx144Hmm)

Depth behind bezel (5.83") 148mm Plus (0.7) 18mm for connectors

Weight:.......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B101D40PS ManualFL10

LEOPARD FAMILY

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

40 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to

9999 (12000 counts).

Resistance

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

A Programmable Tricolor (Red-Green-Orange) or mono color

(red or green), 101 segment high brightness bargraph. Vertical or optional horizontal format.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of -1999 to 9999

(12000 counts). Optional green digital display.

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 10 Amp Form C, and two 5 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest

display setting by 50%.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Automatic intelligent averaging, smooths noisy signals while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints with adjustable Hysteresis.

Setpoint 1 has delay-on-make and delay-on-break plus a special pump on pump off mode that creates a

Hysteresis Band between

SP1 and SP2.

Relay activation can be

selected to occur above (hi) or below (Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control

accessed by the

and adjusted by the

button

button.

## FL-B101D40PS

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment, 4 Digit 0.32 LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

### This smart Tricolor or Mono-color digital bar-

### graph with programmable scale factor

### has four fully programmable set points for mon-

### itoring, measurement, and control applications.

### Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

Some examples are shown on pages 13 - 15.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

LEOPARD

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......10 conversions per second (Typical) Digital Display:..........4 digit 0.31" LED red (std), green (optn)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts.

Bargraph Display:....101 segment 4 red vertical (std),

green or tricolor (optn), horizontal (optn) Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:..Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash.

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom

Relay Output:............Two 5 Amp Form A relays and Two

segments of digital display flash.

10 Amp Form C relays.

Analog Output:........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V

OIC (mA out)..........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out)..........0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC @ 2.5W max 4.2W PS2........................18-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2.5W max 4.2W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 60C Storage Temp:..........20C to 70C Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....9/64 DIN (Bezel 36Wx144Hmm)

Depth behind bezel (5.83") 148mm Plus (0.7) 18mm for connectors

Weight:......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

### Index

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators

Setpoints

indicated

by an ON

Segment

Setpoints

indicated

by an OFF

Segment

Seven Segment

LED Display

101 Segment

Bargraph

LED

Annunciators

for Setpoints

1-4

Button

PROGRAM

Button

DOWN

Button

Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The

When pressed at the same time as the calibration mode.When pressed at the same time as the it initiates the setpoint setting mode.

button is used to move from one program step to the next. button, it initiates the button,

### Programming Conventions

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The following symbols are used throughout the logic diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter:

This symbol represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP button.

This is the DOWN button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When an alternative dotted line is shown, this indicates that an alternative logic branch will be followed when a particular option is present.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If an X appears through a digit, it means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained.

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the to view the setting of the saved Peak and Valley Values.

button allows you

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

button allows you When in the operational display, pressing the to change the Brightness Level as well as to view the setting of the setpoints SP1, SP2, SP3 & SP4.

When setting a displayed parameter during programming, the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

Front Panel LED Display Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs indicate the alarm status. They are labeled from bottom to top: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

Digital LED Displays

The digital LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming settings during programming.

Setpoint Indication

The position of setpoints on the bargraph display are indicated by an ON or OFF segment dependent on the bargraph display being above or below the setpoint.

and

When the buttons are shown together, the display value can be increased button by pressing and releasing the or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

and

When the buttons are shown with two displays, either display can be or selected by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

When two displays are shown together with bursts, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value.

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

When there are more than two display selections they are shown in brackets below the first display and are also selectable by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

A dotted line enclosing an entire logic diagram indicates that programming branch will appear only when a particular option is present.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### Software Logic Tree

The FL-B101D40PS is an intelligent bargraph meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

Software Version is Displayed on Power-up When power is applied, all segments of the bargraph and digital display light up for 3 seconds. The version number of the installed software is then displayed for 2 seconds, after which, the operational display indicates the input signal.

15 Second Program Timeout Except for ZERO and SPAN settings in the Two Point Digital Calibration Mode and the Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode (cLo and chi), the meter has a 15 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 15 seconds in any of the other programming sequences, the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the button in the preceding step will not be saved.

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Digital Rescaling

The FL-B10140PSF meter may be rescaled without applying an external signal by changing the Offset and Scale factor.

Offset is the reading that the meter will display for a zero input. The Offset may be set to any value from -1999 to +9999. The default value of the Offset is 000

Scale factor is the gain of the meter. The displayed reading is directly proportional to the Scale factor. The default value of the scale factor is 2000, but it may be set to any value between -1999 and +9999.

For an input of 2V a calibrated meter will read 2000 with the default Scale factor of 2000, 3000 with a Scale factor of 3000 and 500 with a Scale factor of 500

If a linear scale is represented by mx + b, then the Scale Factor corresponds to the slope m and the Offset corresponds to the intercept b

The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between 1 V DC to + 2 V DC. Outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange.

Note: Most input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meters digital Scale Factor is set to

2000 and Offset set to 0000 then, any pre-calibrated signal conditioner with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly in the meter without any further calibration.

MAIN MENU

Operational Display

### Digital Rescaling Procedure

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

1) Press the

gles between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

[on].

3) Press the

[out].

buttons at the same time. Display tog-

button. Display changes from [oFF] to

button. Display toggles between [CAL] and

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP C and toggles between [ScAL] and the previous [ScAL] setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Select Two Point Digital Calibration of Input Signal

button to select CAL [iP] for input sig-

button. Display toggles between [oFFS] and

1) Press the

nal calibration.

2) Press the

the

previous offset setting.

STEP C Set the Offset on the Digital Display

and

buttons, adjust the digital display to 1) Using the the desired offset. This is the reading that the meter will display for a zero input 2) Press the

the previous Scale factor.

button. Display toggles between [ScAL] and

STEP D Set the Scale factor on the Digital Display

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the meter display to the desired Scale factor. The default value is 2000, for which a 2V input will read 2000. If the scale factor is changed the display will change proportionately. Therefore if the Scale factor is changed to 1000 then for the same 2V input the display would read 1000.

3) Press the

button.

The Digital Rescaling is now complete.

If the Digital Rescaling was successfully completed, the menu branches to the Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display (see page 6), and the display flashes [bhi] and the previous setting.

Sub-menu

MODE

STEP A Calibration

Mode

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display

See Page 7

STEP B Calibration

Mode

To Two Point Analog Output Range Setting

and Calibration

See Page 8

DIGITAL

RESCALING MODE

STEP C Offset

STEP D Scale

Factor

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display Page 6

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### Successive Digital Rescaling to get Progressively Better Accuracy

STEP A

STEP B

STEP C

Texmate Meter

300

Offset = 0

Scale = 2000

3.5mV

Texmate Meter

320

Offset = 20

Scale = 2000

3.5mV

Texmate Meter

1190

Offset = 20

Scale = 2000

13.5mV

Hopper contains some material whose EXACT weight is not known.

It is estimated to be 320 pounds.

When a Texmate meter is connected, it displays 300 instead of 320.

Change offset to +20 to correct the Texmate meter display to 320.

A known load of EXACTLY 1000 pounds is now added to the hopper.

Texmate meter displays 1190 instead of 1320.

STEP D

STEP E

STEP F

Texmate Meter

1320

Offset = 20

Scale = 2219

13.5mV

Texmate Meter

Offset = 20

Scale = 2219

0.5mV

Texmate Meter

Offset = -40

Scale = 2219

0.5mV

Change scale to 2219 to correct the Texmate meter display to 1320

New scale = 2000 x 1320 / 1190 = 2219

The meter is approximately calibrated. Approximate, not exact, because the weight in STEP B is not exactly known.

Later (maybe many days later) when the hopper is finally empty, it is seen that the meter does not read zero.

Change Offset to -40 to correct the Texmate meter display.

Display is now correct.

STEP G

STEP H

STEP I

Texmate Meter

970

Offset = -40

Scale = 2219

10.5mV

Texmate Meter

1000

Offset = -40

Scale = 2287

10.5mV

Texmate Meter

Offset = -40

Scale = 2287

5mV

If a known weight of 1000 pounds is now added, the Texmate meter displays 970 instead of 1000.

Change Scale to correct this display.

New Scale = 2219x1000 / 970

The next time the hopper is empty, it will read 0 correctly.

error = 30 pounds

=2287

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Digital Span Selection For Bargraph Display

The bargraph can be set to display full scale (0-101 bars) any portion of the

digital reading from a minimum of 100 counts to a maximum of 12,000

Example of Setting the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display to be Different than the Digital Display Range

counts. This provides higher resolution bargraph indication for those appli-

cations where the normal operating input signal range is less than the

desired full scale display range of the digital display.

For Example:

If the full scale range of the meter has been set from -1999 to

9999 (0-12,000 counts), but the normal operating range of the

input signal is between 4000 & 6000. The bargraph high parame-

ter [bhi] can be set to 6000 and the bargraph low parameter [bLo]

can be set to 4000.

This means that although the meter could digitally display a signal

from -1999 to 9999 (0-12,000 counts), the bargraph display only

begins to function at a reading of 4000, and reaches full scale indi-

cation at a reading of 6000. Although the digital display will con-

tinue reading up to 9999 before indicating overrange, the bargraph

display will indicate its overrange by flashing for readings above

6000.

Bargraph does not light up for Input Signals up to 3999 counts

Bargraph lights up for Input Signals above 4000 counts

STEP A Enter the Calibration Sub Menu Mode

1) Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [bhi] and the

previous setting.

STEP B Set the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display (See example above) buttons, adjust the display to the desired

1) Using the

and

high parameter reading, e.g. 6000 counts.

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [bLo] and the

previous setting.

3) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

low parameter reading, e.g. 4000 counts.

4) Press the

button. Display changes from [4000] to [dP].

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP C Set the Decimal Point 1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

decimal point setting.

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [br] and the

previous brightness setting.

STEP D Set the Bargraph and Digital Display Brightness

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

brightness setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the

previous [Anhi] setting.

button. Display toggles between [Anhi] and the

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP G and toggles between [Cto] and [oFF], the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output

STEP E Selecting the [Anhi] Digital Value for Analog High Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value at which the [chi] Calibrated Analog High output will occur. For digital readings outside the digital span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability. However, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo (see below).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and previous

[AnLo] setting.

STEP F Selecting the [AnLo] Digital Value for Analog Low Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

digital value at which the [cLo] Calibrated Analog Low output will occur. For Digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. button. The display toggles between [cto] and

2) Press the

[oFF].

Note: Any two digital span points from 1999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital values for [Anhi] analog high and [AnLo] analog low can be reversed to provide a 20 to 4mA output. The digital span selected can be as small as two counts, when using the analog output to function as a Control or Alarm Driver. Small digital spans will cause the high resolution 16 bit D to A to increment digitally in stair case steps.

See Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration at the top of the next page.

Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with a Unipolar Input

If the meter's full scale range is set to 5000 counts, the midpoint would be

2500 counts. If a signal of 2500 counts is applied only one segment at the

2500 count mark will light up. If a signal of 4000 counts is applied the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 4000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 1000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 1000 count mark will light up.

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with Bipolar Signal Inputs

The meter may also be calibrated to display symmetrical bipolar signals such as 1 V or 10 V. When the center point display mode is selected, it will then function as a center zero meter. When positive signals are applied, the bar will go up from the center point, and when negative signals are applied, the bar will go down from the center point.

STEP G Bargraph Center Point Mode Selection (See example above) 1) To select bargraph center point mode, press the

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

button. Display toggles between [diSP] and [on]

2) Press the

or [oFF].

STEP H Digital Display ON/OFF Selection

1) To set the display to [oFF], press the toggles between [diSP] and [oFF].

button. Display

2) Press the

button. The display exits the calibration mode

and returns to the operational display. Only the bargraph display is on and the digital display is off.

If the digital display is selected to be off, pressing any button to make programming changes or to view setpoints activates the digital display.

When the procedure is complete, the digital display will then automatically switch off.

The Display/Bargraph settings are now complete.

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

1) Press the

and [oFF].

2) Press the

Press the

Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Determine if the Analog Output Selection Header is in the 4 to 20mA (0-20mA) position or the 0 to 10VDC position. If necessary, the module may have to be removed and the header position changed (see Component Layout below).

Note: Always disconnect power from the meter before removing the analog output module to adjust the mA or Volts output selection header and reinstalling it. When power is reconnected, the meters software will automatically detect the presence or absence of the analog output module.

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [cAL]

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on]. button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out] input calibration.

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between Zero and the previous Zero setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Enter the Two Point Analog [ouT] Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode button. Display toggles between [cLo] and an internal scale factor.

1) Press the

and

STEP E Set or Calibrate [cLo] the Low Analog Value of the Analog Output Range 1) Connect a multimeter to analog output pins 17 and 18 (see Rear Panel Pinouts on page 11). Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired low value as measured on the multimeter. cLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 18 mA (mA output selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected). However, the output of cLo must always be less than the value selected for chi. If a reversed analog output is desired, the values selected to establish the Digital Span can be reversed (see top of page 7). For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go any lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. However, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the the maximum analog output capability (see chi below).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [chi] and an internal scale factor.

STEP F Set or Calibrate [chi] the High Analog Value of the Analog Output Range 1) Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high value as measured on the multimeter display. chi may be adjusted to any value from 18 mA to 24 mA (mA output) or from 8 V to 10.3 V (volt output).

However, the value must be higher than the value selected for cLo. For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability.

2) Press the button. The meter exits the calibration mode and returns to the operational display.

and

Note: The analog output range established by the values selected for cLo and chi will occur, automatically scaled, between the two digital values selected for AnHi and AnLo.

However, the analog output can linearly rise above the chi value set for digital readings outside the digital span selected. See Digital Span Selection on page 7.

Case Dimensions

PANEL CUTOUT

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed, the setpoints without relays are operational in software for tri-color control or display only purposes. To remove unwanted setpoint indications, set them to 9999 or -1999 depending on the relay activation mode selected.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode

1) Press the

SP1 setting.

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [SP1] and the previous

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 [SP1] and 1) Using the button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous [doM] setting. 2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP1 value.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make [doM] Delay Time Setting

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value (0 to 9999 seconds).

The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous [dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break [dob] Delay Time Setting

and

1) Using the buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value (0 to 9999 seconds).

The reading must continuously remain in a non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break contact (de-energize).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [hYSt] and the previous [hYSt] setting.

STEP E Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

button. Display toggles between PUM and (on) or (oFF).

STEP F Select Pump [PUM] (on) or (oFF)

1) Using the buttons, select the Pump to be ON or OFF. When PUM is selected ON, and SP2 is set at a value higher than SP1, the SP1 relay will operate in a special "pump on pump off" mode.

SP2 acts as the upper limit and SP1 acts as the lower limit of the Hysteresis Band on the SP1 relay.

and

For filling applications:

[rLYS] should be set to [LhXX] (see step M). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs less than the SP1 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP2 setpoint is reached.

For emptying applications:

[rLYS] should be set to [hhXX] (see step M). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs greater than the SP2 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP1 setpoint is reached.

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous SP2 setting.

STEP G Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) and 1) Using the button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting. 2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP2 value.

STEP H Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

button. Display toggles between [SP3] and the previous [SP3] setting.

STEP I

Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob]) 1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

and

button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

STEP J Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

button. Display toggles between [SP4] and the previous [SP4] setting.

STEP K Set Setpoint 4 (SP4) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP4 value.

and

button. Display toggles between [hySt] and the previous [hySt] setting.

STEP L Select the Hysteresis [hYSt]

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

and

button. Display toggles between [rLYS] and the previous relay setting.

Please Continue On Next Page.

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode Continued

STEP M Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS] for SP1

(h) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

1) Using the

2) Press the

and

button. The SP2 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

buttons, select (L) or (h) for the first digit, which corresponds to SP1.

STEP N Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP2

1) Using the

2) Press the

and buttons, select (L) or (h) for the second digit, which corresponds to SP2. button. The SP3 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

STEP O Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP3

1) Using the

2) Press the

and

button. The SP4 Relay Activation digit begins to flash, and its decimal point is lit.

buttons, select (L) or (h) for the third digit, which corresponds to SP3.

STEP P Set High (h) or Low (L) for SP4

1) Using the

2) Press the

and

button.

buttons, select (L) or (h) for the fourth digit, which corresponds to SP4.

If a mono-color red or green display is installed then the Setpoint Relay Programming Mode is now complete and the meter returns to the operational display.

If a tricolor bargraph display is installed then the Bargraph Color Programming Mode will be entered and display toggles between [CoL] and the previous setting. Color selection menu will be displayed.

### Bargraph Color Programming Mode

To comply with the latest safety requirements, the tri-color bargraph is designed like a traffic light, to display either red, orange or green, but only one color at a time. When the bar reaches a selected color change point, the entire bar will change to the color designated for that zone. This eliminates any ambiguity as to the signal status, especially just after transitioning to a new zone.

First (Step Q) is to select the color to be displayed, when the bar is below*, whichever set point is set to the lowest position.

Second (Steps R, S, T, and U) is to select the color to be displayed when the bar is above each specific set point, regardless of the order or position to which the set points are set.

However, if two or more setpoints with differently specified colors are positioned at the same set point value, the color specified for the set point with the highest identifying number will be displayed. When set points are set to the same value, the SP4 color overrides the SP3 color, the SP3 color overrides the SP2 color, and the SP2 color overrides the SP1 color.

STEP Q Select Bargraph Color when the bar is BELOW* the Setpoint that is set to the lowest position

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

button. Display toggles between [CSP1] and the previous color setting.

STEP R Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP1 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

button. Display toggles between [CSP2] and the previous color setting.

STEP S Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP2 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

button. Display toggles between [CSP3] and the previous color setting.

STEP T Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP3 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red]

and

button. Display toggles between [CSP4] and the previous color setting.

STEP U Select Bargraph Color when the bar is ABOVE* SP4 Setpoint

1) Using the

2) Press the

display.

and buttons, select the desired bargraph color [grn], [oran] or [red] button. The meter exits the setpoint mode and returns to the operational

The Bargraph Color programming mode is now complete.

*Note: For horizontal display formats BELOW* should be read as, to the left and ABOVE* should be read as, to the right.

Page 10

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 23 and 24) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Replacement 2-, 3-, and 4-pin plug connectors are available (see Accessories on page 20).

Note: The sequence of setpoint outputs on meters shipped prior to 2002 was 1-2-3-4. The sequence is now 3-1-4-2, enabling delay on make

(dom) and delay on break (dob) to be used with both Form C relays.

### Pin Descriptions

### Input Signal Pins 1 to 6

Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner.

See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 15 Relay Output Pins

Pin 8 SP3 NO. Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

Pin 9 SP1/3 COM. Common for SP1 and SP3.

Pin 10 SP1 NC. Normally Closed 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 11 SP1 NO. Normally Open 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 12 SP4 NO. Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

Pin 13 SP2/4 COM. Common for SP2 and SP4.

Pin 14 SP2 NC. Normally Closed 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 15 SP2 NO. Normally Open 10 Amp Form C.

Pins 17 to 21 Rear Panel Switches

Pin 18 ANALOG OUTPUT (). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 19 Programming LOCK. By connecting the LOCK pin

to the COMMON pin, the meter's programmed parameters can be viewed but not changed.

Pin 20 COMMON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Pin 21 DIM. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting is halved.

### Pins 23 and 24 AC/DC Power Input

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Pin 17 ANALOG OUTPUT (+). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 23 AC Neutral / DC. Neutral power supply line.

Pin 24 AC line / +DC. Live power supply line.

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 11

### Component Layout

### Connectors

WARNING

AC and DC input signals and power supply voltages can be hazardous.

Do Not connect live wires to terminal blocks, and do not insert, remove or handle terminal blocks with live wires connected.

Standard plug-in screw terminal blocks provided by Texmate:

Page 12

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate.com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 16-17.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/600V AC

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300/600V AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA04: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

Fully User Scalable

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 13

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IA10 AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

Fully User Scalable

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

Ordering Code Options for Direct Pressure (IGYX, IGYY & IGYZ)

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC

Fully User Scalable

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

Fully User Scalable

Fully User Scalable

Page 14

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IP07: Universal Process Input 2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire

IPT1: Prototype Board for Custom Design

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

20/2mV/V, 4/6wire

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 15

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Input and Output Pins

On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

### INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB.Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

### SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

### SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

### 24V DC Output Header

On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

### ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

### ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header

When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Page 16

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps.

This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### Input Module Calibration Procedures

In addition to the analog calibration capabilities that enable many modules to be interchanged between different meters without loss of accuracy the Leopard Family of meters have enhanced Digital Calibration functions.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. For negative inputs, Leopard Family Meters will display negative overrange at 50% of full scale range.

4 Decimal Points.The selection or positioning of decimal points has

no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or

150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from

1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 1800.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts.

Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0% Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only 10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts. Apply

4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000. Apply

20 mA and check that the display reads 1000.

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 17

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### FL-B101D40PS

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: FL-B101D40PS-VRR-PS1-IA01-OIC-R11-OA2 plus CR-CHANGE and an OP-N4/144X36

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

For Custom Face Plates and Scales see page 19.

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Page 20

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

FL-B101D40PS DS (FL10)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B101D40PS Features and Specs

## FL-B101D40PS

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment, 4 Digit 0.32 LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

LEOPARD FAMILY

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

40 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

AC/DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired digital span from one count to the full scale range of 1999 to

9999 (12000 counts).

Resistance

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

A Programmable Tricolor (Red-Green-Orange) or mono color

(red or green), 101 segment high brightness bargraph.Vertical or optional horizontal format.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of -1999 to 9999

(12000 counts). Optional green digital display.

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest

display setting by 50%.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Automatic intelligent averaging, smooths noisy signals while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

UL Listed

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Setpoint 1 has delay-on-make and delay-on-break plus a special pump on pump off mode that creates a Hysteresis Band between

SP1 and SP2.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints with adjustable Hysteresis.

Relay activation can be

selected to occur above (hi) or below (Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control

### This smart Tricolor or Mono-color digital bar-

### graph with programmable scale factor

### has four fully programmable set points for mon-

### itoring, measurement, and control applications.

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

LEOPARD

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......10 conversions per second (Typical) Digital Display:..........4 digit 0.31" LED red (std), green (optn)

Range 1999 to 9999 counts.

Bargraph Display:....101 segment 4 red vertical (std),

green or tricolor (optn), horizontal (optn) Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Front panel button selectable, XXXX Positive Overrange:..Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash.

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom

Relay Output:............Two 4 Amp Form A relays and Two

segments of digital display flash.

9 Amp Form C relays.

Analog Output:........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V

OIC (mA out)..........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out)..........0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply 85-265 VAC,50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 4.2W 18-48 VAC,50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.2W

PS1 (std)................

PS2........................

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:..........20C to 70C Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....9/64 DIN (Bezel 36Wx144Hmm)

Depth behind bezel (5.83") 148mm Plus (0.7) 18mm for connectors

Weight:......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

accessed by the

and adjusted by the

button

button.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B101Q Bargraph manual TexmateFL6

Center Bar

for Dual Scale

Applications

(Tri-Color or

Mono-Color)

LEOPARD FAMILY

## FL-B101Q

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

### Smart mono-color digital bargraph

### with four fully programmable set points for

### monitoring, measurement, and control applications.

Left or Right Bar to match 6 Edgewise Mechanical Meters with Left or Right Pointers (Mono-Color only)

General Features

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired span from one bar to the full scale range

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20 mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

UL Listed

Software Features

The two 101 segment bargraph can be independently scaled.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints.

Relays activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below (LO)

each setpoint.

Decimal point setting.

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 50 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Leopard Family meters. Some examples are shown on pages 12 - 14. Check with your local distributors for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on range and function selected A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 1segment) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......10 conversions per second (Typical) Bargraph Display:.....101 segment 4 vertical

(std), horizontal (optn), red (std), green (optn), one red one green (optn)

Polarity:.....................Selectable center zero Positive Overrange:..Bargraph display flashes Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph display flashes Relay Output:............Two 4 Amp Form A relays and Two

9 Amp Form C relays

Analog Output:.........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out).......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400 Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 4.2W PS2.........................15-48 VAC,50-400 Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.2W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:...........20C to 70C Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....3/32 DIN, Bezel: 36x144 mm(1.42x5.69) Depth behind bezel: (4.64") 117.5 mm Plus 10 mm (0.39) for Right-angled connector, or plus 18.3 mm (0.72) for Straightthru connector, or plus 26.5 mm (1.05) for Push-On connector.

Weight:.......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

Zero Buttons

Set Point Button

Span Buttons

UP Button Indicator

Setpoint indicated

by an ON Segment

101 Segment Bar

Setpoint indicated

by an OFF Segment

DOWN Button

Indicator

Quickset Programming

This bargraph features Texmate's unique QUICKSET PROGRAMMING.

When a front panel button is pressed the associated function is directly changed. The direction of change will be either up or down, as indicated by the UP and DOWN indicator LEDs. After the indicator LED lights up there is a 0.5 second delay before any change occurs. When a button is released and pressed again the direction of change is reversed.

As there are no menu or sub-menus to navigate, the programming and setup is quick and

## Front Panel Buttons

Zero Button

The Zero Button sets the Channel 1 low input signal scaling.

Span Button

The Span Button sets the Channel 1 high input signal scaling.

SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4 Buttons These buttons setup the corresponding setpoints.

Setpoint Indication

The position of setpoints on the bargraph display are indicated by an ON segment if the bargraph display is below the setpoint, and by an OFF segment if the bargraph display is above the setpoint. (See the drawing above)

### Center Bar Display Option

This display option can be selected when a dual scale is required. A custom face plate is required for dual scales. Tri-Color option is available only for the Center Bar display.

### Glossary of Programming Symbols and Modes of Operation Controls and Indicators

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following programming steps. The following symbols are used to represent the functions and displays of the meter:

Setpoint indicated by

an ON segment.

This arrow represents

the direction and level of an input signal

Small arrow shows

direction the bargraph display has

moved or will move.

Setpoint indicated by

an OFF segment.

Shading indicates

bargraph is ON in this area.

### Standard or Center Zero Display Mode Select Header

CH1

CH2

CH2

CH1

Jumper clips enables standard display on CH1 and CH2.

Jumper clip to enable Center Zero display.

Operating Mode Select Header

This header selects one of the two basic operating modes presently available for this meter.

MODE

32 1

Mode 0 Bargraph with four set points displayed on

bargraph display.

Mode 3 Enables the Hysteresis mode for tank

filling or tank emptying applications.

When two fingers are shown side by side, the two corresponding buttons must be pressed at the same time to initiate an indicated function.

### Relay Activation Mode Select Header

When no jumper clips are installed the relays will

activate when the display exceeds the set point.

Any relay that has a jumper clip installed will activate when the display is less than the set point.

Page 2

### Overview of Display Modes, Scaling Capabilities and Operating Modes

### Standard Display Mode

Standard Scaling

Standard display mode selected and scaled so bar increases as input signal increases from Low to Hi.

Inverse Scaling

Standard display mode selected and scaled so the bar increases as the input signal decreases from Hi to Low.

CH1

CH2Center Zero Display Mode

Bipolar Center Zero

Center point display mode selected and scaled, so the bar increases upward from zero, for increasing positive inputs and downward from zero for increasing negative inputs. When the input is zero, only the center segment will be on.

MODE

32 1

### Mode 0 Channel Inputs

Display with 4 Set Points With Standard display or Center point mode selected, the setpoints are indicated by an ON segment outside the bar display area and by an OFF segment inside the bar display area.

Halfway Zero Point

Center point display mode selected and scaled, so the bar increases upwards or downwards from the center point, for signals that are greater or less than half the calibrated full scale range respectively.

When the input is equal to half the full scale range, only the center segment will be on.

Horizontal and Reverse Mounting with Custom Face Plate Installed

Horizontal or Reverse Mounting Meters can be mounted horizontally in the panel and for those applications that require an opposite growth of the bar, the meter can be vertically or horizontally mounted upside down

Mode 3 Hysteresis Band between SP1 & SP2 This mode enables the Hysteresis function. In order for Hysteresis to function, SP2 must be set to a value greater than SP1, and SP2 should be selected as High (h) Setpoint (See page 7). When these conditions are met, and Mode 3 is selected, then a Hysteresis band is created for the

SP1 relay, with the upper limit of SP2 and the lower limit of SP1. SP2 relay continues to operate normally.

For a tank filling application SP1 is set to a Low (L) Setpoint. SP1 relay can control a pump that fills the tank With Mode 3 selected, SP1 relay activates for inputs less than the SP1 level. Once activated, SP1 relay will stay ON until the tank is filled to the SP2 level.

For a tank emptying application SP1 is set to a High (h) Setpoint. SP1 can control a pump that empties the tank. With Mode 3 selected, SP1 relay activates for inputs greater than the SP2 level. Once activated, SP1 relay will stay ON until the tank is emptied to the SP1 level.

Page 3

### Opening the Case to Access Mode Select Headers

The mode select headers are located on the Display Driver Board assembly. To change any of the modes, it is best to remove the Display Driver Board assembly from the case. Before removing the Display Driver Board assembly from the front of the case it is necessary to remove the rear cover and slide the main board back an inch, or remove it, to disengage the pin and socket connector between the main board and the display assembly.

Step 1

Remove the front bezel by lightly levering the plastic catches up and forward in the a b c d sequence shown.

Then remove the cover and scale faceplate.

Front view with bezel and scale faceplate removed.

Step 4

Starting with the top first, insert a small flat bladed screw driver and carefully lever the plastic catch up and tilt the Display Board assembly forward. Then repeat this action with the bottom catches.

Step 5

Remove the entire Display Board assembly by sliding it out of case.

### Meter Exploded view

Optional 16 Bit Isolated Analog Output Module

Page 4

Step 2

Remove the rear cover plate by pressing down lightly with a small flat bladed screw driver to release two plastic catches, on either side of the case and levering backwards.

Step 3

Slide the Main Board back approximately 1 to disengage the pin and socket connection to the Display Driver

Board.

### Operating Mode

### Select Header

### Standard or

### Center Zero

### Display Mode

### Select Header

CH1

CH2

3 4

### Relay Activation Mode

### Select Header

### Two Point Quickset Scaling and Calibration

Meters with QuICkSET PROgRAMMINg feature a unique, easy-to-use, two point scaling and calibration system.

Scaling or calibration is accomplished simply, by applying a zero or low input signal and adjusting the bar to the desired reading, using the ZERO button. A higher input signal is then applied, and the bar is adjusted to the desired reading for that input value, using the SPAN button.

IMPORTANT DETAILS THAT MAkE QuICkSET PROgRAMMINg EASY TO uSE AND uNDERSTAND

1. The zero and span buttons are functionally the same, except as follows: The ZERO button can initiate a scaling with input signals from zero to 95% of fullscale.The Span button can initiate a scaling with input signals from 5% of fullscale to 105% of fullscale.

2. When a Zero or Span button is pressed, the Up or Down indicator LED will immediately light up to show the direction, in which the Bar will move, after a 0.5 second delay. If the button is released and pressed again, the opposite Up or Down indicator will light up, and 0.5 seconds later the Bar will begin to move in that direction until the button is released.

When the bar is being adjusted to zero or fullscale, the bar will automatically stop at the zero or fullscale position, and will not overshoot these positions, even if the button continues to be pressed.

3. While the bar is being adjusted, a new offset and scale factor is continuously being calculated. At the moment the button is released, and the scaling is accepted, the calculation data is memorized and implemented. The Scaling calculation is based on the new position of the Bar, the input signal being applied at that moment, and the previously memorized position of the Bar and the input signal that was being applied, when the other button was last released.

4. Positive and negative signals maybe integrated into a two point scaling. However when either a ZERO or SPAN button is pressed the input signal being applied, must be more than 5% higher or lower than the previously memorized value of the input signal, that was being applied when the other button was last released. If not, the bar will flash, the scaling will not be accepted, and the previous scaling will still be retained in memory.

5. Because of the requirement, that a new scaling input signal must be 5% higher or lower than the previously stored value, it can sometimes be difficult to implement a desired scaling, particularly when using a calibrator that only has fixed output values. In this case Reset the Scaling by pressing the ZERO and SPAN buttons simultaneously for two seconds. Both scaling memories will be erased and an internal default scale factor will be loaded. This provides a display of zero to fullscale on the bar for an input of approximately 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioning module. After Resetting the Scaling a new calibration, using either button, can be implemented with new input signal values. It is good practice to always use the Zero button for lower input signals and the Span button for higher input signals, even when the bar display scale is inversed.

6. The larger the difference between two points used for calibration, the better the accuracy. However if the difference is too high, and the output from the input signal conditioning module is greater than +2.1VDC, or less than -1.05VDC, the bar will flash over range. The calibration will not then be accepted and, the previous scaling will still be retained in memory. In this case, either a lower input signal must be used, or a higher range on the input module should be selected to recalibrate the meter.

Note: Most input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meters scale factor is set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 10 Bars fullscale with a 2.000 V input, any pre-calibrated signal conditioner with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly in the meter without any further calibration.

### Standard Display Mode Calibration Procedure

Standard or Center Zero Display Mode may be selected, depending on the Operating Mode selected. If the standard display mode is not already selected open the meter case as showing on page 4 and move the jumper clips on the display mode select header to the OFF position.

STEP A REVIEW THE INPuT MODuLE STATuS

1) See pages 12-14 for information on input modules that may be used with

this meter.

2) Confirm that the correct range and input is selected on the input signal con-

ditioning module.

Note: When undertaking an initial set up and primary scaling and calibration of the meter it is best to start with a reset of the scaling.

STEP B RESET THE SCALINg

1)Apply power to the meter and press the ZERO and SPAN buttons simultaneously for

2 seconds. This erases any previously memorized scalings, and resets the scaling to the factory default, of approximately zero to full scale, for an input, that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

Reset the scaling

to the default value on by pressing

the Zero and

Span buttons

simultaneously

for 2 secs.

Page 5

### Standard Display Mode Calibration Procedure Continued

Note: To calibrate the bargraph you must be able to input two input signals. Usually the minimum input (LO Input) and the maximum input (HI Input) signals are used for optimum accuracy. However a scaling can be accomplished with any two signals that are higher or lower than each other by more than 5% of fullscale and are not greater than +2.1VDC or less than -1.05VDC.

STEP C SET THE LOW INPuT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (4ma in this example) to the input pins.

2) Using the ZERO button adjust the bar down to the required position.

STEP D SET THE HIgH INPuT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the high input signal (20mA in this example) to the input pins.

Using the SPAN button adjust the bar to the required position.

This position could be higher or lower than the position adjusted in Step 2. The scaling for an input of 4 to 20mA is now complete.

One Point Quickset Rescaling and Calibration Procedure

ONE POINT RECALIBRATION

As explained earlier, the FL-B101Q bargraph is calibrated using two point calibration. Once a bargraph is calibrated, the low end of the range may be then recalibrated without affecting the calibration of the high end, and vice versa.

For example, take an FL-B101Q that has been calibrated to read zero to full scale for an input of 4 to 20mA. If now the scaling has to be changed to read zero to full scale for an input of 0 to 20mA, only the low (4 mA) end needs to be recalibrated. The high (20 mA) end of the scaling is left untouched, and so does not change. The following one point recalibration procedure is used for this purpose.

STEP A RECALIBRATE THE LOW INPuT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR 1) Apply the LO input signal (0ma in this example) to the input pins.

The first segment will flash, indicating an under range condition.

2) Using the ZERO button adjust the bar up to the required position.

3) The FL-B101Q has now been recalibrated to read zero to fullscale

for a 0 to 20 mA input.

### Center Zero Mode Scaling For Bipolar Inputs

The procedure for scaling the bar graph for bipolar signals is very simple. If say CH1 has to be scaled for -1V to +1V, the steps are as follows:

STEP A SELECT THE CENTER ZERO DISPLAY MODE FOR CH1

1) Following the instructions on page 4, remove the meter from the case.

2) Select the Center Zero Mode for CH1 by repositioning the jumper clip on the Center

Zero Display Mode Select Header.

CH1

CH2

STEP B REVIEW THE INPuT MODuLE STATuS

1) See pages 15 21 for information on input modules that may be use with this

meter.

2) Only the IDP4 Universal Input module can be used for dual inputs and information

on this module can be found on page 15.

3) Confirm that the correct range and input is selected on the input signal conditioning

module.

Note: When undertaking an initial set up and primary scaling and calibration of the meter it is best to start with a reset of the scaling.

STEP C RESET THE SCALINg ON CHANNEL ONE

1) Apply power to the meter and press the CH1 ZERO and CH1 SPAN buttons

simultaneously for 2 seconds. This erases any previously memorized scalings, and resets the scaling to the factory default, of approximately zero to full scale, for an input, that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

Page 6

### Center Zero Mode Scaling For Bipolar Inputs continued

STEP D SET THE LOW INPuT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (-1V in this example) to the CH1 input pins.

2) Using the CH1 ZERO button adjust the bar down to the required position. In this

case, all the bar segments from mid point down to the bottom will be ON.

STEP E SET THE HIgH INPuT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the high input signal (+1V in this example) to the CH1 input pins.

2) Using the CH1 SPAN button adjust the bar to the required position. This position could be higher or lower than the position adjusted in Step 2. In this case, all the bar segments from mid point up to the top will be ON.

3) The scaling of CH1 for an input of -1V to +1V is now complete.

Setpoint Adjust

The bargraph has the option to have up to 4 setpoints (two 9A Form C relays and two 4A Form A relays) installed. Each relay may be set to activate either above or below its setpoint by inserting jumper clips on the Relay Activation header which is located on the Display Driver Board. See the layout diagram on Page 4 for the exact location. The steps to setup the setpoints are as follows:

1) SELECT THE RELAY ACTIVATION MODE FOR EACH INSTALLED RELAY

Make sure that the required relays have been installed in the meter. Refer to the component layout on Page 11 for relay positions. If a jumper clip is installed in a specific relay position on the Relay Activation Mode Header, that relay will activate when the display bar is lower that the programmed setpoint. If no jumper clip is installed in a specific relay position on the Relay Activation Mode Header, that relay will activate when the display bar is equal to or higher that the programmed setpoint. The Diagrams below show some of the various possibilities for relay activation.

Default

SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4 all activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

SP2 and SP4 activate when input is lower than set point. SP1 and SP3 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

SP2 activate when input is lower than set point. SP1, SP3 and SP4 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

SP1 and SP3 activate when input is lower than set point. SP2 and SP4 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4 all activate when input is lower than set point.

SP1 and SP2 activate when input is lower than set point. SP3 and SP4 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

3 4

3 4

3 4

3 4

3 4

3 4

Page 7

### Setpoint Adjust continued

2) ADJuST THE SETPOINT FOR EACH RELAY

The setpoint for each relay is set by the front panel buttons marked SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4. When a front panel button is pressed and held down, the associated setpoint is directly changed. The direction of change will be either up or down, as indicated by the UP and DOWN indicator LEDs. After the indicator LED lights up there is a 0.5 second delay before any change occurs. To reverse the direction of change, release the button and then press down again. As there are no menus or sub-menus to navigate, the programming and setup is quick and easy.

Setpoints are indicated on the bar display by an ON segment if the bar is below the setpoint and with an OFF segment if the bar display is above the setpoint.

### Setting the Colors (For CHT or CVT Center Bar display options only)

To comply with the latest safety requirements, the tri-color bargraph is designed like a traffic light, to display either red, orange or green, but only one color at a time. When the bar reaches a selected color change point, the entire bar will change to the color designated for that zone. This eliminates any ambiguity as to the signal status, especially just after transitioning to a new zone.

However, if two or more setpoints with differently specified colors are positioned at the same set point value, the color specified for the set point with the highest identifying number will be displayed. When set points are set to the same value, the SP4 color overrides the SP3 color, the SP3 color overrides the SP2 color, and the SP2 color overrides the SP1 color.

STEP A ENTER COLOR SET MODE Hold down ALL four setpoint buttons (SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4) and apply power to the meter. The meter will light up in the Color Set Mode. Release all the setpoint buttons.

STEP B SELECT COLOR FOR BAR ABOVE SETPOINT 1 Hold down the SP1 button. The color of the bar segments below SP1 will cycle between red,

green and orange. Release the SP1 button when the bar is the required color. Now

Whenever the bar is above the SP1 level it will be this color. When the bar is below the SP1

level it will always be red.

STEP C SELECT COLOR FOR BAR ABOVE SETPOINT 2 Hold down the SP2 button. The color of the bar segments below SP2 will cycle between red,

green and orange. Release the SP2 button when the bar is the required color. Now

whenever the bar is above the SP2 level it will be this color.

STEP D SELECT COLOR FOR BAR ABOVE SETPOINT 3 Hold down the SP3 button. The color of the bar segments below SP3 will cycle between red,

green and orange. Release the SP3 button when the bar is the required color. Now

whenever the bar is above the SP3 level it will be this color.

STEP E SELECT COLOR FOR BAR ABOVE SETPOINT 4 Hold down the SP4 button. The color of the bar segments below SP4 will cycle between red,

green and orange. Release the SP4 button when the bar is the required color. Now

whenever the bar is above the SP4 level it will be this color.

STEP F EXIT COLOR SET MODE

Turn off the power to the meter for 5 seconds and then re apply the power. The bargraph will now work with the programmed colors.

Page 8

### Analog Output Scaling and Calibration

When the optional analog output module is installed, an independently calibrated 16 bit isolated, voltage or current analog output is available.

The analog signal is independently scaled to the input signal and not to the bargraph display. It is important to note that the Analog Output is completely independently of the bargraph display. This means for example that the bargraph display may be scaled to go from zero to full scale as the input changes from 0 to 5V, while at the same time, the analog output is scaled to go from 4 to 20mA as the input changes from 2 to 3V. Rescaling the bargraph or the analog output will not affect the scaling of the other.

To calibrate the Analog Output you must be able to input two input signals. Usually the minimum input (LO Input) and the maximum (HI Input) signals are used for maximum accuracy.

For example the five steps to obtain an Analog Output of 4mA to 20mA for an input of 0 to 10V are:

STEP A ACCESS THE ANALOg CALIBRATION MODE

1) Confirm the internal analog output module is installed and that the required

voltage or current output option is selected.

2) Turn OFF the power to the bargraph.

3) Hold down the ZERO and SPAN buttons simultaneously and re-power the bargraph. The ZERO button will now function as the LO button and the SPAN button will now function as the HI button for calibrating the Analog Output.

STEP B RESET THE ANALOg OuTPuT SCALINg

1) Press the LO and HI buttons simultaneously and hold them down for 2 seconds. This will reset the analog output scaling to the default value. The default analog output scaling is approximately 0 to 20mA (0 to 10V if voltage output option is selected) for an input that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

STEP C CALIBRATE ANALOg OuTPuT FOR LO SIgNAL

1) Apply the low input signal (0V in this example) to the meter.

2) Connect an external multimeter to the analog output pins (Pins 17 and 18).

3) Using the LO button adjust the analog output as measured on the external multimeter to be the required value. (4mA in this example). When the LO button is pressed, the UP or DOWN indicator LED shows the direction of change. To reverse the direction of change release the LO button and press down again. Initially the output changes very slowly, but speeds up as the LO button remains pressed down. The analog output for a low input can be set in this step to any value in the range of 0 to 20mA or 0 to 10V ( if the voltage output option is selected).

Turn Power ON

while holding

down the Zero

and Span Buttons

simultaneously

Reset the analog

output scaling by

pressing the LO (zero) and HI (span) buttons simultaneously

for 2 secs.

Apply 0 V to the Input Signal Pins

Adjust the Analog

output to 4.00mA with the LO (zero) button

Apply 10 V to the Input Signal Pins

STEP D CALIBRATE ANALOg OuTPuT FOR HI SIgNAL

1) Next apply the high input signal (10V in this example) to the meter.

2) Using the HI button, adjust the analog output as measured on the external multimeter to be the required value. (20mA in this example). When the HI button is pressed the UP or DOWN indicator LED shows the direction of change. Release the HI button and press again to reverse the direction of change. Initially the output changes very slowly, but speeds up as the HI button continues to remain pressed. This output may be higher or lower than the value set in Step C, and may be any value in the range of 0 to 20mA or 0 to10V. This allows the easy reversal of analog output that is required in some applications.

Adjust the Analog

output to 20.00mA with the HI (span) button

STEP E EXIT THE ANALOg OuTPuT CALIBRATION MODE

1) Turn OFF the power to the bargraph 2) Re-power the bargraph. The two buttons will now return to their original

function of ZERO and SPAN.

3) Calibration is now complete and the bar is scaled for a 0 to 10V input to

produce an analog output of 4 to 20mA.

Turn Power OFF

and then back

ON to exit

Analog output

Calibration Mode

Page 9

### Functional Diagram Controls and Indicators

### Connector Pinouts Controls and Indicators

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 23 and 24) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Replacement 2-, 3-, and 4-pin plug connectors are available (see Accessories on page 18).

WARNINg

AC and DC power supply voltages are hazardous. Make sure the power supply is isolated before connecting to the meter.

### Pin Descriptions Controls and Indicators

### Input Signal Pins 1 to 6

Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner.

See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 15 Relay Output Pins

Pin 8 SP3 NO. Normally Open 4 Amp Form A.

Pin 9 SP1/3 COM. Common for SP1 and SP3.

Pin 10 SP1 NC. Normally Closed 9 Amp Form C.

Pin 11 SP1 NO. Normally Open 9 Amp Form C.

Pin 12 SP4 NO. Normally Open 4 Amp Form A.

Pin 13 SP2/4 COM. Common for SP3 and SP4.

Pin 14 SP2 NC. Normally Closed 9 Amp Form C.

Pin 15 SP2 NO. Normally Open 9 Amp Form C.

### Pins 17 to 21 Rear Panel Switches

Note: The sequence of setpoint outputs is 3-1-4-2, enabling delay on make (dom) and delay on break (dob) to be used with both Form C relays.

Pin 18 ANALOg OuTPuT (). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to

20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 19 Programming LOCk. By connecting the LOCK pin

to the COMMON pin, the meter's programmed parameters can be viewed but not changed.

Pin 20 COMMON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Pin 21 DIM. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting is halved.

### Pins 23 and 24 AC/DC Power Input

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Pin 17 ANALOg OuTPuT (+). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 23 AC Neutral / DC. Neutral power supply line.

Pin 24 AC line / +DC. Live power supply line.

Page 10

### Component Layout Controls and Indicators

### Connectors

WARNINg

AC and DC input signals and power supply voltages can be hazardous.

Do Not connect live wires to terminal blocks, and do not insert, remove or handle terminal blocks with live wires connected.

Standard plug-in screw terminal blocks provided by the Manufacturer

Page 11

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate.com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary on page 16. Also see Two Point Digital Calibration and Digital Calibration on page 5.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA04: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

Page 12

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

Fully User Scalable

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

Fully User Scalable

IP07: Universal Process Input 2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

224C

IPT1: Prototype Board for Custom Design

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

Fully User Scalable

Page 13

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

Page 14

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

### Case Dimensions Controls and Indicators

Page 15

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Dual input modules, and those modules exclusively compatible with the Leopard or

### Tiger Families, do not have zero and span adjustments. These modules are scaled

### and calibrated using the internal software functions of each individual meter.

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

100 Counts

+ 100 Counts

15 Turn Potentiometer

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

1 2

4 5

SPAN Adjust

Header position

SPAN Pot %

Signal Span %

< Decrease Span Increase >

20%

20%

20%

40%

20%

60%

20%

20%

80% 100%

Equivalent

Circuit

Input LO

Acts like 75 Turn 1 Mega Ohm Potentiometer

Input

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

Zero Offset Range Header

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

Page 16

Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

### FL-B101Q

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: FL-B101Q-RVR-PS1-IA01-OIC-R11-OA2. OA2 are CR-CHANGE and an OP-N4/144X36 (Two "Options and Accessories")

FL-B101Q...144x36mm, Leopard, 101 Segment Bargraph, 4 Digit......

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 18

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B101Q Features and Specs

Center Bar

for Dual Scale

Applications

(Tri-Color or

Mono-Color)

LEOPARD FAMILY

## FL-B101Q

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

### Smart mono-color digital bargraph

### with four fully programmable set points for

### monitoring, measurement, and control applications.

Left or Right Bar to match 6 Edgewise Mechanical Meters with Left or Right Pointers (Mono-Color only)

### General Features

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired span from one bar to the full scale range

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20 mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

UL Listed

Software Features

The two 101 segment bargraph can be independently scaled.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints.

Relays activation can be selected to occur above (HI) or below (LO)

each setpoint.

Decimal point setting.

### Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 50 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Leopard Family meters.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on range and function selected A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 1segment) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......10 conversions per second (Typical) Bargraph Display:.....101 segment 4 vertical

(std), horizontal (optn), red (std), green (optn), one red one green (optn)

Polarity:.....................Selectable center zero Positive Overrange:..Bargraph display flashes Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph display flashes Relay Output:............Two 4 Amp Form A relays and Two

9 Amp Form C relays

Analog Output:.........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V

OIC

OIV

(mAout)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance (volts out).......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400 Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 4.2W PS2...................... 15-48 VAC,50-400 Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.2W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:...........20C to 70C Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....3/32 DIN, Bezel: 36x144 mm(1.42x5.69) Depth behind bezel: (4.64") 117.5 mm Plus 10 mm (0.39) for Right-angled connector, or plus 18.3 mm (0.72) for Straightthru connector, or plus 26.5 mm (1.05) for Push-On connector.

Weight:.......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B202Q DS FL5

Dual - Inputs

with Dual Input IDP4 Universal DC volts, mA, 4-20mA Input Module

2 Setpoints per bar Vertical or Horizontal

Configuration

## FL-B202Q

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## Dual 101 Segment LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

LEOPARD FAMILY

MIN-MAX Display

on Right Bar with Push Button Reset

Left Bar Displays

Single Input and

4 Setpoints using

Leopard Family

I-Series Input

Modules, such as

AC amps, Temperature, Pressure, etc..

Dual Tracking

Setpoints on Right

bar. Adjustable by

External Signal or

Potentiometer

input on CH2.

Left Bar Displays

Single Input on CH1 with Dual Input IDP4 Universal DC volts, mA, 4-20mA

Input Module

General Features

Two 10 Amp Form C, and two 5 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V

AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired span from one bar to the full scale range

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20 mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

Software Features

Utilizes the unique Quickset programming system.

The two 101 segment bargraphs can be independently scaled.

Five user selectable operating modes.

Center zero display mode selectable for one or both bargraphs.

Four programmable setpoints.

Relay activation is individually selectable to occur above (HI) or

below (LO) for each setpoint.

### Smart dual-bar, dual-input or Single-input bargraph

### with up to four fully programmable set points and an

### isolated independently scalable 16-bit Analog output.

### Input Module Compatibility

Dual input modes utilize the FL-B202Q specific IDP4 Universal DC Volts, mA, 4-20mA dual-input

module, see pages 14-15.

Single Input modes are compatible with the entire LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

Some examples are shown on pages 13 - 17.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specification:....... Depends on range & function selected A/D Converter:........... 14 bit single slope Accuracy:............... (0.05% of reading + 1segment) Temp. Coeff.:............. 100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm Up Time:........... 2 minutes Conversion Rate:......... 10 conversions per second (Typical) Bargraph Display:........ 101 segment 4 vertical dual red bars(std), Dual green bars(optn), one red bar and one green bar(optn) Horizontal bars(optn)

Polarity:................. Selectable center zero Positive Overrange:....... Bargraph display flashes Negative Overrange:...... First segment of bargraph display

flashes

Relay Output:............ Two 5 Amp Form A Two 10 Amp Form C relays

relays and

Analog Output:........... Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V

OIC (mA out)........... 4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance

OIV (volts out).......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance

Power Supply:........... AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply

PS1 (std).............. 85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC @

PS2................... 15-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC @

2.5W max 4.2W

2.5W max 4.2W

Operating Temp.:......... 0 to 60C Storage Temp:............ 20C to 70C Relative Humidity:........ 95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:........ 9/64 DIN

(Bezel 36Wx144Hmm)

Depth behind bezel (5.83") 148mm Plus (0.7) 18mm for connectors

Weight:................. 9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

### Index

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

CH1

Zero Button

Span Button

Setpoint

indicated

by an ON

Segment

Display 1

101 Segment Bar

Setpoint

indicated

by an OFF

Segment

Set Point Button

Zero Button

Span Button

CH2 &

Analog

Output

UP Button Indicator

Setpoint indicated

by an ON Segment

Display 2

101 Segment Bar

Setpoint indicated

by an OFF Segment

DOWN Button

Indicator

Quickset Programming

This bargraph features our unique QUICKSET PROGRAMMING.

When a front panel button is pressed the associated function is directly changed. The direction of change will be either up or down, as indicated by the UP and DOWN indicator LEDs. After the indicator LED lights up there is a 0.5 second delay before any change occurs. When a button is released and pressed again the direction of change is reversed. As there are no menu or sub-menus to navigate, the programming and setup is quick and easy.

Front Panel Buttons

Display 1 Zero Button The Display 1 Zero Button sets the Channel 1 low input signal scaling. See Pages 5 to 7 for Calibration Instructions.

Display 1 Span Button The Display 1 Span Button sets the Channel 1 high input signal scaling. See Pages 5 to 7 for Calibration Instructions.

Display 2 Zero Button/Analog Output Lo The Display 2 Zero Button sets the Channel 2 low input signal scaling. See Pages 5 to 7 for Calibration Instructions.

This button also functions as the Analog Output LO button.

When the ZERO and SPAN buttons for DISPLAY 2 are simultaneously held down and the bargraph is powered up then the ZERO button will now function as the Analog Output LO button (and the SPAN button will now function as the Analog Output HI button). If the meter is turned OFF and then re-powered, this button will return to the original function of ZERO for DISPLAY 2.

See Pages 10 for Analog Output Calibration Instructions.

Display 2 Span Button/Analog Output Hi The Display 2 Span Button sets the Channel 2 high input signal scaling. See Pages 5 to 7 for Calibration Instructions.

This button also functions as the Analog Output HI button. (see zero button above for activation procedure). See Pages 10 for Analog Output Calibration Instructions.

SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4 Buttons These buttons setup the corresponding setpoints and Modes of Operations. See Pages 11 and 12 for Setpoint Adjustment Instructions.

Glossary of Programming Symbols and Modes of Operation Controls and Indicators To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following programming steps. The following symbols are used to represent the functions and displays of the meter:

Setpoint indicated

by an ON segment

This arrow represents

the direction and level of an input signal

Small arrow shows

direction the bargraph

display has moved or will move.

Setpoint indicated

by an OFF segment

Shading indicates

bargraph is ON in this area.

Blank indicates

bargraph is OFF

in this area

This indicates that the bargraph display is

flashing in shaded area

Setpoint level

indication

When two fingers are shown side by side, the two corresponding buttons must be pressed at the same time to initiate an indicated function.

Relay Activation Mode Select Header RELAYS

3 4 1

When no jumper clips are installed the relays will activate when the display exceeds the set point.

Any relay that has a jumper clip installed will activate when the display is less than the set point.

### Standard or Center Zero Display Mode Select

Header

No jumper clips enables standard display on CH1 and CH2. Add jumper clip to enable Center Zero display on selected channel. Two jumper clips enable Center Zero display on both CH1 and CH2.

Operating Mode Select Header: This header selects one of the four operating modes presently available.

Mode 0

Mode 1

Mode 2

Mode 12

Dual inputs channels with two set points per input.

Single input with 4 setpoints displayed on right side bargraph display.

Single input with four set points displayed on left bargraph display with MIN MAX displayed on right side bargraph display.

Single input with two tracking set points adjustable by an external potentiometer.

Auxillary Mode 3:

When a jumper clip is inserted in the Mode 3 position, special pump on/pump off Hysteresis function is added (see page 3 any of the operating modes.

Mode 0 with Mode 3 Hysteresis.

Mode 1 with Hysteresis.

Mode 2 with Hysteresis.

Mode 12 with Hysteresis.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### Over View of Display Modes, Scaling Capabilities and Operating Modes

CH2 Standard Display Mode (May be selected for CH1 and or CH2 Displays)

Standard Scaling

Standard display mode selected and scaled so bar increases as input signal increases from Low to Hi.

Inverse Scaling

Standard display mode selected and scaled so the bar increases as the input signal decreases from Hi to Low.

CH2 Center Zero Display Mode (May be selected for CH1 and or CH2 Displays)

Bipolar center zero

Center point display mode selected and scaled, so the bar increases upward from zero, for increasing positive inputs and downward from zero for increasing negative inputs. When the input is zero, only the center segment will be on.

Half-scale zero point

Center point display mode selected and scaled, so the bar increases upwards or downwards from the center point, for signals that are greater or less than half the calibrated full scale range respectively.

When the input is equal to half the full scale range, only the center segment will be on.

Mode 0 Dual Channel Inputs Utilizing the IDP4 Universal DC Volts, mA, 4-20mA dualinput module. Two set points per channel.

Dual Display with Set Points With Standard display or Center point mode selected, the setpoints are indicated by an ON segment outside the bar display area and by an OFF segment inside the bar display area.

MODE

32 1

Mode 2 MIN-MAX Display with Reset Single channel input using any Leopard family I-Series Input module with up to four set points and a resetable MIN-MAX display on the right hand bar.

MIN-MAX Display

Standard display or Center point display mode may be selected for the left hand display channel 1. The right hand bar displays the MIN-MAX of the CH 1 reading Pressing SP 3 and SP 4 buttons simultaneously resets the MINMAX reading.

MODE

32 1

Mode 1 Independent Set Point Display Single channel input on CH1 using any Leopard family ISeries Input module with up to four set points displayed on the right hand bar.

Independent Set Point Display Standard or Center point display mode may be selected for the left hand bar displaying channel 1. The right hand bar displays all the setpoints as ON segments.

Mode 12 Dual Externally Adjustable Setpoints Single channel input on CH1of a Dual channel IDP4 Universal DC Volts, mA, 4-20mA input module.

CH2 input adjusts SP1 from an external signal or potenti-

ometer. SP2, set by its front panel button, tracks SP1.

Dual External Set Point Adjust Standard or Center point display mode may be selected for the left hand bar displaying channel 1. The right hand bar displays the setpoints.

All the bar segments above SP2 and below SP1 are ON, when SP1 is less than SP2. If SP1 is adjusted to be greater than SP2, the segments between will flash.

Mode 3 Hysteresis Band between SP1 & SP2 When a jumper clip is inserted in the Mode 3 position, the Hysteresis function is added (see page 2 for selecting this function). In order for Hysteresis to function, SP2 must be set to a value greater than SP1, and SP2 should be selected as High (h) Setpoint (See page 9). When these conditions are met, and Mode 3 is selected, then a Hysteresis band is created for the SP1 relay, with the upper limit of SP2 and the lower limit of SP1. SP2 relay continues to operate normally. For a tank filling application SP1 is set to a Low (L) Setpoint. SP1 relay can control a pump that fills the tank. With Mode 3 selected, SP1 relay activates for inputs less than the SP1 level. Once activated, SP1 relay will stay ON until the tank is filled to the SP2 level.

For a tank emptying application SP1 is set to a High (h) Setpoint. SP1 can control a pump that empties the tank. With Mode 3 selected, SP1 relay activates for inputs greater than the SP2 level. Once activated, SP1 relay will stay ON until the tank is emptied to the SP1 level.

Horizontal and Reverse Mounting with Custom Face Plate Installed

Horizontal or Reverse mounting Meters can be mounted horizontally in the panel and for those applications that require an opposite growth of the bar, the meter can be vertically or horizontally mounted upside down

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Opening the Case to Access Mode Select Headers

The mode select headers are located on the Display Driver Board assembly. To change any of the modes, it is best to remove the Display Driver Board assembly from the case. Before removing the Display Driver Board assembly from the front of the case it is necessary to remove the rear cover and slide the main board back an inch, or remove it, to disengage the pin and socket connector between the main board and the display assembly.

Step 1

Remove the front bezel by lightly levering the plastic catches up and forward in the a b c d sequence shown. Then remove the cover and scale faceplate.

Front view with bezel and scale faceplate removed.

Step 2

Remove the rear cover plate by pressing down lightly with a small flat bladed screw driver to release two plastic catches, on either side of the case and levering backwards.

Step 3

Slide the Main Board back approximately 1 to disengage the pin and socket connection to the Display Driver

Board.

Step 4

Starting with the top first, insert a small flat bladed screw driver and carefully lever the plastic catch up and tilt the Display Board assembly forward. Then repeat this action with the bottom catches.

Step 5

Remove the entire Display Board assembly by sliding it out of case.

### Meter Exploded view

Optional 16 Bit Isolated Analog Output Module

### Operating Mode

### Select Header

### Standard or

### Center Zero

### Display Mode

### Select Header

CH1

CH2

3 4

### Relay Activation Mode

### Select Header

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### Two Point Quickset Scaling and Calibration

Meters with QUICkSET PROgRAMMINg feature a unique, easy-to-use, two point scaling and calibration system.

Scaling or calibration is accomplished simply, by applying a zero or low input signal and adjusting the bar to the desired reading, using the ZERO button. A higher input signal is then applied, and the bar is adjusted to the desired reading for that input value, using the SPAN button.

IMPORTANT DETAILS THAT MAkE QUICkSET PROgRAMMINg EASY TO USE AND UNDERSTAND

1. The zero and span buttons are functionally the same, except as follows: The ZERO button can initiate a scaling with input signals from zero to 95% of fullscale.The Span button can initiate a scaling with input signals from 5% of fullscale to 105% of fullscale.

2. When a Zero or Span button is pressed, the Up or Down indicator LED will immediately light up to show the direction, in which the Bar will move, after a 0.5 second delay. If the button is released and pressed again, the opposite Up or Down indicator will light up, and 0.5 seconds later the Bar will begin to move in that direction until the button is released.

When the bar is being adjusted to zero or fullscale, the bar will automatically stop at the zero or fullscale position, and will not overshoot these positions, even if the button continues to be pressed.

3. While the bar is being adjusted, a new offset and scale factor is continuously being calculated. At the moment the button is released, and the scaling is accepted, the calculation data is memorized and implemented. The Scaling calculation is based on the new position of the Bar, the input signal being applied at that moment, and the previously memorized position of the Bar and the input signal that was being applied, when the other button was last released.

4. Positive and negative signals maybe integrated into a two point scaling. However when either a ZERO or SPAN button is pressed the input signal being applied, must be more than 5% higher or lower than the previously memorized value of the input signal, that was being applied when the other button was last released. If not, the bar will flash, the scaling will not be accepted, and the previous scaling will still be retained in memory.

5. Because of the requirement, that a new scaling input signal must be 5% higher or lower than the previously stored value, it can sometimes be difficult to implement a desired scaling, particularly when using a calibrator that only has fixed output values. In this case Reset the Scaling by pressing the ZERO and SPAN buttons simultaneously for two seconds. Both scaling memories will be erased and an internal default scale factor will be loaded. This provides a display of zero to fullscale on the bar for an input of approximately 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioning module.

After Resetting the Scaling a new calibration, using either button, can be implemented with new input signal values. It is good practice to always use the Zero button for lower input signals and the Span button for higher input signals, even when the bar display scale is inversed.

6. The larger the difference between two points used for calibration, the better the accuracy. However if the difference is too high, and the output from the input signal conditioning module is greater than +2.1VDC, or less than -1.05VDC, the bar will flash over range. The calibration will not then be accepted and, the previous scaling will still be retained in memory.

In this case, either a lower input signal must be used, or a higher range on the input module should be selected to recalibrate the meter.

Note: Most input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meters scale factor is set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 10 Bars fullscale with a 2.000 V input, any pre-calibrated signal conditioner with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly in the meter without any further calibration.

### Standard Display Mode Calibration Procedure

Standard or Center Zero Display Mode may be selected for CH1 and or CH2 displays, depending on the Operating Mode selected. If the standard display mode is not already selected open the meter case as showing on page 4 and move the jumper clips on the display mode select header to the OFF position.

STEP A REVIEW THE INPUT MODULE STATUS

1) See pages 15 21 for information on input modules that may be used with this meter.

2) Only the IDP4 Universal Input module can be used for dual inputs and

information on this module can be found on page 15.

3) Confirm that the correct range and input is selected on the input signal

conditioning module.

Note: When undertaking an initial set up and primary scaling and calibration of the meter it is best to start with a reset of the scaling.

STEP B RESET THE SCALINg ON CHANNEL ONE

1) Apply power to the meter and press the CH1 ZERO and CH1 SPAN buttons simulta-

neously for 2 seconds. This erases any previously memorized scalings, and resets the scaling to the factory default, of approximately zero to full scale, for an input, that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

Reset the scaling

to the default value on CH1 by pressing the CH1 Zero and CH1 Span buttons

simultaneously

for 2 secs.

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Two Point Quickset Scaling and Calibration Procedure (continued)

Note: To calibrate the bargraph you must be able to input two input signals. Usually the minimum input (LO Input) and the maximum input (HI Input) signals are used for optimum accuracy.

However a scaling can be accomplished with any two signals that are higher or lower than each other by more than 5% of fullscale and are not greater than +2.1VDC or less than -1.05VDC.

STEP C SET THE LOW INPUT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (4ma in this example) to the CH1 input pins.

2) Using the CH1 ZERO button adjust the bar down to the required position.

STEP D SET THE HIgH INPUT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the high input signal (20mA in this example) to the CH1 input pins. Using the CH1 SPAN button adjust the bar to the required position. This position could be higher or lower than the position adjusted in Step 2. The scaling of CH1 for an input of 4 to 20mA is now complete.

In the Dual input mode, the procedure for calibrating CH2 is the same, except that the input signal is applied to the CH2 input pins and adjustments are made with the CH2 ZERO and CH2 SPAN buttons.

Apply 4 mA

to the CH 1 Input Signal Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

Apply 20 mA

to the CH 1 Input Signal

Pins and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

### One Point Quickset Rescaling and Calibration Procedure

ONE POINT RECALIBRATION

As explained earlier, the FL-B202Q bargraph is calibrated using two point calibration. Once a bargraph is calibrated, the low end of the range may be then recalibrated without affecting the calibration of the high end, and vice versa.

For example, take an FL-B202Q that has been calibrated to read zero to full scale for an input of 4 to 20mA. If now the scaling has to be changed to read zero to full scale for an input of 0 to 20mA, only the low (4 mA) end needs to be recalibrated. The high (20 mA) end of the scaling is left untouched, and so does not change. The following one point recalibration procedure is used for this purpose.

STEP A RECALIBRATE THE LOW INPUT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (0ma in this example) to the CH1 input pins. The first segment

will flash, indicating an under range condition.

2) Using the CH1 ZERO button adjust the bar up to the required position.

3) The FL-B202Q has now been recalibrated to read zero to fullscale for a 0 to 20 mA input.

Apply 0 mA

to the CH 1 Input Signal Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### Center Zero Mode Scaling For Bipolar Inputs

The procedure for scaling the bar graph for bipolar signals is very simple. If say CH1 has to be scaled for -1V to +1V, the steps are as follows:

STEP A SELECT THE CENTER ZERO DISPLAY MODE FOR CH1

1) Following the instructions on page 4, remove the meter from the case.

2) Select the Center Zero Mode for CH1 by repositioning the jumper clip on the Center Zero

CH1

CH2

Display Mode Select Header.

STEP B REVIEW THE INPUT MODULE STATUS

1) See pages 15 21 for information on input modules that may be use with this meter.

2) Only the IDP4 Universal Input module can be used for dual inputs and information on this

module can be found on page 15.

3) Confirm that the correct range and input is selected on the input signal conditioning module.

Note: When undertaking an initial set up and primary scaling and calibration of the meter it is best to start with a reset of the scaling.

STEP C RESET THE SCALINg ON CHANNEL ONE

1) Apply power to the meter and press the CH1 ZERO and CH1 SPAN buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds. This erases any previously memorized scalings, and resets the scaling to the factory default, of approximately zero to full scale, for an input, that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

Reset the scaling

to the default value on CH1 by pressing the CH1 Zero and CH1 Span buttons

simultaneously

for 2 secs.

STEP D SET THE LOW INPUT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (-1V in this example) to the CH1 input pins.

2) Using the CH1 ZERO button adjust the bar down to the required position. In this case, all

the bar segments from mid point down to the bottom will be ON.

Apply -1V

to the CH 1 Input Signal Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

STEP E SET THE HIgH INPUT SIgNAL READINg ON THE BAR

1) Apply the high input signal (+1V in this example) to the CH1 input pins.

2) Using the CH1 SPAN button adjust the bar to the required position. This position could

be higher or lower than the position adjusted in Step 2. In this case, all the bar segments from mid point up to the top will be ON.

3) The scaling of CH1 for an input of -1V to +1V is now complete.

Apply +1V

to the CH 1 Input Signal Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Analog Output Scaling and Calibration

When the optional analog output module is installed, an independently calibrated 16 bit isolated, voltage or current analog output is available. The analog signal is independently scaled to the input signal and not to the bargraph display. It is important to note that the Analog Output is completely independently of the bargraph display. This means for example that the bargraph display may be scaled to go from zero to full scale as the input changes from 0 to 5V, while at the same time, the analog output is scaled to go from

4 to 20mA as the input changes from 2 to 3V. Rescaling the bargraph or the analog output will not affect the scaling of the other.

To calibrate the Analog Output you must be able to input two input signals. Usually the minimum input (LO Input) and the maximum (HI Input) signals are used for maximum accuracy.

For example the five steps to obtain an Analog Output of 4mA to 20mA for an input of

0 to 10V are:

STEP A ACCESS THE ANALOg CALIBRATION MODE

1) Confirm the internal analog output module is installed and that the

required voltage or current output option is selected.

2) Turn OFF the power to the bargraph.

3) Hold down the DISPLAY 2 ZERO and DISPLAY 2 SPAN buttons simul-

taneously and re-power the bargraph. The DISPLAY 2 ZERO button will now function as the LO button and the DISPLAY 2 SPAN button will now function as the HI button for calibrating the Analog Output.

STEP B RESET THE ANALOg OUTPUT SCALINg

1) Press the LO and HI buttons simultaneously and hold them down for 2 seconds. This will reset the analog output scaling to the default value. The default analog output scaling is approximately 0 to 20mA (0 to 10V if voltage output option is selected) for an input that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

STEP C CALIBRATE ANALOg OUTPUT FOR LO SIgNAL

1) Apply the low input signal (0V in this example) to the meter.

2) Connect an external multimeter to the analog output pins (Pins 17 and

18).

3) Using the LO button adjust the analog output as measured on the external multimeter to be the required value. (4mA in this example). When the LO button is pressed, the UP or DOWN indicator LED shows the direction of change. To reverse the direction of change release the LO button and press down again. Initially the output changes very slowly, but speeds up as the LO button remains pressed down. The analog output for a low input can be set in this step to any value in the range of 0 to 20mA or 0 to 10V ( if the voltage output option is selected).

STEP D CALIBRATE ANALOg OUTPUT FOR HI SIgNAL

1) Next apply the high input signal (10V in this example) to the meter.

2) Using the HI button, adjust the analog output as measured on the external multimeter to be the required value. (20mA in this example). When the HI button is pressed the UP or DOWN indicator LED shows the direction of change. Release the HI button and press again to reverse the direction of change. Initially the output changes very slowly, but speeds up as the HI button continues to remain pressed. This output may be higher or lower than the value set in Step 2, and may be any value in the range of 0 to 20mA or 0 to10V. This allows the easy reversal of analog output that is required in some applications.

STEP E EXIT THE ANALOg OUTPUT CALIBRATION MODE

1) Turn OFF the power to the bargraph 2) Re-power the bargraph. The two buttons will now return to their original

function of DISPLAY 2 ZERO and DISPLAY 2 SPAN.

3) Calibration is now complete and the bar is scaled for a 0 to 10V input to

produce an analog output of 4 to 20mA.

Turn Power ON

while holding

down the

CH2 Zero

and

CH2 Span

Buttons

Apply 0 V

to the CH 1 Input Signal Pins

Adjust the Analog

output to 4.00mA

Apply 10 V

to the CH 1 Input Signal Pins

Adjust the Analog

output to 20.00mA

Turn Power OFF

and then back

ON to exit

Analog output

Calibration Mode

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### Setpoints Adjust

The bargraph has the option to have up to 4 setpoints (two 10A Form C relays and two 5A Form A relays) installed. Each relay may be set to activate either above or below its setpoint by inserting jumper clips on the Relay Activation header which is located on the Display Driver Board. See the layout diagram on Page 4 and 14 for the exact location. The steps to setup the setpoints are as follows:

1) SELECT THE RELAY ACTIVATION MODE FOR EACH INSTALLED RELAY

Make sure that the required relays have been installed in the meter. Refer to the component layout on Page 14 for relay positions.

If a jumper clip is installed in a specific relay position on the Relay Activation Mode Header, that relay will activate when the display bar is lower that the programmed setpoint. If no jumper clip is installed in a specific relay position on the Relay Activation Mode Header, that relay will activate when the display bar is equal to or higher that the programmed setpoint. The Diagrams below show some of the various possibilities for relay activation.

Default

SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4 all activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

SP2 and SP4 activate when input is lower than set point. SP1 and SP3 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

SP2 activate when input is lower than set point. SP1, SP3 and SP4 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

SP1 and SP3 activate when input is lower than set point. SP2 and SP4 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

3 4

3 4

3 4

3 4

SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4 all activate when input is lower than set point.

3 4

SP1 and SP2 activate when input is lower than set point. SP3 and SP4 activate when input is equal to or higher than set point.

2) ADJUST THE SETPOINT FOR EACH RELAY

The setpoint for each relay is set by the front panel buttons marked SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4. When a front panel button is pressed and held down, the associated setpoint is directly changed. The direction of change will be either up or down, as indicated by the UP and DOWN indicator LEDs. After the indicator LED lights up there is a 0.5 second delay before any change occurs. To reverse the direction of change, release the button and then press down again. As there are no menus or sub-menus to navigate, the programming and setup is quick and easy.

Setpoints are indicated on the bar display by an ON segment if the bar is below the setpoint and with an OFF segment if the bar display is above the setpoint.

3 4

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

### External Setpoint Calibration Controls and Indicators

EXTERNALLY ADJUSTABLE SETPOINT

The FL-B202Q may be configured to have SP1 as an external setpoint by selecting either Mode 3 or Mode 12. This external SP1 setpoint is adjusted either by a 10K potentiometer connected as shown in Figure 1.a or by an external voltage or current as shown in Figure 1.b.

This feature is used for adjusting the setpoint when the operator is located some distance away from the meter installation.

In Mode 3 SP1 is an external setpoint and SP2 is a normal setpoint that is set by the SP2 front panel button.

In Mode 12 SP1 is an external setpoint and SP2 is a tracking setpoint that is set by the SP2 front panel button. Once SP2 is set, it will track any change in setpoint SP1 so that the window or difference between SP1 and SP2 is maintained constant.

In Mode 3 and Mode 12, the CH2 signal is used to adjust the SP1 setpoint. Therefore when a mode with an external setpoint is selected, even though the Universal Dual Input module IDP4 is used, only one input channel CH1 is available to measure input signals.

It follows then, that before using this feature, CH2 has must be calibrated for the signal that will adjust the SP1 setpoint. A reference voltage of approximately 1V is provided on Pin 5 of the IDP4 Universal Dual Input module, for use with an external potentiometer.

IDP4

Signal Conditioning Module

1 2 3 4 5

IDP4

Signal Conditioning Module

1 2 3 4 5

CH1 +

INPUT

10K

1V

SP1

Adjust

CH1 +

INPUT

+ External Voltage or Current to Adjust SP1

Figure 1.a Figure 1.b

External Setpoint Calibration

In Mode 3 and Mode 12, SP1 is an external setpoint that is adjusted by an external potentiometer or by an external signal. Before the external setpoint mode is selected, CH2 has to be scaled. The four steps to calibrate CH2 and then select the external setpoint mode are as follows.

1) SELECT DUAL INPUT MODE 0 Select Mode 0 (See Page 8). If an external potentiometer is to be used with the internal reference of approximately 1V, then select the 2V range on CH2 of IDP4, the dual input signal conditioner. If some other signal is to control the external setpoint, then select the range of CH2 accordingly.

2) CALIBRATE CH2 LO Apply the minimum input signal to the CH2 input pins. If an external potentiometer is to be used with the internal reference of approximately 1V, then this minimum input signal is 0V. If some other signal is to control the external setpoint, input the appropriate signal at this stage. Using the CH2 ZERO button calibrate the CH2 bar to read zero. (See Page 6 for detailed instructions)

3) CALIBRATE CH2 HI Apply the maximum input signal to the CH2 input pins. If an external potentiometer is to be used with the internal reference of approximately 1V, then connect Pin 5 to Pin 2. If some other signal is to control the external setpoint, input the appropriate signal at this stage. Using the CH2 SPAN button calibrate the CH2 bar to read full scale. (See Page 6 for detailed instructions)

4) SELECT REQUIRED EXTERNAL SETPOINT MODE 3 OR MODE 12 Check that the CH2 bar has been calibrated correctly, and then select the required external setpoint Mode 3 (One external setpoint and one normal setpoint) or Mode 12 (One external setpoint and one tracking setpoint). As the external 10K potentiometer wiper moves from one end to the other, (or as the setpoint signal increases from Lo to Hi), setpoint SP1 will move from the zero position

to the full scale position on bar 2.

Page 10

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### Functional Diagram Controls and Indicators

### Connector Pinouts Controls and Indicators

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 23 and 24) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Replacement 2-, 3-, and 4-pin plug connectors are available (see Accessories on page 16).

WARNINg

AC and DC power supply voltages are hazardous. Make sure the power supply is isolated before connecting to the meter.

### Pin Descriptions Controls and Indicators

### Input Signal Pins 1 to 6

Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner.

See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 15 Relay Output Pins

Pin 8 SP3 NO. Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

Pin 9 SP1/3 COM. Common for SP1 and SP3.

Pin 10 SP1 NC. Normally Closed 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 11 SP1 NO. Normally Open 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 12 SP4 NO. Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

Pin 13 SP2/4 COM. Common for SP3 and SP4.

Pin 14 SP2 NC. Normally Closed 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 15 SP2 NO. Normally Open 10 Amp Form C.

### Pins 17 to 21 Rear Panel Switches

Note: The sequence of setpoint outputs on meters shipped prior to 2002 was 1-2-3-4. The sequence is now 3-1-4-2, enabling delay on make

(dom) and delay on break (dob) to be used with both Form C relays.

Pin 18 ANALOg OUTPUT (). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to

20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 19 Programming LOCk. By connecting the LOCK pin

to the COMMON pin, the meter's programmed parameters can be viewed but not changed.

Pin 20 COMMON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Pin 21 DIM. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting is halved.

### Pins 23 and 24 AC/DC Power Input

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Pin 17 ANALOg OUTPUT (+). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 23 AC Neutral / DC. Neutral power supply line.

Pin 24 AC line / +DC. Live power supply line.

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 11

### Component Layout Controls and Indicators

SP3

SP1

SP4

SP2

SP3

SP1

SP4

SP2

### Connectors

WARNINg

AC and DC input signals and power supply voltages can be hazardous. Do Not connect live wires to terminal blocks, and do not insert, remove or handle

terminal blocks with live wires connected.

Standard plug-in screw terminal blocks provided by Texmate:

Page 12

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate.com for updated information.

Pre-calibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 13 and 14. Also see Two Point Digital Calibration and Digital Calibration on page 4.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre-calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other pre-calibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/600V AC

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300/600V AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

IA04: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

Fully User Scalable

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 13

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

Fully User Scalable

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

Fully User Scalable

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IDP4: Dual Channel Universal Process 2V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

IDP4 with Dual Channel DC mA, 2 mA/20 mA/Custom Connection (2 mA DC range shown)

Page 14

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules continued

IDP4 with Dual 4-20 mA Connection

IDP4 with 4-20 mA Connection and External Setpoint option - excitation provided by the meter

IDP4 with Dual Channel 4-20 mA Connection Excitation provided by the meter

IF02: Line Frequency

IDP4 with DC Volt Connection and External Setpoint

option 2 V/10 V/20 V/200 V/Custom

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

IDP4 with DC mA Connection and

External Setpoint option 2 mA/20 mA/Custom

IDP4 with 4-20 mA Connection and External Setpoint option

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

Fully User Scalable

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 15

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

Fully User Scalable

IP07: Universal Process Input 2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

224C

IS01: Strain Gage 5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire IS02: Pressure/Load Cell

5/10VDC Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6-wire

IPT1: Prototype Board for Custom Design

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

Page 16

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 17

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Dual input modules, and those modules exclusively compatible with the Leopard or

### Tiger Families, do not have zero and span adjustments. These modules are scaled

### and calibrated using the internal software functions of each individual meter.

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24 V DC Output for 4-20 mA Header On some modules this header enables a 24 V DC 25 mA

(max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin

2 that can power most 4-20 mA process loop sensors.

INPUT RANGE Headers

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to eight positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Display span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit.

Function Select Headers

On some modules various functions such as Amps and Volts, 4 wire and 6 wire, or cold junction compensation are selected by header positions that are marked on the PCB.

Excitation Output Select Headers When excitation outputs are provided, they are typically 5 V DC max 30 mA, 10 V DC max 30 mA (300 or higher resistance) or external supply. They are selected by either a single or multiple jumper clip.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of the full scale display span.

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, by 25% of the full scale display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5 V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

Page 18

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### Input Module Analog Calibration Procedures

### Tiger, Leopard and Q-Series Lynx meters have software calibration and scaling functions that

### can expand or be used in conjunction with the analog capabilities of any compatible modules.

Note: I-Series modules with analog calibration and scaling capability can be interchanged between any compatible meter without recalibration. However, meters that also have software scaling and calibration capabilities such as meters in the Leopard and Tiger families or Lynx

Q-Series (Quickset programming), must have their software scaling set to unity gain.

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the jumper

clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. The Lynx family of Q meters can accept negative signals also, and may be scaled for inputs from -50% to +100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioning module.

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or

150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any Display Span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit.

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Display Span (digital counts or bargraph segments) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: Using a FL-B202Q bargraph meter

Input signal 0 to 10 V to read zero to full scale.

Signal Span = 10 V, Display Span = 100 segments

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. The standard direct scaling will provide a display of 100 segments with an input of only

2 V which is (210) =20% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 20% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads full

scale.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset so that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Display Span to produce the required display reading.

Example B: Using a FL-B202Q Bargraph meter.

Input signal 1 to 5 V to read zero to full scale.

Signal Span = 4 V, Display Span = 100 segments

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a display of 101 segments for an input of 2 V which is (2 4) = 50% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 50% select the next higher 60% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 3).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a display of 101 segments for an input of 4 V which is 100% of the examples 4 V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 25 segments. A 4 V input would then read 100 segments.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 25 segments. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads zero. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads full scale.

Example C: Using a FL-B202Q Bargraph meter

Input signal 4 to 20 mA to read zero to full scale

Signal Span = 16 mA, Display Span = 100 segments

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is

0 to 20 mA for a full scale Display Span of 0 to 100 segments.

2 Select the (Lo Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

25 segments. A 16 mA input would then read 100 segments.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 25 segments. Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads zero. Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads full scale.

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 19

### Panel Adapter

## Fits 6 Edgewise Pointer Meter Cut-Outs

The adapter snaps on the 36x144 mm (1.42x5.69) case and enables single unit or stack mounting in an existing 6 edgewise pointer meter cut-out.

When extra panel

mounting tightness

is required, order the optional screw mount clip.

Adapter uses wide jaw mounting slide clips.

P/N (75-DMC14436B)

Fits existing cut-outs for 6 (150 mm) edgewise switchboard pointer meters from:

Crompton

G.E.

Westinghouse

Yokogawa

and most others

Width: 43.7 mm to 48 mm (1.72) to (1.89)

Height: 143.4 mm to 149 mm (5.62) to (5.88)

Two bezel trim strips are provided with each adapter to finish off the edge of each individually mounted meter or the edge of each stack mounted array.

Texmates panel adapter enables modern DIN meters to fit in existing cutouts

individually or stacked when replacing old 6 edgewise mechanical pointer meters.

Page 22

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### Case Dimensions Controls and Indicators

### Hinged Clear Lockable Polycarbonate NEMA 4X Splash Proof Cover

9/64 DIN

36x144 mm (1.42"x5.69")

P/N: OP-N4/144X36

Base

Cover

Removable

Key-lock

Panel

Safety

Catch

Page 23

Cam opening

This rugged, impact resistant, clear lens cover is designed to be dust and water proof to NEMA 4 and IP65 standards. The lens cover consists of a base and cover with a cam hinge and key-lock locking device.

An O-ring, or neoprene gasket forms a seal between the base and the panel. When opened, a cam hinge prevents the cover from closing until pushed closed.

The cover has a tapered recess that, when closed, forms a capillary seal with a tapered ridge on the base. A capillary seal is created when capillary action causes a small amount of water to be drawn in between the two surfaces producing a water tight film around the sealing area.

For those applications, such as food processing, where fluid residues are unacceptable, apply a light coating of clear silicone grease, or other approved sealant to the mating grove to prevent any ingress of liquid and enable the cover to withstand steam cleaning.

Turning the key-lock tightens the cover to the base, ensuring seal integrity. A safety catch keeps the cover closed even when the key is turned to the open position and removed. The keyhole can also be used to attach a safety seal clip, preventing unauthorized opening.

O ring or gasket

O-ring

Gasket

Vertical or

Horizontal Mounting

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

key lock

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

1/8 DIN

### 96x48 mm (3.78"x1.89")

P/N: OP-N4X/96X48

Clear bezel will

match customers

panel and meter color

Removable

Key-lock

Safety

Catch

Cam

Opening

### Two 1/16 DIN, 96x24 mm (3.78"x0.95") or

### Four 1/32 DIN, 48x24 mm (1.89"x0.95")

### case can also be mounted.

Safety catch

Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

### FL-B202Q

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### OA____

Add.to.the.basic.model.number.the.order.code.suffix.for.each.standard.option.required..The.last.suffix.is.to. indicate.how.many.different.special.options.and.or.accessories.that.you.may.require.to.be.included.with.this.product..

Ordering Example: FL-B202Q-VRR-PS1-IA01-OIC-R11-OA2 plus CR-CHANGE and an OP-N4/144X36, + N/C + N/C + 35 + 35 + 35 + 7+ 25 =

995 Park Center Drive Vista, CA 92081-8397 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

Page 24

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

01/12/07 FL-B202Q DS (FL5)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FL-B202Q Features and Specs

Dual - Inputs

with Dual Input IDP4 Universal DC volts, mA, 4-20mA Input Module

2 Setpoints per bar Vertical or Horizontal

Configuration

LEOPARD FAMILY

## FL-B202Q

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## Dual 101 Segment LEDs

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

MIN-MAX Display

on Right Bar with teseR nottuB hsuP

Left Bar Displays

Single Input and

4 Setpoints using

Leopard Family

I-Series Input

Modules, such as

AC amps, Temperature, Pressure, etc..

Dual Tracking

Setpoints on Right

bar. Adjustable by

External Signal or

Potentiometer

input on CH2.

Left Bar Displays

Single Input on CH1 with Dual Input IDP4 Universal DC volts, mA, 4-20mA

eludoM tupnI

General Features

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A relays available

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265

V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Optional isolated 16 bit analog output. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired span from one bar to the full scale range

24 V DC excitation is available to power external 4/20 mA transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors.

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Software Features

Utilizes the unique Quickset programming system.

The two 101 segment bargraphs can be independently scaled.

Five user selectable operating modes.

Center zero display mode selectable for one or both bargraphs.

Four programmable setpoints.

Smart dual-bar, dual-input or Single-input bargraph with up to four fully programmable set points and an isolated independenly scalable 16-bit Analog output.

Input Module Compatibility

Dual input modes utilize the FL-B202Q specific IDP4 Universal DC Volts, mA, 4-20mA dual-input

module.

Single Input modes are compatible with the entire LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specification:........Depends on range & function selected A/D Converter:............14 bit single slope Accuracy:................(0.05% of reading + 1segment) Temp. Coeff.:..............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm Up Time:............2 minutes Conversion Rate:..........10 conversions per second (Typical) Bargraph Display:.........101 segment 4 vertical dual red bars(std), Dual green bars(optn), one red bar and one green bar(optn) Horizontal bars(optn)

Polarity:..................Selectable center zero Positive Overrange:........Bargraph display flashes Negative Overrange:.......First segment of bargraph display flashes Relay Output:.............Two 4 Amp Form A relays and Two 9 Amp Form C relays

Analog Output:............Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V

OIC (mA out)............4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out)...........0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance

Power Supply:............AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400 Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 4.2W PS2.........................15-48 VAC,50-400 Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.2W Operating Temp.:..........0 to 60C Storage Temp:............20C to 70C Relative Humidity:.........95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:.........9/64 DINBezel: 36x144 mm(1.42x5.69) Depth behind bezel: (4.64") 117.5 mm Plus 10 mm (0.39) for Right-angled connector, or plus 18.3 mm (0.72) for Straight-thru connector

Relay activation is individually selectable to occur above (HI) or

Weight:..................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

below (LO) for each setpoint.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### PL-B101D40 panel meter bargraph controller Texmate

## PL-B101D40

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 LED Segments

## in a 3/32 DIN Case

LEOPARD FAMILY

### Red, 101 segment bargraph, with a 4-digit LED digital display for monitoring,

### measurement, and control applications, mounted in a 24x144 case.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

Pressure

Resistance

AC/DC Voltage

Process

Temperature

Load Cell

Prototype

4 to 20 mA

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

A red, 101 segment high brightness bargraph.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of 1999 to 9999

(12000 counts).

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 10 Amp Form C, and two 5 Amp Form A relays available.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC/95-370 V DC (PS1).

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest display setting by 50%.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

### Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Bargraph center zero function.

Four programmable setpoints.

Setpoint 1 has delay-onmake and delay-on-break

plus a special pump on pump off mode that creates a Hysteresis Band between

SP1 and SP2.

Relay activation can be

selected to occur above (hi) or below (Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control of the bargraph and digital display.

### Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

Some examples are shown on pages 12 - 13.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

LEOPARD

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 to 16 conversions per second Display:......................4 digit 0.27" Red LED display (std).

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays ve sign.

Decimals:..................User programmable

Positive Overrange:..Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash.

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom

segments of digital display flash.

Display Range:..........1999 to 9999 counts on digital display

Relay Output:............Two 5A form A and two 10A Form C

0 to 101 segments on bargraph

relays.

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply 85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC @ 2.5W max 4.2W 18-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2.5W max 4.2W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 60C Storage Temp:..........20C to 70C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....3/32 DIN, Bezel: 24x144mm (0.95x5.69), Depth behind bezel 128.6 mm (5.08"), Plus 14 mm (0.55) for connector.

Weight:......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed.

Index

Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output..6 Functional Diagram...................10 General Features......................1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules..12-13 Input Module Calibration Procedures.....15 Input Module Component Glossary.......14 Ordering Information..................16 Pin Descriptions......................10 Programming Conventions..............2

Setpoint Setting & Relay Configuration Mode....8 Software Features.....................1 Software Logic Tree....................3 Specifications........................1 Two Point Analog Range Setting & Calibration...7 Two Point Digital Calibration Mode........4

### Controls and Indicators

LED

Annunciators

for Setpoints

1-4

101 Segment

Bargraph

Seven Segment

LED Display

DOWN

Button

Button

PROGRAM

Button

### Front Panel Buttons

Program Button

The

When pressed at the same time as the

button is used to move from one program step to the next. button, it initiates the

### Programming Conventions

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following the programming steps. The following symbols are used throughout the logic diagrams to represent the buttons and indicators on the meter:

This symbol represents the OPERATIONAL DISPLAY.

This is the PROGRAM button.

This is the UP button.

This is the DOWN button.

When a button is shown, press and release it to go onto the next step in the direction indicated by the arrow. When an alternative dotted line is shown, this indicates that an alternative logic branch will be followed when a particular option is present.

When two buttons are shown side by side and enclosed by a dotted line, they must be pressed at the same time then released to go onto the next programming step.

If an X appears through a digit, it means that any number displayed in that digit is not relevant to the function being explained.

calibration mode.When pressed at the same time as the it initiates the setpoint setting mode.

button,

Up Button

When in the operational display, pressing the allows you to view, but not change, the setting of Setpoint SP1.

button alone,

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to increase the value of the displayed parameter.

Down Button

When in the operational display, pressing the allows you to view, but not change, the setting of setpoint SP2.

button alone,

When in the calibration mode or the setpoint setting mode the button is used to decrease the value of the displayed parameter.

### Front Panel LED Display

Annunciator LEDs

The annunciator LEDs indicate the alarm status. They are labeled from bottom to top: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

Digital LED Displays

The digital LED displays are used to display the meter input signal readings. They also display the programming settings during programming.

Setpoint Indication

The position of setpoints on the bargraph display are indicated by an ON or OFF segment dependent on the bargraph display being above or below the setpoint.

and

When the buttons are shown together, the display value can be increased button by pressing and releasing the or decreased by pressing and releasing the

button.

and

When the buttons are shown with two displays, either display can be or selected by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

When two displays are shown together with bursts, this indicates that the display is toggling (flashing) between the name of the function and the value.

[Span]

[10000]

Text or numbers shown between square brackets in a procedure indicate the programming code name of the function or the value displayed on the meter display.

When there are more than two display selections they are shown in brackets below the first display and are also selectable by pressing and releasing the

buttons.

A dotted line enclosing an entire logic diagram indicates that programming branch will appear only when a particular option is present.

Software Logic Tree

The PL-B101D40 is an intelligent bargraph meter with a hierarchical software structure designed for easy programming and operation, as shown below in the software logic tree.

Software Version is Displayed on Power-up When power is applied, all segments of the bargraph and digital display light up for 3 seconds. The version number of the installed software is then displayed for 2 seconds, after which, the operational display indicates the input signal.

15 Second Program Timeout Except for ZERO and SPAN settings in the Two Point Digital Calibration Mode and the Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode (cLo and chi), the meter has a 15 second program timeout. If no buttons are pressed for 15 seconds in any of the other programming sequences, the meter will exit the programming mode and return to the operational display. Any program changes that were made prior to pressing the button in the preceding step will not be saved.

### Two Point Digital Calibration Mode

This mode enables the meter to be calibrated by applying a zero or low input signal, entering the desired reading for that signal, then applying a high input signal, and then entering the desired reading for that signal. The meter then automatically calculates and programs in the requisite scale factor, within the following parameters.

1. Positive and negative signals may be applied, but the difference between the low and the high signal inputs must be at least 1000 counts or Err will be indicated.

2. Positive and Negative values for the desired reading can be entered, but the scale factor created can not exceed the Digital Display Span capability of the meter which is 12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999.

3. The internal Signal Span is limited to 3 V DC between 1 V DC to + 2 V DC. Any outputs from an Input Signal Conditioning module that exceed these limits will cause the meter to indicate overrange regardless of the Digital Display Span scaled.

Note: Many input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meter is digitally set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 1000 with a 1.000 V input, any pre-calibrated analog signal conditioner, with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly without any further calibration when it is inserted in the meter.

MAIN MENU

Operational Display

Sub-menu

MODE

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

1) Press the

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

3) Press the

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

button. Display toggles between [CAL] and [out].

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP C and toggles between [SPAn] and the previous [SPan] setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Select Two Point Digital Calibration of Input Signal

button to select CAL [iP] for input signal cali-

button. Display toggles between [ZEro] and the pre-

1) Press the

bration.

2) Press the

vious zero setting.

STEP C Set the Meters Low Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

1) Apply a zero or low signal to the meter. (Positive or negative values are allowed).

2) Using the

desired reading for the applied low input signal.

3) Press the

vious span setting.

button. Display toggles between [SPAn] and the pre-

buttons, adjust the meter display to the

and

STEP A Calibration

Mode

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display

See Page 6

STEP B Calibration

Mode

To Two Point Analog Output Range Setting

and Calibration

See Page 7

TWO POINT DIGITAL

CALIBRATION MODE

STEP D Set the Meters High Input Signal Reading on the Digital Display

STEP C Zero

1) Apply a high input signal to the meter.

2) Using the and desired reading for the applied high input signal.

3) Press the

button.

buttons, adjust the digital display to the

The Digital Calibration Procedure is now complete.

If the digital calibration was successfully completed, the menu branches to the Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display (see page 5), and the display flashes [bhi] and the previous setting.

STEP D Span

ERROR Indicates Unsuccessful Calibration

If the calibration was unsuccessful, the display indicates [Err], the new calibration settings just entered will not take effect and the previously stored setting will remain. The three most likely causes of an error during calibration are:

The full scale and zero signals were too similar. The full scale signal must be at least 1000 counts greater than the zero or low input signal (positive and negative values are allowed).

The scaling requirement exceeded the digital display span capability of the meter (12,000 counts between 1999 to 9999).

No input signal present, or incorrect input signal connections.

Err. Any new setting canceled and previous

settings are retained

To Digital Span Selection for Bargraph Display Page 5

### Digital Span Selection For Bargraph Display

The bargraph can be set to display full scale (0-101 bars) any portion of the

digital reading from a minimum of 100 counts to a maximum of 12,000

counts. This provides higher resolution bargraph indication for those appli-

cations where the normal operating input signal range is less than the

desired full scale display range of the digital display.

For Example:

If the full scale range of the meter has been set from -1999 to

9999 (0-12,000 counts), but the normal operating range of the

input signal is between 4000 & 6000. The bargraph high parame-

ter [bhi] can be set to 6000 and the bargraph low parameter [bLo]

can be set to 4000.

This means that although the meter could digitally display a signal

from -1999 to 9999 (0-12,000 counts), the bargraph display only

begins to function at a reading of 4000, and reaches full scale indi-

cation at a reading of 6000. Although the digital display will con-

tinue reading up to 9999 before indicating overrange, the bargraph

display will indicate its overrange by flashing for readings above

6000.

Example of Setting the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display to be Different than the Digital Display Range

Bargraph does not light up for Input Signals up to 3999 counts

Bargraph lights up for Input Signals above 4000 counts

STEP A Enter the Calibration Sub Menu Mode

1) Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

between [CAL] and [oFF].

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [bhi] and the

previous setting.

STEP B Set the Digital Span of the Bargraph Display (See example above) buttons, adjust the display to the desired

1) Using the

and

high parameter reading, e.g. 6000 counts.

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [bLo] and the

previous setting.

3) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

low parameter reading, e.g. 4000 counts.

4) Press the

button. Display changes from [4000] to [dP].

### Decimal Point and Brightness Selection

STEP C Set the Decimal Point 1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

decimal point setting.

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [br] and the

previous brightness setting.

STEP D Set the Bargraph and Digital Display Brightness

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

brightness setting (4 is the brightest setting).

2) Press the

previous [Anhi] setting.

button. Display toggles between [Anhi] and the

Note: If at this point, the display skips directly to STEP G and toggles between [Cto] and [oFF], the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

### Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output Digital Span Selection for Analog Range Output

STEP E Selecting the [Anhi] Digital Value for Analog High Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired digital value at which the [chi] Calibrated Analog High output will occur. For digital readings outside the digital span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability. However, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo (see below).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [AnLo] and previous

[AnLo] setting.

STEP F Selecting the [AnLo] Digital Value for Analog Low Output

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired

digital value at which the [cLo] Calibrated Analog Low output will occur. For Digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. button. The display toggles between [cto] and

2) Press the

[oFF].

Note: Any two digital span points from 1999 to 9999 can be selected. The digital values for [Anhi] analog high and [AnLo] analog low can be reversed to provide a 20 to 4mA output. The digital span selected can be as small as two counts, when using the analog output to function as a Control or Alarm Driver. Small digital spans will cause the high resolution 16 bit D to A to increment digitally in stair case steps.

See Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration at the top of the next page.

Bargraph Center Point Display Mode Selection

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with a Unipolar Input

If the meter's full scale range is set to 5000 counts, the midpoint would be

2500 counts. If a signal of 2500 counts is applied only one segment at the

2500 count mark will light up. If a signal of 4000 counts is applied the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 4000 count mark light up.

If a signal of 1000 counts is applied, the segments between the center segment (2500 counts) and the 1000 count mark will light up.

Example of Using the Center Point Bargraph Display Mode with Bipolar Signal Inputs

The meter may also be calibrated to display symmetrical bipolar signals such as 1 V or 10 V. When the center point display mode is selected, it will then function as a center zero meter. When positive signals are applied, the bar will go up from the center point, and when negative signals are applied, the bar will go down from the center point.

STEP G Bargraph Center Point Mode Selection (See example above) 1) To select bargraph center point mode, press the

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on].

2) Press the

or [oFF].

button. Display toggles between [diSP] and [on]

STEP H Digital Display ON/OFF Selection

1) To set the display to [oFF], press the toggles between [diSP] and [oFF].

button. Display

2) Press the

button. The display exits the calibration mode

and returns to the operational display. Only the bargraph display is on and the digital display is off.

If the digital display is selected to be off, pressing any button to make programming changes or to view setpoints activates the digital display.

When the procedure is complete, the digital display will then automatically switch off.

The Display/Bargraph settings are now complete.

Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Two Point Analog Output Range Setting and Calibration Determine if the Analog Output Selection Header is in the 4 to 20mA (0-20mA) position or the 0 to 10VDC position. If necessary, the module may have to be removed and the header position changed (see Component Layout below).

Note: Always disconnect power from the meter before removing the analog output module to adjust the mA or Volts output selection header and reinstalling it. When power is reconnected, the meters software will automatically detect the presence or absence of the analog output module.

STEP A Enter the Calibration Mode

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles between [cAL]

1) Press the

and [oFF].

2) Press the

Press the

button. Display changes from [oFF] to [on]. button. Display toggles between [cAL] and [out] input calibration.

Note: If at this point the display skips directly to toggle between Zero and the previous Zero setting, the software is detecting that the optional analog output hardware is NOT installed.

STEP B Enter the Two Point Analog [ouT] Output Range Setting and Calibration Mode button. Display toggles between [cLo] and an internal scale factor.

1) Press the

and

STEP E Set or Calibrate [cLo] the Low Analog Value of the Analog Output Range 1) Connect a multimeter to analog output pins 17 and 18 (see Rear Panel Pinouts on page 10). Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired low value as measured on the multimeter. cLo may be adjusted to any value from 0.3 mA to 18 mA (mA output selected) or from 0.6 V to 8 V (volt output selected). However, the output of cLo must always be less than the value selected for chi. If a reversed analog output is desired, the values selected to establish the Digital Span can be reversed (see top of page 6). For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will not go any lower than the calibrated value set for cLo. However, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the the maximum analog output capability (see chi below).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [chi] and an internal scale factor.

and

STEP F Set or Calibrate [chi] the High Analog Value of the Analog Output Range 1) Using the buttons, adjust the analog output to the desired high value as measured on the multimeter display. chi may be adjusted to any value from 18 mA to 24 mA (mA output) or from 8 V to 10.3 V (volt output).

However, the value must be higher than the value selected for cLo. For digital readings outside the Digital Span selected, the analog output will linearly rise above the value set for chi, up to the maximum analog output capability. button. The meter exits the calibration mode and returns to 2) Press the the operational display.

Note: The analog output range established by the values selected for cLo and chi will occur, automatically scaled, between the two digital values selected for AnHi and AnLo.

However, the analog output can linearly rise above the chi value set for digital readings outside the digital span selected. See Digital Span Selection on page 6.

### Case Dimensions

### Setpoint Setting and Relay Configuration Mode

The following programming steps are required to enter the setpoint values and configure the relay functions in a meter with four relays using four setpoints. Generally if less than four relays are installed, the setpoints without relays are operational in software for tricolor control or display only purposes. To remove unwanted setpoint indications, set them to 9999 or -1999 depending on the relay activation mode selected.

STEP A Enter the Setpoint Mode

1) Press the

and

buttons at the same time. Display toggles

between [SP1] and the previous SP1 setting.

STEP B Set Setpoint 1 (SP1) 1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP1 value.

and

button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous

[doM] setting.

STEP C Set the SP1 Delay-on-Make (doM) Delay Time Setting

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [doM] value

(0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in an alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will make contact (energize).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [dob] and the previous

[dob] setting.

STEP D Set the SP1 Delay-on-Break (dob) Delay Time Setting

1) Using the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired [dob] value

(0 to 9999 seconds). The reading must continuously remain in a non-alarm condition until this delay time has elapsed before the relay will break

contact (de-energize).

2) Press the

button. Display toggles between [hYSt] and the previous

[hYSt] setting.

STEP E Select the Hysteresis (hYSt)

1) Using the

2) Press the

and

SP2 setting.

buttons, select the Hysteresis to be ON or OFF.

button. Display toggles between [SP2] and the previous

Note: When hYSt is selected ON, and SP2 is set at a value higher than SP1, the SP1 relay will operate in a special "pump on pump off" Hysteresis mode. SP2 acts as the upper limit and SP1 acts as the lower limit of the Hysteresis Band on the SP1 relay.

For filling applications:

rLYS should be set to LhLh (see step I). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs less than the SP1 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP2 setpoint is reached.

For emptying applications:

rLYS should be set to hhhh (see step I). The SP1 relay and SP1 LED Annunciator will then activate for inputs greater than the SP2 setpoint, and remain ON until the SP1 setpoint is reached.

STEP F Set Setpoint 2 (SP2) 1) Using the

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP2 value.

and

button. Display toggles between [doM] and the previous

[doM] setting.

STEP G Set Setpoint 3 (SP3) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press the

SP4 setting.

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP3 value.

button. Display toggles between [SP4] and the previous

SETPOINT SETTING

AND RELAY

CONFIGURATION MODE

STEP H Set Setpoint 4 (SP4) (No [doM] or [dob])

1) Using the

2) Press

the

and

buttons, adjust the display to the desired SP4 value.

button. Display

toggles between

[rLYS] and

the

previous relay setting.

STEP I

Set Relay Activation mode [rLYS]

(H) High the relay energizes when the setpoint is exceeded. (L) Low the relay energizes below the setpoint. The setpoint is indicated from left to right SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4.

1) Using the

the desired relay settings: [LLLL], [LhLh], [LLhh], [hhhh].

2) Press the

buttons, adjust the reading on the display to

button.

and

### Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 23 and 24) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Replacement 2-, 3-, and 4-pin plug connectors are available (see Accessories on last page).

Pin Descriptions

Input Signal Pins 1 to 6 Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner.

See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 8 to 15 Relay Output Pins

Pin 8 SP3 NO. Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

Pin 9 SP1/3 COM. Common for SP1 and SP3.

Pin 10 SP1 NC. Normally Closed 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 11 SP1 NO. Normally Open 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 12 SP4 NO. Normally Open 5 Amp Form A.

Pin 13 SP2/4 COM. Common for SP2 and SP4.

Pin 14 SP2 NC. Normally Closed 10 Amp Form C.

Pin 15 SP2 NO. Normally Open 10 Amp Form C.

### Pins 17 to 21 Rear Panel Switches

Pin 17 ANALOG OUTPUT (+). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 18 ANALOG OUTPUT (). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 19 Programming LOCK. By connecting the LOCK pin

to the COMMON pin, the meter's programmed parameters can be viewed but not changed.

Pin 20 COMMON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Pin 21 DIM. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting is halved.

### Pins 23 and 24 AC/DC Power Input

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-370 V DC (PS1) or 18-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Pin 23 AC Neutral / DC. Neutral power supply line.

Pin 24 AC line / +DC. Live power supply line.

### Component Layout

### Input Signal Conditioner

### Program Lock Switch

Default setting is Lock off (switch to opposite

position to turn Lock on).

### Processor Board

### Connectors

WARNING

AC and DC input signals and power supply voltages can be hazardous.

Do Not connect live wires to terminal blocks, and do not insert, remove or handle terminal blocks with live wires connected.

Standard plug-in screw terminal blocks provided:

PL-B101D40 (PL1)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 (cid:127) www.texmate.com

Page 11

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 14 and 15.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IS07: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc. High Impedance,

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Input and Output Pins

On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

### INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB.Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

### SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

### SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

### 24V DC Output Header

On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

### ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

### ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header

When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps.

This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

Input Module Calibration Procedures Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

The unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from 1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

1800.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase). This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0%

Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of

0 to 2000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only 10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts. Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000. Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 1000.

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### PL-B101D40

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: PL-B101D40-HRR-PS1-IA01-0IC-R1-OA2, the 2 OAs are, HD-CHANGE and a GN.CAS96X24L

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### PL-B101D40 Features and Specs

## PL-B101D40

## Leopard Bargraph Meter

## 101 LED Segments

## in a 3/32 DIN Case

LEOPARD FAMILY

Red, 101 segment bargraph, with a 4-digit LED digital display for monitoring, measurement, and control applications, mounted in a 24x144 case.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by direct connection of the sensor output to more than

38 Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC/DC Current

Pressure

Resistance

AC/DC Voltage

Process

Temperature

Load Cell

Prototype

4 to 20 mA

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for resistance bridge type sensors such as Load Cells and Pressure Transducers.

A red, 101 segment high brightness bargraph.

Red 4-digit LED display with a range of 1999 to 9999

(12000 counts).

Front panel LED annunciators provide indication of setpoint status.

Two 9 Amp Form C, and two 4 Amp Form A relays available.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC/95-300 V DC (PS1).

Provision to connect an external programming lockout switch.

Provision for external DIM switch to reduce the brightest display setting by 50%.

Automatic intelligent averaging smooths noisy signals, while providing a fast display response to real level changes.

Software Features

The bargraph can display, full scale, any desired portion of the digital reading.

Four programmable setpoints.

Setpoint 1 has delay-onmake and delay-on-break

plus a special pump on pump off mode that creates a Hysteresis Band between SP1 and SP2.

Bargraph center zero function.

Relay activation can be

selected to occur above (hi) or below (Lo) each setpoint.

Digital display blanking.

Decimal point setting.

Four-level brightness control of the bargraph and digital display.

Input Module Compatibility

LEOPARD FAMILY: More than 38 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Leopard Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

LEOPARD

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on Input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 to 16 conversions per second Display:......................4 digit 0.27" Red LED display (std).

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays ve sign.

Decimals:..................User programmable

Positive Overrange:..Bargraph and top segments of digital display flash.

Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph and bottom

segments of digital display flash.

Display Range:..........1999 to 9999 counts on digital display

Relay Output:............Two 4A form A and two 9A Form C

0 to 101 segments on bargraph

relays.

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply

85-265 VAC,50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @4.2W 18-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @4.2W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:..........20C to 70C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....3/32 DIN, Bezel: 24x144mm (0.95x5.69), Depth behind bezel 128.6 mm (5.08"), Plus 14 mm (0.55) for connector.

Weight:......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

## Lynx Family Panel Meters and Bargraphs

Individual Lynx Family indicators are covered in separate user manuals. Each manual provides a brief description of the meter’s hardware, and software options. They also provide general data sheet information such as specifications, pinout details, and case size dimensions.

## Lynx Family Digital Meters

- BX-35
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-45
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-40
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-45
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

## Lynx Family Bargraphs

- BX-B31
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FX-B101Q
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

### BX-35 DS UL BX1 UL-1

E469078

## BX-35

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 3 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 LED

## in a 1/16 DIN Case

LYNX FAMILY

A versatile panel meter that utilizes many different types of modular plug-in signal conditioners.

### General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series

Plug-in Input Signal Conditioning Modules that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning modules, that

have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between

any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all

of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained with-

in the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters

and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load

cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 3 1/2-digit

0.56 LED with display range 1999 to 1999 (4000 counts).

Display brightness may be externally controlled

1/16 DIN (96 x 24mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick

panels (up to 2).

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters. As shown on pages 3 to 5.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........12 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................3 1/2 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Green or Super Bright Red (optn).

Range 1999 to 1999 counts.

Polarity:.....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate, XXXX Positive Overrange:..1 (MSD) is displayed with all other dig-

its blank.

Negative Overrange: 1 (MSD) and sign are displayed with

all other digits blank.

Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2.........................15-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.0W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN Bezel: 96x24mm (3.78x0.95)

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connector.

Weight:.......................7 oz., 9 oz when packed

### Index

Case Dimensions.................................. 7 Component Layout................................. 3 Connector Pinouts................................. 2 Connectors....................................... 2 Functional Diagram................................ 2 General Features.................................. 1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules............ 3-5

Input Module Calibration Procedures................. 6-7 Input Module Compatibility........................... 1 Installation Guidelines.............................. 8 Specifications..................................... 1 Input Module Component Glossary.................... 6 Ordering Information............................... 9 Pin Descriptions................................... 2

Page 1

### Functional Diagram

Hold

Test

Common

Dim/Blank

AC Neutral, DC

AC Line, + DC AC/DC Power Input

BX-35 Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts

### Connectors

Decimal Select Header

This meter comes standard with screw ter mi nal plug connections.

10 11 12

14 15

Top Catches

Release From Bottom

TO REMOVE REAR COVER

### Pin Descriptions

Pins 1 to 6 - Input Module: See the individual pin out of the input signal conditioning module selected. Usually Pin 1 is the Signal Input High pin and Pin 3 is the Signal Input Low pin. All calibration and scaling functions are performed on the individual input signal conditioner module. See pages 6 and 7.

Pin 9 - Hold: If this pin is left unconnected the meter will operate in a free running mode. When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, the meter display will be latched. A/D conversions will continue, but the display will not be updated until Pin 9 is disconnected from Pin 11.

Pin 10 - Display Test: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, all segments of the display light up and 1888 is displayed. This is used to detect any missing segments in the display.

Page 2

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 14 and 15) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Pin 11 - Common: To Hold, Test or Dim the display, the re spec tive pins have to be connected to this Common Pin.

Pin 12 - Dim/Blank: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin

11 the display is blanked out. If it is connected through an external 1K pot, the display may be dimmed.

Pin 14 & 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket. The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-265 VAC/95-300 VDC (PS1 Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 15-48 VAC/10-72 VDC

(PS2) is also available.

### Component Layout

BX-35-XX-PS1 (High Voltage)

BX-35-XX-PS2 (Low Voltage)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate. com for updated information.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 6 and 8.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

IA04: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

Page 3

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IF02: Line Frequency

Page 4

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

Page 5

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Page 6

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span.

For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Calibration

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the jumper

clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points has

no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or

150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from 1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 1800.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0% Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is

0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 2000 counts.

This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only

10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts.

Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000.

Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 1000. Select decimal point 1XXX to display 00.0 to 100.0.

### Case Dimensions

Page 7

## Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 8

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### OA____

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### BX-35

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: BX-35-DR-PS1-IA01-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and a 75-DMTC96X24, + N/C + N/C + 40 + 8+ 2.50 = POWER SUPPLY

BASIC MODEL #

INPUT MODULES

RELAY OUTPUT

DISPLAY

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

BASIC MODEL NuMBER

BX-35...

96x24mm, Lynx, 3.5 Digit.....................

Standard Options for this Model Number

Order Code Suffix

Description

List

DISPLAY

DR... Red LED, 0.56 inch high........................... N/C DB... Superbright Red LED, 0.56 inch high............ DG... Green LED, 0.56 inch high....................

POWER SuPPLY

PS1.. 85-265VAC/95-300VDC............................ N/C PS2.. 15-48VAC/10-72VDC........................

INPuT MODuLES (Partial List. See www.texmate.com) Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type.

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

### OA____

IP03..Process Input, 1-5V DC(0-100.00) w/Offset, 24V Exc...... IR02.. 3-Wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)................... IR03.. Linear Potentiometer, 3-wire, 1K min................... IR04..Resistance 2K................................. IS04..Pressure Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire................ IS05.. Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire........... IS06.. Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire............ IT03...RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C)............... IT04...RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F).............. IT05...RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-190.0 to 199.0F)............ IT06...Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F).................... IT07...Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999F).................... IT08...Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)..................... IT09...Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260C).................... IT14...RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.0 to 199.0C)............

Special Options and Accessories (OAs)

Part Number

Description

List

SPECIAL OPTIONS (Specify Input & Req. Reading) CR-CHANGE.. Calibrated Range Change to another Standard Range.. CS-3/3.5/4.... Custom display scaling within std.ranges....... CSS-SETUP... NRC to set-up custom special scaling beyond the std. range.. CSS-34/INSTL. Installation, specify serial #CSS...........

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Page 9

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BX-35 Features and Specs

## BX-35

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 3 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 L ED

## in a 1/16 DI N Case

LYNX FAMILY

A versatile panel meter that utilizes many different types of modular plug-in signal conditioners.

### General Features

### Input Module Compatibility

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series

Plug-in Input Signal Conditioning Modules that include:

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters.

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning modules, that

have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between

any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all

of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained with-

in the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters

and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load

cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 3 1/2-digit

0.56 LED with display range 1999 to 1999 (4000 counts).

Display brightness may be externally controlled

1/16 DIN (96 x 24mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick

panels (up to 2).

UL Listed

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........12 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................3 1/2 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Green or Super Bright Red (optn).

Range 1999 to 1999 counts.

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate, XXXX Positive Overrange:..1 (MSD) is displayed with all other dig-

its blank.

Negative Overrange: 1 (MSD) and sign are displayed with

all other digits blank.

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2........................15-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.0W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:..........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN Bezel: 96x24mm (3.78x0.95)

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connector.

Weight:......................7 oz., 9 oz when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BX-45 UL DS BX2

E469078

LYNX FAMILY

## BX-45

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 4 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 LED

## in a 1/16 DIN Case

### A versatile panel meter that utilizes many different types of plug-in signal conditioners.

### General Features

### Input Module Compatibility

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series

Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero

potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series

compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog

scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters

and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load

cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-36 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4 1/2-digit

0.56 LED with display range -19999 to 19999 (40000 counts).

Display brightness may be externally controlled.

1/16 DIN (96 x 24mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick

panels (up to 2).

UL Listed.

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters. As shown on pages 3 to 5.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........16 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 3 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................4 1/2 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Green or Super Bright Red (optn).

Range 19999 to 19999 counts.

Polarity:.....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate, XXXXX Positive Overrange:..All digits flash.

Negative Overrange: negative sign and all digits flash Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2.........................15-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 1.5W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN, Bezel: 96x24mm(3.78x0.95)

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connector.

Weight:.......................7 oz., 9 oz when packed

### Index

Case Dimensions.................................. 7 Component Layout................................. 3 Connector Pinouts................................. 2 Connectors....................................... 2 Functional Diagram................................ 2 General Features.................................. 1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules............ 3-5

Input Module Calibration Procedures................. 6-7 Input Module Compatibility........................... 1 Input Module Component Glossary.................... 6 Installation Guidelines.............................. 8 Ordering Information............................... 8 Pin Descriptions................................... 2 Specifications..................................... 1

Page 1

### Functional Diagram

Hold

Test

Common

Dim/Blank

AC Neutral, DC

AC Line, + DC AC/DC Power Input

BX-45 Functional Diagram

Decimal Select Header

### Connector Pinouts

### Connectors

This meter comes standard with screw ter mi nal plug connections.

10 11 12

14 15

Top Catches

Release From Bottom

TO REMOVE REAR COVER

### Pin Descriptions

Pins 1 to 6 - Input Module: See the individual pin out of the input signal conditioning module selected. Usually Pin 1 is the Signal Input High pin and Pin 3 is the Signal Input Low pin. All calibration and scaling functions are performed on the individual input signal conditioner module. See pages 6 and 7.

Pin 9 - Hold: If this pin is left unconnected the meter will operate in a free running mode. When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, the meter display will be latched. A/D conversions will continue, but the display will not be updated until Pin 9 is disconnected from Pin 11.

Pin 10 - Display Test: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, all segments of the display light up and 1888 is displayed. This is used to detect any missing segments in the display.

Page 2

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 14 and 15) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

Pin 11 - Common: To Hold, Test or Dim the display, the re spec tive pins have to be connected to this Common Pin.

Pin 12 - Dim/Blank: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin

11 the display is blanked out. If it is connected through an external 1K pot, the display may be dimmed.

Pin 14 & 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket.

The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-265 VAC/95-300 VDC (PS1 Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 15-48 VAC/10-72 VDC

(PS2) is also available.

### Component Layout

BX-45-XX-PS1 (High Voltage)

BX-45-XX-PS2 (Low Voltage)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate. com for updated information.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 6 and 8.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

### IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

IA04: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

Fully User Scalable

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

### IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

Page 3

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IF02: Line Frequency

Page 4

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

Page 5

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 19999 counts to 0001 (one count).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Page 6

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-1000 to +1000 counts).

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span.

For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Calibration

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the jumper

clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points has no

effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from 19999 (counts) to 0001 (one count).

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 18000 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 18000 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 18000 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 18000.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100.0 to 1500.0 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 16000 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 16000 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 16000 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 400. A 4V input would then read 16000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 15000. Select decimal point 1XXXX to display -100.0 to 1500.0.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.00 to +100.00% Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 10000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is 0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 20000 counts. This will provide a digital display of 10000 counts with an input of only 10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 2500. A 16 mA input would then read 10000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 2500 counts.

Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 0000.

Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 10000. Select decimal point 1XXXX to display 00.00 to 100.00

### Case Dimensions

FRONT VIEW

SIDE VIEW

TOP VIEW

Page 7

## Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 8

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### BX-45

### OA____

Ordering Example: BX-45-DR-PS1-IA01-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and a 75-DMTC96X24, + N/C + N/C + 40 + 8+ 2.50 =

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

basic model number

BX-45....

96x24mm, Lynx, 4.5 Digit.....................

standard options for this model number

Order Code Suffix

BASIC MODEL #

Description

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

List

display

DR... Red LED, 0.56 inch high........................... N/C DB... Superbright Red LED, 0.56 inch high............ DG... Green LED, 0.56 inch high....................

power supply

PS1.. 85-265VAC/95-300VDC............................ N/C PS2.. 15-48VAC/10-72VDC........................

input modules (partial list. see www.texmate.com)

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type.

### OA____

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

IP01.. Process Loop, 4-20mA(0-100.00)..................... IP02.. Process Loop, 4-20mA(0-100.00) w/24VDC Exc.......... IP03.. Process Input, 1-5V DC(0-100.00) w/Offset, 24V Exc...... IR02.. 3-Wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)................... IR03.. Linear Potentiometer, 3-wire, 1K min................... INPUT MODULES IR04.. Resistance 2K................................. IS04.. Pressure Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire................ IS05.. Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire........... IS06.. Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire............ IT03... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C)............... IT04... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F).............. IT05... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-190.0 to 199.0F)............ IT06... Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F).................... IT07... Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999F).................... IT08... Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)..................... IT09... Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260C).................... IT14... RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.0 to 199.0C)............

### OA____

special options and accessories (oa s)

Part Number

Description

List

special options (specify input & req. reading )

CR-CHANGE.. Calibrated Range Change to another Standard Range.. CS-4.5/5/6.... Custom display scaling within std.ranges....... CSS-SETUP... NRC to set-up custom special scaling beyond the std. range.. CSS-56/INSTL. Installation, specify serial #CSS...........

accessories (specify serial # for custom artwork installation)

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Page 9

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BX-45 Features and Specs

## BX-45

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 4 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 LED

## in a 1/16 DIN Case

LYNX FAMILY

A versatile panel meter that utilizes many different types of plug-in signal conditioners.

### General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated

by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series

Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero

potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series

compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog

scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters

and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load

cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-36 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4 1/2-digit

0.56 LED with display range -19999 to 19999 (40000 counts).

Display brightness may be externally controlled.

1/16 DIN (96 x 24mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick

panels (up to 2).

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........16 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 3 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................4 1/2 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std), 0.56 Green or Super Bright Red (optn).

Range 19999 to 19999 counts.

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate, XXXXX Positive Overrange:..All digits flash.

Negative Overrange: negative sign and all digits flash Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2........................15-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 1.5W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:..........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN, Bezel: 96x24mm(3.78x0.95)

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83") Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled connector.

Weight:......................7 oz., 9 oz when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DX-35 UL DS DX1 UL-1

## DX-35

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 3 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 or 0.8 LED

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

LYNX FAMILY

Large display option

0.8 red or green LED

### A versatile digital panel meter with standard or large

### display, for monitoring and measurement applications.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning

modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external

transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

AC/DC Auto-sensing power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 3 1/2-digit 0.56 LED with display range 1999 to 1999 (4000 counts).

Red or green 0.8" LED large display option.

Display brightness may be externally controlled.

1/8 DIN (96 x 48mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick panels (up to 2). May be ordered with optional extra fire resistant metal case.

Optional NEMA-4X, IP-65 hinged, lockable, water and dust

proof cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters. As shown on pages 3 to 5.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........12 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................3 1/2 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std),

0.56 or 0.8 Green or Super Bright Red (optn). Range 1999 to 1999 counts.

Polarity:.....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate, XXXX Positive Overrange:..1 (MSD) is displayed with all other digits blank.

Negative Overrange: 1 (MSD) and sign are displayed with

all other digits blank.

Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @1.5W PS2.........................15-48 VAC,50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @4.0W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/8 DIN, Bezel: 96x48 mm (3.78"x1.89")

Depth behind bezel: 117 mm (4.61") Plus 11.8 mm (0.47") for Right-angled connector or plus 20 mm (0.79") for Straight-thru connector.

Weight:.......................8 oz., 11 oz when packed.

Index

Case Dimensions.................................. 7 Component Layout................................. 3 Connector Pinouts................................. 2 Connectors....................................... 2 Functional Diagram................................ 2 General Features.................................. 1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules............ 3-5

Input Module Calibration Procedures................. 6-7 Input Module Compatibility........................... 1 Input Module Component Glossary.................... 6 Installation Guidelines.............................. 8 Ordering Information............................... 8 Pin Descriptions................................... 2 Specifications..................................... 1

Page 1

### Functional Diagram

Hold

Test

Common

Dim/Blank

AC Neutral, DC

AC Line, + DC AC/DC Power Input

Decimal Select Header

DX-35 Functional Diagram

### Connector Pinouts

### Connectors

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all connections.

### Pin Descriptions

Pins 1 to 6 - Input Module: See the individual pin out of the input signal conditioning module selected. Usually Pin 1 is the Signal Input High pin and Pin 3 is the Signal Input Low pin. All calibration and scaling functions are performed on the individual input signal conditioner module. See pages 6 and 7.

Pin 9 - Hold: If this pin is left unconnected the meter will operate in a free running mode. When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, the meter display will be latched. A/D conversions will continue, but the display will not be updated until Pin 9 is disconnected from Pin 11.

Pin 10 - Display Test: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, all segments of the display light up and 1888 is displayed.

This is used to detect any missing segments in the display.

Pin 11 - Common: To Hold, Test or Dim the display, the re spective pins have to be connected to this Common Pin.

Pin 12 - Dim/Blank: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11 the display is blanked out. If it is connected through an external 1K pot, the display may be dimmed.

Page 2

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 14 and 15) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard rightangled connectors.

Pin 14 & 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket.

The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-265 VAC/95-300 VDC (PS1 Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 15-48 VAC/10-72 VDC (PS2) is also available.

OPTIONAL EXTERNAL DECIMAL POINT SELECTION BOARD

Pins 6, F - Decimal Common: Connect to these pins to activate

decimals.

Pins 7, H - Decimal XXXX.: Connect to pin 6 or pin F to activate

decimal XXXX..

Pins 8, J - Decimal XXX.X: Connect to pin 6 or pin F to activate

decimal XXX.X.

Pins 9, K - Decimal XX.XX: Connect to pin 6 or pin F to activate

decimal XX.XX.

Pins 10, L - Decimal X.XXX: Connect to pin 6 or pin F to

activate decimal X.XXX.

### Component Layout

DX-35-XX-PS1 (High Voltage)

DX-35-XX-PS2 (Low Voltage)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate. com for updated information.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 6 and 8.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

IA04: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

Page 3

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IF02: Line Frequency

Page 4

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

Page 5

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Input and Output Pins

On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

### 24V DC Output Header

On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

### INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 1999 counts to 001 (one count).

### SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Page 6

### ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-100 to +100 counts).

### ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header

When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span.

For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Calibration

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the

jumper clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points

has no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

1999 (counts) to 001 (one count).

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 1800 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 1800 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 1800 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 1800.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Case Dimensions

Span to produce the required digital reading.

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100 to 1500 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 1600 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase). This will provide a digital display of 1600 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

400. A 4V input would then read 1600 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts.

Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100.

Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 1500.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.0 to +100.0% Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 1000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is

0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 2000 counts.

This will provide a digital display of 1000 counts with an input of only

10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

250. A 16 mA input would then read 1000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 250 counts. Apply

4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 000. Apply

20 mA and check that the display reads 1000. Select decimal point 1XXX to display 00.0 to 100.0.

SIDE VIEW

Page 7

## Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 8

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### OA____

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### DX-35

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: DX-35-DR-PS1-IA01-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and an OP-N4X/96x48, + N/C + N/C + 40 + 8 + 25 = OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES POWER SUPPLY

BASIC MODEL #

INPUT MODULES

RELAY OUTPUT

DISPLAY

basic model number

DX-35....

96x48mm. Lynx, 3.5 Digit.....................

standard options for this model number

Order Code Suffix

Description

List

display

DR... Red LED, 0.56 inch high........................... N/C DB....Superbright Red LED, 0.56 inch high................ DG...Green LED, 0.56 inch high......................... LG....Large Green LED, 0.8 inch high..................... LR....Large Red LED, 0.8 inch high.......................

power supply

input modules (partial list. see www.texmate.com)

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type.

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

### OA____

special options and accessories (oa s)

Part Number

Description

List

special options (specify input & req. reading )

CR-CHANGE.. Calibrated Range Change to another Standard Range.. CS-3/3.5/4.... Custom display scaling within std.ranges....... CSS-SETUP... NRC to set-up custom special scaling beyond the std. range.. CSS-34/INSTL. Installation, specify serial #CSS........... OP-DXEXTDP.. External Dec. Pt. W/Conn. Option-Factory Installed..

accessories (specify serial # for custom artwork installation)

75-DBBZ9648F..Extra Black Bezel for 96x48mm Case......... 75-DMTCLIPF...Side Slide Brackets (2 pc) - extra set, extra strength. 76-D35G-N4....NEMA 4 Green LED Faceplate, Factory Installed.. 76-D35LG-N4...NEMA 4 Large Green LED Faceplate, Factory Installed 76-D35LR-N4...NEMA 4 Large Red LED Faceplate, Factory Installed 76-D35R-N4....NEMA 4 Red LED Faceplate, Factory Installed.. CN-L18........Dual Row 18 Pin Edge Connector, Solder Type. DN.CAS96X48B.Complete 96 X 48 mm Case with bezel....... OP-MTLCILP....Screw Mount Clips (2 pc) - to screw tighten slide brackets OP-MTL96X48..Metal Surround Case, includes screw mounting clips OP-N4X/96X48..96x48mm clear lockable front coverNEMA 4X, splash proof

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Page 9

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DX-35 Features and Specs

## DX-35

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 3 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 or 0.8 L ED

## in a 1/8 DIN Case

LYNX FAMILY

### A versatile digital panel meter with standard or large

### display, for monitoring and measurement applications.

Large display option

0.8 red or green LED

E469078

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning modules, that

have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

AC/DC Auto-sensing power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 3 1/2-digit 0.56

LED with display range 1999 to 1999 (4000 counts).

Red or green 0.8" LED large display option.

Display brightness may be externally controlled.

1/8 DIN (96 x 48mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick panels (up to 2). May be ordered with optional extra fire resistant metal case.

Optional NEMA-4X, IP-65 hinged, lockable, water and dust

proof cover.

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........12 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 2 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:......................3 1/2 digit 0.56" Red LED display (std),

0.56 or 0.8 Green or Super Bright Red (optn). Range 1999 to 1999 counts.

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate, XXXX Positive Overrange:..1 (MSD) is displayed with all other digits blank.

Negative Overrange: 1 (MSD) and sign are displayed with

all other digits blank.

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2........................15-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.0W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:..........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/8 DIN, Bezel: 96x48 mm (3.78"x1.89")

Depth behind bezel: 117 mm (4.61") Plus 11.8 mm (0.47") for Right-angled connector or plus 20 mm (0.79") for Straight-thru connector.

Weight:......................8 oz., 11 oz when packed.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DX-40 45 UL DS DX2 UL

## DX-40

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 4 DIGIT 0.8 LED

## DX-45

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 4 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 LED

## Both in a 1/8 DIN Case

LYNX FAMILY

Large display DX-40

0.8 red or green LED

E469078

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be elimi-

nated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

A versatile, standard and large display, series of digital panel meter for monitoring and measurement applications.

Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters. As shown on pages 3 to 5.

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4

1/2-digit 0.56" LED with display range 19999 to 19999 (40000 counts DX-45).

Display brightness may be externally controlled.

Standard red or optional green 4-digit 0.8" LED with display range -9999 to 9999 (20000 counts DX-40).

Optional NEMA-4X, IP-65 hinged, lockable, water and dust

proof cover.

1/8 DIN (96 x 48mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick panels (up to 2). May be ordered with optional extra fire resistant metal case.

UL Listed.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........16 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 3 counts) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:....DX-45.......4 1/2 digit 0.56 Red LED display (std) 0.56 Green or Super Bright Red (optn).

Range 19999 to 19999 counts.

DX-40.......4 digit 0.8 Red LED display (std)

0.8 Green (optn).

Range 9999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:.....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate DX-45......XXXXX

DX-40......XXXX

Positive Overrange:..All digits flash.

Negative Overrange: negative sign and all digits flash Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2.........................15-48 VAC, 50-400HZ / 10-72 VDC @ 1.5W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:...........20 C to 70 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/8 DIN, Bezel: 96x48 mm (3.78"x1.89")

Depth behind bezel: 117 mm (4.61") Plus 11.8 mm (0.47") for Right-angled connector or plus 20 mm (0.79") for Straight-thru connector.

Weight:.......................8 oz., 11 oz when packed.

### Index

Case Dimensions........................................ 7 Component Layout....................................... 3 Connector Pinouts....................................... 2 Connectors............................................. 2 Functional Diagram...................................... 2 General Features........................................ 1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules...................3-5

Input Module Calibration Procedures........................6-7 Input Module Compatibility................................. 1 Input Module Component Glossary.......................... 6 Installation Guidelines.................................... 8 Ordering Information..................................... 8 Pin Descriptions......................................... 2 Specifications........................................... 1

Page 1

### Functional Diagram

Hold

Test

Common

Dim/Blank

AC Neutral, DC

AC Line, + DC AC/DC Power Input

### Connector Pinouts

### Connectors

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all connections.

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 14 and 15) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

### Pin Descriptions

Pins 1 to 6 - Input Module: See the individual pin out of the input signal conditioning module selected. Usually Pin 1 is the Signal Input High pin and Pin 3 is the Signal Input Low pin. All calibration and scaling functions are performed on the individual input signal conditioner module. See pages 6 and 7.

Pin 9 - Hold: If this pin is left unconnected the meter will operate in a free running mode. When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, the meter display will be latched. A/D conversions will continue, but the display will not be updated until Pin 9 is disconnected from Pin 11.

Pin 10 - Display Test: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin 11, all segments of the display light up and 1888 is displayed. This is used to detect any missing segments in the display.

Page 2

Pin 11 - Common: To Hold, Test or Dim the display, the re spec tive pins have to be connected to this Common Pin.

Pin 12 - Dim/Blank: When this pin is connected to the Common Pin

11 the display is blanked out. If it is connected through an external 1K pot, the display may be dimmed.

Pin 14 & 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket. The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-265 VAC/95-300 VDC (PS1 Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 15-48 VAC/10-72 VDC

(PS2) is also available.

### Component Layout

DX-40/45-XX-PS1 (High Voltage)

DX-40/45-XX-PS2 (Low Voltage)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate. com for updated information.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 6 and 8.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

### IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

IA04: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA02: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

### IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

Page 3

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IA07: AC Volts True RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

ID02: DC Millivolts, 20/50/100/200mV DC w/24V DC Exc

IA08: AC Milliamps True RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ID03: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC w/24V DC Exc

IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

ID04: DC Amps, 5A DC ID09: DC Amps, 1A DC

ID05: DC Volts 2/20/200/Custom V DC with Offset and 24V Exc.

ID07: DC Milliamps, 2/20/200mA DC with Offset and 24V Exc

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

IF02: Line Frequency

Page 4

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IGYZ: Universal Direct Pressure (Absolute or Differential/Gage)

See below for ordering code options

IR04: Resistance 2K (Lynx only) IR05: Resistance 2K (Leopard only)

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

IS06: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4-wire

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

IP03: Process Input, 1-5V DC with Offset, 24V Exc

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

Page 5

### Input Module Component Glossary

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24V DC Output Header On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span.

For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

### ZERO ADJUST Header

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 19999 counts to 0001 (one count).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Span Adjust Header

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-1000 to +1000 counts).

Page 6

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Calibration

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the jumper

clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value.

4 Decimal Points. The selection or positioning of decimal points has

no effect on the calibration of the modules

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or

150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any full scale Digital Display Span from 19999

(counts) to 0001 (one count).

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Digital Display Span (counts) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Digital Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: 0 to 10 V to read 0 to 18000 gallons.

Signal Span = 10V, Digital Display Span = 18000 counts

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. This will provide a digital display of 18000 counts with an input of only 1.8 V which is (1.810)=18% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 18% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 18000.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Digital Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset of sufficient counts that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Digital Display Span to produce the required digital reading.

### Case Dimensions

Example B: 1 to 5 V to read 100.0 to 1500.0 C.

Signal Span = 4V, Digital Display Span = 16000 counts

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a digital display of 16000 counts for an input of 1.6 V which is (1.6 4) = 40% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 40% select the 40% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a digital display of 16000 counts for an input of 4V which is 100% of the examples 4V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

400. A 4V input would then read 16000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 500 counts. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 100. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads 15000. Select decimal point 1XXXX to display -100.0 to 1500.0.

Example C: 4 to 20 mA to read 00.00 to +100.00% Signal Span = 16 mA, Digital Display Span = 10000 counts.

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is

0 to 20 mA for a full scale Digital Display Span of 0 to 20000 counts.

This will provide a digital display of 10000 counts with an input of only

10 mA which is (1016)=62.5% of the examples 16 mA signal span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 62.5% select the (Hi Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

2500. A 16 mA input would then read 10000 counts.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 2500 counts. Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads 0000. Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads 10000. Select decimal point 1XXXX to display 000.0 to 100.00.

SIDE VIEW

Page 7

## Installation Guidelines

## Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

Page 8

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### OA____

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### DX-45

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: DX-45-DR-PS1-IA01-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and an OP-N4X/96x48, + N/C + N/C + 35 + 5 + 20 = OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES POWER SUPPLY

BASIC MODEL #

INPUT MODULES

RELAY OUTPUT

DISPLAY

basic model number

DX-40....

DX-45....

96x48mm, Lynx, Large 4 Digit................. 96x48mm, Lynx, 4.5 Digit.....................

standard options for this model number

Order Code Suffix

Description

List

display

DR... Red LED, 0.56 inch high........................... N/C DB... Superbright Red LED, 0.56 inch high........... DG... Green LED, 0.56 inch high.................... LG... Large Green LED, 0.8 inch high................ LR... Large Red LED, 0.8 inch high.................. N/C

power supply

PS1.. 85-265VAC/95-300VDC............................ N/C PS2.. 15-48VAC/10-72VDC........................

input modules (partial list. see www.texmate.com)

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type.

450 State Place Escondido, CA 92029 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

### OA____

special options and accessories (oa s)

Part Number

Description

List

special options (specify input & req. reading )

CR-CHANGE. Calibrated Range Change to another Standard CR-CHANGE.. Calibrated Range Change to another Standard Range.. CS-3/3.5/4.... Custom display scaling within std.ranges....... CSS-SETUP... NRC to set-up custom special scaling beyond the std. range.. CSS-34/INSTL. Installation, specify serial #CSS........... OP-DXEXTDP.. External Dec. Pt. W/Conn. Option-Factory Installed..

accessories (specify serial # for custom artwork installation)

75-DBBZ9648F.. Extra Black Bezel for 96x48mm Case......... 75-DMTCLIPF... Side Slide Brackets (2 pc) - extra set, extra strength. 76-D35G-N4.... NEMA 4 Green LED Faceplate, Factory Installed.. 76-D35LG-N4... NEMA 4 Large Green LED Faceplate, Factory Installed 76-D35LR-N4... NEMA 4 Large Red LED Faceplate, Factory Installed 76-D35R-N4.... NEMA 4 Red LED Faceplate, Factory Installed.. CN-L18........ Dual Row 18 Pin Edge Connector, Solder Type. DN.CAS96X48B.Complete 96 X 48 mm Case with bezel....... OP-MTLCILP.... Screw Mount Clips (2 pc) - to screw tighten slide brackets OP-MTL96X48.. Metal Surround Case, includes screw mounting clips OP-N4X/96X48.. 96x48mm clear lockable front coverNEMA 4X, splash proof

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Page 9

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### DX-40-45 Features and Specs

## DX-40

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 4 DIGIT0.8 LED

## DX-45

## Lynx Panel Meter

## 4 1/2 DIGIT 0.56 LED

## Both in a 1/8 DIN Case

LYNX FAMILY

### A versatile, standard and large display, series of digital

### panel meter for monitoring and measurement applications.

Large display DX-40

0.8 red or green LED

E469078

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioners that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for straingages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between

85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 15-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Standard red or optional green or super bright red 4 1/2digit 0.56" LED with display range 19999 to 19999 (40000 counts DX-45).

Display brightness may be externally controlled.

Standard red or optional green 4-digit 0.8" LED with display range -9999 to 9999 (20000 counts DX-40).

Optional NEMA-4X, IP-65 hinged, lockable, water and dust

proof cover.

1/8 DIN (96 x 48mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick panels (up to 2). May be ordered with optional extra fire resistant metal case.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner A/D Converter:..........16 bit dual slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 3 counts) Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:..........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......3 conversions per second (Typical) Display:....DX-45......4 1/2 digit 0.56 Red LED display (std) 0.56 Green or Super Bright Red (optn).

Range 19999 to 19999 counts.

DX-40......4 digit 0.8 Red LED display (std)

0.8 Green (optn).

Range 9999 to 9999 counts.

Polarity:....................Assumed positive. Displays negative Decimal Selection:....Header under face plate DX-45......XXXXX

DX-40......XXXX

Positive Overrange:..All digits flash.

Negative Overrange: negative sign and all digits flash Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply 85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W 15-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 1.5W

PS1 (std)................

PS2........................

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C Storage Temp:..........20 C to 50 C.

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....1/8 DIN, Bezel: 96x48 mm (3.78"x1.89")

Depth behind bezel: 117 mm (4.61") Plus 11.8 mm (0.47") for Right-angled connector or plus 20 mm (0.79") for Straight-thru connector.

Weight:......................8 oz., 11 oz when packed.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BX-B31 manual Texmate BX3

## BX-B31

## Lynx Bargraph Meter

## 31 LED Segments

## in a 1/16 DIN Case

LYNX FAMILY

### A versatile, modular bargraph with optional single or dual setpoints.

### General Features

### Input Module Compatibility

31 segment AC/DC powered modular compact bargraph.

1/16 DIN (96 x 24mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick panels (up to 2).

Red (std), green (optional) or amber (optional) colors.

Vertical or horizontal formats.

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioning Modules that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

High voltage power supply (PS1) 85 - 265VAC / 95 - 370VDC Low voltage power supply (PS2) 15 - 48VAC / 10 - 72VDC

Optional single or dual setpoints with easy adjustment

from the front.

Dual 5A Form A relays or one 5A Form A and one 10A

Form C relays.

Easy configuration of relays as high or low setpoints.

Proportional brightness mode for increased effective opti-

cal resolution.

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters. As shown on pages 4 to 5.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner

A/D Converter:..........31 step flash converter

Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 3 counts)

Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical)

Warm up time:..........2 minutes

Display:......................Thirty-one 0.2 x 0.06 (5.08 x 1.52mm)

LED segments. Red display (std), green

(opt) or amber (opt)

Positive Overrange:..All segments flash.

Negative Overrange:..Zero segment flashes

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply

PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC / 95-370 VDC @ 2.5W

PS2........................15-48 VAC / 10-72 VDC @ 2.5W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 60 C

Storage Temp:..........-20 C to +70 C

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing)

Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN, Bezel: 96x24mm(3.78x0.95)

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83")

Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled

connector.

Weight:......................198 gms (7 oz)

255 gms (9 oz) when packed

Index

Case Dimensions................................7 Component Layout...............................3 Connector Pinouts................................2 Connectors.....................................2 Functional Diagram...............................2 General Features................................1 I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules............4-5

Input Module Calibration Procedures................6-7 Input Module Compatibility.........................1 Input Module Component Glossary...................6 Ordering Information..............................8 Pin Descriptions.................................2 Specifications...................................1

### Functional Diagram

Com 1 8

9 NC 1

10 NO 1

NO 2

AC Neutral, DC

AC Line, + DC AC/DC Power Input

BX-B31 with no setpoints

BX-B31 with 2 setpoints

BX-B31 with 1 setpoint

### Connector Pinouts

This meter comes standard with screw terminal plug connections.

Connectors

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 14 and 15) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors.

### Pin Descriptions

Pins 1 to 6 - Input Module: See the individual pin out of the input signal conditioning module selected. Usually Pin 1 is the Signal Input High pin and Pin 3 is the Signal Input Low pin. All calibration and scaling functions are performed on the individual input signal conditioner module. See pages 6 and 7.

Pin 8 - Common of 10 Amp Form C or 5 Amp Form A SP1 Relay.

Pin 9 - Normally Closed Contact of 10 Amp Form C SP1 Relay.

Pin 10 - Normally Open Contact of 10 Amp Form C or 5 Amp Form A SP1 Relay.

Pin 11 & Pin 12Normally Open Contacts of 5 Amp Form A SP2 Relay.

Pin 14 & Pin 15 - AC/DC Power Input: These pins are the power pins of the meter and they only accept a special polarized screw terminal plug that can not be inserted into any other input socket. The standard meter has a auto sensing AC/DC power supply that operates from 85-265 VAC/95-370 VDC (PS1 Std). An optional isolated low voltage power supply that operates from 15-48 VAC/10-72 VDC (PS2) is also available.

### Changing the Setpoints From the Front of the Meter

FRONT OF METER WITH BEZEL AND FILTER REMOVED

To adjust the setpoint on the BX-B31 with relays, remove the front bezel and faceplates. Use needlenose pliers to remove and reposition the setpoint jumper clips.

For Setpoint #1: Insert the jumper clip between Row #1 and Row #2, directly below the LED that you wish to activate.

For Setpoint #2: Insert the jumper clip between Row #2 and Row #3, directly below the LED that you wish to activate.

Relay Activation Select Header Select High to energize the relay when the setpoint is exceeded. Select Low to energize the relay when the display is below the setpoint.

Proportional Brightness Band Potentiometer

The Proportional Brightness Potentiometer superimposes a proportional brightness band to the leading edge of the bargraph which creates

the optical appearance of a pointed arrow. This feature produces a display of infinite resolution. The position of the signal in relation to any two adjacent segments and the scale on the faceplate can be accurately ascertained to within 1%. When the amplitude of the proportional band is adjusted counterclockwise to zero, the smooth proportional advance of the display will be replaced by a step by step movement as each bar is either turned full on or full off.

### Custom Face Plates

Texmate Produces Thousands of Custom OEM Face Plates

Have Texmate Design and Build a Custom Face Plate to Suit your Next project!

Custom face plates have a non-recurring artwork charge. A serial number is then assigned to each artwork, to facilitate re-ordering.

Small Run or One-Off custom face plates incur an installation charge, and are generally printed on a special plastic film, which is then laminated to custom faceplate blanks as required.

OEMs may also order Custom Meter Labels, Box Labels Custom

Data Sheets and Instruction Manuals.

### Component Layout

BX-B31-XX-PS1 (High Voltage)

BX-B31-XX-PS2 (Low Voltage)

BX-B31 Data Sheet (BX3)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate.com for updated information.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit. See Input Module Component Glossary and Calibration on pages 6 and 8.

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200mV/2V/20V AC

IA12: AC Millivolt RMS Sigma Delta

IA02:

ID01: DC Volts, 2/20/200V/Custom w/24V DC Exc

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

BX-B31 Data Sheet (BX3)

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IR02: 3 wire Potentiometer 1K min (0-F.S.)

IF02: Line Frequency

IR03: Linear Potentiometer 1K min

IS04: Pressure/Load Cell Ext Exc., 20/2mV/V, 4/6wire

IS05: Pressure/Load Cell 20/2mV/V, 5/10V Exc 4-wire

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Input and Output Pins

On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

### 24V DC Output Header

On some modules this header enables a 24V DC 25mA (max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin 2.

### INPUT RANGE Header

Range values are marked on the PCB.Typically two to four positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

### SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

### SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Digital Display span from 19999 counts to 0001 (one count).

### SPAN RANGE Header

### ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header

When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, to 25% of the digital display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5V input to display 0 to full scale.The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

### ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps.

This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Calibration

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter). Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of full scale (-1000 to +1000 counts).

Note: I-Series modules with analog calibration and scaling capability can be interchanged between any compatible meter without recalibration. However, meters that also have software scaling and calibration capabilities such as meters in the Leopard and Tiger families or Lynx Q-Series (Quickset programming), must have their software scaling set to unity gain.

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the jumper

clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. The Lynx family of Q meters can accept negative signals also, and may be scaled for inputs from -50% to +100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioning module.

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

### Input Module Calibration Procedures Continued

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any Display Span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit.

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Display Span (digital counts or bargraph segments) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

Example A: Using a BX-B31 bargraph meter Input signal 0 to 10 V to read zero to full scale.

Signal Span = 10 V, Display Span = 30 segments

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. The standard direct scaling will provide a display of 30 segments with an input of only 2 V which is (210) =20% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 20% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads full scale.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Display Span.

### Case Dimensions

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset so that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Display Span to produce the required display reading.

Example B: Using a BX-B31 Bargraph meter.

Input signal 1 to 5 V to read zero to full scale.

Signal Span = 4 V, Display Span = 30 segments

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a display of 30 segments for an input of

2 V which is (2 4) = 50% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 50% select the next higher 60% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 3).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a display of 30 segments for an input of 4 V which is 100% of the examples 4 V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 8.5 segments. A 4 V input would then read 30 segments.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 25 segments. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads zero. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads full scale.

Example C: Using a BX-B31 Bargraph meter Input signal 4 to 20 mA to read zero to full scale Signal Span = 16 mA, Display Span = 30 segments

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is

0 to 20 mA for a full scale Display Span of 0 to 30 segments.

2 Select the (Lo Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 8.5 segments. A 16 mA input would then read 30 segments.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 8.5 segments. Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads zero. Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads full scale.

### Ordering Information

BASIC MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

RELAY OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### BX-B31

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: BX-B31-VR-PS1-IA01-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and a 75-DMT96X24

BASIC MODEL NUMBER

Standard Options for this Model Number

Order Code Suffix

Description

DISPLAY

HG...31 Segment Green LED Bargraph, Horizontal HR....31 Segment Red LED Bargraph, Horizontal VG....31 Segment Green LED Bargraph, Vertical VR..31 Segment Red LED Bargraph, Vertical

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES (Partial List. See www.texmate.com)

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules pre calibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOLD type.

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

RELAY OUTPUT

R1....Single 5A Form A Relay R2....Dual 5A Form a Relays R11...Single 10A Form C Relay R16...Single 10A Form C & Single 5A Form C Relays

Special Options and Accessories (OAs)

Part Number

Description

SPECIAL OPTIONS (Specify Input & Req. Reading)

CR-CHANGE....Range change from the standard input as shown in BOLD type CS-BAR.......Custom Scaling within any Stnd. or Custom Selectable Range CSR-SETUP....NRC to Set-up Custom Selectable Range CSR-INSTL.....Installation of Custom Selectable Range CSS-SETUP....NRC to Set-up Custom Special Scaling CSS-BR/INSTL..Installation of custom special scaling of bargraph

ACCESSORIES (Specify Serial # for Custom Artwork Installation)

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### BX-B31 Features and Specs

LYNX FAMILY

## BX-B31

## Lynx Bargraph Meter

## 31 LED Segments

## in a 1/16 DIN Case

A versatile, modular bargraph with optional single or dual setpoints.

### General Features

31 segment AC/DC powered modular compact bargraph.

1/16 DIN (96 x 24mm ) case easily mounts in thin or thick panels (up to 2).

Red (std), green (optional) or amber (optional) colors.

Vertical or horizontal formats.

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioning Modules that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

High voltage power supply (PS1) 85 - 265VAC / 95 - 300VDC Low voltage power supply (PS2) 15 - 48VAC / 10 - 72VDC

Optional single or dual setpoints with easy adjustment

from the front.

Dual 4A Form A relays or one 4A Form A and one 9A

Form C relays.

Easy configuration of relays as high or low setpoints.

Proportional brightness mode for increased effective opti-

cal resolution.

UL Listed.

### Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on input signal conditioner

A/D Converter:..........31 step flash converter

Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 3 counts)

Temp. Coeff.:............100 ppm/C (Typical)

Warm up time:..........2 minutes

Display:......................Thirty-one 0.2 x 0.06 (5.08 x 1.52mm)

LED segments. Red display (std), green

(opt) or amber (opt)

Positive Overrange:..All segments flash.

Negative Overrange:..Zero segment flashes

Power Supply:..........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply

PS1 (std)................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W

PS2........................15-48 VAC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 VDC @ 4.0W

Operating Temp.:......0 to 50 C

Storage Temp:..........-20 C to +70 C

Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing)

Case Dimensions:....1/16 DIN, Bezel: 96x24mm(3.78x0.95)

Depth behind bezel 122.2 mm (4.83")

Plus 12.7mm (0.5) for Right-angled

connector.

Weight:......................198 gms (7 oz)

255 gms (9 oz) when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FX-B101QFX1 Texmate Bargraph Meter

E469078

LYNX FAMILY

## FX-B101Q

## Lynx Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

### A low cost red or optional green, 101 segment bargraph in a 36x144 case, providing

### a direct connection to most sensors for monitoring and measurement applications.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioning Modules that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. 5 or 10 V DC excitation is provided for resistance bridge type sensors.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

A red or optional green 101 segment bargraph.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 14-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Optional 16 Bit isolated analog output that can be used to drive an external process device such as a chart recorder, remote display, or for retransmission to a central control room. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired span from one bar to the full scale range

Center zero setting, header selectable.

Provision for external brightness setting switch (by connecting the DIM to the GND pin on the back of the meter).

Smart averaging (to speed up display response).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters. As shown on pages 10-12.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on range and function selected A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 1segment) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......10 conversions per second (Typical) Bargraph Display:.....101 segment 4 vertical (std),

horizontal (optn), red (std), green (optn)

Polarity:.....................Selectable center zero Positive Overrange:..Bargraph display flashes Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph display flashes Analog Output:.........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out)......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)..................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2...............................14-48 V AC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 V DC @1.5W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:...........20C to 70C Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....3/32 DIN, Bezel: 36x144 mm(1.42x5.69) Depth behind bezel: (4.64") 117.5 mm Plus 10 mm (0.39) for Right-angled connector, or plus 18.3 mm (0.72) for Straightthru connector, or plus 26.5 mm (1.05) for Push-On connector.

Weight:.......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

### Index

Page 1

### Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators

101

Segment

Bargraph

Zero

Button

UP Program

Direction Indicator

DOWN Program

Direction Indicator

Span

Button

### directly changed. The direction of change will be

### either up or down, as indicated by the UP and

### DOWN indicator LEDs. After the indicator LED lights

### up there is a 0.5 second delay before any change

### occurs. When a button is released and pressed

### down again the direction of change is reversed. As

### there are no menu or sub-menus to navigate, the

### programming and setup is quick and easy.

### Front Panel Buttons

### Zero Button

### The Zero Button sets the low input signal scaling.

### Span Button

### The Span Button sets the high input signal scal-

### ing.

Lo Button

The Lo Button sets the analog output low setting.

### Hi Button

### The Hi Button sets the analog output high setting.

### Quickset Programming

### This bargraph features Texmate's unique QUICKSET

### PROGRAMMING. When a front panel button is

### pressed and held down, the associated function is

### Glossary of Programming Symbols and Modes of Operation Controls and Indicators

To explain software programming procedures, logic diagrams are used to visually assist in following programming steps. The following symbols are used to represent the functions and displays of the meter:

This arrow represents

the direction and level of an input signal

Small arrow shows

direction the bargraph display has

moved or will move.

Shading indicates

bargraph is ON in this area.

### Standard or Center Zero Display Mode Select Header

Jumper clips enables standard display.

Jumper clip to enable Center Zero display.

Horizontal and Reverse Mounting with Custom Face Plate Installed

Horizontal or Reverse Mounting Meters can be mounted horizontally in the panel and for those applications that require an opposite growth of the bar, the meter can be vertically or horizontally mounted upside down

When two fingers are shown side by side, the two corresponding buttons must be pressed at the same time to initiate an indicated function.

Page 2

Over View of Display Modes, Scaling Capabilities and Operating Modes

### Standard Display Mode

Standard Scaling

Standard display mode selected and scaled so bar increases as input signal increases from Low to Hi.

Inverse Scaling

Standard display mode selected and scaled so the bar increases as the input signal decreases from Hi to Low.

### Center Zero Display Mode

Bipolar Center Zero

Center point display mode selected and scaled, so the bar increases upward from zero, for increasing positive inputs and downward from zero for increasing negative inputs. When the input is zero, only the center segment will be on.

Halfway Zero Point

Center point display mode selected and scaled, so the bar increases upwards or downwards from the center point, for signals that are greater or less than half the calibrated full scale range respectively.

When the input is equal to half the full scale range, only the center segment will be on.

### Two Point Quickset Scaling and Calibration

Meters with QuICkSeT PROgRAmmINg feature a unique, easy-to-use, two point scaling and calibration system.

Scaling or calibration is accomplished simply, by applying a zero or low input signal and adjusting the bar to the desired reading, using the ZERO button. A higher input signal is then applied, and the bar is adjusted to the desired reading for that input value, using the SPAN button.

ImPORTANT DeTAIlS THAT mAke QuICkSeT PROgRAmmINg eASy TO uSe AND uNDeRSTAND

1. The zero and span buttons are functionally the same, except as follows: The ZERO button can initiate a scaling with input signals from

zero to 95% of fullscale.The Span button can initiate a scaling with input signals from 5% of fullscale to 105% of fullscale.

2. When a Zero or Span button is pressed, the Up or Down indicator LED will immediately light up to show the direction, in which the Bar will move, after a 0.5 second delay. If the button is released and pressed again, the opposite up or down indicator will light up, and 0.5 seconds later the Bar will begin to move in that direction until the button is released. When the bar is being adjusted to zero or fullscale, the bar will automatically stop at the zero or fullscale position, and will not overshoot these positions, even if the button continues to be pressed.

3. While the bar is being adjusted, a new offset and scale factor is continuously being calculated. At the moment the button is released, and the scaling is accepted, the calculation data is memorized and implemented. The Scaling calculation is based on the new position of the Bar, the input signal being applied at that moment, and the previously memorized position of the Bar and the input signal that was being applied, when the other button was last released.

4. Positive and negative signals maybe integrated into a two point scaling. However when either a ZERO or SPAN button is pressed the input signal being applied, must be more than 5% higher or lower than the previously memorized value of the input signal, that was being applied when the other button was last released. If not, the bar will flash, the scaling will not be accepted, and the previous scaling will still be retained in memory.

5. Because of the requirement, that a new scaling input signal must be 5% higher or lower than the previously stored value, it can sometimes be difficult to implement a desired scaling, particularly when using a calibrator that only has fixed output values. In this case Reset the Scaling by pressing the ZERO and SPAN buttons simultaneously for two seconds. Both scaling memories will be erased and an internal default scale factor will be loaded. This provides a display of zero to fullscale on the bar for an input of approximately 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioning module. After Resetting the Scaling a new calibration, using either button, can be implemented with new input signal values. It is good practice to always use the Zero button for lower input signals and the Span button for higher input signals, even when the bar display scale is inversed.

6. The larger the difference between two points used for calibration, the better the accuracy. However if the difference is too high, and

the output from the input signal conditioning module is greater than +2.1VDC, or less than -1.05VDC, the bar will flash over range. The calibration will not then be accepted and, the previous scaling will still be retained in memory. In this case, either a lower input signal must be used, or a higher range on the input module should be selected to recalibrate the meter.

Note: Most input signal conditioners have provisions for analog calibration and scaling. If the meters scale factor is set to read zero with a zero input (shorted input), and to read 10 Bars fullscale with a 2.000 V input, any pre-calibrated signal conditioner with an output that does not exceed 1 V to + 2 V, will read correctly in the meter without any further calibration.

Page 3

### Opening the Case to Access Mode Select Header Controls and Indicators

## To remove front bezel lightly lever

## the plastic catches up and for-

## ward in the sequence

## shown by the num-

## bers

## To remove rear

## cover plate press

## down lightly to release

## two plastic catches, on either

## side of the case and lever back-

## wards.

### meter exploded view

Page 4

Two Point Quickset Scaling and Calibration Procedure (continued) Standard Display Mode Calibration Procedure Note: Calibrating the bargraph requires two input signals. Using the minimum input (LO Input) and maximum input (HI Input) signals are recommended for optimal accuracy.

However, scaling can be accomplished with any two signals that are higher or lower than each other by more than 5% of the full scale and are not greater than +2.1VDC or less than -1.05VDC.

See page 10-12 for information on input modules that may be used with this meter.

Confirm that the correct range and input is selected on the input signal conditioning module.

STeP A SeT THe lOW INPuT SIgNAl ReADINg ON THe BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (4ma in this example) to the input pins.

2) Using the ZERO button adjust the bar down to the required position.

Warning: Do not press the Span button when a low signal is applied or the Zero button when a high signal is applied. Doing so will tamper with the calibration process and necessitate resetting and recalibrating the meter.

If erroneous signals or buttons are pressed, tampering with the calibration, please perform the "Reset Scaling and Calibration " procedure below, then repeat steps A and B.

STeP B SeT THe HIgH INPuT SIgNAl ReADINg ON THe BAR

1) Apply the high input signal (20mA in this example) to the input pins.

Using the SPAN button, adjust the bar to the required position.

This position can be higher or lower than the position adjusted in Step 2. The scaling for a 4 to 20mA input is now complete.

Reset Scaling and Calibration ReSeT THe SCAlINg

1) Apply power to the meter and press the ZERO and SPAN buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds. This erases any previously memorized scalings and resets the meters scaling to the factory default. Factory default scaling is approximately zero to full scale for an input that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

Apply Low

Signal to the

Input Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

Apply Hi

Signal to the

Input Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

Reset the scaling

to the default value on by pressing

the Zero and

Span buttons

simultaneously

for 2 secs.

One Point Quickset Rescaling and Calibration Procedure ONe POINT ReCAlIBRATION

As explained earlier, the FX-B101Q bargraph is calibrated using two point calibration. Once a bargraph is calibrated, the low end of the range may be then recalibrated without affecting the calibration of the high end, and vice versa.

For example, take an FX-B101Q that has been calibrated to read zero to full scale for an input of 4 to 20mA. If now the scaling has to be changed to read zero to full scale for an input of 0 to 20mA, only the low (4 mA) end needs to be recalibrated. The high (20 mA) end of the scaling is left untouched, and so does not change. The following one point recalibration procedure is used for this purpose.

STeP A ReCAlIBRATe THe lOW INPuT SIgNAl ReADINg ON THe BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (0ma in this example) to the input pins.

The first segment will flash, indicating an under range condition.

2) Using the ZERO button adjust the bar up to the required position.

3) The FX-B101Q has now been recalibrated to read zero to full scale for a 0 to 20 mA input.

Apply 0 mA

to the Input Pins and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

Page 5

### Center Zero Mode Scaling For Bipolar Inputs

The procedure for scaling the bar graph for bipolar signals is very simple. If say CH1 has to be scaled for -1V to +1V, the steps are as follows:

STeP A SeleCT THe CeNTeR zeRO DISPlAy mODe FOR CH1

1) Following the instructions on page 4, remove the meter from the case.

2) Select the Center Zero Mode for CH1 by repositioning the jumper clip on the

Center Zero Display Mode Select Header.

### CZ1

STeP B ReVIeW THe INPuT mODule STATuS

1) See pages 10 12 for information on input modules that may be use with this

meter.

2) Confirm that the correct range and input is selected on the input signal condition-

ing module.

Note: When undertaking an initial set up and primary scaling and calibration of the meter it is best to start with a reset of the scaling.

STeP C ReSeT THe SCAlINg ON CHANNel ONe

1) Apply power

the meter and press

the ZERO and SPAN buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds. This erases any previously memorized scalings, and resets the scaling to the factory default, of approximately zero to full scale, for an input, that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

STeP D SeT THe lOW INPuT SIgNAl ReADINg ON THe BAR

1) Apply the LO input signal (-1V in this example) to the input pins.

2) Using the ZERO button adjust the bar down to the required position. In this case,

all the bar segments from mid point down to the bottom will be ON.

STeP e SeT THe HIgH INPuT SIgNAl ReADINg ON THe BAR

1) Apply the high input signal (+1V in this example) to the input pins.

2) Using the SPAN button adjust the bar to the required position. This position could be higher or lower than the position adjusted in Step 2. In this case, all the bar segments from mid point up to the top will be ON.

3) The scaling for an input of -1V to +1V is now complete.

Page 6

Reset the scaling

to the default value on by pressing

the Zero and

Span buttons

simultaneously

for 2 secs.

Apply -1V

to the Input

Signal Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

Apply +1V

to the Input

Signal Pins

and adjust

bar display

to the required

position

### Analog Output Scaling and Calibration

When the optional analog output module is installed, an independently calibrated 16 bit isolated, voltage or current analog output is available. The analog signal is independently scaled to the input signal and not to the bargraph display. It is important to note that the Analog Output is completely independently of the bargraph display. This means for example that the bargraph display may be scaled to go from zero to full scale as the input changes from 0 to 5V, while at the same time, the analog output is scaled to go from 4 to 20mA as the input changes from 2 to 3V. Rescaling the bargraph or the analog output will not affect the scaling of the other.

To calibrate the Analog Output you must be able to input two input signals. Usually the minimum input (LO Input) and the maximum (HI Input) signals are used for maximum accuracy.

For example: the three steps to obtain an Analog Output of 4mA to 20mA for an input of

0 to 10V are:

STeP A CAlIBRATe ANAlOg OuTPuT FOR lO SIgNAl

1) Apply the low input signal (0V in this example) to the meter.

2) Connect an external multimeter to the analog output pins (Pins 17 and 18).

3) Using the LO button adjust the analog output as measured on the external multimeter to be the required value. (4mA in this example). When the LO button is pressed, the UP or DOWN indicator LED shows the direction of change. To reverse the direction of change release the LO button and press down again. Initially the output changes very slowly, but speeds up as the LO button remains pressed down. The analog output for a low input can be set in this step to any value in the range of 0 to 20mA or 0 to 10V ( if the voltage output option is selected).

Apply 0 V

to the Input

Signal Pins

Adjust the Analog

output to 4.00mA

Warning: Do not press the Hi button when a low signal is applied or the Lo button when a high signal is applied. Doing so will tamper with the analog output calibration process and necessitate resetting and recalibrating the Analog Output.

If erroneous signals or buttons are pressed, tampering with the analog output calibration, please perform the "Reset Analog output Scaling and Clibration" procedure below, then repeat steps A and B.

STeP B CAlIBRATe ANAlOg OuTPuT FOR HI SIgNAl

1) Next apply the high input signal (10V in this example) to the meter.

2) Using the HI button, adjust the analog output as measured on the external multimeter to be the required value. (20mA in this example). When the HI button is pressed the UP or DOWN indicator LED shows the direction of change. Release the HI button and press again to reverse the direction of change. Initially the output changes very slowly, but speeds up as the HI button continues to remain pressed. This output may be higher or lower than the value set in Step 2, and may be any value in the range of 0 to 20mA or 0 to10V. This allows the easy reversal of analog output that is required in some applications.

### Reset Analog Output Scaling and Calibration

ReSeT THe ANAlOg OuTPuT SCAlINg

1) Press the LO and HI buttons simultaneously and hold them down for 2 seconds. This will reset the analog output scaling to the default value. The default analog output scaling is approximately 0 to 20mA (0 to 10V if voltage output option is selected) for an input that is 0 to 100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioner.

Apply 10 V

to the Input

Signal Pins

Adjust the Analog

output to 20.00mA

Reset the analog

ouput scaling by

pressing the LO

and HI buttons

simultaneously

for 2 secs.

Page 7

### Functional Diagram Controls and Indicators

Analog +

Analog

Program Lock

Common

Dim

AC Neutral, DC

AC Line, + DC AC/DC Power Input

### Connector Pinouts Controls and Indicators

This meter uses plug-in type screw terminal connectors for all input and output connections. The power supply connections (pins 23 and 24) have a unique plug and socket outline to prevent cross connection. The main board uses standard right-angled connectors. Replacement 2-, 3-, and 4-pin plug connectors are available.

WARNINg

AC and DC power supply voltages are hazardous. make sure the power supply is isolated before connecting to the meter.

### Pin Descriptions Controls and Indicators

## Input Signal Pins 1 to 6

### Pins 23 and 24 AC/DC Power Input

Pins 1 to 6 are reserved for the input signal conditioner.

See the data sheet for the selected input signal conditioner.

### Pins 17 to 21 Rear Panel Switches

Pin 17 ANAlOg OuTPuT (+). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 18 ANAlOg OuTPuT (). mA (0 to 20 mA/4 to

20 mA) or V (0 to 10 V) output is header selectable.

Pin 19 Programming lOCk. By connecting the LOCK pin

to the COMMON pin, the meter's programmed parameters can be viewed but not changed.

Pin 20 COmmON. To activate the LOCK or DIM functions from the rear of the meter, the respective pins have to be connected to the COMMON pin. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Pin 21 DIm. By connecting the display dim (DIM) pin to the COMMON pin, the display brightness setting is halved.

Page 8

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC, 50~400Hz / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or optional 14-48 V AC 50~400Hz / 10-72 V DC 1.5W nominal. (PS2).

Pin 23 AC Neutral / DC. Neutral power supply line.

Pin 24 AC line / +DC. Live power supply line.

### Internal Function Header Pin out

Internal header pins 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 are for factory settings only. Not for external use!

4 HOlD. By connecting the HOLD pin to the GND pin, the displayed reading is frozen, however, A/D conversions continue. When the HOLD pin is disconnected from the GND pin, the correct reading is displayed.

5 gND. This pin is connected to the internal power supply ground.

Internal

Function

Header

Center Point

Display

Header

### Component Layout

4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA) Selection Position

Analog Output

Selection Header

0 to 10 V DC Selection Position

Optional Analog Output Module

Typical

Input Signal

Conditioner

Analog

output

board

placed

on edge

here

100

FX-B101Q Main Board

### Connectors

WARNINg

AC and DC input signals and power supply voltages can be hazardous. Do Not connect live wires to terminal blocks, and do not insert, remove or handle terminal blocks with live wires connected.

Standard plug-in screw terminal blocks provided by Texmate:

Page 9

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules

Many additional input modules are available and others are constantly being developed. Check with your local distributor or www.texmate. com for updated information.

Precalibrated I-Series input modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. Where appropriate, all the standard ranges shown are designed to be header selectable by the user, and Texmate's unique SPAN ADJUST Header facilitates scaling to almost any required engineering unit.

Unless otherwise specified Texmate will ship all modules precalibrated with factory preselected ranges and/or scalings as shown in BOlD type. Other precalibrated standard ranges or custom ranges may be ordered. Factory installed custom scaling and other custom options are also available (see Ordering Information, Special Options on last page).

Symbols Indicate Module Compatibility Within Meter Families

IA03: AC Milliamps Scaled RMS, 2/20/200mA AC

ALL MODELS

SOME MODELS MODEL SPECIFIC

IA01: AC Volts Scaled RMS, 200/300V AC

IA04: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 1 Amp AC IA05: AC AC Amps Scaled RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA06: AC Volts True RMS, 300V AC

Page 10

I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued IA09: AC Amps True RMS, 1 Amp AC IA11: AC Amps True RMS, 5 Amp AC

IA10: AC Millivolts, Scaled RMS, 100mV AC

IF02: Line Frequency

IP01: Process Loop, 4-20mA IP02: Process Loop, 4-20mA with 24VDC EXC 091E

IP07: Universal Process Input

2V/5V/10V/20V/200V/2mA/20mA/Custom

224D

Page 11

### I-Series Input Signal Conditioning Modules Continued

IT06: Thermocouple, J Type (0-1400 F) IT08: Thermocouple, J Type (0-760 C)

IT07: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1999 F) IT09: Thermocouple, K Type (0-1260 C)

### Installation Guidelines

### Installation

1. Install and wire meter per local applicable codes/regulations, the particular application, and good installation practices.

2. Install meter in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating temperature and that provides good air circulation.

3. Separate input/output leads from power lines to protect the meter from external noise. Input/output leads should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers and other noisy components. Shielding cables for input/output leads is recommended with shield connection to earth ground near the meter preferred.

4. A circuit breaker or disconnect switch is required to disconnect power to the meter. The breaker/switch should be in close proximity to the meter and marked as the disconnecting device for the meter or meter circuit.

The circuit breaker or wall switch must be rated for the applied voltage (e.g., 120VAC or 240VAC) and current appropriate for the electrical application (e.g., 15A or 20A).

5. See Case Dimensions section for panel cutout information.

6. See Connector Pinouts section for wiring.

7. Use 28-12 AWG wiring, minimum 90 C (HH) temperature rating. Strip wire approximately 0.3 in. (7-8 mm).

8. Recommended torque on all terminal plug screws is 4.5 lb-in (0.51 N-m).

IT03: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 800C) IT04: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-200 to 1470F) IT05: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9F) IT14: RTD, 100 Pt. 2/3/4-wire (-199.9 to 199.9C) 187C

Page 12

### Custom Face Plates and Scales

Custom face plates have a non-recurring artwork charge. A serial number is then assigned to each artwork, to facilitate re-ordering. We prefer custom logos and special artwork to be supplied in an Illustrator or Photoshop file format.

Small Run or One-Off custom face plates incur an installation charge, and are generally printed on a special plastic film, which is then laminated to custom faceplate blanks as required.

Large Run (300 pieces min): custom face plates are production silk screened, issued a part number, and held in stock for free installation as required by customer orders.

Analog Output

Hi Lo

### 100

### 1000

### 1.2

### 120

### 1200

### 1.5

### 150

### 1500

### 200

### 2000

### 2.5

### 250

### 2500

### 300

### 3000

### 400

### 4000

### 4.5

### 450

### 4500

### 500

### 5000

### 600

### 6000

### 7.5

### 750

### 7500

### 800

### 8000

### 900

### 9000

Zero

Span

10x5

Div.

6x2x2

5x3x2

4x5x2

5x5x2

6x5

8x5

9x5

10x5

6x5

7.5x5

37.5

8x5

9x5

28 mm

(1.1")

Some horizontal scales

only have numbers on each second major division.

Face plate scales

and numbers are shown close to their actual size.

Zero

Span

136 mm (5.35")

Analog

Output

Page 13

### Input Module Component Glossary

### Dual input modules, and those modules exclusively compatible with the Leopard or

### Tiger Families, do not have zero and span adjustments. These modules are scaled

### and calibrated using the internal software functions of each individual meter.

Input and Output Pins On most modules Pin 1 is the Signal High input and Pin 3 is the Signal Low input. Typically Pin 2 is used for Excitation Voltage output.

24 V DC Output for 4-20 mA Header On some modules this header enables a 24 V DC 25 mA

(max) Excitation/Auxiliary output to be connected to Pin

2 that can power most 4-20 mA process loop sensors.

INPUT RANGE Headers

Range values are marked on the PCB. Typically two to eight positions are provided, which are selected with either a single or multiple jumper clip. When provided, a custom range position is only functional when the option has been factory installed.

SPAN Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the 15 turn SPAN pot is always on the right side (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal range.

SPAN ADJUST Header

This unique five-position header expands the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into five equal 20% steps, across 100% of the input Signal Span. Any input Signal Span can then be precisely scaled down to provide any required Display span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit.

Function Select Headers

On some modules various functions such as Amps and Volts, 4 wire and 6 wire, or cold junction compensation are selected by header positions that are marked on the PCB.

Excitation Output Select Headers When excitation outputs are provided, they are typically 5 V DC max 30 mA, 10 V DC max 30 mA (300 or higher resistance) or external supply. They are selected by either a single or multiple jumper clip.

ZERO Potentiometer (Pot)

If provided, the ZERO pot is always to the left of the SPAN pot (as viewed from the rear of the meter).

Typically it enables the input signal to be offset 5% of the full scale display span.

ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header When provided, this three position header increases the ZERO pots capability to offset the input signal, by 25% of the full scale display span. For example a Negative offset enables a 1 to 5 V input to display 0 to full scale. The user can select negative offset, positive offset, or no offset (ZERO pot disabled for two step non-interactive span and offset calibration).

SPAN RANGE Header

When this header is provided it works in conjunction with the SPAN ADJUST Header by splitting its adjustment range into a Hi and a Lo range. This has the effect of dividing the adjustment range of the SPAN pot into ten equal 10% steps across 100% of the input Signal Span.

Page 14

ZERO ADJUST Header

When this header is provided, it works in conjunction with the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header, and expands the ZERO pots offset capability into five equal negative steps or five equal positive steps. This enables virtually any degree of input signal offset required to display any desired engineering unit of measure.

### Input Module Analog Calibration Procedures

### Tiger, Leopard and Q-Series Lynx meters have software calibration and scaling functions that

### can expand or be used in conjunction with the analog capabilities of any compatible modules.

Note: I-Series modules with analog calibration and scaling capability can be interchanged between any compatible meter without recalibration. However, meters that also have software scaling and calibration capabilities such as meters in the Leopard and Tiger families or Lynx

Q-Series (Quickset programming), must have their software scaling set to unity gain.

Basic standard range calibration of direct reading modules that utilize either Auto Zero or a ZERO pot, an INPUT RANGE Header and or a SPAN pot.

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, reposition the jumper

clip to select the desired input signal range.

2. Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

3 Apply a known input signal that is at least 20% of the full scale input range and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads the exact input value. The Lynx family of Q meters can accept negative signals also, and may be scaled for inputs from -50% to +100% of the range selected on the input signal conditioning module.

Wide range scaling, in engineering units not requiring offsets, with modules that utilize auto-zero or a ZERO pot, a SPAN RANGE Header and or a SPAN ADJUST Header.

Texmates unique SPAN ADJUST and SPAN RANGE Headers provide the circuit equivalent of an ultra-precision one megohm 75 or 150 turn potentiometer that can infinitely scale down any Input Signal SPAN to provide any Display Span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit.

If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header, and the required full scale Display Span (digital counts or bargraph segments) is to be larger than the directly measured value of the input Signal Span, then the next lower range on the INPUT RANGE Header should be selected. The resulting over range Signal Span is then scaled down, by selecting the position of the SPAN RANGE Header and or the SPAN ADJUST Header, which will reduce the input Signal Span to a percentage, that the required Display Span can be reached by calibration with the SPAN pot.

example A: Using a FX-B101Q bargraph meter

Input signal 0 to 10 V to read zero to full scale.

Signal Span = 10 V, Display Span = 100 segments

1 Select the 2 V INPUT RANGE Header position. The standard direct scaling will provide a display of 100 segments with an input of only

2 V which is (210) =20% of the examples 10 V Signal Span.

2 To scale down the Signal Span to 20% select the 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 1) or if the module has a SPAN RANGE Header, select (LO Range) and 20% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Apply a zero input or short the input pins. The display will auto zero, or if the module has a ZERO pot, it should be adjusted until the display reads zero.

4 Apply 10 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads full

scale.

Large offset scaling and calibration of process signal inputs with modules that utilize ZERO ADJUST Headers and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Headers.

Texmates unique ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header enables the use of a simple two step scaling and calibration procedure for those process signals that require large offsets. This eliminates the back and forth interaction, between zero and span settings, that is often required to calibrate less finely engineered products.

The first step is to set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (No Offset) and scale down the Input Signal Span to a percentage that will enable calibration with the SPAN pot to reach the required Display Span.

The second step is to set the ZERO ADJUST and or ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to provide a positive or negative offset so that calibration with the ZERO pot will offset the Display Span to produce the required display reading.

example B: Using a FX-B101Q Bargraph meter.

Input signal 1 to 5 V to read zero to full scale.

Signal Span = 4 V, Display Span = 100 segments

1 If the module has an INPUT RANGE Header the 2 V position should be selected. This will provide a display of 101 segments for an input of 2 V which is (2 4) = 50% of the examples 4 V signal span. To scale down the Signal Span to 50% select the next higher 60% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 3).

2 If the module is a Process Input 1-5 V DC type, select the (Hi Range) position on the SPAN RANGE Header and the 100% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 5, max increase).

This will provide a display of 101 segments for an input of 4 V which is 100% of the examples 4 V Signal Span.

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 1 V and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads 25 segments. A 4 V input would then read 100 segments.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the negative offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 25 segments. Apply 1 V and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads zero. Apply 5 V and check that the display reads full scale.

example C: Using a FX-B101Q Bargraph meter

Input signal 4 to 20 mA to read zero to full scale

Signal Span = 16 mA, Display Span = 100 segments

1 The full scale Signal Span of the Process Input 4-20 mA modules is

0 to 20 mA for a full scale Display Span of 0 to 100 segments.

2 Select the (Lo Range) Position on the Span Range Header and the 70% Signal Span position on the SPAN ADJUST Header (position 2).

3 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the center position (no offset). Apply 4 mA and adjust the SPAN pot until the display reads

25 segments. A 16 mA input would then read 100 segments.

4 Set the ZERO OFFSET RANGE Header to the positive offset position. If the module has a ZERO ADJUST Header select the position that will provide a negative offset of 25 segments. Apply 4 mA and adjust the ZERO pot until the display reads zero. Apply 20 mA and check that the display reads full scale.

Page 15

Adapter uses wode jaw mouting slide clips.

P/N (75-DMC14436B)

### Panel Adapter

## Fits 6 Edgewise Pointer Meter Cut-Outs

The adapter snaps on the 36x144 mm (1.42x5.69) case and enables single unit or stack mounting in an existing 6 edgewise pointer meter cut-out.

Fits existing cut-outs for 6 (150 mm) edgewise switchboard pointer meters from:

Crompton

G.E.

Westinghouse

Yokogawa

and most others

Width: 43.7 mm to 48 mm (1.72) to (1.89)

Height: 143.4 mm to 149 mm (5.62) to (5.88)

Two bezel trim strips are provided with each adapter to finish off the edge of each individually mounted meter or the edge of each stack mounted array.

Texmates panel adapter enables modern DIN meters to fit in existing cutouts

individually or stacked when replacing old 6 edgewise mechanical pointer meters.

Page 16

### Case Dimensions Controls and Indicators

### Hinged Clear Lockable Polycarbonate NEMA 4X Splash Proof Cover

This rugged, impact resistant, clear lens cover is designed to be dust and water proof to NEMA 4 and IP65 standards. The lens cover consists of a base and cover with a cam hinge and key-lock locking device.

An O-ring, or neoprene gasket forms a seal between the base and the panel. When opened, a cam hinge prevents the cover from closing until pushed closed.

The cover has a tapered recess that, when closed, forms a capillary seal with a tapered ridge on the base. A capillary seal is created when capillary action causes a small amount of water to be drawn in between the two surfaces producing a water tight film around the sealing area.

For those applications, such as food processing, where fluid residues are unacceptable, apply a light coating of clear silicone grease, or other approved sealant to the mating grove to prevent any ingress of liquid and enable the cover to withstand steam cleaning.

Turning the key-lock tightens the cover to the base, ensuring seal integrity. A safety catch keeps the cover closed even when the key is turned to the open position and removed. The keyhole can also be used to attach a safety seal clip, preventing unauthorized opening.

O-ring

Gasket

9/64 DIN

36x144 mm (1.42"x5.69")

P/N: OP-N4/144X36

Base

Cover

Removable

Key-lock

Panel

Safety

Catch

Page 17

### Ordering Information

BASE MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

INPUT MODULES

ANALOG OUTPUT

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### FX-B101Q

### OA____

Add to the basic model number the order code suffix for each standard option required. The last suffix is to indicate how many different special options and or accessories that you may require to be included with this product.

Ordering Example: FX-B101Q-VR-PS1-IA01-OA2, the 2 OAs are, CR-CHANGE and a OP-PA/144X36, + N/C + N/C + 35 + 7+ 8 =

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

BASE MODEL #

INPUT MODULES

POWER SUPPLY

DISPLAY

BASE MODEL #

DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY

### OA____

OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES

### OA____

RELAY OUTPUT

INPUT MODULES

1934 Kellogg Ave., Carlsbad, CA 92008 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected]

Page 18

For Custom Face Plates and Scales see page 13.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### FX-B101Q Features and Specs

E469078

## FX-B101Q

## Lynx Bargraph Meter

## 101 Segment

## in a 9/64 DIN CASE

LYNX FAMILY

### A low cost red or optional green, 101 segment bargraph in a 36x144 case, providing

### a direct connection to most sensors for monitoring and measurement applications.

General Features

External transmitters or signal conditioners can be eliminated by directly connecting the sensor to more than 33 I-Series Plug-in Input Signal Conditioning Modules that include:

AC Current

AC Voltage

DC Current

DC Voltage

Load Cell

Pressure

Process

Prototype

Resistance

Strain-gage

Temperature

4 to 20 mA

Pre-calibrated I-Series Input Signal Conditioning modules, that have span or zero potentiometers, can be interchanged between any I-Series compatible meter, without recalibration, because all of the analog scaling and reference circuitry is self-contained within the module. 5 or 10 V DC excitation is provided for resistance bridge type sensors.

24 V DC excitation is available to power external transmitters and 5 or 10 V DC excitation is available for strain-gages, load cells and resistance bridge type sensors.

A red or optional green 101 segment bargraph.

Auto-sensing AC/DC power supply. For voltages between 85-265 V AC / 95-300 V DC (PS1) or 14-48 V AC / 10-72 V DC (PS2).

Optional 16 Bit isolated analog output that can be used to drive an external process device such as a chart recorder, remote display, or for retransmission to a central control room. User or factory scalable to 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V across any desired span from one bar to the full scale range

Center zero setting, header selectable.

Provision for external brightness setting switch (by connecting the DIM to the GND pin on the back of the meter).

Smart averaging (to speed up display response).

Optional NEMA-4 front cover.

UL Listed

### Input Module Compatibility

LYNX FAMILY: More than 33 different Plug-in I-Series Input Signal Conditioners are approved for Texmates Lynx Family of meters.

See www.texmate.com for an up to date listing.

### Specifications

Input Specs:..............Depends on range and function selected A/D Converter:..........14 bit single slope Accuracy:..................(0.05% of reading + 1segment) Temp. Coeff.:.............100 ppm/C (Typical) Warm up time:...........2 minutes Conversion Rate:......10 conversions per second (Typical) Bargraph Display:.....101 segment 4 vertical (std),

horizontal (optn), red (std), green (optn)

Polarity:.....................Selectable center zero Positive Overrange:..Bargraph display flashes Negative Overrange: First segment of bargraph display flashes Analog Output:.........Isolated 16 bit user scalable mA or V OIC (mA out)...........4-20 mA @ 0 to 500 max loop resistance OIV (volts out)......... 0-10 V DC @ 500 or higher resistance Power Supply:...........AC/DC Auto sensing wide range supply PS1 (std)..................85-265 VAC, 50-400Hz / 95-300 VDC @ 1.5W PS2...............................14-48 V AC, 50-400Hz / 10-72 V DC @1.5W Operating Temp.:......0 to 50C Storage Temp:...........20C to 70C Relative Humidity:....95% (non condensing) Case Dimensions:....3/32 DIN, Bezel: 36x144 mm(1.42x5.69) Depth behind bezel: (4.64") 117.5 mm Plus 10 mm (0.39) for Right-angled connector, or plus 18.3 mm (0.72) for Straightthru connector, or plus 26.5 mm (1.05) for Push-On connector.

Weight:.......................9.5 oz., 12 oz when packed

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

## Function Dedicated Panel Meters and Bargraphs

The following Application Specific indicators are covered in separate user manuals. Each manual provides a brief description of the meter’s hardware, and software options. They also provide general data sheet information such as specifications, pinout details, and case size dimensions.

## Function Dedicated Family Digital Meters

- BDD-652
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40-HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40-RTD
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40-TC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40PSF-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40PSF-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40PSF-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40PSF-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40PSF-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BL-40RPM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BN-35
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BN-35I
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BN-40BCD
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BN-45-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BN-45CL420
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BN-45I-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-35-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-35-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-35-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-35-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-35-HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-35-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-45-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-45-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-45-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-45-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-45-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CM-35XT
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CM-35XTL
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CPW-503
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DD-40VHZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50-FLOW
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50-MAS1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50-MAS2
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50-MS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50-POWER
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-503-POWER
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-503MAS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-50E-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DI-602MAS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40-HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40-RTD
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40-TC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40JANUS-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40JANUS-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40JANUS-DCA
  Datasheet
  missing & Spec
- DL-40JANUS-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40JANUS-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40JANUS-SG
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DL-40RPM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-RTD-C
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-RTD-C.1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-RTD-F
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-RTD-F.1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-SG
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-TC-JC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-TC-JF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-TC-KC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-35-TC-KF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-40-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-40-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-40-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-40-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-40-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-45-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-45-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-45-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-45-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DX-45-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- LVDT-100
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- LVDT-200
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- MINI-5VDIM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- MINI-CL4-20
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- MU-35
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- MU-35CL
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- PC-45X
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- PC-45XAC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- PM-35U
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- PM-35XAC110-AR1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- PM-45-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- PM-45X
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- RP-3500D2
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- RP-35A
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- RP-4500D2
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- RP-4500D2BCD
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SB-B31
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SD-50X
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SD-60XI
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SD-802XAI
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SG-100
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SM-35
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SM-35-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SM-35MV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SM-35X
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SP-35X
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SP-35XMV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SP-35XRMS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SPM-083ACHZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SPM-083CL
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SPM-083VAC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- SPM-083VDC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TD5300
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TEX-CAL-934
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35JC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35JF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35KC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35KF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35XJC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35XJF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35XKC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TM-35XKF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-RTD-C
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-RTD-C.1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-RTD-F
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-RTD-F.1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-SG
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-TC-JC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-TC-JF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-TC-KC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-35-TC-KF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-40-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-45-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- UM-45-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

## Function Dedicated Family Bargraphs

- AM-20
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- AM-30
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- AM-30R1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- AM-30R2
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- BX-B31-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-Astern-Ahead
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40-RTD
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40-TC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40PF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40PS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- CL-B101D40RPM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- DV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FB-B50
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FI-BD-MAS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101D40-RPM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101D40-TC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101D40HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101D40PF
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101Q-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101Q-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101Q-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101Q-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-B101Q-HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-BDPSF-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-BDPSF-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-BDPSF-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-BDPSF-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-BDPSF-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FL-BQ-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FX-B101Q-ACA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FX-B101Q-ACV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FX-B101Q-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FX-B101Q-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FX-B101Q-HZ
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- FX-BQ-PROCESS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

## Transmitters

Texmate’s legendary and cost-effective Tiger microPLC and Leopard Process Controllers are now available in DIN rail mount configurations.

## DIN Rail Mount Transmitters/Isolators/Controllers/Micro PLC

- TI-500
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TI-501
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TI-502
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TI-503
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-4-20mA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-ACA-RMS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-ACV-RMS
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-DCA
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-DCV
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-DUAL-LOOP
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-Frequency
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-QUAD-LOOP
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-RPM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TL-TC-RTD
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TT series brief
  TT series brief
- TT-1S1M
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TT-2D2MC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TT-2D2MM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TTM-2S2MC
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TTM-2S2MM
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

### Texmate signal transmitter TT-1S1M manual d0004

## TT-1S1M

## Microprocessor Based

## Programmable Isolated Single Channel input and

## Single 4-20mA output Signal Transmitter

## in a Compact 18.5 mm DIN Rail Mount Case

### General Features

TT-1S1M is a DIN rail mount programmable 2-wire loop powered isolated signal transmitter. It converts input signal into a scalable linear 4~20mA analog output current.

The Microprocessor based designed make it flexible to accept various input signals including mV, V, mA, PT100 and 9 different thermocouples.

Easy configuration without external loop power connected.

The measuring unit and range can also be configured via a user-friendly software from a PC.

Fault signal on sensor break presettable.

* Factory setting

Table 1

Accuracy is not guaranteed between 0 and 400C (0 and 752F) for type B, R and S.

Range set by an internal DIP switch, see Table 2.

### Specifications

Input signal: User programmable. refer to table 1.

Thermocouple (T/C): industry standard thermocouple

types, J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C (ITS-90).

Pt100: Excitation 180uA. 2 or 3 wire connection (ITS-90 =0.00385).

Common mode rejection ratio: >80dB.

Galvanic isolation: 2800 Vrms. between input and output

Operating temperature: 0 to 55C

Humidity: 0 to 90% RH

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): En 50081-2, En 50082-2

Dimension: shown in Figure 1.

Voltage: -60mVdc to 60mVdc or -10Vdc to 10Vdc.

Housing material: ABS plastic. UL 94V0

Current: 0mA to 24mA

Weight: 65g

Measuring range: User programmable. Max. range see table 1.

Measuring accuracy: Refer to Table 1. The accuracy is tested

CASE DIMENSIONS

under the operating condition of 24C3C.

Input sampling rate: 200mS.

Input current required: 3.8mA Current limit: 23mA

Output signal: Analogue 4 to 20mA, 20 to 4mA.

Output resolution: 0.6uA.

Output response time: <200mS.

Load: Max. (VPower supply - 10 V) / 0.020

Power supply: 12 to 36 V, internal protection against polarity inversion.

Figure 1

Page 1

### Terminal Connection

### Configuration

RTD

Voltage

Current

Figure 2. Terminal connections

Wiring Specification:

Screw tightening torque: 4.3 lb-in, Wire range: 12~30 AWG.

Wire strip length: 6~7mm

TT-1S1M transmitter is user configurable with the user-frendly TT Configurator software and URC-1020 interface cable. The lastest version can be download free from www.texmate.com.

The URC-1020 Interface cable consist of interface converter and USB plug. It can be purchased separately. During configuration the transmitter can work alone with or without connecting to a power source.

Wiring Precaution:

1. Always keep signal wires away from power or contactor wires.

2. The power supply of TT-1S1M should not be shared with contactors, electrical motor and other inductive devices.

The various input signals are divided into three groups.

1. TC/RTD/mV: Thermocouple type (J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C), Pt100 and voltage input in the range of -60mVdc~60mVdc.

2. Current: 0~24 mA.

3. Voltage: -10~10Vdc.

For the three different groups of input signal type, An internal DIP switch SW1 should be set according to the Table 2.

*Factory Setting

Table 2.

Internal DIP switch setting

### Installation

Mounting

### Operation

Removing

All the input signals and output current are calibrated within the specified accuracy at factory. Further custom input and output signal adjustment can be recalibrated with TT Configurator software.

Page 2

The Configurable parameters are:

1. Input signal type: Various input signal type can be selected among the available options.

2. Unit: Select the unit (C or F) of temperature measurement.

For linear input (voltage or current), it doesnt effect the measurement.

3. Measuring range: Defines the lowest and highest value of measuring range. Within the range, the transmitter will convert input signals into an scalable 4 to 20mA analogue output signal.

4. Output direction: Defines the scalable analogue output signal to be 4 to 20mA or 20 to 4mA.

5. Fault signal on sensor break: Defines the output signal to be (1) Downscale (<4mA).

(2) upscale (>20mA).

(3) Cut-off. Limit the output signal within the output range when the input is out of measuring range.

6. Offset Correction: Allows to eliminate the offset error of measuring value.

7. 4~20mA Output Signal Calibration: Zero and Span adjustment of output signal. A power source shoule be connected as Figure 6.

8. Measuring value: Read the measuring value from transmitter continually.

9. Device information: Indicate the device model, firmware version, series number and communication status.

### Acceessary

URC-1020 Interface cable

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate signal transmitter TT-2D2M manual d0005

## TT-2D2MM

## TT-2D2MC

## Microprocessor Based Programmable

## Isolated Dual Independent Channels

## Universal Signal Transmitter

Table 1

Output signal:

TT-2D2MM: Two analog output, 0/4~20mA or optional 0~10Vdc TT-2D2MC: One alalog output, 0/4~20mA or optional 0~10Vdc and one RS485

Output resolution: 0.6uA.

Output response time: <200mS.

Load: Max. (VPower supply - 10 V) / 0.020 Power supply: 18 to 36 V, internal protection against polarity inversion.

Communication: Modbus RS485 RTU protocol, 4800~38400 bps Common mode rejection ratio: >80dB.

Galvanic isolation: 2 KV 1min. between input and output Operating temperature: 0 to 55C Humidity: 0 to 90% RH Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): En 50081-2, En 50082-2 Housing material: ABS plastic. UL 94V0 Weight: 85g

CASE DIMENSIONS

Figure 1

TT-2D2MM and TT-2D2MC are the DIN rail mount user programmable Isolated dual independent channel universal signal converters. It accepts various input signals including mV, V, mA, PT100 and 9 different thermocouples. The measuring unit and range are also configurable with a user-friendly TT Configurator software.

### General Features

Two independent input channels for various inputt signals and measuring range.

Easy configuration without external power connected.

Dual channel Input:

Resistance thermometer (Pt100)

Thermocouple (J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C) Voltage/Current transmitter (mV/V/mA)

Dual analog output: 0/4 to 20mA or optional 0~10V.

RS485 comm. (TT-2D2MC): Modbus RTU protocol.

Fault signal on sensor break presettable.

Specifications

Input signal: User programmable. refer to table 1.

Thermocouple (T/C): Industry standard thermocouple

types, J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C (ITS-90).

Pt100: Excitation 180uA. 2 or 3 wire connection (ITS-90 =0.00385).

Voltage: -60mVdc to 60mVdc or -10Vdc to 10Vdc.

Current: 0mA to 24mA Measuring range: User programmable. Max. range see table 1.

Measuring accuracy: Refer to Table 1. The accuracy is tested under the operating condition of 24C3C.

Input sampling rate: 200mS.

Page 1

### Terminal Connection

### Configuration

Wiring Specification:

Screw tightening torque: 4.3 lb-in,

Wire range: 12~30 AWG.

Wire strip length: 6~7mm

Wiring Precaution:

The transmitter is user configurable with the user-frendly TT Configurator software and URC-1020 interface cable. The lastest version can be download free from www.texmate.com.

The URC-1020 Interface cable consist of interface converter and USB plug. It can be purchased separately. During configuration the transmitter can work alone with or without connecting to a power source.

Figure 6

1. Always keep signal wires away from power or contactor wires.

2. Transmitter's power supply should not be shared with

contactors, electrical motor and other inductive devices.

The various input signals are divided into three groups.

1. TC/RTD/mV: Thermocouple type (J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C),

The Configurable parameters are:

Figure 5

Pt100 and voltage input in the range of -60mVdc~60mVdc.

1. Input signal type: Various input signal type can be selected

2. Current: 0~24 mA.

3. Voltage: -10~10Vdc.

For the three different groups of input signal type, The SW1 and SW2 should be set according to the Table 2 for each channel separately. Open the cover o change the DIP switch setting.

*Factory setting

Table 2.

Internal DIP switch setting

### Installation

(1) Downscale (<4mA).

(2) upscale (>20mA).

among the available options.

2. Unit: Select the unit (C or F) of temperature. For linear input

(voltage or current), it doesnt effect the measurement.

3. Measuring range: Defines the lowest and highest value of

measuring range. Within the range, the transmitter will convert input signals into an scalable analogue output signal.

4. Output direction: Defines the scalable analogue

output signal to be 4 to 20mA or 20 to 4mA.

5. Fault signal on sensor break: Defines the output signal to be

(3) Cut-off. Limit the output signal within the output range when the input is out of measuring range.

6. Offset Correction: Allows to eliminate the offset error of

measuring value.

7. ID & Baud Rate: Set device ID and communication baud rate.

8. 0/4~20mA Output Signal Calibration: Zero and Span adjustment of output signal. A power source shoule be connected as Figure 6.

9. Measuring value: Read the measuring value of channel 1

(PV1), channel 2 (PV2) continually.

10. Device information: Indicate the device model, firmware version, series number and communication status. Figure 5.

### Acceessary

URC-1020 Interface cable

Mounting

### Communication

Removing

All the input signals and output current are calibrated within the specified accuracy at factory. Further Custom input and output signal adjustment can be recalibrated with TT Configurator software.

Page 2

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate signal transmitter TTM-2S2M manual d0006

Two independent input channels for various inputt

signals and measuring range.

Easy configuration without external power connected.

Dual channel Input:

Resistance thermometer (Pt100)

Thermocouple (J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C)

Voltage/Current transmitter (mV/V/mA)

Dual analog output: 0/4 to 20mA or optional 0~10V.

RS485 comm. (TT-2D2MC): Modbus RTU protocol.

Fault signal on sensor break presettable.

## TTM-2S2MM

## TTM-2S2MC

## Microprocessor Based Programmable

## Isolated Dual Independent Channels

## Universal Signal Transmitter

Table 1

Input sampling rate: 200mS.

Output signal:

TTM-2S2MM: Two analog output, 0/4~20mA or optional 0~10Vdc TTM-2S2MM: One alalog output, DC 0/4~20mA or optional 0~10Vdc and one RS485 Output resolution: 0.6uA.

Output response time: <200mS.

Power supply: 18 to 36 V, internal protection against polarity inversion.

Power Consumption: 2W max.

Communication: Modbus RS485 RTU protocol, 4800~38400 bps Galvanic isolation: 2 KV 1min. between input and output Operating temperature: 0 to 55C Humidity: 0 to 90% RH Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): En 50081-2, En 50082-2 Housing material: ABS plastic. UL 94V0 Weight: 85g

CASE DIMENSIONS

Figure 1

TTM-2S2MM and TTM-2S2MC are the DIN rail mount user programmable Isolated two channel universal signal converters.

It accepts various input signals including mV, V, mA, PT100 and 9 different thermocouples. The measuring unit and range are also configurable with a user-friendly TT Configurator software.

### General Features

Unique math function

A,B,C values adjustable via utility software.

Square root function may be switched ON or OFF.

Unique High/Low comparison output:

The output 1 will scale to Input 1 or input 2 whichever is higher/

lower than the other.

Programmable for various input signals, measuring range.

Easy configuration without external power connected.

Dual channel Input:

Resistance thermometer (Pt100)

Thermocouple (J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C) Voltage/Current transmitter (mV/V/mA)

Dual analog output: 0/4 to 20mA or optional 0~10V.

RS485 comm. (TTM-2S2MC): Modbus RTU protocol.

Fault signal on sensor break presettable.

Specifications

Input signal: User programmable. refer to table 1.

Thermocouple (T/C): industry standard thermocouple

types, J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C (ITS-90).

Pt100: Excitation 180uA. 2 or 3 wire connection (ITS-90 =0.00385).

Voltage: -60mVdc to 60mVdc or -10Vdc to 10Vdc.

Current: 0mA to 24mA Measuring range: User programmable. Max. range see table 1.

Measuring accuracy: refer to Table 1. the accuracy is tested under the operating condition of 24C3C.

Page 1

### Terminal Connection

Wiring Specification:

Screw tightening torque: 4.3 lb-in, Wire range: 12~30 AWG.

Wire strip length: 6~7mm

Wiring Precaution:

1. Always keep signal wires away from power or contactor wires.

2. Transmitter's power supply should not be shared with contactors, electrical motor and other inductive devices.

The various input signals are divided into three groups.

1. TC/RTD/mV: Thermocouple type (J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, C), Pt100 and voltage input in the range of -60mVdc~60mVdc.

2. Current: 0~24 mA.

3. Voltage: -10~10Vdc.

For the three different groups of input signal type, The SW1 and SW2 should be set according to the Table 2 for each channel separately. Open the cover o change the DIP switch setting.

*Factory setting

Table 2.

Internal DIP switch setting

### Installation

Mounting

Removing

### Acceessary

URC-1020 Interface cable

Page 2

Communication

Optional RS-485 interface is available for TTM-2S2MC model.

Custom input and output signal adjustment can be recalibrated with TT Configurator software.

### Configuration

The transmitter is user configurable with the user-frendly TT Configurator software and URC-1020 interface cable. The lastest version can be download free from www.texmate.com.

The URC-1020 Interface cable consist of interface converter and USB plug. Sold separately. During configuration the transmitter can work alone with or without connecting to a power source.

Figure 6

Figure 5

The Configurable parameters are:

1. Input signal type: Various input signal type can be selected

among the available options.

2. Unit: Select the unit (C or F) of temperature. For linear input

(voltage or current), it doesnt effect the measurement.

3. Measuring range: Defines the lowest and highest value of

measuring range. Within the range, the transmitter will convert input signals into an scalable analogue output signal.

4. Output direction: Defines the scalable analogue

output signal to be 4 to 20mA or 20 to 4mA.

5. Fault signal on sensor break: Defines the output signal to be

(1) Downscale (<4mA).

(2) Upscale (>20mA).

(3) Cut-off. Limit the output signal within the output range when the input is out of measuring range.

6. Offset Correction: Allows to eliminate the offset error of

measuring value.

7. ID & Baud Rate: Set device ID and communication baud rate.

8. Output Function: Select output 1 to be

(1) scale to channel 1 measuring value (PV1).

(2) Math function, which make it possible to be used as signal

addition/subtraction/division/square-root converter.

(3) High/Low comparison of PV1, PV2 the output 1 will scale to input 1 or input 2 whichever is higher/lower than the other.

9. 0/4~20mA Output Signal Calibration: Zero and Span adjustment of output signal. A power source shoule be connected as Figure 6.

10. Measuring value: Read the measuring value of channel 1

(Input 1), channel 2 (input2) continually.

11. Device information: Indicate the device model, firmware version, series number and communication status. Figure 5.

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

## Transducers

Industry First Plug and Play Transducers - TDX Series

## Plug and Play Transducers/Transmitters

- TDX series
  Transducers flyer
- TDX-ACA-PNP-PS1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TDX-ACV-PNP-PS1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec
- TDX-HZ-PNP-PS1
  Datasheet
  Features & Spec

## Input Modules

Input Signal Modules

## Input Signal Modules

- IA05
  Datasheet
- IA06
  Datasheet
- IA07
  Datasheet
- IA08
  Datasheet
- IA09
  Datasheet
- IA11
  Datasheet
- IA12
  Datasheet
- IA3V
  Datasheet
- IC02
  Datasheet
- IC03
  Datasheet
- ID01
  Datasheet
- ID02
  Datasheet
- ID03
  Datasheet
- ID04
  Datasheet
- ID05
  Datasheet
- ID06
  Datasheet
- ID07
  Datasheet
- ID08
  Datasheet
- ID09
  Datasheet
- IDC1
  Datasheet
- IDD1
  Datasheet
- IDD2
  Datasheet
- IDD3
  Datasheet
- IDD4
  Datasheet
- IDD5
  Datasheet
- IDD6
  Datasheet
- IDD9
  Datasheet
- IDF2
  Datasheet
- IDP1
  Datasheet
- IDP2
  Datasheet
- IDP3
  Datasheet
- IDP4
  Datasheet
- IDS3
  Datasheet
- IDT1
  Datasheet
- IDT2
  Datasheet
- IDT3
  Datasheet
- IDT4
  Datasheet
- IDT6
  Datasheet
- IF02
  Datasheet
- IF05
  Datasheet
- IF06
  Datasheet
- IF10
  Datasheet
- IGYX
  Datasheet
- IGYY
  Datasheet
- IGYZ
  Datasheet
- IH01
  Datasheet
- IH02
  Datasheet
- IP01
  Datasheet
- IP02
  Datasheet
- IP03
  Datasheet
- IP06
  Datasheet
- IP07
  Datasheet
- IP08
  Datasheet
- IP09
  Datasheet
- IP10
  Datasheet
- IPT1
  Datasheet
- IQD1
  Datasheet
- IQD2
  Datasheet
- IQP1
  Datasheet
- IQT2
  Datasheet
- IQT4
  Datasheet
- IQT5
  Datasheet
- IR01
  Datasheet
- IR02
  Datasheet
- IR03
  Datasheet
- IR04
  Datasheet
- IR05
  Datasheet
- IS01
  Datasheet
- IS02
  Datasheet
- IS03
  Datasheet
- IS04
  Datasheet
- IS05
  Datasheet
- IS06
  Datasheet
- ISD1
  Datasheet
- ISD2
  Datasheet
- ISD3
  Datasheet
- ISD4
  Datasheet
- ISD5
  Datasheet
- ISD6
  Datasheet
- ISD7
  Datasheet
- ISD8
  Datasheet
- ISD9
  Datasheet
- ISDA
  Datasheet
- ISDB
  Datasheet
- ISL1
  Datasheet
- ISL2
  Datasheet
- ISM1
  Datasheet
- ISR1
  Datasheet
- ISR2
  Datasheet
- ISR3
  Datasheet
- ISR4
  Datasheet
- ISS1
  Datasheet
- ISS2
  Datasheet
- ISS3
  Datasheet
- ISS4
  Datasheet
- ISS5
  Datasheet
- ISS6
  Datasheet
- ISS7
  Datasheet
- ISS8
  Datasheet
- ISS9
  Datasheet
- ISSA
  Datasheet
- ISSB
  Datasheet
- ISSC
  Datasheet
- ISSD
  Datasheet
- IST1
  Datasheet
- IST2
  Datasheet
- IST3
  Datasheet
- IST4
  Datasheet
- IST5
  Datasheet
- IST6
  Datasheet
- IST7
  Datasheet
- IST8
  Datasheet
- IT01
  Datasheet
- IT02
  Datasheet
- IT03
  Datasheet
- IT04
  Datasheet
- IT05
  Datasheet
- IT06
  Datasheet
- IT07
  Datasheet
- IT08
  Datasheet
- IT09
  Datasheet
- IT10
  Datasheet
- IT11
  Datasheet
- IT12
  Datasheet
- IT13
  Datasheet
- IT14
  Datasheet
- ITD1
  Datasheet
- ITD2
  Datasheet
- ITP1
  Datasheet
- ITT1
  Datasheet
- ITT2
  Datasheet
- ITT3
  Datasheet
- ITT4
  Datasheet
- ITT7
  Datasheet
- ITT8
  Datasheet
- ITTC
  Datasheet
- ITTE
  Datasheet
- ITTF
  Datasheet
- ITTG
  Datasheet
- IW03
  Datasheet
- IW04
  Datasheet
- IW05
  Datasheet

### Texmate IA06

# AC VOLTS TRUE RMS 200/600 V

Fits Lynx, Leopard & Tiger 320 Series

Voltage Input.

Differential Voltage Divider.

Safe operation for connection to high voltages.

Header.

Selectable 200 V or 600 V input range.

Texmate Proprietary Designed

RMS-to-DC Convertor.

High accuracy, extremely linear.

Span Potentiometer.

Fine full scale adjustment.

State-of-the-Art

Electromagnetic Noise Suppression.

Circuitry ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Interface to Texmate's full range of modular panel meters.

True RMS voltage measurements for the AC power industry.

The IA06 true RMS input module provides unprecedented linearity over a choice of 200 or 600 volt RMS ranges utilizing the Texmate designed RMS-to-DC convertor circuit block. True differential input and high input impedance 2M improved RFI/EMI rejection and protection at high input voltages. High linearity means simple system calibration.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IA06

Hardware Module Specifications

200 V or 600 V RMS, header selectable 0.02 % linearity over full scale.

0 to 6 KHz, independent of input voltage.

1 mV RMS over full scale input.

Some Relevant Operating System Features

IA06 Data Sheet (NZ326)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

Figure 1 IA06 Input Module Component La yout

### Description

The AC volts true RMS input module is a universal module designed to function with the Lynx, Leopard, and Tiger range of indicators, meter relays, and programmable meter controllers (PMCs). Commonly used in the 0 to 200 V range, a 0 to 200/600 V range header provides the option to go to a higher v oltage.

The IA06 has a diff erential input with common mode filter ing and a v oltage divider to atten uate the high input v oltage to safe levels.

Zero input voltage produces a 0 output signal, meaning no z ero adjustment is necessar y.

Tiger Controllers and Leopard Meter Relays The Tiger and Leopard r ange use inter nal software functions to calibr ate the span. However, it may be necessar y to adjust the sp an potentiometer to bring the maximum input signal within the full scale r ange of the instrument.

When the input signal is be yond the full scale r ange of a Tiger controller, the display flashes [OVER]. When the input signal is be yond the full scale, the top range of a Leopard meter segment of each digit of the displa y flashes.

Figure 2 Span Potentiometer Adjustment

Turn the 15 tur n span potentiometer counter-clockwise to decrease the signal until a reading appears on the display (See Figure 2). Now calibrate the instr ument using the softw are calibration method f or y our instr ument.

Figure 3 Span Pot

Lynx Indicators

The span potentiometer is the only means of calibr ating Lynx indicators. When the input signal is beyond the full scale range of a Lynx indicator, a 1 is displayed in the most significant digit

(MSD) with all other digits b lank. Turn the 15 tur n span potentiometer counter-clockwise to decrease the signal until a reading appears on the display (See Figure 2).

Span Potentiometer (Pot)

The 15 tur n span potentiometer is located on the r side of the input module (when vie wed from the rear of the meter). Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal r (See Figure 3).

ight-hand

ange

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IA06 Data Sheet (NZ326)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IA09

# AC AMPS TRUE RMS 1 OR 5 AMP MODULE

Fits Lynx Leopard & Tiger 320 Series

Input

Connected to Isolated

Current Transformer.

High Precision 1 or 5 Amp Shunt Resistor.

Improved linearity.

Span Potentiometer.

Provides precise full scale adjustment.

Span Adjust Header.

Provides fine full scale range adjustment.

Span Range Header.

Provides Coarse

range adjustment.

State-of-the-Art

Electromagnetic Noise Suppression.

Circuitry ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Active Bandpass Filter.

0.2 Hz to 10 kHz bandwidth.

Texmate Patented

RMS-to-DC Converter.

High accuracy, extremely linear.

Interface to

Lynx, Leopard and Tiger Families

At last, the answer to precise and repeatable RMS current measurements for the AC power industry.

This revolutionary module utilizes the Texmate designed RMS-to-DC convertor circuit block. This circuit block provides true RMS measurements over a wide range of isolated input currents while maintaining excellent linearity up to a 10 kHz waveform frequency.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IA09 (1 Amp)

IA11 (5 Amp)

Current Range (Isolated)

Frequency Range

Resolution

Accuracy

Lynx

Leopard

Tiger

Output Signal

Forced Zero

Meter Interface

Span Drift

Hardware Module Specifications

IA09: 0-1 A AC, IA11: 0-5 A AC. 0.02 % linearity on both.

0.2 Hz to 10 KHz (3 dB).

1 mA over full scale input.

0.03 % of full scale input 2 digit.

0.05 % of full scale input 2 digit.

0.02 % of full scale input 1 digit.

Adjustable to 2 V full scale using on-board trimmer and header selections.

Forces output to 0000 if below 1 % of full scale.

Can be utilized in the Lynx, Leopard, and Tiger range of indicators, meter relays, and controllers. 500 ppm /C of full scale maximum.

Some Relevant Operating System Features

Direct display of true RMS current.

Setpoint control (Tiger & Leopard).

Full scale calibration accurate for any sized signal.

IA09-11 Data Sheet (NZ339)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

### Introduction

Note:

The IA09 and IA11 input module has been designed for use with an isolating current transformer (CT).

IA11 wired to monitor RMS amps usage on a resistive load connected to a single phase mains supply

Figure 1 IA09/IA11 Input Module Component La yout

The AC amps true RMS input module is a universal module designed to function with the Lynx, Leopard, and Tiger r ange of indicators, meter rela ys, and prog rammable meter controllers (PMCs).

IA09 has a 1 amp high-precision shunt resistor installed f or an isolated current r ange of 0 to 1 amp, while IA11 has a 5 amp high-precision shunt resistor installed for an isolated current range of 0 to 5 amps. A span potentiometer, span adjust header, and a span r ange header are used to adjust the input signal full scale. A zero input current produces a 0 V output signal, meaning no zero adjustment is necessar y.

Tiger Controllers and Leopard Meter Relays The Tiger and Leopard range use internal software functions to calibrate the span. However, it may be necessar y to adjust the span potentiometer to br ing the maxim um input signal within the full scale range of the instrument.

When the input signal is be yond the full scale range of a Tiger controller, the display flashes [OVER].

When the input signal is be yond the full scale r ange of a Leopard meter, the top segment of each digit of the display flashes.

Figure 2 Span Potentiometer Adjustment

With the span range header set to HI and the span adjust header set to 100%, turn the 15 turn span potentiometer counter-clockwise to decrease the signal until a reading appears on the display (See Figure 2). Now calibrate the instrument using the software calibration method for your instrument.

Lynx Indicators

Calibration settings on all L ynx indicators are carr ied out using the b uilt-in headers and span potentiometer. The 15 turn span potentiometer has an approximate span adjustment of 20% of the full scale signal. Together, the span range header and the span adjust header e xpand the range of the span potentiometer into 10 equal adjustab le portions, each por tion being 10% of the full scale range.

When the input signal is be yond the full scale r ange of a Lynx indicator, a 1 is displayed in the most significant digit with all other digits b lank.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IA09-11 Data Sheet (NZ339)

### Header Descriptions

Span Potentiometer (Pot)

The 15 tur n span potentiometer is located on the r side of the input module (when vie wed from the rear of the meter). Typical adjustment is 20% of the input signal r (See Figure 3).

ight-hand

ange

Figure 3 Span Pot

Span Adjust Header

This unique fiv e-position header e xpands the adjustment r ange of the span potentiometer into fiv e equal 20% sectors, across 100% of the input signal span. Any input signal span can then be precisely scaled do wn to provide any required display span from full scale to the smallest viewable unit (See Figures 4 and 5).

Figure 4 Span Adjust Header

Figure 5 Span Adjust Header Operation

Span Range Header

The span r ange header w orks together with the span adjust header b y splitting its adjustment r ange into a high and a low range. This has the eff ect of dividing the adjustment r ange of the span potentiometer into ten equal 10% sectors across 100% of the input signal span (See Figures 6 and 7).

Figure 6 Span Rang e Header

Figure 7 Span Rang e Header Operation

IA09-11 Data Sheet (NZ339)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Lynx Indicator Calibration Setup To successfully calibrate a Lynx indicator over the input signal span with an IA09 or IA11 input module installed, the headers must be correctly set and the span pot adjusted to the final displa y setting.

Example

With an IA11 input module installed in a DX-35 L ynx indicator, we want to show a digital representation of a 5 A input signal o n the display. As the DX-35 has a maximum of 1999 counts, 5 A could easily be shown to two decimal places by setting the span setting to

500 counts.

To configure the input module to sho w 500 counts for an isolated input signal of 5 A, proceed as f ollows:

1) The first adjustment to mak e is the coarse r ange setting. Set the span range header to the LO W position (See Figure 8).

This effectively halves the maximum counts of the DX-35 from 1999 to

1000 (+ or 20% of 1999.This could be as much as 400 counts).

2) The next adjustment is the fine r ange setting. Set the span adjust header to the 40% position (See Figure 9).

This position should lea ve you with a display setting lower than 500 counts.

By how much, depends on the position of the span pot.

3) The final adjustment can no w be made

using the span pot (See Figure 10).

As the display reading is below the required setting of 500 counts, tur n the span pot clockwise to increase the counts until the display shows a reading of 500 counts.

Figure 8 Span Rang e Header

Adjustment

Figure 9 Span Adjust Header

Figure 10 Span Pot Adjustment

Adjustment

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IA09-11 Data Sheet (NZ339)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IC02-3

# Fits Tiger 320 Series

# QUADRATURE ENCODER SMART INPUT MODULE QUADRATURE ENCODER SMART INPUT MODULE

3 Independent

Counter Inputs, A, B & C.

Separate excitation

voltages.

Input Header.

Header selectable.

mV, TTL and open-collector transistor options.

Debounce Header.

1 KHz low-pass filter.

2 Independent Frequency

Inputs, A and B.

Interface to Tiger Meter

Dual SSR Outputs.

High speed setpoint switching.

On-board Digital Signal Processor.

Varied and versatile counter configurations.

The total solution to incremental shaft encoder control

With this module you can not only sense position and direction of rotation, but the additional third channel can be used as the zero signal for precise determination of reference position. A variety of interface options and excitation voltages are provided to satisfy all user requirements including multiple counter inputs, a choice of two frequency channels and many interactive modes. When interfaced to the Tiger

320 Series operating system, these powerful software features provide the solution to all your counting needs in process control applications.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IC02 (No SSR)

IC03 (with 2 SSRs)

Counter Inputs

Input Header

Excitation Voltage

SSRs

Debounce Header

Quadrature Mode

A, B Modes

C Mode

SSR Switching

Frequency Option

Hardware Module Specifications

Software Module Features

Choice of x1, x2 and x4 modes for increased resolution.

A & B independent counter inputs arranged in various combinations.

C counter control to capture, reset to predetermined counts, zero and/or restart A & B counters.

Independent fast >1 ms setpoint switching of each SSR using counter selected from smart output register.

Can be NO or NC relay outputs.

100 kHz on A input, 500 kHz on B input.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

Dual Rate (Frequency) 0n A and B.

Setpoint Timer Functions.

Setpoint Register Reset and Trigger Functions.

Macro Compiler for PLC Functions.

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

### Detailed Description

Figure 1 IC03 Smar t Input Module Wired to a Quadrature Encoder

Smart Setup Registers

The meter has three smart setup registers to configure smart input modules. Smart input module IC02 requires only smart register

1 to be set up, while IC03 requires smart registers 1 and 2 to be set up. Figure 2 sho ws the functions of quadr ature smar t input modules IC02 and IC03 with input signals from a standard quadr ature encoder.

IC02 & IC03

Signal A

Signal B

Signal C

IC03 Only

Figure 2 IC02 & IC03 Quadrature Smar t Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

Smart Register 1

Smart register 1 allows you to select either the quadrature, combined, or independent counting mode for input signals A and B. Input signal C is the control mode for input signals A and B to capture, gate, zero, reset, or start the counters and is also selected through smart register 1. Input signal C can also be set as an independent counter without control o ver input signals A and B.

The resultant count produced by each mode is stored in the smar t register output map in pr imary, secondary, capture or gate counters. Any of the counters can be tr ansferred to Channel 1 via Code 2, to Channel 2 via Code 4, to Channel 3 via Code 5, and to Channel 4 via Code 6.

Smart Register 2 (IC03 Only) Smart register 2 allows you to select the setpoint control settings of smar t relay 1 (SR1) and smar t relay 2 (SR2) using either the primary, secondary, capture, or gate counters of the smar t register 2 output map. All other settings f or SR1 are configured via setpoint 5 and for SR2 via setpoint 6 in the meter s setpoint programming mode.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Counter Functions

Counter inputs A, B, and C can be portrayed as a train of pulses having a rising edge ( ) between a low and high signal level. Depending on the counter function selected, these inputs may vary in phase to each other. In the case of a shaft encoder, the A signal lags the B signal by 90 and the primary counter decrements when the shaft is rotated clockwise. To change the direction of rotation to countercloc kwise, reverse the A and B signal inputs at the connector (see Figure 1). The C signal occurs once per revolution.

) and falling edge (

See Figure 3.

Table 1 Counter Modes Switching Speeds

Figure 3 Counter Input Signals

Max. Frequency for A, B & C Inputs

### A and B Signal Functions

Table 1 lists the counter functions a vailable and the maximum input frequency for each mode.

Quadrature Modes

The quadrature modes are shown for a shaft encoder as an example. Depending on the direction of rotation, the A signal leads or lags the B signal.

Using the same shaft encoder, the angular / linear resolution of the x1 Mode can be increased b y 2 using the x2 Mode, or by 4 using the x4 Mode.

x1 Mode

This is the most commonly used counter function and oper ates as follows:

See Figures 4 and 5.

Direction of rotation: Clockwise

The primary counter decrements on a rising ) A signal when B is low.

edge (

Direction of rotation: Counterclockwise

The primary counter increments on a falling ) A signal when B is low.

edge (

Figure 4 x1 Mode: Primary Counter

Decrements

Figure 5 x1 Mode: Primary Counter

Increments

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

x2 Mode

The x2 mode operates as follows:

See Figures 6 and 7.

Direction of rotation: Clockwise

The primary counter decrements on a rising ) A signal when B is low.

The primary counter decrements on a

edge (

falling edge (

) A signal when B is high.

Figure 6 x2 Mode: Primary Counter

Decrements

x4 Mode

The x4 mode operates as follows:

See Figures 8 and 9.

edge (

Direction of rotation: Clockwise

The primary counter decrements on a rising ) A signal when B is low.

The primary counter decrements on a rising ) B signal when A is high.

The primary counter decrements on a falling ) A signal when B is high.

The primary counter decrements on a falling ) B signal when A is low.

edge (

edge (

edge (

Figure 8 x4 Mode: Primary Counter

Decrements

A+B Signal Count Mode (Anticoincident)

There is no fix ed relationship betw een A and B. Signal A increments the pr imary counter on every rising edge. Signal B increments the primary counter on every rising edge.

The A+B signal count mode oper ates as follows:

See Figure 10.

The primary counter increments on a rising edge (

The primary counter increments on a rising edge (

) A signal.

) B signal.

Direction of rotation: Counterclockwise

The primary counter increments on a rising ) A signal when B is high.

The primary counter increments on a falling ) A signal when B is low.

edge (

edge(

Figure 7 x2 Mode: Primary Counter

Increments

edge (

Direction of rotation: Counterclockwise

The primary counter increments on a rising ) A signal when B is high.

The primary counter increments on a rising ) B signal when A is low.

The primary counter increments on a falling ) A signal when B is low.

The primary counter increments on a falling ) B signal when A is high.

edge (

edge (

edge (

Figure 9 x4 Mode: Primary Counter

Increments

Figure 10 A+B Signal Count Mode:

Primary Counter Increments

Application:

You may have two production lines in a factory with a sensor on each line. By adding the totals of each counter you can determine the total output of the f actory.

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

AB Signal Count Mode (Anticoincident)

The A and B signals are link ed in a phase relationship. Signal A increments the pr imary counter on e very rising edge, while signal B decrements the primary counter on every rising edge.

The AB signal count mode operates as follows:

See Figure 11.

The primary counter increments on a rising edge (

The primary counter decrements on a rising edge (

) A signal.

) B signal.

Application:

This mode is useful when the diff erence betw een tw o counts is required. For example, a carpark building where the A signal represents an incoming car and the B signal represents an outgoing car. A minus B lets you know how many cars are in the building at any one time.

Figure 11 AB Signal Count Mode: Primary

Counter Increments/Decrements

A&B Independent Mode (Anticoincident) There is no fixed relationship between signals A and B. Signal A increments the primary counter on every rising edge. Signal B increments the secondary counter on every rising edge.

The A&B independent mode operates as follows:

See Figure 12.

The primary counter increments on a rising edge (

) A

signal.

The secondary counter increments on a rising edge (

B signal.

Application:

This mode is useful for dual counting systems.

Figure 12 A&B Independent Mode: Primary Counter Increments, Secondary Counter Increments

A Count, B Direction Mode The A and B signals are link ed in a phase relationship. Signal A increments the pr imary counter on every rising edge when signal B is low. Signal A also decrements the pr imary counter on every rising edge when signal B is high.

The A count, B direction mode oper ates as follows:

See Figures 13 and 14.

The primary counter increments on a rising edge ( ) A signal when B is low.

Figure 13 A Count, B Direction Mode: Primary Counter

Increments

The primary counter decrements on a rising edge ( ) A signal when B is high.

Figure 14 A Count, B Direction Mode: Primary Counter

Decrements

Application:

Some positional encoders have this type of output instead of a quadr ature output.

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

C Signal Functions

C signal functions operate with the A and B signal functions and influence the pr imary and secondary gate and capture counters.

Capture A, B Mode The capture A, B mode provides a snapshot of the pr imary and secondary counters. It is a straight transfer of the values from the primary and secondary counters to primary and secondary capture.

See Figure 15.

Note:

The primary and secondary counters are not affected by the operation and no counts are lost.

The primary counter value is loaded into primary capture on a falling edge (

) C signal.

The secondary counter value is loaded into secondary capture ) C signal. on a falling edge (

Application:

This mode is useful to capture positional inf ormation in relation to an e xternal event. To track if an y errors occur, the positi onal information could be used as a ref erence that the encoder can be compared against.

Figure 15 Capture A, B Mode

Gate Count A, B In this mode the primary and secondary gate counters are updated with the number of pulses that occur in the primary (A signal) and secondary (B signal) counters respectively between consecutive falling edge C signal pulses. The primary and secondary counters are not reset and continue to count after each update of the gate counters. The gate count A, B mode oper ates as follows:

See Figure 16.

The value in the primary counter on the pre vious falling edge (

) C signal is subtracted from the v alue in the primary counter on the ) C signal and loaded into the primary gate counter. The primary counter continues to count up and is not

most recent falling edge ( reset after each event.

The value in the secondary counter on the previous falling edge (

) C signal is subtracted from the value in the secondary counter on ) C signal and loaded into the secondary gate counter. The secondary counter continues to count up

the most recent falling edge ( and is not reset after each e vent.

Note:

The gate secondary counter is only updated in the A & B independent mode.

Application:

This mode is

useful to capture

rate inf ormation

in relation to an external e vent.

For e xample, you may want to know ho w m uch product was produced per shift.

At the star t of the shift, the

operator could

set a s witch and reset it at the end of the shift.

The resultant

gate counter

would let y ou know ho w m uch was produced

during that shift.

Figure 16 Snapshot of Gate Count A, B Mode: Primary Counter

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Gate Count & Reset A, B Mode In this mode the pr imary and secondary gate counters are again updated with the n umber of pulses that occur in the pr imary (A signal) and secondar y (B signal) counters respectiv ely between consecutive falling edge C signal pulses. But, in this case, the pr imary and secondary counters are reset after each update of the gate counters. The gate count & reset mode oper ates as follows:

See Figure 17.

The value in the primary counter on the pre vious falling edge (

) C signal is subtracted from the v alue in the primary counter on the ) C signal and loaded into the primary gate counter. The primary counter stops counting after each f alling

most recent falling edge ( edge C signal event and is reset to 0.

The value in the secondary counter on the previous falling edge (

) C signal is subtracted from the value in the secondary counter on ) C signal and loaded into the secondary gate counter. The secondary counter stops counting after each

the most recent falling edge ( falling edge C signal event and is reset to 0.

Figure 17 Snapshot of Gate Count & Reset Mode

Reset to Offset & Star t A, B Mode

In this mode the primary and secondary counters are reset to the value stored in the meters primary and secondary reset offset registers (registers 121 and 122 respectively). Primary and secondary counters continue counting after being reset to the reset offset values.

The reset to offset & star t A, B mode operates as follows:

See Figure 18.

The pr imary and secondar y counrising

ters begin counting on a edge (

) C signal.

On a falling edge (

) C signal the

primary counter is reset to the value stored in the primary reset offset register (121), and the secondary counter reset to the v alue stored in the secondary reset offset register (122).

Figure 18 Reset to Offset & Star t Mode

The default setting of the pr imary and secondary reset offset registers is 0. To change the value stored in these registers:

Connect the meter to a PC r unning a terminal program.

Start the terminal program.

Access register 121 and change the offset to the required v alue.

Access register 122 and change the offset to the required v alue.

See Registers Supplement (NZ209), Registers 121 and 122 Reset Offset Registers, for a detailed description of the reset offset registers.

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

Application:

This mode is useful f or when an e xternal reset is required. For example, A pushbutton on the C input can be used to reset to 0, or forward the counter to a kno wn count. The counter starts again when the button is released.

C Count Mode

In this mode the primary counter increments on a rising edge (

) C signal only.

See Figure 19.

Application:

This mode is useful for multi-input systems.

Figure 19 C Count Mode

Reset to Offset A, B Mode In this mode the primary and secondary counters are also reset to the value stored in the meters primary and secondary reset offset registers (registers 121 and 122 respectiv ely). But, in this mode, the pr imary and secondar y counters contin ue counting after be ing reset to the reset offset v alues.

See Figure 20.

The reset to offset A, B mode oper ates as follows:

On a falling edge (

) C signal the primary counter is reset to the value stored in the primary reset offset register (121), and the secondary counter reset to the value stored in the secondary reset offset register (122).

The pr imary and secondar y counters contin ue to count on

being reset.

Application:

This mode is useful for setting a position to a known reference position. For example, a microswitch can be positioned at home and used as an input to C on a milling tab le. Now every time the home position is encountered, the counter is set to a kno wn position.

Figure 20 Reset to Offset A, B Mode

### Programming Quick Start Guide

## Programming Procedures

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note the register map is different for each smar t input module type.

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of the IC02/IC03 input module.

Using the

and the function for the C input.

buttons, select the function f or the A & B inputs

Note, see Detailed Description on P description of A, B, and C counter functions.

age 3 f or a

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

Press the

button 3 times to enter Code 5. Set Code 5 to [X77].

Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup menu.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 2 of the IC02/IC03 input module.

Note the register map is diff erent for each smart input module type.

Select the setpoint source for switching from the smart output registers for SP5 in the 3rd digit and SP6 in the 2nd digit, and the operating mode of the solid state relays SR1 and SR2 in the 1st digit.

Press the

button to save the settings.

The display toggles between [Cod_5] and [X77].

Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to 0 to lea ve the smart register 2 menu.

Press the

and

button at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note the register

map is diff erent for each smar t input module type.

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9

Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

If required enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings for CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Note the register map is different for each smart input module type.

Note, to measure frequenc y on A and B inputs select the appropriate options in Code 2 and Code 4 respectively.

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

Page 10

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

to Length Controller

perates an automatic cut-to-len gth guillotine. A

Texmate 320 Ser ies prog rammable meter controller has been installed and prog rammed to measure length from an encoder input. Setpoint 1 is prog rammed to oper ate at the required cutoff length. A clutch and a clamp oper ate to stop the metal f eed motor.

After a prog rammed OFF-time, (to enab le the guillotine to complete its cut cycle) the displayed length is reset to 0.

The clamp releases, the clutch engages commences feeding, repeating the process. At each cut-off, 1 is added to a totalizer. (Viewed by pressing the UP button.)

, and the metal

CUT TO LENGTH CONTROLLER

OPERATIONAL DISPLAY

displays length

Encoder

Start/Stop

Press Control

Feed

Motor

APPLICATION VARIATIONS

A total number of cuts can be programmed to SHUT OFF

the guillotine at the required total.

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 11

Example Quadrature Encoder with Setpoint Contr ol Setup Procedure Our customer operates a steel punch and wishes to automate the process using a rotar y encoder. Texmate installed a Tiger 320 Series DI-50 meter with an IC03 quadr ature encoder smart input module.

The encoder is used to set the length of steel plate being punched. The metal punch is activated using the modules smart relay output SR1.

The primary counter is read b y channel 1 and configured in the x1 quadr ature mode. This setting provides 1 to 1 encoder resolution. Setpoint 5 is configured to activ ate SR1 from the pr imary counter.

1 Select the encoder resolution quadrature x1 for the A & B counter functions in the 3rd digit, and no function for the C counter function in the 2nd digit:

select X77

then press

button.

Display toggles between

Set

2 Select the primary counter for CH1:

select X70

Set setpoint 5 (SP5) sour ce to the primar y counter with SR1 switch closure set to normally open (NO):

select X77

then press

button.

Display toggles between

Set

Note, in the quadrature mode the primar y counter is always used to output positional count and direction of rotation.

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 12

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IC02-3 Data Sheet (NZ329)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IF05

## Fits the Leopard Family

## FREQ./RPM INPUT MODULE WITH 24 V EXC.

Low-pass Filter Header.

20 kHz, 2 kHz, 200 Hz.

Switching Comparator.

Prevents false triggering.

Input Connector.

Freq. Input.

24 V Excitation.

Sensor Header.

Mag, Namur, Source, Sink.

De-coupling Header.

20 mHz high pass filter.

Interface to

Leopard Meter.

Signal Type Header.

AC, mV or digital logic.

Your first choice frequency/rpm input module.

Should your transducer be a magnetic pick-up outputting small AC volts or an open-collector transistor switching voltage levels, the IF05 is easily connected with a selection of configuration headers. These headers provide a variety of options to interface to time varying or change-of-state signals.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Signal Input

Hardware Module Specifications

0-24 V DC, 0-30 V AC.

IF05

Low-pass Filter Header

Off, 200 Hz, 2 kHz, 20 kHz cut off frequency.

BL-40F

BL-40RPM

DL-40F

DL-40RPM

De-coupling Header

DC component removed by 0.02 Hz high-pass filter.

Sensor Header

Optional sink / source for digital transistor or switch interface; specific Namur 2-wire proximity detector option; magnetic pick-up (AC) choice.

Signal Type Header

Choice of DC (logic) or AC signal type.

Frequency Response

Set by Leopard meter configuration software.

Display to 9999 counts.

Excitation Voltage

24 V DC (50 mA maximum) to power external transducers.

Maximum Input Frequency 20 kHz.

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts &

### Module Layout

Figure 1 IF05 Frequency/RPM Input Module

### Detailed Description

The IF05 is a frequency/RPM input module designed specifically f Leopard family range. The IF05 input module receiv es and conditions a frequency input via pin 1 and supplies the input to the me ter for further processing. Selectable on-board headers provide configuration settings allowing different sensor types to be selected along with high and low-pass filtering.

or BL-40F, BL-40RPM, DL-40F, and DL-40RPM meters in the

Figure 2 IF05 Frequency/RPM Input Module Signal Flow Diagram

### Interface Configuration

### Examples

The following example diagrams show the various header settings and input connections required f or a range of input sensor type s.

Example 1 NPN Open-collector Output with Pr oximity Switch Figure 3 shows a 3-wire proximity switch taking +24 V excitation from the meter with an NPN open-collector signal output connec ted to the input module as frequency with no filter ing.

The input header is set to SINK connecting the signal output to +24 V via an on-board 10 k pull-up resistor. As the proximity switch is activated, the signal is forced to ground.

Figure 3 3-wire Proximity Switch

with NPN Open-collector Output

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

Example 2 PNP Open-collector Output with Pr oximity Switch Figure 4 shows a 3-wire proximity switch taking +24 V excitation from the meter with a PNP open-collector signal output connect ed to the input module as frequency with no lo w-pass filtering.

The input header is set to SOURCE connecting the input signal to a 10 k pull-do wn resistor to g round. When the proximity switch is activated, the input signal switches from 0 V to +24 V.

Figure 4 3-wire Proximity Switch with PNP Open-collector Output

Example 3 Hall Effect / Magnetic Pickup mV Input Figure 5 shows a magnetic pickup. With small AC signals a shielded cable should be used to a void stray pickup.

Figure 5 Hall Effect / Magnetic Pickup mV Input

Example 4 TTL Input Figure 6 shows a TTL input. The TTL input requires the sensor header to be placed in the SINK position. In this example the TTL logic has a separate +5 V supply.

Figure 6 TTL Input

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Example 5 Digital Input with DC Voltage Offset Figure 7 shows a digital input with voltage offset. In this situation the DC component of the signal is removed by selecting the AC option on the decoupling header. The digital input has its o wn supply voltage.

Figure 7 Digital Input with DC Component

Example 6 Pushbutton Switch Figure 8 shows a pushbutton switch. The low-pass filter header is set to 200 Hz to debounce mechanical contacts. The sensor header is set to SINK to pull-up the input signal to +24 V until it is switched to ground when the pushbutton is pressed.

Figure 8 Pushbutton Switch

Example 7 NAMUR Sensor Figure 9 shows a NAMUR 2-wire pro ximity detector. Set the sensor header to NAMUR to ensure the detector has the correct output load (2 k pull-down resistor) and to protect the sensor at +24 V excitation voltage. The current output of these detectors v ary in response to the proximity of the target metal.

Figure 9 NAMUR Sensor

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

Example 8 Tacho-generator Sensor Figure 10 shows a tacho-generator. Set the sensor header to SOURCE to ensure the detector has the correct output load (2 k pulldown resistor) and to protect the sensor at +24 V excitation voltage.

Figure 10 Tacho-generator Sensor

Setting Up IF05 for BL-40F and DL-40F Frequency

Meters

To set up the IF05 input module f or frequency input in a Leopard BL-40F or DL-40F frequency meter, carry out the following procedures:

Step 1

Establish the scale factor for the desired display reading

Maximum Display Range

Input Frequency

x Required Display Reading

= Scale Factor

Step 2

Set the new scale factor

Step 3

Select the range for the desired display reading

Step 4

Select the decimal point position

Frequency Meter

Calibrated

Step 1 Establish the Scale Factor Establish the scale f actor for the desired displa y reading. The default scale factor is 9999. If you want the scale f actor to be anything other than the input frequency or m ultiples of 10 of the input frequency, then a new scale factor must be established and set.

For example:

If we had an input frequency of 4 Hz and required a displa y reading of 400 counts, then the scale factor would not change from 9999.

But, if we had an input frequency of 4 Hz and required a displa y reading of 120 counts, then the scale f actor would be 2999. To establish a new scale factor, carry out the following calculation:

Maximum Display Range

(Default Scale Factor)

Input Frequency

Required Display Reading = Scale Factor

Example:

9999

x 120 = 2999

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

Step 2 Set the Ne w Scale Factor If the scale factor has to change, enter the meter calibration mode and set the new scale factor. See Figure 11 Calibration Logic Diagram.

Step 3 Select the Rang e for the Desired Display Reading The range multiplier and the decimal point position settings allo w you to set the the display resolution to suit the desired di splay reading. The range multiplier allows you to display the reading using either a x1, x10, or x100 range setting. For example, if you had a 4 Hz frequency input and wanted it to display as 400, you would choose the x100 range multiplier.

But, what if you had a 4 Hz input and wanted it to display as 120. First you would need to establish and set the new scale factor. Then you apply the same pr inciple as you would for 4 Hz to displa y 400 counts. 4 Hz is a single digit n umber and you require it to be displayed as 120 counts. 120 counts is a 3-digit number, so you effectively apply the x100 range multiplier, but because of the new scale factor, instead of displaying as 400 it is displa yed as 120.

Table 1 shows how to use the range multiplier for a range of frequency inputs where the scale factor has not been changed. If the scale factor is changed, the number of digits shown depends on the range multiplier chosen.

Note, the decimal point sho wn on the displa y at this point is not the setting f or the decimal point, but merely a means of displa ying the range multiplier setting.

Table 1 Range Multiplier Settings

Input

4 Hz

50 Hz

600 Hz

Multiplier

Display As

Meter Range Setting

x10

x100

x10

x100

x10

x100

400

500

5000

600

6000

*60000

### 9 9 9 9

### 9 9 9 . 9

### 9 9 . 9 9

### 9 9 9 9

### 9 9 9 . 9

### 9 9 . 9 9

### 9 9 9 9

### 9 9 9 . 9

### 9 9 . 9 9

With the scale f actor changed to displa y 120 counts f or 4 Hz input, the displa yed reading depends on the range multiplier selected.

4 Hz

*Note:

x10

x100

120

### 9 9 9 9

### 9 9 9 . 9

### 9 9 . 9 9

The Leopard BL-40F/BL-40RPM and DL-40F/DL-40RPM range has a 4-digit display, therefore, a x100 multiplier cannot be used on a 3-digit reading as this goes overrange.

[9999]

[99.99]

[999.9]

See Table 1 for details

[x.xxx]

[xx.xx]

[xxx.x]

[xxxx]

[ 1]

[ 2]

[ 3]

[ 4]

See Table 2 for details

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

Figure 11 Calibration Logic

Diagram

Step 4 Select the Decimal P oint Position The decimal point can be set to one of three positions on the display or not displayed at all.

This allows you to display a 4-digit reading as a full number (xxxx), a 3-digit reading to one decimal place (xxx.x), a 2-digit reading to two decimal places (xx.xx), or a 1-digit reading to three decimal places (x.xxx).

To complete our e xample in Step 3 where an input frequency of 4 Hz displa counts, set the decimal point to the xxxx position. The display reads 120 at 4 Hz input.

ys as 120

Table 2 sho ws the displa y readings with a decimal point f or a 4 Hz input set to the x100 range multiplier.

Table 2 Decimal Point Settings

Input

4 Hz

Multiplier Setting

DP Setting

Display Reading

x100

x.xxx

xx.xx

xxx.x

xxxx

### . 1 2 0

### 1 . 2 0

### 1 2 . 0

### 1 2 0

Setting Up IF05 for BL40RPM and DL-40RPM

Meters

To set up the IF05 input module f or rpm input in a Leopard BL-40RPM or DL-40RPM meter, carry out the following procedures:

Step 1

Establish the pulses per revolution for the sensor

Step 2

Set the pulses per revolution (PPR) in the meter

Step 3

Select the display resolution

RPM Meter

Calibrated

Step 1 Establish the PPR for the Sensor The sensor has an output r ated in pulses per revolution (PPR). You will need this setting f or the next step.

Step 2 Set the PPR in the Meter Enter the meters PPR and range setting mode and set the pulses per revolution you require (PPR output of your sensor). See Figure

12 PPR & Range Setting Logic Diag ram.

Step 3 Set the Displa y Resolution After you have set the PPR setting, enter the range [rG] menu and select the resolution setting you require from one of the three ranges available.

Range Setting 0.1

This setting pro vides you with a resolution of 1 digit after the decimal point. For example, if y our PPR setting is 1, then y our display reading would be 1.0. If your PPR setting is 25, then y our display reading w ould be 25.0. The maximum PPR in this r ange is 999.9 rpm.

Range Setting 1

This setting provides you with a resolution of 1 to 1. For example, if your PPR setting is 1, then your display reading would be 1. If your PPR setting is 25, then y our display reading would be 25. The maximum PPR in this range is 9999 r pm.

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

Range Setting 1000

This setting provides you with a resolution of 2 digits after the decimal point. For example, if your PPR setting is 1, then y our display reading would be 1.00. If your PPR setting is 25, then y our display reading would be 25.00. The maximum PPR in this range is 99.99 rpm.

Example

Figure 12 is a logic diagram showing the logic steps involved in setting up the IF05 input module for a BL-40RPM or DL-40RPM meter.

The diagram is written as an example showing meter connected to a rotar y encoder with an output r ate of 100 pulses per re volution, displayed with 1 digit after the decimal point.

Operational Display

# XXXX

[ 1]

[ 0.1]

[1000]

Example

Figure 12 PPR & Range Setting

Logic Diagram

[ 1]

[ 2]

[ 3]

[ 4]

Operational Display

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IF05 Data Sheet (NZ324)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### IF10 NZ337 4-5-04 Redacted

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## UNIVERSAL FREQ/COUNTER INPUT MODULE

Sensor Header.

Magnetic, Namur, Source, Sink.

De-coupling Header.

0.02 Hz high pass filter.

Signal Type Header.

AC, (mV) or digital logic.

Input Connector.

Freq. Input (CH1)

Up/Down Counter

Control (CH2).

+24 V Excitation.

Low Pass Filter Header.

20 kHz, 2 kHz, 200 Hz.

Comparator.

Precision switching interface.

Frequency/

Counter Header.

CH2.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

Your first choice frequency/rpm/counter input module.

Combined with the Tiger 320 Series operating system, the IF10 universal frequency/counter input module is the quick-fix interface to time varying signals. You now have a versatile and powerful monitoring and control system to perform tasks such as totalizing counts, frequency measurements, or status monitoring. Should your transducer be a magnetic pick-up outputting small AC volts or an open-collector transistor switching voltage levels, the IF10 is easily connected with a selection of configuration headers providing a variety of interface options.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Signal Input

IF10

Hardware Module Specifications

0-24 V DC, 0-30 V AC. CH1 frequency or UP counter.

CH2 frequency or UP / DOWN counter.

Low-pass Filter Header

None, 200 Hz, 2 kHz, 20 kHz cut off frequency.

De-coupling Header

DC component removed by 0.02 Hz high-pass filter.

Sensor Header

Optional sink / source for digital transistor or switch interface; specific Namur 2-wire proximity detector option; magnetic pick-up (AC) choice.

Signal Type Header

Choice of DC (logic) or AC signal type.

Frequency/Counter Header CH2 function select.

Frequency Response

Set by Tiger meter configuration software.

Can be as fast as 200 kHz on CH1 or CH2.

Excitation Voltage

24 V DC (50 mA) to power external transducers.

CH2 UP/DOWN Control

### Connector Pinouts &

### Module Layout

Figure 1 IF10 Universal Frequency/Counter Input

Module

### Detailed

### Description

The Tiger 320 Series controller has four input channels capable of processing almost any input signal type. The IF10 universal frequency/counter input module uses only channels 1 (CH1) and 2 (CH2).

The IF10 input module receives and conditions an AC volts or digital input signal, via pin 1, and supplies a frequency input to CH1 and CH2 in the meter for further processing. CH1 can also be configured as an UP counter via software selection in Code 2 of the meters programming software. CH2 can be configured as an UP or DOWN counter. The UP/DOWN counter control signal for CH2 is connected to pin 4. With the frequency/counter selection header set to the COUNT position, the input module provides an UP counter output to the meter for further processing. To provide a DOWN counter, pin 4 must be connected to ground (pin 3).

Selectable on-board headers provide configuration settings allowing the sensor and signal type to be selected along with high and low-pass filtering. These selectable headers give the Tiger 320 Series the flexibility to perform dual software operations such as rate of change on CH1 and totalizing on CH2.

Figure 2 IF10 Universal Frequency/Counter Input Module Signal Flow Diagram

Tiger 320 Series Meter Settings Frequency and counter settings are configured in Codes 2 and 4 of the Tiger 320 Series meters main programming mode. Channel 1 frequency settings are configured in Code 2. Channel 2 frequency and counter settings are configured in Code 4.

### Interface Configuration

### Examples

The following example diagrams show the various header settings and input connections required for a range of input sensor types.

Example 1 NPN Open-collector Output with Proximity Switch Figure 3 shows a 3-wire proximity switch taking +24 V excitation from the meter with an NPN open-collector signal output connected to the input module as frequency with no filtering (CH1 and CH2).

The input header is set to SINK connecting the signal output to +24 V via an on-board 10 k pull-up resistor. As the proximity switch is activated, the signal is forced to ground.

Figure 3 3-wire Proximity Switch with NPN Open-collector Output

Example 2 PNP Open-collector Output with Proximity Switch Figure 4 shows a 3-wire proximity switch taking +24 V excitation from the meter with a PNP open-collector signal output connected to the input module as frequency with no low-pass filtering (CH1 and CH2).

The input header is set to SOURCE connecting the input signal to a 10 k pull-down resistor to ground. When the proximity switch is activated, the input signal switches from 0 V to +24 V.

Figure 4 3-wire Proximity Switch with PNP Open-collector Output

Example 3 Hall Effect / Magnetic Pickup mV Input Figure 5 shows a magnetic pickup. With small AC signals a shielded cable should be used to avoid stray pickup.

Figure 5 HAll Effect / Magnetic Pickup mV Input

Example 4 TTL Input Figure 6 shows a TTL input. The TTL input requires the sensor header to be placed in the SINK position. In this example the TTL logic has a separate +5 V supply. The input module is configured as a DOWN counter on CH2 and a frequency input on CH1. This requires pin 4 connected to ground (pin 3) to select the DOWN counter option and the frequency/counter header set to COUNT. The digital option (LOGIC) is selected on the signal type header.

Figure 6 TTL Input

Example 5 Digital Input with DC Voltage Offset Figure 7 shows a digital input with voltage offset. In this situation the DC component of the signal is removed by selecting the AC option on the decoupling header. The digital input has its own supply voltage. CH1 reads frequency. CH2 is set as an UP counter.

Figure 7 Digital Input with DC Component

Example 6 Pushbutton Switch with Frequency & UP Counter Option Figure 8 shows a pushbutton switch with frequency on CH1 and the UP counter option on CH2. The low-pass filter header is set to

200 Hz to debounce mechanical contacts. Sensor type is set to SINK to pull-up the input signal to +24 V until it is switched to ground when the pushbutton is pressed.

Figure 8 Pushbutton Switch with Frequency & UP Counter

Example 7 NAMUR Sensor Figure 9 shows a NAMUR 2-wire proximity detector as an UP counter on CH2. Set the sensor header to NAMUR to ensure the detector has the correct output load (2 k pull-down resistor) and to protect the sensor at +24 V excitation voltage. The current output of these detectors vary in response to the proximity of the target metal.

Figure 9 NAMUR Sensor

### Converting K Factor to

### Scale Factor for Manual

### Calibration

One method of calibrating the IF10 input module is to use a frequency generator to apply a low and high input, while setting zero and span settings via the two-point calibration mode. Unfortunately, a frequency generator is not always available to a user in the field and, therefore, manual calibration needs to be carried out by changing the controllers scale factor.

Flow sensors such as paddlewheel and turbine types generate a known number of pulses for each unit of volume of fluid passing the rotor blade. This constant is known as the K factor and is used to determine the flow rate or total flow from the number of pulses occurring per second.

To calibrate the IF10 input module in applications using pulse, flow, and proximity sensors, the manufacturer provides either the K factor specified for the sensor, or a pulses per engineering unit chart (liters, gallons, feet, inches, meters, millimeters, revolution). From this information, The K factor can be easily converted to a scale factor and the scale factor manually entered into the controller.

Depending on the channel used and the type of input signal, follow the sequence of steps in one of the following manual calibration procedure sequence charts:

Channel 1:

As a frequency signal to the controller.

As an UP counter.

Channel 2:

As a frequency signal to the controller.

As an UP or DOWN counter.

### Channel 1

Frequency Input

As a frequency input to the meter, a different scale factor can be used in CH1 to suit the required engineering units. To calculate and set a new scale factor, carry out the manual calibration procedure in the following sequence:

UP Counter

As with CH1 set to frequency, a different scale factor can be used in CH1 to suit the required engineering units. The configuration procedure is identical for the first five steps, but in Step 6 the frequency input signal can be selected in software as an UP counter. To calculate and set a new scale factor, carry out the manual calibration procedure in the following sequence:

Step 1

Establish the K Factor

Step 1

Establish the K Factor

Step 2

Calculate the Scale Factor

Step 2

Calculate the Scale Factor

= Scale Factor

per

minute

per

hour

Divide

scale factor

by 60

Divide

scale factor

by 3600

you

require units

per second

YES

= Scale Factor

per

minute

per

hour

Divide

scale factor

by 60

Divide

scale factor

by 3600

you

require units

per second

YES

Step 3

Enter the New Scale Factor

Step 3

Enter the New Scale Factor

Calibration Mode

Calibration Mode

Step 4

Select Display Resolution

Step 4

Select Display Resolution

Code 1

Code 1

Step 5

Select the Data Source for the Primary Display

Step 5

Select the Data Source for the Primary Display

Code 1

Code 1

Step 6 Final Settings

Step 6 Final Settings

Code 2 Select the frequency range

Code 2 Select the UP counter settings

### Channel 1: Frequency Input

Step 1 Establish the K Factor The manufacturer of the sensor normally provides either the K factor specified for the sensor, or a pulses per engineering unit chart, shown in pulses per liter, gallon, feet, inch, meter, millimeter, or revolution. Either way the K factor is the same:

A K factor of 250 is the same as 250 pulses/unit for a specified sensor application

Step 2 Calculate the Scale Factor From the K factor, the scale factor can be calculated by dividing K into unity.

For example:

A paddlewheel sensor generates 213 pulses per gallon of fluid passing the rotor.

If K = 213 (213 pulses/gallon)

Then

= 0.0047 gallons/pulse = the scale factor

The resultant scale factor is then entered into the controller in the calibration mode.

The controller receives the input signal from the sensor as pulses and treats them as a frequency measurement task. The final controller display is in units of frequency, i.e. hertz, but equivalent to the flow rate scaled to the appropriate engineering units, for example: gallons/second.

A rotary encoder placed on a milling table generates 500 pulses per foot of travel.

Therefore, if K = 500 (500 pulses/foot)

Then

= 0.002 feet/pulse = the scale factor

Again, the resultant scale factor is then entered into the controller in the calibration mode. The controller receives the input signal from the sensor as pulses and treats them as a frequency measurement task. The final controller display is in units of frequency, i.e. hertz, but equivalent to the feed rate scaled to the appropriate engineering units, for example: feet/second.

Note:

If you require units per minute divide the scale factor by 60.

If you require units per hour divide the scale factor by 3600.

Step 3 Enter the New Scale Factor When you have established the new scale factor, enter the controllers calibration mode [CAL] and set to [10X]. The X in the 3rd digit means you must select the relevant channel for the input signal. Enter this mode and set the offset setting [OFF_1] to 0 and the scale setting [SCA_1] to the new scale factor.

Enter Calibration Mode

then

Leave as

Reset to new scale factor. For example:

Step 4 Select Display Resolution At this point you should decide on where you want to position the decimal point on the display, based on the minimum and maximum displayed units you require, then set this in Code 1 [X61].

Enter Code 1

3rd digit selects channel 1

then

3rd digit selects decimal point position

Step 5 Select the Data Source for the Primary Display While leaving Code 1 after setting the position of the decimal point, set the 2nd digit to 5 and the 3rd digit to 0 to select the primary display [Cod_1] [X50].

The source for the primary display is set by selecting 0 in the 3rd digit and then entering the select data source mode. In this mode a number of choices are available as the source of data for the selected (primary) display.

Enter Code 1

then

Note:

3rd digit 0 selects primary display.

Select the channel

source for the primary display.

required as the

The primary display is the default display for all single display Tiger 320 Series controllers (i.e. selecting 0, 1, or 2 in the 3rd digit selects the primary display). In dual and triple display controllers, the top display is the primary display. And in bargraphs the digital display is the primary display and the bargraph is the secondary display.

Step 6 Final Settings: Frequency Input The display frequency range is selected last and completes the manual calibration procedures for CH1 setup as a frequency input. After you have decided on the resolution you require, and positioned the decimal point to provide this, the frequency range then configures the position of the displayed counts when a 1 Hz pulsed input is applied.

Enter Code 2 and select 4 in the 2nd digit. In the 3rd digit select the frequency range that applies.

Enter Code 2

X X 3rd digit selects the frequency range

for the display

Displayed Counts

X40

For 1 Hz

### 1. 0 0 0

For 50 Hz

### 5 0. 0 0 0

X41

For 1 Hz

### 1. 0 0 0

For 50 Hz

### 5 0. 0 0 0

X42

For 1 Hz

X43

For 1 Hz

X44

For 1 Hz

X45

For 1 Hz

X46

For 1 Hz

X47

For 1 Hz

### 1. 0 0

For 50 Hz

### 5 0. 0 0

For 50 Hz

### 5 0. 0 0

### 1. 0

1. 0

### 0. 1

For 50 Hz

For 50 Hz

For 50 Hz

For 50 Hz

### 5 0. 0

5 0. 0

### 5 0.

Step 6 Final Settings: UP Counter To complete the manual calibration procedures, CH1 must be configured as an UP counter. Enter Code 2 and select 6 in the 2nd digit. This selects counter as the measurement task. In the 3rd digit select 3 to apply the UP counter.

Enter Code 2

### Channel 2

Flow Rate Header in FREQ Position As a frequency input, a different scale factor can be used in CH2 to suit the required engineering units. To calculate and set a new scale factor, carry out the manual calibration procedure in the following sequence:

Step 1

Establish the K Factor

Step 2

Calculate the Scale Factor

= Scale Factor

per

minute

per

hour

Divide

scale factor

by 60

Divide

scale factor

by 3600

you

require units

per second

YES

Step 3

Enter the New Scale Factor

Calibration Mode

Step 4

Select Display Resolution

Code 1

Step 5

Select the Data Source for the Primary Display

Code 1

Step 6 Select the Display Range

Code 4

### Channel 2

Totalizer Header in COUNT Position As a counter input, CH2 can be programmed as a totalizer using the prescaler. To calculate the prescaler, carry out the manual calibration procedure in the following sequence:

Step 1

Establish the K Factor

Step 2

Calculate the Scale Factor

= Scale Factor

per

minute

per

hour

Divide

scale factor

by 60

Divide

scale factor

by 3600

you

require units

per second

YES

Step 3

Enter the New Scale Factor

Calibration Mode

Step 4

Make Sure the Prescaler is Set to 1

Code 4

Step 5

Select the UP/DOWN Counter

Code 1

Step 6

Select Display Resolution

Code 1

Step 7

Select the Data Source for the Primary Display

Code 1

Step 8

If required:

Select a New Display Message for the CH2 Display in the View Mode

Texmate Meter Configuration

Utility Program

### Channel 2: Flow Rate Header in FREQ Position

Step 1 to Step 5 Steps 1 to 5 are the same for CH1 Frequency Input and CH2 Flow Rate. Follow Steps 1 to

5 under the heading Channel 1 Frequency Input when carrying out channel 2 flow rate manual calibration procedures.

Step 6 Select the Display Frequency Range The display frequency range is selected last and completes the manual calibration procedures.

After you have decided on the resolution you require, and positioned the decimal point to provide this, the frequency range then configures the position of the displayed counts when a 1 Hz pulsed input is applied.

Enter Code 4 and select 3 in the 1st digit to select the second digital input channel. In the 2nd digit select the frequency range that applies. Select 0 in the 3rd digit to ensure no linearization tables are applied to CH2.

Enter Code 4

X 2nd digit selects the frequency range

for the display

Displayed Counts

300

For 1 Hz

### 1 0 0 0

For 50 Hz

### 5 0 0 0 0

310

For 1 Hz

### 1 0 0

For 50 Hz

### 5 0 0 0

320

For 1 Hz

For 50 Hz

330

For 1 Hz

### 0. 1

For 50 Hz

### 5 0

### Channel 2: Totalizer Header in COUNT Position

Step 1 to Step 3 Steps 1 to 3 are the same for CH1 Frequency Input and both CH2 Flow Rate and CH2 Totalizer. Follow Steps 1 to 3 under the heading Channel 1 Frequency Input when carrying out channel 2 totalizer manual calibration procedures.

Step 4 Make Sure the Prescaler is Set to 1 When you have established the K factor for the required unit of measurement, enter Code 4 and ensure that the prescale setting is still 1. Select 3 in the 1st digit to select the second digital input channel, 7 in the 2nd digit to enter the prescaler menu, and 0 in the 3rd digit to ensure no linearization tables are applied to CH2.

Enter Code 4

2nd digit selects the Set Prescaler menu

Step 5 Select the UP/DOWN Counter When you have checked the prescaler, select the UP/DOWN counter setting as the mode for CH2. Enter Code 4 and select 3 in the 1st digit to select the second digital input channel, 6 in the 2nd digit to select the UP/DOWN counter, and 0 in the 3rd digit to ensure no linearization tables are applied to CH2.

Enter Code 4

2nd digit selects the Up/Down Counter with Prescaler setting

Step 6 Select Display Resolution At this point you should decide on where you want to position the decimal point on the display, based on the minimum and maximum displayed units you require, then set this in Code 1 [X61].

Enter Code 1

3rd digit selects channel 1

then

3rd digit selects decimal point position

Step 7 Select the Data Source for the Primary Display While leaving Code 1 after setting the position of the decimal point, set the 2nd digit to 5 and the 3rd digit to 0 to select the primary display [Cod_1] [X50].

The source for the primary display is set by selecting 0 in the 3rd digit and then entering the select data source mode. In this mode a number of choices are available as the source of data for the selected (primary) display.

Enter Code 1

then

Note:

3rd digit 0 selects primary display.

Select the channel

source for the primary display.

required as the

The primary display is the default display for all single display Tiger 320 Series controllers (i.e. selecting 0, 1, or 2 in the 3rd digit selects the primary display). In dual and triple display controllers, the top display is the primary display. And in bargraphs the digital display is the primary display and the bargraph is the secondary display.

Step 8 Select a New Display Message for the CH2 Display in the View Mode

The value displayed on CH2 can be viewed in the view mode by pressing the in the operational display. The display toggles between [Ch2] and [VALUE].

button while

If required, the [Ch2] message can be changed to display the unit of measure using the display editing function of the Texmate Meter Configuration Utility Program.

See www.texmate.com for details of the Texmate Meter Configuration Utility Program.

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Local Distributor Address

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IGYX

# DIRECT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT MODULE

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

Ratio-metric Measurement &

Differential Amplification of

Pressure Sensor Output.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

Pressure, freq/cntr

& 2 digital inputs.

On-board Pressure Sensor.

Absolute/Differential.

Connection.

2.5 mm ID Pneumatic Tubing.

Frequency/Counter

Header.

Up/Down Cntr.

Link J1.

Low-pass Filter Header.

1 kHz cut-off frequency.

Reference Voltage.

0V/-2.5V link J2.

Digital Interface.

Dual inputs & excitation voltage.

Input Headers.

mV, TTL, and Open-collector Transistor (PNP, NPN)

Interface Options.

An on-boa rd pres sure senso r c omb i n ed w i th du al d ig i ta l i np uts.

A cost effective solution for pressure applications requiring monitoring and process control of non-corrosive, non-ionic working fluids such as air, dry gases and similar. The pressure sensor is available in absolute and differential models and pressure ranges from 0 to 100 psi. Two independent digital inputs and a 24 V excitation voltage provide additional transducer and/or logic interfaces for measuring such variables as flow rate of the fluid being monitored.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IGYX

Pressure Inputs Channel 1 Absolute or differential connections

Hardware Module Specifications

Pressure Ranges

Max Pressure any Port Repeatability

Linearity/Hysteresis

Digital Inputs

Input Headers

Excitation Voltage

Low-pass Filter Header

via 2.5 mm I.D. pneumatic tubing.

0-1, 0-5, 0-15, 0-30, and 0-100 psi.

Temperature compensated 0-50 C, 0.4% F.S.

150 psi.

0.2% F.S. typical. 0.2% F.S. typical.

Dual independent digital inputs.

Input 1(Channel 2) can be configured to measure frequency, or as an UP/DOWN counter and as a digital input (D1).

Input 2 is treated as a digital input only (D2).

In both cases, frequency response is dependent on meter update rate.

Configured for mV, TTL, OC (NPN/PNP) interface.

Millivolt reference to 0 V (open jumper J2) TTL/PNP/NPN referenced to -2.5 V (close jumper J2)

24 V DC (50 mA) available for external signal excitation.

Set to OFF position for high speed update.

Set to ON for 1 kHz cut off frequency low-pass filter. (Does not apply to Input 2.)

Frequency/Counter Header Input 1selected as either a frequency or counter input.

Up counter: open jumper J1. Down counter: close jumper J1. (Does not apply to Input 2.)

IGYX Data Sheet (NZ335)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

Figure 1 IGYX Direct Pressure Sensor Input Module

### Detailed Description

The Tiger 320 Series controller has four input channels capable of processing almost any input signal type.The direct pressure sensor input module IGYX uses only channels 1 and 2 and also the controller s digital inputs D1 and D2.

The input module processes the pressure input via a b uilt-in pressure sensor capab le of processing an absolute or diff erential pressure input. The pressure signal is then f ed to CH1 f or further processing. Gain setting resistors are f actory installed to optimiz e the full scale output for each pressure r ange. Contact Texmate when ordering to discuss your pressure range requirements.

In addition to the pressure sensor, there is a digital interf ace with independent dual inputs and a 24 V excitation voltage. Each input uses an input header to interface to standard open collector (PNP or NPN), TTL, or millivolt digital signals. Frequency or counter inputs are f ed through input 1 where the y are conditioned and have the option of lo w-pass filtering, via a selection header, then fed to CH2 for further processing. Input 1 can also receive status inputs that are conditioned and fed to the controllers digital input D1, where it can be used f or setpoint control or macro functions. Input 2 receives status inputs that are conditioned and fed to the controllers digital input D2, where it can also be used f or setpoint control or macro functions.

Figure 2 IGYX Direct Pressure Sensor Input Module Signal Flo w Diagram

Tiger 320 Series Meter Settings Channel 1 (CH1) and channel 2 (CH2) configur ation settings for the IGYX input module are selected in Codes 2 and 4 of the Tiger

320 Series meters main programming mode. CH1 single or dual pressure input settings are configured in Code 2 and must be selected as a voltage input. CH2 frequency and counter settings are configured in Code 4.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYX Data Sheet (NZ335)

Status inputs D1 and D2 are an activation source for any of the six available setpoints. The selected setpoint is individually configured in the setpoint control function settings menu of the setpoint programming mode. Enter the setpoint programming mode, adjust the activation value of the selected setpoint, and then enter the rele vant setpoint control function menu (SPC_X) and select the requir ed status input (D1 or D2).

### Interface Configuration

### Examples

The following example diagrams show the various header settings required f or a range of digital inputs to the digital interf ace (inputs

1 and 2). Inputs to the pressure sensor are not sho wn, but can be either absolute or diff erential.

Example 1 Frequency Input with 1 kHz Lo w-pass Filter Figure 3 shows a transducer with an open collector NPN transistor output connected to digital input 1 (CH2/D1). In this case the transducer has its o wn power supply and the signal output is an open collector NPN transistor. By positioning input header CNT1 to the NPN position, a 10 k pull-up resistor ties the signal output to +24 V. The negative supply of the transducer is common to the g round

(GND) pin of the input module. When the transistor switches ON, the voltage of digital input 1 changes from +24 V to 2.5 V (J2 closed).

Figure 3 Open Collector PNP Transistor Connected to Digital Input 1

Example 2 Monitoring Voltage Level Shifts Figure 4 shows a transducer with an open collector PNP transistor output type connected to digital input 2 (D2) to monitor voltage level shifts. In this example the transducer uses the +24 V supply of the Tiger meter. By positioning input header CNT2 to the PNP position, a

10 k pull-down resistor ties the transducer signal to 2.5 V (J2 closed). When the transducer switches ON, the signal output changes from 2.5 V to +24 V DC. The Tiger 320 Series controller software reads digital input D2.

Figure 4 Open Collector PNP Transistor

Connected to Digital Input 2

IGYX Data Sheet (NZ335) IGYX Data Sheet (NZ335)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Example 3 TTL Output Configured as a HS Do wn Counter Figure 5 shows a transducer having its own external power supply of +5 V DC connected to digital input 1 and configured as a hi gh speed down counter on CH2. Input header CNT1 is positioned for TTL and this forces the 0 to 5 V transducer signal to be pulled down to 2.5 V (J2 closed). This ensures the input signal v aries about 0 V and all counts are detected.

Figure 5 TTL Signal Connected to Digital Input 1

Example 4 Transducer Input Configured as Up Counter Figure 6 shows a transducer that produces a slow 300 mV peak-to-peak output. The magnitude of the signal is less than 2.5 V peakto-peak. This means jumper J2 must be cut so that the mean signal passes through z ero. The signal is connected to input 1 as an u p counter with low-pass filtering.

Figure 6 mV AC Signal Connected to Digital Input 1

Example 5 Switch Closure Figure 7 shows a switch connected to both digital inputs. Digital input 1 acts as an up counter with low-pass filtering to record the number of switch closures. Digital input 2 acts as a status input on D2. Input 1 header (CNT1) and input 2 header (CNT2) are set to NPN for 10 k pull-up resistors to +24 V. Closing the switch sets both inputs to 2.5 V.

Figure 7 Switch Closure for Digital Input 1 and 2

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYX Data Sheet (NZ335)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IGYY

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

bso

Dual on-board pressure sensors.

The cost effective solution for pressure applications requiring monitoring and process control of non-corrosive working fluids such as air, dry gases and similar. Two independent pressure sensors are available in absolute and differential combinations in five pressure ranges covering 0 to 100 psi. Select your type and range from the order code listed below.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IGYY

Pressure Inputs for

Channel 1 & Channel 2

Absolute or differential connections via 2.5 mm I.D. pneumatic tubing.

Pressure Ranges

4% full scale

Max Pressure any Port Repeatability

Linearity/Hysteresis

150 psi.

0.2% full scale typical.

Sensor Range

1 psi absolute

1 psi differential

5 psi absolute

5 psi differential

15 psi absolute

15 psi differential

30 psi absolute

30 psi differential

100 psi absolute

100 psi differential

CH1

CH2

For example, IGCD:

CH1 5 psi, absolute pressure.

CH2 5 psi, differential pressure.

IGYY Data Sheet (NZ340)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

### Detailed Description

Figure 1 IGYY Dual Direct Pressure Sensor Input Module Component La yout

The Tiger 320 Series controller has four input channels capable of processing almost any input signal type. The dual direct pressure sensor input module IGYY uses only channels 1 and 2.

The input module processes the pressure inputs via b uilt-in pressure sensors capab le of processing an absolute or differential pressure input.The pressure signals are then fed to CH1 and CH2 for further processing. Gain setting resistors are factory installed to optimize the full scale output for each pressure range. Contact Texmate when ordering to discuss your pressure range requirements.

Pressure Sensor

Amplifier

CH1

Multiplexer

Pressure Sensor

Amplifier

CH2

Figure 2 IGYY Dual Direct Pressure Sensor Input Module Signal Flo w Diagram

Tiger 320 Series Meter Settings Channel 1 (CH1) and channel 2 (CH2) configuration settings for the IGYY input module are selected in Codes 2 and 4 respectiv ely of the Tiger 320 Series meters main programming mode. Both CH1 and CH2 must be selected as a v oltage input.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYY Data Sheet (NZ340)

Calibration

Both channel 1 and channel 2 m ust be individually calibr ated using the tw o-point calibration method. Calibration must be done us ing a source of pressure equal to the pressure r ange you selected for your meter. For example, if you selected 0-5 psi f or CH1, then you should be able to apply a pressure of 5 psi from y our source for the meter s [SPAn] setting. See Figure 3 and the 2-point calibr ation procedure on the next page.

1) Enter the meters calibration mode and set the display to [111]. This sets you up to calibrate CH1 using the 2-point method.

2) While in the [ZEro] setting mode with no pressure applied, set the displa y to the n umber of counts you want to see on the dis play for the

zero setting.

3) Now enter the [SPAn] setting mode and apply the maximum pressure for CH1. Set the display to the number of counts you want to see on

the display for the span setting (full scale).

4) Save the CH1 settings and repeat the procedure f or CH2 by setting the calibration mode to [112].

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

IGYY Data Sheet (NZ340)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Figure 3 Two-point Calibration Procedure

T HERE STSTARART HERE

From Step 6

Step 3

Example

Example

To Step 7

Step 5

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYY Data Sheet (NZ340)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IGYZ

## UNIVERSAL DIRECT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT MODULE

### Fits Lynx, Leopard & Tiger 320 Series

Span Pot Adjust.

Zero Pot Adjust.

Connection.

2.5 mm I.D. pneumatic tubing.

On-board Sensor.

Absolute.

Differential has two connections.

Interface to Lynx, Leopard or Tiger 320 Meter.

Ratiometric Measurement &

Differential Amplification of

Pressure Sensor Output.

An on-board pressure sensor module for Texmate's range of modular meters.

A cost effective solution for pressure applications requiring monitoring and process control of non-corrosive, non-ionic working fluids such as air, dry gases and similar. The pressure sensor is available in absolute and differential models and pressure ranges from 0 to 100 psi. The input module interfaces directly with Lynx, Leopard, and Tiger 320 Series meters.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Hardware Module Specifications

IGYZ

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

### ZERO

### SPAN

### Detailed Description

Figure 1 IGYZ Universal Direct Pressure Sensor Input Module Component La yout

This module interfaces directly with Texmates Tiger, Leopard, and Lynx range of modular controllers and panel meters. It has a single output that is an amplified and scaled v ersion of the onboard direct pressure sensor.

The sensor can be ordered as either an absolute or diff resistors are factory installed to optimize the full scale output f or each pressure range.

erential pressure type. Gain setting

Contact Texmate when ordering to discuss your pressure range requirements.

Pressure Sensor

Amplifier

Multiplier

CH1

ZERO

Offset

Figure 2 IGYZ Universal Direct Pressure Sensor Input Module Signal Flo w Diagram

Tiger Controllers and Leopard Meter Relays The Tiger and Leopard range use internal software functions to calibrate the span and zero offset. However, it may be necessary to adjust the span potentiometer to bring the maximum input signal within the full scale r ange of the instr ument. The Lynx has no inter nal software calibration procedure. Calibration is done manually using both the zero and span potentiometers.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

Overrange Indications

Lynx

When the input signal is be yond the full scale r ange of a L ynx meter, all the segments of each digit of the displa y flashes.

Leopard

When the input signal is be yond the full scale r ange of a Leopard meter, the top segment of each digit on the displa y flashes. See Figure 3.

Tiger

When the input signal is be yond the full scale r ange of a Tiger controller, the display flashes [OVER]. See Figure 3.

Lynx Indicators

Lynx indicators are supplied to match the displa yed full scale counts to the full scale input pressure.

Lynx indicators can displa y the f ollowing resolution for absolute and differential pressure ranges:

Lynx Calibration Example

See Figure 4. For a certain application, a

15 psi pressure input may be required to read 2.00 counts on the meter displa y.

Apply a zero pressure input or zero pressure diff erential. Using the z ero potentiometer, adjust the zero pot until the display reads 0 counts.

Now apply the full scale pressure signal of 15 psi. Using the span potentiometer, adjust the span pot until the displa y reads 2.00 counts.

This procedure can be used to calibr ate a L ynx o ver an y of the specified input ranges b y adjusting the full scale pressure signal and the full scale displa counts to suit.

Figure 3 Overrange Indications

ZERO

SPAN

332

ZERO

SPAN

332

Figure 4 Lynx Calibration Setting

Leopard & Tiger Initial Setup If an overrange condition exists, with the full scale pressure applied to the pressure sensor, tur n the 15-tur n span potentiometer counter-clockwise to decrease the signal until a reading appears on the display (See Figure 5). Now calibr ate the instr ument using the softw are calibr ation method f or your instr ument. See Leopard Calibr ation Example on P age 4 and Tiger Calibration Example on Page 6.

ZERO

SPAN

332

Figure 5 Leopard & Tiger Initial Calibration Setting

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Leopard Meter Relay Calibration Example In the following example, compressed air is supplied at a constant 80 psi to the pneumatics of an assembly line. If the air pressure becomes greater than 90 psi for an extended period damage can occur to the pneumatic seals.

A Leopard DL-40 meter relay has been installed to monitor the air with an IGYZ universal direct pressure input module set to 100 psi absolute pressure. A setpoint activ ates if the pressure exceeds 90 psi for more than 10 seconds, opens a relief valve, and sounds an alar m.

Figure 6 IGYZ Universal Direct Pressure Sensor Leopard Calibration Example

Procedure

With the compressor off and the air lines open, set the meter s zero calibration setting.

With the isolation v alve closed and only the sample pressure line open, star and take it to 100 psi. With 100 psi at the meter, set the meters span (full scale) setting.

t the compressor

The following example calibration procedure demonstrates calibrating the Leopard DL-40 meter with a zero setting of 0 counts, and a span (full scale) setting of 100 psi. See Figure 7 and the calibration procedure diagram opposite.

The low input source is applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

Figure 7 Leopard 2-point Calibration Zero and Span Setting

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

T HERE STSTARART HERE

From Step 9

To Step 10

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

Tiger Controller Calibration Example In the following example, a Tiger 320 Series controller has been installed with an IGYZ univ ersal direct pressure input module set to 15 psi differential pressure to monitor the efficiency of a filter mounted in an air duct.If the differential pressure becomes too great, the controller sounds an alarm. See Figure 8.

Figure 8 IGYZ Universal Direct Pressure Sensor Tiger Calibration Example

Procedure

Without the filter in place, zero channel 1.

Now apply 15 psi into the positive (+) differential input tube, while leaving the negative () input tube open to atmosphere.

The f ollowing e xample calibr ation procedure demonstr ates calibr ating the Tiger DI-50 meter with a zero setting of 0 counts, and a span (full scale) setting of 1500 counts for 15 psi on channel 1 (CH1). See Figure 9 and the calibr ation procedure diagram opposite.

low input source is The applied to the meter when setting the zero value.

The high input source is applied to the meter when setting the span value.

Figure 9 Tiger 2-point Calibration Zero and Span Setting

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

T HERE STSTARART HERE

From Step 6

Step 1

Enter brightness

mode

Step 2

Pass brightness mode

and the enter calibration mode

### Step 3

Step 4

Enter calibration

mode [111] for 2-point calibration of CH1

Example

Step 7

7.1. Adjust the display to the desired reading for the span input setting

Step 8

Save the zero and the span settings and

re-enter the calibration

mode

Step 9

Select the no function calibration mode [000]

Step 10

Save calibration mode

[000] setting and enter Code 1

Example

Step 11

Exit code 1 and return to operational display

### To Step 7

### Step 5

Step 6

Set the reading for zero load into the meter and enter the span mode

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IGYZ Data Sheet (NZ343)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IP07

### INPUT MODULE

3-pin Input Connector.

Process input (Volts / Current) plus 24 V Excitation.

Excitation Header.

External 24 V available

Signal Type Header.

Voltage / Current

Input Range Header.

Selects 2 V, 5 V, 10 V, 20 V, 200 V,

2 mA, 20 mA, Custom

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

Introducing IP07 The mainstay in process interfacing.

IP07 is a versatile input module presented as a general purpose interface to a wide range of DC voltage or milliamp signal inputs. With an external excitation voltage available to power transducers and onboard selectable headers for interface options, IP07 is the ideal choice between the process inputs and board selectable headers for interface options, IP07 is the ideal choice between the process inputs and your Texmate controller.

p g p g

g g

p p

p p

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IP07

Signal Type

Choice of DC volts or DC current (header selectable).

Voltage Ranges

Current Ranges

2 V, 5 V, 10 V, 20 V, and 200 V DC (header selectable). (Input Impedance approximately 1 megohm)

2 mA, 20 mA, 1Custom (header selectable). (200 mV drop across shunt resistor)

External Excitation

+24 V DC (150 mA maximum).

Interface

Accuracy

Tiger 320 Series and Leopard range.

0.05% of reading.

Temperature Drift

Typically 50 ppm/C.

Fits Leopard

& Tiger 320 Series

### Connector Pinouts &

### Module Layout

See

Popular IP07 Connection

Configurations

For connection details

Figure 1 IP07 Component Layout

### Technical

### Description

Figure 2 is an IP07 signal flow diagram showing the input signal flow through the signal type, voltage range, and current range headers to the Tiger or Leopard controller for further processing. The signal type header channels the input signal to either the voltage or current range header, which is set to suit the input voltage or current.

For Tiger or Leopard controller supplied +24 V DC excitation, set the excitation header to ON.

If excitation is supplied externally (e.g. from the transducer) set the excitation header to OFF.

Figure 2 IP07 Signal Flow Diagram

### Popular IP07 Connection

### Configurations

Table 1 provides a list of process input signals with and without external excitation and shows the appropriate header positions for each signal type. See diagrams on Page 3.

TABLE 1

POPULAR IP07 CONNECTION CONFIGURATIONS & HEADER POSITIONS

Input

Header Positions

Excitation

Signal Type

Input Range

External Excitation

0-10 V Process Input

0/4-20 mA Process Input

OFF

OFF

VOLTAGE

CURRENT

Controller Supplied Excitation +24 V (150 mA)

Loop Powered Sensors (Current Mode)

0-10 V Process Input

0/4-20 mA Process Input

CURRENT

VOLTAGE

CURRENT

10 V

20 mA

20 mA

10 V

20 mA

External Excitation

0 to 10 V Process Input.

+POS

N/C

+24 V Exc

NEG

+ Supply

+ Signal

External

Supply

Supply

Signal

4 to 20 mA Process Input.

+ Supply

External

Supply

Supply

+ Signal

+POS

+24 V Exc

N/C

NEG

Signal

Controller Supplied Excitation +24 V (150 mA)

2-wire, Loop Powered Sensors (Current Mode).

+POS

+24 V Exc

NEG

N/C

Sensor

3-wire, 0 to 10 V Process Input.

+ Signal

+ Supply

+POS

+24 V Exc

NEG

Signal / Supply

3-wire, 4 to 20 mA Process Input.

+ Signal

+ Supply

+POS

+24 V Exc

NEG

Signal / Supply

### Quick Setup Guide

### Leopard Controller

Calibration

Enter the Calibration Mode and set the [ZEro] and then the [SPAn] settings, while applying a low and then a high signal.

For a full set of calibration and decimal point placement procedures, see your relevant Leopard controller user manual.

### Tiger Controller

Calibration and Input Signal Type Selection Enter the Calibration Mode and then Code 2 to set the following calibration and input signal type settings for CH1:

CAL

000

for CH1 select

111

CODE_2

000

60 Hz Operation:

CODE_2

100

50 Hz Operation:

Code 2 frequency selection applies to all channels

Note, to calibrate the input signal for other engineering units use CH2, CH3, or CH4. These can be viewed

by pressing the

button while in the operational display.

for CH2 select

112

CODE_4

for CH3 select

113

CODE_5

for CH4 select

114

CODE_6

010

010

010

For a full set of calibration and decimal point placement procedures, see your relevant Tiger meter controller manual.

### Customer Configuration Settings:

### IP07 Header Settings

### Calibration Settings

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Volts

Amps

Display

Input Low

Input High

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IP07 (NZ342)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISD1-4

# Fits Tiger 320 Series

# 16-BIT SMART DC VOLTS INPUT MODULE 16-BIT SMART DC VOLTS INPUT MODULE

Attenuation Header.

1:1000 selectable voltage

divider for 60 V input.

Signal 1 (CH1)

Signal 2 (CH2)

Stable Voltage Reference.

10 ppm / C.

Ultra-low Noise

16-bit A/D Convertor.

Approaches 19-bit performance

with additional software filtering.

On-board Digital

Signal Processor.

Software selectable gains, output rates and noise rejection frequency.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

8-pin Input Connector.

Voltage input

excitation and SSR output.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity under harsh EMC environments.

Dual SSR Outputs.

Super fast

setpoint response.

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz

Noise rejection option.

Excitation Header.

External +24 V available.

Signal 2 (CH2)

Signal 1 (CH1)

The answer to accurate voltage measurements and switched relay outputs.

When faced with the task of supplying precise and stable voltage measurements over a large dynamic range, the automation engineer now has the solution at his fingertips.

Combined with the Tiger 320 Series operating system, this module is the smart design solution for many and varied control applications.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Input Channels

Input Range

Attenuation Header

Excitation Header

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Signal processing Rate

Solid Sate Relays (SSR)

Output Rates

Gain Select

Frequency Select

Setpoint Switching

Hardware Module Specifications

1 of 2 inputs available and chosen through software.

Software selectable from 25 mV to 2 V for signal (1) and fixed 1 V for signal (2), + 2.1 V common mode.

1: 1000 voltage divider on both inputs for 60 V with optional current shunt configuration.

+ 24 V (50 mA) available to power external sensors.

0.08 V / count maximum. 40 nV / C typical. 5 ppm / C of full scale maximum. 0.003% of full scale maximum.

160 nVp-p typical at 1 Hz output rate.

50 Hz maximum, 1 Hz minimum.

17 , 140 mA ( 400 V breakdown).

Software Module Features

A choice of average response outputs, 1-50 Hz.

A choice of 7 voltage ranges from 25 mV to 2 V.

50 / 60 Hz noise rejection (Software selectable).

High speed (>1 ms) SSR outputs under setpoint control.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

Setpoint Timer Functions.

Setpoint Register Reset and Trigger Functions.

On-demand Calibration.

Macro Compiler for PLC Functions.

32-Point Linearization.

Totalizer and Serial Printing.

ISD1-4 Data Sheet (NZ333)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

The diagram shows an external transducer requiring external excitation wired to input module ISD3 or ISD4 through signal 1.

### Programming Procedures

A signal <2 V requires the signal 1 (CH1) attenuation header to be set to the ON position.

The external supply requires signal 1 (CH1) e xcitation header to be set to the ON position.

### Smart Setup Registers

The meter uses three smar t setup registers to configure all smar t input modules. Input modules ISD1 and ISD2 require smart register 1 to be set up, while input modules ISD3 and ISD4 require smart register 1 and smart register 2 to be set up. All four modules are single input signal modules with the choice of tw o channels. ISD3 and ISD4 also has two solid state rela y (SSR) outputs dr iven b y SP5 and SP6 control.

SSR1 is controlled by SP5 and SSR2 is controlled b y SP6.

The following programming procedures co ver all the steps required to configure ISD1 to ISD4. Steps 1 to 5 describe how to select the line frequency rejection, the voltage range and input signal, and the output rate through smart register 1.

Steps 6 to 9 descr ibe ho w to select the SSR (SR1 and SR2) output mode f or SP5 and SP6 control through smart register 2. Steps 10 onwards describe how to select the output register for channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 as required.

Note, as ISD1 and ISD2 do not have SSRs, smart register 2 is not programmed.

ISD1 is factory software set to 50 Hz rejection.

ISD2 is factory software set to 60 Hz rejection.

ISD3 is factory software set to 50 Hz rejection with two 140 mA SSRs.

ISD4 is factory software set to 60 Hz rejection with two 140 mA SSRs.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note:

The 1st digit setting is not rele vant to this step. 0 is the default setting.

Press the

button.

This enters smart register 1 code setup menu.

Signal output at the A/D sampling r ate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter capture pin.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module.

2nd digit settings 0 to 6 allows you to select input signal 1 with a range of full scale voltage settings from 25 mV (setting 6) to 2 V (setting 0).

Setting 7 allows you to select input signal 2 with a 1 V full scale setting.

Both input signals can accept < 60 V utilizing the on-board 1:1000 atten uation header or e ven be configured for a current shunt.

Using the

and range, and the output rate. settings.

buttons, select the rele vant line frequency rejection, input signal

Press the

button.

This takes you back to the Code 2 men u.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISD1-4 Data Sheet (NZ333)

Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

7 Press the

three times to enter Code 5. Set Code 5 to [X77].

Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup menu.

This men u pro vides smar t rela y settings unique to input module ISD3 and ISD4 only.

Select the required smar t relay output mode and source of data for setpoints SP5 and SP6.

Note:

SP5 controls SR1.

SP6 controls SR2.

Press the

button to save the settings.

The display toggles between [Cod_5] and [X77].

Using the

buttons, reset the 3rd digit to 0 to lea ve the smart register 2 menu.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming

mode, then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

* *

Signal output at the A/D sampling r ate. Signal output at the A/D sampling r ate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin. ** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

Note:

Reset of Peak, Valley, and Capture Signals Reset of peak/valley/capture signals options are:

If peak/valley/capture signals are stored in CH1, y CH2, CH3, or CH4, a macro can reset CH1 b resetting register 253, CH2 b y resetting register 252, CH3 b y resetting register 251, and CH4 b y resetting register 250.

2. As for Step 1, but using the LOCK pin to reset.

3. As for Step 1, but only applying to CH1 using the

HOLD pin to reset.

4. As f or Step 1, b ut using SPC1 to reset CH1, SPC3 to reset CH3, and SPC4 to reset CH4.

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

14 Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or

CH2 in the 2nd digit.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Signal output at the A/D sampling rate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

## CH2

ISD1-4 Data Sheet (NZ333)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

If required enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings f or CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Signal output at the A/D sampling rate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISD1-4 Data Sheet (NZ333)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISD5-8

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## 24-BIT SMART DC VOLTS INPUT MODULE

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz.

Noise rejection option.

1 ppm / C Ultra-stable Reference.

For near zero

temperature drift.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Provides six output functions including Texmate's unique

dual output rates.

Break-thru performance

24-bit high resolution, ultra-low noise

A/D Convertor.

High dynamic range.

Dual S.S.R. Outputs.

For super fast 2 ms setpoint response times.

Voltage Inputs.

Choice of two input ranges.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

For the first time, an exceptionally high performance mV/V controller is available at a panel meter price

This input module outperforms many laboratory benchtop meters and calibrators.

Where absolute accuracy is a must, this is the module to use.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Input Range

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

SSR Processing Rate

Tiger 320 Processing Rate Solid State Relay (SSR)

Hardware Module Specifications

Software selectable from 30 mV to 60 V.

5 nV/ count maximum. 40 nV/ C typical. 3 ppm/ C of F.S. (typical) for 30 mV to 2 V ranges. 30 ppm/C of F.S. (typical) for 60 V range. 0.002% of full scale maximum.

40 nV p-p typical at 1 Hz output rate (30 mV range).

960 Hz maximum 1 Hz minimum.

10 or 100 Hz.

17 , 140 mA ( 400 V Breakdown).

Dual output rates

Peak & Valley Outputs Capture Output

Rate of Change Output

Software Module Features

Rapid and average response outputs.

Monitoring over and under-shoots.

Hardwire signal capture.

Useful for fine tuning reaction times.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

Smart Averaging.

Setpoints.

Linearization.

Macro Compiler for complex math Functions.

ISD5-8 Data Sheet (NZ323)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

mV +

Smart Setup Registers

The meter can be connected to tw o input ranges, but perform signal conditioning on only one. The required input r ange is selecte d through software configuration.

ISD5 is a crystal controlled 50 Hz frequency r ange input module and ISD6 is a crystal controlled 60 Hz frequency r ange input module.

ISD7 is a crystal controlled 50 Hz frequency r ange input module with two solid state relay (SSR) outputs. ISD8 is a crystal controlled 60 Hz frequency range input module with two SSR outputs.

The SSR outputs are known as smart relay 1 (SR1) and smar t relay 2 (SR2) and are controlled through meter setpoints SP5 and SP6 respectively. In their unenergized state, the SSRs can be configured in software to be either a normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contact and can be switched at the selected averaged input signal or rapid response rate.

Smart Setup Register Operational Flow Diagram

Input Signal 1

Input Signal 2

Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure ISD7. Similar procedures can be followed to configure ISD5, ISD6, and ISD8. Remember, ISD5 and ISD6 do not ha ve SSRs, so Steps 6 to 10 can be skipped dur ing configuration.

Steps 1 to 5 descr ibe how to select the signal (1 or 2), v oltage, and output rate through smart register 1.

Steps 6 to 9 descr ibe how to select the SR1 and SR2 output mode and the source of data f or SP5 and SP6 through smart register 2.

Steps 10 to 16 descr ibe how to select the output register f or channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note:

The 1st digit setting is not rele vant to this step. 0 is the default setting.

* *

Signal output at the A/D sampling r ate. Signal output at the A/D sampling r ate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin. ** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

ISD5-8 Data Sheet (NZ323)

Press the

button.

This enters smart register 1 code setup menu.

2nd digit settings 0 to 6 allo ws you to select input signal 1 with a range of full scale voltage settings from 30 mV to 2

V. Setting 7 allows you to select input signal 2 with a full scale voltage setting of a veraged 60 V. The 3rd digit allo ws you to select the output rate.

Using the

and output rate settings.

buttons, select the relevant input signal, voltage,

Press the

button.

This takes you back to the Code 2 men u.

Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

7 Press the

button three times to enter Code 5. Set Code 5 to [X77].

Note:

SP5 controls SR1.

SP6 controls SR2.

Note:

Reset of Peak, Valley, and Capture Signals Reset of peak/valley/capture signals options are:

2. As for Step 1, but using the LOCK pin to reset.

3. As for Step 1, b ut only applying to CH1 using the

HOLD pin to reset.

4. As for Step 1, but using SPC1 to reset CH1, SPC3

to reset CH3, and SPC4 to reset CH4.

8 Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup menu.

This men u pro vides smar t rela y settings unique to input module ISD7 or ISD8.

Select the required smar t rela y output mode and source of data for setpoints SP5 and SP6.

Press the

button to save the settings.

The display toggles between [Cod_5] and [X77].

Using the

buttons, reset the 3rd digit to 0 to leave the smart register 2 menu.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

12 Press the

programming mode.

and

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

To select channel 1, set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing r ate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required output register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Signal output at the A/D sampling r ate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

ISD5-8 Data Sheet (NZ323)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

To select channel 2, set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required output register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

To select channel 3, enter Code 5 and select the required output register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

To select channel 4, enter Code 6 and select the required output register map settings f or CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

* *

Signal output at the A/D Signal output at the A/D sampling rate. sampling rate.

** Hardwire initiated from ** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin. meter Capture pin.

Customer Configuration Settings:

### CH1

### CH2

### CH3

### CH4

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

For product details visit www.texmate.com

ISD5-8 Data Sheet (NZ323)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISD9

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## VOLTAGE & RESISTANCE SMART MODULE

Attenuation Header.

1:100 selectable voltage

divider or DC current shunt.

8-pin Input

Connector.

Voltage and resistance

inputs, voltage and

current excitation

outputs.

Constant Current Source.

Ratiometric referenced

5 mA excitation current.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity under harsh EMC environments.

Ultra-low Noise

16-bit A/D Convertor.

Approaches 19-bit

performance with additional

software filtering.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

On-board Digital

Signal Processor.

Optimized signal bandwidth

and output rate.

Stable Voltage Reference

10 ppm / C

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz

Noise Rejection option.

The smart answer to precise resistance & voltage measurement

Initially designed to measure copper winding resistance to within fractions of an ohm and the surface temperature using an infrared sensor. When coupled with the Tiger 320 Series operating system this module, and its on-board current and voltage excitation outputs, satisfy OEMs wishing to accurately measure a range of resistance and voltage/current signals.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

A/D Convertor

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Voltage Reference

Voltage Input

Attenuation Header

Excitation Voltage

Resistance Input

Resistance Resolution

Excitation current

Hardware Module Specifications

Dual channel ultra-low noise 16-bit A/D with effective 19-bit resolution in post processing software.

0.08 V/count maximum.

40 nV/ C typical. 5 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.003% of full scale maximum.

160 Vp-p typical at 1 Hz output rate.

+ 2.5 V, 10 ppm.

Selection of ranges 25 mV to 2 V, 2.1 V common mode.

1:100 voltage for voltage inputs 60 V or optional mA current shunt configuration.

+ 24 V (50 mA) to drive external sensors.

Designed to measure voltage drop across small resistances (typically ~10 ), +3 V common mode.

1 m (10 load resistor).

5 mA constant current source to drive external resistor.

Ratiometrically referenced to A/D for precision low-drift resistance measurement.

Output Rates

Gain Select

Frequency Select

Software Module Features

A choice of average response outputs, 1-20 Hz.

7 voltage ranges to optimize signal resolution.

50 / 60 Hz noise rejection. Software selectable.

ISD9 Data Sheet (NZ331)

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

### Smart Setup Registers

The meter has three smart setup registers to configure all smar t input modules.

ISD9 requires smart registers 1 and 2 to be configured. Because this is a dual input module, measuring voltage and resistance, independent sensor inputs can be software selected for Tiger 320 Series meter channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. This module produces two output registers. One of these registers can be transferred to Channel 1 via Code 2, the same or another register to Channel 2 via Code 4, the same or another regi ster to Channel 3 via Code 5, and the same or another register to Channel 4 via Code 6.

Smart Setup Register Operational Flow Diagram

Input Signal 1

Input Signal 2

### Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure smar t input module ISD9. Steps 1 to 5 describe how to select the line frequency rejection, the voltage range, and the averaged output rate through smart setup register 1.

Steps 6 to 9 describe how to select the resistance r ange through smart setup register 2.

Steps 10 to 19 describe how to select the output register for channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button twice to enter Code 2 for input signal 1 configuration settings. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of the ISD9 input module.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISD9 Data Sheet (NZ331)

Using the

nal 1, and the output rate common to both signal 1 and signal 2.

buttons, select the relevant line frequency rejection and voltage range for input sig-

5 Press the

6 Using the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

7 Press the

button three times to enter Code 5 f or input signal 2 configuration settings. Set Code 5 to [X77].

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to ISD9. These register s v ary f or each different smart input module.

8 Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup menu.

Using the

register 2 from the 3rd digit.

buttons, select the resistance setting f or smart

Press the

button to save the settings.

The display toggles between [Cod_5] and [X77].

Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to 0 to lea ve the smart register 2 menu.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

Note resistance values

based on 5 mA current excitation. For example, a

10 resistor has a 50 mV input voltage.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

15 Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required

output register map setting in the 3rd digit.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

## CH1

If required enter Code 4 and select the required output register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit. Note, the 1st digit must be set to 0.

## CH2

ISD9 Data Sheet (NZ331)

Page 3

If required enter Code 5 and select the required post processing settings f or CH3 in the 1st digit and the required output register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required post processing settings for CH4 in the 1st digit and the required output register map setting in the 3rd digit.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

and

Press the

same time to retur n to the oper ational display.

buttons at the

### Example Setup Procedure

Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISD9 Data Sheet (NZ331)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISDA-B 1

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## 16-BIT SMART DUAL DC VOLTS INPUT MODULE

Excitation Header.

External +24 V available.

Stable Voltage Reference.

10 ppm/C.

On-board Digital

Signal Processor.

Software selectable gains, output rates and noise rejection frequency.

8-Pin Input Connector.

Dual voltage inputs and excitation voltage

output.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

Attenuation Header.

1:1000 selectable voltage divider for each input channel.

Crystal Controller 50/60 Hz.

Noise rejection.

Ultra-low Noise 16-bit

A/D Convertor.

Approaches 19-bit performance with additional software filtering.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC conditions.

An extremely flexible and powerful dual input mV/V Input Module

This input module comes with a myriad of hardware and software options to satisfy the requirements of precision voltage measurement and dual input functionality. When combined with the Tiger 320 Series operating system, the OEM has a powerful solution to applications ranging from small voltage measurement through to process control, all at a very affordable price.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Input Range

Input Channels

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input noise

Signal Processing Rate

Excitation Voltage

Hardware Module Specifications

Software selectable from 25 mV to 2 V, +2.1 V common mode.

Maximum 60 V using signal attenuation header.

Dual with independent gains. Zero X-talk between channels each having 19-bit effective resolution.

0.08 V/Count maximum.

40 nV/ C typical. 5 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.003 % of full scale maximum.

160 nVp-p typical at 1 Hz output rate.

20 Hz maximum, 1 Hz minimum. +24 V (50mA) available to power external sensors.

Output Rates

Gain Select

Frequency Select

Software Module Features

Choice of 4 average response outputs, 1-20 Hz.

Choice of 7 voltage ranges from 25 mV to 2 V.

50/60 Hz noise rejection (Software selectable).

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

Auto Zero Maintenance.

Set TARE, Reset TARE.

Setpoint Timer Functions.

Setpoint Register Reset and Trigger Functions.

On-demand Calibration.

Macro Compiler for PLC Functions.

32-Point Linearization.

Totalizer and Serial Printing.

ISDA-B Data Sheet (NZ330)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

ISDA is factory software set to 50 Hz rejection.

ISDB is factory software set to 60 Hz rejection.

Smart Setup Registers

The meter has three smar t setup registers to configure all smar t input modules.

ISDA and ISDB require smart registers 1 and 2 to be configured.Because this is a dual input module, independent sensor inputs can be software selected for Tiger 320 Series meter channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. This module produces two output registers. One of these registers can be transferred to Channel

1 via Code 2, the same or another register to Channel 2 via Code 4, the same or another register to Channel 3 via Code 5, and t he same or another register to Channel 4 via Code 6.

Smart Setup Register Operational Flow Diagram

Input Signal 1

Input Signal 2

Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures co ver all the steps required to configure smar t input module ISD A and ISDB. Steps 1 to 5 descr ibe how to select the input signal 1 voltage range, line frequency rejection, and the output r ate through smart setup register 1.

Steps 6 to 9 describe how to select input signal 2 voltage range through smart setup register 2.

Steps 10 to 19 describe how to select the output register f or channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button twice to enter Code 2 for input signal 1 configuration settings. Set Code 2 to [X77].

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module.

Page 2

ISDA-B Data Sheet (NZ330)

Press the

button.

This enters smart register 1 code setup menu.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of the ISDA and ISDB input module.

Using the buttons, select the relevant line frequency rejection, the voltage range for signal 1, and the output rate common to both signals.

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

7 Press the

button three times to enter Code 5 f or input signal 2 configuration settings. Set Code 5 to [X77].

Note the output registers in the 3r d digit are specific to ISD A and ISDB. These register s vary f or eac h diff erent smart input module.

8 Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup menu.

Using the

input from the 3rd digit.

buttons, select the sensor 2

Press the

button to save the settings.

The display toggles between [Cod_5] and [X77].

Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to 0 to lea ve the smart register 2 menu.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

15 Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required

register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

ISDA-B Data Sheet (NZ330)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

If required enter Code 4 and select the required register map settings for CH2 in the 2nd digit. Note, the 1st digit must be set to 0.

## CH2

If required enter Code 5 and select the required post processing settings f or CH3 in the 1st digit and the required register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required post processing settings f or CH4 in the 1st digit and the required register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Customer Configuration Settings:

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

ISDA-B Data Sheet (NZ330)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISL1-2 1

# SMART DUAL LVDT INPUT

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

Crystal Control.

50/60 Hz

line frequency rejection.

Sine Wave Generator.

16 programmable excitation

frequencies. 3V RMS.

Dual Setpoint Outputs.

Open-collector NPN outputs.

+24V excitation.

11-pin Input Connector.

Dual LVDT inputs.

Dual setpoint inputs.

Cable shielding.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Controls ATD sampling speed, excitation frequency and

setpoint outputs.

State-of-the-art Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Synchronous Demodulation.

>130db attenuation of

excitation frequency.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

Ultra Low-noise 16-bit Dual Channel ATD.

Approaching 19-bit performance with additional software filtering.

A high performance dual channel LVDT input module.

A dual LVDT signal conditioning input module interfaced to the Tiger 320 Series Operating System provides programmable excitation frequency, ATD sampling and averaging rate, and high-speed setpoint outputs.

Synchronous demodulation at multiples of line frequency ensures high frequency response applications unhindered by carrier noise.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Excitation Voltage

Excitation Frequency

Temperature Coefficient

Dual LVDT Inputs

Hardware Module Specifications

3 V RMS sine wave, Zero DC component THD < 2% (1.2 kHz). x 16 available (1.2 kHz to 11.52 kHz) as multiples of 50/60 Hz line frequency.

Crystal locked, software driven. 50 ppm /C full scale (typical).

30 k input impedance.

Synchronous demodulation of excitation carrier. > 130 dB rejection of excitation carrier.

500 Hz (3 dB) low-pass filter.

Dual channel A/D convertor approaching 19-bit resolution. Ratiometric operation relative to excitation voltage magnitude.

High-speed Control Outputs Dual high speed open collector transistor outputs 600 mA max. under setpoint control (SP5 / SP6).

Frequency Response

Analog to Digital

Dual Output Rates

Single Fast Output

Software Module Specifications

Rapid & average response outputs.

1 Hz, 4 Hz, 10 Hz, 20 Hz, averaged.

Single channel, increased signal to noise.

4 Hz, 10 Hz, 20 Hz, 40 Hz, averaged.

16 selectable frequencies.

50 / 60 Hz noise rejection.

high speed setpoints.

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

ISL1 / ISL2 configured for dual input LVDTs.

Fast setpoint control outputs activ ate a status LED (SP5) and a +24 V relay coil (SP6).

Figure 1 ISL1 / ISL2 Configured f or Dual LVDT Inputs

### Technical Description

The output to the primary coil of both LVDTs is a

3 V RMS sine w ave. The received LVDT signals are synchronously demodulated and filtered to remove the carrier frequency. The 16-bit A/D convertor has over 130 dB noise rejection at the excitation frequencies and is capab le of 40 Hz averaged output on 45 samples.

Two open collector NPN tr ansistors are a vailable as high-speed controlled outputs. Tiger controller setpoint SP5 controls output CONTROL 1 and SP6 and controls output CONTROL 2.

Figure 2 ISL1 / ISL2 LVDT Functional Schematic

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

### Smart Setup Registers

The Tiger meter uses three smart setup registers to configure all smart input modules. ISL1 / ISL2 requires only smart register 1 (SMT1) and smart register 2 (SMT2) to be configured. See Figure 3.

SMT1 configures both LVDT1 and LVDT2 input signals for line frequency, excitation frequency, and output rate. SMT2 allows LVDT1 and LVDT2 to be selected as a high-speed setpoint outputs, CONTROL 1 from setpoint 5 and CONTROL 2 from setpoint 6.

ISL1 / ISL2 produces the f ollowing four output registers:

The averaged response signal output from LVDT 1.

The averaged response signal output from LVDT 2.

The rapid response signal output from LVDT 1.

One of these registers can be tr ansferred to Channel 1 (CH1) via Code 2, the same or another register to CH2 via Code 4, the same or another register to CH3 via Code 5, and the same or another register to CH4 via Code 6,

LVDT 1 Input Signal

LVDT 2 Input Signal

Figure 3 ISL1 / ISL2 Smar t Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

### Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure smart input module ISL1 / ISL2. Steps 1 to 6 describe ho w to select the line frequenc y, excitation frequenc y, and output rate through SMT1. Steps 7 to 12 describe how to select the control output mode, control 1 and control 2 source through SMT2.

Steps 13 to 18 describe how to select the output registers f or channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the ISL1 / ISL2 input module. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Press the

button.

This menu provides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module ISL1.

Using the

buttons, select:

1st Digit: 50 Hz line frequenc y rejection for 50 Hz po wer supply areas, or 60 Hz line frequenc y

rejection for 60 Hz power supply areas.

2nd Digit: The excitation frequency.

3rd Digit: The output rate.

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

Press the

button three times to enter Code 5. Set Code 5 to [X77].

* Single fast LVDT 1 (LVDT

2 is disabled) (improved signal-tonoise).

Note, the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the ISL1 / ISL2 input module. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup men u. This men u configures the tw o high-speed setpoint outputs.

This menu provides settings unique to smart register 2 of input module ISL1.

9 Select the following control output settings:

1st Digit: Control output mode for the open-collector transistors.

2nd Digit: Control output source for CONTROL 2 (SP6).

3rd Digit: Control output source for CONTROL 1 (SP5).

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

10 Press the

button to save the settings. The display returns to [Cod_5] [X77].

11 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_5] and [SMt2].

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode,

then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

If required enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings for CH4 in the 3rd digit.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

### CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Application Examples

LVDT sensors can be applied to almost all engineer ing applications from civil, mechanical, petrochemical, and power generation, to production, aerospace, defense, and much more.

They can be used on production lines to automatically gauge products for quality control and product sorting. In the power generation and petrochemical industries they can be used, for example, as servo position feedback on actuated equipment such as valves and dampers, or for measuring turbine casing expansion.

Submersible units can be used in mar ine and offshore mining applications, and sensors that meet militar y environmental standards have been applied to defense and aerospace applications.

Dual LVDT smart input module ISL1 / ISL2 is the ideal interf ace between LVDT sensors and the unr ivaled control functionality of the Tiger 320 Ser ies operating system. This combination is ideal f or multi-dimensional linear displacement measurement applications. Programmable excitation v oltage, ultr a-low noise high speed signal processing, and dual control outputs are standard f eatures of this input module.

The following are example applications that show the versatility of the LVDT200 controller.

Example Setup Procedure

An LVDT transducer is fitted to the shak er head of a vibration tester to measure dynamic displacement versus time. The shaker head vibrates at approximately 100 Hz frequency and a 3 mm peak to peak amplitude.

The excitation frequency is set at 2.4 kHz, 24 times g reater than the mechanical vibration frequency, and a 50 Hz line frequency rejection (suitab le for 50 Hz power supply areas). A single channel fast option with a 40 Hz average and a 1600 Hz sampling speed is selected. If this averaged result exceeds 3.500 mm then CONTROL 1 is activated and a buzzer sounds.

1 Set up smart register 1 (SMT1) for 50 Hz line rejection, 2.4 kHz excitation frequency,

and a 40 Hz averaged output rate:

then press the

button.

Display toggles between

Set

2 Select LVDT 1 average output for CH1:

reset to

then press the

button.

Set up smart register 2 (SMT2) to activ ate CONTROL 1 output (SP5) on the LVDT 1 averaged signal:

then press the

button.

Display toggles between

Set

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

Figure 4 Example LVDT Application

ALIGNMENT TOOL

Measured using two LVDT sensors at 90

Signal 1 to CH1 = Sho wn on Display

Signal 2 to CH2 = Use View Mode to view CH2

Signal 1

Signal 2

Operational Display (CH1)

CH2 View Mode

SLOPE INDEXING

Measured using two parallel LVDT sensors (1 2)

Signal 1 minus Signal 2 = Displayed Result

Note:

Select [rESLt] as the data source f or the display in Code 1 of the main prog ramming mode.

Signal 1

Signal 2

Operational Display

showing result of

signal 1 signal 2

THICKNESS MONITORING

Measured using two opposed LVDT sensors (1 + 2)

Signal 1 plus Signal 2 = Displa yed Result

Note:

Select [rESLt] as the data source f or the displa y in Code 1 of the main prog ramming mode.

Signal 1

Signal 2

Operational Display

showing result of

signal 1 + signal 2

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Note:

### The ISL1 / ISL2 dual LVDT smart input module is the

### standard input module f or Texmates LVDT200 dual

### input LVDT controller, but can be used in an y Tiger

### 320 Series controller.

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISL1-2 Data Sheet (NZ360)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISM1

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## MAGNETOSTRICTIVE SMART INPUT MODULE

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

State-of-the-art Time to Digital Converter.

Unprecedented 250 picosecond

resolution on up to 4 independent magnet positions.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Provides 8 output functions.

RS-422 Transceiver.

1 kHz noise immune digital interface.

Setpoint Control.

2 open-collector NPN high speed digital outputs.

8-Pin I/O Connector.

Differential transducer interface, +24 V excitation and setpoint outputs.

Solutions in time for ultra-precise contact-less registration of linear displacement.

Redefining linear displacement measurements, the ISM1 smart input module provides sub-micro meter resolution over the entire length of the positioning equipment. Interfaced with industry standard micro-pulse magnetorestrictive transducers, the combination of the ISM1 and the Tiger 320 operating system deliver four independent linear displacements, four independent rates of change, and two high speed setpoint controls.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

TDC

ISM1

Displacement Resolution

Multi-hit Capability

Transducer Interface

Sample Rate

Transducer Type

Digital Outputs

Gradient (s/inch)

Units

Transducer Type

Displacement

Velocity

Sample Rate

Setpoint Control

Hardware Module Specifications

ACAM Time-to-digital convertor 250 ps time resolution (typical).

In principle 0.7 m or equivalently 28 millionth of an inch.

Up to 4 independent floating magnets read concurrently (representing 4 displacements).

RS422 differential for interrogate & pulse.

Stroke length dependent: 1 kHz < 2000 mm stroke

500 Hz > 2000 mm stroke.

Designed to operate with digital interface leading/ trailing-edge pulse magnetostrictive transducers.

Two latched digital outputs available (open-collector NPN transistor type) operated from Tiger setpoints SP5 & SP6.

Macro Software Inputs

Resolution correction for independent transducer scale factors.

Select inches or millimeters.

Enter leading or trailing edge received pulse format.

Selectable 1-4 independent position calculations.

Selectable 1-4 independent velocity calculations.

1 kHz, 500 Hz or 200 Hz available.

Choice of 8 setpoint sources and inverted logic for latched digital outputs.

* Note, for a quadrature interface option, please see Texmate's Quadrature Smart Input Module IC02/IC03 on data sheet (NZ329).

ISM1 Data Sheet (NZ336)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connecting the ISM1 to a

### Magnetostrictive

### Transducer

The Texmate ISM1 magnetostr ictive smart input module is designed to oper ate with most digital interf ace leading/trailing-edge pulse magnetostr ictive tr ansducers. These include the f ollowing man ufacturers of magnetostrictive transducers:

Balluff.

Gefran.

MTS Systems Corporation.

Novotechnik.

Patriot Sensors and Controls Cor poration.

SanTest.

TR Electronic.

As an example, the ISM1 magnetostr ictive smart input module, shown in Figure 1, interf aces directly with and supplies +24 V excitation voltage to a Balluff micropulse P-style magnetostrictive transducer. The ISM1 can be configured to receiv e either trailing-edge active (P Balluff option) or leading-edge activ e (M Balluff option) pulses.

Note, the ISM1 only suppor ts the P and M digital RS-422 output interf ace options.

Figure 1 Magnetostrictive Input Module ISM1 connected to Balluff Micr opulse Transducer

All setup procedures are carr ied out b y Texmate pr ior to shipping. Customers are responsib le for pinout connections between the controller and the sensor.

Smart Setup Registers

Texmate have a range of smart input modules that require prog ramming through the controllers programming modes. The meter has three smar t setup registers a vailable to configure the installed smar t input module. Input module ISM1 requires only smar t registers 1 and 2 to be set up. The ISM1 input module is configured f or tr ailing/leading-edge activ e receiv ed pulses, sample r ate, n umber of magnet positions, required number of velocities, and setpoint controlled outputs.

Figure 2 shows the logic flow through the ISM1 smar t input module.

### Input Module Setup

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISM1 Data Sheet (NZ336)

### Tiger Macro Development

### System (TDS)

Figure 2 ISM1 Logic Flo w Diagram

Macro Programming

Prior to shipping, Texmate configures the controller with a macro. The macro automates the prog rammable functions a vailable in the controller to perf orm our customers requested functions. The macro is programmed on a PC using Texmates in-house de velopment softw are prog ram, kno wn as the Tiger Development System (TDS) compiler program. The TDS compiler saves the macro as a.bas file that is then downloaded to the controller.

Tiger 320 Macro Overview The Tiger 320 Series of programmable meter controllers have been designed to incorporate the analog and digital functionality of an intelligent controller with the logic of a PLC.

Traditionally, the PLC approach is to build a working application entirely in some form of programming language. The approach used in the Tiger 320 Series of controllers is to b uild an application by selecting the pre-programmed functions of the controller and then adding small amounts of prog rammability and logic where needed.

The operating system of the Tiger 320 controller controls all the pre-prog rammed functions, handling the input, averaging, scaling, linear ization, totalization and m uch more, as w ell as dr iving the displa y, timers, relays, analog and ser ial outputs. Once configured, these functions are e xecuted by the operating system and form the basis of a control system.

To form an advanced automation and control system you only need to write a small program that adds the extra logic required. We call this program a macro. A macro can be wr itten specifically for your application and is used to initiate a sequence, reconfigure, or disable some of the controller functions. With Texmate's

22 I/O plug-in module installed, a macro fur ther expands the Tiger 320 oper ating system with additional digital status inputs and digital s witched outputs.

Custom Macro Programming

Texmates Tiger Development System (TDS) enables a macro to be wr itten and compiled in BASIC, utilizing any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. When y our BASIC prog ram is compiled into Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized.

Macros are useful when implementing a specializ ed control system that cannot be achie ved by the standard configuration capability of the Tiger 320 Operating System. Using the TDS software, functions can be altered or added in a standard controller to perf sequencing functions and mathematical functions.

orm the required job. This ma y typically include logic

Developing a Macro is m uch easier and quicker than programming a PLC, because the basic code required to customize the Tiger meter is considerably less than the ladder logic prog ramming required for PLCs. This is due to the hundreds of functions built into the Tiger controller that can be manipulated or invoked by a macro to fulfill the requirements of almost an y application.

Scrolling display messages can be prog rammed to appear with an y setpoint activation, selected event, or logic input. Easy to read, plain text prompts can be programmed to replace the manual programming codes and provide a user-friendly interface for any custom application.

ISM1 Data Sheet (NZ336) ISM1 Data Sheet (NZ336)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Scrolling Text Messaging

Scrolling text messaging is another bon us from r unning a macro. Any number of messages f or detailed operator instructions, of up to 100 char acters each, can be wr itten into the macro dur ing compilation f or detailed operator instructions, alarm and control applications.

A scrolling text message can be written for OEMs and sensor manufacturers providing informative instructions for setup and calibration procedures.

Alphanumeric Displays

14-segment alphanumeric displays are Texmates display choice for easy to read display text and scrolling text messaging.

7-SEGMENT

14-SEGMENT

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISM1 Data Sheet (NZ336)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISR1-2

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## SINGLE 3-WIRE POTENTIOMETER SMART MODULE

8-pin Input

Connector.

Single 3-wire pot inputs and +2.5 V excitation.

Break-through Performance 24-bit High Resolution Ultra-low Noise

A/D Convertor.

High dynamic range.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity under harsh EMC environments.

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz

Noise Rejection option.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

On-board Digital

Signal Processor.

Optimized signal full scale with average and rapid response outputs.

Incredible resolution for linear position transducer now available.

Designed exclusively for continuous linear displacement measurements, ISR1 and ISR2 provide unprecedented resolution with over 8,000,000 denominator counts available full scale.

Combined with the Tiger 320 Series operating system, the user has the design solution for the most demanding industrial applications.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

A/D Convertor

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Potentiometer Inputs

Resolution

Frequency Select

Output Rates

Gain Select

Hardware Module Specifications

Single channel high performance 24-bit A/D with post processing signal averaging.

0.02 V/count maximum.

40 nV/ C typical. 5 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.002% of full scale maximum.

80 Vp-p.

Single, + 2.5 V excitation (10 mA) ratiometric referenced to A/D.

1:8,000,000 counts of full scale.

ISR1 50 Hz; ISR2 60 Hz.

Software Module Features

A choice of average response outputs, 1-50 Hz.

Optimized for +2.5 Volt excitation.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

Setpoint Timer Functions.

Setpoint Register Reset and Trigger Functions.

On-demand Calibration.

Macro Compiler for PLC Functions.

32-Point Linearization.

Totalizator and Serial Printing.

ISR1-2 Data Sheet (NZ334)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

### Smart Setup Registers

### Programming Procedures

The meter has three smar t setup registers to configure smar t input modules. ISR1 and ISR2 requires smar t register 1 to be configured.

The averaged potentiometer signal can be software selected for Tiger

320 Series meter channels 1, 2, 3, & 4.The signals can be transferred to Channel 1 via Code 2, to Channel 2 via Code 4, to Channel 3 via Code 5, and to Channel 4 via Code 6.

Steps 8 to 17 describe how to select the output registers f or channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Press the

button.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module ISR1.

Using the buttons, select the +2.5 V reference voltage, the +2.5 V potentiometer full scale operating voltage, and the averaged output rate.

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode,

then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Signal output at the A/D sampling rate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

If required enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings for CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Signal output at the A/D sampling rate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

ISR1-2 Data Sheet (NZ334)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Example Setup Procedure

A plant engineer requires a record of the speed at which a r apid (frequency >10 Hz) linear displacement tak es place in an assembly process.

The mechanical shift is monitored b y connection to a 10 K rectilinear potentiometer, wired to an ISR1 3-wire potentiometer smar t input module installed in a Tiger 320 Series meter.

1 Select the +2.5 V reference voltage, the +2.5 V full scale for

a 10 K pot, and the 50 Hz (800 readings) a veraged response for a fast mechanical shift:

then press

button.

Display toggles between

Set

2 Select rate of change signal as speed is to be recor ded:

reset to

then press

button.

Note:

In this example the speed is calculated from the average of 800 samples and output every 20 ms (50 Hz r ate).

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISR3-4

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## DUAL 3-WIRE POTENTIOMETER SMART MODULE

8-pin Input

Connector.

Dual 3-wire pot inputs and +2.5 V excitation.

Ultra-low Noise

16-bit A/D Convertor.

Ratiometric operation on both inputs.

Approaches 19-bit performance

with additional software filtering.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity under harsh EMC environments.

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz

Noise Rejection option.

On-board Digital

Signal Processor.

Optimized signal full scale and averaged output rate.

The interface solution for linear position transducers.

With dual inputs, the ISR3 and ISR4 can excite and perform ratiometric data conversion on two linear potentiometers. Combined with the Tiger 320 Series operating system, this smart module is the design answer for industrial and process control applications involving accurate and continuous linear displacement and/or rate-of-change measurements at up to 100 Hz averaged output rate.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Hardware Module Specifications

A/D Convertor

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Potentiometer Inputs

Potentiometer Resistance

Resolution

Dual channel ultra-low noise 16-bit A/D with effective 19-bit resolution in post processing software.

5 V/count full scale maximum. 40 nV/ C typical. 5 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.003% of full scale maximum.

30 Vp-p typical at 1 Hz output rate.

Dual, separate + 2.5 V excitation (10 mA). ratiometric referenced to A/D.

1 kilohm to 100 kilohm (typical).

1:100,000 counts of full scale.

Output Rates

Gain Select

Frequency Select

Software Module Features

1-20 Hz, POT 1 and POT 2.

50-100 Hz, POT 1 only.

Optimized for +2.5 Volt excitation.

ISR3 50 Hz/ISR4 60 Hz noise rejection (Software selectable).

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

ISR3-4 Data Sheet (NZ332)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

### Smart Setup Registers

The meter has three smart setup register s to configure all smar t input modules. The reference voltage and output rate for both input signals are configured in smart register 1.

Potentiometer signals, POT 1 and PO T 2, are then individually softw are selected for a combination of tw o meter channels. Either signal can be selected for Channel 1 via Code 2, Channel 2 via Code 4, Channel 3 via Code 5, and Channel 4 via Code 6.

Smart Setup Register Operational Flow Diagram

Note both signals cannot be selected for the same channel.

Input Signal 1 (POT 1)

Input Signal 2 (POT 2)

### Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure smart input module ISR3 and ISR4. Steps 1 to 5 describe how to select the line frequency rejection and the output rate through smart register 1.

Steps 7 to 12 describe how to select the output registers for Channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module.

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of the ISR3 and ISR4 input module.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISR3-4 Data Sheet (NZ332)

Using the

input signals.

buttons, select the line frequency rejection and the output rate common to both

Note, POT 1 has two high speed output rates that are not available to POT 2.

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode,

then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

To select channel 1, set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required output register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

To select channel 2, set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required output register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

To select channel 3, enter Code 5 and select the required output register map settings f or CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

Note the output

register map is

different for each

smart input module type.

To select channel 4, enter Code 6 and select the required output register map settings f or CH4 in the 3rd digit.

### CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Note the output

register map is

different for each

smart input module type.

ISR3-4 Data Sheet (NZ332)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

## Calibrate a Channel

Calibrate the required channels

Steps 4 and 5 of the Example Setup Procedure descr ibe how to calibr ate channel 1 and channel 2 to display the x (CH1) and y (CH2) axes. Steps 6 and 7 describe how to set the resolution for CH1 and CH2.

Customer Configuration Settings:

### CH1

### CH2

### CH3

### CH4

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISR3-4 Data Sheet (NZ332)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISS1-2

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## 16-BIT SMART LOAD CELL INPUT MODULE

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz

Noise Rejection option.

On-board Excitation

Voltage Generator.

Enough to power 8 x 350 bridges.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

8-pin Input

Connector.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Provides six output functions including Texmate's unique

dual output rates.

6-wire or 4-wire Bridge Header selectable.

Ultra-low Noise 16-Bit

A/D Convertor.

Approaching 19-bit performance

with additional software filtering.

For the first time, a high performance load cell controller is available at a panel meter price

Combining this input module with the functionality of the Tiger 320 Series Operating System, results in a versatile, powerful controller. Now such tasks as weighing, bagging, batching, and continuous batching control can be performed.

In fact our customers have replaced multi-faceted control systems including weighing controllers, PLCs and timers with a single Tiger controller.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Excitation

Input Range

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Signal processing Rate

Dual output rates

Hardware Module Specifications

5 V DC, 130 mA maximum.

Software selectable for sensors from 1 mV/V to 20 mV/V.

0.08 V/Count maximum.

40 nV/ C typical. 5 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.003% of full scale maximum.

160 nVpp typical at 1 Hz output rate.

50 Hz maximum, 1 Hz minimum.

Software Module Features

Rapid and average response outputs.

Ideal for 2 and 3-speed weighing / bagging systems.

Peak & Valley Outputs Capture Output

Rate of Change Output Frequency Select

Monitoring over and under-shoots.

Hardwire signal capture.

Useful for fine tuning reaction times.

ISS1 50 Hz noise rejection; ISS2 60 Hz noise rejection.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

Auto Zero Maintenance.

Set TARE, Reset TARE.

Setpoint Timer Functions.

Setpoint Register Reset and Trigger Functions.

On-demand Calibration.

Macro Compiler for PLC Functions.

32-Point Linearization.

Totalizator and Serial Printing.

ISS1-2 Data Sheet (NZ327)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

Smart Setup Registers

The meter uses three smart setup registers to configure smart input modules. ISS1 and ISS2 requires only smart register 1 to be set up. This module produces six output register s. One of these registers can be transferred to Channel 1 via Code 2, the same or another register to Channel 2 via Code 4, the same or another register to Channel 3 via Code 5, and the same or another register to Channel 4 via Code 6.

### Programming Procedures

### Connector Pinouts

Press the

enter the main programming mode.

and

buttons at the same time to

Press the

Set Code 2 to [X77].

button three times to enter Code 2.

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Press the

button.

Signal output at the A/D sampling rate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

This menu provides settings unique to the ISS1 input module.

Using the

sensor input, and output rate settings.

buttons, select the rele vant line frequency rejection,

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to ISS1 and ISS2. These registers vary for eac h diff erent smar t input module.

Press the

button.

This takes you back to the Code 2 men u.

Using the

output register map.

buttons, reset the 3rd digit to select an output register from the

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode,

then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Page 2

ISS1-2 Data Sheet (NZ327)

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Signal output at the A/D sampling rate.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

If required enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings for CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

** Hardwire initiated from meter Capture pin.

ISS1-2 Data Sheet (NZ327)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Example Load Cell Setup Procedure For example, a 2 mV/V load cell requires maxim um signal resolution and minimum signal noise for a slowly varying change in weight. Line frequency is 50 Hz. As an option, the user also requires to monitor the raw signal.

Select a load input of 2 mV/V and a 1 Hz averaged output rate with the averaged signal read by CH1 and the rapid response signal read by CH3.

1 Select LINE FREQ UENCY as 50 Hz f or 2 mV/V

with a 1 Hz averaged OUTPUT RATE:

then press

Set

Select the AVERAGED SIGNAL for CH1:

Select the RAPID RESPONSE SIGNAL for CH3:

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

ISS1-2 Data Sheet (NZ327)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISS3-4

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## 24-BIT SMART LOAD CELL INPUT MODULE

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz

Noise Rejection option.

On-board Excitation

Voltage Generator.

Enough to power 8 x 350 bridges.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Provides six output functions including Texmate's unique

dual output rates.

Break-thru performance

24-bit high resolution, ultra-low noise

A/D Convertor.

High dynamic range.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity under harsh EMC environments.

8-pin Input

Connector.

Includes shield drive

to minimize leakage

effects.

6-wire or 4-wire Bridge Header selectable.

For the first time an exceptionally high performance load cell controller is available at a panel meter price

Combining this input module with the functionality of the Tiger 320 Series 32-bit operating system results in a versatile, powerful controller. Now such tasks as weighing, bagging, batching, and continuous batching control can be performed.

In fact our customers have replaced multi-faceted control systems including weighing controllers, PLCs and timers with a single 320 Series controller.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Excitation

Input Range

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Signal Processing Rate

Line Frequency Rejection

Hardware Module Specifications

5 V DC, 130 mA maximum.

Software selectable for sensors from 1 mV/V to 20 mV/V.

0.02 V/Count maximum.

40 nV/ C typical. 5 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.002% of full scale maximum.

80 nVp-p typical at 1 Hz output rate.

100 Hz maximum, 1 Hz minimum.

ISS3 50 Hz (4.096 MHz xtal); ISS4 60 Hz (4.192 MHz xtal).

Dual output rates

Software Module Features

Rapid and average response outputs.

Ideal for 2 and 3-speed weighing / bagging systems.

Peak & Valley Outputs Capture Output

Rate of Change Output

Monitoring over and under-shoots.

Hardwire signal capture.

Useful for fine tuning reaction times.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

Auto Zero Maintenance.

Set TARE, Reset TARE.

Setpoint Timer Functions.

Setpoint Register Reset and Trigger Functions.

On-demand Calibration.

Macro Compiler for PLC Functions.

32-Point Linearization.

Totalizer and Serial Printing.

ISS3-4 Data Sheet (NZ321)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

### Smart Setup Registers

The meter uses three smar t input modules. ISS3 and ISS4 require only smart register 1 to be configured.

t setup registers to configure all smar

These modules produce six output registers. One of these registers can be transferred to channel 1 via Code 2, the same or another register to Channel 2 via Code 4, the same or another register to Channel 3 via Code 5, and the same or another register to Channel

4 via Code 6.

Smart Setup Register Operational Flow Diagram

Input Signal

### Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure smart input module ISS3 or ISS4.Steps 1 to 6 describe how to select the sensor input and output rate settings through smar t register 1.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS3-4 Data Sheet (NZ321)

Press the

button.

This menu provides settings unique to the ISS3 or ISS4 input module.

Using the

output rate settings.

buttons, select the rele vant sensor input and

Press the

button. This takes you back to the Code 2 men u.

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to ISS3/ISS4. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Using the

register from the output register map.

buttons, reset the 3rd digit to select an output

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

To select channel 1, set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

To select channel 2, enter Code 4 and select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

To select channel 3, enter Code 5 and select the required post processing settings f or CH3 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

From Procedure 12, page 4

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

ISS3-4 Data Sheet (NZ321)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

To select channel 4, enter Code 6 and select the required post processing settings for CH4 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

To Procedure 11, page 3

Example Load Cell Setup Procedure For example, a 2 mV/V load cell requires maxim um signal resolution and minimum signal noise for a slowly varying change in w eight. As an option, the user also requires to monitor the r aw signal.

Select a load input of 5 mV/V and a 1 Hz averaged output rate with the averaged signal read by CH1 and the rapid response signal read by CH3.

1 Select LOAD INPUT for 5 mV/V with a 1 Hz a veraged

OUTPUT RATE:

then press

Set

Select AVERAGED SIGNAL for CH1:

Select RAPID RESPONSE SIGNAL for CH3:

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS3-4 Data Sheet (NZ321)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISS5-6

# 16-BIT SMART DUAL LOAD CELL MODULE

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

Crystal

Controlled 50/60 Hz

Noise Rejection option.

On-board Excitation

Voltage Generator.

Enough to power 8 x 350 bridges.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity under harsh EMC environments.

8-pin Input

Connector.

Dual load cell and excitation.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Provides output rates, selectable gains and digital filtering

for dual load cell inputs.

Ultra-low noise 16-bit

A/D Convertor.

Approaches 19-bit performance

with additional software filtering.

6-wire or 4-wire Bridge Header selectable.

The revo lution in intelligent loa d c el l c o ntr ol l e rs co nti n u es wi t h our du al i n put modu l e.

This powerful input module defines the next generation of intelligent load cell controllers, encapsulating high performance and precision measurement with dual input functionality.

When combined with the Tiger 320 Series operating system, the operator has all the solutions to weighing, bagging and continuous batching control applications. All these features plus the bonus of dual load cell inputs make this module the obvious choice over dated weighing controllers, PLC and timer technology.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Excitation

Input Range

Input Channels

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Signal Processing Rate

Frequency Select

Hardware Module Specifications

5 V DC, 130 mA maximum.

Software selectable for sensors from 1 mV/V to 20 mV/V.

Dual, independent gains. Zero X-talk between channels each having 19-bit effective resolution.

0.08 V/Count maximum.

40 nV/ C typical. 200 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.003% of full scale maximum.

160 nVp-p typical at 1 Hz output rate.

20 Hz maximum, 1 Hz minimum.

50/60 Hz noise rejection.

Output Rates

Gain Select

Software Module Features

A choice of average response outputs, 1-20 Hz.

Choice of industry standards, 1-20 mV/V.

Frequency Select

50/60 Hz noise rejection.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

ISS5-6 Data Sheet (NZ328)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

Smart Setup Registers

The meter uses three smar t setup registers to configure smart input modules. ISS5 and ISS6 require smart registers 1 and 2 to be set up. Because this is a dual input module, independent sensor inputs can be softw are selected for channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Sensor 1 and/or sensor 2 can be transferred to Channel

1 via Code 2, to Channel 2 via Code 4, to Channel 3 via Code 5, and to Channel 4 via Code 6.

### Connector Pinouts

### Programming Procedures

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module.

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module ISS5.

Using the

sensor 1 input, and the output rate common to both sensor inputs.

buttons, select the rele vant line frequenc y rejection,

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

Press the

button 3 times to enter Code 5. Set Code 5 to [X77].

Note the output register map is diff erent f or eac h smar t input module.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS5-6 Data Sheet (NZ328)

Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup menu.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 2 of the ISS5 and ISS6 input module.

Using the

buttons, select the sensor 2 input from the 3rd digit.

Press the

button to save the settings.

The display toggles between [Cod_5] and [X77].

Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to 0 to lea ve the smart register 2 menu.

Press the

and

button at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings (sensor 1 or sensor 2) in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

If required enter Code 4 and select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

If required enter Code 5 and select the required post processing settings f or CH3 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

From Procedure 18, page 4

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

ISS5-6 Data Sheet (NZ328)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required post processing settings f or CH4 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

To Procedure 17, page 3

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS5-6 Data Sheet (NZ328)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISS7-8

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

## 16-BIT SMART 4-CHANNEL LOAD CELL MODULE

IDC Shielded Cable.

In user selectable lengths

16-pin Load Cell Terminal Block.

Din rail mount.

Up to 8 load cells, 6-wire configuration.

Ultra-low noise 16-bit

A/D Convertor.

Approaches 19-bit performance

due to software filtering.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity under harsh EMC environments.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Choice of averaging and sample rates.

4 Averaged output.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

T h e c o s t e f f e c t i v e s o l u t i o n t o m o n i t o r i n g u p t o e i g h t l o a d c e l l s o n f o u r i n d i v i d u a l c h a n n e l s.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Hardware Module Specifications

5 V DC, 130 mA maximum.

Software selectable for sensors from 1 mV/V to 20 mV/V.

Quad, independent gains. Zero X-talk between channels each having 19-bit effective resolution.

0.08 V/Count maximum.

40 nV/ C typical. 5 ppm/ C of full scale maximum. 0.003% of full scale maximum.

160 nVp-p typical at 1 Hz output rate.

10 Hz maximum, 0.5 Hz minimum.

Software Module Features

A choice of average response outputs, 0.5-10 Hz.

Choice of industry standards, 1-20 mV/V.

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Introduction

ISS7/8 is a 4-channel smar t load cell input module that can pro vide excitation for a maximum of eight load cells. The input module can receive four independent sensor input signals through four channels from any combination of up to eight load cells.

Being a smar t input module means that it can perf orm the f ollowing pre-processing functions on the input signals of all f our channels, prior to processing in the Tiger 320 meter:

Select the line frequency for all four inputs.

Select the signal range for all four inputs.

Select the averaged output rate for all four inputs.

Input Module

Tiger 320 Series Controller

Figure 1 Up to Eight Load Cell Sensor Inputs into Four Input Module Channels

The preferred method of connecting load cells to the ISS7/8 input module is via the DIN rail mount terminal block. Unlike simple junction bo xes that combine all load cell input signals into one sensor input prior to processing in a controller, the load cell terminal block can interface eight load cells into as many as four independent sensor groups. For example, sensor input 1 could have four load cells, sensor input 2 could ha ve two load cells, sensor input 3 could ha ve one load cell, and sensor input 4 could also ha ve one load cell. This provides four averaged signals for pre-processing via the four channels of the input module's 16-bit A/D con vertor and built-in microprocessor.

Diagnostic Capability

Having four independent inputs provides a diagnostic capability to quickly detect which sensor input is s vie w faulty. Using the meter modes, all four input channel readings can be quic kly vie wed. This allows incorrectly installed, connected, or damaged load cells to be quickly identified and then repaired.

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 4

Figure 2 Viewing all Four Channels

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

### Component Layout

### Connecting Load Cells to

### the Input Module

Weight Distribution Monitoring

Having four independent load cell inputs is also useful in the load distr ibution and wind loading areas of dr y mater ial handling. With individual inputs from each support on a silo, it is possible to detect uneven distribution of mass within the silo (See Figure 3). Wind loading is a potentially dangerous hazard with high silos, especially when empty. Setpoint alarms can be configured for each load cell to activ ate when the wind load exceeds a pre-set limit.

Figure 3 Weight Distribution in Dry Material Silo

See

Connecting Load Cells

to the Input Module for connection details

Figure 4 ISS7/8 Input Module Component La yout

Connecting the load cells directly to the input module is an option, b ut means that a maxim um of only f our load cells can be connected and processed. In most cases connecting through the terminal b lock simplifies connections and allo ws for up to eight load cells to be connected (See Figure 5).

The e xternal pinouts betw een the input module and the ter minal b lock are sho wn in the tab le opposite:

1 3

2 4

9 11

Figure 5 Load Cell to Input Module Connections

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Connection to the DIN rail mount terminal block and the input module is via a shielded 16-wire IDC cable available in user selectable lengths. For example, the Tiger 320 controller and input module could be sited about 5 meters from the load cells. In this case, the terminal block would be located close to the load cells and connected, b y a 5 meter length of IDC cable, to the controller housed in an enclosure. Also, the controller could possib ly be linked to a central control through a serial communications link (See Figure 6).

Figure 6 Example of Three Load Cells Connected to the Meter via the Terminal Block

Alternatively, both the controller and the ter minal block could be mounted on a DIN r ail within an enclosure and connected using a standard shor t ribbon cable (See Figure 7).

Figure 7 Example of Single Load Cell Connected to the Meter via the Terminal Block

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Smart Setup Registers

The meter uses three smar t setup registers to configure smar t input modules. ISS7 and ISS8 require smart registers 1 and 2 to be set up.

This input module produces four output registers, each being the averaged result of one or more input sensors. One of these registers can be transferred to CH1 via Code 2, the same or another register tr ansferred to CH2 via Code 4, the same or another register tr ansferred to CH3 via Code 5, and the same or another register tr ansferred to CH4 via Code 6.

Smart register 1 allows you to select the following settings:

A line frequency of 50 or 60 Hz f or all four sensor inputs.

The input signal range for sensor input 1 only from 1, 2, 3, or 20 mV/V.

And the output r ate for all f our sensor inputs from 0.5, 1, 5, or 10 Hz

(Note: If more than one type of load cell is installed, the output rate selected must correspond to the load cell requir ing the fastest output rate).

Smart register 2 allows you to select the input signal r ange for sensor inputs 2, 3, and 4.

Smart Setup Register Operational Flow Diagram

Averaged Sensor Input 1

Averaged Sensor Input 2

Averaged Sensor Input 3

Averaged Sensor Input 4

### Programming Procedures

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note the output register map is diff erent f or eac h smart input module.

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module ISS7/8.

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

Using the

range of sensor 1, and the output rate common to all sensor inputs.

buttons, select the relevant line frequency rejection for all input sensors, the input

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

output register map.

buttons, reset the 3rd digit in Code 2 to select an output register (sensor) from the

Note, sensor 1 would normally be selected as the output register as this output is tr ansferred to channel 1 in the meter.

Press the

button 3 times to enter Code 5. Set Code 5 to [X77].

Note the output register map is diff erent f or eac h smar t input module.

8 Press the

button.

This setting enters the smart register 2 code setup menu.

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to ISS7/8. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Using the

from the 2nd digit, and select the sensor 2 input from the 3rd digit.

buttons, select the sensor 4 input from the 1st digit, select the sensor 3 input

Press the

button to save the settings.

The display toggles between [Cod_5] and [X77].

Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to 0 to lea ve the smart register 2 menu.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

15 Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing r ate for sensor 1 in the 1st digit and the

required register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

If required enter Code 4 and select the required register map settings f or sensor 2 in the 2nd digit.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

## CH2

If required enter Code 5 and select the required post processing settings f or sensor 3 in the 1st digit and the required register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required post processing settings f or sensor 4 in the 1st digit and the required register map setting in the 3rd digit.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Example Setup Procedure

Our customer requires to monitor the w eight in a grain silo and also control dispensing the grain (See Figure 8).

Texmate installed an ISS7/8 input module connected to the load cells via a terminal block. Load cell sensors 2, 3, and 4 are installed belo w the silo legs and are used to monitor the silo w eight. They are 20 tonne sensors with a 20 mV/V sensor signal. Load cell sensor 1 is used to control grain dispensing and is a 100 kg sensor with a 2 mV/V sensor signal.

All four load cells are configured with a 10 Hz output r ate. This is necessary to keep up with the rate the grain is emptied from the silo.

1 Select 50 Hz input line frequenc y, with a 10 Hz averaged output rate for all sensors. Select a 2 mV/V sensor input for sensor 1:

then press

button.

Display toggles between

Set

2 Select 20 mV/V voltage range for sensors 2, 3, and 4:

reset to

then press

button.

Display toggles between

Set

3 Select sensor 1 as the dispensing weight f or CH1:

select

4 Select the silo leg sensor 2 load cell f or CH2:

select

5 Select the silo leg sensor 3 load cell f or CH3:

select

6 Select the silo leg sensor 4 load cell f or CH4:

select

Figure 8 Example 1: Monitoring Weight and Distribution

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISS7-8 Data Sheet (NZ346)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISSA

# QUAD RESISTIVE DISPLACEMENT SENSOR

### Fits Tiger 320 Series

11-pin Input Connector.

Quad 3-wire Pot inputs & +2.5VDC Excitation.

Ultra low-noise 16-bit SD Dual Channel ATD.

Ratiometric operation.

Approaching 19-bit performance

with additional software filtering.

On-board Digital Signal Processor.

Choice of averaging and sample rates.

4 Averaged outputs.

State-of-the-art Electromagnetic

Noise Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Crystal Controlled Line

Frequency Rejection.

50 / 60Hz line frequency rejection.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

Adding 4 dimensions to linear or rotative displacement registration.

Quad inputs, complete with excitation voltage and accurate ratiometric sensing of slider or rotative position, deliver multiple axis linear displacement sensing or similar resistive measurements. Designed to interface with Tiger 320 Series controllers, the ISSA provides the capacity for accurate and continuous process control and feedback systems.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Hardware Module Specifications

Independent +2.5 V excitation (10 mA).

ISSA

Software Module Specifications

1, 5, 10, 20, or 50/60 Hz output rate for all channels.

ISSA Data Sheet (NZ354)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

Quad 3-wire Potentiometer Smart Module connected to four linear displacement transducers.

Figure 1 ISSA Quad 3-wire P otentiometer Smart Input Module

### Smart Setup Registers

The Tiger meter uses three smart setup registers to configure all smar t input modules. The line frequency rejection (50 / 60 Hz) and the a veraged output rate are configured in smart register 1 (SMT1). See Figure 2.

Potentiometer signals, Pot 1, Pot 2, Pot 3, and Pot 4, are then individually software selected for the four input channels. Either signal can be selected f or CH1 via Code 2, CH2 via Code 4, CH3 via Code 5, and CH4 via Code 6. Note, two signals cannot be selected f or the same channel.

Input Signal 1 (Pot 1)

Input Signal 2 (Pot 2)

Input Signal 3 (Pot 3)

Input Signal 4 (Pot 4)

Figure 2 ISSA Smar t Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

### Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure smar t input module ISSA.

Steps 1 to 5 describe how to select the line frequency and the output rate through SMT1.

Steps 7 to 12 describe how to select the output registers f or channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the Quad 3-wire Potentiometer input module. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSA Data Sheet (NZ354)

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module ISSA.

Using the buttons, select either 50 or 60 Hz line frequency rejection in the 1st digit and the output rate common to all f our input signals in the 3rd digit.

2nd digit settings are not rele vant and should be left at z ero (0).

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode,

then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

2nd digit settings are not rele vant and should be left at z ero (0).

## CH1

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

ISSA Data Sheet (NZ354)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Enter Code 5 and select the required output register map settings f or CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Enter Code 6 and select the required output register map settings f or CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSA Data Sheet (NZ354)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISSB

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

# RTD & SMART 16-BIT LOAD CELL INPUT MODULE

State-of-the-art Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Constant Current Source.

Accurate

RTD excitation.

11-pin Input Connector.

Load cell and RTD sensors.

On-board Excitation Voltage

Generator.

+5 V, 130 mA.

Crystal Controlled 50/60 Hz Line Frequency Rejection.

Load Cell Bridge Header.

6-wire or 4-wire Selectable.

Ultra Low-noise 16-bit

A/D Converter.

Approaching 19-bit performance with additional software filtering.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

On-board Digital Signal Processor.

Provides 6 output functions.

RTD & high performance load cell combination.

A smart input module designed to monitor temperature using an RTD sensor and weight using a load cell.

Ideal for applications that calculate fluid volume from weight and density measurements corrected for temperature changes.

Combined with the powerful Tiger 320 Series programmable meter controller, continuous monitoring and control of accurate volume versus cost calculations are a reality.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

ISSB (50/60 Hz)

RTD (CH1)

Excitation

Sensor Types

Wiring

Hardware Module Specifications

1.5 mA DC continuous.

Pt (100 ) 385 & 395, Ni 120 & Cu 10.

3-wire excitation & lead compensation.

(CH2 / CH3 / CH4)

Load Cell

Excitation

Input Range

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input noise

Signal Processing Rate

Wiring

Guard

5 V DC, 130 mA maximum.

Software selectable for sensors 1 mV/V to 20 mV/V.

0.08 V/ count maximum. 40 nV/C typical. 5 ppm/C of full scale maximum. 0.003% of full scale maximum.

160 nV pp typical at 1 Hz output rate.

50 Hz maximum, 1 Hz minimum.

4-wire & 6-wire selectable.

Shield 2.5 V common mode voltage.

Load Cell

Dual Output Rates

Peak & Valley Outputs Capture Output

Rate of Change Output Line Frequency Rejection

Software Module Features

Rapid and average response outputs.

Monitoring over and under-shoots.

Hardwire signal capture.

Useful for fine tuning reaction times.

50/60 Hz selectable.

ISSB Data Sheet (NZ347)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

Figure 1 ISSB Input Module Showing 4-wire Load Cell

Figure 2 ISSB Input Module Showing 6-wire Bridge and

and 3-wire RTD Configuration

3-wire RTD Configuration

### Smart Setup Registers

The meter uses three smar t setup registers to configure all smar t input modules. The ISSB input module requires only smart register 1 to be set up.

Input

Signal

Figure 3 ISSB Smar t Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

Internally, the RTD input is automatically assigned to channel 1

(CH1) and must be set up through Code 2. The RTD input feeds directly through the input module m ultiplexer to the meter s 17bit A/D converter, and then to the microprocessor for further processing.

The load cell input is processed in the input module s 16-bit A/D converter and digital signal processor. It is then f ed to some or all of the three remaining channels, CH2, CH3, CH4, where one of six outputs can be selected f or each channel from the output register map. Smart register 1 must be set up for the load cell to define the line frequency rejection, the sensor input in milliv olts per volt, and the output r ate.

Figure 4 ISSB Smart Setup Registers Signal Flow Diagram

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Load Cell Setup

1 Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu of the load cell input.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module.

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSB Data Sheet (NZ347)

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module ISSB.

Using the

cell input, and output rate settings.

buttons, select the relevant line frequency rejection, load

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

### RTD Setup

6 Using the

buttons, set Code 2 to [X2X] to select a 3-wire RTD sensor for the CH1 measurement task.

In the 3rd digit, select the R TD type.

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

settings and return to the operational display.

and

buttons at the same time to save the RTD Code 2

## Select a Load Cell Channel

Select the load cell output register f or CH2, CH3, or CH4

8 Press the

and

button at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode.

Press the

button five times to enter Code 4.

To select an output register for CH2, enter Code 4 and select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

Note, the 1st and 3rd digits must be set to 0.

## CH2

Note the capture and rate of change registers can not be selected in Code 4 for CH2.

If required enter Code 5 and select the required post processing setting f or CH3 in the 2nd digit and the required output register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

Note the register map is different for each smart input module type.

ISSB Data Sheet (NZ347)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

If required enter Code 6 and select the required post processing setting f or CH4 in the 1st digit and the required register map setting in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

Figure 5 Example Milk Dispensing Tank

### Customer Configuration Settings:

RTD only

## CH1

Load Cell only

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSB Data Sheet (NZ347)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate ISSC-D

### Fits Tiger 320 Series

# 16-BIT LOAD CELL/DUAL STATUS INPUT

State-of-the-art Electromagnetic

Noise Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

On-board Excitation.

+5VDC, (120mA).

Optional Excitation

Header Status Inputs.

11-pin Input Connector.

Load cell bridge and 2 status inputs.

Crystal Controlled Line

Frequency Rejection.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

On-board Digital Signal Processor.

Provides 6 output functions.

Bridge Header.

6-wire or 4-wire selectable.

Ultra low-noise 16-bit SD Dual Channel ATD.

Approaching 19-bit performance

with additional software filtering.

High performance load cell controller with dual status inputs.

Now available in Texmate's family of intelligent load cell input modules is the ISSC 50 Hz and the ISSD 60 Hz input module. With additional dual status inputs, standard weighing tasks can now utilize external control signals. When combined with the Tiger 320 Series controller, a versatile and interactive control system is now possible. For example, a continuous belt weigher with an encoder speed sensor.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Hardware Module Specifications

Software Module Features

Some Relevant Tiger 320 Series Operating System Features

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

ISSC / ISSD input module showing 6-wire load cell configuration and two status inputs connected to limit s witches.

Note:

Both status excitation headers are in the ON position to provide voltage transition from +24 V to 0 V on switch closure.

Load cell header selected for 6-wire load cell.

Figure 1 ISSC / ISSD Configured f or 6-wire Load Cell and Two Status Inputs

ISSC / ISSD input module sho wing 4-wire load cell configuration and one status input connected to a pro ximity switch.

Status input D1 is the signal from an open collector NPN transistor output in a pro ximity detector. Status e xcitation header D2 m ust be in the ON position f or the tr ansistor to provide +24 V to GND voltage transitions.

D2 is not connected.

Figure 2 ISSC / ISSD Configured f or 4-wire Load Cell and One Status Input

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

### Technical Description

The load cell input signal is processed in the input module s 16-bit A/D converter and digital signal processor from where it can be fed to either channel 3 (CH3) or channel 4 (CH4) or both. Status input D1 is internally assigned to channel 1 (CH1) and status input D2 is inter nally assigned to channel 2 (CH2).

CH1 is configured f or frequency measurement f or D1 in Code 2. CH2 is configured f or frequency measurement for D2 in Code 4. Selecting the load cell output f or CH3 is configured in Code 5 and f or CH4 in Code 6.

The line frequency rejection setting, sensor input r ange in mV/V, and the output rate are all selected in the smart register 1 (SMT1) menu in Code 2.

### Smart Setup Registers

Figure 3 ISSC / ISSD Signal Flo w Diagram

The Tiger meter uses three smar requires only smart register 1 (SMT1) to be configured. See Figure 4.

t setup registers to configure all smar

t input modules. ISSC / ISSD

SMT1 configures the load cell input signal for line frequency rejection, input signal range in mV/V, and output rate. SMT1 produces the following six output registers from the load cell input:

Averaged signal.

Rapid response signal*.

Peak signal*.

Valley signal*.

Capture signal**.

Rate-of-change signal.

Note:

* Signal output at the A/D sampling rate. ** Hardware initiated from meter CAPTURE pin.

Load Cell

Input Signal

Figure 4 ISSC / ISSD Smar t Setup Register Operational Flow Diagram

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Programming Procedures

The f ollowing prog ramming procedures co ver all the steps required to configure smar ISSC/ISSD:

t input module

Steps 1 to 7:

Code 2 SMT1

1) Line frequency rejection.

2) Signal range in mV/V.

3) Output rate.

Steps 8 to 9:

Code 2 CH1

Frequency range for status input D1.

Steps 10 to 12:

Code 4 CH2

Frequency range for status input D2.

Steps 13 to 14:

Code 5 CH3

Output register for load cell input.

Steps 15 to 16:

Code 6 CH4

Output register for load cell input.

SMT1 Setup

Enter Code 2 and then enter SMT1 to configure line frequency rejection, signal r ange, and output rate settings.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the ISSC / ISSD input module. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Press the

button to enter SMT1.

This menu provides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module ISSC/ISSD.

Using the

buttons, select:

1st Digit: 50 Hz line frequency rejection for 50 Hz power supply areas, or 60 Hz line frequency

rejection for 60 Hz power supply areas.

2nd Digit: The sensor input range.

3rd Digit: The output rate.

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

Press the

buttons to return to the operational display.

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

## Channel Setup

Configure the required channel for each input signal type

Status Input D1: Set up CH1 in Code 2.

Status Input D2: Set up CH2 in Code 4.

Load Cell Input: Set up CH3 in Code 5 or CH4 in Code 6.

Status Input D1

Enter Code 2 and select the frequency r ange for CH1.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main

programming mode, then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Set Code 2 to [X4X] to configure status input D1 on CH1.

1st Digit: Not relevant digital input D1.

2nd Digit: Select 4 to enter the frequency range menu for digital input D1.

3rd Digit: Select the required frequency range setting for digital input D1.

## CH1

Status Input D2

Enter Code 4 and select the digital input f or CH2.

Press the

button twice to enter Code 4.

Set Code 4 to [3X0] to configure status input D2 on CH2.

1st Digit: Select 3 to enter the second digital input men u.

2nd Digit: Select the frequency range for digital input D2.

3rd Digit: Select 0 to apply No user defined linearization on CH2.

## CH2

Press the

button to exit Code 4 and enter Code 5.

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

Load Cell Input

The load cell input can be selected f or CH3 via Code 5 or CH4 via Code 6.

Set Code 5 to [07X] and select the required load cell output register f or CH3 in the 3rd digit.

1st Digit: Set to 0 to select Direct Display of Input.

2nd Digit: Select 7 to enter the output register map f or the load cell signal.

3rd Digit: Select the required output register setting f or the load cell signal.

## CH3

Note, the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the ISSC / ISSD input module. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Press the

button to exit Code 5 and enter Code 6.

If a load cell output is required on CH4 set Code 6 to [07X] and select the required load cell output register f or CH4 in the 3rd digit.

1st Digit: Set to 0 to select Direct Display of Input.

2nd Digit: Select 7 to enter the output register map f or the load cell signal.

3rd Digit: Select the required output register setting f or the load cell signal.

## CH4

Note, the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the ISSC / ISSD input module. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

### Example Setup Procedure

In our example, a hopper fills boxes travelling along a conveyor belt. A rotary encoder monitors the conveyor speed and a light beam sensor indicates when the bo x to be filled is in position belo w the hopper. A load cell under the conveyor weighs the box.

The rotary encoder is connected to status input D1 and assigned to CH1. The light beam sensor is connected to status input D2 and assigned to CH2. The load cell is configured f or 3 mV/V input with 50 Hz line frequency rejection. As the boxes are filled relatively quickly, the averaged output rate is set to 10 Hz on CH3.

The frequency output from the encoder is in the 0 to 1 kHz r ange (360 pulse/revolution). The light sensor has its beam broken at a much slower rate.

Hopper Gate

Rotary encoder

feedback for

motor speed

control

Light

Sensor

Weight

CH3 or CH4

D2 (CH2)

D1 (CH1)

Load Cell

Speed

Controller

Relay Outputs

Figure 5 Load Cell with Dual Status Inputs

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main prog ramming mode. Press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

1 Set up smart register 1 (SMT1) for 50 Hz line rejection, a 3 mV/V range, and 10 Hz averaged output rate:

select

then press the

button.

Display toggles between

Set

2 Select the 1 kHz frequency range for the encoder on CH1:

then press the

button twice.

Select the slowest frequency range for the light sensor on CH2:

select

button.

Select the averaged load cell signal for CH3:

select

then press the

button.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n the main programming mode.

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

1st Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

ISSC-D Data Sheet (NZ348)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IST1-2

# 3-RTD, 2-PROCESS, COUNTER INPUTS

### SMART INPUT MODULE

16-pin Terminal Block.

3 RTD Inputs, 2 Process Inputs, 1 Counter Input.

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Linearization RTDs 20 Hz averaged outputs 16-bit precision comparator function.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

IDC Shielded Cable.

In user selectable lengths.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Multiple inputs processed with powerful signal conditioning.

IST1 and IST2 are smart input modules that can monitor a combination of mixed temperature, process, and counter inputs. Both modules can accept three triple 3-wire RTD sensors, two 0-10 V / 4-20 mA process inputs, and a frequency input. Applied in multiple-point temperature measurement and automation / control applications, these modules can be user programmed to process any four of the six inputs, or programmed with a macro to process all six inputs.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Hardware Module Specifications

IST1 (50 Hz Rejection) IST2 (60 Hz Rejection)

RTD

Triple-input RTD

Excitation Current

Resolution & Range

Process Inputs

Dual Process Inputs

Mode

Counter CH1 Only Single Counter

Analog-to-digital

3-wire RTD configuration. Choice of Pt385 or Pt392.

160 A DC constant current source, ratiometric referenced to ATD.

0.1 C, 200 C to +850 C.

Bipolar, 88 mV full scale.

Voltage or current range set by attenuation resistors.

Configured in Tiger 320 controller.

Dual channel sigma delta ATD convertor.

16-bit resolution.

Shield drive +2.5 V.

Line Frequency Rejection

RTD Type

RTD Linearization

2-point Calibration

Sampling Speed

Software Module Specifications

50/60 Hz software selectable.

Pt385 / Pt392 sofware selectable.

On-board linearization tables for RTD.

Simple 2-point calibration of RTD & process inputs using Tiger 320 Series software.

800 / 960 Hz each channel, 20 Hz averaged outputs.

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Component Layout

Connector Block

Interface to Sensors

See Connector Pinouts

for connection details

Attenuation Resistors

Used to set process inputs full scale

Figure 1 IST1/IST2 Triple RTD, Dual Process, Counter Smart Input Module

### Connector Pinouts

Connecting the sensors directly to the input module is an option, but it is far easier to connect sensors via the supplied 16-pin terminal block.

The external pinouts between the input module and the terminal block are shown in Figure 2.

1 3

2 4

9 11

16-pin

Connectors

Interface

to Tiger

Controller

Input

Module

IST1

3 M IDC Ribbon Cable

DIN-Rail

Mounted

Terminal

Block

16-pin Screw

Terminal Block

Interface to

Sensors

Figure 2 IST1/IST2 to 16-pin DIN-Rail Mounted Terminal Block Connections

Page 2 Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Example

Triple 3-wire RTDs connected to the terminal block in series.

In Figure 3, a magnetostrictive displacement sensor having a 0-10 V output and a resistive type displacement sensor derive their power from the input modules +24 V excitation and act as two process inputs. The counter input is a square wave generator and is normally a flow sensor or optical pickup type also receiving +24 V.

### Overview

Figure 3 Triple 3-wire RTDs connected to the terminal block in series

There are two methods of configuring the IST1/IST2 smart input module:

By the user through the front panel using the code menus, or

By preconfiguring the controller with a macro.

Front Panel Programming

The controller has four input channels available for processing sensor input signals when programming through the front panel. All six sensors can be connected to the input module at the same time, but only four can be selected and processed at any one time.

Macro Programming

With a macro installed, the controller can process all six sensor input signals at the same time. A macro can be either pre-compiled and installed by Texmate before the module leaves the factory, or compiled and installed by the customer. See Page 10 for a brief overview of the Tiger Macro Development System (TDS).

A full set of tutorial documents for macro programming are available online at www.texmate.com.

Alternatively, printed copies can be sent on request.

Technical Description

Input module IST1/IST2 is designed for 3-wire RTDs that are either 100 type Pt385 or Pt392. A constant current source ratiometric referenced to a precision 16-bit ATD drives all three RTDs wired in series at the

Therefore, if only a single or dual RTD combination is required, the unused RTD inputs must be short circuited to ensure the constant current loop is maintained.

Example of dual RTD with RTD3 inputs short circuited to maintain current integrity

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3 Page 3

Functional Schematic

16-pin DIN-Rail

Terminal Block

RTD's

Dual

Process

Counter

Filtering

Multiplexers

EMF

EMF

EMF

Counter Input

MUX1

CH 1

MUX2

CH 2

Shield

Driver

+ 5 V

5 V

GND

+ 24 V

Exc.

Figure 4 Input Module IST1/IST2 Functional Schematic Diagram

The input module

accepts a counter or input such as pulse from a paddlewheel flow sensor or equivelant. If this option is used, CH1 automatically defaults

as the counter input.

External +24 V excitation and return is available to power external transducers if required.

Contact Texmate for

your required process

input type.

P1+

Example of attenuating

0-10 V to required signal range

0 to 10 V Full Scale

1 Megohm

8.06 k

0 to 75 mV Full Scale

Example of selecting

the correct current

shunt (4 ) to achieve a 0-80 mV signal corresponding to a 0-20 mA constant current input.

P1

P2+

0 to 20 mA

0 ohm

Current

Shunt

4 ohm

0 to 80 mV Full Scale

P2

The Tiger controller uses three smart setup registers to configure all smart input modules. Line frequency rejection (50 / 60 Hz) and RTD type are configured in smart register 1 (SMT1). See Figure 5.

Smart register 1 allows you to select the following settings:

Line frequency rejection of 50 or 60 Hz for all four sensor inputs.

RTD type: Pt385 or Pt392 for all RTD types.

A standard sampling rate of 800 / 960 Hz (50 / 60 Hz) is applied to all inputs.

### Smart Setup Registers

Page 4 Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

RTD1

RTD2

RTD3

Process 1

Process 2

Counter

Figure 5 IST1/IST2 Smart Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

### Programming Procedures

The input module requires the following individual inputs to be programmed through the configuration menus in the controller:

1 Select Line Frequency Rejection & RTD Type

This menu allows you to select the input signal line frequency rejection for all input signals (50 or

60 Hz) and the RTD type for all RTD inputs (Pt385 or Pt392) using Smart Register 1 (SMT1).

2 Setup Counter or Frequency Input

If a counter or frequency signal is used, this menu allows you to configure the frequency range or counter settings.

3 Select a Channel for the RTD or Process Input

In the code for the required channel, select the relevant RTD or process input from the output register map.

Note: If a counter or frequency signal is not used, CH1 is available for RTD or process inputs.

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5 Page 5

## Select RTD Type

Enter Code 2 and select the RTD type and input signal line frequency rejection setting for all inputs

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming

The 1st digit setting is not relevant to this procedure and can remain at zero (0).

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note: The output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the IST1/IST2 input module.

These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Note: The 20 Hz averaged signal is output for all five inputs.

This menu provides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module IST1/IST2.

2nd digit settings are not relevant and should be left at zero (0).

## Setup Counter or Frequency Input

On leaving Code 2, setup counter or frequency settings

5 Press the P button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

Frequency

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the display constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

For Frequency

For Counter

## CH1

Frequency

buttons at the same time to return to the operational display.

Page 6 Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

## Select a Channel

Select a channel for the RTD or process input from the output register map of the required channel

Channel 1

If a counter or frequency input has not been applied to CH1, then this channel is still available for an RTD or process input signal. To select an RTD or process signal for CH1:

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main programming mode, then

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for all input sensors in the 1st digit and the required RTD or process signal in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Note: The output register map is different for each smart input module type.

### Channel 2

Enter Code 4 and set to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings for CH2 in the 2nd digit. See *Note in 2nd digit below.

## CH2

### Channel 3

Enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

### Channel 4

Enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings for CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

buttons at

to return to

Note: Unlike CH1, you cannot select Averaged

Process 2 in CH2.

Note: The output register map is different for each smart input module type.

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7 Page 7

### Example 1:

### User Programmable

### Application

Example 1 describes the setup procedure for measuring the volume, temperature, and flow rate of a milk vat using front panel programming.

The volume of the milk vat is monitored using a linear displacement transducer and float arrangement. A pump transfers the milk past a flow rate sensor. The milk vat temperature and discharge temperature are monitored using type Pt392 RTD sensors.

The input module is wired via the 16-pin DIN-rail mounted terminal block. See Figure 7 for connection details between the terminal block and the input sensors. The inputs are designated to the following channels:

CH1: Flow rate sensor

Milk Volume Application

Frequency input.

CH2: Milk vat temperature

RTD2 input.

CH3: Discharge temperature

RTD3 input.

CH4: Milk volume

Process 1 input.

Milk Vat

Note: RTD1 is not used. Process input 2 is not used. The frequency input automatically defaults to CH1.

## MILK

### Terminal Block Wiring

Figure 6 Example 1: Using IST1/IST2 in a User Programmable Application

MILK

Flow

Rate

Sensor

16-PIN DIN-Rail Terminal Block

Page 8 Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Figure 7 Example 1: Application Wiring of Sensor Inputs to 16-pin Terminal Block

### Example 1 Setup Procedure

1 Select 50 Hz input line frequency rejection with Pt392 RTDs.

The averaged output rate of 20 Hz for all sensor inputs is more than adequate for fast filling / draining of the milk vat:

Display toggles between

Set

2 Select CH1 frequency input of 2 Hz - 1000 Hz for the flow rate sensor:

3 Select RTD2 as the vat temperature input for CH2:

select

4 Select RTD3 as the discharge temperature input for CH3:

select

5 Select process input 1 as the milk volume input for CH4:

select

Note: both RTD inputs (RTD2 and RTD3) and the linear displacement transducer input (Process Input 1) require to be individually calibrated using the controllers 2-point calibration technique.

### Example 2:

### Application Running a

### Macro

The IST1 and the IST2 have 5 active smart output registers available. Access to the fifth register (or all registers) can be done through a simple macro string as demonstrated in the example macro below.

First set Code 7 to [000] so that the Result register (& Result) is not updated by any math function. In the example macro below the Main Macro defines the Result register as the 5th smart output register (&SMART_RESULT5). In this way CH1 to CH4 contain the first four smart output registers and the Result contains the fifth.

Macros are powerful tools used to increase the versatility and range of the Tiger controller beyond the standard code settings. For further information on macros and the registers in the Tiger 320 operating system see the following literature:

TDS Macro Tutorial (NZ212).

Registers Supplement (NZ209).

These and other Tiger related documents are freely available on our website at:

### www.texmate.com

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 9 Page 9

### RTD Full Scale

### Calibration Procedures

### Tiger Macro Development

### System (TDS)

The RTDs can be calibrated in F or C. Using a calibration source to calibrate a zero and full scale setting is the easiest method to use. If a calibration source is not available, the known resistance values for the temperatures can be used.

The following table lists the equivelant resistances for both Pt385 and Pt392 type 100 RTDs over a temperature range of 0 to 100 C.

RTD Type

Type Pt385 / 392 Type Pt385

Type Pt392

Temperature

0 C

100 C

100 C

Equivelant Resistance

100

138.5

139.3

If a calibration source is not available make up a set of calibration plugs with the resistors shown in the diagrams opposite.

Plug the 0 C calibration plug into the module and program the [ZEro] setting for the first channel required.

Unplug the 0 C plug and plug the

100 C calibration plug into the module and program the [SPAn] setting for the same channel.

Resistor Connections for Zero (low) Setting

Resistor Connections for Span (high) Setting

Example 2-point Calibration Procedure The example 2-point calibration procedure on Page 11 can be used with a calibration source or with the calibration plug method. Enter the calibration mode and carry out the 2-point calibration procedure on the first channel required for RTD input.

Repeat this procedure for any other channels requiring an RTD input.

Tiger 320 Macro Overview The Tiger 320 Series of programmable meter controllers have been designed to incorporate the analog and digital functionality of an intelligent controller with the logic of a PLC.

Traditionally, the PLC approach is to build a working application entirely in some form of programming language. The approach used in the Tiger 320 Series of controllers is to build an application by selecting the pre-programmed functions of the controller and then adding small amounts of programmability and logic where needed.

The operating system of the Tiger 320 controller controls all the pre-programmed functions, handling the input, averaging, scaling, linearization, totalization and much more, as well as driving the display, timers, relays, analog and serial outputs. Once configured, these functions are executed by the operating system and form the basis of a control system.

To form an advanced automation and control system you only need to write a small program that adds the extra logic required. We call this program a macro. A macro can be written specifically for your application and is used to initiate a sequence, reconfigure, or disable some of the controller functions. With Texmate's 22 I/O plug-in module installed, a macro further expands the Tiger 320 operating system with additional digital status inputs and digital switched outputs.

Page 10 Page 10

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

From Step 6

2-point Cal.eps

START HERE

2-point Calibration

Mode Example

Step 1

Enter the

brightness

mode

Step 2

Pass the brightness

mode and the enter calibration mode

Step 4

Enter calibration

mode [111] for 2-point calibration of CH1

LOW

Signal

Step 5

5.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

zero input

Example

Example

HIGH

Signal

Step 7

7.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

span input

Step 8

Save zero and span settings and re-enter

calibration mode

Step 9

Select the no function calibration mode [000]

Step 10

Save calibration mode

[000] setting and enter Code 1

Step 11

Exit Code 1 and return to the operational display

### To Step 7

Macro control is ideal for many OEM applications that require analog, digital, and timer functions with sophisticated mathematical and enhanced logic operations. The macro concept has major cost advantages for large or small sophisticated applications that require some degree of programmable logic control with display and front panel control.

Custom Macro Programming

Texmates Tiger Development System (TDS) enables a macro to be written and compiled in BASIC, utilizing any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. When your BASIC program is compiled into Tiger

320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized.

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 11 Page 11

Macros are useful when implementing a specialized control system that cannot be achieved by the standard configuration capability of the Tiger 320 Operating System. Using the TDS software, functions can be altered or added in a standard controller to perform the required job.

This may typically include logic sequencing functions and mathematical functions.

Developing a Macro is much easier and quicker than programming a PLC, because the basic code required to customize the Tiger meter is considerably less than the ladder logic programming required for PLCs. This is due to the hundreds of functions built into the Tiger controller that can be manipulated or invoked by a macro to fulfill the requirements of almost any application.

Scrolling display messages can be programmed to appear with any setpoint activation, selected event, or logic input. Easy to read, plain text prompts can be programmed to replace the manual programming codes and provide a user-friendly interface for any custom application.

Scrolling Text Messaging

Scrolling text messaging is another bonus from running a macro. Any number of messages for detailed operator instructions, of up to 100 characters each, can be written into the macro during compilation for detailed operator instructions, alarm and control applications.

A scrolling text message can be written for OEMs and sensor manufacturers providing informative instructions for setup and calibration procedures.

Alphanumeric Displays

14-segment alphanumeric displays are Texmates display choice for easy to read display text and scrolling text messaging.

7-SEGMENT

14-SEGMENT

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 12 Page 12

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST1_IST2 (NZ358)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IST3-4

# QUAD THERMOCOUPLE INPUT

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

Terminal Reference Junction.

On-board Reference Junction Sensor.

8-pin Input Connector.

Quad J or K Thermocouple.

On-board Digital Signal Processor.

Choice of type J or K thermocouples.

10Hz Averaged output.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

Crystal Controlled Line

Frequency Rejection.

50 / 60Hz line frequency rejection.

State-of-the-art Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Multiple inputs processed with powerful signal conditioning.

Ideal for multi-temperature control systems, IST3 and IST4 monitor up to four individual thermocouple sensors at 10 Hz averaged output rate. A choice of industry J or K type thermocouples with an on-board temperature sensor for reference junction compensation provide a versatile interface for temperature measurement tasks.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

Input Channels

Thermocouple Type

Input Sensitivity

Zero Drift

Span Drift

Non-linearity

Input Noise

Signal Processing Rate

Reference Junction

Hardware Module Specifications

Four independent channels, zero X-talk and 16-bit resolution.

Industry standard J or K type (software selectable).

0.08 V / count maximum. 40 nV / C typical. 5 ppm / C full scale maximum. 0.003% 5of full scale maximum.

160 nV p-p typical.

10 Hz averaged output rate on all channels.

On-board solid state sensor referenced thermal connection to terminal block socket. Resolution better that 0.1 C.

Output Rate

Sensor Selection

Line Frequency Rejection

Broken Thermocouple

Software Module Specifications

Fixed 10 Hz averaged per channel.

Choice of J or K, software selectable.

50/60 Hz, software selectable. [OVER] on display indicates broken thermocouple.

Software senses a broken thermocouple and causes the display to flash [OVER]. Note, only seen if that display is the current display. Otherwise, it can be checked through the view mode.

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Connector Pinouts

TC1

TC2

TC3

TC4

### Smart Setup Registers

Figure 1 IST3/IST4 Quad Thermocouple Smart Input Module

Thermocouple signals, TC1, TC2, TC3, and TC4, are then individually softw are selected for the four input channels. Either signal can be selected f or CH1 via Code 2, CH2 via Code 4, CH3 via Code 5, and CH4 via Code 6.

Note: Once selected, the thermocouple type is the same f or all four channels.

Note: The same thermocouple signal can be selected f or two or more channels.

Input Signal 1 (TC1)

Input Signal 2 (TC2)

Input Signal 3 (TC3)

Input Signal 4 (TC4)

Figure 2 IST3/IST4 Smar t Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

Reference junction sensor

thermally bonded to the connector block.

Reference

Junction

Sensor

Quad Input

Analog to

Digital

Convertor

16-bit

Resolution

Microcontroller

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

Figure 3 IST3/IST4 Quad Thermocouple Functional Schematic Diagram

### Standard Setup Quick Start Guide

This section describes the procedures to enter the controllers code structure and configure the input module for the following standard settings:

60 Hz Line Frequency (suitable for areas operating on 60 Hz power supplies).

J Type Thermocouple.

Thermocouple TC1 selected for channel 1 (CH1).

All other configuration settings are described in the following pages.

### Step 1

Step 2

Pass the Brightness

Mode and enter

Code 2

### From Step 5

Step 6

Return to Code 2 and select the

thermocouple for CH1

Example

Example

Step 8

Save settings and

return to Code 2

Step 4

Enter the Smart

Register 1 (SMt1)

Setup Mode

### Step

Step 9

Exit Code 2 and return to the operational

display

Programming Tip

The f ollowing procedure uses a DI-50 displa y.

The readings sho wn may differ for other displa y versions.

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

### Programming Procedures

The f ollowing prog ramming procedures co ver all the steps required to configure smar t input module IST3/IST4. Steps 1 to 5 describe how to select the line frequency and the thermocouple type through smart register 1 (SMT1).

Steps 7 to 12 describe how to select a specific ther mocouple from the output registers f or channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note: The output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the Quad Thermocouple input module. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module IST3/4.

Using the

1st digit and the thermocouple type in the 3rd digit.

buttons, select either 50 or 60 Hz line frequency rejection in the

2nd digit settings are not rele vant and should be left at z ero (0).

Note: 10 Hz is the average output for all four thermocouple inputs.

Operational Temperature Range

0 C to 700 C

0 C to 1100 C

J Type Thermocouple

K Type Thermocouple

Approximate contin uous w orking temper ature r ange of measur ing junction. Not related to wire diameters and conducted insulation.

Refer IEC 584.2, 1982 (BS EN 60584.2, 1993) Inter nal Standards for Thermocouple Characteristics.

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note: Leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the display constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

### Select a Channel

Select a thermocouple output from the output register map of the required c hannel

### Channel 1

Press the

and

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode,

then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

2nd digit settings are not rele vant and should be left at z ero (0).

## CH1

### Channel 2

Note: The output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

### Channel 3

Enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings f or CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

### Channel 4

Note: The output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings f or CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Calibration

As the calibration procedure requires a calibr ation source that can output stab le V signals, calibration of the four channels is nor mally done in the factory prior to shipping.

Calibrating 4 Channels for K Type Thermocouple If user calibration is required, the f ollowing procedure should be f ollowed. It is assumed that the user has a thermocouple calibration source available. When the controller is switched on, allow a few minutes warmup time to let the ref erence junction stabilize to the connector ter minal block temperature.

1 Setup Smart Register 1 (SMT1)

See Page 4 and carry out Steps 1 to 7 to select the required line frequency and thermocouple type.

2 Connect to the Calibrated Source

Connect a standard K type ther mocouple plug to the calibration source.

3 Connect to the Input Module

Connect the standard K type ther mocouple cable to the rele vant pins on the input module of the thermocouple input to be calibrated.

Thermocouple

Calibration

Source

K Type

Thermocouple

Plug

K Type

Thermocouple

Wire

IST3/IST4

Terminal Block

4 Set the Low Setting

a) Set the calibration source to 0 C.

b) Enter [CAL] [111] and set to [ZEro] setting.

5 Set the High Setting

Set the calibration source to 100 C.

Set to [SPAn] setting to 100.0.

6 Repeat Steps

Repeat Steps 2 to 4 f or all required ther mocouples and channels.

See 2-point Calibration Mode Example on Page 7 for a step-by-step calibration procedure.

Note:

One thermocouple can be assigned to one or more c hannels (e.g. TC1 assigned to CH1 to CH4), but each channel can accept only one thermocouple input.

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

From Step 6

T HERE STSTARART HERE 2-point Calibration

Mode Example

Step 1

Enter the

brightness

mode

Step 2

Pass the brightness

mode and the enter calibration mode

Step 4

Enter calibration

mode [111] for 2-point calibration of CH1

### Step 5

LOW

Signal

Step 6

Set reading for zero load into meter and enter span mode

Example

HIGH

Signal

Step 7

7.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

span input

Example

Step 8

Save zero and span settings and re-enter

calibration mode

Step 9

Select the no function calibration mode [000]

Step 10

Save calibration mode

[000] setting and enter Code 1

Step 11

Exit Code 1 and return to the operational display

### To Step 7

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST3-4 Data Sheet (NZ362)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### Texmate IST5-6

## Fits Tiger 320 Series

# DUAL RTD INPUT

8-pin Input Connector.

Dual 4-wire RTD inputs.

State-of-the-art Electromagnetic

Noise Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Ultra low-noise 16-bit SD Dual Channel ATD.

Approaching 19-bit performance

with additional software filtering.

On-board Digital Signal Processor.

Produces 10Hz averaged output of each RTD Signal.

Monitors RTDs for O/C conditions.

Interface to Tiger Meter.

Crystal Controlled Line

Frequency Rejection.

50 / 60Hz line frequency rejection.

Unprecedented 0.01 accuracy on two channels.

Designed for applications in precision temperature measurement and calibration systems, the dual channel RTD input module interfaces directly with all Tiger 320 Series controllers. Using 4-wire RTDs, 0.01 resolution and repeatability is possible on each channel

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IST5 (50 Hz Rejection) IST6 (60 Hz Rejection)

Dual Inputs

Excitation Current

Hardware Module Specifications

4-wire RTD, choice of Pt 385 or Pt 392.

800/960 sample rate per channel.

10 Hz average output per channel.

200 A constant current source.

Ratiometric referenced to ATD.

Current sense for open circuit RTD.

Resolution

0.01 on each channel.

Analog-to-Digital

Dual channel ATD convertor approaching 19-bit resolution operating ratiometric with respect to excitation current.

Line Frequency Rejection

Input Type Selection

Software Module Specifications

50/60 Hz selectable.

Select from either Pt 385 or Pt 392 for both channels.

Calibration

Easy calibration with wide operating temperatures through Tiger 320 Series software.

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

Note:

The trimpot is used dur ing factory calibrated to optimize internal RTD calibration algorithms.

Figure 1 IST5 Input Module Configured f or Two 4-wire RTD Sensors

Note:

To complete the current pathw ay use links betw een pins 5 and 6, pins 6 and 7, and pins 7 and 8 to replace the missing RTD.

Figure 2 IST5 Input Module Configured f or a Single 4-wire RTD Sensor

### Smart Setup Registers

The Tiger meter uses three smart setup registers to configure all smart input modules. The IST5 input module requires only smart register 1 (SMT1) to be configured. See Figure 3.

RTD1 Input Signal

RTD2 Input Signal

Figure 3 IST5 Smart Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

Page 2

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

Input module IST5 has tw o RTD inputs: RTD1 and R TD2. RTD1 is ph ysically connected to input 1 and RTD2 is physically connected to input 2 of IST5 s dual channel, 16-bit A to D con vertor. See Figure 4.

SMT1 resides in IST5 s microcontroller and allo ws you to select the R TD type to suit y our input. SMT1 applies a Pt 385 or Pt 392 linear ization table to both input 1 and input 2.

The IST5 input module produces two output registers, one for the averaged signal output from each RTD.

The data from one of these registers can be tr ansferred to a channel in the Tiger meter. All four channels can be selected for either RTD1 or RTD2, or a combination of both inputs can be selected, f or example:

RTD1 to CH1.

RTD2 to CH2.

CH3 not used.

CH4 not used.

The channels are selected through the codes in the Tiger meters main programming mode:

RTD1 or RTD2 to CH1 via Code 2.

RTD1 or RTD2 to CH2 via Code 4.

RTD1 or RTD2 to CH3 via Code 5.

RTD1 or RTD2 to CH4 via Code 6.

Figure 4 IDT5 Dual RTD Smart Input Module Functional Sc hematic

### Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure smar t input module IST5.

Steps 1 to 7 describe how to select the line frequency and the RTD type through SMT1.

Steps 8 to 12 describe how to select the output registers f or channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

Press the

button three times to enter Code 2. Set Code 2 to [X77].

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the dual R TD input module.

These registers vary for each different smart input module.

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

Press the

button.

This men u pro vides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module IST5.

Using the

1st digit and either Pt 385 or Pt 392 the RTD type in the 3rd digit.

buttons, select either 50 or 60 Hz line frequency rejection in the

2nd digit settings are not rele vant.

5 Press the

button. The display returns to [Cod_2] [X77].

6 Using the

button, reset the 3rd digit to z ero [X70] to leave the smart register 1 menu.

Note, leaving the 3rd digit as 7 means the displa y constantly cycles between [Cod_2] and [SMt1].

Press the

and

buttons at the same time to retur n to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

Press the

and

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main prog ramming mode,

then press the

button three times to enter Code 2.

### Channel 1

Set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

### Channel 2

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Set Code 4 to [0X0]. Select the required register map settings f or CH2 in the 2nd digit.

## CH2

Page 4

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

### Channel 3

If required enter Code 5 and select the required register map settings for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

### Channel 4

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

If required enter Code 6 and select the required register map settings for CH4 in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

Press the

button to save the settings.

Press the

time to return to the operational display.

buttons at the same

and

### Calibration Procedures

Calibrating the IST5 dual RTD smart input module is done in the f ollowing two steps:

Perform a simulated RTD input calibration procedure.

Perform a full scale calibration procedure.

Simulated RTD Input Calibration Procedure To gain the best performance from and linearization of RTD signals, the input module should be initially calibrated using a sim ulated RTD input signal of 32 F (0 C). Fine calibration is a means of initially calibr ating the input module using tw o 100 precision resistors to simulate an RTD input signal of 32 F. This is normally done before the input module leaves the factory. But, if recalibration is required, connect two 100 precision resistors to the input module according to the connection diagram shown in Figure 6 and carry out the following steps.

100

Resistor 1

100

Resistor 2

Trimpot

Figure 6 IST5 Fine Calibration Connection Dia gram

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

1) Ensure that the line frequency rejection and R TD type settings for SMT1 have been set. See Steps 2 and 3

of the Programming procedures.

2) Enter the main programming mode in your Tiger meter and set the offset setting to 0 (zero) and the span set-

ting to 1 (one) for CH1 and CH2 using the f ollowing codes:

for CH1 select

then press the

button.

Display toggles between

Leave the offset setting [OFF_1] at [0] and press the

button.

Display toggles between

Adjust the full scale setting [SCA_1] to [1] and press the

button.

Display returns to

for CH2 select

then press the

button.

Carry out the same steps as f or CH1 to to set the offset and full scale settings f or CH2.

3) While still in the main prog ramming mode set CH1 to displa y RTD1 and CH2 to displa y RTD2 using the f ol-

lowing codes:

for CH1 enter Code 2 and select R TD1 in the 3rd digit. See Step 9 on Page 4.

for CH2 enter Code 4 and select R TD2 in the 2nd digit. See Step 10 on Page 5.

4) While viewing CH1, adjust the trimpot until the display reads 3200 counts. This represents 32.00 F.

Both CH1 and CH2 are now calibrated.

Full Scale Calibration Procedure The RTDs can be calibrated in F or C. A calibration source is the easiest method to calibr ate a zero and full scale setting, otherwise, the known resistance values for the temperatures must be used:

RTD Pt 385:

0 C is equivalent to 100 .

100 C is equivalent to 138.5 .

For example:

Offset (low setting) is zero (0 C).

Full scale setting is 100 C.

Enter the calibration mode and carry out the procedure on Page 7 for both CH1 and CH2.

Figure 7 IST5 2-point Calibration Dia gram

Page 6

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

T HERE STSTARART HERE

From Step 6

Step 1

Enter the

brightness

mode

Step 2

Pass brightness mode

and the enter calibration mode

### Step 3

Step 4

Enter calibration

mode [111] for 2-point calibration of CH1

Example

Step 8

Save the zero and the span settings and

re-enter the calibration

mode

Step 9

Select the no function calibration mode [000]

Step 10

Save calibration mode

[000] setting and enter Code 1

### Step 5

Step 6

Set the reading for zero load into the meter and enter the span mode

Example

### Step

Step 11

Exit code 1 and return to operational display

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH3

## CH4

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE

Page 8

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

IST5-6 Data Sheet (NZ359)

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### IST7 IST8 DSNZ365

### SMART INPUT MODULE

# Triple RTD

On-board Digital Signal

Processor.

Linearization RTDs 20 Hz averaged outputs 16-bit precision comparator function.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Perfect module for 3 phase dry transformer temperature

measurement.

IST7 and IST8 are smart input modules that can monitor temperature. Both modules can accept triple 2/3/4-wire RTD sensors. Applied in multiple-point temperature measurement.

0.01o accuracy on three channels.

Input Module

Order Code Suffix

IST7 (50 Hz Rejection) IST8 (60 Hz Rejection)

Hardware Module Specifications

RTD

Triple-input RTD

Excitation Current

Resolution & Range

Analog-to-digital

2/3/4-wire RTD configuration. Choice of Pt385 or Pt392.

160 mA DC constant current source, ratiometric referenced to ATD.

0.01 C, 200 C to +850 C.

Dual channel sigma delta ATD convertor.

16-bit resolution.

Shield drive +2.5 V.

Software Module Specifications

Line Frequency Rejection 50/60 Hz software selectable.

RTD Type

RTD Linearization

2-point Calibration

Pt385 / Pt392 sofware selectable.

On-board linearization tables for RTD.

Simple 2-point calibration of RTD using Tiger 320 Series software.

800 / 960 Hz each channel, 20 Hz averaged outputs.

Sampling Speed

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1 Page 1

### Component Layout

Figure 1 IST7/IST8 Triple RTD Input Module

### Connector Pinouts

### Function Schematic Diagram

Functional Schematic

160 A

Crystal Control

Filtering

Multiplexers

EMF

EMF

EMF

MUX1

CH 1

+ 5 V

5 V

GND

+ 24 V

Exc.

Figure 2 Input Module IST7/IST8 Functional Schematic Diagram

Page 2

### Smart Setup Registers

The Tiger controller uses three smart setup registers to configure all smart input modules. Line frequency rejection (50 / 60 Hz) and RTD type are configured in smart register 1 (SMT1). See Figure 3.

Smart register 1 allows you to select the following settings:

Line frequency rejection of 50 or 60 Hz for all three RTD inputs.

RTD type: Pt385 or Pt392 for all RTD types.

A standard sampling rate of 800 / 960 Hz (50 / 60 Hz) is applied to all inputs.

The module produces three output registers (3 RTD), each being the 20 Hz averaged result of the input sensors. One of these registers can be transferred to CH1 via Code 2, the same or another register transferred to CH2 via Code 4, the same or another register transferred to CH3 via Code 5, and the same or another register transferred to CH4 via Code 6.

RTD1

RTD2

RTD3

Figure 3 IST7/IST8 Smart Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

### Programming Procedures

The input module requires the following individual inputs to be programmed through the configuration menus in the controller:

1 Select Line Frequency Rejection & RTD Type

This menu allows you to select the input signal line frequency rejection for all input signals (50 or 60 Hz) and the RTD type for all RTD inputs (Pt385 or Pt392) using Smart Register 1 (SMT1).

2 Select a Channel for the RTDs

In the code for the required channel, select the relevant RTD from the output register map.

Page 3

## Select RTD Type

Enter Code 2 and select the RTD type and input signal line frequency rejection setting for all inputs

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming

The 1st digit setting is not relevant to this procedure and can remain at zero (0).

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note: The output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to the IST7/IST8 input module.

These registers vary for each different smart input module.

Note: The 20 Hz averaged signal is output for all five inputs.

This menu provides settings unique to smart register 1 of input module IST7/IST8.

buttons at the same time to return to the operational display.

## Select a Channel

Select a channel for the RTD.

Channel 1 = RTD1 To select an RTD1 for CH1:

buttons at the same time again to re-enter the main programming mode,

Set Code 2 to [X70]. Select the required processing rate for all input sensors in the 1st digit and RTD1 in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

Page 4

Note: The output register map is different for each smart input module type.

### Channel 2 = RTD2

Enter Code 4 and set to [050]. Select the RTD2 for CH2 in the 2nd digit. See *Note in 2nd digit below.

## CH2

### Channel 3 = RTD3

Enter Code 5 and sert to [X72]. Select RTD3 for CH3 in the 3rd digit.

## CH3

Note: The output register map is different for each smart input module type.

Page 5

### RTD Full Scale

### Calibration Procedures

### Tiger Macro Development

### System (TDS)

Page 6

The RTDs can be calibrated in F or C. Using a calibration source to calibrate a zero and full scale setting is the easiest method to use. If a calibration source is not available, the known resistance values for the temperatures can be used.

The following table lists the equivelant resistances for both Pt385 and Pt392 type 100 RTDs over a temperature range of 0 to 100 C.

RTD Type

Type Pt385 / 392 Type Pt385

Type Pt392

Temperature

0 C

100 C

100 C

Equivelant Resistance

100

138.5

139.3

If a calibration source is not available make up a set of calibration plugs with the resistors shown in the diagrams opposite.

Plug the 0 C calibration plug into the module and program the [ZEro] setting for the first channel required.

Resistor Connections for Zero (low) Setting

Unplug the 0 C plug and plug the 100 C calibration plug into the module and program the [SPAn] setting for the same channel.

Resistor Connections for Span (high) Setting

Example 2-point Calibration Procedure The example 2-point calibration procedure on Page 7 can be used with a calibration source or with the calibration plug method. Enter the calibration mode and carry out the 2-point calibration procedure on the first channel required for RTD input.

Repeat this procedure for any other channels requiring an RTD input.

Tiger 320 Macro Overview The Tiger 320 Series of programmable meter controllers have been designed to incorporate the analog and digital functionality of an intelligent controller with the logic of a PLC.

Traditionally, the PLC approach is to build a working application entirely in some form of programming language. The approach used in the Tiger 320 Series of controllers is to build an application by selecting the pre-programmed functions of the controller and then adding small amounts of programmability and logic where needed.

The operating system of the Tiger 320 controller controls all the pre-programmed functions, handling the input, averaging, scaling, linearization, totalization and much more, as well as driving the display, timers, relays, analog and serial outputs. Once configured, these functions are executed by the operating system and form the basis of a control system.

To form an advanced automation and control system you only need to write a small program that adds the extra logic required. We call this program a macro. A macro can be written specifically for your application and is used to initiate a sequence, reconfigure, or disable some of the controller functions. With Texmate's 22 I/O plug-in module installed, a macro further expands the Tiger 320 operating system with additional digital status inputs and digital switched outputs.

From Step 6

2-point Cal.eps

START HERE

2-point Calibration

Mode Example

Step 1

Enter the

brightness

mode

Step 2

Pass the brightness

mode and the enter calibration mode

Step 4

Enter calibration

mode [111] for 2-point calibration of CH1

LOW

Signal

Step 5

5.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

zero input

Example

Example

HIGH

Signal

Step 7

7.1. Adjust display to desired reading for

span input

Step 8

Save zero and span settings and re-enter

calibration mode

Step 9

Select the no function calibration mode [000]

Step 10

Save calibration mode

[000] setting and enter Code 1

Step 11

Exit Code 1 and return to the operational display

### To Step 7

Macro control is ideal for many OEM applications that require analog, digital, and timer functions with sophisticated mathematical and enhanced logic operations. The macro concept has major cost advantages for large or small sophisticated applications that require some degree of programmable logic control with display and front panel control.

Custom Macro Programming

Texmates Tiger Development System (TDS) enables a macro to be written and compiled in BASIC, utilizing any combination of the hundreds of functions and thousands of registers embedded in the Tiger 320 Operating System. When your BASIC program is compiled into Tiger 320 Macro-language it is error checked and optimized.

Page 7

Macros are useful when implementing a specialized control system that cannot be achieved by the standard configuration capability of the Tiger 320 Operating System.

Using the TDS software, functions can be altered or added in a standard controller to perform the required job. This may typically include logic sequencing functions and mathematical functions.

Developing a Macro is much easier and quicker than programming a PLC, because the basic code required to customize the Tiger meter is considerably less than the ladder logic programming required for PLCs. This is due to the hundreds of functions built into the Tiger controller that can be manipulated or invoked by a macro to fulfill the requirements of almost any application.

Scrolling display messages can be programmed to appear with any setpoint activation, selected event, or logic input. Easy to read, plain text prompts can be programmed to replace the manual programming codes and provide a user-friendly interface for any custom application.

Scrolling Text Messaging

Scrolling text messaging is another bonus from running a macro. Any number of messages for detailed operator instructions, of up to 100 characters each, can be written into the macro during compilation for detailed operator instructions, alarm and control applications.

A scrolling text message can be written for OEMs and sensor manufacturers providing informative instructions for setup and calibration procedures.

Alphanumeric Displays

14-segment alphanumeric displays are Texmates display choice for easy to read display text and scrolling text messaging.

7-SEGMENT

14-SEGMENT

### Customer Configuration Settings:

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

## CH1

## CH2

## CH3

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

1st Digit

2nd Digit 3rd Digit

For product details visit www.texmate.com Local Distributor Address

Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 Thats 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

Page 8

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.

### IW04 5 single Phase smart module datasheetNZ322

Current

Input.

Voltage

Input.

High Precision Shunt

Resistor

Eliminates secondary

current transformers and

improves linearity.

State-of-the-art

Electromagnetic Noise

Suppression Circuitry.

Ensures signal integrity even in harsh EMC environments.

Zero Crossing

Detector.

Allows high resolution

line-frequency measurement.

Interface to

Tiger Meter.

Differential Voltage

Divider.

Safe operation for direct connection to phase-tophase voltages.

16-bit Dual Channel

Synchronous A/D

Converter.

Delivers unmatched

accuracy and performance.

Math Co-processor.

Offloads work from Tiger

320 processor, leaving it free to perform advanced automation and control

functions.

IW04 (600V, 1 Amp) IW05 (600V, 5 Amp)

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 1

### Programming Quick Start Guide

### Connector Pinouts

Figure 1 Single Phase, 2-wire Configuration

Figure 2 Single Phase, 3-wire Configuration

### Smart Setup Registers

The meter uses three smart setup registers to configure all smart input modules. Input modules IW04/5 require only smart register 1 to be set up. These modules produce four output registers.

One of these registers can be transferred to Channel 1 via Code 2, the same or another register to Channel

2 via Code 4, the same or another register to Channel 3 via Code 5, and the same or another register to Channel 4 via Code 6.

Input modules IW01/2/4/5 have a zero crossing detector that is available for direct line-frequency measurement in Channel 2. The following resolution settings can be selected in Code 4:

0 to 99.999 Hz, 0.001 Hz resolution.

Set Code 4 to [30X].

0 to 999.99 Hz, 0.01 Hz resolution.

Set Code 4 to [31X].

Note, the direct line-frequency measurement setting for channel 2 is a hard-wired option and, if selected, means channel 2 is not available for selecting an output register.

for

Line-frequency

CH2 ONLY

Figure 3 Smart Input Module IW04/5 Signal Flow Diagram

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 2

Input Signal

### Programming Procedures

The following programming procedures cover all the steps required to configure smart input module IW04/05 as follows:

Figure 4 IW04/5 Smart Setup Registers Operational Flow Diagram

Channel 1 to display current (I rms).

Channel 2 to display direct line-frequency measurement.

Channel 3 to display voltage (V rms).

Channel 4 to display power usage (kW).

Steps 1 to 6 describe how to select the current gain setting through smart register 1.

Steps 7 to 13 describe how to select the output registers for channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 as required.

Steps 14 to 16 describe how to select line-frequency for channel 2.

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

This setting enters the smart register 1 code setup menu.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module.

This menu provides settings unique to input modules IW01 to IW04.

This takes you back to the Code 2 menu.

Note the output registers in the 3rd digit are specific to IW04/5. These registers vary for each different smart input module.

The next step is to select the appropriate output register from the output register map for a selected channel.

Continued on next page

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 3

## Select a Channel

Select the output register for the required channels

button at the same time again to re-enter the main programming mode.

9 To select channel 1, set Code 2 to [X7X]. Select the required processing rate for CH1 in the 1st

digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH1

To select channel 2, enter Code 4 and select the required register map settings for CH2 in the 2nd digit.

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

## CH2

Note, If you require the direct line-frequency measurement setting, channel 2 will not available for selecting an output register.

To select channel 3, enter Code 5 and select the required post processing settings for CH3 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

To select channel 4, enter Code 6 and select the required post processing settings for CH4 in the 1st digit and the required register map settings in the 3rd digit.

## CH4

buttons at the same

Note the output register map is different for each smart input module type.

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 4

Select the Line Frequency Select the line frequency on Channel 2

button at the same time again to re-enter the main programming mode.

Set Code 4 to [3X0]. Select the required line frequency measurement in the 2nd digit.

Note, the direct line-frequency measurement setting for channel 2 is a hard-wired option and, if selected, means channel 2 is not available for selecting an output register.

DI-503 WHITE TRIM 2/May/02

## CH2

### Example Single Phase Power Module Setup Procedure

Our customer has a powerful single phase motor connected to the 120 V rms supply. The motor can draw up to 200 A rms under full load. As part of the supervisory programme, the owner requires to monitor the line voltage, current draw, and resultant power usage simultaneously.

A Tiger 320 Series triple display meter is installed to display:

Channel 1:

Current (I rms) on the top (primary display).

Channel 3:

Voltage (V rms) on the middle display.

Channel 4:

Power usage (kW) on the bottom display.

CH1

CH3

Channel 2:

Configured to read the line frequency at 0.01 Hz resolution (displayable in the view mode).

Because there is a 5 A rms maximum current limit on smart power module IW02, a 200:5 current transformer is used to sense the load current.

CH4

The meter is calibrated at the factory to the following default settings with a scale factor of 1 and an offset of 0:

30,000 counts for 5 A rms.

1000 counts for 100 V rms.

10,000 counts for 500 W.

To accomodate the customers specifications, the offsets remain at 0, but the scale factors must be adjusted to display (See Recalibration Procedures on Page 6):

20,000 counts for 200 A on CH1.

1,200 counts for 120 V on CH3.

24,000 counts for 24 kW on CH4.

The new scale factors are calculated as follows:

1 CH1 Scale Factor

Our 200 A load is reduced to 5 A to suit the smart input modules maximum current limit by passing it through a 200:5 current transformer (CT).

The original factory setting was 30,000 counts for the maximum load.

We now want to display 20,000 counts for the same load. Therefore, the scale factor is calulated as:

CH1 Scale Factor =

20,000

30,000

= 0.666 (I rms)

2 CH3 Scale Factor

Our original factory setting for the 100 V line voltage was 1,000 counts. Applying a new line voltage of

120 V to the original settings for CH3 displays 1,200 counts on the meter. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary and the scale factor remains unchanged at 1.0.

3 CH4 Scale Factor

Our original factory setting for the power reading on CH4 is:

5 A load & 100 V line voltage = 500 W over 10,000 counts

Our load has now increased to 200 A, which is passed through a 200:5 CT effectively retaining a 5 A load.

Our line voltage has increased to 120 V displayed over 1,200 counts. This means we now have:

5 A load (actual 200 A) & 120 V line voltage = 600 W over 12,000 counts

We wish to double the resolution of the power reading on the display to 24,000 counts for the maximum load. Therefore, the scale factor is calculated as:

CH4 Scale Factor =

24,000

12,000

= 2.0

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 5

### Recalibration Procedures

The following recalibration procedures describe how to recalibrate the scale factors for CH1, CH3, and CH4 if they are different from the Texmate factory default settings. See the new scale factor calculations on the example on Page 5.

buttons at the same time to enter the main programming mode.

The display toggles between [CAL] and [101].

The display toggles between [OFF_1] and [0.0].

The COS value does not require any user scaling. However, make sure that the appropriate channel scaling register is set to 1.0 and the offset set to 0.

5 Press the P button.

The display toggles between [SCA_1] and [1.0000].

Example

7 Press the P button once to return to the calibration mode.

The display toggles between [CAL] and [101].

The display enters the offset and scale factor setting menu for CH3.

Repeat Steps 4 to 6, but set the Scale Factor for CH3 to the new settings.

Example

10 Press the P button once to return to the calibration mode.

The display toggles between [CAL] and [103].

The display enters the offset and scale factor setting menu for CH4.

Example

buttons at the same time to return to the operational display.

The scale factor for CH1, CH3, and CH4 has now been reset.

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 6

Single Phase Measurement and Control

It is no longer necessary to use combinations of transducers to achieve a power measurement and control system.

A Texmate Tiger 320 Series DI-503 meter, installed with a single-phase power input module, calculates and displays volts, amps, Hz, watts, watt hours, and power factor from a single-phase 2 or 3-wire voltage and current input.

SINGLE PHASE MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL

The optional relay, analog and serial outputs can be configured from all the above parameters to interface with a control or alarm system.

TIGER 320 SERIES DI-503 TIGER 320 SERIES DI-503

OPTIONS

Up to 6 super smart relay outputs, digitally

programmable upper and lower limits.

Programmable deviation mode, hysteresis mode, latch

ON or latch OFF.

Built-in super smart timers on each setpoint.

Programmable DOM to eliminate nuisance tripping.

Power ON inhibit to avoid tripping during power up.

Dual 4-20 mA or 0-10 V, 16-bit analog output.

RS-232 or RS-485.

DeviceNet / ModBus.

Direct serial printer output.

Data logging with real-time clock.

DISPLAY AND CALCULATE

Voltage (R.M.S.).

Current (R.M.S.).

Frequency.

Watts, kilowatts.

Watt hours, kilowatt hours.

Power factor monitoring

for precise load sensing.*

MULTIPLE TRANSDUCERS NO LONGER REQUIRED

* APPLICATION CONCEPT

Power factor gives an accurate measure of load change, particularly at low to medium loads, where current is dominated by it's magnetizing element. Where prompt action is required the optional relays in the Tiger 320 Series meter can be used for protection against broken belts, pump cavitation, conveyor stalling and general overloads.

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 7

1934 Kellogg Ave., Carlsbad, CA 92008 Tel: 1-760-598-9899 USA 1-800-839-6283 1-800-TEXMATE Fax: 1-760-598-9828 Email: [email protected] Web: www.texmate.com

IW04_IW05 smart module manual (NZ322)

Texmate, Inc. Tel. (760) 598-9899 www.texmate.com

Page 8

### About TexMate

Texmate is an American manufacturer of high durability industrial grade panel meters, bar graphs, and transducers. Texmate's meters are frequently equipped with relays and various signal outputs for industrial automation applications and are known for their extremely long service life.